Powerflex® 700S High Performance Ac Drive - Phase Ii Control

PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drive Phase II Control
USER MANUAL
Firmware Versions 1.xxx - 4.002
Important User Information
Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment. Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (Publication SGI-1.1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http:// www.rockwellautomation.com/literature) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because of this difference, and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable. In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment. The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams. No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual. Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, Inc. is prohibited. Throughout this manual, when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations. WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
Important: Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product. ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequences. Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment (e.g., drive or motor) to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present. Burn Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment (e.g., drive or motor) to alert people that surfaces may be at dangerous temperatures.
PowerFlex, DriveExplorer, DriveTools SP, DPI, and SCANport are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc. Klixon is a registered trademark of Sensata Technologies, Inc.
PowerFlex 700S Phase II AC Drive User Manual
Summary of Changes
Manual Updates
This information summarizes the changes to the PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drive - Phase II Control User Manual, publication 20D-UM006, since the January 2007 release.
Change
Updated the Catalog Number Explanation Added information for Single-Phase Input Power operation Updated the Disconnecting MOVs and Common Mode Capacitors section for frames 5 and 6 drives The following parameters were updated for firmware version 4.002: 7 153 156 266 267 329 370 [Motor Poles] [Control Options] [Start Inhibits] [Heidn Encdr Type] [Heidn Encdr PPR] [Fault TP Sel] [HiHp InPhsLs Cfg] 400 408 415 466 471 473 513 [Rated Amps] [Power Loss Level] [BusReg/Brake Ref] [MC TP1 Select] [Estimated Torque] [MC TP2 Select] [V/Hz Mode Config] 825 [Dig In1 Sel] 826 [Dig In2 Sel] 827 [Dig In3 Sel] 828 [Dig In4 Sel] 830 [Dig In6 Sel] 1125 [DC Brake Level]
See Page...
Preface-5 1-9 1-17 3-1-3-115
Updated the Parameter Cross Reference By Name table Added new Ride Thru (F92) fault Updated the drive rating current value for single-phase operation Separated the drive ratings information from the drive protection devices - now in separate tables and added frame 14 drive data Added a note regarding overwriting parameters when performing a download to drive from a HIM set using the Copycat function Added the Allen-Bradley 842HR rotary encoder to the list of supported encoders Added new 2090-XXNFMF-SXX cable wiring diagram for use with HPK-Series Motors and rotary encoders Added a note regarding the use of certain permanent magnet motors in constant velocity applications
3-118 4-11 A-3 A-7, A-17 D-4 F-2, H-2 F-3, H-2 I-1
PowerFlex 700S Phase II AC Drive User Manual - Publication 20D-UM006G-EN-P July 2008
soc-2
This information summarizes the changes to the PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drive - Phase II Control User Manual, publication 20D-UM006, since the August 2006 release.
Change
Updated the Important information regarding the use of an Auxiliary Power Supply with Voltage Feedback boards on drives manufactured before June 2006. The following new parameters were added for firmware versions 4.001: 459 460 461 462 544 586 587 588 589 590 591 [IdsCompCoeff Mot] [IdsCompCoeff Reg] [SlipReg Off Iqs] [VqsReg Off Freq] [External DB Res] [IdsCmd Slew Rate] [SlipReg Err Lmt] [VqsReg Err Lmt] [Err Count Lmt] [RsTempCoefAdjust] [RsTmpCoefAdjstEn] 592 [VqsReg On Hystr] 593 [SlipReg On Hystr] 1124 [Home Actual Pos] 1155 [Heidn VM Pos Ref] 1156 [Heidn VM Enc PPR] 1160 [VirtEncPositFast] 1161 [EGR Config] 1162 [EGR Mul] 1163 [EGR Div] 1164 [EGR Pos Input] 1165 [EGR Pos Output] 1166 [EGR Pos Preset] 1170 [MC Generic 1] 1171 [MC Generic 2] 1172 [MC Generic 3] 1173 [MC Generic 4] 1174 [MC Generic 5] 1175 [MC Generic 6] 1176 [MC Generic 7] 1177 [MC Generic 8] 1178 [MC Generic 9] 1179 [MC Generic 10] 3-1-3-115
See Page...
1-23 3-1-3-115
The following parameters were updated for firmware version 4.001: 153 156 161 263 264 266 267 277 314 357 360 457 466 510 [Control Options] [Start Inhibits] [Logic TP Sel] [Heidenhain0 Cnfg] [Heidenhain0 Stat] [Heidn Encdr Type] [Heidn Encdr PPR] [Reslvr0 Type Sel] [VPL Firmware Rev] [Curr Ref TP Sel] [Min Flux] [MC Firmware Rev] [MC TP1 Select] [FVC Mode Config] 512 515 533 553 701 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 825 [PMag Mode Config] [FVC Tune Config] [SlewRateTimeLimt] [Slip Slew Rate] [FdbkAxis FdbkSel] [Xsync In 1] [Xsync Out 1] [Xsync In 2] [Xsync Out 2] [Xsync Out 2 Dly] [Xsync In 3] [Xsync Out 3] [Xsync Out 3 Dly] [Dig In1 Sel] 826 [Dig In2 Sel] 827 [Dig In3 Sel] 828 [Dig In4 Sel] 829 [Dig In5 Sel] 830 [Dig In6 Sel] 1000 [UserFunct Enable] 1122 [Home Speed] 1123 [Home Position] 1136 [PPMP Rev Spd Lim] 1137 [PPMP Fwd Spd Lim] 1138 [PPMP Over Ride] 1145 [PPMP TP Select]
Added the Electronic Gear Ratio Group to the User Function file. Added required encoder PPR rating values Updated the Inputs & Outputs - Digital block diagram to reflect new values Added the new Virtual Master Encoder block diagram Updated the User Functions 2 block diagram Updated parameter names in the Inverter Overload IT block diagram Added an Application Note regarding Motor Overload Memory Retention
3-14 A-4 B-11 B-19 B-21 B-25 C-6
This information summarizes the changes to the PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drive - Phase II Control User Manual, publication 20D-UM006, since the March 2006 release.
Change
Updated the Catalog Number Explanation Added a note for Frame 6 power terminals connections Added a note to indicate that the Analog Inputs are not isolated Added maximum value calculation for Par 81 [Spd Reg P Gain] Added note referencing Cable Tuning Tests to Par 268 [Resolver0 Cnfg] Added bit 14 to Pars 322 [Exception Event3], 325 [Fault Status 3], and 328 [Alarm Status 3] Added a note for value 1 FOC 2 for Par 485 [Motor Ctrl Mode] Updated Par 796 [Posit Gear Ratio] to be linkable
See Page...
Preface-5 1-12 1-24 3-19 3-42 3-48, 3-49, 3-49 3-70 3-94
soc-3
Change
Updated the description for options 34 UserGen Sel0 - 37 UserGen Sel3 for Pars 825 - 830 Added a list of parameters corresponding to the value selected in Par 831 [Anlg Out1 Sel] Updated the description for Par 1022 [Sel Switch Ctrl] Added new fault code 79 HiHP Bus Data Updated the Bus Overvoltage Trip levels Added information on DPI device limitations Update the Drive, Fuse & Circuit Breaker Ratings tables Updated the DriveLogix - Motion Control Block Diagram Updated wiring diagram for Rotary Encoder connections Added new Appendix for SynchLink Specifications
See Page...
3-97 3-98 3-107 4-11 A-1 A-6 A-17 B-28 F-4, H-4 K-1
This information summarizes the changes to the PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drive - Phase II Control User Manual, publication 20D-UM006, since the September 2005 release.
Change
Updated the Power Terminal Block Specification Descriptions Updated the Terminal Block specifications for digital input leakage current Updated the HIM Start Up Menu diagram Updated the Min./Max. values for parameter 75 [Rev Speed Limit] Updated the Min./Max. values for parameter 76 [Fwd Speed Limit] Added values 9 and 10 to parameter 150 [Logic State Mach] Added value 8 to parameter 165 [Tune Test Status] Updated the trigger Source settings for parameter 236 [RegisLtch 0/1Cnfg] Changed parameter 321 [Exception Event2] / bit 14 to a non-configurable alarm Changed parameter 322 [Exception Event3] / bit 11, 12, 13, 21 and 28 to a non-configurable alarms Changed parameter 324 [Fault Status 2] / bit 14 to a non-configurable alarm Changed parameter 325 [Fault Status 3] / bit 21 to Drive Homing and bit 28 to +/- 12v Pwr Changed parameter 327 [Alarm Status 2] / bit 14 to a non-configurable alarm Changed parameter 328 [Alarm Status 3] / bit 21 to Drive Homing and bit 28 to +/- 12v Pwr Added values 45, 46 and 47 to parameter 347 [Drive OL TP Sel] Added values 20 - 52 to parameter 357 [Curr Ref TP Sel] Changed bit 3 to FastFluxDsbl for parameter 510 [FVC Mode Config] Changed bit 3 to FastFluxDsbl for parameter 513 [V/Hz Mode Config] Updated the default and Min./Max. values for parameter 532 [Maximum Frequency] Change bit 18 to Vqs Reg Act for parameter 555 [MC Status] Added bit 9 Watch Fb Arm and bit 10 WatchFbPosit to parameter 691 [Motn EventStatus] Added bit 7 Watch Fb Rev to parameter 692 [Motn Event Ctrl] Updated Parameter 554 [LED Status] to include a description Updated the description for bit 7 AbsoluteMode of parameter 740 [Position Control] Updated the description for bit 0 Absolute of parameter 1134 [PPMP Control] Updated fault 33 +/- 15volt Power to new voltage band settings Added new event 86 Drive Homing Added new event 93 +/- 12volt Power Alarm Updated the Specifications table for C-tick Agency Certification, drive sound levels, and encoder voltage supply data. Updated the Drive, Fuse & Circuit Breaker Ratings tables. Updated wiring diagram for Rotary Encoder connections. Added new Appendix for ATEX approved PowerFlex 700S Phase II Drives in Group II Category (2) applications with ATEX approved motors.
See Page...
1-12 1-24 2-7 3-18 3-18 3-24 3-29 3-35 3-48 3-48 3-48 3-49 3-49 3-49 3-53 3-54 3-72 3-73 3-76 3-78 3-84 3-84 3-77 3-90 3-114 4-8 4-11 4-11 A-1 A-17 H-4 J-1
soc-4
This information summarizes the changes to the PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drive - Phase II Control User Manual, publication 20D-UM006, since the August 2005 release.
Change
The following new parameters were added for firmware versions 3.01: 49 50 54 119 120 341 368 533 551 552 553 554 669 712 713 714 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 [Selected SpdRefA] [Selected SpdRefB] [Inertia TrqLpfBW] [SLAT ErrorSetpnt] [SLAT Dwell Time] [Mtr I2T Count] [Cnv NotLogin Cfg] [SlewRateTimeLimt] [CurrFdbk AdjTime] [Slip Preload Val] [Slip Slew Rate] [LED Status] [Write Mask] [Write Mask Act] [Logic Mask Act] [Port Mask Act] [PLL TP Select] [PLL TP DataDInt] [PLL TP DataReal] [PLL Control] [PLL Position Ref] [PLL BandWidth] [PLL Rev Input] [PLL Rev Output] [PLL EPR Input] [PLL EPR Output] [PLL VirtEncdrRPM] [PLL Ext Spd Ref] [PLL Ext SpdScale] [PLL LPFilter BW] [PLL Posit Out] 732 [PLL Posit OutAdv] 733 [PLL FiltPositOut] 734 [PLL Speed Out] 735 [PLL SpeedOut Adv] 848 [Dig Out1 On Time] 849 [Dig Out1 OffTime] 853 [Dig Out2 On Time] 854 [Dig Out2 OffTime] 858 [Rly Out3 On Time] 859 [Rly Out3 OffTime] 1093 [Anlg In1LossCnfg] 1094 [Anlg In2LossCnfg] 1095 [Anlg In3LossCnfg] 1096 [AddSub 1 Input] 1097 [AddSub 1 Add] 1098 [AddSub 1 Subtrct] 1099 [AddSub 1 Result] 1100 [AddSub 2 Input] 1101 [AddSub 2 Add] 1102 [AddSub 2 Subtrct] 1103 [AddSub 2 Result] 1104 [AddSub 3 Input] 1105 [AddSub 3 Add] 1106 [AddSub 3 Subtrct] 1107 [AddSub 3 Result] 1108 [DelTmr1 TrigData] 1109 [DelTmr1 Trig Bit] 1110 [DelayTimer1PrSet] 1111 [DelayTimer1Accum] 1112 [DelayTimer1Stats] 1113 [DelTmr2 TrigData] 1114 [DelTmr2 Trig Bit] 1115 [DelayTimer2PrSet] 1116 [DelayTimer2Accum] 1117 [DelayTimer2Stats] 1120 [Home Accel Time] 1121 [Home Decel Time] 1122 [Home Speed] 1123 [Home Position] 1125 [DC Brake Level] 1126 [DC Brake Time] 1130 [PPMP Pos Command] 1131 [PPMP Pos Mul] 1132 [PPMP Pos Div] 1133 [PPMP Scaled Cmd] 1134 [PPMP Control] 1135 [PPMP Status] 1136 [PPMP Rev Spd Lim] 1137 [PPMP Fwd Spd Lim] 1138 [PPMP Over Ride] 1139 [PPMP Accel Time] 1140 [PPMP Decel Time] 1141 [PPMP SCurve Time] 1142 [PPMP Spd Output] 1143 [PPMP Pos Output] 1144 [PPMP Pos To Go] 1145 [PPMP TP Select] 1146 [PPMP TP DataDInt] 1147 [PPMP TP DataReal] 1150 [DInt2Real2 In] 1151 [DInt2Real2 Scale] 1152 [DInt2Real2Result]
See Page...
3-1-3-115
soc-5
Change
The following parameters were updated for firmware version 3.01: 81 84 92 110 132 147 149 150 153 157 165 222 223 224 259 263 264 266 306 322 325 328 [Spd Reg P Gain] [SpdReg AntiBckup] [SpdReg P Gain Mx] [Speed/TorqueMode] [Inert Adapt Sel] [FW Functions En] [FW FunctionsActl] [Logic State Mach] [Control Options] [Logic Ctrl State] [Tune Test Status] [Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri] [Mtr Fdbk Sel Alt] [TachSwitch Level] [Stegmann0 Cnfg] [Heidenhain0 Cnfg] [Heidenhain0 Stat] [Heidn Encdr Type] [DC Bus Voltage] [Exception Event3] [Fault Status 3] [Alarm Status 3] 370 [HiHp InPhsLs Cfg] 412 [Power EE TP Sel] 414 [Brake/Bus Cnfg] 416 [Brake PulseWatts] 417 [Brake Watts] 420 [Pwr Strct Mode] 465 [MC Diag Error 3] 466 [MC TP1 Select] 475 [MC FaultTPSelect] 486 [Rated Slip Freq] 490 [StatorInductance] 510 [FVC Mode Config] 511 [FVC2 Mode Config] 512 [PMag Mode Config] 514 [Test Mode Config] 549 [Vuv Fdbk Offset] 550 [Vvw Fdbk Offset] 740 [Position Control] 741 [Position Status] 742 [Position Ref Sel] 777 [PositionFdbk Sel] 796 [Posit Gear Ratio] 825 [Dig In1 Sel] 826 [Dig In2 Sel] 827 [Dig In3 Sel] 828 [Dig In4 Sel] 829 [Dig In5 Sel] 830 [Dig In6 Sel] 904 [SL Node Cnfg] 905 [SL Rx CommFormat] 906 [SL Rx DirectSel0] 907 [SL Rx DirectSel1] 908 [SL Rx DirectSel2] 909 [SL Rx DirectSel3] 910 [SL Tx Comm Format] 911 [SL Tx DirectSel0] 912 [SL Tx DirectSel1] 913 [SL Tx DirectSel2] 914 [SL Tx DirectSel3] 1000 [UserFunct Enable] 1047 [DInt2Real1 In] 1048 [DInt2Real1 Scale] 1049 [DInt2Real1Result]
See Page...
3-1-3-115
The following new fault codes were added for firmware version 3.01: 76 77 HiHP HardwareVer HiHP CurrUnblnce 78 94 HiHP VoltUnblnce Analog In 1 Loss 95 96 Analog In 2 Loss Analog In 3 Loss
4-5
Encoder specifications updated Updated and new Control Block Diagrams
A-1 & A-17 B-1
soc-6
This information summarizes the changes to the PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drive - Phase II Control User Manual, publication 20D-UM006 since the August 2004 release.
Change
URL for Rockwell Automation Technical Support added Catalog Number Explanation updated DIP Switch Settings table updated The following new parameters were added for firmware versions 2.03 and 2.04:
See Page...
Preface-2 Preface-5 1-30 3-1-3-115
42 98 99 107 136 137 138 139 170 263 264 265 266 267 285 296 153 245 266 268 272 316 322 328
[Jerk] [Slip RPM @ FLA] [Slip Comp Gain] [Slip RPM Meter] [Skip Speed 1] [Skip Speed 2] [Skip Speed 3] [Skip Speed Band] [Flying StartGain] [Heidenhain0 Cnfg] [Heidenhain0 Stat] [Heidn Mkr Offset] [Heidn Encdr Type] [Heidn Encdr PPR] [Linear1 Config] [Motor Freq Ref] [Control Options] [Spd Fdbk TP Sel] [Heidn Encdr Type] [Resolver0 Cnfg] [Reslvr0 SpdRatio] [SynchLink Status] [Exception Event3] [Alarm Status 3]
332 333 334 362 363 364 471 473 474 475 476 478 479 480 481 482 347 466 787 825 826 827 828 829
[700L EventStatus] [700L FaultStatus] [700L AlarmStatus] [Current Limit Gain] [Ki Current Limit] [Kd Current Limit] [Estimated Torque] [MC TP2 Select] [MC TP2 Value] [MC FaultTPSelect] [MC FaultTP Value] [VPL Mem Password] [VPL Mem Address] [VPL Mem Data Int] [VPL Mem Data Flt] [VVPL Mem Data Bit] [Drive OL TP Sel] [MC TP1 Select] [Xsync Gen Period] [Dig In1 Sel] [Dig In2 Sel] [Dig In3 Sel] [Dig In4 Sel] [Dig In5 Sel]
483 484 513 527 528 529 530 531 532 541 542 545 546 547 548
[VPL Mem Link Int] [VPL Mem Link Flt] [V/Hz Mode Config] [Start/Acc Boost] [Run Boost] [Break Voltage] [Break Frequency] [Maximum Voltage] [Maximum Freq] [SrLss Angl Comp] [SrLss Volt Comp] [Bus Reg Ki] [Bus Reg Kp] [Bus Reg Kd] [Bus Reg ACR Kp]
The following parameters were updated for firmware versions 2.03 and 2.04:
830 [Dig In6 Sel] 905 [SL Rx CommFormat] 906 [SL Rx DirectSel0] 907 [SL Rx DirectSel1] 908 [SL Rx DirectSel2] 909 [SL Rx DirectSel2] 1000 [UserFunct Enable]
4-5 A-1 & A-17 B-1 D-1 I-1
Added new fault codes and descriptions/actions Specifications Table and Recommended Protection Devices tables updated Updated and New Control Block Diagrams Updated HIM Overview to include HIM menu chart and steps for viewing, editing and linking parameters using the HIM. Added new Appendix I - PowerFlex 700S Permanent Magnet Motor Specifications
Important User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Summary of Changes Preface
Manual Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Overview
Who Should Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Is Not In This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive Frame Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Class 1 LED Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Explanation, Continued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1 P-1 P-1 P-3 P-3 P-4 P-4 P-5 P-6
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring
Chapter Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Opening the Drive Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Mounting Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Operating Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 AC Supply Source Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Unbalanced, Ungrounded or Resistive Grounded Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Input Power Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Grounding Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Recommended Grounding Scheme. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Shield Termination - SHLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 RFI Filter Grounding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Power Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Power Cable Types Acceptable for 200-600 Volt Installations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Motor Cable Lengths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Power Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Cable Entry Plate Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Power Wiring Access Panel Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Single-Phase Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 AC Input Phase Selection (Frames 5 & 6 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Cooling Fan Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Selecting/Verifying Fan Voltage (Frames 5 & 6 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Important Common Bus (DC Input) Application Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Dynamic Brake Resistor Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Using Input/Output Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Using PowerFlex 700S Drives with Regenerative Power Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Regenerative Unit to Drive Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Disconnecting MOVs and Common Mode Capacitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 I/O Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 ATEX Approved Drives and Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Wiring the Main Control Board I/O Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Auxiliary Power Supply (High Power Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Hardware Enable Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Main Control Board I/O Configuration Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
CE Conformity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Essential Requirements for CE Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-30 1-30 1-30 1-31 1-31
Chapter 2
Start-Up
Prepare for Drive Start-Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before Applying Power to the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Power to the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assisted Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2-1 2-3 2-6
Chapter 3
Programming and Parameters

About Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 How Parameters are Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Parameter Data in Linear List Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Parameter Cross Reference By Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-118
Chapter 4
Troubleshooting
Chapter Objectives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED Indications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precharge Board LED Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIM Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manually Clearing Faults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Faults and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault/Alarm Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-5
Appendix A
Supplemental Information
Chapter Objectives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 DPI Communication Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5 Typical Programmable Controller Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5 Logic Command Word. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5 Logic Status Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6 DPI Device Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6 Output Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6 Drive Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7 Drive Fuse & Circuit Breaker Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17 Fuse Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17 Fuse Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
List of Motors with Compatible Thermistor Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive Frame Size to HP/kW Ratings Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approximate Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-31 A-32 A-33 A-34
Appendix B
Control Block Diagrams

List of Control Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 Diagram Conventions and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Appendix C
Application Notes
Input Voltage Range/Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field Oriented Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Permanent Magnet Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volts/Hertz Control - v2.003 and later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Parameter 338 [Mtr I2T Spd Min] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Overload Memory Retention Per 2005 NEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop Dwell Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setpt 1 Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setpt 2 Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-4 C-5 C-5 C-6 C-7 C-8 C-8
Appendix D
HIM Overview
External and Internal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LCD Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALT Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing and Editing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LCD HIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Numeric Keypad Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Establishing A Link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing/Installing the HIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1 D-2 D-2 D-3 D-5 D-5 D-6 D-6 D-6 D-7
Appendix E
PowerFlex 700S 2nd Encoder Feedback Option Card

Chapter Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2nd Encoder Feedback Option Card Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring and Configuring the Second Encoder Option Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dip Switch Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 E-1 E-1 E-2 E-3
Appendix F
PowerFlex 700S Stegmann Hi-Resolution Encoder Feedback Option

Chapter Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stegmann Hi-Resolution Feedback Option Card Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supported Encoders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1 F-1 F-1 F-1
Wiring the Stegmann Hi-Resolution Feedback Option Card to an Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
Appendix G
PowerFlex 700S Resolver Feedback Option Card

Chapter Objectives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolver Feedback Option Card Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compatible Resolvers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring the Resolver Feedback Option Card to a Resolver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1 G-1 G-1 G-1 G-2 G-3
Appendix H
PowerFlex 700S Multi-Device Interface (MDI) Option Card

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDI Option Card Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linear Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotary Encoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring the MDI Option Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1 H-1 H-1 H-2 H-2 H-3
Appendix I Appendix J
PowerFlex 700S Permanent Magnet Motor Specifications

Compatible Permanent Magnet Motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1
Instructions for ATEX Approved PowerFlex 700S, Phase II Drives in Group II Category (2) Applications with ATEX Approved Motors
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1 J-1 J-2 J-4 J-4
Appendix K Index
SynchLink Board for PowerFlex 700S Drives with Phase II Control

What is SynchLink?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-1
Preface
Overview
The purpose of this manual is to provide you with the basic information needed to install, start-up, program and troubleshoot the PowerFlex 700S Adjustable Frequency AC Drive with Phase II Control.
For information on Who Should Use This Manual What Is Not In This Manual Recommended Documentation Manual Conventions Drive Frame Sizes General Precautions Catalog Number Explanation See page... Preface-1 Preface-1 Preface-1 Preface-3 Preface-3 Preface-4 Preface-5
Who Should Use This Manual
This manual is intended for qualified personnel. You must be able to program and operate Adjustable Frequency AC Drive devices. In addition, you must have an understanding of the parameter settings and functions. You must also understand programmable controllers for the PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix.
What Is Not In This Manual
This User Manual is designed to provide installation and wiring and basic start-up information for frames 1 - 6 only. Therefore, the following topics have not been included: Spare Parts Information Installation and wiring and start-up instructions for frame 9 - 14 drives Please refer to the tables below for more information on recommended documentation.
Recommended Documentation
The following publications provide general drive information.

Title Wiring and Grounding for PWM AC Drives Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control A Global Reference Guide for Reading Schematic Diagrams Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage Publication DRIVES-IN001 SGI-1.1 www.rockwellautomation.com/ literature Available
100-2.10 8000-4.5.2
p-2
Overview
The following publications provide detailed PowerFlex 700S drive information:

Title PowerFlex 700S Phase II Reference Manual PowerFlex 700S Phase II Quick Start - Frames 1-6 PowerFlex 700S Phase II Quick Start - Frames 9-13 PowerFlex 700H/S Drives Installation Manual Frames 9 - 13 Publication Available PFLEX-RM003 20D-QS002 20D-QS004 PFLEX-IN006 www.rockwellautomation.com/ literature
The following publications provide specific PowerFlex 700S drive features information:
Title Installation Instructions - Stegmann Feedback Option for PowerFlex 700S Drive Installation Instructions - Resolver Feedback Option for PowerFlex 700S Drives Installation Instructions - Multi-Device Interface for PowerFlex 700S Drive Installation Instructions - Second Encoder Option for PowerFlex 700S Drives with Phase II Control Firmware Release Notes - PowerFlex 700S Drive & DriveLogix Publication 20D-IN001 20D-IN002 20D-IN004 20D-IN009 www.rockwellautomation.com/ literature Available
20D-RN007
For Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support:

Title Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support Online at www.rockwellautomation.com/literature or call M-F, 7:00a.m. to 7:00p.m. Central STD time: 1.262.512.8176
For Automation and Control Technical Support:

Title Online at Rockwell Automation Technical Support http://support.rockwellautomation.com/knowledgebase
The following publications provide necessary information when applying the DriveLogix Controller.:
Title DriveLogix5730 Controller User Manual PowerFlex 700S Drive & DriveLogix Controller Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions RSLogix 5000 Getting Results Publication 20D-UM003 20D-RN007 1756-PM001 1756-RM003 1756-RM006 9399-RLD300GR Available
www.rockwellautomation.com/ literature
Overview
p-3
The following publications provide information that is useful when planning and installing communication networks:
Title ContolNet Coax Tap Installation Instructions ControlNet Cable System Planning and Installation Manual ContolNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide Publication 1786-5.7 1786-6.2.1 CNET-IN001 Available
www.rockwellautomation.com/literature
Manual Conventions
In this manual we refer to the PowerFlex 700S Adjustable Frequency AC Drive as: drive, PowerFlex 700S, PowerFlex 700S drive or PowerFlex 700S AC drive. To help differentiate parameter names and LCD display text from other text, the following conventions will be used: Parameter Names will appear in [brackets] after the Parameter Number. For example: Par 307 [Output Voltage]. Display text will appear in quotes. For example: Enabled. The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action:
Word Can Cannot May Must Shall Should Should Not Meaning Possible, able to do something Not possible, not able to do something Permitted, allowed Unavoidable, you must do this Required and necessary Recommended Not recommended
Drive Frame Sizes
Similar PowerFlex 700S drive sizes are grouped into frame sizes to simplify spare parts ordering, dimensioning, etc. A cross reference of drive catalog numbers and their respective frame size is provided in Appendix A.
p-4
Overview
General Precautions
Class 1 LED Product

ATTENTION: Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment. This product emits intense light and invisible radiation. Do not look into module ports or fiber optic cable connectors. ATTENTION: This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies. Static control precautions are required when installing, testing, servicing or repairing this assembly. Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed. If you are not familiar with static control procedures, reference A-B publication 8000-4.5.2, Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage or any other applicable ESD protection handbook. ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life. Wiring or application errors, such as, undersizing the motor, incorrect or inadequate AC supply, or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system. ATTENTION: Only qualified personnel familiar with the PowerFlex 700S Drive and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation, start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system. Failure to comply may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage. ATTENTION: To avoid an electric shock hazard, verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive. Measure the DC bus voltage at the +DC & DC terminals of the Power Terminal Block (refer to Chapter 1 for location). The voltage must be zero. ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. DPI or SCANport host products must not be directly connected together via 1202 cables. Unpredictable behavior can result if two or more devices are connected in this manner. ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Parameters 365 [Fdbk LsCnfg Pri] - 394 [VoltFdbkLossCnfg] let you determine the action of the drive in response to operating anomalies. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the settings of these parameters do not create hazards of injury or equipment damage. ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Parameters 383 [SL CommLoss Data] - 392 [NetLoss DPI Cnfg] let you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted. You can set these parameters so that the drive continues to run. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the settings of these parameters do not create hazards of injury or equipment damage.
! !
Overview
p-5
Catalog Number Explanation

Position 1-3 4 5-7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
20D
a
D
b
2P1
c
A
d
0
e
E
f
Y
g
N
h
A
i
N
j
A
k
N
l
E
m
a
Drive Code 20D Type PowerFlex 700S Code 2P1 3P5 5P0 Prechg. N N N N Y Y Y Y Y 8P7 011 015 022 030 037 043 056 072 085 105 125 170 205 260 261 300 385 460 500 590 650 730 820 920 1K0 Hp 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 1K1 1K3 1K4
c2
ND Rating 400V, 50 Hz Input Amps 2.1 3.5 5.0 8.7 11.5 15.4 22 30 37 43 56 72 85 105 125 170 205 260 261 300 385 460 500 590 650 730 820 920 1030 1150 1300 1450 kW 0.75 1.5 2.2 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 55 90 110 132 132 160 200 250 250 315 355 400 450 500 560 630 710 800 Code 2P1 3P4 5P0 8P0 011 014 022 027 034 040 052 065 077 096 125 156 180 248 261 300 385 460 500 590 650 730 820 920 1K0 1K1 1K3 1K4
c3
ND Rating 480V, 60 Hz Input Amps 2.1 3.4 5 8 11 14 22 27 34 40 52 65 77 96 125 156 180 248 261 300 385 460 500 590 650 730 820 920 1030 1150 1300 1450 Hp 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 200 250 300 350 450 500 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1200 1250
b
Voltage Rating Code B C D E F H J K M N P R T W Voltage 240V AC 400V AC 480V AC 600V AC 690V AC 540V DC 650V DC 810V DC 932V DC 325V DC 540V DC 650V DC 810V DC 932V DC Ph. 3 3 3 3 3
Note: CE Certification testing has not been performed on 600V class drives, Frames 14. Frames 5 & 6 Only. Frames 5 & up. For DC input on Frames 14, use the corresponding AC input code B, C, D, or E.
c1
ND Rating 208/240V, 60Hz Input Code 4P2 6P8 9P6 015 022 028 042 052 070 080 104 130 154 192 260 208V Amps 4.8 7.8 11 17.5 25.3 32.2 48.3 56 78.2 92 120 130 177 221 260 240V Amps 4.2 6.8 9.6 15.3 22 28 42 52 70 80 104 130 154 192 260
p-6
Overview
Catalog Number Explanation, Continued

c4
ND Rating 600V, 60Hz Input Code 1P7 2P7 3P9 6P1 9P0 011 017 022 027 032 041 052 062 077 099 125 144 170 208 261 325 385 416 460 502 590 650 750 820 920 1K0 1K1 1K5 Amps 1.7 2.7 3.9 6.1 9 11 17 22 27 32 41 52 62 77 99 125 144 170 208 261 325 385 416 460 502 590 650 750 820 920 1030 1180 1500 Hp 1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 150 200 250 350 400 450 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1300 1600 Code Y N Code E N Code 052 060 082 098 119 142 170 208 261 325 385 416 460 502 590 650 750 820 920 1K0 1K1 1K5
c5
ND Rating 690V, 50 Hz Input Amps 52 60 82 98 119 142 170 208 261 325 385 416 460 502 590 650 750 820 920 1030 1180 1500 kW 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 315 355 400 450 500 560 630 710 800 900 1000 1100 1500 B C D G Documents Manual No Documentation H A Code 3 4 5 6 Code N C D E R S 1 2
j
Comm Slot Version None DPI ControlNet (Coax) DPI DeviceNet DPI EtherNet/IP DPI RIO DPI RS-485 DF1 DriveLogix ControlNet (Coax) DriveLogix ControlNet Redundant (Coax) DriveLogix ControlNet (Fiber) DriveLogix ControlNet Redundant (Fiber) DriveLogix DeviceNet (Open Conn.) DriveLogix EtherNet/IP
k
Control Options Control Logic Synch Option Expansion -Link Phase II Phase II Phase II Phase II Phase II Phase II No No Yes Yes N/A N/A No Yes No Yes No Yes Cassette Expanded Expanded Expanded Expanded Slim Slim
Note: CE Certification testing has not been performed on 600V class drives Frames 14.
f
Documentation
l
Feedback Code Option Standard (Incremental Encoder) Resolver Stegmann Hi-Resolution Encoder Multi-Device Interface 2nd Encoder Safe-Off (w/2nd Encoder) N A B C E S
g
Brake w/Brake IGBT Yes No
Note: CE Certification testing has not been performed on 600V class drives Frames 14.
d
Enclosure Code A B N Frames 9 & up Only. Frames 10-12 Only. Enclosure IP20, NEMA Type 1 IP21, NEMA Type 1, MCC Open/IP00
Brake IGBT is standard on Frames 13 and optional on Frames 49 ONLY.
h
Brake Resistor Code Y N w/Resistor Yes No
Expanded cassette required. One encoder interface is included with the base drive.
m
Additional Config. Code E K Description Phase II Control Phase II DriveLogix5730 Phase II DriveLogix5730 w/EtherNet/IP
Not available for Frame 3 drives or larger.
i e
HIM Code 0 2 3 5 C Frames 10 & up only. Operator Interface Blank Cover Digital LCD Full Numeric LCD Prog. Only LCD Full Numeric LCD, Door Mount Code A B N Emission CE Filter Yes Yes No CM Choke Yes No No
This is an embedded EtherNet option that is only available with DriveLogix5730.
Frames 16 Only. Frames 9 & up Only. For use on a high resistive ground, an ungrounded distribution system, or a B phase grounded distribution system (Frame 9 only). Note: CE Certification testing has not been
Chapter
Installation/Wiring
Chapter Objectives
This chapter provides the information needed to mount and wire PowerFlex 700S AC drives, frames 1 - 6. For installation instructions for PowerFlex 700S AC drives frames 9 - 14, refer to the PowerFlex 700H and 700S Frames 9-14 Installation Manual, publication PFLEX-IN006.
For Information on Opening the Drive Covers Mounting Clearances AC Supply Source Considerations Grounding Requirements Fuses and Circuit Breakers Power Wiring Using Input/Output Contactors Using PowerFlex 700S Drives with Regenerative Power Units Disconnecting MOVs and Common Mode Capacitors I/O Wiring CE Conformity See Page... 1-2 1-3 1-3 1-5 1-6 1-6 1-16 1-16 1-17 1-20 1-30
Since most start-up difficulties are the result of incorrect wiring, take every precaution to assure the wiring is correct. Read and understand all items in this chapter before beginning installation. ATTENTION: The following information is merely a guide for proper installation. The Rockwell Automation Company cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code, national, local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment. A hazard of personal injury and/or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation.
1-2
Installation/Wiring
Opening the Drive Covers

Frames 1-4 Locate the slot in the upper left corner. Slide the locking tab up and swing the cover open. Special hinges allow cover to move away from drive and lay on top of adjacent drive (if present). Frame 5 Slide the locking tab up, loosen the right-hand cover screw and remove. Frame 6 Loosen two screws at bottom of drive cover. Carefully slide bottom cover down & out. Loosen the two screws at top of cover and remove.
(x2)
Proper tightening torque for reassembly is 6 lb.-in.
(x2)
PE U/ V/ T1 W T2 R/L1 /T3
DC DC- +
1 BR 2 BR
L2
(x3)
=
Removing the Side Covers Removing the Cassette
Task Task
A B C
Description Open the door of the power structure and disconnect the cables that connect to the main board Loosen screws on face of cassette Remove the cassette
A B
Description Loosen screws on face of front cover and remove the cover Loosen screws on side of rear cover and remove the cover
Installation/Wiring
1-3
Mounting Clearances
101.6mm (4.0 in.)
No Adhesive Label
(see below)
With Adhesive Label

(see below)
50.8mm (2.0 in.)
101.6mm (4.0 in.)
101.6mm (4.0 in.)
50.8mm (2.0 in.)
101.6mm (4.0 in.)
Operating Temperatures
Refer to the Drive, Fuse and Circuit Breaker Ratings tables in Appendix A for information on drive ambient operating temperatures.
AC Supply Source Considerations
PowerFlex drives are suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering up to a maximum of 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes, 600 volts with recommended fuses/circuit breakers. Refer to the PowerFlex 700S Drive with Phase II Control Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM003, for actual interrupt ratings based on circuit breaker or fuse choice. ATTENTION: To guard against personal injury and/or equipment damage caused by improper fusing or circuit breaker selection, use only the recommended line fuses/circuit breakers specified in Appendix A.
If a Residual Current Detector (RCD) is used as a system ground fault monitor, only Type B (adjustable) devices should be used to avoid nuisance tripping.
1-4
Installation/Wiring
Unbalanced, Ungrounded or Resistive Grounded Distribution Systems

If phase to ground voltage will exceed 125% of normal or the supply system is ungrounded, refer to Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives, publication DRIVES-IN001, for more information. ATTENTION: PowerFlex 700S drives contain protective MOVs and common mode capacitors that are referenced to ground. These devices must be disconnected if the drive is installed on a resistive grounded distribution system or an ungrounded distribution system. See page page 1-19 for jumper locations.
Input Power Conditioning

Certain events on the power system supplying a drive can cause component damage or shortened product life. These conditions are divided into 2 basic categories: 1. All Drives The power system has power factor correction capacitors switched in and out of the system, either by the user or by the power company. The power source has intermittent voltage spikes in excess of 6000 volts. These spikes could be caused by other equipment on the line or by events such as lightning strikes. The power source has frequent interruptions. 2. 5 HP or Less Drives (in addition to 1 above) The nearest supply transformer is larger than 100kVA or the available short circuit (fault) current is greater than 100,000A. The impedance in front of the drive is less than 0.5%. If any or all of these conditions exist, it is recommended that the user install a minimum amount of impedance between the drive and the source. This impedance could come from the supply transformer itself, the cable between the transformer and drive or an additional transformer or reactor. The impedance can be calculated using the information supplied in the technical document Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives, publication DRIVES-IN001.
Installation/Wiring
1-5
Grounding Requirements
The drive Safety Ground-PE must be connected to system ground. Ground impedance must conform to the requirements of national and local industrial safety regulations and/or electrical codes. The integrity of all ground connections should be periodically checked.
Recommended Grounding Scheme

A single point (PE only) grounding scheme should be used. Some applications may require alternate grounding schemes, refer to the Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives, publication number DRIVES-IN001, for more information. These applications include installations with long distances between drives or drive line-ups, which could cause large potential differences between the drive or line-up grounds. For installations within a cabinet, a single safety ground point or ground bus bar connected directly to building steel should be used. All circuits including the AC input ground conductor should be grounded independently and directly to this point/bar.
Figure 1.1 Typical Grounding
R (L1) S (L2) T (L3) PE U (T1) V (T2) W (T3) DC + DC BR1 BR2
Required Input Fusing Required Branch Circuit Disconnect
Shield Termination - SHLD

The Shield terminal (see Figure 1.3 on page 1-13) provides a grounding point for the motor cable shield. It must be connected to an earth ground by a separate continuous lead. The motor cable shield should be connected to this terminal on the drive (drive end) and the motor frame (motor end). Use a shield terminating or EMI clamp to connect shield to this terminal.
1-6
Installation/Wiring
RFI Filter Grounding

Using an optional RFI filter may result in relatively high ground leakage currents. Therefore, the filter must only be used in installations with grounded AC supply systems and be permanently installed and solidly grounded (bonded) to the building power distribution ground. Ensure that the incoming supply neutral is solidly connected (bonded) to the same building power distribution ground. Grounding must not rely on flexible cables and should not include any form of plug or socket that would permit inadvertent disconnection. Some local codes may require redundant ground connections. The integrity of all connections should be periodically checked. Refer to the instructions supplied with the filter.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The PowerFlex 700S drive can be installed with either input fuses or an input circuit breaker. Local/national electrical codes may determine additional requirements for these installations. Refer to Appendix A for recommended fuses/circuit breakers. ATTENTION: The PowerFlex 700S does not provide input power short circuit protection. Specifications for the recommended fuse or circuit breaker to provide drive input power protection against short circuits are provided in Appendix A.
Power Wiring
Since most start-up difficulties are the result of incorrect wiring, take every precaution to assure the wiring is correct. Read and understand all items in this section before beginning installation. ATTENTION: The following information is merely a guide for proper installation. The Rockwell Automation Company cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code, national, local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment. A hazard of personal injury and/or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation.
Installation/Wiring
1-7
Power Cable Types Acceptable for 200-600 Volt Installations

ATTENTION: National Codes and standards (NEC, BSI etc.) and local codes outline provisions for safely installing electrical equipment. Installation must comply with specifications regarding wire types, conductor sizes, branch circuit protection and disconnect devices. Failure to do so may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage.
A variety of cable types are acceptable for drive installations. For many installations, unshielded cable is adequate, provided it can be separated from sensitive circuits. As an approximate guide, allow a spacing of 0.3 meters (1 foot) for every 10 meters (32.8 feet) of length. In all cases, long parallel runs must be avoided. Do not use cable with an insulation thickness less than or equal to 15 mils (0.4mm/0.015 in.). Use copper wire only. Wire gauge requirements and recommendations are based on 75 C. Do not reduce wire gauge when using higher temperature wire.
Table 1.A Recommended Cable Design
Type Type 1 Type 2 Max. Wire Size Where Used 2 AWG Standard Installations 100 HP or less 2 AWG Standard Installations 100 HP or less with Brake Conductors 500 MCM AWG Standard Installations 150 HP or more 500 MCM AWG Water, Caustic Chemical, Crush Resistance 500 MCM AWG 690V Applications Rating/Type 600V, 90oC (194oF) XHHW2/RHW-2 600V, 90oC (194oF) RHH/RHW-2 Tray rated 600V, 90oC (194oF) RHH/RHW-2 Tray rated 600V, 90oC (194oF) RHH/RHW-2 Tray rated 2000V, 90oC (194oF) Description Four tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation Four tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation plus one (1) shielded pair of brake conductors. Three tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation and (3) bare copper grounds and PVC jacket. Three bare copper conductors with XLPE insulation and three copper grounds on #10 AWG and smaller. Acceptable in Class I & II, Division I & II locations. Three tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation. (3) bare copper grounds and PVC jacket. Note: If terminator network or output filter is used, connector insulation must be XLPE, not PVC.
Type 3 Type 4
Type 5
Unshielded THHN, THWN or similar wire is acceptable for drive installation in dry environments provided adequate free air space and/or conduit fill rates limits are provided. Do not use THHN or similarly coated wire in wet areas. Any wire chosen must have a minimum insulation thickness of 15 Mils and should not have large variations in insulation concentricity. Shielded/Armored Cable Shielded cable contains all of the general benefits of multi-conductor cable with the added benefit of a copper braided shield that can contain much of the noise generated by a typical AC Drive. Strong consideration for shielded cable should be given in installations with sensitive equipment such as weigh scales, capacitive proximity switches and other devices that may be affected by electrical noise in the distribution system. Applications with large numbers of drives in a similar location, imposed EMC regulations or a high degree of communications/networking are also good candidates for shielded cable.
1-8
Installation/Wiring
Shielded cable may also help reduce shaft voltage and induced bearing currents for some applications. In addition, the increased impedance of shielded cable may help extend the distance the motor can be located from the drive without the addition of motor protective devices such as terminator networks. Refer to Reflected Wave in Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives, publication DRIVES-IN001. Consideration should be given to all of the general specifications dictated by the environment of the installation, including temperature, flexibility, moisture characteristics and chemical resistance. In addition, a braided shield should be included and specified by the cable manufacturer as having coverage of at least 75%. An additional foil shield can be greatly improve noise containment. A good example of recommended cable is Belden 295xx (xx determines gauge). This cable has 4 XLPE insulated conductors with a 100% coverage foil and an 85% coverage copper braided shield (with drain wire) surrounded by a PVC jacket. Other types of shielded cable are available, but the selection of these types may limit the allowable cable length. Particularly, some of the newer cables twist 4 conductors of THHN wire and wrap them tightly with a foil shield. This construction can greatly increase the cable charging current required and reduce the overall drive performance. Unless specified in the individual distance tables as tested with the drive, these cables are not recommended and their performance against the lead length limits supplied is not known. EMC Compliance Refer to CE Conformity on page 1-30 for details. Cable Trays and Conduit If cable trays or large conduits are to be used, refer to guidelines presented in the Grounding and Wiring Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives, publication DRIVES-IN001 ATTENTION: To avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages, unused wires in the conduit must be grounded at both ends. For the same reason, if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed, all drives using this conduit should be disabled. This will help minimize the possible shock hazard from cross coupled motor leads.
Installation/Wiring
1-9
Motor Cable Lengths

Typically, motor lead lengths less than 30 meters (100 feet) are acceptable. For motor lead lengths of 30 meters (100 feet) or above, applicable cable types and length recommendations and restrictions, refer to publication 20D-TD002, Technical Data - PowerFlex 700S Drives - Phase II Control, or publication DRIVES-IN001, Grounding and Wiring Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives.
Power Terminal Blocks

Figure 1.3 on page 1-13 shows the typical location of the Power Terminal Block in PowerFlex 700S frame 1 - 6 drives.
Cable Entry Plate Removal

If additional wiring access is needed, the Cable Entry Plate on Frame 1-3 drives can be removed. Simply loosen the screws securing the plate to the chassis. The slotted mounting holes assure easy removal. Important: Removing the Cable Entry Plate limits the maximum surrounding air temperature to 40o C (104o F).
Power Wiring Access Panel Removal

ATTENTION: Removing the access panel/cover exposes dangerous voltages on the terminals and negates the enclosure type rating. Replace the access panel/cover when service is complete. Failure to comply may result in personal injury or equipment damage.
Removal Procedure (Replace when wiring is complete) Remove part of the front cover, see page 1-2. Open front cover and gently tap/slide the cover down and out. Loosen the 4 screws and remove. Remove front cover (see page 1-2), gently tap/slide panel up and out.
Frame 1, 2 & 6 3 4 5
Single-Phase Input Power

The PowerFlex 700 drive is typically used with a three-phase input supply. Single-phase operation of the drive is not currently rated under the UL508C listing. Rockwell Automation has verified that single-phase operation with output current derated by 50% of the three-phase ratings identified on pages A-7 through A-16 will meet all safety requirements.
1-10
Installation/Wiring
AC Input Phase Selection (Frames 5 & 6 Only)
ATTENTION: To avoid a shock hazard, ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following.
Moving the Line Type jumper shown in Figure 1.2 on page 1-11 will select single or three-phase operation. Remove plastic guard to access jumper. Important: When selecting single-phase operation, input power must be applied to the R (L1) and S (L2) terminals only.
Cooling Fan Voltage

Common Bus drives require user supplied 120 or 240V AC to power the cooling fans. The power source is connected between 0V AC and the terminal corresponding to your source voltage (see Figure 1.4 on page 1-14).
Table 1.B Fan VA Rating
Frame 5 6 Fan Voltage(120V or 240V) 100 VA 138 VA
Selecting/Verifying Fan Voltage (Frames 5 & 6 Only)
ATTENTION: To avoid a shock hazard, ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following:
Frames 5 & 6 utilize a transformer to match the input line voltage to the internal fan voltage. If your line voltage is different than the voltage class specified on the drive nameplate, it may be necessary to change the transformer taps. The taps are shown in Figure 1.2 on page 1-11.
Installation/Wiring
1-11
Figure 1.2 Frames 5 & 6 Jumper and Transformer Locations (Frame 5 shown)
Phase Selection Jumper
3-PH 1-PH LINE TYPE SPARE 1

Optional Communications Module
SPARE 2
POWER TERMINAL RATINGS WIRE RANGE: 14-1/0 AWG (2.5-35 MM2) TORQUE: 32 IN-LB (3.6 N-M) STRIP LENGTH: 0.67 IN (17 MM) USE 75 C CU WIRE ONLY GROUND TERMINAL RATINGS (PE) WIRE RANGE: 6-1/0 AWG (16-35 MM2) TORQUE: 44 IN-LB (5 N-M) STRIP LENGTH: 0.83 IN (21 MM)
21 17
300 VDC EXT PWR SPLY TERM (PS+, PS-) WIRE RANGE: 22-10 AWG (0.5-4 MM2) TORQUE: 5.3 IN-LB (0.6 N-M) STRIP LENGTH: 0.35 IN (9 MM)
9
Fan Voltage
INPUT AC
OUTPUT
690 Volt Tap 600 Volt Tap 480 Volt Tap 400 Volt Tap
Frame 6 Transformer Tap Access The transformer is located behind the Power Terminal Block in the area shown in Figure 1.2. Gain access by releasing the terminal block from the rail. To release terminal block and change tap: 1. Locate the small metal tab at the bottom of the end block. 2. Press the tab in and pull the top of the block out. Repeat for next block if desired. 3. Select appropriate transformer tap. 4. Replace block(s) in reverse order.
1-12
Installation/Wiring
Important Common Bus (DC Input) Application Notes

1. If drives without internal precharge are used (Frames 5 & 6 only), then: precharge capability must be provided in the system to guard against possible damage, and disconnect switches Must Not be used between the input of the drive and a common DC bus without the use of an external precharge device. 2. If drives with internal precharge (Frames 1-6) are used with a disconnect switch to the common bus, then an auxiliary contact on the disconnect must be connected to a digital input of the drive. The corresponding input (parameter 825-830) must be set to Precharge Enable. This provides the proper precharge interlock, guarding against possible damage to the drive when connected to a common DC bus.
Table 1.C Power Terminal Block Specifications
Wire Size Range(1) No. Name Frame Power Terminal Block 1 4.0 mm2 (10 AWG) 2 10.0 mm2 (6 AWG) 3 25.0 mm2 (3 AWG) 10.0 mm2 (6 AWG) 4 Input power and motor 35.0 mm2 connections (1/0 AWG) R, S, T, BR1, BR2, DC+, 50.0 mm2 5 (3) DC-, U, V and W (1/0 AWG) (75 HP) PE 50.0 mm2 (1/0 AWG) 5 R, S, T, DC+, DC-, U, V and 70.0 mm2 (100 HP)(3) W (2/0 AWG) BR1, BR2 50.0 mm2 (1/0 AWG) PE 50.0 mm2 (1/0 AWG) 6 Input power and motor 120.0 mm2 connections (4/0 AWG)(5) 1-6 Terminating point for wiring shields Auxiliary Control Voltage (6) 1.5 mm2 PS+, PS(16 AWG) 4.0 mm2 (10 AWG) User Supplied Fan Voltage 4.0 mm2 0V AC, 120V AC, 240V AC (10 AWG) Description Input power and motor connections Input power and motor connections Input power and motor connections BR1, BR2
Maximum Minimum
Torque
Maximum Recommended
Terminal Bolt Size(2)
0.5 mm2 (22 AWG) 0.8 mm2 (18 AWG) 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) 0.8 mm2 (18 AWG) 10 mm2 (8 AWG) 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) 4.0 mm2 (12 AWG) 16.0 mm2 (6 AWG) 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) 4.0 mm2 (12 AWG) 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG)
1.7 N-m 0.8 N-m (15 lb.-in.) (7 lb.-in.) 1.7 N-m 1.4 N-m (15 lb.-in.) (12 lb.-in.) 3.6 N-m 1.8 N-m (32 lb.-in.) (16 lb.-in.) 1.7 N-m 1.4 N-m (15 lb.-in.) (12 lb.-in.) 4.0 N-m 4.0 N-m (24 lb.-in.) (24 lb.-in.) See Note (4) See Note (3)
6 N-m 6 N-m (52 lb.-in.) (52 lb.-in.) 1.6 N-m 1.6 N-m (14 lb.-in.) (14 lb.-in.) 0.6 N-m (5.3 lb.-in.) 0.6 N-m (5.3 lb.-in.) 0.6 N-m (5.3 lb.-in.) 0.6 N-m (5.3 lb.-in.)
SHLD Terminal AUX Terminal Block
M12
1-4 5-6
Fan Terminal Block

(Common Bus Only)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
5-6
0.2 mm2 (24 AWG) 0.5 mm2 (22 AWG) 0.5 mm2 (22 AWG)
M10
Maximum/minimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations. Apply counter torque to the nut on the other side of terminations when tightening or loosening the terminal bolt in order to avoid damage to the terminal. Not all terminals present on all drives. Refer to the terminal block label inside the drive. If necessary, two wires can be used in parallel to any of these terminals using two lugs. Auxiliary power: UL Installation - 300V DC, 10%, Non UL Installation - 270-600V DC, 10%. Frame 1-6, 100 W.
Installation/Wiring
1-13
Figure 1.3 Typical Power Terminal Block Location

Frame 1 Frame 2 Frames 3 & 4
PE B PE A
12 IN. LBS. 1.4 N-M } TORQUE
75C Cu Wire 2 3 AWG [25MM ] Max. 16 IN. LBS. 1.8 N-M } TORQUE
Use 75C Wire Only #10-#14 AWG Torque to 7 in-lbs
BR1 BR2 DC+ DC PE U/T1 V/T2 W/T3

AUX IN+ AUX OUT

WIRE STRIP
AUX IN +
BR1 BR2 DC+ DC- U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
BR1 B V/T2 W/T3
CONTROL
POWER
PE R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
/
SHLD
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
PE
PE
SHLD
SHLD

Frame 6 Frame 5
CONTROL
DANGER
WIRE STRIP
BR1 BR2 75C Cu Wire 6 AWG [10MM2] Max.
POWER
SHLD

POWER TERMINAL RATINGS WIRE RANGE: 14-1/0 AWG (2.5-35 MM2) TORQUE: 32 IN-LB (3.6 N-M) STRIP LENGTH: 0.67 IN (17 MM) USE 75 C CU WIRE ONLY GROUND TERMINAL RATINGS (PE) WIRE RANGE: 6-1/0 AWG (16-35 TORQUE: 44 IN-LB (5 N-M) STRIP LENGTH: 0.83 IN (21 MM) MM2)
17
9
21
OUTPUT
INPUT AC
WIRE STRIP
22-10 AWG 5.3 IN-LB (0.6 N-M)
PS+ PS
BR2
BR1
DC+
DC
USE 75 C COPPER WIRE ONLY, TORQUE 52 IN-LB (6 N-M)
Below Wire Guard

USE 75 C COPPER WIRE ONLY TORQUE 52 IN-LB (6 N-M)
T1
T2
OUTPUT
T3
L1
L2
INPUT
L3
1-14
Installation/Wiring
Figure 1.4 Power Terminal Block

BR1 BR2 DC+ DC PE U (T1) V (T2) W (T3) R (L1) S (L2) T (L3)
Frame 2 Frame 1
BR1 BR2 DC+ DC PE U V W R S T (T1) (T2) (T3) (L1) (L2) (L3)
Motor Input AC Line

PS
Frame 3
BR1 BR2 DC+ DC U V W R S T (T1) (T2) (T3) (L1) (L2) (L3)
PE PE R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
BR1/ BR2 DC+ DC+ DC U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
Frame 5 - 75 HP, Normal Duty 480V AC Input
PS+
BR1/ DC+ DC+ DC U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 PE PE R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
BR2 PS
Frame 5 - 100 HP, Normal Duty 480V AC Input

PS+
PS
BR1*/ BR2* DC+ DC+ DC
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
PE
0 240 VAC VAC
PE
Frame 5 - 75 HP, Normal Duty 650V DC Input

PS+ 120 VAC
Precharge Resistor Fuse FWP-15A14F (Common Bus Drives w/Precharge Only)
PS
BR1*/ BR2* DC+
DC+
DC
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
0 240 PEVAC VAC
PE

PS+ 120 VAC
Frame 6 - 150 HP, Normal Duty 480 V AC Input

Common Mode Capacitor & MOV Jumpers (Green/Yellow Wire)
WIRE STRIP 22-10 AWG 5.3 IN-LB (0.6 N-M)
PS+ PS
Common Mode Capacitor & MOV Jumpers (Green/Yellow Wire)

BR2 BR1 DC+ DC
WIRE STRIP
BR2
BR1
DC+
DC
Input Filter Capacitor (Green/Yellow Wire)

PS+ PS
22-10 AWG 5.3 IN-LB (0.6 N-M)
Input Filter Capacitor (Green/Yellow Wire)
FAN INPUT
TORQUE 52 IN-LB (6 N-M)
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
INPUT
0 VAC
120V AC
1-PHASE
USE 75 C COPPER WIRE ONLY
USE 75 C COPPER WIRE ONLY
U T1
V T2
W T3
PE
PE
R L1
S L2
T L3
TORQUE 52 IN-LB (6 N-M)
U T1
V T2
W T3
PE
PE
22-10 AWG 5.3 IN-LB (0.6 N-M)
0 VAC 120 VAC 240 VAC
240V AC
Shaded terminals (BR1 & BR2) will only be present on drives ordered with the Brake Option.
Installation/Wiring
1-15
Terminal BR1 BR2 DC+ DC PE U V W R S T
Description DC Brake (+) DC Brake () DC Bus (+) DC Bus () PE Ground Motor Ground U (T1) V (T2) W (T3) R (L1) S (L2) T (L3)
Notes Dynamic Brake Resistor Connection (+) Dynamic Brake Resistor Connection () DC Input Power or Dynamic Brake Chopper DC Input Power or Dynamic Brake Chopper Refer to Figure 1.7 on page 19 for location on 3 Frame drives Refer to Figure 1.7 on page 19 for location on 3 Frame drives To motor To motor To motor AC Line Input Power AC Line Input Power AC Line Input Power
Dynamic Brake Resistor Considerations

ATTENTION: The drive does not offer protection for externally mounted brake resistors. A risk of fire exists if external braking resistors are not protected. External resistor packages must be self-protected from over temperature or a circuit equivalent to the one shown below must be supplied.
Figure 1.5 External Brake Resistor Circuitry

Three-Phase AC Input
(Input Contactor) M R (L1) S (L2) T (L3)
Power Off
Power On
M M Power Source DB Resistor Thermostat
1-16
Installation/Wiring
Using Input/Output Contactors
ATTENTION: A contactor or other device that routinely disconnects and reapplies the AC line to the drive to start and stop the motor can cause drive hardware damage. The drive is designed to use control input signals that will start and stop the motor. If an input device is used occasionally, an auxiliary contact on that device should also be wired to a digital input programmed as a Enable function. The input device must not exceed one operation per minute or drive damage will occur. ATTENTION: The drive start/stop control circuitry includes solidstate components. If hazards due to accidental contact with moving machinery or unintentional flow of liquid, gas or solids exist, an additional hardwired stop circuit may be required to remove the AC line to the drive. When the AC line is removed, there will be a loss of any inherent regenerative braking effect that might be present - the motor will coast to a stop. An auxiliary braking method may be required. ATTENTION: To guard against drive damage when using output contactors, the following information must be read and understood. One or more output contactors may be installed between the drive and motor(s) for the purpose of disconnecting or isolating certain motors/loads. If a contactor is opened while the drive is operating, power will be removed from the respective motor, but the drive will continue to produce voltage at the output terminals. In addition, reconnecting a motor to an active drive (by closing the contactor) could produce excessive current that may cause the drive to fault. If any of these conditions are determined to be undesirable or unsafe, an auxiliary contact on the output contactor should be wired to a drive digital input that is programmed as Enable. This will cause the drive to execute a coast-to-stop (cease output) whenever an output contactor is opened.
Using PowerFlex 700S Drives with Regenerative Power Units
If a Regenerative unit (i.e., 1336 REGEN) is used as a bus supply or a brake, the common mode capacitors should be disconnected (see Table 1.D on page 1-17).
Regenerative Unit to Drive Connections

Regenerative Brake Mode
Terminals Frame(s) 1336 REGEN 1- 4 DC+ & DC5&6 DC+ & DCPowerFlex 700S BR1 & DCDC+ & DC-
Regenerative Bus Supply Mode

Terminals Frame(s) 1336 REGEN 1-4 DC+ & DC5&6 DC+ & DCPowerFlex 700S DC+ & DCDC+ & DC- of the Common Bus Drives
Installation/Wiring
1-17
Disconnecting MOVs and Common Mode Capacitors
PowerFlex 700S Phase II drives contain protective MOVs and common mode capacitors that are referenced to ground. To guard against drive damage, these devices must be disconnected if the drive is installed on a resistive grounded distribution system or an ungrounded distribution system, or B phase grounded distribution system. Additionally, the devices must be disconnected if the drive is used with a regenerative unit such as a common DC bus supply and brake. On ungrounded distribution systems where the line-to-ground voltages on any phase could exceed 125% of the nominal line-to-line voltage an isolation transformer should be installed. To disconnect these devices, remove the jumper(s) listed in Table 1.D. Jumpers can be removed by carefully pulling the jumper straight out. See the Grounding and Wiring Guidelines for PWM AC Drives, publication DRIVES-IN001, for more information on ungrounded system installation. Important: Common mode capacitors are required to conform with the EMC directive and MOVs are needed to meet UL certification. Removing these devices will withdraw the associated directive/ certification.
ATTENTION: To avoid an electric shock hazard, verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before removing/ installing jumpers. Measure the DC bus voltage at the +DC & DC terminals of the Power Terminal Block. The voltage must be zero.
Table 1.D Jumper Removal
Important: Do Not remove jumpers if the distribution system is grounded.

Frame 1 Rating All Jumper Component Jumper Location No. PEA Common Remove the Control Assembly and Cassette (see Mode Cap. page 1-2). Jumpers are located on the drive Power Board (see Figure 1.6). PEB MOVs PEA PEB 5 All 400V Wires drives except 140A, 400V Common Mode Cap. MOVs Common Mode Cap. Jumpers are located above the Power Terminal Block (see Figure 1.6 for frame 2 and Figure 1.7 for frames 3 and 4). Remove the I/O Cassette as described on page 1-2. The green/yellow jumper is located on the back of chassis (see Figure 1.7 for location). Disconnect, insulate and secure the wire to guard against unintentional contact with chassis or components. Note location of the two green/yellow jumper wires next to the Power Terminal Block (Figure 1.7). Disconnect, insulate and secure the wires to guard against unintentional contact with chassis or components. Note location of the green/yellow jumper wire shown in Figure 1.7. Disconnect, insulate and secure the wire to guard against unintentional contact with chassis or components.
2, 3 & 4 All
MOVs(1)(2) Input Filter Cap. (2) 140A, 400V drive only Wires Common Mode Cap. MOVs(1)(2) Input Filter Cap.(2)
1-18
Installation/Wiring
Frame 5
Rating Jumper Component All 600/ Wires Common Mode Cap. 690V drives MOVs(1)(2) except Input Filter 77A, Cap.(2) 600/ 690V Wires Common 77A, Mode Cap. 600/ 690V MOVs(1)(2) drive Input Filter only Cap.(2) All Wires Common Mode Cap. MOVs(1)(2) Input Filter Cap.(2)
Jumper Location Note location of the green/yellow jumper wire shown in Figure 1.7. Disconnect, insulate and secure the wire to guard against unintentional contact with chassis or components.
No.
Note location of the green/yellow jumper wire shown in Figure 1.7. Disconnect, insulate and secure the wire to guard against unintentional contact with chassis or components.
Remove the wire guard from the Power Terminal Block. Disconnect the green/yellow wire(s) from the PE terminals shown in Figure 1.7. Important: Do Not Disconnect the larger green/yellow wire. On 600/690V drives locate and disconnect a third green/yellow wire at the top right side of the chassis. Insulate/secure the wires to guard against unintentional contact with chassis or components.
(1) (2)
When removing MOVs, the input filter capacitor must also be removed. AC input drives only. MOVs and input filter caps do not exist on DC input drives.
ATTENTION: The MOVs must be installed, or kept in circuit, on grounded systems.
Figure 1.6 Typical Jumper Locations - Frames 1 and 2

Frame 1 (Control Assembly & I/O Cassette Removed) Frame 2
PE 4 PE 3
DC FILTER CAP-PE JMPR
PE 2 PE 1
MOV-PE JMPR
ER NG DA
!
Wire 75C WG Use #14 A s -lb #10- 7 in to ue Torq
y Onl

WIRE STRIP
BR1 B
V/T2 W/T3
PE R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
BR1 BR2 DC+ DC PE 1 U/T 2 V/T 3 W/T 1 R/L 2 S/L 3 T/L
AUX IN+ AUX OUT
SHLD
SHLD
PE B PE A
CONTROL
POWER
Installation/Wiring
1-19
Figure 1.7 Typical Jumper Locations - Frames 3 - 6

Frames 3 & 4 Frame 5

PE A
PE B
PE B PE A
WIRE STRIP
75C Cu Wire 3 AWG [25MM2] Max. 16 IN. LBS. 1.8 N-M } TORQUE
CONTROL
BR1 BR2 75C Cu Wire 6 AWG [10MM2] Max.

12 IN. LBS. 1.4 N-M } TORQUE
POWER
AUX IN +
BR1 BR2 DC+ DC- U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
POWER TERMINAL RATINGS WIRE RANGE: 14-1/0 AWG (2.5-35 MM2) TORQUE: 32 IN-LB (3.6 N-M) STRIP LENGTH: 0.67 IN (17 MM) USE 75 C CU WIRE ONLY GROUND TERMINAL RATINGS (PE) WIRE RANGE: 6-1/0 AWG (16-35 MM2) TORQUE: 44 IN-LB (5 N-M) STRIP LENGTH: 0.83 IN (21 MM)
17
9
PE
SHLD
21
OUTPUT
INPUT AC
SHLD
Important: Do not discard or replace grounding hardware. Frame 6
600/ 690V
WIRE STRIP
x1
22-10 AWG 5.3 IN-LB (0.6 N-M)
PS+ PS
BR2
BR1
DC+
DC
USE 75C COPPER WIRE ONLY, TORQUE 52 IN-LB (6 N-M)
PE
PE
USE 75C COPPER WIRE ONLY TORQUE 52 IN-LB (6 N-M)
DC Input
T1
T2
OUTPUT
T3
L1
L2
x2
L3
INPUT
x3
PE PE
PE
PE
600/690V
208/240/ 400/480V
1-20
Installation/Wiring
I/O Wiring
Important points to remember about I/O wiring: Always use copper wire. Wire with an insulation rating of 600V or greater is recommended. Control and signal wires should be separated from power wires by at least 0.3 meters (1 foot). 4100CCF3 Flex I/O cable for use with DriveLogix is 3 ft. maximum length. Important: I/O terminals labeled () or Common are not referenced to earth ground and are designed to greatly reduce common mode interference. Grounding these terminals can cause signal noise. ATTENTION: Hazard of personal injury or equipment damage exists when using bipolar input sources. Noise and drift in sensitive input circuits can cause unpredictable changes in motor speed and direction. Use speed command parameters to help reduce input source sensitivity.
Table 1.E Recommended Control Wire

Type Digital I/O Wire Type(s) Un-shielded Per US NEC or applicable national or local code Shielded Multi-conductor shielded cable such as Belden 8770(or equiv.) Belden 8760/9460(or equiv.) Description Insulation Rating 300V, 60o C (140o F), Minimum
0.750 mm2 (18AWG), 3 conductor, shielded. Standard 0.750 mm2 (18AWG), Analog I/O twisted pair, 100% shield with drain (5). Remote Pot Belden 8770(or equiv.) 0.750 mm2 (18AWG), 3 cond., shielded Encoder/ Combined: Belden 9730 (or equivalent) (1) 0.196 mm2 (24AWG), Pulse I/O individually shielded. Less 30.5 m (100 ft.) 300V, 0.196 mm2 (24AWG), Encoder/ Signal: Belden 9730/9728 (or 75-90 C (1) individually shielded. Pulse I/O equivalent) (167-194 F) (2) 2 (18AWG) 30.5 m (100 Power: 0.750 mm Belden 8790 ft.) to 152.4 Combined: Belden 9892 (3) 0.330 mm2 or 0.500 mm2 m (500 ft.) (3) Encoder/ Pulse I/O 152.4 m (500 ft.) to 259.1 m (850 ft.) EMC Compliance
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Signal: Power: Combined:
Belden 9730/9728 (or equivalent) (1) Belden 8790 (2) Belden 9773/9774 (or equivalent) (4)
0.196 mm2 (24AWG), individually shielded. 0.750 mm2 (18AWG) 0.750 mm2 (18AWG), individually shielded pair.
Refer to CE Conformity on page 1-30 for details.
Belden 9730 is 3 individually shielded pairs (2 channel plus power). If 3 channel is required, use Belden 9728 (or equivalent). Belden 8790 is 1 shielded pair. Belden 9892 is 3 individually shielded pairs (3 channel), 0.33 mm2 (22 AWG) plus 1 shielded pair 0.5 mm2 (20 AWG) for power. Belden 9773 is 3 individually shielded pairs (2 channel plus power). If 3 channel is required, use Belden 9774 (or equivalent). If the wires are short and contained within a cabinet which has no sensitive circuits, the use of shielded wire may not be necessary, but is always recommended.
Installation/Wiring
1-21
ATEX Approved Drives and Motors

For detailed information on using ATEX approved drives and motors, refer to Appendix J.
Wiring the Main Control Board I/O Terminals

Terminal blocks TB1 and TB2 contain connection points for all inputs, outputs and standard encoder connections. Both terminal blocks reside on the Main Control Board. Remove the terminal block plug from the socket, and make connections. Do not use a tool for terminal block removal. Damage may occur if a tool is used. Important: For NEMA/UL Type 1 applications, all wiring must be routed through the conduit plate on the drive. Route any wires from the expanded cassette to the base cassette and out of the drive. Reinstall the plug when wiring is complete.
Table 1.F Control & Encoder Terminal Block Specifications
Name I/O Blocks
(1)
Frame Description 1-6 Signal & Encoder connections
Wires Size Range(1) Maximum Minimum 1.5 mm2 .14 mm2 (16 AWG) (28 AWG)
Torque Maximum .25 N-m (2.2 lb.-in.)
Recommended .22 N-m (1.9 lb.-in.)
Maximum/minimum sizes the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations.
1-22
Installation/Wiring
Figure 1.8 Main Control Board I/O Terminal Locations
TB1 Terminals
TB2 Terminals
Installation/Wiring
1-23
Auxiliary Power Supply (High Power Only)

You may use an auxiliary power supply to keep the 700S Control Assembly energized when input power is de-energized. This allows the Main Control Board, DriveLogix controller and any feedback option cards to continue operation. Refer to Power Terminal Blocks on page 1-9 for connection information. You must set bit 17 Aux Pwr Sply of Par 153 [Control Options] to enable this feature. Refer to the PowerFlex 700S Auxiliary Control Power Supply Installation Instructions (PN: 20-24V-AUX1), publication 20D-IN021 for more information. Important: For frame 9 - 13 drives manufactured prior to June 2006, the Voltage Feedback board provides the bulk 24 volts for the High Power Fiber Optic Interface board. If the auxiliary power supply (24 volts) is greater than the Voltage Feedback board (24 volts) then the switch mode power supply on the Voltage Feedback board will shut down. If the auxiliary power supply has an adjustable voltage, then the voltage should be lowered (23.75). This will allow the Voltage Feedback board power supply to supply the 24 volts. If the auxiliary power supply cannot be adjusted, then a 500 ohm resistor needs to be added to the Voltage Feedback board. In this case, please contact Drives Technical Support for details.
Hardware Enable Circuitry

By default, Digital Input 6 is configured for hardware enable input. This is for applications requiring the drive to be disabled without software interpretation. With the HW Enable Jumper (Shunt) on the pins closest to the PCB (2-4), Digital Input 6 is configured as a dedicated hardware enable. If this configuration is not required, the HW Enable Jumper (Shunt) may be moved to the out board pins (1-3), making Digital Input 6 user programmable via Par 830 [Dig In6 Sel].
1-24
Installation/Wiring
Table 1.G TB1 Terminals

Terminal Signal
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Factory Default
(Volt) NA (Volt) (Volt) NA (Volt) (Volt) NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA
Description
Bipolar, differential input, +/-10V, 0-20 mA, 13 bit + sign 20k Ohm impedance at Volt; 500 Ohm impedance at mA(1) Analog Input Shield Bipolar, differential input, +/-10V, 0-20 mA, 13 bit + sign 20k Ohm impedance at Volt; 500 Ohm impedance at mA Differential input, 0-10V, 10 bit (for motor control mode FVC2, this is the temperature adaptation input). Analog Output Shield Bipolar, differential output, +/-10V, 0-20 mA, 11 bit + sign 2k Ohm minimum load
Related Parameter
800
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Analog Input 1 Comm. Analog Input 1 (+/-) Shield Analog Input 2 Comm. Analog Input 2 (+/-) Analog Input 3 [NTC-] Comm. Analog Input 3 [NTC+] Shield Analog Output 1 (-) Analog Output 1 (+) Analog Output 2 (-) Analog Output 2 (+) +10V Reference Reference Common -10V Reference Encoder A Encoder A (Not) Encoder B Encoder B (Not) Encoder Z Encoder Z (Not) Encoder Reference (+) Encoder Reference (-) Encoder Shield
806 812 832, 833 839, 840
Rating: 20 mA maximum load (Recommend 5k Ohm pot)
Normal current draw per channel: 20 mA
230-233
12 or 5V DC power supply for primary encoder interface Rating: 300 mA maximum Connection point for encoder shield
(1)
The analog inputs are not isolated. However, the analog inputs can be connected in series when using current mode. Note that at 20mA the voltage source must be capable of providing 10V dc at the drive terminals for one drive - - 20V dc is required for two drives and 30V dc is required for three drives.
Table 1.H TB2 Terminals

Terminal Signal
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 24V DC Common (-) 24V DC Source (+) Digital Output 1 Digital Output 1/2 Com Digital Output 2 Relay Output 3 (NC) Relay Output 3 Com Relay Output 3 (NO) Digital Input 1-3 Com Digital Input 1 Digital Input 2 Digital Input 3 Digital Input 4-6 Com Digital Input 4 Digital Input 5 Digital Input 6
Factory Default
NA NA
Description
Drive supplied 24V DC logic input power Rating: 300 mA maximum load 24V DC Open Collector (sinking logic) Rating: Internal Source = 150 mA max. External Source = 750 mA Common for Digital Output 1 & 2 24V DC Open Collector (sinking logic) Rating: Internal Source = 150 mA max. External Source = 750 mA Relay contact output Rating: 115V AC or 24V DC = 2 A max. Inductive/Resistive Common for Digital Inputs 1-3 High speed 12V or 24V DC(1), sourcing Load:15 mA at 24V DC
Related Parameter
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
816, 847
NA
851, 852 856, 857
NA NA
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
NA
HW Enable
Load:15 mA at 24V DC sourcing Common for Digital Inputs 4-6 Load: 10 mA at 24V DC sinking/sourcing 828 Load: 7.5 mA at 115V AC 829 Note: The 115 VAC Digital Inputs can withstand 2 milliamps of leakage current without turning on. If an output device has a leakage current greater than 2 milliamps a burden resistor is required. A 68.1K ohm resistor with a 0.5 watt rating should be used to keep the 115 VAC output below 2 milliamps. 830
825 826 827
(1)
Digital Inputs 1 and 2 are configured for 12V or 24V DC via DIP switches S3-1 and S3-2, respectively. 24V DC is the default setting.
Installation/Wiring
1-25
Table 1.I TB1 Terminals Analog Wiring Examples

Input/Output 0-10V Analog Input Connection Example 0-10V Analog Input - Internal Source Required Parameter Changes NA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
0-10V Analog Input
0-10V Analog Input - Bi-Polar
NA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
0-10V Analog Input
0-10V Analog Input - External Source

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NA
-Signal or Source Common +Signal Shield / Common -Signal or Source Common +Signal Shield / Common -Signal or Source Common +Signal Shield / Common
1-26
Installation/Wiring
Input/Output Analog Output +/-10V DC Used to drive analog meters displaying speed and current
Connection Example 0-10V Analog Output

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
+ +
Required Parameter Changes Using Analog Out 1, -10V to + 10V to meter Motor RPM and direction: Send the data to the Analog Output Par 833 [Anlg Out1 Real] (the destination) linked to Par 71 [Filtered SpdFdbk] (the source) Scale the Output to the source parameter Par 835 [Anlg Out1 Scale] = 175 (Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1750 / 10V) Using Analog Out 2, -10V to + 10V to meter Motor Current: Send the data to the Analog Output Par 840[ Anlg Out2 Real] (the destination) linked to Par 308 [Output Current] (the source) Scale the Output to the source parameter Par 842 [Anlg Out2 Scale] = xx (Par 2 [Motor NP FLA] / 10 V Output) Using Encoder 0 as speed feedback: Par 222 [Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri] = 0 Encoder 0 (default) Par 232 [Encoder0 PPR] = Pulses/Rev for installed encoder
Primary Encoder Primary Encoder - Internal Supply Interface 13 Supports 5V DC/12V DC 14 differential encoders with Encoder 15 internal power supply. A 16 Used as primary closed loop feedback.
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
AB BThe Z channel is not required in typical Z- applications + Z -
Primary Encoder - External Supply

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
NA
Encoder A AB BZ The Z channel is not required in typical Z- applications + -
Power +V Common -V Shield
Installation/Wiring
1-27
Table 1.J TB2 - Digital Wiring Examples

Input/Output Digital Inputs used for enable and precharge control. Note: 24V DC Supply supports only on-board digital inputs. Do not use for circuits outside the drive. Note: The factory default for all Digital Inputs is 24V. To use 115V on Digital Inputs 4-6 see Table 1.K. Connection Example Sourcing Digital Inputs - Internal Power Supply
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Com 24V DC
Sourcing and Sinking Definitions The digital inputs and digital outputs of the PowerFlex 700S AC drive support Sourcing or Sinking configuration. Typically, digital inputs are sourcing devices and digital outputs are sinking devices. The following definitions apply throughout this section: Sourcing a Digital Input - The digital input common (return) is connected to the power supply common. Applying a positive voltage to the digital input will cause it to activate (pull up). Sinking a Digital Input - The digital input common (return) is connected to the power supply positive voltage. Applying 0V or common to the digital input will cause it to activate (pull down). Sourcing a Digital Output - The digital output common (return) is connected to the power supply common. The device to be controlled by the digital output is connect to the positive voltage and the device common is connected to the digital output. Sinking a Digital Output - The digital output common (return) is connected to the power supply positive voltage. The digital output is connect to the device to be controlled and the device common is connected to the power supply common. Note: Digital Inputs 1-3 can only be configured as sourcing inputs. Digital Inputs 4-6 can be configured as sourcing or sinking inputs.
Note: Digital Inputs 1 & 2 Sourcing Digital Outputs - Internal Power Supply are 12 or 24V DC. Com Digital Input 3 is 24V DC. 1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
24V dc
Sinking Digital Inputs - Internal Power Supply

Com
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
24V dc
Sinking Digital Output - Internal Power Supply

Com 24V dc
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1-28
Installation/Wiring
Input/Output Digital Inputs 24V DC
Connection Example Sourcing Digital Inputs - Internal Power Supply, 2-Wire Control Required Parameter Changes Set Par 829 [Dig In5 Sel] to value 7 - Run Com 1 Par 153 [Control Options], bit 8 3WireControl will 24V DC 2 automatically be OFF (0) for 2-wire control Set Par 168 [Normal Stop Mode] for the desired 3 stopping mode: 9 4 0 = Ramp Stop 10 5 1 = CurLim Stop 11 2 = Coast Stop 6
7 8 12 13 14 15 16
RUN Enable
Digital Inputs 24V DC
Sourcing Digital Inputs- Internal Power Supply, 3-Wire

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Com 24V DC
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
START STOP Enable
Set Par 829 [Dig In5 Sel] to value 14 Normal Stop Set Par 828 [Dig In4 Sel] to value 5 - Start Par 153 [Control Options], bit 8 3WireControl will automatically be ON (1) for 3-wire control Set Par 168 [Normal Stop Mode] for the desired stopping mode: 0 = Ramp Stop 1 = CurLim Stop 2 = Coast Stop
Installation/Wiring
1-29
Main Control Board I/O Configuration Settings

ATTENTION: The DIP switches for Digital Inputs 4 - 6 are set to 24V DC at the factory. If you are running a 115V AC input application, the switches must be set as indicated below before applying power to the drive or damage to the Main Control board may occur.
Figure 1.9 Main Control Board Dip Switches and Jumpers
JUMPER P22
4 2 3 1
= HW Enable
S1
SWITCH S5
SIDE VIEW Up = Open = Off FRONT TOP VIEW
4 2
3 1
= No HW Enable
Down = Closed = On
1 2
JUMPER P13
16
16
= Gate Enabled = Gate Disabled
SWITCH S2
SIDE VIEW Up = Open = Off FRONT TOP VIEW
15
15
Down = Closed = On
1 2
3 4
SWITCH S4 SWITCH S3
SIDE VIEW Up = Open = Off FRONT TOP VIEW Up = Open = Off SIDE VIEW FRONT TOP VIEW
Down = Closed = On Down = Closed = On

1 2
1 2
1-30
Installation/Wiring
Table 1.K Switch and Jumper Settings

Function HW Enable Jumper (P22) Gate Enable Jumper (P13) Analog Input 1 Analog Input 2 Digital Inputs 4-6 Voltage Digital Input 1 Voltage Digital Input 2 Voltage Encoder Supply Voltage Encoder Signal A Voltage Encoder Signal B Voltage Encoder Signal Z Voltage Function DriveLogix Processor
(1)
Default pins 2-4 HW Enbl Jumper on pins 15-16 Voltage Voltage 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 12V DC 12V DC 12V DC 12V DC Down RUN
Switch SHUNT Jumper SHUNT Jumper S5-2 S5-1 S4-1, S4-2 S3-1 S3-2 S2-4 S2-1 S2-2 S2-3 Switch S1
Open pins 2-4 HW Enbl No Jmpr
Closed pins 1-3 No Enbl Jumper on pins 15-16 Current Current 24V DC 12V DC 12V DC 5V DC 5V DC 5V DC 5V DC Center Remote
Voltage Voltage 115V AC 24V DC 24V DC 12V DC 12V DC 12V DC 12V DC Up Prog
Notes No Jmpr = HW Enbl See window for Cnfg No Jmpr = Gate disable or Safe-Off/Second Encoder board is present(1) Change with Power Off Change with Power Off Change with Power Off Change with Power Off Change with Power Off Change with Power Off Typically, set all switches the same
Notes Processor Mode
Refer to publication 20D-UM007, DriveGuard Safe-Off Option for PowerFlex 700S Phase II AC Drives and PowerFlex 700L Liquid-Cooled AC Drives, for more information on the Safe-Off Option board, or publication, 20D-IN009 Installation Instructions - Second Encoder Option Card for PowerFlex 700S Drives with Phase II Control, for more information on the Second Encoder Option board.
Please note there are two separate values for an encoder.
CE Conformity
Conformity with the Low Voltage (LV) Directive and Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive has been demonstrated using harmonized European Norm (EN) standards published in the Official Journal of the European Communities. PowerFlex drives comply with the EN standards listed below when installed according to the User and Reference Manuals. Important: CE Certification testing has not been performed on 600V class drives, frames 1-4. Declarations of Conformity are available online at: http://www.ab.com/certification/ce/docs.
Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC)

EN50178 Electronic equipment for use in power installations.
EMC Directive (89/336/EEC)

EN61800-3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3: EMC product standard including specific test methods.
Installation/Wiring
1-31
General Notes
If the adhesive label is removed from the top of the drive, the drive must be installed in an enclosure with side openings less than 12.5 mm (0.5 in.) and top openings less than 1.0 mm (0.04 in.) to maintain compliance with the LV Directive. The motor cable should be kept as short as possible in order to avoid electromagnetic emission as well as capacitive currents. Use of line filters in ungrounded systems is not recommended. PowerFlex drives may cause radio frequency interference if used in a residential or domestic environment. The user is required to take measures to prevent interference, in addition to the essential requirements for CE compliance listed below, if necessary. Conformity of the drive with CE EMC requirements does not guarantee an entire machine or installation complies with CE EMC requirements. Many factors can influence total machine/installation compliance. PowerFlex drives can generate conducted low frequency disturbances (harmonic emissions) on the AC supply system. More information regarding harmonic emissions can be found in the PowerFlex Reference Manual Vol. 2.
Essential Requirements for CE Compliance

Conditions 1-6 listed below must be satisfied for PowerFlex drives to meet the requirements of EN61800-3. 1. Standard PowerFlex 700S CE compatible drive. 2. Review important precautions/attentions statements throughout this document before installing drive. 3. Grounding as described on page 1-5. 4. Output power, control (I/O) and signal wiring must be braided, shielded cable with a coverage of 75% or better, metal conduit, or have shielding/ cover with equivalent attenuation. 5. All shielded cables should terminate with proper shielded connector. 6. Output power cable to motor must not exceed lengths in Table 1.L
Table 1.L PowerFlex 700S EN61800-3 EMC Compatibility(1)
Second Environment Restrict Motor Cable to 30 m (98 ft.) Any Drive and Option First Environment Restricted Distribution Restrict Motor Cable to 150 m (492 ft.) Any Drive and Option External Filter Required Frame(s) 1-6
(1) External filters for First Environment installations and increasing motor cable lengths in Second Environment installations are available. Roxburgh models KMFA (RF3 for UL installations) and MIF or Schaffner FN3258 and FN258 models are recommended. Refer to http://www.deltron-emcon.com and http://www.mtecorp.com (USA) or http://www.schaffner.com, respectively.
1-32
Installation/Wiring
Notes:
Chapter
Start-Up
This chapter describes how to start-up the PowerFlex 700S Phase II drive. Refer to Appendix D for a brief description of the Human Interface Module (HIM).
For Information on Prepare for Drive Start-Up Assisted Start-Up See Page... 2-1 2-6
ATTENTION: Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following start-up procedure. Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential. To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment, only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure. Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning. If an event does not occur while performing this procedure, Do Not Proceed. Remove Power including user supplied control voltages. User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive. Correct the malfunction before continuing.
Prepare for Drive Start-Up
Before Applying Power to the Drive

Important: If you have a DriveLogix application, you must first connect the battery before starting this section. 1. Confirm that motor wires are connected to the correct terminals and are secure. Confirm Frame 5 & 6 transformer connections (refer to page 1-10).
T1 T2 T3 U V W PE
2. If an encoder is used, confirm the encoder wires are connected to the correct terminals and are secure (refer to Table 1.G on page 1-24). 3. Confirm that all control inputs are connected to the correct terminals and are secure.
2-2
Start-Up
4. Verify that AC line power at the disconnect device is within the rated value of the drive. 5. Verify that the control power voltage is correct.
PWR
STS
L1
PORT MOD NET A
L2 L3
NET B
The remainder of this procedure requires that a HIM be installed. If an operator interface is not available, remote devices should be used to start-up the drive. If the DriveLogix option is not present the associated indicators will not be present. The RUN LED and the controller LEDs are only operational when the drive is energized. These LEDs are only visible when the drive door is open or when viewed from the HIM or an application program (e.g., DriveExplorer) in parameter 554 [LED Status]. This feature is only available with DriveLogix version 15.03 or later.
ATTENTION: The RUN LED and the controller LEDs are only operational when the drive is energized and only visible with the drive door open. Servicing energized equipment can be hazardous. Severe injury or death can result from electrical shock, burn or unintended actuation of controlled equipment. Follow Safety related practices of NFPA 70E, ELECTRICAL SAFETY FOR EMPLOYEE WORKPLACES. DO NOT work alone on energized equipment!
Start-Up
2-3
Applying Power to the Drive

RUN (Drive)
RUN (DriveLogix) I/O (DriveLogix)
FORCE (DriveLogix) COM (DriveLogix) BAT (DriveLogix) OK (DriveLogix)
6. Apply AC power and control voltages to the drive. Examine the Power (PWR) LED.
Table 2.A Drive Status Indicator Descriptions
2-4
Start-Up
Name
Color
State
Description
PWR
Power Structure
Green Green Yellow
Steady Flashing Steady Flashing Steady Flashing Steady Flashing Alternately
Illuminates when power is applied to the drive. Drive ready, but not running & no faults are present. Drive running, no faults are present. When running, a type 2 (non-configurable) alarm condition exists, drive continues to run. When stopped, a start inhibit exists and the drive cannot be started. A type 1 (user configurable) alarm condition exists, but drive continues to run. A fault has occurred. A non-resettable fault has occurred. The drive is in flash recovery mode. The only operation permitted is flash upgrade.
(Power) STS (Status)
Red Red / Yellow
DRIVE
Communications
Control Assembly
PORT MOD NET A NET B
Status of DPI port internal communications (if present). Refer to the Status of communications module (when installed). Communication Status of network (if connected). Adapter User Manual Status of secondary network (if connected). Steady The module is configured as the time keeper. or The module is configured as a follower and synchronization is complete. The follower(s) are not synchronized with the time keeper. The module is configured as a time master on SynchLink and has received time information from another time master on SynchLink. The drives enable input is high. The drives enable input is low.
(1)
SYNCHLINK Green
Control
Green Red ENABLE Green Green
Flashing Flashing On Off
(1)
SynchLink LEDs are located on the SynchLink daughtercard on the main circuit board in the control cassette.
Start-Up
2-5
7. Examine the Status (STS) LED. Verify that it is flashing green or that bit 1 Sts Ready of parameter 554 [LED Status] is set when viewed from the HIM or an application program. If it is not in this state, check the following possible causes and take the necessary corrective action.
Table 2.B Common Causes of a Run Inhibit
Examine Par 156 - Run Inhibit Status bit Description 1 No power is present at the Enable Terminal TB2 - 16 2, 3, 4 A stop command is being issued 5 Power loss event is in progress, indicating a loss of the AC input voltage 6 Data supplied by the power structure EEprom is invalid or corrupt. 7 Flash Update in Progress 8 Drive is expecting a Start Edge and is receiving a continuous signal. 9 Drive is expecting a Jog Edge and is receiving a continuous signal. A conflict exists between the Encoder PPR programming (Par 232 or 10 242) and the encoder configuration for edge counts (Par 233, bits 4 & 5). The drive cannot precharge because a precharge input is programmed 11 and no signal is present. Start input configured but stop not configured Run input configured but control options do not match Start input configured but control options do not match Multiple inputs configured as Start or Run 12 Multiple inputs configured as Jog1 Multiple inputs configured as Jog2 Multiple inputs configured as Fwd/Rev Invalid Feedback Device for Permanent Magnet Motor Control Digital Configuration Action Apply the enable Close all stop inputs Restore AC power Cycle power. If problem persists, replace the power structure. Complete Flash Procedures Open all start buttons and remove all start commands Open all jog buttons and remove all jog commands Verify encoder data and reprogram
Reprogram the input or close the precharge control contact. Program Par 825-830 to include a stop button, rewire the drive Program Par 153, Bit 8 to 0 (2 wire control) Program Par 153, Bit 8 to 1 (3 wire control) Reprogram Par 825-830 so multiple starts, multiple runs or any combination do not exist Reprogram Par 825-830 so only (1) is set to Jog1 Reprogram Par 825-830 so only (1) is set to Jog2 Reprogram Par 825-830 so only (1) is set to Fwd/Rev Set Par 222 to Value 5 (FB Opt Port0)
14
Table 2.C Common Start-Up Faults

Fault Encoder Loss Description Action One of the following has occurred on an encoder: Reconnect encoder or replace encoder. missing encoder (broken wire) quadrature error phase loss Motor Overload A motor overload is pending. Enter correct motor nameplate full load amps. Par 2 [Motor NP FLA] or reduce excess load. Motor Poles Fault The poles of the motor do not match its rating. Enter correct motor nameplate information. Par 4 [Motor NP RPM]
If any digital input is configured to Stop - CF (CF=Clear Faults) verify the signal is present or the drive will not start. Refer to Chapter 4 for a list of potential digital input conflicts. If a fault code appears, refer to Chapter 4. The STS LED should be flashing green or bit 1 Sts Ready of parameter 554 [LED Status] should be set at this point. 8. Proceed to the Assisted Start-Up routine below.
2-6
Start-Up
Assisted Start-Up
This routine prompts you for information needed to start-up a drive for most applications, such as line and motor data, commonly adjusted parameters and I/O. Important: When using the Start-Up Assistant, always exit the Assistant before cycling power on the drive. Failure to exit may leave unwanted settings active in the drive configuration. If, after exiting the Start-Up Assistant, external sources inhibit drive start, check Par 671 [Start Mask]. The assisted start-up routine asks simple yes or no questions and prompts you to input required information. Access Assisted Start-Up by selecting Start-Up from the Main Menu.
Step Key(s) Example LCD Displays
1. To exit the User Display screen, Press Esc.

Esc
Stopped
0.0 0.0
1. In the Main Menu, use the Down Arrow to scroll to Start Up 2. Press Enter. TIP: Throughout the Start-Up Routine many screens have more selection than shown. Use the arrow keys to scroll through all the menu options. 1. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the Start-Up.
0.0
Auto
RPM
DC Bus V Output C
Auto
Stopped
Main Menu: 0.0 Diagnostics Parameter Device Select
0.0
RPM
PowerFlex 700S Start-Up The Start-Up routine sets up 0.0 the drive for Diagnostics basic operation. Push Enter.
Important: If using a HIM the following functions are not available: Alt-Man Alt-Lang Alt-SMART
Start-Up
2-7
Figure 2.1 Start-Up Menu
PowerFlex 700S Start-Up
Esc
Down 1 level or Select Back 1 level or 1 selection Scroll all choices
Motor Control
Motor Data
Feedback Configuration
Power Circuit Test
Direction Test
Select Motor Control Mode Select DB Resistor
Enter Motor NP Data Power & Units FLA Volts Hertz RPM Poles
Setup / Select Encoder Resolver Hi-Res Encoder Linear Sensor
Diagnostic Check for Drive Power Circuit
Verify Direction
Motor Tests
Inertia Measure
Speed Limits
Speed Control
Start / Stop / I/O
Done / Exit
Field Oriented Control: Measure Stator Resistance, Leakage Inductance, Magnetizing Inductance, Slip Frequency PMag Motor: Encoder Offset, Stator Resistance, Stator Inductance, Back EMF
Measure System Inertia
Select Direction Control Set FWD, REV and ABS Speed Limits
Select Sources For All Speed References
Configure: Digital Inputs, Digital Outputs, Analog Inputs, Analog Outputs
2-8
Start-Up
Notes:
Chapter
This chapter provides a complete listing and description of the PowerFlex 700S Phase II drive parameters. The parameters can be programmed (viewed/edited) using a Human Interface Module (HIM). Refer to HIM Overview on page D-1 for information on using the HIM to view and edit parameters. As an alternative, programming can also be performed using DriveTools software and a personal computer.
For information on...
About Parameters How Parameters are Organized Parameter Data in Linear List Format Parameter Cross Reference By Name
See page
3-1 3-3 3-15 3-118
About Parameters
To configure a drive module to operate in a specific way, certain drive parameters may have to be configured appropriately. Three types of parameters exist: ENUM Parameters These parameters allow a selection from 2 or more items. The LCD HIM will display a text message for each item. Bit Parameters These parameters have individual bits associated with features or conditions. If the bit is 0, the feature is off or the condition is false. If the bit is 1, the feature is on or the condition is true. Numeric Parameters These parameters have a single numeric value (i.e. 0.1 Volts). The example on the following page shows how each parameter type is presented in this manual.
3-2
Table 3.A Table Explanation
Name Description Logic Command
Linkable Read-Write Data Type

1= 0= 1= 2= 3= Speed Reg Zero Torque Speed Reg Torque Ref Min Spd/Torq 4 = Max Spd/Torq 5 = Sum Spd/Torq 6 = AbsMn Spd/Tq RW 16-bit Integer RPM Calculated 1/30000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0pu
No. 151
Values
The controller-drive interface (as defined by the Controller Communication Format) sets bits to enable and disable various functions and algorithms. Bits that are changed here are reflected in Par 152 [Applied LogicCmd]. Note: Bits 4 through 9 in Logic Command are NOT recalled from Control EEprom. They will be cleared upon drive powerup or following an EEprom recall operation. SpdRamp Hold Spd S Crv En 0 1 TachLoss Rst 0 2 SReg IntgHld SReg IntgRst Time Axis En Inertia Comp PI Trim Hold Options PI Trim Rst SpdRamp Dsbl 0 0 0 = False 1 = True Position En Frict Comp Ext Flt/Alm 0
PI Trim En
Reserved 0 8
Default Bit
0 7
Reserved
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
110
Selects the source for the drive torque reference.
Spd/Torq ModeSel
Default: Options:
Set to the motor nameplate rated RPM.
Motor NP RPM
Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale:
Read-Write
No.
Name Description
No. - Parameter Number Parameter value cannot be changed until the drive is stopped.
Name - Parameter name as it appears in the DriveExecutive software. Description - Brief description of parameter function. Values - Define the various operating characteristics of the parameter. There are 3 types of Values. ENUM Bit Numeric Default: Options: Default: Options: Default Min/Max. Scale: Lists the value assigned at the factory. Displays the selections available. Lists the value assigned at the factory. Displays the selections available. Lists the value assigned at the factory. Displays lowest possible setting/Displays highest possible setting. Value sent from Controller or Comm Device = Drive Parameter Value x Comm Scale RW RO 16-bit Integer
A checkmark () indicates that the parameter is linkable. Indicates if parameter is read-write or read-only. RW=Read-Write RO=Read Only Indicates parameter data type (i.e. integer, floating point, boolean).
Data Type
Linkable
3-3
How Parameters are Organized
DriveExecutive programming software displays parameters in Linear List or File Group Parameter format. Viewing the parameters in File Group Parameter format simplifies programming by grouping parameters that are used for similar functions. There are twelve files. Each file is divided into multiple groups of parameters.
Monit
Moto or
Dyna
r Con
mic C
Spee
ontro l
ess C Torqu ontro e Co l ntrol d Co ntrol
Proc
Posit io
Spee n Co
d/Po
ntrol
sit Fd
Utility
bk
Com
ser F Inputs uncti ons & Ou tputs munic ation
trol
Metering
310 49 50 40 43 301 319 300 72 297 499 309 312 307 311 762 299 298 306 313 345 824 801 807 813 837 844 Output Freq Selected SpdRefA Selected SpdRefB Selected Spd Ref Ramped Spd Ref Motor Speed Ref Selected Trq Ref Motor Spd Fdbk Scaled Spd Fdbk Output Curr Disp Trq CurFdbk (Iq) % Motor Flux MotorFluxCurr FB Output Voltage Output Power Position Fdbk Elapsed MWHrs Elapsed Run Time DC Bus Voltage Heatsink Temp Drive OL JnctTmp Local I/O Status Anlg In1 Value Anlg In2 Value Anlg In3 Volts Anlg Out1 Value Anlg Out2 Value
Control Status
150 155 157 156 166 167 555 346 159 165 317 554 Logic State Mach Logic Status Logic Ctrl State Start Inhibits Motor Ctrl Cmmd Motor Ctrl Ackn MC Status Drive OL Status DigIn ConfigStat Tune Test Status SL System Time LED Status
Drive Data
400 401 420 404 314 315 457 456 900 901 Rated Amps Rated Volts Pwr Strct Mode Dead Time VPL Firmware Rev VPL Build Number MC Firmware Rev MC Build Number SynchLink Rev SL System Rev
3-4
Com d/Po Posit sit Fd ion C Proc bk ontro ess C Torqu l ontro Spee e Co l ntrol d Co Dyna ntrol mic C Moto ontro l r Con Monit trol or Spee
Inputs munic a tion
Utility
& Ou tputs
User
Func
tions
Motor Data
1 2 3 4 5 6 336 7 9 Motor NP Volts Motor NP FLA Motor NP Hertz Motor NP RPM Motor NP Power Mtr NP Pwr Units Motor OL Factor Motor Poles Total Inertia
Monitoring
525 526 434 435 441 442 497 498 495 496 499 489 Slip Ratio Stator Frequency Mtr Vds Base Mtr Vqs Base Vds Fdbk Filt Vqs Fdbk Filt Vqs Command Vds Command Iqs Command Ids Command Trq CurFdbk (Iq) Flx CurFdbk (Id)
Drive Config
485 402 403 405 409 410 411 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 505 506 507 508 509 424 Motor Ctrl Mode PWM Frequency Voltage Class Dead Time Comp Line Undervolts PreChrg TimeOut PreChrg Control FVC Mode Config FVC2 Mode Config PMag Mode Cnfg V/Hz Mode Config Test Mode Config FVC Tune Config FVC2 Tune Config PMag Tune Config PM TestWait Time PM Test Idc Ramp PM Test FreqRamp PM Test Freq Ref PM Test I Ref Flux Ratio Ref
Tuning
423 453 454 425 426 443 470 444 533 500 501 437 438 439 440 469 449 450 447 448 446 445 552 553 472 431 432 433 477 428 537 538 539 54 551 Iqs Rate Limit Iu Offset Iw Offset Flux Rate Limit Flux Satur Coef Flux Reg P Gain1 Flux Reg P Gain2 Flux Reg I Gain SlewRateTimeLimit Bus Util Limit Torque En Dly Vqs Max Vds Max Vqs Min Vds Min FVC CEMF Comp SrLss Reg I Gain SrLss Reg P Gain Slip Reg P Gain Slip Reg I Gain Slip Gain Min Slip Gain Max Slip Preload Val Slip Slew Rate PreCharge Delay Test Current Ref Test Freq Ref Test Freq Rate Est Theta Delay IReg IGain Fctr SrLssAngleStblty SrLss VoltStblty SrLss StbltyFilt Inertia TrqLpfBW CurrFdbk AdjTime
Autotune Results
421 422 429 430 486 487 488 490 491 492 493 494 502 503 504 427 520 521 522 523 Iqs Integ Freq Iqs Reg P Gain Ids Integ Freq Ids Reg P Gain Rated Slip Freq Motor NTC Coef Flux Current StatorInductance StatorResistance Leak Inductance Leak Indc Satur1 Leak Indc Satur2 Rotor Resistance Current Reg BW PM AbsEncd Offst PM Mtr CEMF Comp PM Q Inductance PM D Inductance PM Stator Resist PM Mtr CEMF Coef
3-5
d/Po Posit sit Fd ion C Proc bk ontro ess C Torqu l ontro Spee e Co l ntrol d Co Dyna ntrol mic C Moto ontro r Con l Monit trol or
Spee
r Fun Inputs ction s & Ou Com munic tputs ation Utility
Use
Configuration
151 152 153 158 160 169 335 Logic Command Applied LogicCmd Control Options Drive Logic Rslt Zero Speed Lim SrLss ZeroSpdLim Abs OverSpd Lim
Overload Protect
337 338 339 340 341 343 344 Mtr I2T Curr Min Mtr I2T Spd Min Mtr I2T Calibrat Mtr I2T Trp ThrH Mtr I2T Count OL OpnLp CurrLim OL ClsLp CurrLim
Stop/Brake Modes
168 414 415 416 417 154 545 546 547 1125 544 1126 Normal Stop Mode Brake/Bus Cnfg BusReg/Brake Ref Brake PulseWatts Brake Watts Stop Dwell Time Bus Reg Ki Bus Reg Kp Bus Reg Kd DC Brake Level External DB Res DC Brake Time
Power Loss
406 407 408 Power Loss Mode Power Loss Time Power Loss Level
3-6
Monit
Moto or
Dyna
r Con
mic C
Spee ontro l
d Co
Torqu
ntrol
Proc e Co
ess C
Posit io ontro l
Spee
n Co
d/Po
ntrol
sit Fd
ser F Inputs uncti ons Com & Ou munic tputs ation Utility
bk
ntrol
trol
Reference
27 28 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 29 39 40 30 31 41 32 33 34 43 53 45 61 62 63 37 35 36 38 46 21 47 56 9 57 58 60 55 59 64 65 1160 66 67 68 69 Speed Ref A Sel Speed Ref B Sel Speed Ref 1 Spd Ref1 Divide Speed Ref 2 Spd Ref2 Multi Preset Speed 1 Preset Speed 2 Preset Speed 3 Preset Speed 4 Preset Speed 5 Preset Speed 6 Preset Speed 7 Jog Speed 1 Jog Speed 2 Selected Spd Ref Min Spd Ref Lim Max Spd Ref Lim Limited Spd Ref Accel Time 1 Decel Time 1 S Curve Time Ramped Spd Ref Drive Ramp Rslt Delayed Spd Ref Virt Encoder EPR Virt Encdr Posit Virt Encdr Dlyed Spd Ref Bypass SpdRef Filt Gain SpdRef Filt BW Speed Ref Scale Scaled Spd Ref Speed Trim 1 SpdRef + SpdTrm1 Inertia SpeedRef Total Inertia InertiaAccelGain InertiaDecelGain DeltaSpeedScale Speed Comp Inertia Trq Add FricComp Spd Ref FricComp Setup VirtEncPositFast FricComp Stick FricComp Slip FricComp Rated FricComp Trq Add
Regulator
48 23 24 22 25 26 74 75 76 301 300 93 94 71 100 89 84 85 87 9 90 97 91 81 82 92 86 101 106 104 105 102 103 95 96 302 Spd Ref Bypass2 Speed Trim 3 SpdTrim 3 Scale Speed Trim 2 STrim2 Filt Gain SpdTrim2 Filt BW Atune Spd Ref Rev Speed Lim Fwd Speed Lim Motor Speed Ref Motor Spd Fdbk SRegFB Filt Gain SReg FB Filt BW Filtered SpdFdbk Speed Error Spd Err Filt BW SpdReg AntiBckup Servo Lock Gain SReg Trq Preset Total Inertia Spd Reg BW Act Spd Reg BW Spd Reg Damping Spd Reg P Gain Spd Reg I Gain SpdReg P Gain Mx Spd Reg Droop SpdReg Integ Out SrLss Spd Reg BW SrLss Spd Reg Kp SrLss Spd Reg Ki Spd Reg Pos Lim Spd Reg Neg Lim SRegOut FiltGain SReg Out Filt BW Spd Reg PI Out
Setpoint Monitor
171 172 173 174 175 176 177 Set Speed Lim Setpt 1 Data Setpt1 TripPoint Setpt 1 Limit Setpt 2 Data Setpt2 TripPoint Setpt 2 Limit
3-7
Monit
Moto or
Dyna
r Con
mic C
Spee
ontro l
d Co
Torqu e
Proc
Contr ol
ess C
Posit io ontro l
Spee
n Co
d/Po
ntrol
sit Fd
ser F Inputs uncti ons & Ou Com tputs munic Utility ation
bk
ntrol
trol
Torque
110 302 59 69 111 112 113 114 115 119 120 319 116 129 117 118 415 401 306 300 127 128 353 125 126 123 124 303 132 133 134 221 Speed/TorqueMode Spd Reg PI Out Inertia Trq Add FricComp Trq Add Torque Ref 1 Torque Ref1 Div Torque Ref 2 Torque Ref2 Mult Torque Trim SLAT ErrorSetpnt SLAT Dwell Time Selected Trq Ref Torque Step Atune Trq Ref NotchAttenuation Notch Filt Freq BusReg/Brake Ref Rated Volts DC Bus Voltage Motor Spd Fdbk Mtring Power Lim Regen Power Lim Iq Actual Lim Torque Pos Limit Torque Neg Limit Trq PosLim Actl Trq NegLim Actl Motor Torque Ref Inert Adapt Sel Inert Adapt BW Inert Adapt Gain Load Estimate
Current
303 309 359 360 361 350 351 308 343 356 362 352 488 312 345 313 346 344 353 354 355 305 Motor Torque Ref % Motor Flux Motor Flux Est Min Flux Flx LpassFilt BW Iq Actual Ref Iq Ref Trim Output Current OL OpnLp CurrLim Mtr Current Lim Current Lmt Gain Is Actual Lim Flux Current MotorFluxCurr FB Drive OL JnctTmp Heatsink Temp Drive OL Status OL ClsLp CurrLim Iq Actual Lim Iq Rate Limit Iq Ref Limited Mtr Trq Curr Ref
3-8
ed/P Posit osit F ion C Proc dbk ontro ess C Torqu l ontro Spee e Co l ntrol d Co Dyna ntrol mic C Moto ontro r Con l Monit trol or
Spe
er Fu Inputs nctio ns & Ou Com tputs munic ation Utility
Us
Regulator
181 182 184 183 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 180 PI Reference PI Feedback PI Lpass Filt BW PI Error PI Preload PI Prop Gain PI Integ Time PI Integ HLim PI Integ LLim PI Integ Output PI High Limit PI Lower Limit PI Output
Limit Generator
202 203 204 205 206 207 208 Time Axis Rate Time Axis Output LimGen Y axis Mx LimGen Y axis Mn LimGen X axis In Limit Gen Hi Out Limit Gen Lo Out
3-9
Monit
Moto or
Dyna
r Con
mic C
Spee
ontro l
Proc
Posit ion
Spee d/Po sit Fd Contr bk ol
User Func Inputs tions Com & Ou munic tputs ation Utility
trol
Position Config
740 741 742 777 784 780 785 781 782 783 Position Control Position Status Posit Ref Sel PositionFdbk Sel Posit Detct1 In PositDetct1 Stpt Posit Detct2 In PositDetct2 Stpt In Posit BW In Posit Dwell
Point to Point
758 745 746 744 753 754 755 756 747 757 762 763 769 796 768 761 759 760 775 776 778 779 318 797 798 799 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 Pt-Pt Posit Ref PositRef EGR Mul PositRef EGR Div PositRef EGR Out Posit Offset 1 Posit Offset 2 Posit Offset Spd X Offst SpdFilt Position Cmmd Abs Posit Offset Position Fdbk Position Actual Position Error Posit Gear Ratio PositReg P Gain Pt-Pt Filt BW Pt-Pt Accel Time Pt-Pt Decel Time XReg Spd LoLim XReg Spd HiLim X Notch Attenu X Notch FiltFreq Posit Spd Output BasicIndx Step BasicIndx Preset BasicIndx Output PPMP Pos Command PPMP Pos Mul PPMP Pos Div PPMP Scaled Cmd PPMP Control PPMP Status PPMP Rev Spd Lim PPMP Fwd Spd Lim PPMP Over Ride PPMP Accel Time PPMP Decel Time PPMP SCurve Time PPMP Spd Output PPMP Pos Output PPMP Pos To Go
Sync Generator
786 787 317 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 Xsync Status Xsync Gen Period SL System Time Xsync In 1 Xsync Out 1 Xsync In 2 Xsync Out 2 Xsync Out 2 Dly Xsync In 3 Xsync Out 3 Xsync Out 3 Dly
Phase Lock Loop

720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 PLL Control PLL Position Ref PLL BandWidth PLL Rev Input PLL Rev Output PLL EPR Input PLL EPR Output PLL VirtEncdrRPM PLL Ext Spd Ref PLL Ext SpdScale PLL LPFilter BW PLL Posit Out PLL Posit OutAdv PLL FiltPositOut PLL Speed Out PLL SpeedOut Adv
Interp / Direct
748 750 749 751 752 693 743 745 746 744 757 753 754 755 756 747 762 764 766 767 763 765 769 796 768 770 772 773 774 771 775 776 778 779 318 CoarsePosit Trgt Coarse Spd Trgt Interp Position Interp Speed Interp AccelRate Interp SyncInput Aux Posit Ref PositRef EGR Mul PositRef EGR Div PositRef EGR Out Abs Posit Offset Posit Offset 1 Posit Offset 2 Posit Offset Spd X Offst SpdFilt Position Cmmd Position Fdbk Posit Load Fdbk Posit FB EGR Mul Posit FB EGR Div Position Actual Posit Actl Load Position Error Posit Gear Ratio PositReg P Gain PositReg Integ XReg Integ LoLim XReg Integ HiLim XReg Integ Out PositReg Droop XReg Spd LoLim XReg Spd HiLim X Notch Attenu X Notch FiltFreq Posit Spd Output
Motion
684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 MotnUpdatePeriod Motn CoarseMulti Motn Config Motn Axis Status Motn AxisControl Motn Axis Resp Motn Cnct Status Motn EventStatus Motn Event Ctrl Motn Mx Pos Trvl Motn Mx Neg Trvl Motn PositErrTol MotnPositLockTol Motn Posit Cmmd Motn Speed Cmmd Motn Posit Sync FdbkAxis FdbkSel FdbkAxis FdbkVal Motn TP Select Motn TP Value Motn RotaryCmmd MotnUnwdTurnCmmd SrvoAxis RotFdbk SrvoAxisUnwdFdbk FdbkAxis RotFdbk FdbkAxisUnwdFdbk MotnCnfgErrParam
Homing
1120 1121 1122 1124 1123 Home Accel Time Home Decel Time Home Speed Home Actual Pos Home Position
Note: The Position Control function is disabled by default. To enable the Position Control function, set Par 147 bit 16 to 1 enable.
3-10
Com Proc Posit io ontro l

Spee
Monit
Moto or
Dyna
r Con
mic C
Spee
ontro l
Torqu e Co ntrol d Co ntrol
ess C
n Co
ntrol
d/Po sit Fd bk
Utility
User Func Inputs tions & Ou munic tputs ation
trol
Feedback Config
222 223 777 224 300 762 73 72 MtrFdbk Sel Pri MtrFdbk Sel Alt PositionFdbk Sel TachSwitch Level Motor Spd Fdbk Position Fdbk Spd Fdbk Scale Scaled Spd Fdbk
Encoder Port 0/1

233 234 232 231 230 242 241 240 236 237 238 235 239 Encdr 0/1 Config Encdr 0/1 Error Encoder0 PPR Encdr0 Spd Fdbk Encdr0 Position Encoder1 PPR Encdr1 Spd Fdbk Encdr1 Position Enc0/1 RegisCnfg Enc0/1 RegisCtrl Enc0/1 RegisStat Encdr0 RegisLtch Encdr1 RegisLtch
Calculated Fdbk
225 226 227 228 229 Virtual Edge/Rev Motor Speed Est Motor Posit Est MtrSpd Simulated MtrPosit Simulat
Feedback Opt 0/1

249 251 250 253 252 259 260 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 277 272 273 274 275 276 254 255 256 257 258 286 289 290 285 291 1155 1156 Fdbk Option ID FB Opt0 Spd Fdbk FB Opt0 Posit FB Opt1 Spd Fdbk FB Opt1 Posit Stegmann0 Cnfg Stegmann0 Status Heidenhain0 Cnfg Heidenhain0 Stat Heidn Mkr Offset Heidn Encdr Type Heidn Encdr PPR Resolver0 Cnfg Resolver0 Status Reslvr0 Type Sel Reslvr0 SpdRatio Reslvr0 Carrier Reslvr0 In Volts Rslvr0 XfrmRatio Reslvr0 CableBal Opt0/1 RegisCnfg Opt0/1 RegisCtrl Opt0/1 RegisStat Opt 0 Regis Ltch Opt 1 Regis Ltch Linear1 Status Lin1 Update Rate Linear1 CPR Linear1 Config Lin1Stahl Status Heidn VM Pos Ref Heidn VM Enc PPR
3-11
Com ess C Torqu ontro e Co l ntrol d Co ntrol Proc
Posit io
n Co
Spee d
Monit
Moto or
r Con
Dyna mic
Spee
Contr ol
ntrol
/Posit F
Utility dbk
User Func Inputs tions & Ou munic tputs ation
trol
Drive Memory
196 145 147 149 146 148 ParamAccessLevel ApplicationGroup FW Functions En FW FunctionsActl FW TaskTime Sel FW TaskTime Actl
Diagnostics
155 156 304 824 320 321 322 326 327 328 323 324 325 331 313 345 346 316 902 903 518 519 463 464 465 894 895 896 897 898 899 332 333 334 Logic Status Start Inhibits Limit Status Local I/O Status Exception Event1 Exception Event2 Exception Event3 Alarm Status 1 Alarm Status 2 Alarm Status 3 Fault Status 1 Fault Status 2 Fault Status 3 LstFaultStopMode Heatsink Temp Drive OL JnctTmp Drive OL Status SynchLink Status SL Error Status SL Error History MC Diag Status MC Diag Done MC Diag Error 1 MC Diag Error 2 MC Diag Error 3 SL CRC Err Accum SL CRC Error SL BOF Err Accum SL BOF Error SL CRC Err Limit SL BOF Err Limit 700L EventStatus* 700L FaultStatus* 700L AlarmStatus*
Fault/Alm Config
379 374 373 382 381 393 394 376 377 372 371 375 369 365 366 367 391 392 383 384 390 385 386 387 388 389 370 363 364 378 395 396 397 398 399 368 Ext Flt/Alm Cnfg Motor Stall Cnfg Motor Stall Time MC Cmd Lim Cnfg PreChrg Err Cnfg BusUndervoltCnfg VoltFdbkLossCnfg Inv OL Pend Cnfg Inv OL Trip Cnfg Mtr OL Pend Cnfg Mtr OL Trip Cnfg Inv OT Pend Cnfg Brake OL Cnfg Fdbk LsCnfg Pri Fdbk LsCnfg Alt Fdbk LsCnfgPosit DPI CommLoss Cfg NetLoss DPI Cnfg SL CommLoss Data SL CommLoss Cnfg SL MultErr Cnfg Lgx CommLossData Lgx OutOfRunCnfg Lgx Timeout Cnfg Lgx Closed Cnfg Lgx LinkChngCnfg HiHp InPhsLs Cfg HiHp GndFlt Cur HiHp GndFlt Dly Interp Flt Cnfg +Sft OvrTrvlCnfg -Sft OvrTrvlCnfg +Hrd OvrTrvlCnfg -Hrd OvrTrvlCnfg Position ErrCnfg Cnv NotLogin Cfg*
Test Points
161 162 163 164 329 330 77 78 79 108 109 347 348 130 131 357 358 418 419 178 179 737 738 739 892 893 245 246 247 261 262 270 271 287 288 412 413 466 467 468 473 474 475 476 717 718 719 1145 1146 1147 Logic TP Sel Logic TP Data Stop Oper TP Sel StopOper TP Data Fault TP Sel Fault TP Data Spd Ref TP Sel Spd Ref TP RPM Spd Ref TP Data Spd Reg TP Sel Spd Reg TP Data Drive OL TP Sel Drive OL TP Data Trq Ref TP Sel Trq Ref TP Data Curr Ref TP Sel Curr Ref TP Data Brake TP Sel Brake TP Data PI TP Sel PI TP Data Posit TP Select PositTP DataDInt PositTP DataReal SL Comm TP Sel SL Comm TP Data Spd Fdbk TP Sel Spd Fdbk TP RPM Spd Fdbk TP Data Steg&Hiedn TPSel Steg&Heidn TPDta Reslvr0 TP Sel Reslvr0 TP Data Linear1 TP Sel Linear1 TP Data Power EE TP Sel Power EE TP Data MC TP1 Select MC TP1 Value MC TP1 Bit MC TP2 Select MC TP2 Value MC FaultTPSelect MC FaultTP Value PLL TP Select PLL TP DataDInt PLL TP DataReal PPMP TP Select PPMP TP DataDInt PPMP TP DataReal
Peak Detection
210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 PeakDtct Ctrl In PeakDtct Status PkDtct1 In DInt PkDtct1 In Real PeakDtct1 Preset PeakDetect1 Out PkDtct2 In DInt PkDtct2 In Real PeakDtct2 Preset PeakDetect2 Out
Trending
556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 Trend Control Trend Status Trend State Trend Rate Trend TrigA DInt Trend TrigA Real Trend TrigB DInt Trend TrigB Real Trend Trig Data Trend Trig Bit Trend PreSamples Trend Mark DInt Trend Mark Real TrendBuffPointer Trend In1 DInt Trend In1 Real Trend Out1 DInt Trend Out1 Real Trend In2 DInt Trend In2 Real Trend Out2 DInt Trend Out2 Real Trend In3 DInt Trend In3 Real Trend Out3 DInt Trend Out3 Real Trend In4 DInt Trend In4 Real Trend Out4 DInt Trend Out4 Real
*Note: This parameter is used by PowerFlex 700L drives only.
3-12
Com
Inputs munic a tion
& Ou
Monit
Moto or
Dyna
r Con
mic C
Spee
ontro l
Proc
Posit io
Utility Spee d/Po sit Fd n Co bk ntrol
User Func tions tputs
trol
Masks & Owners

670 671 672 673 674 677 678 679 680 681 Logic Mask Start Mask Jog Mask Direction Mask Fault Clr Mask Stop Owner Start Owner Jog Owner Direction Owner Fault Clr Owner
DriveLogix I/O
600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 Lgx Comm Format From DL DataType FromDriveLogix00 FromDriveLogix01 FromDriveLogix02 FromDriveLogix03 FromDriveLogix04 FromDriveLogix05 FromDriveLogix06 FromDriveLogix07 FromDriveLogix08 FromDriveLogix09 FromDriveLogix10 FromDriveLogix11 FromDriveLogix12 FromDriveLogix13 FromDriveLogix14 FromDriveLogix15 FromDriveLogix16 FromDriveLogix17 FromDriveLogix18 FromDriveLogix19 FromDriveLogix20 To DL DataType To DriveLogix00 To DriveLogix01 To DriveLogix02 To DriveLogix03 To DriveLogix04 To DriveLogix05 To DriveLogix06 To DriveLogix07 To DriveLogix08 To DriveLogix09 To DriveLogix10 To DriveLogix11 To DriveLogix12 To DriveLogix13 To DriveLogix14 To DriveLogix15 To DriveLogix16 To DriveLogix17 To DriveLogix18 To DriveLogix19 To DriveLogix20
SynchLink Config
904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 SL Node Cnfg SL Rx CommFormat SL Rx DirectSel0 SL Rx DirectSel1 SL Rx DirectSel2 SL Rx DirectSel3 SL Tx CommFormat SL Tx DirectSel0 SL Tx DirectSel1 SL Tx DirectSel2 SL Tx DirectSel3 SL Rcv Events SL Clr Events SL Rx P0 Regis SL Rx P1 Regis SL Real2DInt In SL Real2DInt Out SL Mult Base SL Mult A In SL Mult B In SL Mult Out SL Mult State
SynchLink Output
964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 Tx Dir Data Type SL Dir Data Tx00 SL Dir Data Tx01 SL Dir Data Tx02 SL Dir Data Tx03 Tx Buf Data Type SL Buf Data Tx00 SL Buf Data Tx01 SL Buf Data Tx02 SL Buf Data Tx03 SL Buf Data Tx04 SL Buf Data Tx05 SL Buf Data Tx06 SL Buf Data Tx07 SL Buf Data Tx08 SL Buf Data Tx09 SL Buf Data Tx10 SL Buf Data Tx11 SL Buf Data Tx12 SL Buf Data Tx13 SL Buf Data Tx14 SL Buf Data Tx15 SL Buf Data Tx16 SL Buf Data Tx17
DPI Data Links

650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 DPI In DataType DPI Data In A1 DPI Data In A2 DPI Data In B1 DPI Data In B2 DPI Data In C1 DPI Data In C2 DPI Data In D1 DPI Data In D2 DPI Out DataType DPI Data Out A1 DPI Data Out A2 DPI Data Out B1 DPI Data Out B2 DPI Data Out C1 DPI Data Out C2 DPI Data Out D1 DPI Data Out D2
SynchLink Input
928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 Rx Dir Data Type SL Dir Data Rx00 SL Dir Data Rx01 SL Dir Data Rx02 SL Dir Data Rx03 Rx Buf Data Type SL Buf Data Rx00 SL Buf Data Rx01 SL Buf Data Rx02 SL Buf Data Rx03 SL Buf Data Rx04 SL Buf Data Rx05 SL Buf Data Rx06 SL Buf Data Rx07 SL Buf Data Rx08 SL Buf Data Rx09 SL Buf Data Rx10 SL Buf Data Rx11 SL Buf Data Rx12 SL Buf Data Rx13 SL Buf Data Rx14 SL Buf Data Rx15 SL Buf Data Rx16 SL Buf Data Rx17
Security
714 669 712 670 713 Port Mask Act Write Mask Write Mask Act Logic Mask Logic Mask Act
3-13
oces s Co Torqu ntrol Spee e Co ntrol d Co Dyna ntrol mic C Moto ontro r Con l Monit trol or
Pr
Posit io
Spee n Co
d/Po sit Fd bk ntrol
Utility
Com
munic a
Inputs
User
& Ou tputs
Func
tions
tion
Analog Inputs
821 803 801 802 804 805 800 1093 809 807 808 810 811 806 1094 815 813 814 816 817 812 1095 Analog I/O Units Anlg In1 Offset Anlg In1 Value Anlg In1 Scale AI 1 Filt Gain Anlg In1 Filt BW Anlg In1 Data Anlg In1LossCnfg Anlg In2 Offset Anlg In2 Value Anlg In2 Scale AI 2 Filt Gain Anlg In2 Filt BW Anlg In2 Data Anlg In2LossCnfg Anlg In3 Offset Anlg In3 Value Anlg In3 Scale AI 3 Filt Gain Anlg In3 Filt BW Anlg In3 Data Anlg In3LossCnfg
Analog Outputs
821 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 Analog I/O Units Anlg Out1 Sel Anlg Out1 DInt Anlg Out1 Real Anlg Out1 Offset Anlg Out1 Scale Anlg Out1 Zero Anlg Out1 Value Anlg Out2 Sel Anlg Out2 DInt Anlg Out2 Real Anlg Out2 Offset Anlg Out2 Scale Anlg Out2 Zero Anlg Out2 Value
Digital Inputs
823 825 826 827 828 829 830 824 DigIn Debounce Dig In1 Sel Dig In2 Sel Dig In3 Sel Dig In4 Sel Dig In5 Sel Dig In6 Sel Local I/O Status
Digital Outputs
845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 824 Dig Out1 Sel Dig Out1 Data Dig Out1 Bit Dig Out1 On Time Dig Out1 OffTime Dig Out2 Sel Dig Out2 Data Dig Out2 Bit Dig Out2 On Time Dig Out2 OffTime Rly Out3 Sel Rly Out3 Data Rly Out3 Bit Rly Out3 On Time Rly Out3 OffTime Local I/O Status
BitSwap Control
860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 BitSwap 1A Data BitSwap 1A Bit BitSwap 1B Data BitSwap 1B Bit BitSwap 1 Result BitSwap 2A Data BitSwap 2A Bit BitSwap 2B Data BitSwap 2B Bit BitSwap 2 Result BitSwap 3A Data BitSwap 3A Bit BitSwap 3B Data BitSwap 3B Bit BitSwap 3 Result BitSwap 4A Data BitSwap 4A Bit BitSwap 4B Data BitSwap 4B Bit BitSwap 4 Result BitSwap 5A Data BitSwap 5A Bit BitSwap 5B Data BitSwap 5B Bit BitSwap 5 Result BitSwap 6A Data BitSwap 6A Bit BitSwap 6B Data BitSwap 6B Bit BitSwap 6 Result
3-14
Monit or
Moto
Dyna
r Con
mic C
Spee
ontro l
Torqu e Co ntrol d Co ntrol
Proc
ess C
Posit io ontro l
Spee d/Po sit Fd n Co bk ntrol
User Func Inputs tions & Ou Com tputs munic ation Utility
trol
Param & Config

1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 UserFunct Enable UserFunct Actual UserData DInt 01 UserData DInt 02 UserData DInt 03 UserData DInt 04 UserData DInt 05 UserData DInt 06 UserData DInt 07 UserData DInt 08 UserData DInt 09 UserData DInt 10 UserData Real 01 UserData Real 02 UserData Real 03 UserData Real 04 UserData Real 05 UserData Real 06 UserData Real 07 UserData Real 08 UserData Real 09 UserData Real 10
Select Switches
1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 Sel Switch Ctrl Swtch Real 1 NC Swtch Real 1 NO Swtch Real 1 Out Swtch DInt 1 NC Swtch DInt 1 NO Swtch DInt 1 Out Sel Swtch In00 Sel Swtch In01 Sel Swtch In02 Sel Swtch In03 Sel Swtch In04 Sel Swtch In05 Sel Swtch In06 Sel Swtch In07 Sel Swtch In08 Sel Swtch In09 Sel Swtch In10 Sel Swtch In11 Sel Swtch In12 Sel Swtch In13 Sel Swtch In14 Sel Swtch In15 SelSwtch RealOut SelSwtch DIntOut
Math & Logic

1047 1048 1049 1150 1151 1152 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 DInt2Real1 In DInt2Real1 Scale DInt2Real1Result DInt2Real2 In DInt2Real2 Scale DInt2Real2Result Real2DInt In Real2DInt Scale Real2DInt Result MulDiv 1 Input MulDiv 1 Mul MulDiv 1 Div MulDiv 1 Result MulDiv 2 Input MulDiv 2 Mul MulDiv 2 Div MulDiv 2 Result Logic Config Logic/Cmpr State Logic 1A Data Logic 1A Bit Logic 1B Data Logic 1B Bit Logic 2A Data Logic 2A Bit Logic 2B Data Logic 2B Bit Compare 1A Compare 1B Compare 2A Compare 2B AddSub 1 Input AddSub 1 Add AddSub 1 Subtrct AddSub 1 Result AddSub 2 Input AddSub 2 Add AddSub 2 Subtrct AddSub 2 Result AddSub 3 Input AddSub 3 Add AddSub 3 Subtrct AddSub 3 Result
Timers
1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 DelTmr1 TrigData DelTmr1 Trig Bit DelayTimer1PrSet DelayTimer1Accu DelayTimer1Stats DelTmr2 TrigData DelTmr2 Trig Bit DelayTimer2PrSet DelayTimer2Accu DelayTimer2Stats
Electronic Gear Ratio

1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 EGR Config EGR Mul EGR Div EGR Pos Input EGR Pos Output EGR Pos Preset
3-15
Parameter Data in Linear List Format

Read-Write Data Type
RW 16-bit Integer RW Real RW Real RW 16-bit Integer RW 32-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer
No. 1 2 3 4 5
Name Description Motor NP Volts Motor NP FLA
Values
Units: Volt Default: Calculated (1) Min/Max: 75/705 Units: Amps Default: Calculated (1) Min/Max: Calculated/Calculated Units: Hz Default: Calculated (1) Min/Max: 2.0000/500.0000 Units: RPM Default: Calculated (1) Min/Max: 1/30000
Set to the motor nameplate rated volts.
Set to the motor nameplate rated full load amps. Range limited by three-second inverter rating. Set to the motor nameplate rated frequency.
Motor NP Hertz Motor NP RPM
Set to the motor nameplate rated RPM.
Motor NP Power
Units: Hp Set to the motor nameplate rated power. Default: Calculated (1) Note: The unit of measure for this parameter was changed from kW to Hp for firmware version Min/Max: 0.2500/3500.0000 2.03. The power units shown on the motor nameplate.
Mtr NP Pwr Units
Default: 0 = Hp Options: 0 = Hp 1 = kW Units: Pole Default: 4 Min/Max: 2/128
Motor Poles
Set the number of motor poles indicated on the motor nameplate or manufacturer's motor data sheet. Only even numbers of poles are allowed. Calculation: (120 * NP Hz) / NP RPM = Poles {round down} Note: The maximum value was changed from 60 to 128 for firmware version 4.002. Time, in seconds, for a motor coupled to a load to accelerate from zero to base speed, at rated motor torque. Calculated during auto-tune.
9 10 11 12 13 14 20 21
Total Inertia
Units: Sec Default: 2.0000 Min/Max: 0.0100/655.0000 Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000
RW Real RW Real RW Real RW Real RW Real RW Real
Speed Ref 1
Sets the speed reference that the drive should use when selected by Par 27 [Speed Ref A Sel] or Par 28 [Speed Ref B Sel]. A value of 1.0 represents base speed of the motor.
Spd Ref1 Divide Speed Ref 2
Default: 1.0000 Par 10 [Speed Ref 1] is divided by this number. This number can be used to scale the value of Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 Par 10 [Speed Ref 1]. Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000
Sets the speed reference that the drive should use when selected by Par 27 [Speed Ref A Sel] or Par 28 [Speed Ref B Sel]. A value of 1.0 represents base speed of the motor.
Spd Ref2 Multi
Default: 1.0000 Par 12 [Speed Ref 2] is multiplied by this number. This number can be used to scale the value Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 of Par 12 [Speed Ref 2].
through through
Preset Speed 1 Preset Speed 7

Provides an internal fixed speed command value. The preset speeds may be selected with Par 27 [Speed Ref A Sel] or Par 28 [Speed Ref B Sel].
Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale: Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale: Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale:
RPM 0.0000 -/+8.0000 pu Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0 pu RPM 0.0000 -/+14112.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0 pu RPM 0.0000 -/+14112.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0 pu RPM 0.0000 -/+14112.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0 pu
Speed Trim 1
RW Real
Provides an additive trim value to Par 38 [Speed Ref Scale].
22
Speed Trim 2
RW Real
Provides an additive speed trim value to Par 47 [SpdRef + SpdTrm1] with a Lead/Lag filter. The Position regulator output is linked to this parameter by default. This speed trim value affects the speed reference input to the speed regulator.
23
Speed Trim 3
Units: Provides a scalable speed trim value that will be added to Par 47 [SpdRef + SpdTrm1]. Par 24 Default: [SpdTrim 3 Scale] scales this value prior to the trim value affecting the speed reference. Min/Max: Scale:
RW Real
24
(1)
Par 23 [Speed Trim 3] is multiplied by this number. This number can be used to scale the value of Par 23 [Speed Trim 3]. The calculation is based on the drive frame size and input voltage
SpdTrim 3 Scale
Default: 1.0000 Min/Max: -/+1000.0000
RW Real
The calculation is based on the drive frame size and input voltage.
Linkable
3-16
No. 25 26 27 28
Default: 1.0000 Sets the lead term for the Par 22 [Speed Trim 2] filter. Values greater than 1 will result in a lead Min/Max: -/+15.0000 function and value less than 1 will result in a lag function. A value of 1 will disable the filter. Sets the frequency for the Speed Trim 2 filter.
Name Description STrim2 Filt Gain
Values
RW Real RW Real
SpdTrim2 Filt BW
Units: R/S Default: 200.0000 Min/Max: 0.0000/1000.0000
Default A: 1 = Spd Ref 1 Default B: 5 = Preset Spd 1 Selects the speed reference source for the drive. The selected speed reference values converge in the final selection of the drives speed reference with Par 152 [Applied LogicCmd] Options: 0 = Zero Speed 1 = Speed Ref 1 and are selected with bits 28, 29, 30. 2 = Speed Ref 2 See the Block Diagrams in Appendix B for a description. 3 = Sum Sref 1+2 4 = MOP Level 5 = Preset Spd 1 6 = Preset Spd 2 7 = Preset Spd 3 8 = Preset Spd 4 Units: Jog Speed 1 Sets the speed reference that the drive should use when responding to bit 18 [Jog 1] of Par Default: 152 [Applied LogicCmd]. Min/Max: Scale: Sets the minimum speed reference limit. This value may be negative or positive but not greater than Par 31 [Max Spd Ref Lim].
Speed Ref A Sel Speed Ref B Sel
9 = Preset Spd 5 10 = Preset Spd 6 11 = Preset Spd 7 12 = DPI Port 1 13 = DPI Port 2 14 = DPI Port 3 15 = Reserved 16 = DPI Port 5 RW Real
29
RPM 0.0000 -/+8.0000 pu Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0 pu RPM 0.0000 -8.0000/Par 31 [Max Spd Ref Lim] Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0 pu RPM 0.0000 Par 30 [Min Spd Ref Lim]/8.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0 pu
30
Min Spd Ref Lim
RW Real
31
Units: Max Spd Ref Lim Sets the maximum speed reference limit. This value may be negative or positive but not less Default: than Par 30 [Min Spd Ref Lim]. Min/Max: Scale:
RW Real
32 33 34
Accel Time 1 Decel Time 1
Sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases, with time in seconds to base speed. Accel Rate = Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] / Par 32 [Accel Time] Sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases, with time in seconds to base speed. Decel Rate = Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] / Par 33 [Decel Time]
Units: Sec Default: 10.0000 Min/Max: 0.0100/6553.5000 Units: Sec Default: 10.0000 Min/Max: 0.0100/6553.5000
RW Real RW Real RW Real
S Curve Time
Units: Sec Sets the S time (Round In and Round Out ) in seconds. Half of the time specified is added to Default: 0.5000 the beginning and half to the end of the applied ramp. The S time is independent of speed and Min/Max: 0.0000/4.0000 results in a trapezoidal torque profile. For example:
Speed
Time in Seconds
0.5 sec. 0.5 sec.
Accel Time = 5.0 seconds S Curve Time = 1.0 second Total Ramp Time = 6.0 seconds
35 36 37
Default: 1.0000 SpdRef Filt Gain Sets the lead term for the Speed Reference filter. Values greater than 1 will result in a lead Min/Max: -/+5.0000 function and values less than 1 will result in a lag function. A value of 1 will disable the filter. Sets the frequency for the Speed Reference filter.
SpdRef Filt BW
Units: R/S Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: 0.0000/500.0000 Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale: RPM 0.0000 -/+14112.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0 pu
The speed command after the limit, ramp and s-curve blocks. Link a source directly to this parameter to bypass these blocks.
Spd Ref Bypass
38
Speed Ref Scale
This parameter is multiplied with the value in Par 37 [Spd Ref Bypass].
Default: 1.0000 Min/Max: -/+1000.0000
RW Real
Linkable
3-17
No. 39
Name Description Jog Speed 2
Values
RPM 0.0000 -/+8.0000 pu Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0 pu RPM 0.0000 -/+8.0000 pu Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0 pu RPM 0.0000 -/+8.0000 pu Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0 pu
Units: Sets the speed reference that the drive should use when responding to bit 23 [Jog 2] of Par Default: 152 [Applied LogicCmd]. Min/Max: Scale:
RW Real
40
Selected Spd Ref
Displays the speed command before the speed reference limit block.
RO Real
41
Units: Limited Spd Ref Displays the speed command after the limit block, limited by Par 30 [Min Spd Ref Lim] and Par Default: 31 [Max Spd Ref Lim]. Min/Max: Scale:
RO Real
42 43
Jerk
Allows you to adjust the amount of S-Curve or "Jerk" applied to the Accel/Decel rate. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03.
Default: 900 Min/Max: 2/30000 RPM 0.0000 -/+8.0000 pu Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0 pu RPM 0.0000 -/+14112.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0 pu RPM 0.0000 -/+14112.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0 pu RPM 0.0000 -/+8.0000 pu Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0 pu RPM 0.0000 -/+8.0000 pu Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0 pu
RW 16-bit Integer RO Real
Ramped Spd Ref
Units: Displays the speed command after the ramp block, modified by Par 32 [Accel Time 1], Par 33 Default: [Decel Time 1] and Par 34 [S Curve Time]. Min/Max: Scale: Units: Delayed Spd Ref One sample period delayed output of Par 43 [Ramped Spd Ref]. Used in some applications to Default: synchronize the speed reference value through SynchLink. This master drive Par 43 [Ramped Min/Max: Spd Ref] would then be transmitted to the slave drives over SynchLink. Scale: Displays the speed command after scaling.
45
RO Real
46
Scaled Spd Ref
Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale: Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale: Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale:
RO Real
47
SpdRef + Spd Trm1
RO Real
Displays the final speed command used by the Speed Regulator. It is the sum of Par 46 [Scaled Spd Ref] and Par 21 [Speed Trim 1].
48
The speed command after the limit, ramp and s-curve blocks. Link a source directly to this parameter to bypass these blocks.
Spd Ref Bypass2
RW Real
49
Used to view the value of Speed Reference A, Par 27 [Speed Ref A Sel] from a Human Interface Module (HIM). Note: This parameter is new for firmware version 3.01. Used to view the value of Speed Reference B, Par 28 [Speed Ref B Sel] from a HIM. Note: This parameter is new for firmware version 3.01.
Selected SpdRefA
Units: RPM Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+8.0000 Units: RPM Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+8.0000 Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+262144
RO Real
50 53
Selected SpdRefB
RO Real
Drive Ramp Rslt
Displays the speed reference value, after the limit function. This is the input to the error calculator and speed regulator. Available for use in peer-to-peer data links (DPI interface). This number is scaled so that rated motor speed will read 32768.
RO 32-bit Integer RW Real
54
Units: R/S Inertia TrqLpfBW Sets the bandwidth of the inertia compensation torque output low pass filter. A value of 0.0 will Default: 35.0000 disable the filter. Min/Max: 0.0000 /2000.0000 Note: This parameter is new for firmware version 3.01.
55
Speed Comp
Units: /Sec Displays the derivative or change in Par 56 [Inertia SpeedRef] on a per second basis. Link this Default: 0.0000 parameter to Par 23 [Speed Trim 3] and set Par 24 [SpdTrim 3 Scale] to 0.002 to reduce Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 position error in following applications. The speed input of the inertia compensator. Link this parameter to the output of an internal ramp or s-curve block. The inertia compensator generates a torque reference that is proportional to the rate of change of speed input and total inertia.
RO Real
56
Inertia SpeedRef
RPM 0.0000 -/+14112.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0 pu
RW Real
57 58 59
InertiaAccelGain InertiaDecelGain Inertia Trq Add
Default: 1.0000 Sets the acceleration gain for the Inertia Compensation function. A value of 1 produces 100% Min/Max: 1.0000/2.0000 compensation. Default: 1.0000 Sets the deceleration gain for the Inertia Compensation function. A value of 1 produces 100% Min/Max: 1.0000/2.0000 compensation. Units: P.U. Default: 1.0000 Min/Max: -/+8.0000 pu
RW Real RW Real
RO Real
The torque reference output generated by the inertia compensator. This torque level is modified by Par 57 [InertiaAccelGain] and Par 58 [InertiaDecelGain]. A value of 1.0 represents rated torque of the motor.
Linkable
3-18
No. 60 61
Default: 1.0000 Multiplier in the Inertia Compensation function - affects the value of Par 59 [Inertia Trq Add]. Min/Max: -/+1000.0000 Use in center winder and unwind applications to compensate for roll diameter build-up.
Name Description DeltaSpeedScale
Values
RW Real
Virt Encoder EPR
Units: EPR Equivalent Edges Per Revolution (EPR) or line count of a virtual encoder. A virtual encoder is Default: 4096 a position reference whose input comes from speed reference. It accumulates pulses at the Min/Max: 10/67108864 same rate as a real encoder of identical Pulses Per Revolution (PPR). Enter the equivalent PPR. For example, enter 1024 PPR to match an encoder with 1024 EPR. Default: 0 A 32 bit pulse accumulator of the virtual encoder. The accumulated pulse count is equivalent Min/Max: -/+2147483648 to the hardware accumulator of a real encoder. It accumulates at a rate of 4x the value placed in Par 61 [Virt Encoder EPR]. The accumulator starts at zero upon position enable.
RW 32-bit Integer
62
Virt Encdr Posit
RO 32-bit Integer
63
Default: 0 Virt Encdr Dlyed One sample period delayed output of Par 62 [Virt Encdr Posit]. Used in some applications to Min/Max: -/+2147483648 phase synchronize position reference through SynchLink. The master is delayed one sample while the downstream drives update their position references then all drives sample position simultaneously. The downstream drives do not select a delay. Units: RPM FricComp Spd Ref Supplies a speed input to the Friction Compensation algorithm. This input is normally a speed Default: 0.0000 reference from a motion planner or ramped speed reference. It will trigger a torque feed Min/Max: -/+8.0000 pu forward response depending on its value. Default: 325 FricComp Setup Enter or write a value to configure the friction compensation algorithm. This is a packed word Min/Max: 0/999 of 3 digits. Each digit has a possible selection of 10 levels. The least significant digit sets the speed threshold in intervals of 0.0005 pu speed. The next (middle) digit sets the hysteresis band for the units digit in intervals of 0.0005 pu velocity. The most significant digit sets the number of time steps from stick to slip, each step is 0.002 sec. Example: Value = 524 means: 5 time steps between stick and slip, each of 0.002 sec. duration, 2 counts of hysteresis or 0.001 pu_speed (each count is 0.0005 pu_speed), and 4 counts or 0.002 pu_speed is the trigger threshold (each count is 0.0005 pu_speed).
RO 32-bit Integer
64
RW Real
65
RW 16-bit Integer
66 67 68
The torque needed to break away from zero speed. By nature of friction, the break away sticktion will always be greater than the running friction.
FricComp Stick
Units: P.U. Default: 0.1500 Min/Max: 0.0000/8.0000
Units: P.U. FricComp Slip The torque level to sustain very low speed once break away has been achieved. By nature Default: 0.1000 of friction, viscous friction will always be less than sticktion. Min/Max: 0.0000/8.0000 Units: P.U. FricComp Rated The torque needed to keep the motor running at base speed and with no process loading. The Default: 0.2000 friction compensation algorithm assumes a linear or viscous component of friction between Min/Max: 0.0000/8.0000 Par 67 [FricComp Slip] and Par 68 [FricComp Rated]. Units: FricComp Trq Add The torque reference output of the Friction Compensation function. A value of 1.0 represents Default: rated torque of the motor. Min/Max: Scale: Displays the motor speed feedback value output from the feedback Lead/Lag filter. P.U. 0.0000 -/+8.0000 pu Motor P.U. Torque RPM 0.0000 -/+14112.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0 pu
69
RO Real
71
Filtered SpdFdbk
RO Real
72 73 74
Default: 0.0000 Scaled Spd Fdbk Displays the product of the speed feedback and Par 73 [Spd Fdbk Scale]. This parameter is Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 for display only. Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0 pu A user-adjustable scale factor (multiplier) for speed feedback. It is multiplied with speed feedback to produce Par 72 [Scaled Spd Fdbk]. Sets the maximum speed of the motor during the Flux current and inertia tests.
RO Real RW Real
Spd Fdbk Scale
Default: 1.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale: RPM Par 4 * 0.8500 Par 4 * 0.1000/Par 4 * 1.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0 pu RPM Par 4 * -1.2500 -8.0000/0.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0 pu RPM Par 4 * 1.2500 0.0000/8.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0 pu
Atune Spd Ref
RW Real
75
Rev Speed Limit
Units: Sets a limit on the speed reference in the negative direction. This value can be entered as a Default: negative value or zero. The maximum value equals Par 532 [Maximum Freq] * 0.95. Min/Max: Scale: Sets a limit on the speed reference in the positive direction. This value can be entered as a positive value or zero. The maximum value equals Par 532 [Maximum Freq] * 0.95.
RW Real
76
Fwd Speed Limit
RW Real
Linkable
3-19
No. 77
Name Description Spd Ref TP Sel
Values
Default: 0 = Zero Enter or write a value to select speed reference data displayed in Par 79 [Spd Ref TP Data] Options: 0 = Zero and Par 78 [Spd Ref TP RPM]. 1 = User Ref Note: The values for options 7, 8, & 9 were changed to Reserved for firmware version 2.04. 2 = Logic Select 3 = Lgc Sel Ref 4 = Ramp Spd Ref 5 = Ramp In 6 = Filt Spd Ref 7 = Reserved 8 = Reserved 9 = Reserved 10 = Amp Lim Stat 11 = Ramp Match Displays the value selected in Par 77 [Spd Ref TP Sel] in RPM. This display should only be used if the selected value is floating point data. Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale:
12 = S Crv Match 13 = S Array size 14 = S Array Indx 15 = Reserved 16 = Scl Ext Trim 17 = Trim FiltOut 18 = Ref w/Trim 19 = Amp Lim2 In 20 = Amp LimStat2 21 = Amp Lim2 Out 22 = FTD Ramp Out 23 = Reserved RO Real
78
Spd Ref TP RPM
RPM 0.0000 -/+8.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0 pu
79 81
Spd Ref TP Data Spd Reg P Gain
Default: 0 Displays the value selected in Par 77 [Spd Ref TP Sel]. This display should only be used if the Min/Max: -/+32768 selected value is integer data. Default: 20.0000 Sets the proportional gain of the speed regulator. This value is automatically calculated Min/Max: 0.0000/3000.0000 based on the bandwidth setting in Par 90 [Spd Reg BW]. Proportional gain may be manually adjusted by setting Par 90 [Spd Reg BW] to a value of zero. Units are (per unit torque) / (per unit speed). The maximum value for Par 81 [Spd Reg P Gain] = Par 90 [Spd Reg BW] * Par 9 [Total Inertia] Total Inertia Maximum Speed Regulator (Par 9) Bandwidth (Par 90) 0.01 0.01 0.01 2.0 2.0 2.0 475 (0.5 mSec) 650 (0.25 mSec) 30 (sensorless mode) 475 (0.5 mSec) 650 (0.25 mSec) 30 (sensorless mode) Maximum Speed Regulator Proportional Gain (Par 81) 4.75 6.50 0.03 950 1300 60
Note: The Max. value was increased from 600.0000 for firmware version 3.01.
82
Units: /Sec Spd Reg I Gain Sets the integral gain of the speed regulator. This value is automatically calculated based on Default: 50.0000 the bandwidth setting in Par 90 [Spd Reg BW]. Integral gain may be manually adjusted by Min/Max: 0.0000/100000.0000 setting Par 90 [Spd Reg BW] to a value of zero. Units are (per unit torque/sec) / (per unit speed).
RW Real
84
SpdReg AntiBckup
Default: 0.0000 By setting this parameter to 0.3, the drive will not over shoot to a step response. This Min/Max: 0.0000/0.5000 parameter has no affect on the drive's response to load changes. The recommended setting is 0.1000 to 0.5000. Note: This parameter was changed to non-linkable for firmware version 3.01.
Over-Shoot
RW Real
Over-Shoot Error
Reference Feedback, SpdReg AntiBckup = 0.0 Feedback, SpdReg AntiBckup = 0.3 Under-Shoot
Error
Under-Shoot
Linkable
3-20
No. 85
Units: /Sec Sets the gain of an additional integrator in the speed regulator. The effect of Servo Lock is to Default: 0.0000 increase stiffness of the speed response to a load disturbance. It behaves like a position Min/Max: 0.0000/300.0000 regulator with velocity feed forward, but without the pulse accuracy of a true position regulator. The units of Servo Lock are rad/sec. Gain should normally be set to less than 1/3 speed regulator bandwidth, or for the desired response. Set to zero to disable Servo Lock. Units: P.U. Spd Reg Droop Specifies the amount of base speed that the speed reference is reduced when at full load Default: 0.0000 torque. Use the droop function to cause the motor speed to decrease with an increase in load. Min/Max: 0.0000/0.2500 The units are per unit speed / per unit torque. When the drive is not enabled, this parameter presets integrator output Par 101 [SpdReg Integ Out] to a specified torque level. This ensures that the torque command will be at the preset value when the drive is enabled and run. Par 153 [Control Options], bit 18 [SpdRegPreset] = 0, enables this preset.
Name Description Servo Lock Gain
Values
RW Real
86
RW Real
87
SReg Trq Preset
Units: P.U. Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+8.0000 pu
RW 16-bit Integer
89
Spd Err Filt BW
Sets the bandwidth of a 2nd order Butterworth low pass filter, which reduces quantization noise. The units are rad/sec. A value of 0 will disable the filter. The value should be greater than 5 times the value of Par 90 [Spd Reg BW]. Note: The default value for this parameter was changed from 200.0000 to 700.0000 for firmware version 2.03.
RW Real
90
Spd Reg BW
Units: R/S Sets the bandwidth of the speed regulator in rad/sec. Bandwidth is also referred to as the Default: 10.0000 crossover frequency. Small signal time response is approximately 1/BW and is the time to Min/Max: 0.0000/500.0000 reach 63% of set point. A change to this parameter will cause an automatic update of Par 81 [Spd Reg P Gain] and Par 82 [Spd Reg I Gain]. To disable the automatic gain calculation, set this parameter to a value of zero. Default: 1.0000 Sets the damping factor of the drive's characteristic equation and factors in the calculation of Min/Max: 0.5000/3.0000 the integral gain. A damping factor of 1.0 is considered critical damp. Lowering the damping will produce faster load disturbance rejection, but may cause a more oscillatory response. When Par 90 [Spd Reg BW] is set to zero, damping factor has no effect.
RW Real
91
Spd Reg Damping
RW Real
92
SpdReg P Gain Mx
Default: 100.0000 Places a limit on the maximum value of proportional gain in Par 81 [Spd Reg P Gain] and Par Min/Max: 0.0000/3000.0000 104 [Srlss Spd Reg Kp]. When gains are automatically calculated, this parameter is necessary to limit the amplification of noise with increased inertia. Note: The Max. value was increased from 600.0000 for firmware version 3.01. Default: 1.0000 SRegFB Filt Gain Sets the lead term for the speed feedback filter. Values greater than 1 will result in a lead Min/Max: -5.0000/20.0000 function and values less than 1 will result in a lag function. A value of 1 will disable the filter. Sets the frequency for the Speed Feedback filter.
RW Real
93 94 95
SReg FB Filt BW
Default: 1.0000 SRegOut FiltGain Sets the lead term for the Speed Regulator output filter. Values greater than 1 will result in a Min/Max: -/+5.0000 lead function and values less than 1 will result in a lag function. A value of 1 will disable the filter. Note: The default value for this parameter was changed from 0.7000 to 1.0000 for firmware version 2.03. Sets the frequency for the Speed Regulator output filter.
96 97
SReg Out Filt BW
RW Real
Act Spd Reg BW
Units: R/S Displays the actual speed regulator bandwidth or crossover frequency. The value represents Default: 10.0000 the bandwidth in Par 90 [Spd Reg BW] after the maximum bandwidth limits have been Min/Max: 0.0000/500.0000 applied. Sets the amount of compensation to drive output at motor full load current (FLA). Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03. Sets the response time of slip compensation. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03.
RO Real
98 99 100
Slip RPM @ FLA Slip Comp Gain
Units: RPM Default: Based on [Motor NP RPM] Min/Max: 0.0/1200.0 RPM Units: R/S Default: 40.0 Min/Max: 1.0/100.0 Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale: Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale: RPM 0.0000 -/+14112.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0 pu P.U. 0.0000 -/+8.0000 pu 1.0 PU Torque
RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RO Real
Speed Error
The error (difference) between the motor speed reference (+) and the filtered motor speed feedback (-).
101
The output value of the Speed Regulator Integral channel.
SpdReg Integ Out
RO Real
Linkable
3-21
No. 102
Name Description Spd Reg Pos Lim
Values
P.U. 3.0000 0.0000/6.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0 pu P.U. -3.0000 -6.0000/0.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0 pu
Units: Sets the positive limit of the Speed Regulator output value. The output of the Speed Regulator Default: is limited by adjustable high and low limits. Min.Max: Scale:\ Units: Spd Reg Neg Lim Sets the negative limit of the Speed Regulator output value. The output of the Speed regulator Default: is limited by adjustable high and low limits. Min/Max: Scale:
RW Real
103
RW Real
104
Default: 8.0000 SrLss Spd Reg Kp Sets the proportional gain of the Speed Regulator when sensorless motor speed feedback is Min/Max: 0.0000/200.0000 used. This value is automatically calculated based on the bandwidth set in Par 106 [Srlss Spd Reg BW]. Proportional gain may be manually adjusted by setting Par 106 to zero. This gain setting has no units (per unit torque) / (per unit speed error). Units: /Sec SrLss Spd Reg Ki Sets the integral gain of the Speed Regulator when sensorless motor speed feedback is used. Default: 8.0000 This value is automatically calculated based on the bandwidth set in Par 106 [Srlss Spd Reg Min/Max: 0.0000/4095.8000 BW]. Integral gain may be manually adjusted by setting Par 106 to zero. Units are '/Sec' (per unit torque/sec) / (per unit speed error). Units: R/S SrLss Spd Reg BW Sets the bandwidth of the Speed Regulator when sensorless motor speed feedback is used. Default: 10.0000 Bandwidth is also referred to as the crossover frequency. Small integral time response is Min/Max: 0.0000/30.0000 approximately 1/BW and is the time to reach 63% of set point. A change to this parameter will cause an automatic update of Par 104 [Srlss Spd Reg Kp] and Par 105 [Srlss Spd Reg Ki]. To disable the automatic gain calculation, set this parameter to zero. Displays the present amount of adjustment being applied as slip compensation. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03.
RW Real
105
RW Real
106
RW Real
107 108
Slip RPM Meter
Units: RPM Default: 0.0 Min/Max: +/- 3000.0
RO 16-bit Integer
Default: 0 = Zero Spd Reg TP Sel Enter or write a value to select Speed Regulator data displayed in Par 109 [Spd Reg TP Data]. Options: 0 = Zero Note: The values for options 10 & 11 were changed to Reserved for firmware version 2.04. 1 = Iq Rate BW 2 = Reserved 3 = PGain Max BW 4 = BW Limit 5 = InertiaMaxBW 6 = BW Lim Stat 7 = BW Select 8 = Totl Inertia 9 = TI Lim Stat 10 = Reserved 11 = Reserved 12 = I Rate Limit 13 = I RtLim Stat 14 = PGain Max 15 = GnMx LimStat 16 = Damping 17 = Dmp Lim Stat 18 = Reserved 19 = Srls KpMxBW 20 = Srls BWLimit 21 = SrlsInrtMxBW 22 = SrlsBWSelect 23 = Srls BW Calc 24 = Snsr BW Calc 25 = Reserved 26 = Reserved Displays the data selected by Par 108 [Spd Reg TP Sel].
27 = Spd FiltOut 28 = Servo Lock 29 = Spd+ServLock 30 = Prop Output 31 = Intg Input 32 = Scld Int Pre 33 = Sel Int Pre 34 = Droop Output 35 = Out Lim Stat 36 = Intg Hold 37 = Srlss ZeroWe 38 = I GainParLim 39 = P GainParLim 40 = SrvLck ParLm 41 = AntiBkup PLm 42 = Droop ParLim 43 = Pos Lim Stat 44 = Neg Lim Stat 45 = Limiter Out 46 = Active Pgain 47 = Active Igain 48 = Reserved 49 = Reserved 50 = Reserved 51 = Reserved 52 = Reserved 53 = Reserved RO Real
109 110
Spd Reg TP Data
Units: P.U. Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+8.0000 pu Default: 1 = Options: 0 = 1= 2= 3= 4= Speed Reg Zero Torque Speed Reg Torque Ref Min Spd/Trq Max Spd/Trq 5= 6= 7= 8=
Selects the source for the drive torque reference. Note: Values 7 & 8 were added for firmware version 3.01.
Speed/TorqueMode
Sum Spd/Trq AbsMnSpd/Trq SLAT Minimum SLAT Maximum RW Real RW Real
111 112
Supplies an external motor torque reference to the drive. This parameter is divided by the value in Par 112 [Torq Ref1 Div]. A value of 1.0 represents rated torque of the motor.
Torque Ref 1
Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 Scale: 1.0 Rated Motor Torque
Default: 1.0000 Torque Ref1 Div Par 111 [Torque Ref 1] is divided by this number. Use this parameter to scale the value of Par Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 111 [Torque Ref 1].
Linkable
3-22
Linkable Read-Write
P.U. 0.0000 -/+8.0000 pu 1.0 Rated Motor Torque
No. 113 114 115
Default: 0.0000 Supplies an external motor torque reference to the drive. This parameter is multiplied by the Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 Scale: 1.0 Rated Motor Torque value in Par 114 [Torq Ref2 Mult]. A value of 1.0 represents rated torque of the motor. Default: 1.0000 Torque Ref2 Mult Par 113 [Torque Ref 2] is multiplied by this number. Use this parameter to scale the value of Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 Par 113 [Torque Ref 2]. Units: P.U. Torque Trim The amount added to Par 111 [Torque Ref 1] and Par 113 [Torque Ref 2] before the Speed/ Default: 0.0000 Torque Mode Selector. A value of 1.0 represents rated torque of the motor. Min/Max: -/+8.0000 pu Scale: 1.0 Rated Motor Torque The amount added to the selected Torque Reference before notch filtering or limits are applied. A value of 1.0 represents rated torque of the motor.
Name Description Torque Ref 2
Values
116
Torque Step
RW Real
117
NotchAttenuation
Default: 50 Sets the depth for the Notch Filter. Attenuation is the ratio of the output to the input at the Min/Max: 0/500 th of the input at the notch frequency. An attenuation of 30 means that the notch output is 1/30 specified frequency. Calculation: Attenuation = Input / Output
RW Real
Attenuation
Freq (Hz)
118 119
The center frequency for Notch filter. To disable, set to zero (0).
Notch Filt Freq
Units: Hz Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: 0.0000/500.0000 Units: RPM Default: 0.005 Min/Max: 0.0/0.1
RW Real RW Real
Determines the RPMs at which the drive will switch from speed mode to the Speed Limited Adjustable Torque (SLAT) min. or SLAT max. mode, identified in Par 110 [Speed/Torque Mode] bit 7 SLAT Minimum or bit 8 SLAT Maximum. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
SLAT ErrorSetpnt
120
Units: Sec SLAT Dwell Time SLAT control dwell time. The time in seconds that the drive can be above the error setpoint in Default: 0.0 Min/Max: 0.0/2.0 Par 119 [SLAT ErrorSetpnt] before returning to the SLAT min. or SLAT max. mode. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Units: P.U. Trq PosLim Actl Sets the internal torque limit for positive torque reference values. The positive internal motor Default: 1.0 torque will not be allowed to exceed this value. Min/Max: 0.0/8.0 Units: P.U. Trq NegLim Actl Sets the internal torque limit for negative torque reference values. The internal negative motor Default: -1.0 torque will not be allowed to exceed this value. Min/Max: -8.0/0.0 Units: P.U. Torque Pos Limit Sets the external torque limit for positive torque reference values. The external positive motor Default: 2.0000 torque will not be allowed to exceed this value. Min/Max: 0.0000/8.0000 Sets the external torque limit for negative torque reference values. The external negative motor torque will not be allowed to exceed this value.
RW Real
123 124 125 126 127
RO Real
RO Real RW Real RW Real RW Real
Torque Neg Limit
Units: P.U. Default: -2.0000 Min/Max: -8.0000/0.0000
Units: P.U. Mtring Power Lim Sets the maximum motoring (positive) power of the drive. This can be calculated by Default: 8.0000 multiplying the desired maximum motor torque and the maximum motor speed. A value of 1.0 Min/Max: 0.0000/8.0000 = nominal motor power. Units: P.U. Regen Power Lim Sets the maximum regenerative (negative) power of the drive. This can be calculated by Default: -0.5000 multiplying the desired maximum motor torque and the maximum motor speed. A value of 1.0 Min/Max: -8.0000/0.0000 = nominal motor power. Note: The default value for this parameter was changed from -1.0000 to -0.5000 for firmware version 2.03. Units: P.U. Atune Trq Ref Sets the motor torque that is applied to the motor during the flux current and inertia tests. Default: 0.50 Note: The minimum value for this parameter was changed from 0.2500 to 0.2000 for firmware Min/Max: 0.2/1.0 version 2.03. Scale: 1.0 = P.U. Motor to Torque
128
RW Real
129
RW Real
Data Type
3-23
Linkable Read-Write
16 = Neg Lim Src 17 = MPwr Par Lim 18 = RPwr Par Lim 19 = +Trq ParLim 20 = -Trq ParLim 21 = Nom Bus Volt 22 = Bus Volt Hys 23 = Bus Reg Ref 24 = Bus Reg Err 25 = Bus Reg Intg 26 = BusReg Clamp 27 = BusRegOutput 28 = IAA Filt Out 29 = IAA dVf/dt 30 = MC Trq Lim 31 = IqActlTrqLim P.U. 0.0 -/+8.0 pu 1.0 = P.U. Motor to Torque
No. 130
Name Description Trq Ref TP Sel
Values
Default: 0 = Zero Enter or write a value to select torque reference data displayed in Par 131 [Trq Ref TP Data]. Options: 0 = Zero Note: The value for option 5 was changed to Reserved for firmware version 2.04. 1 = Scale Output 2 = Spd Torque 3 = Trq Mode Out 4 = Actv TrqMode 5 = Reserved 6 = Trq En Input 7 = NotchFiltOut 8 = NotchFilt In 9 = Trq Lim In 10 = Bus Reg Out 11 = Pos Pwr Lim 12 = Neg Pwr Lim 13 = Pos Atun Trq 14 = Neg Atun Trq 15 = Pos Lim Src Displays the data selected by Par 130 [Trq Ref TP Sel].
131
Trq Ref TP Data
RO Real
132
Inert Adapt Sel
Configures the Inertia Adaptation Algorithm (IAA Function). Bit 0 Inrtia Adapt when set to 1 (on), the Inertia Adaptation function will effect enhanced stability, higher bandwidths and dynamic stiffness. Useful when systems with a gear-box becomes disconnected from the load. Also used with motors that have very little inertia that otherwise lack dynamic stiffness, even at high bandwidths. Bit 1 Load Est when set to 1 (on), the Load Estimate option removes or greatly reduces load disturbances and gives quicker system response. Bit 2 First Diff selects the first difference feedback for Inertia Adaptation. Notes: When setting both Bit 0 & 1, stability is enhanced and load disturbances are removed. Bit 2 First Diff was added for firmware version 3.01. Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Load Est Options Inrtia Adapt First Diff
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True RW Real
133
Inert Adapt BW
Units: R/S This parameter sets the bandwidth of the Inertia Adaptation function when the IAA function is Default: 100.0000 selected (Par 132 [Inert Adapt Sel], bit 0 = 1). Typical IAA bandwidths range from 70 to 150 Min/Max: 10.0000/250.0000 rad/sec with 100 rad/sec nominal best.
If the Load Estimate function is selected (Par 132 [Inert Adapt Sel], bit 0 = 1), then this parameter sets the natural frequency of a filter in rad/sec. Typical values range from 10 to 150 rad/sec with higher values being more responsive to disturbances but with increased system noise. There is no nominal best value, but 40 rad/sec is a suggested starting point. This adjustment may not function well in 'sloppy' geared systems. If both Inertia Adaptation and Load Estimate functions are active, use a bandwidth setting of 100 rad/sec.
134
This parameter sets a multiplier of system inertia when the Inertia Adaptation function is selected (Par 132 [Inert Adapt Sel], bit 0 = 1). Higher values may cause high frequency ringing, while smaller values may cause fundamental load instability. A typical value is 0.5 This parameter has no affect on the Load Estimate function.
Inert Adapt Gain
Default: 0.500 Min/Max: 0.300/1.000
RW Real
136 137 138
Skip Speed 1 Skip Speed 2 Skip Speed 3
Units: RPM Default: 0.0 Min/Max: /+30000.0
RW 16-bit Integer
Sets a frequency at which the drive will not operate. [Skip Speed 1 - 3] and Par 139 [Skip Speed Band] must not equal 0. Note: These parameters were added for firmware version 2.03. Units: RPM Skip Speed Band Determines the bandwidth around a skip frequency. [Skip Speed Band] is split, applying 1/2 Default: 0.0 above and 1/2 below the actual skip frequency. The same bandwidth applies to all skip Min/Max: 0.0/1000.0 frequencies. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03. RW 16-bit Integer
139
Data Type
3-24
Linkable Read-Write
EmbeddedENET 0 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 DPI Comm Brd StegmannHiRs SynchLinkBrd 2nd Encoder SafeOff Brd Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0.5 /2 /8ms 0.5 /2 /8ms 0.5 /1 /8ms 0.25 /1 /8ms Lim/Func Gen FrictionComp Process Trim Inertia Comp Virt Encoder Spd Ref Ctrl 0 1 8 1 7 0 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 Spd Ref Sel Speed Reg Reserved Reserved Lim/Func Gen FrictionComp Process Trim Inertia Comp Virt Encoder Spd Ref Ctrl 0 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 Spd Ref Sel Speed Reg Reserved Reserved 6 = Test Done 7 = EnableHealth 8 = Slip Test 9 = Finding Home 10 = Homing Done
No. 145
Indicates if optional hardware is installed. TemposonFdbk Options Stahl Fdbck DriveLogix Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Resolver Brd Heidenhain
Name Description Hardware Present
Values
Default Bit
MDI Brd
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True RW 16-bit Integer
146
FW TaskTime Sel
Default: 0 = Sets the scan times for the drive firmware. Changing the firmware scan times will affect drive Options: 0 = performance. Faster scan times may allow for higher bandwidth of the internal regulators. To 1= achieve faster scan times some functions may need to be disabled. Only the most demanding 2= application may benefit from faster scan times. Typically, adjusting this parameter is not needed, it is recommended you consult the factory before changing.
147
Allows specific firmware functions to be disabled. When a bit is false, the associated function is disabled and all related parameters will be hidden. When a bit is true, the associated function is enabled and all related parameters will be displayed. Notes: Bits 18, 20, & 21 were changed to Reserved for firmware version 2.04. Bit 19 MotinPlanner and 24 PhaseLockLp were added for firmware version 3.01. Phase LockLp PosWtch/Dtct MotinPlanner Analog Outs DI BitSwaps Options DvlpmntDeBug Peak Detect Sync Gener Digital Outs PositionCtrl Test Points Analog Ins
FW Functions En
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default Bit
Reserved
Trending
PF700S
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True RO 16-bit Integer
148
FW TaskTime Actl
Default: 0 = 0.5 /2 /8ms Displays the actual firmware scan times selected by Par 146 [FW TaskTime Sel]. Before the Options: 0 = 0.5 /2 /8ms change to the firmware scan time is accepted, the drive evaluates the change to ensure the 1 = 0.5 /1 /8ms processor will not be overloaded. If there is risk of overloading the processor, the change will 2 = 0.25 /1 /8ms not be accepted. 3 = 0.25 /0.5 /8ms 4 = 0.1/0.5 /8ms 5 = 0.5/1 /2ms 6 = 0.25 /1 /2ms 7 = 0.25 /0.5 /2ms 8 = 0.1/0.5 /2ms
149
Displays the actual state of the firmware functions. If activating requested functions could overload the processor, the change to Par 147 [FW Functions En] will not be accepted. Note: Bit 19 MotinPlanner and 24 PhaseLockLp were added for firmware version 3.01 Phase LockLp PosWtch/Dtct MotinPlanner Analog Outs Posit Motion DI BitSwaps Options DvlpmntDeBug Peak Detect Sync Gener Digital Outs Posit Offset Posit Direct Posit Interp Posit Pt2Pt Test Points Analog Ins Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
FW FunctionsActl
Default Bit
Trending
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
150
Default: 0 = Stopped Logic State Mach Indicates the logical state of the drive. Options: 0 = Stopped Value 0- Stopped indicates zero speed has been detected and the speed and torque 1 = Starting regulators are disabled. 2 = Running Value 8 Slip Test indicates that the Slip Frequency Auto Tune test is in progress. 3 = Stopping Note: Value 8 Slip Test was added for firmware version 3.01. Values 9 Finding Home and 4 = Inertia Test 10 Homing Done were added for firmware version 3.03. 5 = MC Diag
Data Type
3-25
Linkable Read-Write
SpdRamp Hold 0 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 SpdRamp Dsbl Spd S Crv En TachLoss Rst SReg IntgRst SReg IntgHld Time Axis En Ext Flt/Alm Reserved Reserved
No. 151
The controller-drive interface (as defined by the Controller Communication Format) sets bits to enable and disable various functions and algorithms. Bits that are changed here are reflected in Par 152 [Applied LogicCmd]. Note: Bits 4 through 9 are NOT recalled from Control EEprom. They will be cleared upon drive powerup or following an EEprom recall operation. SpdRamp Hold Spd S Crv En TachLoss Rst SReg IntgRst SReg IntgHld Time Axis En Inertia Comp PI Trim Hold Options PI Trim Rst SpdRamp Dsbl Position En Frict Comp Ext Flt/Alm
Name Description Logic Command
Values
PI Trim En
Reserved
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
Reserved
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
152
Displays the Logic Command that is applied to the Regulators and Control Algorithms within the drive. Logic Commands come from the 32-bit Logic Command found in a connection with the Logix Controller. Note: Bits 7 & 8 were changed to Reserved for firmware version 2.04. CurrLim Stop Spd Ref Sel2 Spd Ref Sel1 Spd Ref Sel0 Inertia Comp Normal Stop PI Trim Hold Options Reserved Position En Coast Stop PI Trim Rst Frict Comp Clear Fault PI Trim En Reserved Reserved Reserved
Applied LogicCmd
Reverse
Forward
Jog 2
Jog 1
Default Bit
Start
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
Speed Reference Select Inputs

Bit 30 29 28 Spd Ref Spd Ref Spd Ref Sel2 Sel1 Sel0 Auto Reference Source 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Speed Ref A Sel Speed Ref B Sel Preset Speed 2 Preset Speed 3 Preset Speed 4 Preset Speed 5 Preset Speed 6 Preset Speed 7 To access Preset Speed 1, set parameter 27 [Speed Ref A Sel] or 28 [Speed Ref B Sel] to 5 -Preset Spd 1.
Data Type
3-26
Linkable Read-Write
Jog - NoRamp Trq StopRamp SRef LdLg En Trq DsblZSpd 3WireControl 0 1 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 1 3 0 2 0 1 1 0 Bipolar SRef SErrFilt1Stg Flying Start Jog in Trq Reserved
No. 153
Set bits to configure the options for operating the drive. Note: Bit 3 Flying Start was added for firmware version 2.04. Bit 20, 21, and 29 were added for firmware version 3.01. Added bit 31 Ids Test Enable for firmware version 4.001. SpdRegPreset OL ClsLpDsbl Reserved DM Reserved DM Slip Comp En Auto Tach Sw Motor OL Ret PITrim EnOut MC Atune En PM Offset En Aux Pwr Sply Time Axis En Jog -NoInteg Inrt TrqLPEn Options Ids Test Enable Pwr Diag En Slip Test En Trq Trim En Sys Inrt En
Name Description Control Options
Values
Reserved
Default Bit Bit

0
Motor Dir
Iq Delay
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Name
Bipolar SRef
0 = False 1 = True
Current Function
When this bit is enabled a bipolar speed reference is used. In bipolar reference mode, Par 40 [Selected Spd Ref] indicates both the speed magnitude and the direction: Positive speed reference values (+) = forward direction and negative speed reference values () = reverse direction. When this bit is disabled a unipolar speed reference is used. In unipolar mode, the speed reference is limited to a minimum value of zero (0). In this case Par 40 [Selected Spd Ref] supplies only the speed magnitude. The direction is determined by Par 152 [Applied LogicCmd] bits 20 Forward and 21 Reverse. The forward/reverse direction button on the HIM is one possible source for the Applied Logic Command direction bits. The following chart explains the effect that the direction button on the HIM has based on the condition of the Bipolar SRef bit: Bipolar Reference Controlled By HIM? HIM Direction Button Enabled Yes Changes the motor direction due to a HIM supplied (+) or (-) command signal Enabled No Has no effect on motor direction. Direction determined by sign of Par 40 [Selected Spd Ref]. Disabled Yes Changes the motor direction due to a HIM supplied Forward or Reverse Logic Command bit. Disabled No Changes the motor direction due to a HIM supplied Forward or Reverse Logic Command bit. In either Bipolar or Unipolar mode, the selected direction can be determined from the sign of Par 41 [Limited Spd Ref]. Positive values indicate forward rotation and negative values indicate reverse rotation. Enables/disables the Speed Reference Lead Lag Filter Setting this bit will configure the speed error filter as a single first order low pass filter. Clearing this bit will configure the speed error filter as two cascaded first order low pass filters Enables/disables the function which reconnects to a spinning motor at actual RPM when a start command is issued Overrides Par 110 [Speed/TorqueMode] setting when a jog command is received Bypasses the Speed Reference Ramp and S-Curve Overrides Par 110 [Speed/TorqueMode] setting when stopping Configures how the drive uses stop dwell time Configures the drive for 3-wire control Changes direction of the motor rotation Enables the Torque Current Delay option Configures the speed regulators integrator to hold when jogging Overload Closeloop Calculation Disable Reserved for use by the Drive module for Invert Speed Feedback Reserved for use by the Drive module for Invert Motor Torque Current Switches the drive to secondary motor feedback. This bit cannot be set when Par 485 [Motor Ctrl Mode] = 2 PMag Motor. Enables the use of an auxiliary power supply. When set to 1, the Main Control Board (MCB) examines internal 12V DC power to see when it is energized. When set to 0, the MCB examines the voltage of the DC Bus. This bit enables the MCB to remain energized when 3- voltage is de-energized. When set to 1, this bit selects Par 303 [Motor Torque Ref] for the Speed Regulator preset. When set to 0, Par 87 [SReg Trq Preset] is selected. Enables slip compensation Enables motor over-load retention Enables the Inertia Compensation Torque Output Low Pass Filter Enables the output of Process Trim Ramps the output of the Time Function Generator Enables Autotune tests Enables Torque Trim Enables the Power Diagnostic test Enables the Permanent Magnet Motor offset test Enables the Slip Frequency Auto-Tune function Enables the System Inertia test
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
SRef LdLg En SErrFilt1Stg Flying Start Jog in Torq Jog-NoRamp Trq StopRamp Trq DsblZSpd 3WireControl Motor Dir Iq Delay Jog-NoInteg OL ClsLpDsbl Reserved DM Reserved DM Auto Tach Sw Aux Pwr Sply
18 19 20 21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SpdRegPreset Slip Comp Motor OL Ret Inrt TrqLPEn PITrim EnOut Time Axis En MC Atune En Trq Trim En Pwr Diag En PM Offset En Slip Test En Sys Inrt En
Ids Test Enable Enables the flux producing (d-axis) current test for the Field Oriented Control (FOC) encoder mode
Data Type
3-27
Linkable Read-Write
Command Dir Decelerating Accelerating Flash Mode Actual Dir Running Jogging Faulted Active Alarm 0 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 Current Function Drive is controlling motor (same as enabled) Motor control commissioning in progress Speed control commissioning in progress Par 110 value is 1 & position control is not enabled Start command received & controlling motor SW Ramp Stop SW Coast Stp SW I Lim Stp Flash Upgrd Power Loss No Enable Power EE 0 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 Faulted Start Jog
No. 154
Name Description Stop Dwell Time
Values
Units: Sec Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: 0.0000/10.0000
RW Real
Sets an adjustable delay time between detecting zero speed and disabling the speed and torque regulators, when responding to a stop command. For more information, please see Stop Dwell Time on page C-7.
Important: Consult industry and local codes when setting the value of this parameter.
155
Displays the status - condition of the drive. Hw Enable On Options Spd Ref Act2 Spd Ref Act1 Spd Ref Act0 LogixPresent Reserved RunCommanded Tach Loss Sw PositionMode Above Setpt2 Torque Mode Spd Commis Speed Mode At Setpt Spd
Logic Status
MC Commis
At Zero Spd
Start Active
Enable On
MC Active
At Setpt 1
At Limit
Ready
Default Bit Bit Name 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Current Function Drive is controlling motor Run command received & controlling motor Bit 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Name Enable On At Setpt 1
0 = False 1 = True
Active Running
Par 172 value is within limits defined by Par 173 and Par 174
Command Dir Commanded direction is forward Actual Dir Accelerating Decelerating Jogging Faulted Alarm Flash Mode Actual motor direction is forward Motor is increasing speed Motor is decreasing speed Jog command received & controlling motor Exception event that causes a fault has occurred Exception event that causes an alarm has occurred Flash upgrade in progress Enable input is high & drive is fault free
Above Setpt 2 Par 175 value is within limits defined by Par 176 and Par 177 MC Active MC Commis Spd Commis Hw Enable On Torque Mode Par 110 value is 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 Speed Mode Position Mode Position control active & Par 110 value is not 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 Start Active Command Run Run command received
10 Ready 11 At Limit
Speed, Power, Current or Torque is being limited, refer to 26 Par 304
12 Tach Loss SW Failure is detected in primary speed or position feedback device & drive has switched to secondary device 13 At Zero Spd 14 At Setpt Spd Speed feedback is within limits defined in Par 160 Speed feedback is within limits defined in Par 41 and Par 171
28-3 Spd Ref Act1-3 0 31 LogixPresent
156
Indicates which condition is preventing the drive from starting or running. Bit 16 GateShutDown is set when the shunt jumper in the 16-15 position on the Main Control board is missing and a Safe-Off option board is not present. Refer to Main Control Board I/O Configuration Settings on page 1-29 for the location of this jumper. Bit 17 SafeOff Enbl is set when the HW Enable jumper (P22) is in the Bypass position (on pins 1&3) and the Safe-Off option board is present. A HW Enable is required when a safe-off board is used. Note: Bit 18 MC Config was added to this parameter for firmware version 2.03. Added bit 20 High BusVolt for firmware version 4.001. Encoder PPR Motin Shtdwn PositFdbkSel Bus PreChrg PM Mtr Fdbk High BusVolt SafeOff Enbl Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved GateShutDown DigIn Config
Start Inhibits
Default Bit
MC Config
Reserved
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
Data Type
3-28
Linkable Read-Write
SRef Ramp En SRef SCrv En SReg IntgHld J Tst FulSpd CurLim Stop PositionEnbl Spd Reg En Inert Tst En 0 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 Spd Ref En Trq Ref En CurrLim Stop 0 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 4= 5= 6= 7= 0 2 0 1 0 0 Normal Stop Coast Stop Clear Fault Reserved Reverse Forward Jog 2 Jog 1 Start DigIn Ok DigIn Ok 2 Run/Starts Start NoStop Run+Latched Strt+UnLatch 2 Jog1's 2 Jog2's 2Fwd's/Rev's Zero Zero Avg Spd Ref Avg Spd Fdbk LastStopMode -(0=None) -(1=Coast) -(2=Current Limit) -(3=Ramp) -(4=Torque Mode) 4 = Spd Ref Sel 5 = Start State 6 = Run State 7 = Stop State 8 = PrChrg Logic 9 = Meas State 10 = Data State 11 = Diag State 12 = MC CalcState 13 = Task 1 time 14 = Task 1 max 15 = Task 2 time 16 = Task 2 max 17 = Task 3 time 18 = Task 3 max 19 = BkGnd Time 20 = BkGnd Max 21 = Task 1 % 22 = Task 2 % 23 = Task 3 % 24 = BkGnd % 25 = RThru State 26 = RThru Timer 27 = Health State 28 = Sys Friction 29 = Iq proc time 30 = Enable Inhib 31 = DI Src Index 32 = DI SrcRevIdx 33 = DI TrendTrig 34 = DI Prchg Ena 35 = Enable State 36 = LID Revision 37 = DI MOP Incr 38 = DI MOP Decr 39 = DI MOP Reset 40 = Cmd Term Blk 41 = Cmd DPI 1 42 = Cmd DPI 2 43 = Cmd DPI 3 44 = Cmd DPI 4 45 = Cmd DPI 5 46 = Cmd DPI 6 47 = Cmd ELC 48 = Cmd Debugger 49 = Reserved 50 = SelSw Posit 51 = DI SelSw 00 52 = DI SelSw 01 53 = DI SelSw 02 54 = DI SelSw 03 55 = Ids Motoring 56 = IqsRef Motor 57 = Ids Regen 58 = IqsRef Regen
No. 157
Indicates which logic control functions are enabled. Bit 22 S Tst FulSpd set to 1 indicates that the Slip Auto Tune function is active Bit 23 Slip Test En set to 1 indicates that the drive is at speed for the Auto Tune function. Notes: Bits 22 and 23 were added for firmware version 3.01. Bit 14 DC Brake En is not functional. MC Atune Req Lgx Run Mode MC Gate Enbl Mtr Sim Mode Pwr Diag Req VP Gate Enbl Cmd Dir Upol PM Offset Rq ProcsTrim En DC Brake En S Tst FulSpd RThru Coast Options FTD Ramp EN Slip Test En Lgx I/O Cnx MC En Req Forced Spd Mtr Dir Req CurrRef En Ramp Hold RThru Flux
Name Description Logic Ctrl State
Values
Default Bit
Reserved
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
158
This is the logic output of the logic parser that combines the outputs from the DPI ports and the DriveLogix controller to determine drive control based on the masks and owners. The control bits are reflected in Par 152 [Applied LogicCmd] bits 16-31. CurrLim Stop Spd Ref Sel2 Spd Ref Sel1 Spd Ref Sel0 Spd Ref Sel2 Spd Ref Sel1 Normal Stop Coast Stop Clear Fault Options Reserved Spd Ref Sel0 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reverse
Drive Logic Rslt
Forward
Jog 2
Jog 1
Default Bit
Start
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Default: 0 = Options: 0 = 1= 2= 3=
0 = False 1 = True
159
This parameter indicates the status of the Digital Inputs.
DigIn ConfigStat
160
Units: RPM Zero Speed Lim Establishes a band around zero speed that is used to determine when the drive considers the Default: 17.6400 motor to be at zero speed. Min/Max: 0.0000/882.0000 Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0pu Enter or write a value to select logic status indication displayed in Par 162 [Logic TP Data].
RW Real
161
Logic TP Sel
Default: 0 = Options: 0 = 1= 2= 3=
162
Displays the indication selected by Par 161 [Logic TP Sel].
Logic TP Data
Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000
RO Real
Data Type
3-29
Linkable Read-Write
14 = ZM1 Spd Fdbk 15 = Speed Ref 16 = Avg Spd Ref 17 = ZM1 Spd Ref 18 = SReg PI Out 19 = Trq Ref 20 = TrqRef Stat 21 = DC Bus Volts 22 = Motor Volts 23 = Mtr Current 24 = Motor Flux 25 = Motor Freq 26 = Motor Power 27 = Flt Status 3 5= 6= 7= 8= Reserved Sys Inertia Slip Test Find Home Torque Run Base Block 0 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 CP Enable Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Flux Run Torque Run Power Diag 0 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 CP Enable Precharge Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Flux Run Ramp Stop Ramp Stop CurLim Stop Coast Stop
No. 163
Default: 0 = Zero Enter or write a value to select data displayed in Par 164 [StpOper TPData] at the time of the Options: 0 = Zero last initiated stop. 1 = Logic State 2 = Logic Input 3 = Lcl In State 4 = Logic Status 5 = Run Inhibit 6 = Logic Ctrl 7 = Mtr Ctrl Cmd 8 = Mtr Ctrl Ack 9 = Reserved 10 = Flt Status 1 11 = Flt Status 2 12 = Motor Speed 13 = Avg Spd Fdbk Displays the data selected by Par 163 [Stop Oper TP Sel].
Name Description Stop Oper TP Sel
Values
164 165
StopOper TP Data
Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648
RO 32-bit Integer
Default: 0 = None Tune Test Status Indicates which test (if any) is in progress. Options: 0 = None Value 7 is retained and is used to continue the Auto Tune test from the last point at which it 1 = MC Autotune was stopped. 2 = Power Diag Notes: Value 5 was changed to Reserved for firmware version 2.04. Value 7 Mtr+Sys J was 3 = Motor Direct changed to Slip Test for firmware version 3.01. Value 8 Find Home was added for firmware 4 = PM Offset version 3.03. Displays the command bits to the Motor Control Processor from the Velocity Processor. Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Options Fault Reset
166
Motor Ctrl Cmmd
Default Bit
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
167
Displays the Motor Control Processor's acknowledgment to the Velocity Processor for the Motor Control Command bits. Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Options Fault Reset
Motor Ctrl Ackn
Default Bit
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
168
Default: 0 = Normal Stop Mode Sets the method of stopping the drive when a stop command is given. Normal Stop command Options: 0 = and the RUN input changing from true to false will command a Normal Stop. 1= 2= Ramp Stop = decelerates to zero speed at the decal rate CurLim Stop = Max torque / current applied until zero speed Coast Stop = power removed from motor, motor coasts to zero
169
Units: RPM SrLss ZeroSpdLim Functionally equivalent to Par 160 [Zero Speed Lim], but is used exclusively in Sensorless Default: 49.9975 speed mode. The value is automatically set from Par 3 [Motor NP Hertz], Par 4 [Motor NP Min/Max: 0.0000/875.0000 RPM] or Par 7 [Motor Poles]. The automatic setting corresponds to the rated slip speed of the motor (synchronous speed - nameplate speed). The value can be manually set. This parameter is currently not used. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03.
RW Real
170 171
Flying StartGain
Default: 4000 Min/Max: 0/32767
RW 16-bit Integer RW Real
Set Speed Lim
Units: RPM Default: 17.6400 Creates a tolerance - hysteresis band around the value in Par 41 [Limited Spd Ref] for comparison to average speed feedback. The comparison controls bit 14 At Setpt Spd of Par Min/Max: 0.0000/882.0000 155 [Logic Status]. In general bit 14 At Setpt Spd turns on when the feedback is within the Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0pu tolerance of the reference. Turn-on level for rising feedback = Limited Spd Ref - Limit. Turn-off level for rising feedback = Limited Spd Ref + 2(Limit). Turn-on level for falling feedback = Limited Spd Ref + Limit. Turn-off level for falling feedback = Limited Spd Ref - 2(Limit). Provides data for comparison to Par 173 [Setpt1 TripPoint], driving bit 16 At Setpt 1 of Par 155 [Logic Status]. For more information, please see Setpt 1 Data on page C-8. Units: P.U. Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+8.0000 pu
172
Setpt 1 Data
RW Real
Data Type
3-30
Linkable Read-Write
Zero Zero Reserved LPF Output P Gain Term Reg Output On Intg Lim On Out Limit 7 = Status Hold 8 = Reserved 9 = Reset Status 10 = Time Axis En 11 = Enbl Status 12 = Out Max Lim 13 = Out Min Lim
No. 173 174
Name Description Setpt1 TripPoint Setpt 1 Limit
Values
Units: P.U. Default: 0.1000 Min/Max: -/+8.0000 pu Units: P.U. Default: 0.0100 Min/Max: 0.0000/0.5000
RW Real RW Real
Provides the midpoint for operation of bit 16 At Setpt 1 of Par 155 [Logic Status].
Creates a tolerance - hysteresis band around the value in Par 173 [Setpt1 TripPoint]. Turn-on level for ascending data = TripPoint - Limit. Turn-off level for ascending data = TripPoint + 2(Limit). Turn-on level for descending data = TripPoint + Limit. Turn-off level for descending data = TripPoint - 2(Limit).
175 176 177
Setpt 2 Data
Units: P.U. Provides data for comparison to Par 176 [Setpt2 TripPoint], driving bit 17 Above Setpt 2 of Default: 0.0000 Par 155 [Logic Status]. For more information, please see Setpt 2 Data on page C-8. Min/Max: -/+8.0000 pu Provides the midpoint for operation of bit 17 Above Setpt 2 of Par 155 [Logic Status]. Units: P.U. Default: 0.2000 Min/Max: -/+8.0000 pu Units: P.U. Default: 0.0100 Min/Max: 0.0000/0.5000
Setpt2 TripPoint Setpt 2 Limit
Creates a tolerance - hysteresis band around the value in Par 176 [Setpt2 TripPoint]. For positive setpoints: Turn-on level = TripPoint Turn-off level = TripPoint - Limit. For negative setpoints: Turn-on level = TripPoint Turn-off level = TripPoint + Limit.
178
PI TP Sel
Enter or write a value to select Process Control PI data displayed by Par 179 [PI TP Data]. The values for options 1 & 8 were changed to Reserved for firmware version 2.04.
Default: 0 = Options: 0 = 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6=
179 180 181 182 183 184
PI TP Data PI Output
Displays the data selected by Par 178 [PI TP Sel].
Units: P.U. Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+8.0000 pu Units: P.U. Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+8.0000 pu
RO Real
RO Real RW Real RW Real
The final output of the Process Control regulator. A value of 1 can represent either base motor speed, motor rated torque, or 100% for some external function.
PI Reference
Units: P.U. The reference input for the process control regulator. A value of 1 can represent either base Default: 0.0000 motor speed, motor rated torque, or 100% for some external function. Min/Max: -/+8.0000 pu Units: P.U. PI Feedback The feedback input for the process control regulator. A value of 1 can represent either base Default: 0.0000 motor speed, motor rated torque, or 100% for some external function. Min/Max: -/+8.0000 pu
PI Error
Displays the error of the process trim reference minus the process trim feedback.
RO Real RW Real
Units: R/S PI Lpass Filt BW Sets the bandwidth of a single pole filter applied to the error input of the Process Control Default: 0.0000 regulator. The input to the filter is the difference between Par 181 [PI Reference] and Par 182 Min/Max: 0.0000/500.0000 [PI Feedback]. The output of this filter is used as the input to the process control regulator.
185 186 187 188 189
PI Preload
Presets the integrator of the Process Control regulator.
RW Real RW Real RW Real RW Real RW Real
Default: 8.0000 PI Prop Gain Controls the proportional gain of the Process Control regulator. If the proportional gain is 1.0, Min/Max: 0.0000/200.0000 the regulator output equals 1 pu for 1 pu error. Controls the integral gain of the Process Control regulator. If the integrator time is 1.0, the regulator output equals 1 pu in 1 second for 1 pu error.
PI Integ Time
Units: /Sec Default: 8.0000 Min/Max: 0.0000/4000.0000
Units: P.U. PI Integ HLim The high limit of the integral gain channel for the Process Control regulator. A value of 1 can Default: 0.1000 represent either base motor speed, motor rated torque, or 100% for some external function. Min/Max: 0.0000/8.0000 Units: P.U. PI Integ LLim The low limit of the integral gain channel for the Process Control regulator. A value of 1 can Default: -0.1000 represent either base motor speed, motor rated torque, or 100% for some external function. Min/Max: -8.0000/0.0000
Data Type
3-31
Linkable Read-Write
No. 190
Name Description PI Integ Output
Values
Units: P.U. Displays the output value of the integral channel of the Process Control regulator. A value of Default: 0.0000 1 can represent either base motor speed, motor rated torque, or 100% for some external Min/Max: -/+8.0000 pu function. Units: P.U. PI High Limit The high limit of the Process Control regulator output. A value of 1 can represent either base Default: 0.1000 motor speed, motor rated torque, or 100% for some external function. Min/Max: 0.0000/8.0000 Units: P.U. PI Lower Limit The low limit of the Process Control regulator output. A value of 1 can represent either base Default: -0.1000 motor speed, motor rated torque, or 100% for some external function. Min/Max: -8.0000/0.0000 Default: 0 = Basic ParamAccessLevel The value of this parameter establishes the level of parameter access for the Human Interface Options: 0 = Basic Module (HIM). 1 = Advanced Value 0 - Basic grants access to the minimum number of parameters Value 1 - Advanced grants access to a larger group of parameters Default: 0 = English Language Selects the display language when using an LCD HIM. Currently, only option 0 - English is Options: 0 = English available. 1 = Alt Language Units: /Sec Time Axis Rate Sets rate (1/sec) for the Time Function Generator to ramp from an output of 0 to 1 and from 1 Default: 1.0000 to 0. Min/Max: 0.0100/20.0000 Default: 0.0000 Time Axis Output The output of the Time Function Generator. When the Time Function Generator is enabled by Min/Max: 0.0000/1.0000 Par 151 [Logic Command] bit 3 Time Axis En, or Par 153 [Control Options], bit 24 Time Axis En, the value of this parameter ramps from 0 to 1 at a rate determined by Par 202 [Time Axis Rate]. Conversely, when the Time Function Generator is disabled, the value of this parameter ramps from 1 to 0. Sets Par 207 [Limit Gen Hi Out] and Par 208 [Limit Gen Lo Out] when the absolute value of Par 206 [LimGen X axis In] is greater than or equal to 1. Sets Par 207 [Limit Gen Hi Out] and Par 208 [Limit Gen Lo Out] when the absolute value of Par 206 [LimGen X axis In] is equal to 0.
RO Real
191 192 196
RW Real RW Real
RW 16-bit Integer
201
202 203
RO Real
204 205 206 207
LimGen Y axis Mx
Units: P.U. Default: 0.2500 Min/Max: 0.0000/8.0000 Units: P.U. Default: 0.0500 Min/Max: 0.0000/8.0000
LimGen Y axis Mn
Default: 0.0000 LimGen X axis In The X axis input to the Limit Generator. Typically this parameter is linked to a speed reference Min/Max: -/+8.0000 pu or to Par 203 [Time Axis Output]. Units: P.U. Limit Gen Hi Out Displays the positive output of the Limit Generator. When Par 206 [Limit Gen X axis In] is Default: 8.0000 greater than or equal to 1, this value equals Par 204 [Limit Gen Y axis Mx]. When Par 206 Min/Max: 0.0000/8.0000 [Limit Gen X axis In] is equal to 0, this value equals Par 205 [Limit Gen Y axis Mn]. For values of X Axis input between 0 and 1, the value of this parameter is interpolated from Y axis min. and max. values. Typically it is linked to Par 188 [PI Integ HLim]. Displays the negative output of the Limit Generator. The value of this parameter is the negative of Par 207 [Limit Gen Hi Out]. Typically it is linked to Par 189 [PI Integ LLim].
RO Real
208 210
Limit Gen Lo Out
Units: P.U. Default: -8.0000 Min/Max: -8.0000/0.0000
RO Real
PeakDtct Ctrl In
Sets the configuration of the two peak/level detectors. Peak detection (when set and hold are off) causes the output to capture the peak min./max. Bit 2 Peak1SelHigh and bit 6 Peak2SelHigh determine if the peak/level detector is positive or negative. If the bit is set the detector detects positive peaks or levels above the preset. If the bit is not set the detector detects "valleys" or levels below the preset. The output shows the min. or max. peak. Bit 0 Peak 1 Set bit is used to reset the output to the value in Par 214 [PeakDtct1 Preset] (default 0). Bit 4 Peak 2 Set bit is used to reset the output to the value in Par 218 [PeakDtct2 Preset] (default 0). Bit 1Peak 1 Hold is used to hold the output at the present value in Par 214 [PeakDtct1 Preset]. Bit 5 Peak 2 Hold is used to hold the output at the present value in Par 218 [PeakDtct2 Preset]. Peak2SelHigh Peak 2 Hold Peak 1 Hold Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Peak1SelHigh Peak 2 Set Peak 1 Set
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
Reserved
0 2
0 1
0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
Data Type
3-32
No. 211
Name Description PeakDtct Status
Values
Status of peak/level detectors. A peak detector sets its Change bit for one scan when it detects a peak. The Change bit is off when set or when the Hold bit is on. Peak 2 Chng Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Peak 1 Chng
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648 Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648 Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 RW 32-bit Integer RW Real RW Real
212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 221
PkDtct1 In DInt
Integer input to the first peak/level detector. Floating point input to the first peak/level detector. The first detector (in set or hold modes) compares this value to its input for level detection. When the detector trips (in set mode) it transfers the value of this parameter to its output. Output from the first peak/level detector.
PkDtct1 In Real
PeakDtct1 Preset
PeakDetect1 Out
PkDtct2 In DInt
Integer input to second peak/level detector. Floating point input to second peak/level detector.
RW 32-bit Integer RW Real RW Real
PkDtct2 In Real
Default: 0.0000 PeakDtct2 Preset The second detector (in set or hold modes) compares this value to its input for level detection. Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 When the detector trips (in set mode) it transfers the value of this parameter to its output. Output from the second peak/level detector.
PeakDetect2 Out
Default: 0.00 Min/Max: 0.00/1200.00
Units: P.U. Load Estimate Displays the estimated load torque, which is the side effect of the speed observer and does Default: 0.0 not include torque to accelerate or decelerate the motor if the inertia input is correct. The Min/Max: -/+8.0 pu value is provided for display purposes. Default: 0 = Encoder 0 Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri Selects primary feedback device. The primary feedback device configuration must not be set Options: 0 = Encoder 0 to fault on an event in order to allow operational feedback switch over to the alternate 1 = Encoder 1 feedback device set in Par 223 [Mtr Fdbk Sel Alt]. 2 = Sensorless Notes: Par 485 [Motor Ctrl Mode] must be set to FOC for Sensorless feedback selection to be 3 = Reserved active. Selection 5 is only available when compatible feedback option card is installed. This parameter was changed to non-linkable for firmware version 3.01. Default: 2 = Sensorless Mtr Fdbk Sel Alt Selects alternate feedback device if the feedback device selected in Par 222 [Mtr Fdbk Sel Options: 0 = Encoder 0 Pri] fails. 1 = Encoder 1 Notes: Par 485 [Motor Ctrl Mode] must be set to FOC for Sensorless feedback selection to be 2 = Sensorless active. Selection 5 is only available when compatible feedback option card is installed. This 3 = Reserved parameter was changed to non-linkable for firmware version 3.01. Units: % TachSwitch Level Sets the detection level for the automatic tach loss switchover routine. A drop in feedback Default: 10.0000 speed at this percent of rated speed over 0.5 msec will cause a tach switch from primary to Min/Max: 5.0000/25.0000 alternate feedback device. This feature is enabled when bit 16 Auto Tach Sw in Par 153 [Control Options] is selected. Setting this level lower will make the tach switch detection more sensitive and lower the minimum speed at which a tach switch can occur. Setting this level higher will make the tach switch less sensitive and raise the minimum speed for tach switch detection. Note: This parameter was changed to non-linkable for firmware version 3.01.
222
4 = Motor Sim 5 = FB Opt Port0
223
4 = Motor Sim 5 = FB Opt Port0
224
225 226
Set the EPR (Edges Per Revolution) scaling for calculating motor position. Used in the calculation of the position feedback such as Par 229 [MtrPosit Stimulat].
Virtual Edge/Rev
Units: EPR Default: 4096 Min/Max: 10/16777216 RPM 0.0000 -/+14112.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0pu
Units: Motor Speed Est Displays the estimated motor speed, calculated when the selected feedback is sensorless or Default: when encoderless ridethrough is enabled. Min/Max: Scale: Summation (or integration) of Par 226 [Motor Speed Est] scaled by the value in Par 225 [Virtual Edge/Rev].
227
Motor Posit Est
Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648

RO Real RO Real RO Real RW Real RW 32-bit Integer RO Real RO 32-bit Integer
3-33
No. 228
Name Description MtrSpd Simulated
Values
Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale: RPM 0.0000 -/+14112.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0pu
The motor speed output of the motor simulator. The motor simulator provides motor speed information during setup and troubleshooting when actual motor control is not desired or possible. To use the motor simulator, enter a value of 4 in Par 222 [Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri] or Par 223 [Mtr Fdbk Sel Alt].
229
MtrPosit Simulat
Default: 0 The motor position output of the motor simulator. The motor simulator provides motor position Min/Max: -/+2147483648 information during setup and troubleshooting when actual motor control is not desired or possible. To use the motor simulator, enter a value of 4 in Par 222 [Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri] or Par 223 [Mtr Fdbk Sel Alt]. Default: 0 Displays the position feedback (accumulator) from encoder 0. The value changes by a value Min/Max: -/+2147483648 of four times (4x) the Pulses Per Revolution (PPR) rating of the encoder for each full revolution of the encoder shaft. Used by the Velocity Position Loop (VPL) to close the position loop if position control is selected. Units: Encdr0 Spd Fdbk Displays the speed feedback from encoder 0. Calculated from the change of Par 230 [Encdr0 Default: Min/Max: Position] and Par 232 [Encoder0 PPR]. Scale: RPM 0.0000 -/+14112.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0pu
230
Encdr0 Position
231
232
Encoder0 PPR
Units: PPR Sets the pulse per revolution rating of the feedback device connected to the Encoder 0 input. Default: 1024 This parameter must be set to one of the values displayed in bold in Table 232A below. Min/Max: 10/20000 Table 232A: PPR Rating Values n= 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 2n = 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 x mod 75 75 150 300 600 1200 2400 ---------mod 125 mod 225 mod 375 mod 625 mod1125 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 ---------225 450 900 1800 3600 7200 ---------375 750 1500 3000 6000 12000 ---------625 1250 2500 5000 10000 20000 ---------1125 2250 4500 9000 18000 -----------

RO Real RO 32-bit Integer RO 32-bit Integer RO Real RW 16-bit Integer
3-34
No. 233
Specifies the configuration options for the encoder 0 and encoder 1. Bits 0 Enc0 Filt bt0 through 3 Enc0 Filt bt3, or Bits 16 Enc1 Filt bt0 through 19 Enc1 Filt bt3 configure the encoder input filter (see Table 233A: Encoder Input Filter Settings). The filter requires the input signal to be stable for the specified time period. Input signal transitions within the filter time setting will be ignored. Bits 0-3 and 16-19 add 100ns filtering per stage to encoder inputs. Bits 4 Enc0 4x and 5 Enc0 A Phs or 20 Enc1 4x and 21 Enc1 A Phs determine how the encoder channel A and B signals will be interpreted. Typically, both encoder phases A and B are used so that direction information is available. Par 230 [Encdr0 Position] counts up for forward rotation and down for reverse rotation. If bit 5 is set, then the B phase signal is ignored. As a result, the encoder position will only increase, regardless of rotation direction. Bits 4 and 5 together also determine the number of edges counted per encoder pulse (see Table 233B: Multiplier and Direction Settings). "4x" sampling counts both rise and fall of both A and B encoder phases, hence 4 edges per pulse. In 4x mode, the encoder position will change by four times the encoder pulses per revolution rating (PPR) per encoder revolution (e.g., it increments the value in Par 230 [Encdr0 Position] by 4096 for one revolution of a 1024 PPR encoder). Bit 6 Enc0 Dir and 22 Enc1 Dir inverts the channel A input, thus reversing the direction of the feedback. Note that changes in encoder direction (bit 6 or 22) may require changing Par 153 [Control Options] bit 10 Motor Dir. Bit 7 Enc0 EdgTime or bit 23 Enc1 EdgTime configures the method of sampling used by the Velocity Position Loop (VPL). Setting the bit chooses "Edge to Edge" sampling, while resetting the bit to zero selects "Simple Difference" sampling. "Simple Difference" sampling calculates speed by examining the difference between pulse counts over a fixed sample time. "Edge to Edge" sampling adjusts the sample time to synchronize with the position count updates from the daughter card - improving the accuracy of the speed calculation. Bits 10 En0SmplRate bt0 through 12 En0SmplRate bt2 or bits 26 En1SmplRate bt0 through 28 En1SmplRate bt2 configure the Finite Impulse Response (FIR) Filter (see Table 233C: FIR Filter Settings). This setting reduces the effect of noisy feedback on the system. Refer to the Speed/Position Feedback section of the PowerFlex 700S with Phase II Control Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM003 for details. Note: Bit 27 is set to 0 = False by default for firmware version 1.11 and is set to 1 = True by default for firmware version 2.03. Enc1 EdgTime Enc1 Filt b3 Enc1 Filt b2 Enc1 Filt b1 Enc1 Filt b0 Enc0 Filt b3 Enc0 Filt b2 Enc0 Filt b1 1 1 Enc0 QuadLos 0 1 Enc0 Filt b0 0 0 0 = False 1 = True 0 0 Enc0 Missing 0 = False 1 = True Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Enc0 EdgTime En1SmplRt b2 En1SmplRt b1 En1SmplRt b0 En0SmplRt b2 En0SmplRt b1 En0SmplRt b0 Enc1 A Phs Enc0 A Phs
Name Description Encdr 0/1 Config
Values
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Enc1 Dir
Enc0 Dir
Enc1 4x
Default Bit
0 8
1 7
0 6
0 5
1 4
Enc0 4x
1 3
0 2
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Table 233A: Encoder Input Filter Settings

Bit 3/19 2/18 1/17 0/16 Encoder Bit Filter Settings 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Filter disabled 100 ns filter 200 ns filter 300 ns filter 400 ns filter 500 ns filter 600 ns filter 700 ns filter 800 ns filter (default setting) 900 ns filter 1000 ns filter 1100 ns filter 1200 ns filter 1300 ns filter 1400 ns filter 1500 ns filter
Table 233B: Multiplier and Direction Settings

Bit 5/21 4/20 Mult Directions Comments 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 2x 4x 1x fwd/rev fwd/rev Counts rise/fall of phase A, phase B only used to find direction Counts rise/fall of both A and B phases (default setting)
fwd only Counts rise of phase A. Phase B ignored.
2X fwd only Counts rise of phase A. Phase B ignored.
Table 233C: FIR Filter Settings

Bit 12/28 11/27 10/26 Taps 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 127
234
Indicates the error status of the encoder 0 and encoder 1. Note: Bit 4 was changed to Reserved for firmware version 2.04. Enc1 QuadLos Enc1 PhseLos Enc1 Missing Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Enc0 PhseLos Enc1 PhseLev Enc0 PhseLev Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Encdr 0/1 Error
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
3-35
No. 235
Name Description RegisLtch0 Value
Values
Default: 0 Displays the registration data of port 0. Indicates the position reference counter value latched Min/Max: -/+2147483648 by the external strobes. The strobe signal used to trigger the latch is configurable by Par 236 [RegisLtch 0/1 Cnfg].
236
Configures the registration latch at port 0 or port 1 to be used with Encoder 0 or Encoder 1, respectively. Bit 0 RL0 Encoder 1 selects the encoder for the input source of latched data. Setting bit 0 selects encoder 1, resetting the bit to zero selects encoder 0. Bits 1 RL0 TrgSrc0 and 2 RL0 TrgSrc1 select the trigger source (see Table 236A: Encoder0 Trigger Source Settings). Bits 3 RL0 TrgEdge0, 4 RL0 TrgEdge1, 19 RL1 TrgEdge0 and 20 RL1 TrgEdge1 select which edges signal the position (see Table 236C: Edge Selection Settings). Bits 5 RL0 Dir Rev, 6 RL0 Dir Fwd, 21 RL1 Dir Rev and 22 RL1 Dir Fwd set the direction of position capture (see Table 236D: Trigger Direction Settings). Bits 8 SL DI Filt 0, 9 SL DI Filt 1, 10 SL DI Filt 2, and 11 SL DI Filt 3 configure a filter for the digital input 1 and 2 (see Table 236E: Filter Settings). The filter requires the input signal to be stable for the specified time period. Input transitions within the filter time setting will be ignored. Bits 8-11 add 100ns filter per stage to external trigger. 17 RL1 TrgSrc0 and 18 RL1 TrgSrc1 select the trigger source (see Table 236B: Encoder1 Trigger Source Settings). Bit 0 &16 - off = Enc0 input to latch, on = Enc1 input to latch.
RegisLtch 0/1Cnfg
RL1 Encoder1
RL1 Dir Fwd
RL0 Dir Fwd
RL1 TrgSrc1
RL1 TrgSrc0
RL0 TrgSrc1
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
1 6
1 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
1 1
RL0 TrgSrc0
RL1 Dir Rev
RL0 Dir Rev
Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
1 0
RL0 Encoder1 0 = False 1 = True
RL1 TrgEdge1
RL1 TrgEdge0
RL0 TrgEdge1
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Table 236A: Encoder0 Trigger Source Settings

Bit 2 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 Encoder 0 Z-pulse AND Ext Trig A Ext Trig B (Digital Input 2) Ext Trig A (Digital Input 1) Encoder 0 (Primary Encoder) Z-pulse
Table 236D: Trigger Direction Settings

Bit 6/22 5/21 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Not Configured Reverse Forward Both Directions
Note: When the Z-pulse is selected as a trigger source, registration latch port 0 is used for Encoder0 regardless of the setting of bit 0 RL0 Encoder1.
Table 236B: Encoder1 Trigger Source Settings

Bit 18 0 0 1 1 17 0 1 0 1 Encoder 1 Z-pulse AND Ext Trig A Ext Trig B (Digital Input 2) Ext Trig A (Digital Input 1) Encoder 1 (Secondary Encoder) Z-pulse
Table 236E: Filter Settings

Bit 11 10 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 8 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Input Filter Setting Filter disabled 100 ns filter 200 ns filter 300 ns filter 400 ns filter 500 ns filter 600 ns filter 700 ns filter 800 ns filter (default setting) 900 ns filter 1000 ns filter 1100 ns filter 1200 ns filter 1300 ns filter 1400 ns filter 1500 ns filter
Note: When the Z-pulse is selected as a trigger source, registration latch port 1 is used for Encoder1 regardless of the setting of bit 16 RL1 Encoder1.
Table 236C: Edge Selection Settings

Bit 4/20 3/19 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Capture on rising edge Capture on falling edge Capture on both edges Disable capture
RL0 TrgEdge0
SL DI Filt 3
SL DI Filt 2
SL DI Filt 1
SL DI Filt 0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved

RW 32-bit Integer
3-36
No. 237
Configures the control for registration latch 0 and 1. Set bit 0 RL0 Arm Req and bit 16 RL1 Arm Req to arm the registration logic for the next trigger event. The particular latch will be armed and ready to be strobed on the next occurrence of the trigger input. Set bit 1 RL0 DisarmReq and bit 17 RL1 DisarmReq to disarm the registration logic for next trigger event. After the registration is captured, bit 0 RL0 Arm Req and bit 16 RL1 Arm Req automatically resets back to 0 after found. Bit 1 RL0 DisarmReq and bit 17 RL1 DisarmReq are only needed to disarm a registration latch that has not been found yet. Setting bits 1 and 17 will clear the bits 0 and 6. Setting bits 0 and 6 sets bits 0 RL0 Armed and bit 16 RL1 Armed and clears bits 1 RL0 Found and bit 17 RL1 Found of Par 238 [RegisLtch0/1Stat]. RL1 DisarmReq RL1 Arm Req RL0 Arm Req 0 0 0 = False 1 = True 0 0 RL0 Armed 0 = False 1 = True RO 32-bit Integer RO 32-bit Integer RO Real Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved RL0 DisarmReq 0 1 0 1 RL0 Found
Name Description RegisLtch0/1 Ctrl
Values
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
238
RegisLtch0/1Stat
Indicates the control status of registration latch 0 and 1. Bit 0 RL0 Armed and bit 16 RL1 Armed indicates the registration latch is armed. Bit 1 RL0 Found and bit 17 RL1 Found indicates the registration event has triggered the latch. Rising edge of 'Arm request' will set the 'Armed' status bit. Rising edge of 'Disarm request' will clear the 'Armed' status bit. Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Options RL1 Armed RL1 Found
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
239
Default: 0 RegisLtch1 Value Displays the registration data of port 1. Indicates the position reference counter value latched Min/Max: -/+2147483648 by the external strobes. The strobe signal used to trigger the latch is configurable by Par 236 [RegisLtch 0/1Cnfg].
240
Encdr1 Position
Default: 0 Displays the position feedback (accumulator) from encoder 1. The value changes by a value Min/Max: -/+2147483648 of four times (4x) the Pulses Per Revolution (PPR) rating of the encoder for each full revolution of the encoder shaft. Used by the VPL to close the position loop if position control is selected. Units: Encdr1 Spd Fdbk Displays the speed feedback from encoder 1. Calculated from the change of Par 240 [Encdr1 Default: Position] and Par 242 [Encoder1 PPR]. Min.Max: Scale: RPM 0 -/+14112.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0pu
241
Reserved
3-37
No. 242
Name Description Encoder1 PPR
Values
Units: PPR Sets the pulse per revolution rating of the feedback device connected to the Encoder 1 input. Default: 1024 This parameter must be set to one of the values displayed in bold in Table 242A below. Min/Max: 10/20000 Table 242A: PPR Rating Values n= 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 2n = 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 x mod 75 75 150 300 600 1200 2400 ---------mod 125 mod 225 mod 375 mod 625 mod1125 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 ---------225 450 900 1800 3600 7200 ---------375 750 1500 3000 6000 12000 ---------625 1250 2500 5000 10000 20000 ---------1125 2250 4500 9000 18000 -----------
245
Default: 0 = Zero Spd Fdbk TP Sel Enter or write a value to select the data displayed in Par 246 [Spd Fdbk TP RPM] and Par 247 Options: 0 = Zero [Spd Fdbk TP Data]. 1 = Clock Time Note: Option values 5 - 15 were changed to Reserved and option 41 First Diff was added 2 = InactvFbkDev for firmware version 2.04. 3 = ActiveFbkDev 4 = MCP Fdbk Dev 5 = Reserved 6 = Reserved 7 = Reserved 8 = Reserved 9 = Reserved 10 = Reserved 11 = Reserved 12 = Reserved 13 = Reserved 14 = Reserved 15 = Reserved 16 = MCP PPR 17 = MCP 2^n 18 = E0 Edge Time 19 = E0 dEdge 20 = E0 dTime Units: Spd Fdbk TP RPM Displays the value selected in Par 245 [Spd Fdbk TP Sel] in RPM. This display should only be Default: used if the selected value is floating point data. Min/Max: Scale:
21 = E0 EPR 22 = E0 Edge Mode 23 = E0 nMax 24 = E0 Error 25 = E0 Qloss pk 26 = E0 Ploss pk 27 = E0 PlevlHist 28 = E1 Edge Time 29 = E1 dEdge 30 = E1 dTime 31 = E1 EPR 32 = E1 Edge Mode 33 = E1 nMax 34 = E1 Error 35 = E1 Qloss pk 36 = E1 Ploss pk 37 = E1 PlevlHist 38 = E0 Delta2Err 39 = E1 Delta2Err 40 = EOB Present 41 = First Diff RO Real
246
RPM 0.0 -/+8.0 pu Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0pu
247 249
Default: 0 Spd Fdbk TP Data Displays the value selected in Par 245 [Spd Fdbk TP Sel]. This display should only be used if Min/Max: -/+32768 the selected value is integer data. Displays information about the Feedback Option. Bits 15-11 indicate Module ID Number. Bits 10-6 indicate Version Number. Bits 5-3 indicate Revision Number High. Bits 2-0 indicate Revision Number Low. Hexadecimal 1000 indicates resolver, hexadecimal 2000 indicates old high-resolution board, and hexadecimal 2040 indicates new high-resolution board.
Fdbk Option ID
Options: N N NNN N N NNN N NNN
Revision No. Low Module ID No. Version No. Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648 Revision No. High RO 32-bit Integer
250
Displays the position feedback (accumulator) from the feedback option card port 0.
FB Opt0 Posit

RW 16-bit Integer RO 16-bit Integer
N NNN
3-38
No. 251
Displays the speed feedback from the feedback option card port 0.
Name Description FB Opt0 Spd Fdbk
Values
Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale: RPM 0.0000 -/+14000.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0pu
252 253 254
Displays position feedback (accumulator) from port 1 of the feedback option card. Displays speed feedback from port 1 of the feedback option card.
FB Opt1 Posit
Default: 0 Min/Max: 0/2147483648 Units RPM Default: 0.0 Min/Max: -/+8.0 pu
FB Opt1 Spd Fdbk Opt0/1 RegisCnfg
Configures the registration latch for port 0 of the feedback option card. Bits 3 O0 RLTrgEdg0, 4 O0 RLTrgEdg1, 19 O1 RLTrgEdg0 and 20 O1 RLTrgEdg1 select which trigger edges signal the position (see Table 254A: Edge Selection Settings). Bits 5 O0 RL DirRev, 6 O0 RL DirFwd, 21 O1 RL DirRev and 22 O1 RL DirFwd set the direction of position capture (see Table 254B: Direction Settings). Bits 8-11 configure a digital filter for the registration trigger signal. This filter can be used to reject spurious noise. The filter works by waiting a programmed time before deciding that the signal is valid. This waiting imposes a mandatory delay in the registration signal. The filter delay is programmable in increments of 100 nanoseconds from 0 (or no delay) up to 700 nanoseconds. O1 RLTrgEdg1 O1 RLTrgEdg0 O0 RLTrgEdg1 O1 RL DirFwd O0 RL DirFwd O1 RL DirRev O0 RL DirRev Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved O0 RLTrgEdg0 RL Filt bit3 RL Filt bit2 RL Filt bit1 RL Filt bit0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
1 6
1 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
Reserved 0 = False 1 = True 0 0 O0 Arm Req 0 = False 1 = True 0 0 Opt0 Armed 0 = False 1 = True
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Table 254A: Edge Selection Settings

Bit 4/20 3/19 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Capture on rising edge Capture on falling edge Capture on both edges Disable capture
Table 254B: Direction Settings

Bit 6/22 5/21 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Disable capture Capture position during Reverse rotation Capture position during Forward rotation Capture position during either rotation
255
Configures the registration control on port 0 of the feedback option card. Set bits 0 O0 Arm Req and 16 01 Arm Req to arm the registration logic for the next trigger event. The particular latch will be armed and ready to be strobed on the next occurrence of the trigger input. Set bits 1 O0 DisarmReq and 17 01 DisarmReq to disarm the registration logic for next trigger event. After the registration is captured, bit 0 O0 Arm Req and bit 16 O1 Arm Req automatically resets back to 0 after found. Bit 1 O0 DisarmReq and bit 17 O1 DisarmReq are only needed to disarm a registration latch that has not been found yet. Setting bits 1 and 17 will clear the bits 0 and 6. Setting bits 0 and 6 sets bits 0 Opt0 Armed and bit 16 Opt1 Armed and clears bits 1 Opt0 Found and bit 17 Opt1 Found of parameter 256 [Opt0/1 RegisStat]. O1 DisarmReq O1 Arm Req Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved O0 DisarmReq
Opt0/1 RegisCtrl
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
Reserved
0 1
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
256
Indicates the registration control status on port 0 of the feedback option card. Bit 0 Opt0 Armed indicates the registration latch is armed. Bit 1 Opt0 Found indicates the registration event has triggered the latch. Rising edge of 'Arm request' will set the 'Armed' status bit. Rising edge of 'Disarm request' will clear the 'Armed' status bit. Opt1 Found Opt0 Found Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Options Opt1 Armed
Opt0/1 RegisStat
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

RO Real RO 32-bit Integer RO Real
3-39
No. 257
Name Description Opt 0 Regis Ltch
Values
Default: 0 Displays the registration data of the feedback option card port 0. The registration data is the Min/Max: -/+2147483648 position reference counter value latched by the external strobes. The strobe signal used to trigger the latch is configurable by the Par 254 [Opt0/1 RegisCnfg]. Default: 0 Opt 1 Regis Ltch Displays the registration data of the feedback option card port 0. The registration data is the Min/Max: -/+2147483648 position reference counter value latched by the external strobes. The strobe signal used to trigger the latch is configurable by Par 254 [Opt0/1 RegisCnfg].
258
259
Configures the Stegmann Hi-Resolution Encoder Feedback Option. Bit 5 Direction determines counting direction. If clear, direction is forward or up. If set, the direction is reverse or down. Bits 10 SmplRate bt0 -12 SmplRate bt2 configure the Finite Impulse Response (FIR) Filter (see Table 259A: FIR Filter Settings). This setting reduces the effect of noisy feedback on the system. Refer to the Speed/Position Feedback section of the PowerFlex 700S with Phase II Control Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM003 for details. Notes: Bit 11 SmplRate bt1 is set to 0 = False by default for firmware version 1.11 and is set to 1 = True by default for firmware version 2.03. This parameter was changed to non-linkable for firmware version 3.01. SmplRate bt2 SmplRate bt1 Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved SmplRate bt0 SW Reset
Stegmann0 Cnfg
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
Reserved 0 = False 1 = True 0 0 Reserved 0 = False 1 = True
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Table 259A: FIR Filter Settings

Bit 12 11 10 Taps 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 127
260
Indicates faults on the Stegmann Hi-Resolution Encoder Feedback Option. Bit 8 Open Wire indicates an open wire fault. The feedback option card checks for a pre-determined constant value. If this value is not within tolerances, an open wire fault is declared. A quadrature check also is done. If an error occurs during the check, the ope wire check is aborted. If 3 quadrature errors occur in succession, the open wire check will complete and the constant value checked again. If this value is not within tolerances, the fault is declared. Bit 9 PowerSup Er indicates the failure of the power supply. Bit 10 PwrUpDiag Er indicates the option board failed its power-up diagnostic test. The pattern on the FPGA must be identical to the pattern written from the DSP, or the board status test will fail. Bit 11 MsgChksum Er indicates a message checksum fault. The check sum associated with the Heidenhain encoder must be correct and acknowledged by the feedback option card. Bit 12 Time Out Err indicates a RS-485 time-out fault. This check requires information to be sent from the encoder to the feedback option card within a specified time. Typical times are about 10 clock cycles before an error is detected. This check is done only at power-up. PwrUpDiag Er PowerSup Er Time Out Err Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved MsgChksum Er
Stegmann0 Status
Open Wire
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Direction
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Reserved

RO 32-bit Integer RO 32-bit Integer
3-40
No. 261
Name Description Steg&Hiedn TPSel
Values
Zero Zero St0 EdgeTime St0 dEdge St0 dTime St0 EPR St0 EdgeMode St0 nMax St0 Delta2Er Reserved Reserved
Default: 0 = Selects data displayed by Par 262 [Steg&Hiedn TPDta]. Options: 0 = Hh0 Edge Time - Latency counter value, not used for Hi-Resolution Feedback Option. 1= Hh0 dEdge - Change in edge counts for one 500 microsecond update. At constant speed, 2= this value should be constant. 3= Hh0 dTime - Change in update time. This value should be constant, 500 microseconds. 4= Hh0 EPR - This value should be 1,048,576 counts per revolution-this is a constant value. 5= Hh0 nMax - This is a scaled value of 2. 6= Hho Delta2Err - Derivative of value 2. 7= 8= 9= Displays data selected by Par 260 [Stegmann0 Status].
10 = Reserved 11 = Hh0 EdgeTime 12 = Hh0 dEdge 13 = Hh0 dTime 14 = Hh0 EPR 15 = Hh0 EdgeMode 16 = Hh0 nMax 17 = Hh0 Delta2Er
262 263
Steg&Hiedn TPDta Heidenhain0 Cnfg
Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+32768
Configures the Heidenhain Encoder Feedback Option. Bit 5 Direction determines the counting direction. Set to 0 to count up or forward. Set to 1 to count in reverse or down. Bit 6 SW Reset setting this bit to 1 resets and restarts the option card. Bit 7 VM Direction determines the direction of the encoder pulse output from the Heidenhain option card when bit 6 VrtlMasterEn of Par 266 [Heidn Encdr Type] is set. When this bit is off, = 0, the direction of the encoder pulse output is the same as Par 1155 [Heidn VM Pos Ref], and the reverse of Par 1155 when this bit is set, = 1. Bits 10 -12 form a 3 bit moving average filter sampling rate. (See Table 263A: Sample Rate Bit Settings). Notes: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03. This parameter was changed to non-linkable for firmware version 3.01. Added bit 7 for firmware version 4.001. SmplRate bt2 SmplRate bt1 VM Direction Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved SmplRate bt0 SW Reset Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 = False 1 = True
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
Direction
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Table 263A: Sample Rate Bit Settings

Bit 12 11 10 Exponent Value n Filter Sample Size = 2n 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 4 8 (Default) 16 32 64 127

RO 16-bit Integer
3-41
No. 264
Indicates fault and alarm statuses on the Heidendhain encoder feedback option card and Endat communication. Bit 0 VM Enc Out when set, indicates that the encoder output from the Heidenhain option card is the virtual encoder position determined by Par 1155 [Heidn VM Pos Ref]. Bit 1 Emul Enc Out when set, indicates that the encoder output from the Heidenhain option card is the emulated encoder position determined by the connected Heidenhain encoder. Bit 5 Sig Amplitud indicates that the signal amplitude is insufficient or too large. Bit 6 Quadrate Er indicates that there is a signal quadrature error. Bit 7 Open Wire indicates an open wire fault. Bit 8 VoltageLvlEr indicates that the operating voltage is too high or too low. Bit 9 PowerSup Er indicates the failure of the power supply. Bit 10 PowerUpDiag Er indicates the option board failed its power-up diagnostic test. The pattern on the FPGA must be identical to the pattern written from the DSP, or the board status test will fail. Bit 11 MsgChecksum Er indicates a message checksum fault. The check sum associated with the Endat communication device must be correct and acknowledged by the feedback option card. Bit 12 Time Out Err indicates an Endat time-out fault. Bit 13 PPR Error indicates an encoder PPR setting mismatch fault. Bit 14 Bootup Error indicates an Endat boot-up fault. Bit 15 FW VersionEr indicates that the firmware version of the encoder does not match the firmware version of the Heidenhain option card in the drive. Bit 16 LightSrc Er indicates an Endat light source fault. Bit 17 Sig Amplitud indicates an Endat signal amplitude fault. Bit 18 PstvValue Er indicates an Endat positive value fault. Bit 19 Over Voltage indicates an Endat over voltage fault. Bit 20 Undr Voltage indicates an Endat under voltage fault. Bit 21 Over Current indicates an Endat over current fault. Bit 24 FrqExced Alm indicates an Endat frequency exceeded alarm. Bit 25 Temprtr Alm indicates an Endat temperature exceeded alarm. Bit 26 LghtCtrl Alm indicates an Endat limit of light control alarm. Bit 28 RefPoint Alm indicates an Endat reference point alarm. Notes: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03. Bit 14 was changed from Endat BootEr to Bootup Error and bit 15 FW VersionErr is new for firmware version 3.01. Bits 0 and 1 were added for firmware version 4.001. PowerUpDiag Er Options FrqExced Alm FW VersionEr RefPoint Alm Over Current Undr Voltage Over Voltage Time Out Err PstvValue Er Bootup Error Sig Amplitud LghtCtrl Alm Temprtr Alm LightSrc Er PPR Error Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved MsgChecksum Er
Name Description Heidenhain0 Stat
Values
Emul Enc Out 0 1
PowerSup Er
Sig Amplitud
VoltageLvlEr
Quadrate Er
VM Enc Out 0 0
Open Wire
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
265
Default: 0.0000 Heidn Mkr Offset Configures marker offset values for the Heidenhain Encoder Feedback Option. The marker Min/Max: 0.0000/4294967295 offset is specified within one revolution. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03. Configures the encoder type manually if the Endat type is not used. Bit 0 Reserved Automatically set after power-up. Do not change. Bit 1 Not EnDat Enables/Disables EnDat serial communications. Serial communications must be turned on for permanent magnet motors or if absolute position is required. With EnDat serial communications enabled, bit 2 Multi Turn and the value of parameter 267 [Heidn Encdr PPR] will be automatically set on power-up. Bit 2 Multi Turn set to 1 (True) if the encoder supports mutli-turn absolute position. This bit is set automatically if bit 1 Not EnDat is set to 0 (False). Bit 5 Endat24bitSl when this bit is on, the Heidenhain encoder works as Endat / Single turn / 24 bits. When this bit is off, the Heidenhain encoder works as Endat / Single turn / 20 bits. Bit 6 VrtlMasterEn when set, indicates that the Virtual Master encoder function of the Heidenhain option card is active. The Virtual Master function is available with v3.00 or later of the Heidenhain option card. Notes: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03. Bit 1 Not Endat was changed to 0 (false) and bit 2 Multi Turn was changed to 1 (true) for firmware version 2.04. Bit 1 Not Endat was changed to 1 (true), bit 2 Multi Turn was changed to 0 (False), and bit 6 Endat24bitSl was added for firmware version 3.01. Added bit 6 for firmware version 4.001. VrtlMasterEn Not EnDat Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Endat24bitSl Multi Turn Reserved Reserved Reserved
RW 32-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer
266
Heidn Encdr Type
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
1 1
0 0
0 = False 1 = True
15 14 13 12 11 10 9

0 = False 1 = True
3-42
No. 267
Name Description Heidn Encdr PPR
Values
Units: PPR Set this value equal to the Heidenhain encoder PPR (e.g., 2048). This value is automatically Default: 2048 set when bit 1 NotEnDat of parameter 266 [Heidn Encdr Type] is set to 0 (False). Min/Max: 1/100000 Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03. Changed the minimum value from 10 to 1 for firmware version 4.001.
268
Resolver0 Cnfg
Configures options for the resolver option card port 0. Setting bit 0 Cable Tune enables the cable tuning test, resetting the bit to zero disables the test. Refer to the section on Resolver Cable Tuning Tests in publication PFLEX-RM003, Reference Manual - PowerFlex 700S Drives with Phase II Control for more information. Bit 1 Tune Param has been disabled. Bits 2 Resolution 0 and 3 Resolution 1 select the resolver resolution (see Table 268A: Resolution Settings). This determines the number of significant bits that are calculated in the value of Par 250 [FB Opt0 Posit]. It does not affect the number of counts created per resolver revolution (see Table 268B: Resolution and Least Significant Bits Used). Also, the resolution sets a limit on the maximum tracking speed (see Table 268C: Resolution and Resolver Tracking Speed). Setting bit 4 Energize energizes the resolver, resetting the bit to zero de-energizes the resolver. Bit 5 Resolver Dir determines counting direction. If clear, direction is forward or up. If set, the direction is reverse or down. Bit 9 Edge Time configures the method of sampling used by the Velocity Position Loop (VPL). Setting the bit chooses "Edge to Edge" sampling, while resetting the bit to zero chooses "Simple Difference" sampling. "Simple Difference" sampling calculates speed by examining the difference between pulse counts over a fixed sample time. "Edge to Edge" sampling adjusts the sample time to synchronize with the position count updates from the daughter card - improving the accuracy of the speed calculation. Bits 10 SmplRate bt0 through 12 SmplRate bt2 configure the Finite Impulse Response (FIR) Filter (see Table 268D: FIR Filter Settings). This setting reduces the effect of noisy feedback on the system. Refer to the Speed/Position Feedback section of the PowerFlex 700S with Phase II Control Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM003 for details. Note: Bit 11 SmplRate bt0 is set to 0 = False by default for firmware version 1.11 and bit 11 SmplRate1 is set to 1 = True by default for firmware version 2.03. SmplRate bt2 SmplRate bt1 Resolution 1 Resolution 0 Resolver Dir Cable Tune 0 0 0 = False 1 = True Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved SmplRate bt0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
1 4
0 3
1 2
0 1
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Table 268A: Resolution Settings

Bit 3 0 0 1 1 2 0 1 0 1 Resolution 10 bit resolution 12 bit resolution (default setting) 14 bit resolution 16 bit resolution
Table 268D: FIR Filter Settings

Bit 12 11 10 Taps 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 127
Table 268B: Resolution and Least Significant Bits Used

Resolution LSB Not Used 16 bit 14 bit 12 bit 10 bit All bits used Parameter 250 Increments by 1
2 LSB not used 4 4 LSB not used 8 6 LSB not used 64
Table 268C: Resolution and Resolver Tracking Speed

Resolution Maximum Carrier Freq. 10 bit 12 bit 14 bit 16 bit 34 kHz 24kHz 14kHz 10 kHz Tracking Speed Tracking Speed Tracking Speed for X1 Resolver for X2 Resolver for X5 Resolver 55 K-rpm 13.8 K-rpm 3480 rpm 900 rpm 27.5 K-rpm 6.9 K-rpm 1740 rpm 450 rpm 11 K-rpm 2.76 K-rpm 696 rpm 180 rpm
Reserved
Energize

RW 32-bit Integer
3-43
No. 269
Name Description Resolver0 Status
Values
Indicates status of the resolver option card port 0. Bit 0 -Cable Tune Bit 1 -Tune Result indicates the tuning Parameter type. When set, it indicates the tuning is using the parameter database. When cleared, it indicates the tuning is using derived data. Bit 2 -Mtr Turning indicates that the motor is turning. Bit 4 Energized indicates the resolver is energized. Bit 8 Open Wire indicates a problem with the cable (open circuit). Bit 9 Power Supply indicates problem with the option card's power supply. Bit 10 Diag Fail indicates the option card has failed its power-up diagnostics. -Cable Comp -Tune Result -Cable Tune -Mtr Turning Options Select OK Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Diag Fail Power Supply Open Wire Energized Reserved Reserved Reserved
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True Default: 0 = Options: 0 = 1= 2= 3= Zero Zero R0 Edge Time R0 dEdge R0 dTime
270
Enter or write a value to select Fault data displayed in Par 271 [Reslvr0 TP Data].
Reslvr0 TP Sel
4= 5= 6= 7=
R0 EPR R0 Edge Mode R0 nMax R0 Delta2Err RO 32-bit Integer
271 272
Displays the data selected by Par 270 [Reslvr0 TP Sel].
Reslvr0 TP Data
Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648 2 poles (x1) Zero 2 Poles (x1) 4 Poles (x2) 3 = 6 Poles (x3) 4 = 8 Poles (x4) 5 = 10 Poles(x5)
Default: 1 = Reslvr0 SpdRatio Specifies the speed ratio for the resolver option card port 0. The speed ratio comes from the Options: 0 = following formula. Speed ratio = electrical revolutions / mechanical revolutions = pole count / 1= 2. 2= Note: Option 0 = Zero was added for firmware version 2.04. Specifies the resolver carrier frequency for the resolver option card port 0.
273 274 275 276 277
Reslvr0 Carrier
Units: Hz Default: 0 Min/Max: 0/10000 Units: Volt Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: 0.0000/31.0810 Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: 0.0000/4.0950 Default: 0 Min/Max: 0/255 Disabled Disabled T2014/2087x1 T2014/2087x2 T2014/2087x5 MPL 460v Reserved Siemens 1FT6 PrkrHn ZX600 Reserved
Specifies the resolver input voltage for the resolver option card port 0.
Reslvr0 In Volts
Rslvr0 XfrmRatio
Specifies the resolver transform ratio for the resolver option card port 0. Specifies the resolver cable balance for the resolver option card port 0.
Reslvr0 CableBal
Default: 0 = Reslvr0 Type Sel Specifies used resolver. Options: 0 = The values for options 5 & 12 were changed to Reserved for firmware version 2.04. Added 1= options 15 and 16 for firmware version 4.001 but are not functional (for future use). 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= 8=
9 = 1326Ax 460v 10 = Reserved 11 = Reserved 12 = Reserved 13 = Reserved 14 = AmciR11XC107 15 = PowerTec R1 16 = PowerTec R2

RO 32-bit Integer RO Real RO Real RO Real
3-44
No. 285
Used to configure a linear encoder when a Multi Device Interface (MDI) feedback card is installed. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03. Bit 5 Direction - Setting this bit to 1 inverts the count (up/down) direction of the linear feedback position Par 252 [FB Opt1 Posit]. If [FB Opt1 Posit] has been counting up for forward feedback sensor travel then setting this bit will cause [FB Opt1 Posit] to count down. The opposite behavior will occur when the sensor moves in the other direction. Bit 6 Stahl Linear - Setting this bit to 1 indicates to the MDI card that a Stahl type linear device is being used. It this bit is set to 0 then a Temposonics linear device is being used. Bits 10 - 12 form a 3 bit moving average filter sampling rate. (See Table 285A: Sample Rate Bit Settings). Op1SmplRt b3 Op1SmplRt b2 Stahl Linear Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Op1SmplRt b1
Name Description Linear1 Config
Values
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
Reserved
Direction
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
Table 285A: Sample Rate Bit Settings

Bit 12 11 10 Exponent Value n Filter Sample Size = 2n 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 4 8 (Default) 16 32 64 127
286
Indicates faults on the Multi Device Interface (MDI). Bit 8 Open Wire indicates an open wire fault. Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 1 Reserved 0 0 0 = False 1 = True RO 16-bit Integer 8 = 4.0 msec 9 = 4.5 msec 10 = 5.0 msec 11 = 5.5 msec 12 = 6.0 msec 13 = 6.5 msec 14 = 7.0 msec 15 = 7.5 msec Options Open Wire
Linear1 Status
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
287
Default: 0 = Zero Linear1 TP Sel Enter or write a value to select Linear Feedback data displayed in Par 288 [Linear1 TP Data]. Options: 0 = Zero Value 0 - Zero displays a value of zero. 1 = L1 Edge Time Value 1 - L1 Edge Time displays the change displays the latency or edge time (the time 2 = L1 dEdge since the last update of Par 252 [FB Opt1 Posit]). 3 = L1 dTime Value 2 - L1 dEdge displays the change in Par 252 [FB Opt1 Posit] since the last feedback sample. Value 3 - L1 DTime displays the change in time since the last feedback sample Note the sample rate is 10,000 counts per second (10 Mhz). Value 4 - L1 EPR displays the change in edges per motor revolution. This number is the same value in Par 290 [Linear1 CPR]. Value 5 - Edge Mode should always display a zero (0). Value 6 - L1 nMax displays the numerator term for speed calculation. This number divided by change in time (TP3) is the calculated per unit speed for the linear feedback sensor. Displays the data selected by Par 287 [Linear1 TP Sel]. Sets the sample rate for the linear channel on the Multi Device Interface (MDI) feedback option.
4= 5= 6= 7=
L1 EPR L1 Edge Mode L1 nMax L1 Delta2Err
288 289
Linear1 TP Data
Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+32768 Default: 2 = Options: 0 = 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= 1.0 msec 8.0 msec 0.5 msec 1.0 msec 1.5 msec 2.0 msec 2.5 msec 3.0 msec 3.5 msec
Lin1 Update Rate
3-45
No. 290
Name Description Linear1 CPR
Values
Units: CPR Specifies the change in Par 252 [FB Opt1 Posit] for one revolution of the motor shaft. This Default: 1000 value is used to scale the calculated speed, based on the change in feedback position. Units Min/Max: 10/100000 are count per motor revolution (CPR).
291
Lin1Stahl Status
Displays the status of the Stahl linear encoder. The Stahl linear encoder works with the MDI option card. Bit 8 No Data Read indicates that no data can be read from the encoder Bit 9 Alarm Optics displays an alarm when fiber optics require cleaning Bit 10 Out of Range indicates that the encoder read count is at the maximum value (524,287) Bit 11 ErrBits16-31 displays a diagnostic error code (refer to bits 16-31) Bit 16 Fault Optics indicates that the read head for fiber optic cable must be cleaned or replaced Bit 17 Read Head indicates that the fiber optic cable read head must be checked, aligned or replaced Bit 18 RAM error indicates that the fiber optic cable read head must be replaced Bit19 EPROM error indicates that there is an error with the communication module, replace read head. Bit 20 ROM error indicates, replace read head. Bit 22 No Position Cycle power to Stahl read head. EPROM error Out of Range Alarm Optics ErrBits16-31 Options No Position ROM error Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved No Data Read
Fault Optics
Read Head
RAM error
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved 0 0
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Units: Default: Min/Max: Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale:
296 297
Currently not used. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03. Displays measured RMS motor current with a resolution of 1/10 amperes.
Motor Freq Ref
Output Curr Disp
Amps 0.0 0.0/9999.9 x 10 Hrs 0.0 0.0/429496736.0 x 10 MWHrs 0.0 0.0/429496736.0 x 10 RPM 0.0000 -/+14112.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0pu RPM 0.0000 -/+14112.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0pu
298
Units: Elapsed Run Time Displays the total time that the drive has been running (inverter power devices active) with a Default: resolution of 1/10 hour. This parameter is saved in power EE non-volatile memory. The value Min/Max: in this parameter can be changed (written to) by the user. Scale: Units: Elapsed MWHrs Displays the total energy the drive has consumed or produced. Calculated from the absolute Default: magnitude of the product of motor speed and motor torque (power), accumulated over time. Min/Max: This value will increase in both regen and motoring modes of operation. This parameter value Scale: can be changed (written to) by the user. Displays measured motor speed information from the selected feedback device.
299
300
Motor Spd Fdbk
Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale: Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale:
301
Displays the speed reference value, after the limit function. This is the input to the error calculator and speed regulator.
Motor Speed Ref
302 303
Spd Reg PI Out
Units: P.U. Displays the output of the speed regulator. This is the input to torque control. A value of 1.0 Default: 0.0000 represents base torque of the motor. Min/Max: -/+8.0000 pu Units: P.U. Motor Torque Ref Displays the reference value of motor torque. The actual value of the motor torque is within Default: 0.0000 5% of this value. Min/Max: -/+8.0000 pu

RW 32-bit Integer 0 = False 1 = True RO Real RO 32-bit Integer RW 32-bit Integer RW 32-bit Integer RO Real RO Real RO Real RO Real
3-46
No. 304
Displays the limit status of conditions that may be limiting the current reference or torque reference. Bit 0 +MCS Iq Lim indicates that torque producing current is at its positive limit. Bit 1 +MCS Ws Lim indicates that flux producing torque is at its positive limit. Bit 2 0 Ia from + indicates that torque producing current is limited to zero from the positive direction - refer to Par 353 [Iq Actual Lim]. Bit 3 +Iq Calc indicates the calculation for torque producing current has reached its positive limit. Bit 4 +Current Lim indicates that the current reference has reached the positive Motor Current Limit set by Par 356 [Mtr Current Lim]. Bit 5 +DriveProtOL indicates that the current reference has reached the positive current limit set by the Open Loop Inverter Overload, shown in Par 343 [OL OpnLp CurrLim]. Bit 6 +DriveProtCL indicates that the current reference has reached the positive current limit set by the Closed Loop Inverter Overload, shown in Par 344 [OL ClsLp CurrLim]. Bit 8 +Torq Limit indicates that the torque reference has reached the Positive Torque Limit set by Par 125 [Torque Pos Limit]. Bit 9 Mtrng PwrLim indicates that the torque reference is being limited by the Motoring Power Limit set by Par 127 [Mtring Power Lim]. Bit 10 +Torq CurLim indicates that current reference has reached the Actual Torque Producing Current Limit set by Par 353 [Iq Actual Lim]. Bit 11 Atune Tq Lim indicates that the torque reference is being limited by Par 129 [Atune Trq Ref]. Bit 12 +0 Torq Ena indicates that the torque reference is limited to zero because Par 157 [Logic Ctrl State] bit 9 Torq Ref En is off. Bit 13 +0 Curr Ena indicates that the current reference is limited to zero because Par 157 [Logic Ctrl State] bit 11 CurrRef En is off. Bit 14 Speed Limit indicates the collective status of all speed limitations. Bit 15 Current Lim indicates the collective status of all current limitations Bit 16 -MCS Iq Lim indicates that torque producing current is at its negative limit. Bit 17 -MCS Ws Lim indicates that flux producing torque is at its negative limit. Bit 18 0 Ia from - indicates that torque producing current is limited to zero from the negative direction - refer to Par 353 [Iq Actual Lim]. Bit 19 -Iq Calc indicates the calculation for torque producing current has reached its negative limit. Bit 20 -Current Lim indicates that the current reference has reached the negative Motor Current Limit set by Par 356 [Mtr Current Lim]. Bit 21 -DriveProtOL indicates that the current reference has reached the negative current limit set by the Open Loop Inverter Overload, shown in Par 343 [OL OpnLp CurrLim]. Bit 22 -DriveProtCL indicates that the current reference has reached the negative current limit set by the Closed Loop Inverter Overload, shown in Par 344 [OL ClsLp CurrLim]. Bit 24 -Torq Limit indicates that the torque reference has reached the Negative Torque Limit set by Par 126 [Torque Neg Limit]. Bit 25 Regen PwrLim indicates that the torque reference is being limited by the Regenerative Power Limit set by Par 128 [Regen Power Lim]. Bit 26 -Torq CurLim indicates that current reference has reached the Actual Torque Producing Current Limit set by Par 353 [Iq Actual Lim]. Bit 27 Bus Reg Tq Lim indicates the bus voltage regulator is active and limiting the regenerative torque. Bit 28 -0 Torq Ena indicates that the torque reference is limited to zero because Par 157 [Logic Ctrl State] bit 9 Torq Ref En is off. Bit 29 -0 Curr Ena indicates that the current reference is limited to zero because Par 157 [Logic Ctrl State] bit 11 CurrRef En is off. Bit 30 Torque Limit indicates the collective status of all torque limitations. Bit 31 Power Limit indicates the collective status of all power limitations. Regen PwrLim +MCS Ws Lim 0 1 SpdReg Open Mtrng PwrLim -MCS Ws Lim +DriveProtOL +DriveProtCL -DriveProtOL +Current Lim +MCS Iq Lim 0 0 0 = False 1 = True RO Real RO Real RO Real RO Real RO 16-bit Integer RO Real RO Real -DriveProtCL Bus Reg Lim +0 Curr Enbl Atun Trq Lim Options Torque Limit -0 Curr Enbl Power Limit -0 Trq Enbl +SpdReg Open
Name Description Limit Status
Values
-MCS Iq Lim
-Current Lim
+Trq CurLim
Speed Limit
Current Lim
-Trq CurLim
+0 Trq Enbl
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
305 306
Units: P.U. Mtr Trq Curr Ref Displays the torque current reference present at the output of the current rate limiter. 100% is Default: 0.0000 equal to 1 per unit (pu) rated motor torque. Min/Max: -/+8.0000 pu Units: Volt DC Bus Voltage Displays measured bus voltage. Default: 0.0000 Note: The maximum value was increased from 1000.0000 to 1170.0000 for firmware version Min/Max: 0.0000/1170.0000 3.01. Displays RMS line-to-line fundamental motor voltage. This data is averaged and updated every 50 milliseconds. Displays measured RMS motor current.
307 308 309
Output Voltage
Units: Volt Default: 0.00 Min/Max: 0.00/3000.00 Units: Amps Default: 0.00 Min/Max: 0.00/10000.00 Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale: % 0.0 0.0/100.0 100 = 4096
Output Current
Displays the motor flux in % of nominal.
% Motor Flux
310 311
Displays the motor stator frequency.
Output Freq
Units: Hz Default: 0.00 Min/Max: -/+250.00
Units: Hp Output Power Motor Power is the calculated product of the torque reference and motor speed feedback. A Default: 0.00 125mS filter is applied to this result. Positive values indicate motoring power; negative values Min/Max: -/+9999.00 indicate regenerative power. Note: The units were changed from kW to Hp for firmware version 2.03.
0 Iq from +
0 Iq from -
+Trq Limit
-Trq Limit
+Iq Calc
-Iq Calc
3-47
Linkable Read-Write
0 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 FB Opt Prsnt Encdr1 Prsnt Encdr0 Prsnt Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Rx Active Tx Active In Sync RPM 0.0000 -/+14112.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0pu SpdRef Decel FB Opt1 Loss FB Opt0 Loss 0 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 Abs OverSpd SLink Comm Ctrl EE Mem Encdr1 Loss Encdr0 Loss Power Loss SLink HW
No. 312 313 314
Name Description MotorFluxCurr FB Heatsink Temp
Values
Units: P.U. Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: 0.0000/1.0000 Units: degC Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -30.0000/200.0000
RO Real
Displays the measured per unit motor flux producing current.
RO Real
Displays the measured temperature of the drive's heatsink.
Default: 1.003 VPL Firmware Rev Displays the major and minor revision levels of the drive's Velocity Position Loop (VPL) Min/Max: 0.001/99.999 software. Scale: 000 Notes: The default value was changed from 1.11 to 2.03 for firmware version 2.03. The default value was changed from 2.03 to 3.01 for firmware version 3.01. Changed all values to three decimal places for firmware version 4.001. Displays the build number of the drive's Velocity Position Loop (VPL) software. Note: The default value was changed from 8001 to 1 for firmware version 2.03.
RO 16-bit Integer
315 316
VPL Build Number SynchLink Status
RO 16-bit Integer
Indicates status of SynchLink functions. Bit 0 FB Opt Prsnt indicates the presence of an optional feedback daughter card. Bit 1 Encdr0 Prsnt indicates the presence of encoder 0. Bit 2 Encdr1 Prsnt indicates the presence of encoder 1. Bit 3 In Sync indicates SynchLink communications is synchronized. Bit 4 Tx Active indicates TX frames are being transmitted downstream from this node. Bit 5 Rx Active indicates RX frames are being received from nodes upstream. Bit 15 Rx Data Enbl indicates received data is being updated. Note: Bit 8 Open Wire was changed to Reserved, and bit 12 SOB Present and bit 14 Reset Reqd were added for firmware 2.04. Rx Data Enbl Reset Req'd Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved SOB Present Reserved Reserved Reserved
Default Bit
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True RO 32-bit Integer RO Real
317 318
Displays the SynchLink system time counter.
SL System Time
Units: Sec Default: 0 Min/Max: 0/1048575 Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale:
Final output of the position regulator.
Posit Spd Output
319 320
Selected Trq Ref
Displays the actual selected torque reference value after Par 110 [Speed/TorqueMode].
Units: PU Default: 0.0 Min/Max: -/+8.0 pu
RO Real
Indicates the presence of certain drive anomalies. In some cases, you may configure the drive's response to these events by entering values in the parameters of the fault/alarm configuration group of the utility file. MC Commissn Inv TempPend DSP Mem Err MC Firmware Precharge Er Ground Fault Bus OverVolt Options VPL/MC Comm PWM Asynchro Inv TempTrip Mtr OL Pend Inv OL Pend OverCurrent Trans Desat PWM Short
Exception Event1
Ext Fault In
Default Bit
Mtr OL Trip
Inertia Test
Inv OL Trip
Motor Stall
DSP Error
Over Freq
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
Data Type
3-48
Linkable Read-Write
PowerEE Cksm MC Command BusUnderVolt RidethruTime Ctrl EE Cksm PSC Sys Flt2 PSC Sys Flt1 BrakeOL Trip 0 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 +/- 12v Pwr Slink Mult HH BusWtchDg HH BusComDly HH BusCRC Er HH FanFdbkLs HHPrChrgCntc 0 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 HH InPhaseLs HH PwrBd Prc HH BusLinkLs HH PwrEE Er HH Drv Ovrld SpdRef Decel FB Opt1 Loss FB Opt0 Loss 0 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 Abs OverSpd SLink Comm Ctrl EE Mem Encdr1 Loss Encdr0 Loss Power Loss SLink HW PowerEE Cksm MC Command BusUnderVolt Ctrl EE Cksm RidethruTime PSC Sys Flt2 PSC Sys Flt1 BrakeOL Trip 0 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 +/- 12v Pwr Slink Mult
No. 321
Indicates the presence of certain drive anomalies. Configure the drive's response to these events by entering values in the parameters of the fault/alarm configuration group of the utility file. Note: Changed bit 14 to NonCnfgAlarm for firmware version 3.03. NonCnfgAlarm NonCnfgAlarm Lgx OutOfRun NetLoss DPI6 NetLoss DPI5 NetLoss DPI4 NetLoss DPI3 NetLoss DPI2 NetLoss DPI1 Lgx LinkChng EnableHealth VoltFdbkLoss Interp Synch No Ctrl Devc Options DPI Loss P6 DPI Loss P5 DPI Loss P4 DPI Loss P3 DPI Loss P2 DPI Loss P1 Lgx Timeout
Name Description Exception Event2
Values
Default Bit
Lgx Closed
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
322
Indicates the presence of certain drive anomalies. Configure the drive's response to these events by entering values in the parameters of the fault/alarm configuration group of the utility file. Bit 11 HH HW Ver is sed to indicate a High Horsepower hardware version fault. Bit 12 HH CurUnblnc is used to indicate a High Horsepower output current unbalanced fault. Bit 13 HH VltUnblnc is used to indicate a High Horsepower Bus voltage unbalanced fault. Bit 29 AnlgIn1 Loss is used to indicate an Analog Input 1 loss fault. Bit 30 AnlgIn2 Loss is used to indicate an Analog Input 2 loss fault. Bit 31 AnlgIn3 Loss is used to indicate an Analog Input 3 loss fault. Notes: Bits 16, 20 and 23 were added for firmware version 2.04. Bits 11, 12, 13, 29, 30 and 31 were added for firmware version 3.01. Changed bits 11, 12, 13, 21, and 28 to NonCnfgAlarm for firmware version 3.03. Bit 14 NonCnfgAlarm was added for firmware version 3.04. NonCnfgAlarm NonCnfgAlarm NonCnfgAlarm NonCnfgAlarm NonCnfgAlarm NonCnfgAlarm NonCnfgAlarm Options AnlgIn3 Loss AnlgIn2 Loss AnlgIn1 Loss HH PwrBdTemp +Hrd OvrTrvl -Hrd OvrTrvl
Exception Event3
+Sft OvrTrvl
-Sft OvrTrvl
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default Bit
Reserved
Posit Err
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
323
Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as fault conditions. These events are from Par 320 [Exception Event1]. Inv OTmpPend MC Commissn DSP Mem Err MC Firmware Inv OTmpTrip Precharge Er Ground Fault Bus OverVolt Options VPL/MC Comm PWM Asynchro Mtr OL Pend Inv OL Pend OverCurrent Trans Desat PWM Short Ext Fault In Mtr OL Trip
Fault Status 1
Inertia Test
Inv OL Trip
Default Bit
Motor Stall
DSP Error
Over Freq
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
324
Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as fault conditions. These events are from Par 321 [Exception Event2] Note: Changed bit 14 to NonCnfgAlarm for firmware version 3.03. NonCnfgAlarm NonCnfgAlarm Lgx OutOfRun NetLoss DPI6 NetLoss DPI5 NetLoss DPI4 NetLoss DPI3 NetLoss DPI2 NetLoss DPI1 Lgx LinkChng VoltFdbkLoss EnableHealth No Ctrl Devc Interp Synch Options DPI Loss P6 DPI Loss P5 DPI Loss P4 DPI Loss P3 DPI Loss P2 DPI Loss P1 Lgx Timeout Lgx Closed
Fault Status 2
Default Bit
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
Data Type
3-49
Linkable Read-Write
HH BusComDly HH BusWtchDg HH BusCRC Er HH FanFdbkLs HHPrChrgCntc 0 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 HH InPhaseLs HH PwrBd Prc HH BusLinkLs HH PwrEE Er HH Drv Ovrld FB Opt 1 Loss NonCnfgFault NonCnfgFault NonCnfgFault NonCnfgFault 0 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 NonCnfgFault FB Opt0 Loss SLink Comm Encdr1 Loss Encdr0 Loss MC Command NonCnfg Fault NonCnfg Fault NonCnfg Fault NonCnfg Fault NonCnfg Fault 0 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 NonCnfg Fault BusUnderVolt BrakeOL Trip Slink Mult 0 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 HH InPhaseLs NonCnfg Fault NonCnfg Fault NonCnfg Fault NonCnfg Fault NonCnfg Fault NonCnfg Fault NonCnfg Fault NonCnfg Fault NonCnfg Fault
No. 325
Name Description Fault Status 3
Values
Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as fault conditions. These events are from Par 322 [Exception Event3]. Bit 11 HH HW Ver is sed to indicate a High Horsepower hardware version fault. Bit 12 HH CurUnblnc is used to indicate a High Horsepower output current unbalanced fault. Bit 13 HH VltUnblnc is used to indicate a High Horsepower Bus voltage unbalanced fault. Bit 29 AnlgIn1 Loss is used to indicate an Analog Input 1 loss fault. Bit 30 AnlgIn2 Loss is used to indicate an Analog Input 2 loss fault. Bit 31 AnlgIn3 Loss is used to indicate an Analog Input 3 loss fault. Notes: Bits 16, 20 and 23 were added for firmware version 2.04. Bits 11, 12, 13, 29, 30 and 31 were added for firmware version 3.01. Changed bit 21 to Drive Homing and bit 28 to +/- 12v Pwr for firmware version 3.03. Bit 14 NonCnfgAlarm was added for firmware version 3.04. NonCnfgAlarm NonCnfgAlarm NonCnfgAlarm NonCnfgAlarm NonCnfgAlarm NonCnfgAlarm NonCnfgAlarm Options AnlgIn3 Loss AnlgIn2 Loss AnlgIn1 Loss HH PwrBdTemp +Hrd OvrTrvl -Hrd OvrTrvl +Sft OvrTrvl -Sft OvrTrvl
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default Bit
Reserved
Posit Err
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
326
Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as alarm conditions. These events are from Par 320 [Exception Event1]. NonCnfg Fault NonCnfg Fault NonCnfg Fault NonCnfg Fault NonCnfg Fault NonCnfg Fault NonCnfg Fault NonCnfg Fault NonCnfg Fault NonCnfg Fault NonCnfg Fault NonCnfg Fault Inv TempPend Precharge Er Mtr OL Pend Inv OL Pend Options Non Cnfg Fault Ext Fault In Mtr OL Trip Inertia Test Inv OL Trip Motor Stall
Alarm Status 1
Default Bit
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
327
Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as alarm conditions. These events are from Par 321 [Exception Event2] Note: Changed bit 14 to NonCnfgAlarm for firmware version 3.03. NetLoss DPI6 NetLoss DPI5 NetLoss DPI4 NetLoss DPI3 NetLoss DPI2 NetLoss DPI1 Lgx LinkChng Runtime Data EnableHealth VoltFdbkLoss MC CML Fail Interp Synch DPI Loss P6 DPI Loss P5 DPI Loss P4 DPI Loss P3 DPI Loss P2 DPI Loss P1 Lgx Timeout Options NonCnfg Fault Lgx OutOfRun Lgx Closed
Alarm Status 2
Default Bit
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
328
Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as alarm conditions. These events are from Par 322 [Exception Event3]. Bit 11 HH HW Ver indicates a non-configurable High Horsepower hardware version fault. Bit 12 HH CurUnblnc indicates a non-configurable High Horsepower output current unbalanced fault. Bit 13 HH VltUnblnc indicates a non-configurable High Horsepower Bus voltage unbalanced fault. Bit 14 HH Bus Data indicates when Communication Bus data are mismatched between left side unit and right side unit. Bit 21 Drive Homing when the drive is in "Drive Homing" mode (parameter Par 740 [Position Control] bit 24 "Find Home" or bit 27 "Return Home" is set to "1") this alarm is triggered and the drive moves to a home position automatically. Bit 28 +/- 12v Pwr identifies when the12V dc control voltage is outside the tolerance range. The positive voltage power exceeds +15.50 V dc and the negative voltage power exceeds -15.50V dc. Bit 29 AnlgIn1 Loss indicates a non-configurable Analog Input 1 loss fault. Bit 30 AnlgIn2 Loss indicates a non-configurable Analog Input 2 loss fault. Bit 31 AnlgIn3 Loss indicates a non-configurable Analog Input 3 loss fault. Notes: Bits 16, 20 and 23 were added for firmware version 2.04. Bits 11, 12, 13, 29, 30 and 31 were added for firmware version 3.01. Changed bit 21 to Drive Homing and bit 28 to +/- 12v Pwr for firmware version 3.03. Bit 14 HH Bus Data was added for firmware version 3.04. NonCnfg Fault NonCnfg Fault NonCnfg Fault NonCnfg Fault Drive Homing HH VltUnblnc HH Bus Data +Hrd OvrTrvl Options HH CurrUnblnc -Hrd OvrTrvl Stahl Optics +Sft OvrTrvl HH HW Ver +/- 12v Pwr -Sft OvrTrvl
Alarm Status 3
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default Bit
Reserved
Posit Err
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
Data Type
3-50
Linkable Read-Write
14 = MtrStallTime 15 = MC Handshake 16 = VPL Handshak 17 = MC Diag 18 = PwrLossState 19 = 12 volt loss 20 = PwrEE Chksum 21 = Db Read Cnt1 22 = Db Read Cnt2 23 = Db Read Cnt3 24 = ElpsSec.mSec 25 = Elps Min.Sec 26 = ElpsHour.Min 27 = ElpsDay.Hour Ignore Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop 3 = Flt RampStop 4 = FltCurLimStop Asym DcLink1 Dsat Phs W1 HW Disable1 Ovr Current1 0 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 Dsat Phs U1 Dsat Phs V1 Pwr Suply1 Latch Err1 Reserved Ovr Volt1
No. 329
Enter or write a value to select Fault data displayed in Par 330 [Fault TP Data]. 24 ElpsSec.mSec = Elapsed time in seconds and milliseconds since the last power up 25 ElpsMin.Sec = Elapsed time in minutes and seconds since the last power up 26 ElpsHour.Min = Elapsed time in hours and minutes since the last power up 27 ElpsDay.Hour = Elapsed time in days and hours since the last power up Note: 'Values 24 - 27 were added for firmware version 4.002.
Name Description Fault TP Sel
Values
Default: 0 = Zero Options: 0 = Zero 1 = Abs OverSpd 2 = EE Pwr State 3 = Inv DataStat 4 = Run Time Err 5 = LowBus Thres 6 = LowBus Detct 7 = PwrLosBusVlt 8 = MCPLosBusVlt 9 = MC Flt Reset 10 = Ext Flt Stat 11 = VPL TaskErr 12 = Mtr OL Input 13 = Mtr OL Outpt Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2200000000
330 331
Displays the data selected by Par 329 [Fault TP Sel].
Fault TP Data
RO Real
Default: 0 = LstFaultStopMode Displays the action taken by the drive during the last fault. When a fault occurs, an action is Options: 0 = taken as a result of that fault. 1= 2= Indicates the presence of certain drive anomalies for PowerFlex 700L (LiquiFlo) drive. Bit 0 Dsat Phs U1 indicates that the primary structure detected a Dsat on phase U. Bit 1 Dsat Phs V1 indicates that the primary structure detected a Dsat on phase V. Bit 2 Dsat Phs W indicates that the primary structure detected a Dsat on phase W. Bit 3 Ovr Current1 indicates that the primary structure detected an over current. Bit 4 Ovr Volt1 indicates that the primary structure detected an over voltage. Bit 5 Asym DcLink1 indicates that the primary structure detected an unbalanced DC Link. Bit 6 Pwr Suply1 indicates that the primary structure detected a power supply failure. Bit 7 HW Disable1 indicates that the primary structure detected a hardware disable. Bit 8 Latch Err1 indicates that the primary structure fault was generated but no indicating bit was set. Bit 14 Cnv NotLogin the converter was expected but none logged in. Bit 15 Cnv NotStart the converter was commanded to start but did not become active. Bit 16 Dsat Phs U2 the second structure detected a Dsat on phase U. Bit 17 Dsat Phs V2 the second structure detected a Dsat on phase V. Bit 18 Dsat Phs W2 the second structure detected a Dsat on phase W. Bit 19 Ovr Current2 the second structure detected an over current. Bit 20 Ovr Volt2 the second structure detected an over voltage. Bit 21 Asym DcLink2 the second structure detected an unbalanced DC Link. Bit 22 Pwr Suply2 the second structure detected a power supply failure. Bit 23 HW Disable2 the second structure detected a hardware disable. Bit 24 Latch Err2 the second structure fault was generated but no indicating bit was set. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03. Cnv NotLogin Dsat Phs W2 HW Disable2 Ovr Current2 Cnv NotStart Dsat Phs U2 Dsat Phs V2 Options Latch Err2 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Asym DcLink2 Pwr Suply2
332
700L EventStatus
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default Bit
Reserved
Ovr Volt2
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
Data Type
3-51
Linkable Read-Write
Asym DcLink1 Dsat Phs W1 HW Disable1 Ovr Current1 0 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 Dsat Phs U1 Dsat Phs V1 Pwr Suply1 Latch Err1 Reserved Ovr Volt1 NonCnfgFault NonCnfgFault NonCnfgFault NonCnfgFault NonCnfgFault NonCnfgFault NonCnfgFault NonCnfgFault 0 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 NonCnfgFault Reserved RPM 352.8000 0.0000/1750.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0pu
No. 333
Name Description 700L FaultStatus
Values
Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as fault conditions for PowerFlex 700L (LiquiFlo) drive. Bit 0 Dsat Phs U1 indicates that the primary structure detected a Dsat on phase U. Bit 1 Dsat Phs V1 indicates that the primary structure detected a Dsat on phase V. Bit 2 Dsat Phs W indicates that the primary structure detected a Dsat on phase W. Bit 3 Ovr Current1 indicates that the primary structure detected an over current. Bit 4 Ovr Volt1 indicates that the primary structure detected an over voltage. Bit 5 Asym DcLink1 indicates that the primary structure detected an unbalanced DC Link. Bit 6 Pwr Suply1 indicates that the primary structure detected a power supply failure. Bit 7 HW Disable1 indicates that the primary structure detected a hardware disable. Bit 8 Latch Err1 indicates that the primary structure fault was generated but no indicating bit was set. Bit 14 Cnv NotLogin indicates that the converter expected but none logged in. Bit 15 Cnv NotStart indicates that the converter commanded to start but did not become active. Bit 16 Dsat Phs U2 indicates that the second structure detected a Dsat on phase U. Bit 17 Dsat Phs V2 indicates that the second structure detected a Dsat on phase V. Bit 18 Dsat Phs W2 indicates that the second structure detected a Dsat on phase W. Bit 19 Ovr Current2 indicates that the second structure detected an over current. Bit 20 Ovr Volt2 indicates that the second structure detected an over voltage. Bit 21 Asym DcLink2 indicates that the second structure detected an unbalanced DC Link. Bit 22 Pwr Suply2 indicates that the second structure detected a power supply failure. Bit 23 HW Disable2 indicates that the second structure detected a hardware disable. Bit 24 Latch Err2 indicates that the second structure fault was generated but no indicating bit was set. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03. Cnv NotLogin Dsat Phs W2 HW Disable2 Ovr Current2 Cnv NotStart Dsat Phs U2 Dsat Phs V2 Options Latch Err2 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Asym DcLink2 Pwr Suply2
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default Bit
Reserved
Ovr Volt2
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
334
700L AlarmStatus
Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as alarm conditions for PowerFlex 700L (LiquiFlo) drive. Bit 0 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm. Bit 1 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm. Bit 2 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm. Bit 3 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm. Bit 4 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm. Bit 5 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm. Bit 6 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm. Bit 7 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm. Bit 8 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm. Bit 14 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm. Bit 15 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm. Bit 16 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm. Bit 17 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm. Bit 18 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm. Bit 19 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm. Bit 20 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm. Bit 21 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm. Bit 22 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm. Bit 23 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm. Bit 24 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03. NonCnfgFault NonCnfgFault NonCnfgFault NonCnfgFault NonCnfgFault NonCnfgFault NonCnfgFault NonCnfgFault NonCnfgFault NonCnfgFault Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved NonCnfgFault
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default Bit
Reserved
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale:
335
Sets an incremental speed above Par 76 [Fwd Speed Limit] and below Par 75 [Rev Speed Limit] that is allowable before the drive indicates its speed is out of range.
Abs OverSpd Lim
336
Sets the minimum level of current that causes a motor overload trip under continuous operation. Current levels below this value will not result in an overload trip. For example, a service factor of 1.15 implies continuous operation up to 115% of nameplate motor current.
Motor OL Factor
RW Real
Data Type
3-52
Linkable Read-Write
No. 337
Units: P.U. Sets the minimum current threshold for the motor overload (I2T) function. The value indicates Default: 0.5000 minimum current at the minimum speed, Par 338 [Mtr I2T Spd Min], and these are the first Min Max: 0.0500/2.0000 current/speed breakpoint. From this point the current threshold is linear to the value specified by Par 336 [Motor OL Factor]. Units: P.U. Mtr I2T Spd Min Sets the minimum speed for the motor overload (I2T) function. The value indicates minimum Default: 1.0000 speed below the minimum current threshold Par 337 [Mtr I2T Curr Min], and these are the first Min/Max: 0.0500/1.0000 current/speed breakpoint. From this point the current threshold is linear to the value specified by the motor service factor Par 336 [Motor OL Factor]. For more information, please see Motor Overload on page C-5. Units: P.U. Mtr I2T Calibrat Sets the current calibration level for the motor overload (I2T) function. The value indicates the Default: 2.0000 current level that the drive will fault at this current in 60 seconds. Min/Max: 1.1000/4.0000 Units: P.U. Mtr I2T Trp ThrH Displays the trip threshold current for the motor overload (I2T) function. The value depends on Default: 1.1500 the motor speed, and is calculated from the minimum current Par 337 [Mtr I2T Curr Min], the Min/Max: 0.0500/2.0000 minimum speed Par 338 [Mtr I2T Spd Min] and the motor service factor Par 336 [Motor OL Factor]. Default: 0.0 Mtr I2T Count The accumulator for Motor Overload detection (Motor I2T function). When the motor runs at Min/Max: 0.0/1.5 the over rated motor current, the accumulator starts counting up. If the motor runs at below rated motor current, the accumulator counts down. If the value of this parameter exceeds 0.5, the Motor OLoad Pend alarm (fault 12) occurs. If the value of this parameter exceeds 1.0, the Motor OLoad Trip fault (fault 11) occurs. The value of this parameter is saved in non-volatile memory after power-down if Par 153 [Control Options], bit 20 Motor OL Ret is on. Toggling bit 20 of Par 153 [Control Options] clears the value of this parameter. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
Name Description Mtr I2T Curr Min
Values
RW Real
338
RW Real
339 340
RW Real
RO Real
341
RO Real
343
Units: P.U. OL OpnLp CurrLim Displays the current limit set by the Open Loop Inverter Overload (OL) function. This function Default: 8.0000 sets this current limit based on stator current feedback and the current ratings of the drive - Min/Max: 0.0000/8.0000 continuous and short term (three-second rating). Typically the drive will have a sixty-second rating of 110% of continuous current and a three-second rating at 150% of the continuous. Under normal operating conditions, the open loop function sets this current limit to the short term (three-second) rating. If the function detects an overload, it lowers the limit to the continuous level. After a period of time (typically one to three minutes), the function returns the limit to the short term rating. Units: P.U. OL ClsLp CurrLim Default: 8.0000 Displays the current limit set by the Closed Loop Inverter Overload (OL) function. This function will set a current limit level based on the values in Par 355 [Iq Ref Limited], Par 313 Min/Max: 0.0000/8.0000 [Heatsink Temp] and the thermal characteristics of the drive. Under normal operating conditions, the function typically sets the limit at 250% of the continuous drive rating. If the function determines that the power device junction temperature is approaching maximum, it will reduce this limit to the level required to prevent additional heating of the inverter. This level could be as low as the continuous rating of the drive. If the inverter temperature decreases, the function will raise the limit to a higher level. Disable this protection by setting bit 13 OL ClsLpDsbl of Par 153 [Control Options]. Units: degC Drive OL JnctTmp Displays the calculated junction temperature of the power semiconductors in the inverter. The Default: 0.0000 calculation uses the values of Par 313 [Heatsink Temp], Par 355 [Iq Ref Limited], and inverter Min/Max: -50.0000/300.0000 thermal characteristics contained in the power EE memory. If this value exceeds the maximum junction temperature (visible in Par 348 [Drive OL TP Data] when Par 347 [Drive OL TP Sel] option 12 fJunTmprMax is selected), two faults occur: Inverter Overtemperature Fault (fault code 15), and Junction Overtemperature Fault - indicated by bit 7 Jnc OverTemp of Par 346 [Drive OL Status].
RO Real
344
RO Real
345
RO Real
Data Type
3-53
Linkable Read-Write
24 = fIgbtWatts 25 = iIgbtPerMod 26 = fFdThres 27 = fFdSlope 28 = fFdJunCase 29 = fFdWatts 30 = fMaxHsDegc 31 = fCsImp 32 = fCsFltr 33 = fPwmHz 34 = fElecHz 35 = fModIdex 36 = fBoost 37 = fTotalWatts 38 = fHSDegc 39 = iAdconv 40 = Jct Temp 41 = Jct Tmp HiHp 42 = Jct Tmp Fwd 43 = HH Loss Intg 44 = HH PwrBdTemp 45 = IGBT CndLoss 46 = IGBT SwtLoss 47 = Fwd CndLoss
No. 346
Name Description Drive OL Status
Values
Indicates the status of various overload (OL) conditions. Bit 0 NTC Shorted indicates the Negative Temperature Coefficient (NTC) device has a short circuit. Bit 1 NTC Open indicates the NTC has an open circuit. Bit 2 HS OverTemp indicates heatsink temperature is above 105C for ratings 1.1-11.0A, 115C for 14-34A, 100C for 40-52A. Bit 3 HS Pending indicates heatsink temperature is above 95C for ratings 1.1 -11A, 105C for 14- 34A, 90C for 40- 52A. Bit 4 IT Trip indicates the drive has exceed the 3 second rating of either the 150% normal duty rating or 200% of the heavy duty rating. Bit 5 IT Pending indicates the drive OL integrator is at 50% of the time out time. Bit 6 IT Foldback indicates the drive closed loop current limit is in a fold back condition. The value of the fold back is proportional to the calculated junction temperature. Bit 7 Jnc Over Temp indicates the junction temperature has exceeded the maximum temperature for the power semiconductor device. Jnc OverTemp NTC Shorted HS Pending IT Foldback Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved HS OverTemp IT Pending NTC Open
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
IT Trip
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True Default: 0 = Zero Options: 0 = Zero 1 = fAbsIsCurr 2 = fDelta 3 = fAbsIqCurr 4 = fOL_l 5 = fOL_m 6 = fOL_k 7 = fOL_g 8 = fOL_intg 9 = fCL_intg 10 = fInvOLClim 11 = fJuncDegc 12 = fJunTmprMax 13 = f60sPUCur 14 = f60sAmp 15 = f3sPUCur 16 = f3sAmp 17 = fRatioInvMtr 18 = fRatioMtrInv 19 = iConvertStat 20 = fIgbtThres 21 = fIgbtSlope 22 = fIgbtEnergy 23 = fIgbtJuncase Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000
347
Enter or write a value to select the drive overload data displayed in Par 348 [Drive OL TP Data]. Note: Value 44 HH PwrBdTemp was added for firmware version 2.04. Added values 45 IGBT CndLoss, 46 IGBT SwtLoss and 47 Fwd CndLoss for firmware version 3.03.
Drive OL TP Sel
348 350 351
Displays the value selected by Par 347 [Drive OL TP Sel].
Drive OL TP Data
RO Real RO Real RW Real
Iq Actual Ref Iq Ref Trim
Units: P.U. Displays the value of motor current reference that is present at the output of the divide by flux Default: 0.0000 calculation. Min/Max: -/+8.0000 pu
P.U. Units: Provides an external source to command, trim or offset the internal motor current reference. Default: 0.0000 This value is summed with Par 350 [Iq Actl Ref] before the current limit is applied. Scaling is in Min/Max: -/+8.0000 pu per unit motor current. Displays the largest allowable stator motor current. The range of allowable motor current is limited by the maximum drive current. Scaling is in per unit motor current.
352 353
Is Actual Lim
RO Real
Units: P.U. Iq Actual Lim Displays the largest allowable torque producing (Iq) motor current. The range of allowable Iq Default: 1.0000 motor current is limited by the maximum drive current and is adjusted by the motor flux Min/Max: 0.0000/8.0000 current. Scaling is in per unit Iq motor current. Enter the maximum rate of change for Current Reference, in per unit current / sec. Par 90 [Spd Reg BW] will be limited to 2/3 of this value. Displays the current reference output of the rate limiter.
RO Real
354 355 356
Iq Rate Limit
/Sec Units: Default: 1000.0000 Min/Max: 5.0000/10000.0000 Units: P.U. Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+8.0000 pu
RW Real
Iq Ref Limited
RO Real RW Real
Units: P.U. Mtr Current Lim Sets the largest allowable motor stator current. The online maximum value of this parameter is Default: 1.5000 Par 2 [Motor NP FLA]. The online minimum value is 105% of the current indicated in Par 488 Min/Max: 0.0000/Calculated [Flux Current].
Data Type
3-54
Linkable Read-Write
0 = Zero 0 = Zero 1 = Iq Sum 2 = Iq Lim In 3 = Iq Lim Out 4 = Iq Rate Stat 5 = IqLmOutNoFil 6 = MtrCrLimStat 7 = Lim'dMtrCrLm 8 = Iq Act Limit 9 = Iq Cal Gain 10 = Min Lim Stat 11 = Iq Prescale 12 = IqtoIs Stat 13 = Flux Status 14 = Flux LPF Out 15 = Is Per Unit 16 = Iq Actl +Lim 17 = Iq Actl -Lim 18 = Flx Filt Hld 19 = Inverse Flux 20 = Impedance PU 21 = ImpedanceOhm 22 = Rated We 23 = Leak Induct 24 = Rated Torque 25 = Rated Ids 26 = Rated Iqs 27 = Rated Vds 28 = Rated Vqs 29 = RatedLamdVds 30 = RatedLamdIds 31 = RatedLamd ds 32 = RatedLamd qs 33 = Iqs 34 = Ids 35 = Vqs 36 = Vds 37 = We 38 = Torque 39 = Torque Filtr 40 = Lamda Ids 41 = Lamda Iqs 42 = Lamda Vds 43 = Lamda Vqs 44 = Lamda ds 45 = Lamda qs 46 = Lamda ds Flt 47 = Lamda qs Flt 48 = Torque Ref 49 = Iq Reference 50 = 1/Motor Pole 51 = 1/Rated Iqs 52 = 1/Rated Torq 53 = Rs Temp Coef 2= 1= 1= 1= 2= FltCoastStop Alarm Alarm Alarm FltCoastStop FltCoastStop Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop
No. 357
Name Description Curr Ref TP Sel
Values
Default: Enter or write a value to select current reference data displayed in Par 358 [Curr Ref TP Data]. Options: Note: Added values 20 - 52 for firmware version 3.03. Added value 53 for firmware version 4.001.
358 359 360
Curr Ref TP Data Motor Flux Est
Sets the limit value for the motor torque producing current.
Units: P.U. Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+8.0000 pu Units: P.U. Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+8.0000 pu
RO Real
RO Real RW Real
The Q-axis motor voltage is divided by the motor frequency while field weakening is active. This value is used to convert the torque command to a motor current (Iqs) command.
Units: P.U. Min Flux Sets the smallest level of flux used to convert Par 303 [Motor Torque Ref] to a current Default: 0.2500 reference above base speed. Note: Changed the minimum value from 0.2500 to 0.1000 for Min/Max: 0.1000/1.0000 firmware version 4.001. Units: R/S Flx LpassFilt BW Sets the bandwidth of the low pass filter that adjusts the response of the flux estimate used in Default: 12.0000 the torque to current conversion. Since the field time constant varies between motors, a better Min/Max: 0.5000/100.0000 control response may be obtained by adjusting the filter time constant. Normally this parameter is not changed unless a significant disturbance occurs as the motor enters field weakening AND Par 360 [Min Flux] is less than 1 per unit. Sets the responsiveness of the current limit. This parameter should not be changed by the user. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03. Current Limit Integral gain. This gain is applied to the current limit error signal to eliminate steady state current limit error. A larger value increases overshoot during a step of motor current/load. This parameter should not be changed by the user. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03.
361
RW Real
362
Current Limit Gain
RW 16-bit Integer
363
Ki Current Limit
RW 16-bit Integer
364
Default: 500 Kd Current Limit Current Limit Derivative gain. This gain is applied to the sensed motor current to anticipate a Min/Max: 0/10000 current limit condition. A larger value reduces overshoot of the current relative to the current limit value. This parameter should not be changed by the user. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03.
RW 16-bit Integer
365 366 367
Enter a value to configure the drive's response to an Encoder 0/1 Loss exception event. 0 - Ignore configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs. 1 - Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs. 2 - FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. Configures the 700L drives response when the active convertor is not logged-in via a DPI port. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
Fdbk LsCnfg Pri Fdbk LsCnfg Alt Fdbk LsCnfgPosit
Default: Default: Default: Options:
368
Cnv NotLogin Cfg
Default: 2 = Options: 0 = 1= 2=
Data Type
3-55
Linkable Read-Write
Alarm Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Flt RampStop FltCurLimStp 2= 0= 1= 2= 3= 4= FltCoastStop Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Flt RampStop FltCurLimStp
No. 369
Name Description Brake OL Cnfg
Values
Default: 1 = Enter a value to configure the drive's response to a Brake Overload (OL) Trip exception event. Options: 0 = This event is triggered when a Dynamic Brake (DB) overload condition occurs. 1= 0 - Ignore configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs. 2= 1 - Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 3= this event occurs. 4= 2 - FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 3 - Flt RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 4 - FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event.
370
HiHp InPhsLs Cfg
Default 2 = FltCoastStop Selector for the input phase loss configuration. Options: 0 = Ignore 0 - Ignore configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs. 1 = Alarm 1 - Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 2 = FltCoastStop this event occurs. 3 = Flt RampStop 2 - FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault 4 = FltCurLimStp bit in response to this event. 3 - Flt RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event. 4 - FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event. Notes: The default value was changed from 1 Alarm to 3 Flt RampStop for firmware version 3.01. The default value was changed from 3 to 2 for firmware version 4.002. Default Enter a value to configure the drive's response to a Motor Overload (OL) Trip exception event. Options: 0 - Ignore configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs. 1 - Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs. 2 - FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 3 - Flt RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 4 - FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event.
371
Mtr OL Trip Cnfg
372
Default 1 = Alarm Mtr OL Pend Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to a Motor Overload (OL) Pending exception Options: 0 = Ignore event. 1 = Alarm 0 - Ignore configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs. 2 = FltCoastStop 1 - Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 3 = Flt RampStop this event occurs. 4 = FltCurLimStp 2 - FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 3 - Flt RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 4 - FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. Units: Sec Motor Stall Time Enter a value to specify the time delay between when the drive detects a Motor Stall condition Default: 1.0000 and when it declares the exception event. Min/Max: 0.1000/3000.0000 Default 0 = Ignore Motor Stall Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to a Motor Stall exception event. Options: 0 = Ignore 0 - Ignore configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs. 1 = Alarm 1 - Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 2 = FltCoastStop this event occurs. 3 = Flt RampStop 2 - FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault 4 = FltCurLimStp bit, in response to this event. 3 - Flt RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 4 - FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. RW Real
373 374
Data Type
3-56
Linkable Read-Write
Alarm Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Flt RampStop FltCurLimStp Alarm Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Alarm Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop 3 = Flt RampStop 4 = FltCurLimStp Alarm Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Alarm Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop
No. 375
Default 1 = Enter a value to configure the drive's response to a Inverter Over-Temperature (OT) Pending Options: 0 = exception event. This event is triggered when the Inverter Negative Temperature Coefficient 1= (NTC) function detects the heat-sink temperature reaches to the overload warning level. 2= 0 - Ignore configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs. 3= 1 - Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 4= this event occurs. 2 - FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 3 - Flt RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 4 - FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event.
Name Description Inv OT Pend Cnfg
Values
376
Default 1 = Alarm Inv OL Pend Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to an Inverter Overload (OL) Pending Options: 0 = Ignore exception event. This event is triggered when one of the Inverter Protection 1 = Alarm Current-Over-Time functions (Open Loop or Closed Loop) detects current and temperature at 2 = FltCoastStop warning levels. 3 = Flt RampStop 0 - Ignore configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs. 4 = FltCurLimStp 1 - Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs. 2 - FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 3 - Flt RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 4 - FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. Default: 1 = Inv OL Trip Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to an Inverter Overload (OL) Trip exception Options: 0 = event. This event is triggered when one of the Inverter Protection Current-Over-Time functions 1= (Open Loop or Closed Loop) detects current and temperature at a fault level. 2= 0 - Ignore configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs. 1 - Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs. 2 - FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. Enter a value to configure the drive's response to a position interpolator exception event. If the interpolator loses the synchronization pulse or is out of synch, this event occurs.
377
378
Interp Flt Cnfg
379
Default 2 = FltCoastStop Ext Flt/Alm Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to an External Input exception event. The Options: 0 = Ignore event is triggered by a digital input that is configured for auxiliary fault or auxiliary aux fault by 1 = Alarm selecting 3 Ext Fault or 38 ExtFault Inv in Par 825 [ DigIn 1 Sel], Par 826 [DigIn 2 Sel] or 2 = FltCoastStop Par 827 [DigIn 3 Sel]. 3 = Flt RampStop 0 - Ignore configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs. 4 = FltCurLimStp 1 - Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs. 2 - FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 3 - Flt RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 4 - FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. Default: 2 = PreChrg Err Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to a Precharge Error exception event. Options: 0 = 0 - Ignore configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs. 1= 1 - Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 2= this event occurs. 2 - FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event Default: 2 = MC Cmd Lim Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to a Motor-Controller (MC) Command Options: 0 = Limitation exception event. This event is triggered when the motor-controller detects limit of 1= the command values used in the motor-controller, and returns the exception event to the 2= Velocity Position Loop (VPL). 0 - Ignore configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs. 1 - Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs. 2 - FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event.
381
382
Data Type
3-57
Linkable Read-Write
No. 383
Enter a value to determine what is done with the data received from SynchLink when a communication loss occurs. Refer to Par 902 [SL Error Status] for possible causes of communication loss. 0 - Zero Data Resets data to zero. 1 - Last State Holds data in its last state.
Name Description SL CommLoss Data
Values
Default: 1 = Last State Options: 0 = Zero Data 1 = Last State
!
384
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Par 383 [SL CommLoss Data] lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted. By default this parameter causes the drive to hold the data in its last state. You can set this parameter so that the drive resets the data to zero. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage.
Default 2 = FltCoastStop SL CommLoss Cnfg Enter a value to configures the drive's response to SynchLink communication loss. Options: 0 = Ignore 0 - Ignore configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs. 1 = Alarm 1 - Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 2 = FltCoastStop this event occurs. 3 = Flt RampStop 2 - FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault 4 = FltCurLimStp bit, in response to this event. 3 - Flt RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 4 - FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event.
!
385
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Par 384 [SL CommLoss Cnfg] lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted. By default this parameter causes the drive fault and coast to a stop. You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage.
Default: 1 = Last State Options: 0 = Zero Data 1 = Last State
Enter a value to configure what the drive does with the data received from the DriveLogix controller when the connection is closed or times out. 0 - Zero Data Resets data to zero. 1 - Last State Holds data in its last state.
Lgx CommLossData
!
386
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Par 385 [Lgx CommLossData] lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted. By default this parameter causes the drive to hold the data in its last state. You can set this parameter so that the drive resets the data to zero. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage.
Default 2 = FltCoastStop Lgx OutOfRunCnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to the DriveLogix processor being in a Options: 0 = Ignore Non-Run mode. Non-Run modes include Program, Remote-Program and Faulted. 1 = Alarm 0 - Ignore configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs. 2 = FltCoastStop 1 - Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 3 = Flt RampStop this event occurs. 4 = FltCurLimStp 2 - FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 3 - Flt RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 4 - FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event.
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Par 386 [Lgx OutOfRunCnfg] lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted. By default this parameter causes the drive fault and coast to a stop. You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage.
Data Type
3-58
Linkable Read-Write
FltCoastStop Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Flt RampStop FltCurLimStp
No. 387
Default 2 = Enter a value to configure the drive's response to a Controller-to-Drive connection timeout, Options: 0 = as detected by the drive. 1= 0 - Ignore configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs. 2= 1 - Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 3= this event occurs. 4= 2 - FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 3 - Flt RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 4 - FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event.
Name Description Lgx Timeout Cnfg
Values
!
388
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Par 387 [Lgx Timeout Cnfg] lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted. By default this parameter causes the drive fault and coast to a stop. You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage.
Default 2 = FltCoastStop Lgx Closed Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to the controller closing the Options: 0 = Ignore Controller-to-Drive connection. 1 = Alarm 0 - Ignore configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs. 2 = FltCoastStop 1 - Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 3 = Flt RampStop this event occurs. 4 = FltCurLimStp 2 - FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 3 - Flt RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 4 - FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event.
!
389
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Par 388 [Lgx Closed Cnfg] lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted. By default this parameter causes the drive fault and coast to a stop. You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage.
Default 2 = FltCoastStop Lgx LinkChngCnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to Controller-to-Drive default links being Options: 0 = Ignore removed. A default link is a link automatically set up when a communication format is 1 = Alarm selected for the Controller to Drive connection. 2 = FltCoastStop 0 - Ignore configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs. 3 = Flt RampStop 1 - Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 4 = FltCurLimStp this event occurs. 2 - FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 3 - Flt RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 4 - FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event.
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Par 389 [Lgx LinkChngCnfg] lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted. By default this parameter causes the drive fault and coast to a stop. You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage.
Data Type
3-59
Linkable Read-Write
FltCoastStop Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Flt RampStop FltCurLimStp
No. 390
Default 2 = Enter a value to configure the Drive Module's response to a SynchLink Multiplier error. Refer Options: 0 = to Par 927 [SL Mult State] for possible causes for multiplier errors. 1= 0 - Ignore configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs. 2= 1 - Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 3= this event occurs. 4= 2 - FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 3 - Flt RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 4 - FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event.
Name Description SL MultErr Cnfg
Values
!
391
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Par 390 [SL MultErr Cnfg] lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted. By default this parameter causes the drive fault and coast to a stop. You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage.
Default 2 = FltCoastStop DPI CommLoss Cfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to the failure of a DPI port. Options: 0 = Ignore 0 - Ignore configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs. 1 = Alarm 1 - Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 2 = FltCoastStop this event occurs. 3 = Flt RampStop 2 - FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault 4 = FltCurLimStp bit, in response to this event. 3 - Flt RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 4 - FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event.
!
392
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Par 391 [DPI CommLoss Cfg] lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted. By default this parameter causes the drive fault and coast to a stop. You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage.
Default 2 = FltCoastStop NetLoss DPI Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to a communication fault from a network card Options: 0 = Ignore at a DPI port. 1 = Alarm 0 - Ignore configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs. 2 = FltCoastStop 1 - Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 3 = Flt RampStop this event occurs. 4 = FltCurLimStp 2 - FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 3 - Flt RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 4 - FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event.
!
393
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Par 392 [NetLoss DPI Cnfg] lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted. By default this parameter causes the drive fault and coast to a stop. You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage.
Default 1 = Alarm BusUndervoltCnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to the DC Bus voltage falling below the Options: 0 = Ignore minimum value. 1 = Alarm 0 - Ignore configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs. 2 = FltCoastStop 1 - Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 3 = Flt RampStop this event occurs. 4 = FltCurLimStp 2 - FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 3 - Flt RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 4 - FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event.
Data Type
3-60
Linkable Read-Write
FltCoastStop Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop
No. 394
Enter a value to configure the drive's response to a communication error between Motor Control (MC) and the motor voltage feedback board. 0 - Ignore configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs. 1 - Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs. 2 - FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event.
Name Description VoltFdbkLossCnfg
Values
395
Default 1 = Alarm +Sft OvrTrvlCnfg Enter a value to configure the drives response to a positive software positioning over travel Options: 0 = Ignore condition. 1 = Alarm 0 - Ignore configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs. 2 = FltCoastStop 1 - Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 3 = Flt RampStop this event occurs. 4 = FltCurLimStp 2 - FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 3 - Flt RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 4 - FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. Default 1 = Alarm -Sft OvrTrvlCnfg Enter a value to configure the drives response to a negative software positioning over travel Options: 0 = Ignore condition. 1 = Alarm 0 - Ignore configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs. 2 = FltCoastStop 1 - Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 3 = Flt RampStop this event occurs. 4 = FltCurLimStp 2 - FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 3 - Flt RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 4 - FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. Default 1 = Alarm +Hrd OvrTrvlCnfg Enter a value to configure the drives response to a positive hardware positioning over travel Options: 0 = Ignore condition. 1 = Alarm 0 - Ignore configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs. 2 = FltCoastStop 1 - Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 3 = Flt RampStop this event occurs. 4 = FltCurLimStp 2 - FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 3 - Flt RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 4 - FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. Default 1 = Alarm -Hrd OvrTrvlCnfg Enter a value to configure the drives response to a negative hardware positioning over travel Options: 0 = Ignore condition. 1 = Alarm 0 - Ignore configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs. 2 = FltCoastStop 1 - Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 3 = Flt RampStop this event occurs. 4 = FltCurLimStp 2 - FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 3 - Flt RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 4 - FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. Default 1 = Alarm Position ErrCnfg Enter a value to configure the drives response to a position error condition. Options: 0 = Ignore 0 - Ignore configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs. 1 = Alarm 1 - Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 2 = FltCoastStop this event occurs. 3 = Flt RampStop 2 - FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault 4 = FltCurLimStp bit, in response to this event. 3 - Flt RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. 4 - FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response to this event. Units: Amps Rated Amps Current rating of the inverter. The drive automatically sets this at power up. Default: 22.0000 Notes: The maximum value was changed for firmware version 2.03. The maximum value was Min/Max: 0.1000/3000.0000 changed from 2500.0000 to 3000.0000 for firmware version 4.002. RO Real
396
397
398
399
400
Data Type
3-61
Linkable Read-Write
3 = Reserved 4 = Reserved 5 = Flux Only
No. 401 402
Name Description Rated Volts
Values
Units: Volt Default: 480 Min/Max: 75/750
Nameplate voltage rating of the inverter. The drive automatically sets this at power up.
Units: kHz PWM Frequency Carrier frequency for the PWM output of the drive. Drive derating may occur at higher Default: 2.0000 (Fr 5, 6, 9) carrier frequencies. For derating information, refer to the PowerFlex Reference Manual. 4.0000 (Fr 1-4) Default is dependant on power structure of the drive. Min/Max: 1.0000/15.0000 (10.0000 Fr 5, 6, 9) Note: This parameter was changed for firmware version 3.04 to not allow changes while the drive is running. Sets the drive configuration for high or low voltage class (I.e. a 400 or 480V ac drive). Allows choice of configuration and affects many drive parameters including drive rated current, voltage, power, over loads and maximum PWM carrier frequency. Note: This parameter was changed for firmware version 3.04 to allow the drive to produce an output voltage limited by Par 531 [Maximum Voltage] (or maximum voltage defined by the DC bus voltage level, Par 306 [DC Bus Voltage], and DC bus voltage utilization limit, Par 500 [Bus Util Limit]).
403
Voltage Class
Default: 3 = High Voltage Options: 2 = Low Voltage 3 = High Voltage
404 405 406
Units: Sec Dead Time The time delay between turning off and turning on an upper device and a lower device in Default: 5.0000 the power structure. This parameter is set at power up and is not user adjustable. Min/Max: 2.0000/100.0000
RO Real
Dead Time Comp
Units: % The amount of voltage correction used to compensate for the loss of voltage during dead Default: 0 time. Do not adjust. Contact factory for alternative settings. Min/Max: 0/200
RW 16-bit Integer
Default: 0 = Coast Power Loss Mode Enter a value to configure the drive's response to a loss of input power, as sensed by an Options: 0 = Coast input voltage below the value specified in Par 408 [Power Loss Level]. 1 = Reserved Enter a value of 0 to make the drive fault and coast to a stop (supply no current to the 2 = Continue motor) after the amount of time specified in Par 407 [Power Loss Time] has expired. Enter a value of 2 to make the drive fault and continue "normal" operation after the amount of time specified in Par 407 [Power Loss Time] has expired. Enter a value of 5 to make the drive provide only motor flux current during the power loss time. Units: Sec Power Loss Time Sets the amount of time that the drive will remain in a ride through condition before a fault Default: 2.0000 is detected. Min/Max: 0.0000/60.0000 % Units: Power Loss Level Sets the percentage of the bus voltage at which ride-through begins and modulation Default: 22.1 ends. When the bus voltage falls below this level and Par 406 [Power Loss Mode] is set to Min/Max: 15/95 0 Coast or 5 Flux Only, an alarm (F92 Ride Thru) will be displayed on the HIM and Scale: 0 the drive prepares for an automatic restart. Enter a percentage of the bus voltage derived from the high voltage setting for the voltage class. For example: On a 400-480V drive,
407 408
RW Real
RW 16-bit Integer
0.221 480Vac
2 = 150Vdc
Note: The definition was updated to include the bit settings for parameter 406 for firmware version 4.002.
409
Units: % Line Undervolts Controls the level of bus voltage that is needed to complete precharge and sets the level Default: 61.5000 for undervoltage alarm/fault detection. Enter a percentage of the bus voltage derived from Min/Max: 10.0000/90.0000 the value in Par 401 [Rated Volts]. For example: on a 480V drive,
RW Real
0.615 480Vac 410 411
2 = 418Vdc
RW Real
Units: Sec PreChrg TimeOut Sets the time duration of precharge. If bus voltage does not stabilize within this amount of Default: 30.0000 time, a Precharge Error exception event occurs. Min/Max: 10.0000/180.0000 Must equal 1 to allow drive to exit precharge and begin to run. Link this parameter to a controller output word to coordinate the precharge of multiple drives.
PreChrg Control
Default: 1 = Enbl PrChrg Options: 0 = Hold PrChrg 1 = Enbl PrChrg
Data Type
3-62
Linkable Read-Write
80 = HH1 P/B ID 81 = HH1 S/W ID 82 = HH1 P/B Rev 83 = HH1 S/W Rev 84 = HH1 Extr Data 85 = HH1 VoltIndx 86 = HH1 SizeIndx 87 = HH1 Option 88 = HH1 HrdPrdct 89 = HH1 H/W Mdfy 90 = HH1 1V/Amp 91 = HH1 2s/Amp 92 = HH1 Scale 93 = HH2 Data Rev 94 = HH2 Dev Type 95 = HH2 Serial # 96 = HH2 TestDate 97 = HH2 Vcn Code 98 = HH2 CrsCncID 99 = HH2 P/B ID 100 = HH2 S/W ID 101 = HH2 P/B Rev 102 = HH2 S/W Rev 103 = HH2 ExtrData 104 = HH2 VoltIndx 105 = HH2 SizeIndx 106 = HH2 Option 107 = HH2 HrdPrdct 108 = HH2 H/W Mdfy 109 = HH2 1V/Amp 110 = HH2 2s/Amp 111 = HH2 Scale
No. 412
Name Description Power EE TP Sel
Values
Enter or write a value to select drive power EEPROM data displayed in Par 413 [Power EE TP Data]. The default is 0 Zero. Note: Options 74 - 92 were changed and options 93 - 111 were added for firmware version 3.01. Options: 0 = Zero 1 = Volt Class 2 = Assy Rev 3 = ASA S/N 4 = Manuf Year 5 = Manuf Month 6 = Manuf Day 7 = Tst ProcStat 8 = Life PwrCycl 9 = Life Pwrup 10 = Life RunTime 11 = Kw Accum 13 = Inv High Vlt 14 = Reserved 15 = Fan/Pwr Cntl 16 = Temp Sensor 19 = Bus VltScale 20 = Sml PS Watts 21 = Sml PS Min V 22 = Lrg PS Watts 23 = Lrg PS Min V 24 = Inv Rated Kw 25 = Inv Rated V 26 = Inv Rated A 27 = Inv 1min Amp 28 = inv 3sec Amp 29 = SW OverC Amp 30 = DC Bus Cap 32 = Max PWM Khz 33 = Dfl PWM Khz 34 = PWM Dead us 35 = Drive Frame 38 = IGBT Rated A 39 = IGBT V Thres 40 = IGBT Slope R 41 = IGBT Sw Engy 44 = IGBT CS Tres 45 = IGBT CS Tc 46 = Diode V Thrs 47 = Diode SlopeR 48 = Diode JC Tr 49 = Diode JC Tc 50 = GBT Tjmax 51 = HS Max DegC 52 = DB IGBT Amp 53 = DB ohms 54 = DB E Jo/degC 55 = DB EB C/Watt 56 = DB B Jo/degC 57 = DB BA C/Watt 60 = DB Ambt Tmax 61 = Convt Type 62 = DC Bus Induc 63 = AC Inp Induc 64 = Precharg Res 65 = PrechThrm Tc 66 = Mtr NP Units 67 = Mtr NP Power 68 = Mtr NP Volts 69 = Mtr NP Amps 70 = Mtr NP Freq 71 = Mtr NP RPM 72 = Mtr IR Vdrop 73 = Mtr Id Ref 74 = HH1 Data Rev 75 = HH1 Dev Type 76 = HH1 Serial # 77 = HH1 Test Date 78 = HH1 Vcn Code 79 = HH1 CrsCncID
12 = Mw Hrs Accum 31 = Min PWM Khz
17 = Phs AmpScale 36 = IGBTs per Pk 18 = Gnd AmpScale 37 = GBT Rated V
413 414
Displays the data selected by Par 412 [Power EE TP Sel].
Power EE TP Data
Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2200000000
RO Real
Configures the brake and bus operation of the drive. Set bit 0 Brake Enable to enable the operation of the internal brake transistor. Set bit 1 Brake Extern to configure the brake to use an external resistor. Set bit 2 Bus Ref High to select the "high" voltage setting as the turn-on point for the Bus Voltage Regulator. With the "high" setting brake operation starts when bus voltage reaches the value of Par 415 [BusReg/Brake Ref], and Bus Voltage Regulator operation starts when bus voltage reaches the value of Par 415 [BusReg/Brake Ref] plus 4.5%. With the "low" setting, the bus regulator turns on first at the value set by Par 415 [BusReg/Brake Ref] and then the dynamic braking turns on when there are any transients above the value set in Par 415 [BusReg/Brake Ref]. Set bit 3 Bus Reg En to enable the Bus Voltage Regulator. The output of the Bus Voltage Regulator is summed with Par 128 [Regen Power Lim] and fed into the Power Limit Calculator. It, in effect, reduces regenerative torque references when the bus voltage is too high. Notes: This parameter was changed to non-linkable and bits 5 and 6 were added for future use - not active for use with firmware version 3.01. Remove bits 5 and 6 for firmware version 4.001 - not used. Bus Reg En Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Brake Enable Bus Ref High Brake Extern
Brake/Bus Cnfg
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
1 3
1 2
0 1
0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
415
Units: % BusReg/Brake Ref Sets the turn-on voltage for the bus regulator and brakes. Enter a percentage of the high Default: 111.0000 voltage setting for the voltage class. For example, on a 400-480V drive, Min/Max: 110.5000(1)/117.8000
111
2 480 = VDC
Note: The minimum value for frame 5 and up, 600V AC input drives was changed from 110.5000 to 100.0000 for firmware version 4.002.
(1) The minimum value is 100.0000 for frame 5 and up, 600V AC input drives.
Data Type
3-63
Linkable Read-Write
10 = Data State 11 = MC BrakeEnbl 12 = 1/rdb 13 = 1/th_eb 14 = 1/ce 15 = tamax 16 = 1/th_ba 17 = 1/cb 18 = DB IGBT Amp %/mS 1.0 0.0/195.3 x 10
No. 416
Name Description Brake PulseWatts
Values
Units: Watt Default: 2000.0000 Min/Max: 1.0000/1000000000.0000
RW Real
Limits the power delivered to the external Dynamic Brake (DB) resistor for one second, without exceeding the rated element temperature. You may change the value of this parameter only if you have selected an external DB resistor (set bit 1 Brake Extern of Par 414 [Brake/Bus Cnfg]. If this rating is not available from the resistor vendor, you can approximate it with this equation: Par 416 [Brake PulseWatts] = 75,000 x Weight, where Weight equals the weight of resistor wire element in pounds (not the entire weight of the resistor). Another equation you can use is: Par 416 [Brake PulseWatts] = Time Constant x Brake Watts; where Time Constant equals the amount of time to reach 63% of its rated temperature while the maximum power is applied, and Brake Watts is the peak power rating of the resistor. Note: The maximum value was changed from 1000000.0000 to 1000000000.0000 for firmware version 3.01.
417
Units: Watt Brake Watts Sets the continuous rated power reference for the Dynamic Brake (DB). You may change Default: 100.0000 the value of this parameter only if you have selected and external DB resistor (set bit 1 Min/Max: 0.0000/500000.0000 Brake Extern of Par 414 [Brake/Bus Cnfg]. Note: The maximum value was changed from 5000.0000 to 500000.0000 for firmware version 3.01. Default: 0 = Zero Brake TP Sel Enter or write a value to select the drive brake data displayed in Par 419 [Brake TP Data]. Options: 0 = Zero 1 = Duty Cycle 2 = Power Actual 3 = Max BodyTemp 4 = Max ElemTemp 5 = BodyTemp Act 6 = ElemTemp Act 7 = BTmpTripStat 8 = ETmpTripStat 9 = Int DB Ohms Displays the data selected by Par 418 [Brake TP Sel].
RW Real
418
419 420
Brake TP Data
Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000
RO Real
Displays the power structure used in the drive. This is an identifier to the firmware for power structure control. Bit 0 Lo Pwr Strct = PowerFlex 700S Frame 1 to 6 Bit 1 Hi Pwr Strct = PowerFlex 700S above Frame 6 Bit 3 Parallel Drv = PowerFlex 700S Frame 12 Note: Bit 3 Parallel Drv was added for firmware version 3.01. Lo PwrStrct Parallel Drv Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Options Hi Pwr Strct PF 700L
Pwr Strct Mode
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
421
Units: R/S Iqs Integ Freq Sets the break frequency of the torque producing (q-axis) current regulator. This and Par Default: 10 422 [Iqs Reg P Gain] determine the integral gain for the q-axis current regulator. Set by Min/Max: 0/32767 the autotune procedure. Do not change this value. Sets the proportional gain of the torque producing (q-axis) current regulator. Set by the autotune procedure. Do not change this value.
422 423
Iqs Reg P Gain
Default: 1.0 Min/Max: 0.0/100.0 Scale: x 10
%/mS Units: Iqs Rate Limit Sets the limit of the rate of change for the torque producing (q-axis) current regulator. Do Default: 800.0 not change this parameter. Use Par 355 [Iq Rate Limited] to control the q-axis current rate Min/Max: 0.0/800.0 limit. Scale: x 10 Units: % Flux Ratio Ref Default: 99.99 Active only in the Field Oriented Control (FOC) 2 motor control mode (when Par 485 Min/Max: 12.50/399.99 [Motor Ctrl Mode] equals 1 - FOC 2). Provides a scaling factor for the flux producing Scale: 100 = 32767 (d-axis) current reference. When active (Par 511 [FVC2 Mode Config], bit 28 FlxRatRef Use is set), Flux Producing (d-axis) Current Reference = Par 488 [Flux Current] x Par 424 [Flux Ratio Ref]. When inactive (Par 511 [FVC2 Mode Config], bit 28 FlxRatRef Use is cleared) Flux Producing (d-axis) Current Reference = Par 488 [Flux Current] below base speed and Flux Producing (d-axis) Current Reference = Par 488 [Flux Current] x motor base speed/motor speed above base speed. Sets the limit for the maximum rate of change for flux producing (d-axis) current.
424
RW 16-bit Integer
425
Flux Rate Limit
RW 16-bit Integer
Data Type
3-64
Linkable Read-Write
%/ 0.0 0.0/51.3 x 10 % 50.0 0.0/799.9 x 10 % 1.0 -/+799.9 x 10 % /S 5.0 0.0/1000.0 x 10
No. 426
Units: This represents the amount of flux current required to compensate for the flux saturation Default: effect of the motor. Active only for FOC 2 motor control mode. Min/Max: Scale:
Name Description Flux Satur Coef
Values
RW 16-bit Integer
427 428 429
Units: % PM Mtr CEMF Comp Provides CEMF compensation for the torque producing (q-axis) current in the permanent Default: 0 magnet motor mode. Min/Max: 0/100 Adjustment for current regulator integral frequency factor (gain).
RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer
IReg IGain Fctr
Units: R/S Ids Integ Freq Sets the break frequency of the flux producing (d-axis) current regulator. This and Par 430 Default: 10 [Ids Reg P Gain] determine the integral gain for the d-axis current regulator. Set by the Min/Max: 0/32767 autotune procedure. Do not change this value. Sets the proportional gain of the flux producing (d-axis) current regulator. Set by the autotune procedure. Do not change this value. Sets the current reference used for Motor Control (MC) Test Mode.
430 431
Ids Reg P Gain
Default: 1.0 Min/Max: 0.0/100.0 Scale: x 10 Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale: Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale:
Test Current Ref
432
Sets the frequency reference used for Motor Control (MC) Test Mode. Note: The default value was changed for firmware version 2.03.
Test Freq Ref
RW 16-bit Integer
433
Units: Test Freq Rate Sets the rate of change of frequency reference used for Motor Control (MC) Test Mode. Default: Min/Max: Scale:
RW 16-bit Integer
434
Default: 0 Mtr Vds Base Displays the motor flux producing (d-axis) voltage command when running at nameplate Min/Max -8192/0 motor speed and load. This value is determined during the auto-tune procedure. Do not change this value. Used only in FOC modes. Displays the motor torque producing (q-axis) voltage command when running at nameplate motor speed and load. This value is determined during the auto-tune procedure. Do not change this value. Used only in FOC modes.
RO 16-bit Integer
435
Mtr Vqs Base
RO 16-bit Integer
437
Default: 7971 Vqs Max Displays the maximum torque producing (q-axis) voltage allowed on the motor. Min/Max: 0/32767 Adaptation is disabled below this voltage. This value is determined during the auto-tune procedure. Do not change this value. Used only in FOC modes. Default: 5793 Vds Max Displays the maximum flux producing (d-axis) voltage allowed on the motor. Adaptation is Min/Max: 0/32767 disabled below this voltage. This value is determined during the auto-tune procedure. Do not change this value. Used only in FOC modes. Default: 246 Vqs Min Displays the minimum torque producing (q-axis) voltage required for motor control Min/Max: -/+32767 adaptation. This value is determined during the auto-tune procedure. Do not change this value. Used only in FOC modes. Default: 246 Vds Min Displays the minimum flux producing (d-axis) voltage required for motor control Min/Max: -/+32767 adaptation. Adaptation is disabled below this voltage. This value is determined during the auto-tune procedure. Do not change this value. Displays measured filtered motor flux producing (d-axis) voltage. Displays measured filtered motor torque producing (q-axis) voltage. Sets the Proportional (P) gain for the flux regulator. Do not change this value. Sets the Integral (I) gain for the flux regulator. Do not change this value.
RW 16-bit Integer
438
RW 16-bit Integer
439
RW 16-bit Integer
440
RW 16-bit Integer
441 442 443 444 445 446
Vds Fdbk Filt Vqs Fdbk Filt
Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+32767 Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+32767 Default: 150 Min/Max: 0/32767 Default: 350 Min/Max: 0/32767
RO 16-bit Integer RO 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer
Flux Reg P Gain1
Flux Reg I Gain
Units: % Slip Gain Max Displays the maximum slip frequency allowed in the motor control. The scaling is in hertz Default: 300 x 256. This value is determined during the auto-tune procedure. Do not change this value. Min/Max: 100/10000 Units: % Slip Gain Min Displays the minimum slip frequency allowed in the motor control. The scaling is in hertz x Default: 50 256. This value is determined during the auto-tune procedure. Do not change this value. Min/Max: 0/100
Data Type
3-65
Linkable Read-Write
UP-WNOn-U,W UP-VNOn-Ucur UN,WNdevShrt VN,WNdevShrt UN,VNdevShrt UP,WPdevShrt VP,WPdevShrt UP,VPdevShrt Ground Fault Ground Fault 0 0 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 Vbus Range
No. 447 448 449 450 453
Name Description Slip Reg P Gain Slip Reg I Gain
Values
Default: 35 Min/Max: 0/32767 Default: 100 Min/Max: 0/32767 Default: 250 Min/Max: 0/32767 Default: 350 Min/Max: 0/32767
Sets the Proportional (P) gain for the slip regulator. Do not change this value. Sets the Integral (I) gain for the slip regulator. Do not change this value. Sets the integral gain of the Frequency Regulator, which estimates motor speed when sensorless feedback is selected. Do not change this value. Sets the proportional gain of the Frequency Regulator, which estimates motor speed when sensorless feedback is selected. Do not change this value.
RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer
SrLss FreqReg Ki
SrLss FreqReg Kp
Default: 0 Iu Offset Sets the current offset correction for the phase U current. This value is set automatically Min/Max: -/+32767 when the drive is not running and Motor Control (MC) is not faulted. Do not change this value. Sets the current offset correction for the flux producing (d-axis) current regulator. This value is set automatically when the drive is not running and Motor Control (MC) is not faulted. Do not change this value. Displays the build number of the drive's Motor Control (MC) software.
454
Iw Offset
RW 16-bit Integer
456 457 459
MC Build Number
RO 16-bit Integer RO 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer
Default: 0.000 MC Firmware Rev Displays the major and minor revision levels of the drive's Motor Control (MC) software. Min/Max: 0.000/655.350 Changed all values to three decimal places for firmware version 4.001. Scale: x 10
IdsCompCoeff Mot
Default: 0 Defines the flux producing current (Ids) command compensation coefficient used during Min/Max: +/-32767 motoring. When this parameter is set to 1024 the amount of compensation, which is proportional to torque producing current (Iqs) command, is 100% of the rated flux current at 1 pu of Iqs command when the torque producing voltage (Vqs) regulator is off and Par 510 [FVC Mode Config], bit 7 Ids Comp En = 1. No Ids command compensation will be applied when Par 510 [FVC Mode Config], bit 7 = 0. Notes: Refer to Ids Compensation Coefficient Set Up in the PowerFlex 700S with Phase II Control Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM003, for more information. This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001.
460
IdsCompCoeff Reg
Default: 0 Defines the flux producing current (Ids) command compensation coefficient used during Min/Max: +/-32767 regeneration. When this parameter is set to 1024 the amount of compensation, which is proportional to torque producing current (Iqs) command, is 100% of the rated flux current at 1 pu of Iqs command when the Vqs regulator is off and Par 510 [FVC Mode Config], bit 7 Ids Comp En = 1. No Ids command compensation will be applied when Par 510 [FVC Mode Config], bit 7 = 0. Notes: Refer to Ids Compensation Coefficient Set Up in the PowerFlex 700S with Phase II Control Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM003, for more information. This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001. Default: 200 Defines the torque producing current (Iqs) reference level below which the slip regulator Min/Max: +/-32767 turns off, when the slip regulator turn off point is defined as ((Par 461 / 10) + 5) % of the rated Iqs reference. The slip regulator turn on point is defined as ((Par 461 / 10) + 10) % of the rated Iqs reference with the condition of the Vqs regulator is turned on. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001. Default: 150 VqsReg Off Freq Defines the output frequency level below which the Vqs regulator turns off, when the Vqs Min/Max: 0/1000 regulator turn off point is defined as (Par 462 / 10) % of the rated motor frequency. The Vqs regulator turn on point is defined as ((Par 462 / 10) + 2) % of the rated motor frequency. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001. Displays the first diagnostic error encountered by the Motor Control (MC). Errors appear in this parameter in the order in which they occurred. Note: Bits 7 & 8 have been changed to Ground Fault for firmware version 2.04. WP-VNOn-Wcur WP-UNOn-U,W VP-UNOn-Ucur Neg Parametr Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved VP-WNOn-Wcur Not Rotating Not Rotating
RW 16-bit Integer
461
SlipReg Off Iqs
RW 16-bit Integer
462
RW 16-bit Integer
463
MC Diag Error 1
Reserved
Default Bit
Reserved
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
Data Type
3-66
Linkable Read-Write
UPWN-Vuv,Vvw 0 0 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 SensOfstRnge UP-VNOn-Vuv Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved CurrSensor U Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 Reserved
No. 464
Displays the second diagnostic error encountered by the Motor Control (MC). Errors appear in this parameter in the order in which they occurred. VP-WNOn-Vvw WP-VNOn-Vvw VP-UNOn-Vuv Options Negative Wr Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved WPUN-Vuv,Vvw
Name Description MC Diag Error 2
Values
Default Bit
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
465
Displays the third diagnostic error encountered by the Motor Control (MC). Errors appear in this parameter in the order in which they occurred. Bit 9 CurrSensor U - indicates a current sensing fault in the U phase power structure of a frame 12 drive. Bit 11 CurrSensor V - indicates a current sensing fault in the V phase power structure of a frame 12 drive. Bit 13 CurrSensor W - indicates a current sensing fault in the W phase power structure of a frame 12 drive. Bit 17 IFlux Range - indicates that the Flux current is above 90% of the motor rated current. Note: Bits 1 - 7, 10, 12 and 18 were changed to Reserved, bits 9, 11, 13 and 17 were changed for firmware version 3.01. CurrSensor V IFlux Range Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved CurrSensor W
MC Diag Error 3
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default Bit
Reserved
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
Data Type
3-67
Linkable Read-Write
216 = CurrSnsChck3 217 = CurrSnsChck5 218 = FrameSize 219 = Reserved 220 = Reserved 221 = Reserved 222 = PowerMon 223 = RawIwFdbk2 224 = VqsFbFltrCom 225 = VqsErrorComm 226 = ReconswFreq 227 = ReconAngleAc 228 = VsCmdAngleVf 229 = ReconFreqInt 230 = SpeedRef 231 = CurFbkIdsFbk 232 = CurFbkIqsFbk 233 = VqsThetaEst 234 = VdsThetaEst 235 = RecnSwitch 236 = VqsFbTransf 237 = VdsFbTransf 238 = BusLimitVBEr 239 = ParDecelRtMC 240 = ACRIqsRef 241 = ACRIqsCmd 242 = IqsCmdFltr 243 = ISpdCmd 244 = AccDecRate 245 = RecThetaEx4 246 = RecVqsFdbk 247 = RecVdsFdbk 248 = VdeFilter 249 = VqsFdbkTrans 250 = VdsFdbkTrans 251 = Excitation 252 = ExciteStatus 253 = CommIdsCount 254 = ThetaEsample 255 Reserved
No. 466
Name Description MC TP1 Select
Values
Enter a value to select Motor Control (MC) data displayed in Par 467 [MC TP1 Value] and Par 468 [MC TP1 Bit]. Par 467 [MC TP1 Value] and Par 468 [MC TP1 Bit] are diagnostic tools you can use to view internal drive parameters. The default value is option 0 MuIqsRef2. Notes: Options 209 - 212 were added for firmware version 2.04. Options 213 - 254 were added for firmware version 3.01. Changed the following selections for firmware 4.001: 84,86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 95, 97, 98, 99, 103, 104, 105, 106, 108, 109, 110, 111, 163, 164, 165, 174, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 181, 182, 183. 222, 223, 224, 225, 226, 227, 228, 229, 230, 231, 232, 233, 234, 236, 237, 253. Added option 163 Flux Up Time for firmware version 4.002. Options: 0 = MuIqsRef2 43 = FluxRatio4 86 = SlipGainRate 129 = RWVvOut 172 = VqsComp 215 = CurrSnsChck1 1 = SlipRatio 2 = Ws 3 = WrEst2 4 = We 5 = VdsCmd 6 = VqsCmd 7 = VuCmd1 8 = VvCmd1 9 = VwCmd1 10 = IuFdbk 11 = IwFdbk 12 = IdsFdbk 13 = IqsFdbk 14 = VdsFdbk 15 = VuvFdbk 16 = VvwFdbk 17 = VqsFdbk 18 = IdsCmd 19 = IqsRatio 20 = MuIqsRef 21 = IqsCmd 22 = We2 23 = VuTd 24 = VvTd 25 = VwTd 26 = VuCmd2 27 = VvCmd2 28 = VwCmd2 29 = Kpwm 30 = Vds_cemf 31 = Vqs_cemf 32 = VdsCmd2 33 = VqsCmd2 34 = IdsIntegral 35 = IqsIntegral 36 = DcBus 37 = AGnd 38 = Wr2 39 = FluxRatio1 40 = VbusFdbk 41 = FluxRatio2 42 = FluxRatio3 44 = MuFlxRtioRef 45 = RcpFlxRatio1 46 = MuIfluxRef 47 = MuItestRef 48 = MotVntc 49 = BaseSlip 50 = VbusFdbk2 51 = VdsFdbk2 52 = VqsFdbk2 53 = VdsSpdVltFlt 54 = WrEst1 55 = MuTestFrqRef 56 = TestFrqRef 57 = FluxFltrN_1 58 = PrchgDlayCtr 59 = PrchTimOutCr 60 = PrchPilotCtr 61 = TrqEnableCtr 62 = MuTscan1 63 = ErStatFromCp 64 = FlxCurRteOut 65 = ThetaE 66 = SinThetaE1 67 = SinThetaE2 68 = SinThetaE3 69 = SinThetaE4 70 = SinThetaE5 71 = SinThetaE6 72 = ThetaEcor 73 = SinThtaEcor1 74 = SinThtaEcor2 75 = SinThtaEcor3 76 = SinThtaEcor4 77 = MuIRef2B 78 = SpdFdbk 79 = SpdIntegral 80 = SpdPrportnal 81 = SpdPI 82 = SpdRef 83 = SlipGainEst 84 = LatchSlipGin 85 = Ws2 87 = 88 = 89 = 90 = 91 = 92 = 93 = 94 = 95 = 96 = 97 = 98 = 99 = FiltSlipGain SlipScale SlipSclShift VdsError MotorRegen VqsSlwRtCLim MotorVlts BusUtil IdsCompMon IqsLimit VqsSlwRtCnt VqsErrMon VqsNoErrCnt 130 = RWVwOut 131 = RWuErr 132 = RWvErr 133 = RWwErr 134 = RWVuOut2 135 = RWVvOut2 136 = RWVwOut2 137 = RWPosState 138 = RWNegState 139 = BusDropVolts 140 = RecoverVolts 141 = DbDuty 142 = VdsFdbkFltr 143 = VqsFdbkFltr 144 = VbusFdbkFltr 145 = VbusMemory 173 = S4096 2.5V 174 = FreqAdjustFS 175 = Reserved 176 = FreqIntMonFB 177 = MtrCntrlSel 178 = WeMon 179 = Reserved 180 = IqsCmd2 181 = Reserved 182 = Reserved 183 = Reserved 184 = VLmtVqsRef 185 = VRefVqsRefNm 186 = VRefRsIqsNm 187 = VRefVqsSpdVN 188 = EconoVoltGn
100 = VqsIdsCmd 101 = VqsMaxMotor 102 = VqsMaxVbus 103 = FreqMinFB 104 = FreqMaxFB 105 = IdsCmdFilter 106 = DelFreqIntFB 107 = VqsError 108 = SlipBrkErrFB 109 = FastBrkOnFB 110 = FreqOutput 111 = AbsFreqOut 112 = TestMark70 113 = TestMark71 114 = TestMark72 115 = TestMark73 116 = TestMark74 117 = TestMark75 118 = TestMark76 119 = TestMark76 120 = TestMark78 121 = TestMark79 122 = TestMark7A 123 = TestMark7B 124 = TestMark7C 125 = TestMark7D 126 = TestMark7E 127 = TestMark7F 128 = RWVuOut
146 = VpEnc0VelFbk 189 = F Output Fre 147 = VpEnc1VelFbk 190 = TrqCreflqsCm 148 = VPOpt0VelFbk 191 = Snk Wr 149 = VPOpt1VelFbk 192 = SrLssWrAve 150 = BitSelect1 151 = BitSelect2 152 = SrLssWeEst2 153 = MuIqsRef2 155 = ETVdsFbkA 156 = ETVqsFbkA 157 = ETVdsFbkS 158 = ETVqsFbkS 159 = ETAtanVqVd 160 = ETByMtrVDfr 161 = VelRef2 162 = VelOutput 163 = Flux Up Time 164 = FrameSize 165 = VdTargetMon 166 = ThetaELiner 167 = PprCntDfcOt 168 = PprCntDfcTh 169 = LinearPprCnt 170 = ActiveFdbk 171 = VdsComp 193 = CurFbkIqsFbk 194 = ACRIqsErr 195 = CrefsqIdsCmd 196 = CurFbkIdsFbk 198 = VdsCmc700B 199 = VqsRefNom 200 = VqsRsIqsNom 201 = VqsSpdVltNom 202 = VltLmtVqsRef 203 = IdsFbkDeriv 204 = VdsRefNom 205 = VdsRsIdsNom 206 = VdsSpdVltNom 207 = VltLmtVdsRef 208 = IdsFbkDeriv 209 = VuvFbkOffset 210 = VvwFbkOffset 211 = IuFbkOffset 212 = IwFbkOffset 213 = KSlipNP 214 = IUnbalanceSt
154 = EstThetaByMV 197 = VqsCmd700B
Data Type
3-68
Linkable Read-Write
P.U. 0.0 +/-8.0 pu 1.0 = 100% of the Motor Torque
No. 467
Default: 0 Displays the data selected by Par 466 [MC TP1 Select]. This display should only be used Min/Max: -/+2147483648 if the selected value is integer data. This parameter is a diagnostic tool you can use to view internal drive parameters. Default: 00000000000000000000000000000000 MC TP1 Bit Displays the data selected by Par 466 [MC TP1 Select]. This display should only be used Min: 00000000000000000000000000000000 if the selected value is bit-enumerated data. Par 468 [MC TP1 Bit] is a diagnostic tool you Max: 11111111111111111111111111111111 can use to view internal drive parameters. Displays the current regulator feedforward compensation. Do not change this value.
Name Description MC TP1 Value
Values
RO 32-bit Integer
468
RO 32-bit Boolean
469 470 471
FVC CEMF Comp
Units: % Default: 0 Min/Max: 0/100 Default: 1000 Min/Max: 0/32767 Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale:
RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RO Real
Displays the additional proportional gain used at the start of Bus voltage limited field weakening. Do not change this value.
Flux Reg P Gain2
Estimated Torque
Displays the calculated motor shaft torque. Notes: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03. The Units and Scale information were added for firmware version 4.002.
472
Units: Sec PreCharge Delay Adjusts the delay between the time all other precharge conditions have been met and the Default: 2.0 time the drive leaves the precharge state. Can be used to control the sequence of Min/Max: 0.0/Calculated precharge completion in a drive system. The maximum value of this parameter is calculated as follows: Par 472 [PreCharge Delay] = Par 410 [PreChrg TimeOut] - 1.0 second.
RW 16-bit Integer
Data Type
3-69
Linkable Read-Write
216 = CurrSnsChck3 217 = CurrSnsChck5 218 = FrameSize 219 = Reserved 220 = Reserved 221 = Reserved 222 = PowerMon 223 = RawIwFdbk2 224 = VqsFbFltrCom 225 = VqsErrorComm 226 = ReconswFreq 227 = ReconAngleAc 228 = VsCmdAngleVf 229 = ReconFreqInt 230 = SpeedRef 231 = CurFbkIdsFbk 232 = CurFbkIqsFbk 233 = VqsThetaEst 234 = VdsThetaEst 235 = RecnSwitch 236 = VqsFbTransf 237 = VdsFbTransf 238 = BusLimitVBEr 239 = ParDecelRtMC 240 = ACRIqsRef 241 = ACRIqsCmd 242 = IqsCmdFltr 243 = ISpdCmd 244 = AccDecRate 245 = RecThetaEx4 246 = RecVqsFdbk 247 = RecVdsFdbk 248 = VdeFilter 249 = VqsFdbkTrans 250 = VdsFdbkTrans 251 = Excitation 252 = ExciteStatus 253 = CommIdsCount 254 = ThetaEsample 255 Reserved
No. 473
Name Description MC TP2 Select
Values
Enter a value to select Motor Control (MC) data displayed in Par 474 [MC TP2 Value] and Par 468 [MC TP1 Bit]. Par 474 [MC TP2 Value], and Par 468 [MC TP1 Bit] are diagnostic tools you can use to view internal drive parameters. This parameter should not be changed by the user. The default value is option 0 MuIqsRef2. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03. Added option 163 Flux Up Time for firmware version 4.002. Options: 0 = MuIqsRef2 43 = FluxRatio4 86 = SlipGainRate 129 = RWVvOut 172 = VqsComp 215 = CurrSnsChck1 1 = SlipRatio 2 = Ws 3 = WrEst2 4 = We 5 = VdsCmd 6 = VqsCmd 7 = VuCmd1 8 = VvCmd1 9 = VwCmd1 10 = IuFdbk 11 = IwFdbk 12 = IdsFdbk 13 = IqsFdbk 14 = VdsFdbk 15 = VuvFdbk 16 = VvwFdbk 17 = VqsFdbk 18 = IdsCmd 19 = IqsRatio 20 = MuIqsRef 21 = IqsCmd 22 = We2 23 = VuTd 24 = VvTd 25 = VwTd 26 = VuCmd2 27 = VvCmd2 28 = VwCmd2 29 = Kpwm 30 = Vds_cemf 31 = Vqs_cemf 32 = VdsCmd2 33 = VqsCmd2 34 = IdsIntegral 35 = IqsIntegral 36 = DcBus 37 = AGnd 38 = Wr2 39 = FluxRatio1 40 = VbusFdbk 41 = FluxRatio2 42 = FluxRatio3 44 = MuFlxRtioRef 45 = RcpFlxRatio1 46 = MuIfluxRef 47 = MuItestRef 48 = MotVntc 49 = BaseSlip 50 = VbusFdbk2 51 = VdsFdbk2 52 = VqsFdbk2 53 = VdsSpdVltFlt 54 = WrEst1 55 = MuTestFrqRef 56 = TestFrqRef 57 = FluxFltrN_1 58 = PrchgDlayCtr 59 = PrchTimOutCr 60 = PrchPilotCtr 61 = TrqEnableCtr 62 = MuTscan1 63 = ErStatFromCp 64 = FlxCurRteOut 65 = ThetaE 66 = SinThetaE1 67 = SinThetaE2 68 = SinThetaE3 69 = SinThetaE4 70 = SinThetaE5 71 = SinThetaE6 72 = ThetaEcor 73 = SinThtaEcor1 74 = SinThtaEcor2 75 = SinThtaEcor3 76 = SinThtaEcor4 77 = MuIRef2B 78 = SpdFdbk 79 = SpdIntegral 80 = SpdPrportnal 81 = SpdPI 82 = SpdRef 83 = SlipGainEst 84 = LatchSlipGin 85 = Ws2 87 = 88 = 89 = 90 = 91 = 92 = 93 = 94 = 95 = 96 = 97 = 98 = 99 = FiltSlipGain SlipScale SlipSclShift VdsError MotorRegen VqsSlwRtCLim MotorVlts BusUtil IdsCompMon IqsLimit VqsSlwRtCnt VqsErrMon VqsNoErrCnt 130 = RWVwOut 131 = RWuErr 132 = RWvErr 133 = RWwErr 134 = RWVuOut2 135 = RWVvOut2 136 = RWVwOut2 137 = RWPosState 138 = RWNegState 139 = BusDropVolts 140 = RecoverVolts 141 = DbDuty 142 = VdsFdbkFltr 143 = VqsFdbkFltr 144 = VbusFdbkFltr 145 = VbusMemory 173 = S4096 2.5V 174 = FreqAdjustFS 175 = Reserved 176 = FreqIntMonFB 177 = MtrCntrlSel 178 = WeMon 179 = Reserved 180 = IqsCmd2 181 = Reserved 182 = Reserved 183 = Reserved 184 = VLmtVqsRef 185 = VRefVqsRefNm 186 = VRefRsIqsNm 187 = VRefVqsSpdVN 188 = EconoVoltGn
100 = VqsIdsCmd 101 = VqsMaxMotor 102 = VqsMaxVbus 103 = FreqMinFB 104 = FreqMaxFB 105 = IdsCmdFilter 106 = DelFreqIntFB 107 = VqsError 108 = SlipBrkErrFB 109 = FastBrkOnFB 110 = FreqOutput 111 = AbsFreqOut 112 = TestMark70 113 = TestMark71 114 = TestMark72 115 = TestMark73 116 = TestMark74 117 = TestMark75 118 = TestMark76 119 = TestMark76 120 = TestMark78 121 = TestMark79 122 = TestMark7A 123 = TestMark7B 124 = TestMark7C 125 = TestMark7D 126 = TestMark7E 127 = TestMark7F 128 = RWVuOut
146 = VpEnc0VelFbk 189 = F Output Fre 147 = VpEnc1VelFbk 190 = TrqCreflqsCm 148 = VPOpt0VelFbk 191 = Snk Wr 149 = VPOpt1VelFbk 192 = SrLssWrAve 150 = BitSelect1 151 = BitSelect2 152 = SrLssWeEst2 153 = MuIqsRef2 155 = ETVdsFbkA 156 = ETVqsFbkA 157 = ETVdsFbkS 158 = ETVqsFbkS 159 = ETAtanVqVd 160 = ETByMtrVDfr 161 = VelRef2 162 = VelOutput 163 = Flux Up Time 164 = FrameSize 165 = VdTargetMon 166 = ThetaELiner 167 = PprCntDfcOt 168 = PprCntDfcTh 169 = LinearPprCnt 170 = ActiveFdbk 171 = VdsComp 193 = CurFbkIqsFbk 194 = ACRIqsErr 195 = CrefsqIdsCmd 196 = CurFbkIdsFbk 198 = VdsCmc700B 199 = VqsRefNom 200 = VqsRsIqsNom 201 = VqsSpdVltNom 202 = VltLmtVqsRef 203 = IdsFbkDeriv 204 = VdsRefNom 205 = VdsRsIdsNom 206 = VdsSpdVltNom 207 = VltLmtVdsRef 208 = IdsFbkDeriv 209 = VuvFbkOffset 210 = VvwFbkOffset 211 = IuFbkOffset 212 = IwFbkOffset 213 = KSlipNP 214 = IUnbalanceSt
154 = EstThetaByMV 197 = VqsCmd700B
474
Default: 0.0 MC TP2 Value Displays the data selected by Par 473 [MC TP2 Select]. This display should only be used Min/Max: +/- 2147483648 if the selected value is integer data. This parameter is a diagnostic tool you can use to view internal drive parameters. This parameter should not be changed by the user. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03.
RO 32-bit Integer
Data Type
3-70
Linkable Read-Write
72 = 73 = 74 = 75 = 76 = HH Precharge HH Fan Alarm HH BusComm HH HW Incomp HH GateShort 3 = V/Hz 4 = Test
No. 475
Name Description MC FaultTPSelect
Values
Enter or write a value to select the Motor Control (MC) Fault Data displayed in Par 476 [MC FaultTP Value]. This parameter should not be changed by the user. Notes: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03. The value for option 67 was changed from HH GateShort to MCStatus1 for firmware version 2.04. Values 68 - 76 were added for firmware version 3.01. Options: 0 = IqsRef2 14 = DcBus 29 = DbDuty 43 = RotorFluxEst 57 = VbusDrop 71 = HH OverLoad 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= 8= 9= Ws We We2 VdsCmd VqsCmd VdsFdbk VqsFdbk luFdbk IwFdbk 15 = VbusFdbk 16 = VbusFdbkFltr 17 = VbusMemory 18 = Kpwm 19 = ThetaE 20 = FldWeakActiv 21 = MtrFlxPU 23 = SlipGainFltr 24 = SlipVdsCmd 25 = MotorVolts 26 = BusUtil 27 = IqsLimit 28 = VqsIdsCmd 30 = VelFdbkEnc0 31 = VelFdbkEnc1 32 = VdsCmd2 33 = VelFdbkOpt1 34 = Reserved 35 = Reserved 36 = Reserved 37 = Reserved 38 = TorqueEst 39 = TorqueEstFlt 40 = Reserved 41 = PowerCalc 42 = TorqueCmd 44 = Ws2 45 = BusDropVolts 46 = RecoverVolts 47 = TestDtoA0 48 = TestDtoA1 49 = TestDtoA2 50 = TestDtoA3 51 = RideThruActv 52 = PreChrgReqVp 53 = Reserved 54 = Reserved 55 = Reserved 56 = TorqTrimActv 58 = VdsMax 59 = VbusLow 60 = VbusRising 61 = PreChrgDone 62 = FieldWeak 63 = Reserved 64 = DynamBrakeOn 65 = Reserved 66 = MCStatusMon 67 = MCStatus1 68 = HH OverCurr 69 = HH BusOvrVlt 70 = HH Tr Desat RO 32-bit Integer
10 = IdsFdbk 11 = IqsFdbk 12 = IdsCmd 13 = IqsCmd
476
MC FaultTP Value
Default: 0.0 Displays the data selected by Par 475 [MC FaultTPSelect]. This parameter should not be Min/Max: +/- 2147483648 changed by the user. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03.
477
Est Theta Delay
Units: mSec Active only in Permanent Magnet motor mode (when Par 485 [Motor Ctrl Mode] equals 2 Default: 10 PMag Motor). Provides a delay for the function that compares the estimated rotor Min/Max: 2/1024 position and the data from the position sensor. Default: 0 Min/Max: +/-2147483648 Default: 0 Min/Max: 0 - 4294967295 Default: 32 Min/Max: +/-2147483648 Default: 1.25 Min/Max: Default: 1.25 Min/Max: Default: Min/Max: +/-2147483648
RW 16-bit Integer
478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485
VPL Mem Password

Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03.
RW 32-bit Integer RW 32-bit Integer RW 32-bit Integer RW Real
VPL Mem Address

VPL Mem Data Int

VPL Mem Data Flt

VPL Mem Data Bit

RW 32-bit Integer RO 32-bit Integer RO Real
VPL Mem Link Int

VPL Mem Link Flt

Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03. Default: 0 = FOC Motor Ctrl Mode Enter a value to select the operating mode for the Motor Control (MC). Options: 0 = FOC Value 0 - Field Oriented Control (FOC) is induction motor control with voltage 1 = FOC 2 adaptation. 2 = PMag Motor Value 1 - Field Oriented Control 2 (FOC 2) is induction motor control with temperature adaptation. (This option is used only for motors manufactured by Reliance Electric Japan.) Value 2 - Permanent Magnet Motor Control (Pmag Motor) is permanent magnet motor operation. Value 3 - V/Hz is volts per hertz motor control. Value 4 - Test is the test mode.
Data Type
3-71
Linkable Read-Write
Hz 0.470 0.000/32.000 x 1000 % 30.00 0.00/75.00 x 100 % 100.0 0.00/799.99 100 = 4096 % 1.00 0.00/100.00 100 = 8192 % 20.00 0.00/100.00 100 = 8192 % 0.0 -/+800.0 x 10 % 0.0 -/+800.0 x 10 % 0 -/+200 100 = 8192 % 0 -/+200 100 = 8192 % 90.0 0.0/100.0 100 = 8192 mSec 100 0/32767 100 = 8192
No. 486
Name Description Rated Slip Freq
Values
Units: Displays the control slip frequency, determined from Par 3 [Motor NP Hertz] and Par 4 Default: [Motor NP RPM]. Measured and updated by the autotune procedure. Do not change this Min/Max: value. Scale: Note: Changed the attributes to allow changing this parameter while the drive is running for firmware version 3.01. Defines a coefficient used to calculate the rotor temperature from the measured stator temperature. Used only in Field Oriented Control - 2 (FOC2) mode. See Par Par 485 [Motor Ctrl Mode]. Specifies the magnetizing current that produces rated flux in the motor in a per unit (percent representation). Measured by the auto-tune procedure. Do not change this value. Displays flux producing (d-axis) current feedback.
RW 16-bit Integer
487
Motor NTC Coef
Units: % Default: 100 Min/Max: 50/200 Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale:
RW 16-bit Integer
488
Flux Current
RW 16-bit Integer
489 490
Flx CurFdbk (Id)
Units: P.U. Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+8.0000 pu Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale: Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale: Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale:
RO Real
Displays the sum of the stator and cable inductances of the motor in per unit (percent representation), as determined by the auto-tune procedure. Scaled to percent of rated motor impedance. Do not change this value. Note: the default value was changed from 8192 to 4096 for firmware version 3.01. Displays the sum of the stator and cable resistances of the motor in per unit (percent representation), as determined by the auto-tune procedure. Scaled to percent of rated motor impedance. Do not change this value. Displays the sum of the motor stator and rotor leak inductance, and motor cable inductances in per unit (percent representation), as determined by the auto-tune procedure. Scaled to percent of rated motor impedance. Do not change this value.
StatorInductance
RW 16-bit Integer
491
StatorResistance
RW 16-bit Integer
492
Leak Inductance
RW 16-bit Integer
493 494 495
Leak Indc Satur1 Leak Indc Satur2 Iqs Command
Displays the leakage inductance correction for the first overload level as determined by the autotune procedure. Displays the leakage inductance correction for the first overload level as determined by the auto-tune procedure. Displays the torque producing (q-axis) current command.
Units: % Default: 100.00 Min/Max: 25.00/100.00 Units: % Default: 100.00 Min/Max: 25.00/100.00 Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale: Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale: Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale: Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale:
RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RO 16-bit Integer
496
Displays the flux producing (d-axis) current command.
Ids Command
RO 16-bit Integer
497
Displays the command for initiation of voltage on the torque producing axis (q-axis).
Vqs Command
RO 16-bit Integer
498
Displays the command for initiation of voltage on the flux producing axis (d-axis).
Vds Command
RO 16-bit Integer
499 500
Displays torque producing (q-axis) current feedback.
Trq CurFdbk (Iq)
Units: P.U. Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+8.0000 Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale: Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale:
RO Real
Sets the maximum allowed bus voltage utilization for the Motor Control. Do not change this value. Higher values may result in control instability or over-current faults.
Bus Util Limit
RW 16-bit Integer
501
Sets the delay between the time the drive is enabled and the time the Motor Control applies torque.
Torque En Dly
RW 16-bit Integer
502
Units: % Rotor Resistance Displays rotor resistance, as determined by the auto-tune procedure. Scaled to percent of Default: 1.00 rated motor impedance. Do not change this value. Min/Max: 0.00/100.00 Scale: 100 = 8192
RW 16-bit Integer
Data Type
3-72
No. 503 504 505 506
Units: R/S Sets the bandwidth for the current regulator. Par 402 [PWM Frequency] limits the maximum Default: 600 value. Reducing the value reduces current regulator over-shoot. Min/Max: 100/30000 Determined by auto-tune procedure.
Name Description Current Reg BW
Values
PM AbsEncd Offst
Default: 0 Min/Max: 0/65535 Units: mSec Default: 2000 Min/Max: 500/5000
Defines the time interval used for the automated measurement of Par 504 [PM AbsEncd Offst] for a Permanent Magnet (PM) motor.
PM TestWait Time
Units: %/mS PM Test Idc Ramp Defines the ramp rate of the Flux Producing (d-axis) current reference that is used for the Default: 0.1 automated measurement of Par 504 [PM AbsEncd Offst] for a Permanent Magnet (PM) Min/Max: 0.0/195.3 motor. Scale: x 10 Defines the ramp rate of the frequency reference that is used for the automated measurement of Par 504 [PM AbsEncd Offst] for a Permanent Magnet (PM) motor.
507
PM Test FreqRamp
%/mS 0.1 0.0/195.3 x 10 % 10.0 -/+799.9 x 10
508
Defines the frequency reference that is used for the automated measurement of Par 504 [PM AbsEncd Offst] for a Permanent Magnet (PM) motor.
PM Test Freq Ref
509
Units: % PM Test I Ref Defines the amplitude of the Flux Producing (d-axis) current reference that is used for the Default: 30.0 automated measurement of Par 504 [PM AbsEncd Offst] for a Permanent Magnet (PM) Min/Max: 0.0/799.9 motor. Scale: x 10
510
Configures Field Oriented Control (FOC) operation. Bit 4 SlipTuneDone when set, the value in Par 486 [Rated Slip Freq] is used as the slip gain before the slip regulator becomes active, after power is cycled, or when the drive is reset by the system. When the Slip Tune is completed, this bit will be automatically be set and Par 486 will be updated. Bit 7 Ids Comp En setting this bit runs the Ids test, to establish the initial flux current level for the motor, and the inertia test (even if already run). Bit 12 SlipRsCompEn when set, the stator resistance will be compensated based on the output of the slip regulator. Bit16 ManuCurOffst when set, Par 453 [Iu Offset] is used as the phase U current feedback offset value and Par 454 [Iw Offset] is used as the phase W current feedback offset value. When this bit is not set (default) the phase U and W current feedback offset values are automatically updated when the drive is in a stop condition except during the first 10 seconds of the stop condition. Bit17 ManuVltOffst when this bit is set, Par 549 [Vuv Fdbk Offset] is used as the UV voltage feedback offset value and Par 550 [Vvw Fdbk Offset] is used as the VW voltage feedback offset value. Bit 23 SyncTrans En when set (default), the synchronous transfer algorithm using voltage feedback data is active. Notes: Bit changes were made for firmware version 2.03. Bits 10 and 11 were added for firmware version 3.01. Changed bit 3 from Reserved to FastFluxDsbl for firmware version 3.03. Added bits 4, 7, 12, 16, 17 and 23 for firmware version 4.001.
FVC Mode Config
!
Options Reserved
ATTENTION: Do not modify this parameter. Motor/Drive instabilities and damage could result.
ReflWaveComp
BusGain Comp
SlipRsCompEn
LwSpdRflctWv
SlipTuneDone
ManuCurOffst
SrLss RdThru
SyncTrans En
Flux Reg Use
SlipSlewRtEn
VltMinorLpEn
SoftAdptGain
SlipPrloadEn
ManuVltOffst
Ids Comp En
FastFluxDsbl
Flux Reg En
SlipGain Est
Slip Reg En
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved 0 1
Default Bit
1 8
0 7
1 6
1 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 0
Reserved 0 = False 1 = True
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer
3-73
No. 511
Name Description FVC2 Mode Config
Values
Configures Field Oriented Control - 2 (FOC2) operation. Notes: Bit changes were made for firmware version 2.03. This parameter was changed to non-linkable for firmware version 3.01.
!
Options LnfSnsr Dir
BusGain Comp
CEMF We Use
FlxRatRf Use
LnfSnsr Use
NTC Active
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved 0 1
Default Bit
1 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 0
Reserved 0 = False 1 = True Reserved 0 0 0 = False 1 = True 0 0 0 = False 1 = True Reserved
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
512
Configures Permanent Magnet (PM) operation. Bit 9 ReflWaveComp when set, Reflected Wave Correction is enabled. Notes: Bit changes were made for firmware version 2.03. This parameter was changed to non-linkable for firmware version 3.01. Added bit 9 for firmware version 4.001.
PMag Mode Config
!
Options LinrSnsr Dir
ReflWaveComp
BusGain Comp
CEMF We Use
PMVltRegUse
FlxRatRf Use
LinrSnsr Use
PMVltRegEn
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default Bit
1 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
513
Configures V/Hz control mode operation. Notes: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03. Changed bit 3 from Reserved to FastFluxDsbl for firmware version 3.03. Bits 8, 9, and 21 were changed to be not changeable while the drive is running.
V/Hz Mode Config
!
Options Reserved
ReflWaveComp
BusGain Comp
VltMinorLpEn
FastFluxDsbl
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default Bit
1 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
1 3
0 2
0 1
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Reserved
Reserved
3-74
No. 514
Configures the Motor Control (MC) test mode. Note: This parameter was changed to non-linkable for firmware version 3.01.
Name Description Test Mode Config
Values
!
Options Reserved
ReflWave Comp
BusGain Comp
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved 0 1
Default Bit
1 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 0
Reserved 0 = False 1 = True
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
515
Configures FOC tuning mode. Bit 1 FluxCurrTune when set, the value in Par 488 [Flux Current] is used as the flux current at the beginning of the magnetic inductance test. When this bit is not set (default), an automatically calculated (preset) flux current is used as the flux current at the beginning of the magnetic inductance test. Bit 2 NoTimeLimit when set, the time limit fault detection during the magnetizing inductance test is disabled. Note: Bits 1 and 2 were added for firmware version 4.001.
FVC Tune Config
!
Options Reserved
NoRotateTune
FluxCurrTune
NoTimeLimit
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
Reserved
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
516
Configures FOC 2 tuning mode.
FVC2 Tune Config
!
Options Reserved
NoRotateTune
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
Reserved
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
3-75
No. 517
Name Description PMag Tune Config
Values
Configures Permanent Magnet Motor tuning mode.
!
Reserved Options
IndTestA set
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
518
Indicates the status of the MC diagnostic tests. PDgTrWP-UNOn PDgTrWP-VNOn PDgTrUP-VNOn PDgTrUNWNOn Comm Rs Meas Comm SigmaLs PDgTrUPWPOn CommCntEncls PDgUP-WNOn Pdiag TrWNOn Pdiag TrWPOn Pdg VbusSens 0 0 0 = False 1 = True 0 0 Pdg VbusSens 0 = False 1 = True RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RO 16-bit Integer RO 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer Pdiag TrUNOn PDgVP-UNOn Pdiag TrVNOn Pdiag TrUPOn 0 1 0 1 Pdiag TrUPOn Pdiag TrVPOn Options PM EncOffset PwrDiagFltPt Rot Dir Chk Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved PDgTrVP-WNOn CommParamCal CommLmEncles Comm Lm Meas
MC Diag Status
Default Bit
Comm Count
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
519
Indicates which MC diagnostic tests are completed. PDgTrWP-UNOn PDgTrWP-VNOn PDgTrUP-VNOn PDgTrUNWNOn Comm Rs Meas Comm SigmaLs PDgTrUPWPOn CommCntEncls PDgUP-WNOn Pdiag TrWNOn Pdiag TrWPOn Pdiag TrUNOn PDgVP-UNOn Pdiag TrVNOn Pdiag TrVPOn Options PM EncOffset PwrDiagFltPt Rot Dir Chk Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved PDgTrVP-WNOn CommParamCal CommLmEncles Comm Lm Meas
MC Diag Done
Default Bit
Comm Count
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale:
520
Indicates the percent-per unit inductance of the motor stator in the torque producing (q-axis).
PM Q Inductance
% 20.00 0.00/399.99 100 = 8192 % 20.00 0.00/399.99 100 = 8192 % 1.50 0.00/100.00 100 = 8192 % 89.99 0.00/399.99 100 = 8192
521
Units: PM D Inductance Indicates the percent-per unit inductance of the motor stator in the flux producing (d-axis). Default: Min/Max: Scale: Indicates the percent-per unit resistance of the motor stator.
522
PM Stator Resist
523
Indicates the coefficient for Counter Electro Motive Force (CEMF) voltage, normalized to base motor speed.
PM Mtr CEMF Coef
525
Units: Hz Slip Ratio Used by the Field Oriented Control - 2 (FOC2) mode. Indicates the present operating slip Default: 0.00 frequency at 100% Torque Producing Current (Iqs) scaled to hertz x 100. Min/Max: 0.00/327.67 Scale: x 10 Displays stator frequency as a percentage of Par 3 [Motor NP Hertz].
526
Stator Frequency
% 0.0 -/+800.0 x 10
527
Sets the voltage boost level for starting and acceleration when V/Hz mode is selected. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03.
Start/Acc Boost
Units: VAC Default: 50.0 Min/Max: 0.0/1150.0
3-76
No. 528 529 530 531 532
Sets the boost level for steady state or deceleration when V/Hz mode is selected. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03.
Name Description Run Boost
Values
Units: VAC Default: 50.0 Min/Max: 0.0/1150.0 Units: VAC Default: 1150.0 Min/Max: 0.0/6900.0 Units: Hz Default: 150.0 Min/Max: 0.0/400.0 Units: VAC Default: 460.0 Min/Max: 60.0/690.0
Break Voltage
Sets the voltage the drive will output at Par 530 [Break Frequency]. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03. Sets the frequency the drive will output at Par 529 [Break Voltage]. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03. Sets the highest voltage the drive will output. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03.
Break Frequency
Maximum Voltage
Units: Hz Maximum Freq Sets the highest frequency the drive will output. This parameter is a function of Par 3 [Motor Default: (Par 3 [Motor NP Hertz] * 2) + 10Hz NP Hertz]. Min/Max: Par 3 [Motor NP Hertz] + 10 Hz/420.0 Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03.
533
SlewRateTimeLimt
Default: 0.0 Min/Max: 0.0/1126.0 Defines the time limit in seconds during which torque producing voltage (Vqs) regulator output variations are limited by each slew rate at the transition where the Vqs regulator turns on. The same time limit is applied at the transition to the slip regulator when the slip regulator turns on. A value of zero disables the slew rate function on both the Vqs regulator output and the slip regulator output. Par 553 defines the slew rate for the slip regulator and Par 586 [IdsCmd Slew Rate] defines the slew rate for the Vqs regulator. Notes: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. This parameter was renamed from Flux Gain Adjust to SlewRateTimeLimit, the default value was changed to 10.0 and the minimum value was changed to 0.0 for firmware version 4.001. Adjusts the electrical angle to maintain stable motor operation. An increase in the value increases the angle adjustment. Default: 51.0 Min/Max: 0.0/32767.0
537 538 539 540
SrLssAngleStblty SrLss VoltStblty SrLss StbltyFilt V/Hz Status
Default: 93.0 Adjusts the voltage to maintain stable motor operation. An increase in the value increases Min/Max: 0.0/32767.0 the output voltage adjustment. Default: 3250.0 The coefficient is used to adjust the bandwidth of a low pass filter. The smaller the value of Min/Max: 0.0/32767.0 the coefficient, the lower the bandwidth of the filter. Indicates the limit status of the V/Hz Control Operation. Note: This parameter was added form firmware version 2.03. Current Lim Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Options Bus Volt Lim
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True Default: 0.0 Min/Max: +/- 16384 RW 16-bit Integer
541
SrLss Angl Comp
Not currently used. Note: This parameter was added for future use - not active for use with firmware version 2.03 and above. Not currently used. Note: This parameter was added for future use - not active for use with firmware version 2.03 and above. Sets the resistance value of an external dynamic braking resistor. This value is used to determine the power applied to the resistor and thus calculate its temperature. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001. Sets the responsiveness of the bus regulator. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03. Proportional gain for the bus regulator. Used to adjust regulator response. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03. Derivative gain for the bus regulator. Used to control regulator overshoot. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03.
542
SrLss Volt Comp
Units: Volts Default: 100.0 Min/Max: +/- 1000.0 Units: Ohms Default: 49.0 Min/Max: 0.1/500.0 Default: 450.0 Min/Max: 0.0/100000 Default: 1500.0 Min/Max: 0.0/10000.0 Default: 1000.0 Min/Max: 0.0/10000.0
544
External DB Res
545 546 547
Bus Reg Ki
Bus Reg Kp Bus Reg Kd

RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW Real RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer
3-77
No. 548
Name Description Bus Reg ACR Kp
Values
Default: 225.0 This proportional gain, in conjunction with Par 545 [Bus Reg Ki], adjusts the output Min/Max: 0.0/100000 frequency of the drive during a bus limit or inertia ride through condition. The output frequency is adjusted in response to an error in the active, or torque producing, current to maintain the active bus limit, or inertia ride through bus reference. A larger value of gain reduces the dynamic error of the active current. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 2.03. Default: 16384.0 Vuv Fdbk Offset Displays the motor U phase to V phase offset voltage from the voltage feedback circuit. The Min/Max: 15764.0/17004.0 value of the offset is a uni-polarity signal. A zero offset is equal to 16384. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
549
550
Vvw Fdbk Offset
Displays the motor V phase to W phase offset voltage from the voltage feedback circuit. The value of the offset is a uni-polarity signal. A zero offset is equal to 16384. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
Default: 16384.0 Min/Max: 15764.0/17004.0
551 552 553
Units: uSec CurrFdbk AdjTime Compensates for current feedback delays in High Horse Power drives (frames 9 and up). Default: 0.0 Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Min/Max: 0.0/50.0 The Slip Gain value to be pre-loaded if the drive is powered down. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
Slip Preload Val
Default: 120.0 Min/Max: 0.0/8192.0
Slip Slew Rate
Units: uSec Sets the rate at which the Slip Gain Regulator output transitions from the inactive state to Default: 0.200 the active state. Min/Max: 0.010/16.383 Notes: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. The default value was changed from 2.000 to 0.200 for firmware version 4.001.
554
LED Status
Used to monitor LED statuses including the main controller, SynchLink and DriveLogix5370 from a HIM or an application program (e.g., DriveExplorer). This feature is only available with DriveLogix version 15.03 or later. Bit 0 Sts Active - Drive running, no faults are present. Bit 1 Sts Ready - Drive ready, but not running & no faults are present. Bit 2 Sts HW Fault - A non-resettable fault has occurred in the drive. Bit 3 Sts Fault - A fault has occurred in the drive. Bit 4 Sts Alarm - A type 1 (user configurable) alarm condition exists, but the drive continues to run. Bit 5 Sts RunInhbt - A type 2 (non-configurable) alarm condition exists, drive continues to run. Bit 6 Sync InSync - The module is configured as the time keeper or the module is configured as a follower and synchronization is complete. Bit 7 Sync NotSync - The follower(s) are not configured with the time keeper. Bit 8 DL Run Mode - The controller is in Run mode. Bit 9 DL Force Act - I/O forces are active (enabled) but may or may not exist. Bit 10 DL ForceNtEn - One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state, but the forces have not been enabled. Bit 11 DL Battery - Either the battery is not installed or 95% discharged and should be replaced. Bit 12 DL I/O Activ - The controller is communicating with all the devices in its I/O configuration. Bit 13 DL I/O Alarm - One or more devices in the I/O configuration of the controller are not responding. Bit 14 DL I/O Fault - The controller is not communicating to any devices and is faulted. Bit 15 DL ComActive - RS-232 activity. Bit 16 DL Fault - The controller detected a non-recoverable fault, so it cleared the project from memory. Bit 17 DL NotActive - If the controller is a new, then it requires a firmware update, or if the controller is not new, a major fault occurred. Bit 18 DL OK - Controller is OK. Bit 19 DL Loading - The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory. Bit 20 DL CF Flash - The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card. Bit 21 DL CF Format - The CompactFlash memory is not initialized. Bit 22 DL CF Error - CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. DL ComActive DL CF Format DL ForceNtEn DL Run Mode Sts HW Fault DL NotActive DL Force Act DL I/O Alarm Sts RunInhbt DL CF Flash Sync InSync DL CF Error DL I/O Fault DL I/O Activ DL Loading Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Sync NotSync DL Battery Sts Ready 0 1
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 0
Sts Active 0 = False 1 = True
Sts Alarm
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Sts Fault
DL Fault
DL OK

RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 32-bit Integer RW Real
3-78
No. 555
Indicates the status of the Motor Control (MC) Processor and related functions. Note: Changed bit 18 from Reserved to Vqs Reg Act for firmware version 3.03. MaxDCBus Vqs MC FW Group2 TorqueRunReq MC CommisFlt BaseBlockReq Command Lim MaxMotor Vqs MC Test Mode PreChrg Done FldWeakening Flux Run Req 0 1 SrLssWsLimit Options Min Vqs MC CommisRun PreChrg Req FluxRatioRef Vqs Reg Act DC Bus Low
Name Description MC Status
Values
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 0
MC En Req 0 = False 1 = True 0 = False 1 = True 0 0 Reserved 0 = False 1 = True
Change Dir
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
556
Set bits to configure the Data Trend function: Bit 0 Enbl Collect - Trend data collection begins on the rising edge of this bit and continues until either this bit is set low or the trend data has been completely collected. This bit should be cleared following either the 'Triggered' status or 'Complete' status in order to complete the trend sequence. This bit can also be cleared at any time to force the trend data sampling to stop and set the 'Complete' status bit. Setting bit 1 In1 Real - specifies the Real data type for Trend Input 1. The source for Real data is Par 571 [Trend In1 Real]. Clearing the bit specifies the Integer data type. The source for Integer data is Par 570 [Trend In1 DInt]. Setting bit 2 In2 Real - specifies the Real data type for Trend Input 2. The source for Real data is Par 575 [Trend In2 Real]. Clearing the bit specifies the Integer data type. The source for Integer data is Par 574 [Trend In2 DInt]. Setting bit 3 In3 Real - specifies the Real data type for Trend Input 3. The source for Real data is Par 579 [Trend In3 Real]. Clearing the bit specifies the Integer data type. The source for Integer data is Par 578 [Trend In3 DInt]. Setting bit 4 In4 Real - specifies the Real data type for Trend Input 4. The source for Real data is Par 583 [Trend In4 Real]. Clearing the bit specifies the Integer data type. The source for Integer data is Par 582 [Trend In4 DInt]. Setting bit 15 Auto Output causes the trend output parameters to automatically cycle through the entire trend buffer at the rate specified in Par 559 [Trend Rate]. Typically, you link the output to an analog output for display on an oscilloscope. Auto output is accomplished by writing to Par 569 [TrendBuffPointer]. Clearing this bit requires manual selection of Par 569 [TrendBuffPointer] to view the trend buffer contents. Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Options Enbl Collect Auto Output In 4 Real In 3 Real In 2 Real In 1 Real
Trend Control
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
557
Bits indicate the status of the Data Trend function: Bit 1 Triggered indicates a Trend Trigger event has been detected. This bit will clear in response to the rise of Par 556 [Trend Control], bit 0 Enbl Collect. Bit 2 Complete indicates all the post trigger data samples have been gathered and the trend buffers are full. It will also be set if the Par 556 [Trend Control], bit 0 Enbl Collect is cleared before the trigger occurs. The trend data outputs will be updated from the contents of the trend buffer data when this bit is set. Par 556 [Trend Control], bit 0 Enbl Collect can be cleared after this bit is set without affecting the trend data buffer contents. This bit will clear in response to the rise of Par 556 [Trend Control], bit 0 Enbl Collect. The trend outputs will be forced to zero while this bit is clear. Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Complete 0 2 Options Triggered 0 1
Trend Status
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
MC Ready
Torque En
Reserved
Reserved
Slip Limit
MC Fault
PWM En
Max Vds
Iqs Limit
Min Vds
Flux En
Regen
0 4
0 3
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
3-79
No. 558
Default: 0 = Wait Enable Value indicates the state of the Data Trend function. Options: 0 = Wait Enable Value 0 - Wait Enable indicates the trend function is ready and waiting to begin data 1 = First Scan collection. Setting bit 0 Enbl Collect of Par 556 [Trend Control] will cause data 2 = Pre-trigger collection to begin. In this state, Par 569 [TrendBuffPointer] and the Trend Output 3 = Post-trigger Parameters are active. 4 = Wait Disable Value 1 - First Scan indicates the Trend function is executing the first pass through the trend sample buffer. This takes 512 ms. (0.5 ms x 1024 samples). When it enters this state, the Trend function clears bit 1 Triggered and 2 Complete bits of Par 557 [Trend Enbl Collect Val 0 Enbl Collect Status]. While in this state, the Trend function refreshes the data. Also while in this state, Wait Enable the function forces the Trend Output parameters to zero. When done, it enters the Pre-trigger state. Value 2 - Pre-trigger indicates the Trend function is sampling the trend inputs and storing them in memory, at a rate determined by Par 559 [Trend Rate]. Sampling continues until Enbl Collect either the trend trigger event occurs or bit 0 Enbl Collect of Par 556 [Trend Control] is cleared. While in this state, the Trend function forces the Trend Output parameters to zero. If the trigger event occurs, the function sets bit 1 Triggered of Par 557 [Trend Status] and enters the Post-trigger state. If bit 0 Enbl Collect of Parameter 556 [Trend Val 1 Control] is cleared, the function sets bit 2 Complete of Par 557 [Trend Status] and First Scan returns to the Wait Enable state. Value 3 - Post-trigger indicates the Trend function is continuing to sample and save the Done trend inputs until the buffer is full. While in this state, the function forces the Trend Output parameters to zero value. When the buffer is full, the function sets bit 2 Complete of Par 557 [Trend Status] and enters the Wait Disable state. Value 4 - Wait Disable indicates the Trend function is complete and waiting for bit 0 Enbl Val 2 Collect of Par 556 [Trend Control] to be cleared. When this is done, the trend function Pre-Trigger returns to the Wait Enable state. While in the Wait Disable state, Par 569 [TrendBuffPointer] and the Trend Output Parameters are active. Sets the sample time for both trend input and output updates.
Name Description Trend State
Values
Val 4 Wait Disable
Buffer Full
Val 3 Post-Trigger
Trigger Event
559 560
Trend Rate
Units: mSec Default: 0.5000 Min/Max: 0.5000/1000.0000 Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648
RW Real RW 32-bit Integer RW Real
Provides the integer input for the A trigger function. This integer is converted to a real number and summed with Par 561 [Trend TrigA Real]. The result is compared with the Trigger B sum. If the A sum exceeds the B sum, then a trend trigger will occur.
Trend TrigA DInt
561
Trend TrigA Real
Default: 0.0000 Provides the real input for the A trigger function. This real number is summed with Par 560 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 [Trend TrigA Int]. The result is compared with the Trigger B sum. If the A sum exceeds the B sum, then a trend trigger will occur.
562
Provides the integer input for the B trigger function. This integer is converted to a real number and summed with Par 563 [Trend TrigB Real]. The result is compared with the Trigger A sum. If the A sum exceeds the B sum, then a trend trigger will occur.
Trend TrigB DInt
Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648
563
Trend TrigB Real
Default: 0.0000 Provides the real input for the B trigger function. This real number is summed with Par 562 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 [Trend TrigB Int]. The result is compared with the Trigger A sum. If the A sum exceeds the B sum, then a trend trigger will occur. This is the logic input for the Trend Trigger Function. A trigger will occur on the rise of the specified bit in this word. The bit will be specified by Par 565 [Trend Trig Bit]. Specifies the bit in Par 564 [Trend Trig Data] that will cause a Trend Trigger to occur. Positive numbers specify rising edges and negative numbers specify falling edges.
564 565 566
Trend Trig Data Trend Trig Bit
Default: 00000000000000000000000000000000 RW 32-bit Min: 00000000000000000000000000000000 Boolean Max: 11111111111111111111111111111111 Default: 0 Min/Max: -32/31 RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 32-bit Integer RW Real RW 16-bit Integer
Default: 511 Trend PreSamples Specifies the number pre-trigger samples in the trend buffer. Pre-trigger samples are the Min/Max: 0/1022 j samples that occur before the trigger and remain in the buffer. The remainder of the trend buffer will contain post-trigger samples. Default: 0 Trend Mark DInt Marks the start of data for trend buffers that are using integer data. The Trend Marker can Min/Max: -/+2147483648 be used to provide a scope trigger signal for the Auto Output function.
567 568 569
Trend Mark Real
Default: 0.0000 Marks the start of data for trend buffers that are using real data. The Trend Marker can be Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 used to provide a scope trigger signal for the Auto Output function. Default: 0 TrendBuffPointer Selects the trend buffer element to be displayed in the Trend Output Parameters when the Min/Max: -/+1023 trend function is inactive (not collecting data samples). A zero value points to the element that corresponds to the trigger event. Negative values point to pre-trigger data. Positive values point to post-trigger data. When the Auto Output function is running, this parameter will automatically sequence through it's full range, at a rate set by Par 559 [Trend Rate].
3-80
No. 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586
Provides integer input to the Trend 1. The Trending function samples this parameter for Trend Buffer 1, if bit 1 In 1 Real is cleared.
Name Description Trend In1 DInt
Values
Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648
Trend In1 Real
Default: 0.0000 Provides real input to the Trend 1. The Trending function samples this parameter for Trend Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 Buffer 1, if bit 1 In 1 Real is set. Default: 0 Trend Out1 DInt Displays the output for Trend Buffer 1, if the buffer is using integer data. This will equal the Min/Max: -/+2147483648 value of the element, in Trend Buffer 1, specified by Par 569 [TrendBuffPointer]. Displays the output for Trend Buffer 1, if the buffer is using real data. This will equal the value of the element, in Trend Buffer 1, specified by Par 569 [TrendBuffPointer]. Provides integer input to the Trend 2. The Trending function samples this parameter for Trend Buffer 2, if bit 2 In 2 Real is cleared.
Trend Out1 Real Trend In2 DInt
Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648
Trend In2 Real
Trend In3 Real
Trend In4 Real
Default: 0.0000 Provides real input to the Trend 4. The Trending function samples this parameter for Trend Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 Buffer 4, if bit 4 In 4 Real is set. Default: 0 Trend Out4 DInt Displays the output for Trend Buffer 4, if the buffer is using integer data. This will equal the Min/Max: -/+2147483648 value of the element, in Trend Buffer 4, specified by Par 569 [TrendBuffPointer]. Displays the output for Trend Buffer 4, if the buffer is using real data. This will equal the value of the element, in Trend Buffer 4, specified by Par 569 [TrendBuffPointer].
Trend Out4 Real
Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000
Units: Sec IdsCmd Slew Rate Defines the slew rate for the torque producing voltage (Vqs) regulator. The output variation Default: 5.000 is limited by one count every Par 586 / 16 sec. Min/Max: 0.000/16.383 Notes: This value should not be changed. This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001.
587
SlipReg Err Lmt
Default: 0 Defines the error level at which the slip regulator input becomes active. When the error level Min/Max: +/-32767 reaches the value specified in this parameter and the error count condition (specified in Par 589 [Err Count Lmt]) is met, the drive control will transition from the slew rate limit mode to normal operation of the slip regulator. Notes: This value should not be changed. This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001.
588
Default: 0 VqsReg Err Lmt Defines the error level at which the Flux Producing Voltage (Vqs) regulator input becomes Min/Max: +/-32767 active. When the error level reaches the value specified in this parameter and the error count condition (specified in Par 589 [Err Count Lmt]) is met, the drive control will transition from the slew rate limit mode to normal operation of the Vqs regulator. Notes: This value should not be changed. This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001.

RO 32-bit Integer RO Real RO 32-bit Integer RO Real RO 32-bit Integer RO Real RO 32-bit Integer RO Real RW Real RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer
3-81
No. 589
Name Description Err Count Lmt
Values
Default: 0 Defines the control loop counts limit, where the counter counts up if the error level of the Min/Max: +/-32767 Vqs regulator input is equal to the error level during Flux Producing Current (Ids) command Slew Rate operation. When the counter exceeds the value of this parameter then the normal Vqs regulator operation becomes active. The same limit of control loop counts is applied to the Slip Slew Rate operation, where the counter counts up if the error level of the Slip regulator input is equal to the error level during Slip Slew Rate operation. When the counter exceeds the value of this parameter then the normal Slip regulator operation becomes active. Notes: This value should not be changed. This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001. Default: 0 RsTempCoefAdjust The value specified in this parameter adjusts the temperature compensation coefficient Min/Max: +/-32767 which is calculated based on the Slip regulator output. A value of 4096 in this parameter doubles the compensation coefficient. Notes: This value should not be changed. This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001.
590
591
RsTmpCoefAdjstEn
Default: 0 A value of 1 in this parameter enables the temperature compensation function in flux and Min/Max: +/-32767 torque estimate calculation, where the temperature information is based on the Slip regulator output. A value of 0 in this parameter disables the temperature compensation function. Notes: This value should not be changed. This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001. For Future Use. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001.
592 593 600
VqsReg On Hystr
Default: 0 Min/Max: +/-32767 Default: 0 Min/Max: +/-32767 Default: 16 = Options: 0 = 16 = 17 = Speed Ctrl Not Used Speed Ctrl PositionCtrl
SlipReg On Hystr
For Future Use. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001. Indicates the Controller to Drive communication format. Note: Option values 1 - 15 and 20 - 31 are Reserved
Lgx Comm Format
18 = UserDefin 1 19 = Motion 32 = CustmUserDef
601
From DL DataType
Sets the type of data for each word communicated from DriveLogix to the PowerFlex 700S drive. Setting a bit High will configure the associated word as a Real data type and setting the bit Low will configure it for Integer data type. DL 20 Real DL 19 Real DL 18 Real DL 17 Real DL 16 Real DL 15 Real DL 14 Real DL 13 Real DL 12 Real DL 11 Real DL 10 Real DL 09 Real DL 08 Real DL 07 Real DL 06 Real DL 05 Real DL 04 Real DL 03 Real DL 02 Real DL 01 Real 0 1 DL 01 Real 0 1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Options DL 00 Real 0 0 0 = False 1 = True RO 32-bit Integer 0 0 DL 00 Real 0 = False 1 = True RO Set by Par 625
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
602
to
FromDriveLogix00
to
622 625
FromDriveLogix20 To DL DataType
Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+32 (dependant on Par 601 [From DL DataType])
These parameters display the input values communicated from the DriveLogix controller to the PowerFlex 700S drive. Sets the data type for each word communicated from the PowerFlex 700S drive to DriveLogix. Setting a bit High will configure the associated word as a Real data type and setting the bit Low will configure it for Integer data type. DL 20 Real DL 19 Real DL 18 Real DL 17 Real DL 16 Real DL 15 Real DL 14 Real DL 13 Real DL 12 Real DL 11 Real DL 10 Real DL 09 Real DL 08 Real DL 07 Real DL 06 Real DL 05 Real DL 04 Real DL 03 Real Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Options DL 02 Real
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
626
to
To DriveLogix00
to
646
To DriveLogix20
Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+32 (dependant on Par 625 [To DL DataType])
These parameters display the output values communicated from the PowerFlex 700S drive to the DriveLogix controller.

RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer
3-82
No. 650
Name Description DPI In DataType
Values
Sets the data type for each word communicated from an external controller to the PowerFlex 700S drive via a DPI communication module. Setting a bit High will configure the associated word as a Real data type and setting the bit Low will configure it for Integer data type. DPI D2 Real DPI D1 Real DPI C2 Real DPI C1 Real DPI B2 Real DPI B1 Real DPI A2 Real Options DPI A1 Real
Default Bit
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
0 = False 1 = True Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+32 (dependant on Par 650 [DPI In DataType]) RO 32-bit Integer
651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659
These parameters display the input values communicated from DPI communication modules to the PowerFlex 700S drive.
DPI Data In A1 DPI Data In A2 DPI Data In B1 DPI Data In B2 DPI Data In C1 DPI Data In C2 DPI Data In D1 DPI Data In D2
DPI Out DataType
Sets the data type for each word communicated from the PowerFlex 700S drive to an external controller via a DPI communication module. Setting a bit High will configure the associated word as a Real data type and setting the bit Low will configure it for Integer data type. DPI D2 Real DPI D1 Real DPI C2 Real DPI C1 Real DPI B2 Real DPI B1 Real DPI A2 Real Options DPI A1 Real
Default Bit
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
0 = False 1 = True Default: 0 RW Set by Min/Max: -/+32 (dependant on Par 659 [DPI Out Par 659 DataType])
660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 669
These parameters display the output values communicated from the PowerFlex 700S drive to DPI communication modules.
DPI Data Out A1 DPI Data Out A2 DPI Data Out B1 DPI Data Out B2 DPI Data Out C1 DPI Data Out C2 DPI Data Out D1 DPI Data Out D2
Write Mask
Enables/disables write access (parameters, links, etc.) for DPI ports. Changes to this parameter only become effective when power is cycled, the drive is reset or bit 15 Security of Par 712 [Write Mask Act], transitions from 1 to 0. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Ext DPI Conn Terminal Blk Options DriveLogix Reserved Aux DPI Conn Int DPI Comm
Default Bit
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
Local HIM
Reserved
0 0
0 = False 1 = True
3-83
No. 670 671 672 673 674 677 678 679 680 681
Name Description Logic Mask Start Mask Jog Mask
Values
Determines which adapters can control the drive. Controls which adapters can issue start commands. Controls which adapters can issue jog commands.
Direction Mask Fault Clr Mask Stop Owner
Controls which adapters can issue forward/reverse direction commands. Controls which adapters can clear a fault. Indicates which adapter are currently issuing a valid stop command.
Start Owner Jog Owner
Indicates which adapter are currently issuing a valid start command. Indicates which adapter are currently issuing a valid jog command.
Direction Owner Fault Clr Owner

Options DriveLogix Reserved
Indicates which adapter is currently has exclusive control of direction changes. Indicates which adapter is currently clearing a fault. Aux DPI Conn Ext DPI Conn Int DPI Conn Terminal Blk Local HIM Reserved
Default Bit
1 7
1 6
1 5
1 4
1 3
1 2
1 1
1 0
0 = False 1 = True Unit: uSec Default: 2000 Min/Max: 1/999999 Default: 4 Min/Max: 2/16 RO 32-bit Integer RO 32-bit Integer
684 685 686
The servo update period for the servo axis (drive).
MotnUpdatePeriod
Number of Par 684 [MotnUpdatePeriod] comprising one Course Update Period from the Motion Period. Configuration bits pertaining to Motion-related functions for the Servo axis. Sft Ovr Trvl Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Options Polarity Neg Hrd Ovr Trvl
Motn CoarseMulti Motn Config
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
687
Status bits pertaining to Motion-related functions for the Servo axis. AxisShutdown 0 2 CST Updt Err +Hrd OvrTrvl Course Updt -Hrd OvrTrvl Motn Action 0 0 0 = False 1 = True 0 0 Reserved 0 = False 1 = True +Sft OvrTrvl Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved AxisShtdwnC1 -Sft OvrTrvl
Motn Axis Status
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 1
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
688
Command request bits from the Motion Planner both the Servo and Feedback Only Axis. ChngCmdRefC1 Abrt Home C1 Abrt Home C0 Options ChngCmdRefC0 Shutdown C1 Shutdown C0 0 1
Motn AxisControl
Abrt Evnt C1
Abrt Evnt C0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Reserved
Drv Enable
Posit Lock
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Chng Ref
3-84
No. 689
Command response from both the Servo and Feedback Only Axis to the Motion Planner. Chng XRef C0 Abrt Home C1 Abrt Home C0 Shutdown C1 Shutdown C0 0 1 0 1 Reserved Abrt Evnt C1 Abrt Evnt C0 Options ChngPosRefC1
Name Description Motn Axis Resp
Values
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved 0 2
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 0 0 = False 1 = True
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
690
Status of all Motion connections. Also includes status for the configuration state relating to motion connections. Asynch Cnct Synch Cnct Event Cnct MSO Input Config OK Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved UserIO Cnct Drive Ready
Motn Cnct Status
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
691
Status of all events supported by the Motion Event Connection. Note: Added bit 9 Watch Fb Arm and bit 10 WatchFbPosit for firmware version 3.03. Regis2 X Arm Regis1 X Arm WatchFbPosit Watch X Arm Regis2 Posit Regis1 Posit Watch Posit Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Watch Fb Arm
Motn EventStatus
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
Home Arm
Reserved
Home
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
692
Shows configuration state of Motion Event functions. Note: Added bit 7 Watch Fb Rev for firmware version 3.03. Wndw Regis2 Home Type 1 Home Type 0 Watch X Rev Event Cndt Home Axis Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Wndw Regis1
Motn Event Ctrl
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
693
Bit zero of this parameter is used as the synchronization pulse for the Interpolator. This parameter is linked to Par 700 [Motn Posit Sync] for a Motion Servo Axis. It is linked to Xsync Status for a SynchLink application. Bits 1 - 4 have been changes to Reserved for firmware version 2.04. Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 2 Options Sync Pulse 0 0 0 = False 1 = True RW 32-bit Integer RW 32-bit Integer RW 32-bit Integer
Interp SynchInput
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
694 695 696
Positive soft overtravel threshold for the Motion Servo Axis.
Motn Mx Pos Trvl
Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648 Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648 Default: 4096 Min/Max: 0/2147483648
Negative soft overtravel threshold for the Motion Servo Axis.
Motn Mx Neg Trvl
Position error tolerance for the Motion Servo Axis.
Motn PositErrTol
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
3-85
No. 697 698 699 700
Name Description Motn PositLock Tol Motn Posit Cmmd
Values
Default: 0 Min/Max: 0/2147483648 Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648 Units: P.U. Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+8.0000 pu
Position lock tolerance for the Motion Servo Axis.
Position command input from the Motion Planner. This is linked as the source to the interpolators Course Position Target. Speed command input from the Motion Planner.
Motn Speed Cmmd
Synchronization input signal from the Motion Planner. Pulse received once per coarse update period. This is linked as the course to Par 693 [Interp SynchInput]. Note: Bits 2 - 4 have been changed to Reserved for firmware version 2.04. Sync Pulse 0 0 0 = False 1 = True RO 32-bit Integer 16 = CST Upper 17 = FBonlyFbkRaw 18 = Reserved 19 = I/O Rx Seq# 20 = I/O Rx Msg# 21 = 'I/O Tx Msg# 22 = Syn Rx Seq# 23 = Syn Rx Msg# 24 = Syn Tx Msg# 25 = Evt Rx Seq# 26 = Evt Rx Msg# 27 = Evt Tx Msg# 28 = Asy Rx Seq# 29 = Asy Rx Msg# 30 = Asy Tx Msg# 31 = Reset Msg# RO 32-bit Integer RO 32-bit Integer RO 16-bit Integer RO 32-bit Integer RO 16-bit Integer RO 32-bit Integer RO 16-bit Integer Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved SyncDataActv 0 1
Motn Posit Sync
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
701
Default: 0 = FdbkAxis FdbkSel Selection for the Motion Feedback Only Axis feedback source. Options: 0 = Note: Options 5 and 6 are only available when compatible feedback option card is installed. 1= Note: Bit 11 SL Buff Rx10 was added for firmware version 4.001. 2= 3= 4= 5= Present value of the selected feedback for the Motion Feedback Only Axis. Selector for diagnostic Test point relating to Motion functionality.
Encoder 0 Encoder 0 Encoder 1 Reserved Reserved Motor Sim FB Opt Port0
6 = FB Opt Port1 7 = SL DirIntRx0 8 = SL DirIntRx1 9 = SL DirIntRx2 10 = SL DirIntRx3 11 = SL Buff Rx10
702 703
FdbkAxis FdbkVal
Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648 Default: 0 = SrvoAxisCnfgxe Options: 0 = SrvoAxisCnfg 1 = SrvoAxisUnwd 2 = Marker Dist 3 = HomeEvent X 4 = Watch Posit 5 = Home Posit 6 = SrvoMRP Ofst 7 = SrvoAct Ofst 8 = PositRegis1 9 = PositRegis2 10 = FdbkAxisCnfg 11 = FdbkAxisUnwd 12 = FdbkMRP Ofst 13 = FdbkAct Ofst 14 = TimeEvntStat 15 = CST Lower Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648
Motn TP Select
704 705 706 707 708 709 710
Data for diagnostic Test point relating to Motion functionality.
Motn TP Value
Default: 0 Motn RotaryCmmd Position command input from the Motion Planner to the ServoAxis when configured in rotary Min/Max: 0/4294967295 mode. Position unwind turns command input from the Motion Planner to the Servo Axis when configured in rotary mode.
MotnUnwdTurnCmmd
Default: 0 SrvoAxis RotFdbk Position feedback output to the Motion Planner for the Servo Axis when configured in rotary Min/Max: 0/4294967295 mode. Default: 0 SrvoAxisUnwdFdbk Position unwind feedback output to the Motion Planner for the Servo Axis when configured in Min/Max: -/+32767 rotary mode. Default: 0 FdbkAxis RotFdbk Positon feedback output to the Motion Planner for the Feedback Only Axis when configured in Min/Max: 0/4294967295 rotary mode. Position unwind feedback output to the Motion Planner for the Feedback Only Axis when configured in rotary mode.
FdbkAxisUnwdFdbk

RW 32-bit Integer RO 32-bit Integer RO Real
3-86
No. 711
Default: 0 Identifies a parameter that is not configured properly for a motion connection to be accepted. Min/Max: 0/65535 The parameter identified could either have a wrong value or an incorrect link. When bit 0 "Config OK" of Par 690 [Motn Cnct Status] is set, then this parameter contains the parameter number of an incorrectly configured parameter. If more than one parameter is incorrectly configured, each is displayed in turn after the previously identified parameter is fixed. If there are no configuration problems relating to Motion, then this parameter contains a value of zero and the bit 0 "Config OK" of parameter 690 [Motn Cnct Status] is cleared.
Name Description MotnCnfgErrParam
Values
712
Write Mask Act
Status of write access for DPI ports. When bit 15 Security is set, network security controls the write mask instead of Par 669 [Write Mask]. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Ext DPI Conn Terminal Blk Options DriveLogix Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Security Aux DPI Conn Int DPI Comm
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
Local HIM
Reserved
0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
713
Indicates status of the logic mask for DPI ports. When bit 15 Security is set, network security controls the logic mask instead of Par 670 [Logic Mask]. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. DPI Port 5 DPI Port 3 DPI Port 2 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Digital In Security Options DPI Port 1
Logic Mask Act
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
714
Bits 0-5 indicate status for DPI port communication. Bit 15 Security indicates when security software controls the parameter. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. DPI Port 5 DPI Port 3 DPI Port 2 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Digital In Security Options DPI Port 1
Port Mask Act
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True Default: 0 = Zero Options: 0 = Zero 1 = Bg Once 2 = Position Err 3 = X to V 4 = Dt 5 = Gain 6 = Pos Intg 7 = Cal 8 = Epr Cal 9 = Num 10 = Denom 11 = Egr Ratio 12 = A Comp 13 = H Comp 14 = Pos Lpf Out
717
Phase Locked Loop test point selection. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
PLL TP Select
15 = Vel Lpf In 16 = Vel Lpf Out 17 = k1 18 = k2 19 = k3 20 = pi 21 = Ve Enable 22 = Ve In 23 = Ve Out 24 = Ve AnaPlsScl 25 = Ve Whl Accum 26 = Ve Frc AccmF 27 = Ve Frc AccmI 28 = Ve Dt RO 32-bit Integer
718
Default: 0 PLL TP DataDInt Test point integer data. This data is meaningful only if the selection at Par 717 [PLL TP Select] Min/Max: -/+2147483648 is integer data. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Default: 0.0 PLL TP DataReal Test point real data. This data is meaningful only if the selection at Par 717 [PLL TP Select] is Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 not integer data. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
719

RO 16-bit Integer RO Real
3-87
No. 720
Phase Locked Loop Control. Bit 0 Vel FdFwd En - When set, enables the velocity feed forward path. When cleared, the feed forward path is disabled. Bit 1 Ext Vel In - When set, enables external velocity feed forward through Par 728 [PLL Ext Spd Ref]. When cleared, velocity feed forward is derived from the input device position. Bit 2 Trckng AComp - When set, provides an element of acceleration compensation to the feed forward branch. This is not recommended for use with external inputs because of increased noise. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Trckng HComp Vel FdFwd En Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Trckng AComp
Name Description PLL Control
Values
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
Ext Vel In
0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True Default: 0.0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648 RW 32-bit Integer RW Real
721
Physical encoder position input. This parameter is normally linked directly to the encoder position of the device chosen for input to PLL. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
PLL Position Ref
722
Units: R/S PLL BandWidth Sets the internal bandwidth response of the PLL function in (rad/sec). The setting for very Default: 20.00 noisy mechanical systems could range from 1 to 10 (r/s) while well-behaved high line count Min/Max: 0.00/8000.00 input devices could range upwards of 100 (r/s). Higher bandwidths will quickly resolve tracking errors while the lower bandwidths will take longer to settle into a steady state. Some adjustment will be necessary to effect the best compromise between noise and tracking response. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Default: 1 PLL Rev Input Revolution of the input encoder. This parameter must be coordinated with Par 724 [PLL Rev Min/Max: -/+ 1000000 Out] to resolve the gear-ratio between input revolutions and output (virtual) revolutions. The ratio of input to output revolutions can always be resolved into integer values and should be reduced to their lowest common factor. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Default: 1 PLL Rev Output Revolution of the output encoder. This parameter must be coordinated with Par 723 [PLL Rev Min/Max: 1/2000000 In] to resolve the gear-ratio between input revolutions and output (virtual) revolutions. The ratio of input to output revolutions can always be resolved into integer values and should be reduced to their lowest common factor. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Units: EPR PLL EPR Input Edges Per Revolution of the physical input device. Use highest line count device possible to Default: 1048576 insure smoother PLL operation. Min/Max: 1/67108864 Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Edges Per Revolution of virtual the physical output device. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
723
724
725
726 727
PLL EPR Output
Units: EPR Default: 1048576 Min/Max: 1/67108864
PLL VirtEncdrRPM
Units: RPM RPM of the virtual output device. The value specified determines the 1 pu velocity at Par 734 Default: 1750.0 [PLL Speed Out] and does not otherwise affect performance. Min/Max: 1.0/30000.0 Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. External Speed Reference. This is a velocity feed forward input. It is normally linked to an external velocity reference or the velocity output of the chosen physical encoder. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
728
PLL Ext Spd Ref
Units: P.U. Default: 0.0 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0 Default: 1.0 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0
RW Real
729
External Speed Scale. This parameter is used to properly scale the velocity feed forward. Adjust for zero average at Par 733 [PLL FiltPositOut] while running at moderate speed. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
PLL Ext SpdScale
RW Real
730
Units: R/S PLL LPFilter BW Default: 50.00 Low Pass Filter BandWidth (BW). The filter has two functions: Min/Max: 0.00/8000.00 Basic noise reduction of input velocity. Timed delay of input when feed forward is linked to an external master reference other than an input encoder. The filter BW should be set for best tracking which occurs when the filter output coincides with the Loop filter output of PLL. Usually that means setting its BW to the bandwidth of the master reference drive. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
RW Real

RW 32-bit Integer RW 32-bit Integer RW 32-bit Integer RW 32-bit Integer RW Real
3-88
No. 731
Name Description PLL Posit Out
Values
Default: 0 Phased Locked Loop position output. This signal is precisely in phase with the input physical Min/Max: -/+2147483648 device. A link should be made to it from the local drive auxiliary position input. (The local drive is the one implementing PLL.) Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
732
PLL Posit OutAdv
Default: 0 Phased Locked Loop position advanced output. This signal is one position sample in advance Min/Max: -/+2147483648 of Par 731 [PLL Posit Out]. A link is normally made to this parameter from SynchLink. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
733
Units: P.U. PLL FiltPositOut Phased Locked Loop internal low pass filter output. This parameter is normally used to Default: 0.0 properly scale an external velocity reference. See description of Par 729 [PLL Ext SpdScale]. Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0 Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Units: P.U. PLL Speed Out Phased Locked Loop velocity output. This signal is used as a velocity feed forward. It is Default: 0.0 precisely in phase with the physical input device. A link should be made to it from one of the Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0 inputs on the local drive. (The local drive is the one implementing PLL.) The 1 pu RPM of this parameter is set by Par 727 [PLL VirtEncdrRPM]. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Units: P.U. PLL SpeedOut Adv Phase Locked Loop velocity advanced output. This signal is one velocity reference sample in Default: 0.0 advance of Par 734 [PLL Speed Out]. A link is normally made to this parameter from Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0 SynchLink. (Velocity reference is performed in the same task as the position regulator.) Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Default: 0 = Posit TP Select Enter or write a value to select position regulator data displayed in Par 738 [PositTP DataInt] Options: 0 = and Par 739 [PositTP DataReal]. 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= 8= Zero Zero del Xos Vout del Xcmd del Act Load del Act Mtr Integ Error Xprop Out Fdbk Sel Alt PreLim Xvout
RW Real
734
RW Real
735
RW Real
737
9 = Limiter Out 10 = Ref EGR In 11 = OffsetSpdLim 12 = Pt-Pt SpdLim 13 = Sec per Edge 14 = Edge per Sec 15 = Ratio Guess 16 = Sync Count RO 32-bit Integer RO Real
738 739
Default: 0 PositTP DataDInt Displays the integer data selected by Par 737 [Posit TP Select]. This display should only be Min/Max: -/+2147483648 used if the selected value is Integer data. Default: 0.0 PositTP DataReal Displays the real data selected by Par 737 [Posit TP Select]. This display should only be used Min/Max: -/+8.0 pu if the selected value is Real data.

3-89
3-90
No. 740
Set bits to enable various position control functions. Setting bit 1 Speed Out En enables position regulator output at Par 318 [Posit Spd Output]. Setting bit 2 Integ En enables integrator operation. Resetting it resets the integrator. Setting bit 3 Integ Hold holds integrator in present state. Setting bit 4 X Offset Pol reverses polarity of offset parameters. Setting bit 5 XOffset Ref permits changing the value of position offsets without changing actual position. Resetting it makes the position offset relative to the re-referenced value or the latched value upon enable if re-reference was not performed. Bit 6 AbsPositCtrl may be set when a multi-turn, absolute feedback device is used for Point-to-Point positioning. Activating this bit will ReRef the position reference to the absolute feedback when position control is activated in bit 7 Regulator On of Par 741 [Position Status]. If the value at Par 758 [Pt-Pt Posit Ref] is different than the feedback in Par 763 [Position Actual], a position error will exist and the machine will move to position when activated. When bit 6 AbsPositCtrl is high, bit 9 SetZeroPosit of Par 740 [Position Control] may be used to set the zero "home" position accumulators. This can only be used when the drive is not in run and Par 740 [Position Control] bit 6 = 1 (true). Setting bit 7 AbsoluteMode puts the position regulator in Absolute mode. When using the Homing function while in Absolute mode, the value in Par 758 [Pt-Pt Posit Ref] must be set relative to the value in Par 763 [Position Actual] after homing is complete. For example: When homing is complete Par 763 [Position Actual] = 1000 counts. If you want to move to an absolute position of 2000 counts relative to the home switch, you must enter a value of 3000 counts into Par 758 [Pt-Pt Posit Ref] (i.e., 1000 + 2000 = 3000). If you want to move back to the home switch, using the same value in Par 763 [Position Actual] after homing (1000), you must enter a value of 1000 into Par 758 [Pt-Pt Position Ref] (i.e., 0 + 1000 = 1000). Setting bit 8 Xzero Preset presets Par 744 [PositRef EGR Out], Par 747 [Position Cmmd], Par 763 [Position Actual] and Par 765 [Posit Actl Load] with the value in Par 762 [Position Fdbk] minus Par 757 [Abs Posit Offset] upon drive enable. Setting bit 10 Pt-Pt ReRef enables setting or changing Par 758 [Pt-Pt Posit Ref] without changing the actual position. Setting bit 16 X Watch1 En enables position Watch 1. Resetting it clears Par 741 [Position Status] bit 8 Posit Watch1. Setting bit 17 X Watch1 Dir causes Position Watch 1 output to be set when Par 763 [Position Actual] is greater than Par 780 [PositDtct1 Stpt]. Re-setting bit 17 causes Position Watch 1 output to be set when Par 763 [Position Actual] is less than Par 780 [PositDtct1 Stpt]. Setting bit 18 X Watch2 En enables position Watch 2. Resetting it clears Par 741 [Position Status] bit 9 Posit Watch2. Setting bit 19 X Watch2 Dir causes Position Watch 2 output to be set when Par 763 [Position Actual] is greater than Par 781 [PositDtct2 Stpt]. Re-setting bit 19 causes Position Watch 2 output to be set when Par 763 [Position Actual] is less than Par 781 [PositDtct2 Stpt]. Setting bit 20 Pt-Pt RampStop enables the Ramp to Stop function for point-to-point positioning. When reset and the stop command is given during a move, the drive will stop at 0 ramp time. When set and the stop command is given during a move, the rive will ramp to zero at Par 760 [Pt-Pt Decel Time]. Note: Coast Stop or Removing Enable always causes a Coast to Stop function. Bit 24 Find Home - when this bit is on and the drive is started, a homing sequence is initiated. Bit 25 Pos Redefine - when this bit is set the position will be set to zero. Bit 26 Home Dir - when this bit is set the homing direction will be opposite of the Home Speed commanded in Par 1122 [Home Speed]. Bit 27 Return Home - when this bit is set the homing direction will be opposite of the Home Speed commanded in P1122 [Home Speed]. Note: The position reference will not change, but Par 763 [Posit Load Fdbk] will return to zero. The Position reference should also be redefined to zero to synchronize the position with the command. This can be useful for returning to Home after a jog type operation Bit 28 Home Switch - when this bit is set the Homing sequence will look for the home switch to make a transition from it's current state when the homing sequence is started. Do not set with bit 29 "Home Marker". Bit 29 Home Marker - when set, the Homing Sequence will look for the Marker pulse. When the marker pulse is found the drive will decelerate and return to the position where the marker was found. Do not set with bit 28 "Home Switch". Note: Bits 24 - 29 were added for future use - not active for use with firmware version 3.01 and above. AbsoluteMode Speed Out En 1 1 X IGain HLim 1 1 BscIndxStpRv Home Marker Return Home Pos Redefine BscIndx Step Home Switch Options Reserved Reserved Pt-Pt RampStop X Watch2 Dir X Watch1 Dir BscIndx Enbl X Watch2 En X Watch1 En Xzero Preset SetZeroPosit BscIndx Prst BscIndx Rev AbsPositCtrl
Name Description Position Control
Values
Pt-Pt ReRef
X Offset Pol
XOff ReRef
Find Home
Integ Hold
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved 0 0 0 = False 1 = True X IGain LLim 0 0 0 = False 1 = True
Home Dir
Default 0 Bit
1 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
741
Indicates status of position control algorithms. Bit 0 X IGain LLim indicates the position integrator is at the low limit. Bit 1 X IGain HLim indicates the position integrator is at the high limit. Bit 2 X Spd LLim indicates the position regulator output at the low limit. Bit 3 X Spd HLim indicates the position regulator output is at the high limit. Bit 4 PtPtRRef Act (TBD) Bit 5 XOffRRef Act (TBD) Bit 7 Regulator On indicates position regulator is active. Bit 8 Posit Watch1 indicates Position Watch 1 has detected motor position equal to its setpoint, from the proper direction. Bit 9 Posit Watch2 indicates Position Watch 2 has detected motor position equal to its setpoint, from the proper direction. Bit 10 In Position indicates Par 769 [Position Error] is within the position deadband specified by Par 782 [In Posit BW]. Bit 13 HomeRequired - Set when the "Find Home" bit is set in Par 740 [Position Control] and the drive is waiting on a Start command. Bit 14 Homing - Set when the drive is running the Homing Sequence. Bit 15 Homed - Set when the Homing Sequence has completed. Note: Bits 13 - 15 were added for future use - not active for use with firmware version 3.01 and above. XOffRRef Act Regulator On PtPtRRef Act Posit Watch2 Posit Watch1 Posit Out En Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Homing Homed HomeRequired X Spd HLim X Spd LLim 0 2
Position Status
In Position
Reserved
Default Bit
1 8
0 7
0 6
Reserved
0 5
0 4
0 3
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Integ En
3-91
No. 742
Name Description Position Ref Sel
Values
Default: 1 = AuxPosit Ref Options: 0 = Interpolate 1 = AuxPosit Ref 2 = Pt to Pt
Enter a value to select the position mode and corresponding reference. Note: This parameter was changed to non-linkable for firmware version 3.01.
743
Aux Posit Ref
Default: 0 Supplies position reference to the position regulator when selected by Par 742 [Posit Ref Sel] Min/Max: -/+2147483648 = 1. This input is designed to be linked to a position count accumulator such as a virtual encoder or hardware accumulator. Default: 0 Accumulated output of the position reference Electronic Gear Ratio (EGR). When the position Min/Max: -/+2147483648 regulator is not enabled, this parameter is initialized to Par 762 [Position Fdbk] or to the selected position reference as determined by Par 740 [Position Control] bit 6. An integer value in the numerator of the EGR function that is precision multiplied by the selected position reference. A negative value will effect a change in polarity. An integer value in the denominator of the EGR function that divides into the product of the numerator and the selected position reference. Remainders are accumulated and not lost. Default: 1 Min/Max: -/+2000000 Default: 1 Min/Max: 1/2000000
RW 32-bit Integer
744
PositRef EGR Out
745 746 747
PositRef EGR Mul PositRef EGR Div
RW 32-bit Integer RW 32-bit Integer RO 32-bit Integer
Default: 0 Position Cmmd Final accumulated command to the position regulator. When the position regulator is not Min/Max: -/+2147483648 enabled, this parameter is initialized to Par 762 [Position Fdbk] or to the selected position reference as determined by Par 750 [Position Control] bit 6. Thereafter, its value will reflect the result of reference and offset changes. Input to the interpolator. This is a coarse position target reference. Input to the interpolator. This is a fine position target reference. Input to the interpolator. This is a coarse speed target reference. Output from the interpolator. This is a fine speed target reference. Output from interpolator. This is a fine acceleration rate. First derivative of Par 750 [Course Spd Trgt] if available, or zero (0) if not available.
748 749 750 751 752 753
CoarsePosit Trgt Interp Position
Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648 Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648 Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+8.0000 pu Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+8.0000 pu
RW 32-bit Integer RO 32-bit Integer RW Real RO Real RO Real RW 32-bit Integer
Coarse Spd Trgt
Interp Speed
Interp AccelRate
Default: 0 Posit Offset 1 Supplies a position reference offset, which is summed after the EGR and used to phase trim Min/Max: -/+2147483648 position reference. A step in the offset position will be internally rate limited and added to the selected reference position. The rate of correction is set by Par 755 [Posit Offset Spd]. The initial value of this parameter is latched upon position enable without causing a change in reference. Subsequent changes to this value will be relative to the latched value. See Par 740 [Position Control], bit 5 for re-referencing the offsets. Default: 0 Posit Offset 2 Supplies another position reference offset, which is summed with Par 753 [Posit Offset 1]. Min/Max: -/+2147483648 Used to trim the phase of the selected position reference. Position offset will be internally rate limited to a velocity set by Par 755 [Posit Offset Spd]. Units: RPM Posit Offset Spd Sets the speed of position offset. A position offset command will not exceed this speed. The Default: 176.4000 actual speed of offset is limited to a maximum value of 1/(inertia * pos gain) so as not to cause Min/Max: -/+14112.0000 a torque pulse greater than 1 per unit. The speed will change exponentially. Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0pu RPM Units: X Offst SpdFilt Displays the output of a first order filter whose time response is shaped specifically to provide Default: 0.0000 an output that represents the actual speed of offset correction. It may be used as a feed Min/Max: -/+14112.0000 forward into speed reference to secure minimal position error during changes to offset. Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0pu Default: 0 Abs Posit Offset Provides an offset to absolute position. Setting Par 740 [Position Control], bit 8 Xzero Preset Min/Max: -/+2147483648 presets Par 744 [PositRef EGR Out], Par 747 [Position Cmmd], Par 763 [Position Actual] and Par 765 [Posit Actl Load] with the value in Par 762 [Position Fdbk] minus Par 757 [Abs Posit Offset] upon drive enable.
754
755
756
757
RW 32-bit Integer
758
Pt-Pt Posit Ref
Default: 0 Provides position reference to the point to point position regulator, when the value in Par 742 Min/Max: -/+2147483648 [Position Ref Sel] = 2 Pt to Pt. The initial value is latched upon position enable without causing movement. Subsequent changes to reference are relative to the latched position unless the position is re-referenced by Par 740 [Position Control], bit 10 Pt-Pt ReRef. Position moves may be made within the limits of plus or minus 31 bits. Point-to-point reference may be changed, and even reversed, during a move. Acceleration time (sec) to base speed, active only in point to point mode. Acceleration to a relatively low speed may be exponential. Units: Sec Default: 10.0000 Min/Max: 0.1000/6553.5000
RW 32-bit Integer
759
Pt-Pt Accel Time
RW Real

RO 32-bit Integer RO Real
3-92
No. 760
Name Description Pt-Pt Decel Time
Values
Units: Sec Deceleration time (sec) from base speed to zero, active only in point to point mode. Some Default: 10.0000 tailing can be expected at the end of a move as the drive comes into command position. It is Min/Max: 0.1000/6553.5000 left to the user to select a time that does not place the drive in current or torque limit. Deceleration from relatively low speed may be exponential. Units: R/S Sets the bandwidth of a low pass filter which affects smoothness at the start of deceleration in Default: 25.0000 the point to point mode. A high filter bandwidth will produce a more square deceleration Min/Max: 0.0000/500.0000 torque, one with a higher level of jerk. Typical values range from 5 to 100 (rad/sec). A zero value will bypass the filter. Tail-out is influenced mainly by Par 768 [Posit Reg P Gain]. Displays the accumulated pulse count of the selected position feedback. Select a position feedback device with Par 777 [PositionFdbk Sel].
RW Real
761
Pt-Pt Filt BW
RW Real
762 763
Position Fdbk
Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648
Default: 0 Position Actual Displays the accumulated motor position as a 32-bit integer. It tracks Par 762 [Position Fdbk]. Min/Max: -/+2147483648 When the position regulator is not enabled, this parameter is initialized to Par 762 [Position Fdbk] or to the selected position reference as determined by Par 740 [Position Control], bit 6 AbsPositCtrl. Default: 0 Posit Load Fdbk Tracks the load position, as a 32-bit integer. When a gear box connects the load to the motor, Min/Max: -/+2147483648 Par 766 [Posit FB EGR Mul] and Par 767 [Posit FB EGR Div] must be set to account for the gear ratio. Set Par 766 [Posit FB EGR Mul] equal to Par 767 [Posit FB EGR Div] if the load is directly connected to the motor. Default: 0 Posit Actl Load Mi/Max: -/+2147483648 Holds the accumulated output of the Load Gear Ratio as a 32-bit integer and forms the primary feedback for the position regulator integral channel. It is very important that the load gear ratio be precisely set such that the delta pulse count of one motor revolution equals the delta pulse count of this parameter. When the position regulator is not enabled, this parameter is initialized to Par 762 [Position Fdbk] or to the selected position reference as determined by Par 740 [Position Control], bit 6 AbsPositCtrl. Default: 1 Posit FB EGR Mul A 32-bit integer in the numerator of the load EGR function. It is multiplied by Par 764 [Posit Min/Max: -/+1000000 Load Fdbk] and divided by Par 767 [Posit FB EGR Div] to reflect the load pulse count to the motor (effectively removing the gear box ratio). The accumulated position values Par 763 [Position Actual] and Par 765 [Posit Actl Load] will be equal if the ratio is set properly. There may be some difference due to lost motion in the gear train, but there should not be an accumulated difference. It is often necessary to count gear teeth as gear box manufacturers often approximate exact ratios with decimal numbers. Enter a negative value in the numerator to account for reversed motor rotation. This is a 32-bit integer that forms the denominator of the load EGR function.
764
RW 32-bit Integer
765
766
RW 32-bit Integer
767 768
Posit FB EGR Div
Units: R/S PositReg P Gain Sets position regulator gain as measured from position error to speed reference. The gain Default: 4.0000 number is identically equal to position regulator bandwidth in rad/sec. For example: A gain of Min/Max: 0.0000/200.0000 10 means that a per unit position error of 0.1 sec. will effect a 1.0 pu speed change (1 per unit position error is the distance traveled in 1 sec. at base motor speed). The maximum value of this parameter is typically 1/3 of the speed bandwidth (rad/sec) but may be set considerably higher with careful tuning of the speed regulator output lead/lag filter. Actual position error in motor pulse counts. When the position regulator is not enabled, this 32-bit integer register is initialized to zero. When the position regulator is enabled, this parameter contains the running value of position error, often referred to as following error.
RW Real
769
Position Error
Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648
770
Units: /S2 PositReg Integ Sets position regulator integral gain as measured from position error to velocity reference. It Default: 4.0000 has gain units of (per unit velocity/sec) / (per unit position) and is unit compatible with Par 768 Min/Max: 0.0000/1000.0000 [PositReg P Gain]. An integral gain of 25 means that a per unit position error of 0.1 sec will effect a 2.5 pu speed change per sec. A typical maximum value is _*[PositReg P Gain]2. Note: 1 per unit position is the distance traveled in 1 sec. at base motor speed.
RW Real
771
Default: 0.0000 PositReg Droop Position Droop limits the low frequency gain of the position regulators integral channel to a Min/Max: 0.0000/0.2500 value of (1/droop). It provides a means to fine tune the stability for load mounted feedback devices where lost motion may cause a problem. Typically, position droop will have a value that is less than (1/position gain), perhaps even zero for tightly coupled loads. Position droop has a gain value of (per unit position) / (per unit speed). Note: 1 per unit position is the distance traveled in 1 sec. at base motor speed. The negative limit of the position regulator integral gain.
RW Real
772
XReg Integ LoLim
RPM -176.4000 -14112.0000/0.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0pu
RW Real

RO 32-bit Integer RO 32-bit Integer RO 32-bit Integer RW 32-bit Integer RO 32-bit Integer
3-93
No. 773
Name Description XReg Integ HiLim
Values
Units: Default: Min/Max: Scale: RPM 176.4000 0.0000/14112.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0pu
RW Real
The positive limit of the position regulator integral gain.
774
Units: RPM XReg Integ Out The output of the position regulator integral channel after application of the limits. This output Default: 0 is set to zero if the integral gain is set to zero or the integrator is not enabled. Min/Max: -/+14112.0000 Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0pu The negative speed limit of total position regulator output. Point to point mode uses this parameter to set the reverse speed reference.
775
XReg Spd LoLim
RPM -176.4000 -14112.0000/0.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0pu RPM 176.4000 0.0000/14112.0000 Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] = 1.0pu
RW Real
776
The positive speed limit of total position regulator output. Point to point mode uses this parameter to set the forward speed reference.
XReg Spd HiLim
RW Real
777
Default: 0 = Encoder 0 PositionFdbk Sel Enter a value to select the position control feedback device. The feedback device used for Options: 0 = Encoder 0 position control may be an independent selection from the motor speed control feedback 1 = Encoder 1 device in Par 222 [Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri] or Par 223 [Mtr Fdbk Sel Alt]. If the position feedback is to 2 = Reserved be the same as the motor feedback, select option 3 Motor Fdbk. This option will set the 3 = Mtr Fdbk Pri selected feedback of Par 222 [Motor Fdbk Sel Pri] or Par 223 [Mtr Fdbk Sel Alt] as the position 4 = Motor Sim regulators position feedback. 5 = FB Opt Port0 6 = FB Opt Port1 Notes: Options 5 and 6 are only available when compatible feedback option card is installed. This parameter was changed to non-linkable for firmware version 3.01.
7 = SL DirIntRx0 8 = SL DirIntRx1 9 = SL DirIntRx2 10 = SL DirIntRx3
778
X Notch Attenu
Default: 50 Sets the depth for the Position Notch Filter. Attenuation is the ratio of the output to the input at Min/Max: 0/500 the notch frequency. An attenuation of 30 means that the notch output is 1/30th of the input at the specified frequency. Calculation: Attenuation = Input / Output
RW Real
Attenuation
Freq (Hz)
779 780
Sets the center frequency of the Position Notch Filter.
X Notch FiltFreq
Units: Hz Default: 0.0 Min/Max: 0.0/500.0
RW Real RW 32-bit Integer
PositDetct1 Stpt
Default: 0 Provides the set point for Position Watch 1. Position Watch 1 is enabled and configured with Min/Max: -/+2147483648 Par 740 [Position Control] bits 16 & 17. Position Watch 1 compares this value with Par 784 [Posit Dect1 In] and sets bit 8 Posit Watch1 of Par 741 [Position Status] when the appropriate condition is satisfied. Default: 0 Provides the set point for Position Watch 2. Position Watch 2 is enabled and configured with Min/Max: -/+2147483648 Par 740 [Position Control] bits 18 & 19. Position Watch 2 compares this value with Par 785 [Posit Dect2 In] and sets bit 9 Posit Watch2 of Par 741 [Position Status] when the appropriate condition is satisfied.
781
PositDetct2 Stpt
RW 32-bit Integer
782
In Posit BW
Default: 200 Sets the overall bandwidth of the In Position detector. The detector sets bit 10 In Position of Min/Max: 0/1000000 Par 741 [Position Status], when Par 769 [Position Error] is within this bandwidth for a sufficient time, specified by Par 783 [In Posit Dwell]. A modest hysteresis count is added to the position bandwidth after the position error is within specified limits. Units: Sec In Posit Dwell Position error must be within the value specified by Par 782 [In Posit BW] for this amount of Default: 0.0040 time before the In Position detector sets bit 10 In Position of Par 741 [Position Status]. A Min/Max: 0.0000/10.0000 momentary out-of-position indication will reset the internal timer and clear the In Position status bit.
RW 32-bit Integer
783
RW Real
784
Default: 0 Posit Dect1 In Provides the input variable for Position Watch 1. Position Watch 1 is enabled and configured Min/Max: -/+2147483648 with Par 740 [Position Control] bits 16 & 17. Position Watch 1 compares this value with Par 780 [PositDetct1 Stpt] and sets bit 8 Posit Watch1 of Par 741 [Position Status] when the appropriate condition is satisfied. A default link connects this parameter to Par 763 [Position Actual].
RW 32-bit Integer

RO Real
3-94
No. 785
Default: 0 Provides the input variable for Position Watch 2. Position Watch 2 is enabled and configured Min/Max: -/+2147483648 with Par 740 [Position Control] bits 18 & 19. Position Watch 2 compares this value with Par 781 [PositDetct2 Stpt] and sets bit 9 Posit Watch2 of Par 741 [Position Status] when the appropriate condition is satisfied. A default link connects this parameter to Par 763 [Position Actual].
Name Description Posit Dect2 In
Values
RW 32-bit Integer
786
Xsync Status
Bit 0 Sync Pulse will go high for 0.5ms latching the Sync Generator inputs to the Sync Generator outputs. The period at which this bit is set is determined by Par 787 [Xsync Gen Period]. Note: Bit 1 was changed to Reserved for firmware version 2.04. Sync Unstbl Sync Pulse 0 0 0 = False 1 = True RW 32-bit Integer RO 32-bit Integer RW 32-bit Integer RO 32-bit Integer RO 32-bit Integer RW 32-bit Integer RW 32-bit Integer RW 32-bit Integer RW Real Sync Loss Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved InterpInSync 0 2 Reserved 1 1
Default Bit
1 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
787
Default: 1 = Xsync Gen Period Sets the period for the Sync Pulse Generator. Bit 0 of Par 786 [Xsync Status] will be set for 0.5 Options: 0 = msec and will be cleared for 0.5msec * 2[Xsync Gen Period] - 0.5 msec. 1= Note: Values 5 - 16 msec and 6 - 32 msec were added for firmware version 2.04. 2= 3=
1 msec 0.5 msec 1 msec 2 msec 4 msec
4 = 8 msec 5 = 16 msec 6 = 32 msec
788
Default: 0 Xsync In 1 32-bit integer input of the Sync Generator. Latched to Par 789 [Xsync Out 1]. Link any 32-bit Min/Max: 0/4294967295 integer parameter to this input parameter. Note: This parameter was changed to an unsigned integer data type and linkable to parameters that are either real or integer values for firmware version 4.001.
789
Xsync Out 1
Default: 0 Sync Generator 32-bit output register. Latched to Par 788 [Xsync In 1] every time bit 0 Sync Min/Max: 0/4294967295 Pulse of Par 786 [Xsync Status] is set. Note: This parameter was changed to an unsigned integer data type and linkable to parameters that are either real or integer values for firmware version 4.001.
790
791
Xsync Out 2
Default: 0 Sync Generator 32-bit output register. Latched to Par 790 [Xsync In 2] every time bit 0 Sync Min/Max: 0/4294967295 Pulse of Par 786 [Xsync Status] is set. Note: This parameter was changed to an unsigned integer data type and linkable to parameters that are either real or integer values for firmware version 4.001. Default: 0 Min/Max: 0/4294967295
792
Xsync Out 2 Dly
Displays data of Par 791 [Xsync Out 2] from the last sync period. Note: This parameter was changed to an unsigned integer data type and linkable to parameters that are either real or integer values for firmware version 4.001.
793
794
Xsync Out 3
Default: 0 Sync Generator 32-bit output register. Latched to Par 793 [Xsync In 3] every time bit 0 Sync Min/Max: 0/4294967295 Pulse of Par 786 [Xsync Status] is set. Note: This parameter was changed to an unsigned integer data type and linkable to parameters that are either real or integer values for firmware version 4.001. Default: 0 Min/Max: 0/4294967295
795
Xsync Out 3 Dly
Displays data of Par 794 [Xsync Out 3] from the last sync period. Note: This parameter was changed to an unsigned integer data type and linkable to parameters that are either real or integer values for firmware version 4.001. Sets the load side gear ratio for position control. Adjust this value when the selection of Par 777 [PositionFdbk Sel] is not 3 Motor Fdbk. Calculation: Motor Encoder (Rpm) / Load Encoder (Rpm) Note: This parameter was changed to non-linkable for firmware version 3.01. This parameter was changed to be linkable for firmware version 3.04.
796
Posit Gear Ratio
Default: 1.00 Min/Max: 0.00/9999.00
3-95
No. 797
Name Description BasicIndx Step
Values
Default: 0 Sets the amount added to or subtracted from Par 799 [BasicIndx Output] on a rising edge of Min/Max: -/+2147483648 Par 740 [Position Control], bit 12 BscIndx Step. Note that this value can be positive or negative.
RW 32-bit Integer RW 32-bit Integer RO 32-bit Integer RO Real RO Real
798 799 800 801
Default: 0 BasicIndx Preset Sets the value to be moved into Par 799 [BasicIndx Output] when Par 740 [Position Control], Min/Max: -/+2147483648 bit 11 BscIndx Enbl and bit 14 BscIndx Prst are both on. Displays the output of the Position Index function.
BasicIndx Output
Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648 Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000
Displays the scaled final value for Analog Input 1.
Anlg In1 Data
Units: V/mA Anlg In1 Value Displays the actual input value at Analog Input 1. Analog Input 1 may be configured for Default: 0.0000 voltage or current input signal. For proper selection of the input signal, the DIP switch S-5 and Min/Max: -/+20.0000 Par 821 [Analog I/O Units] must be set to match. Par 801 [Anlg In1 Value] is multiplied by the value in Par 802 [Anlg In1 Scale] to produce the input to the lead lag filter function. Type of Input: Configurable, Voltage or Current Polarity: Resolution: Bi-Polar 14 bit (-8191 to +8191) DIP Switch AI 1 Voltage AI 1 Current S5-2 = Open S5-2 = Closed Analog I/O Units Par 821 Bit 0 = 0 (False) Par 821 Bit 0 = 1 (True)
802
Units: /V or /mA Anlg In1 Scale Scales the range of Analog Input 1 to the range of Par 800 [Anlg In1 Data]. Enter the units you Default: 0.1000 want per volt or mA. For example: If Par 801 [Anlg In1 Value] = 0 - 10V and you enter 6 in Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 this parameter, Par 800 [Anlg In1 Data] will equal 0 - 60V. Par 801 * Par 802 = Par 800. Units: V/mA Anlg In1 Offset Applies an offset to Analog Input 1. Use the offset to correct for zero signal errors or to create Default: 0.0000 an offset to the actual input. The output of the A/D converter is summed with this parameter to Min/Max: -/+20.0000 produce Par 801 [Anlg In1 Value]. Provides the Lead term for the Analog Input 1 filter. Provides the Lag term for the Analog Input 1 filter.
RW Real
803
RW Real
804 805
AI 1 Filt Gain
Default: 1.0000 Min/Max: -/+5.0000 Units: R/S Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: 0.0000/3760.0000l
RW Real RW Real
Anlg In1 Filt BW
Light Heavy
Par 804 [Al 1 Filt Gain] Par 805 [Anlg In1 Filt BW] 0.25 50 0.1 10 Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 RO Real RO Real
806 807
Anlg In2 Data
Units: V/mA Anlg In2 Value Displays the actual input value at Analog Input 2. Analog Input 2 may be configured for Default: 0.0000 voltage or current input signal. For proper selection of the input signal, the DIP switch S-5 and Min/Max: -/+20.0000 Par 821 [Analog I/O Units] must be set to match. Par 807 [Anlg In2 Value] is multiplied by Par 808 [Anlg In2 Scale] produce the input to the lead lag filter function. Type of Input: Configurable, Voltage or Current Polarity: Resolution: Bi-Polar 14 bit (-8191 to +8191) DIP Switch AI 2 Voltage AI 2 Current S5-1 = Open S5-1 = Closed Analog I/O Units Par 821 Bit 1 = 0 (False) Par 821 Bit 1 = 1 (True)
3-96
No. 808
Name Description Anlg In2 Scale
Values
Units: /V or /mA Scales the range of Analog Input 2 to the range of Par 806 [Anlg In2 Data]. Enter the units you Default: 0.1000 want per volt or mA. For example: If Par 807 [Anlg In2 Value] = 0 - 10V and you enter 6 in Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 this parameter, Par 806 [Anlg In2 Data] will equal 0 - 60V. Par 807 * Par 808 = Par 806. Units: V/mA Anlg In2 Offset Applies an offset to Analog Input 2. Use the offset to correct for zero signal errors or to create Default: 0.0000 an offset to the actual input. The output of the A/D converter is summed with this parameter to Min/Max: -/+20.0000 produce Par 807 [Anlg In2 Value]. Provides the Lead term for the Analog Input 2 filter. Sets the frequency for the Analog Input 2 filter.
RW Real
809
RW Real
810 811
AI 2 Filt Gain
Default: 1.0000 Min/Max: -/+5.0000 Units: R/S Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: 0.0000/3760.0000
RW Real RW Real
Anlg In2 Filt BW
Light Heavy
Par 810 [Al 2 Filt Gain Par 811 [Anlg In2 Filt BW] 0.25 50 0.1 10 Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 RO Real RO Real
812 813
Anlg In3 Data
Units: Volts Anlg In3 Value Displays the actual input value at Analog Input 3. Analog Input 3 is a uni-polar voltage input Default: 0.0000 only and cannot be configured for current. Min/Max: 0.0/10.0 Type of Input = Voltage Polarity = Uni-Polar Resolution = 10 bit (0 to +1023) Note: When bit 2 AI3 Thermstr of Par 821 [Analog I/O Units] is set (= 1), this parameter cannot be viewed from the HIM.
814
Units: /Volts Anlg In3 Scale Scales the raw analog input data plus the input offset (if any) to the desired data range. The Default: 0.1000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 scaled data for Analog Input 3 is displayed in Par 812 [Anlg In3 Data] and is available for usage in the drive. Enter the units you want per volt. For example: If Par 813 [Anlg In3 Value] = 0 - 10V and you enter 6 in this parameter, Par 812 [Anlg In3 Data] will equal 0 - 60V. Par 813 * Par 814 = Par 812. Note: When bit 2 AI3 Thermstr of Par 821 [Analog I/O Units] is set (= 1), this parameter cannot be viewed from the HIM. Units: Volts Anlg In3 Offset Applies an offset to Analog Input 3. Use the offset to correct for zero signal errors or to create Default: 0.0000 an offset to the actual input. The output of the A/D converter is summed with this parameter to Min/Max: -/+20.0 produce Par 813 [Anlg In3 Value]. Note: When bit 2 AI3 Thermstr of Par 821 [Analog I/O Units] is set (= 1), this parameter cannot be viewed from the HIM. Provides the Lead term for the Analog Input 3 filter. Note: When bit 2 AI3 Thermstr of Par 821 [Analog I/O Units] is set (= 1), this parameter cannot be viewed from the HIM. Provides the Lag term for the Analog Input 3 filter. Note: When bit 2 AI3 Thermstr of Par 821 [Analog I/O Units] is set (= 1), this parameter cannot be viewed from the HIM.
RW Real
815
RW Real
816
AI 3 Filt Gain
Default: 1.0000 Min/Max: -/+5.0
RW Real
817
Anlg In3 Filt BW
RW Real
Light Heavy
Par 816 [Al 3 Filt Gain Par 817 [Anlg In3 Filt BW] 0.25 50 0.1 10
3-97
No. 821
Name Description Analog I/O Units
Values
Use to configure the type of units (voltage or current) for the analog I/O. For analog input 1, configure bit 0 to match the selection of hardware switch S5-2; bit 0 set to 0 = V, or set to 1 = mA. Also, the units for Pars 801 [Anlg In1 Value], 802 [Anlg In1 Scale], and 803 [Anlg In1 Offset] will correspond to this setting. For analog input 2, configure bit 1 to match the selection of hardware switch S5-1; bit 1 set to 0 = V, or set to 1 = mA. Also, the units for Pars 807 [Anlg In2 Value], 808 [Anlg In2 Scale], and 809 [Anlg In2 Offset] will correspond to this setting. Bit 2 AI3 Thermstr configures analog input 3 for a thermistor input with range of 0 to 10V. For analog output 1, use bit 16 to configure Pars 835 [Anlg Out1 Scale], 836 [Anlg Out1 Zero], and 837 [Anlg Out1 Value] for voltage or current; bit 16 set to 0 = V, or set to 1 = mA. For analog output 2, use bit 17 to configure Pars 842 [Anlg Out2 Scale], 843 [Anlg Out2 Zero], and 844 [Anlg Out2 Value] for voltage or current; bit 16 set to 0 = V, or set to 1 = mA. No hardware configuration is needed for the analog outputs. AO2 Current AO1 Current AI2 Current 0 1 AI1 Current 0 0 0 = False 1 = True 0 0 Reserved 0 = False 1 = True Hw Enbl Byps 0 0 0 = False 1 = True Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved AI3 Thermstr Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
823
Sets the amount of de-bounce (filtering) for each digital input. This is used to remove unwanted on/off cycling (chatter) on the digital inputs caused by relay bounce. Each digital input de-bounce is configured separately from 0.5ms to 8.0ms. The bit selections are cumulative for each digital input (1 - 6). Example: bit 4 & 2 & 1 on = 5.5ms of de-bounce for digital input 1. DI6 8.0ms DI6 4.0ms DI6 2.0ms DI6 1.0ms DI6 0.5ms DI5 8.0ms DI5 4.0ms DI5 2.0ms DI5 1.0ms DI5 0.5ms DI4 8.0ms DI4 4.0ms DI4 2.0ms DI4 1.0ms DI4 0.5ms DI3 8.0ms DI3 4.0ms DI3 2.0ms DI3 1.0ms DI3 0.5ms DI2 8.0ms DI2 4.0ms DI2 2.0ms DI2 1.0ms DI2 0.5ms DI1 8.0ms DI1 4.0ms DI1 2.0ms DI1 1.0ms Reserved Options DI1 0.5ms 1 1 0 1 DigIn 1
DigIn Debounce
Default Bit
1 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
824
Displays the status of the local I/O. SafeOffInput Relay Out 3 Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Local I/O Status
DigOut 2
DigOut 1
DigIn 6
DigIn 5
DigIn 4
DigIn 3
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
825
Default: 0 = Not Used Options: 0 = Not Used 1 = Enable 2 = Clear Faults 3 = Ext Fault Sends Input to this 4 = Norm Stop-CF Selection bit in Par 1022 5 = Start 34 UserGen Sel0 Bit 1 Sel Switch 00 6 = Reverse 7 = Run 35 UserGen Sel1 Bit 2 Sel Switch 01 8 = Reserved 36 UserGen Sel2 Bit 3 Sel Switch 02 9 = Reserved 10 = Jog 1 37 UserGen Sel3 Bit 4 Sel Switch 03 11 = Reserved 12 = Reserved Note: For all Stop Functions: Low = Stop, High = OK to Run, In "Norm Stop-CF" Low = 13 = Jog 2 Normal Stop and Clear Fault. 14 = Normal Stop 15 = Spd Ref Sel0 Note: When Using the MAH instruction in DriveLogix to home an axis and Digital Input 1 16 = Spd Ref Sel1 is used as the homing switch, this parameter must be set to 0 Not Used. When the 17 = Spd Ref Sel2 MAH instruction is executed, this parameter will be changed to option 31 Regis 1 18 = CurLim Stop Ltch, to indicate that the drive registration has latched the encoder position when the 19 = Coast Stop switch was activated. 20 = Accel Decel2 Note: Option 38 ExtFault Inv was added for firmware version 2.04. Option 39 Home Switch was added for firmware version 3.01. Values 41 and 42 were added for firmware version 4.001. Enter a value to select the function of digital input 1. Selecting options 34 UserGen Sel0 - 37 UserGen Sel3 sends Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) data to Par 1022 [Sel Switch Ctrl] as follows: Note: Option 20 Accel Decel2 is not functional.
Dig In1 Sel
21 = Indx Step 22 = Indx StepRev 23 = MOP Inc 24 = MOP Dec 25 = MOP Reset 26 = PI Trim En 27 = PI Trim Hold 28 = PI Trim Rst 29 = Trend Trig 30 = PreCharge En 31 = Regis 1 Ltch 32 = +Hrd OvrTrvl 33 = -Hrd OvrTrvl 34 = UserGen Sel0 35 = UserGen Sel1 36 = UserGen Sel2 37 = UserGen Sel3 38 = ExtFault Inv 39 = Home Switch 41 = Find Home 42 = Return Home
DigIn 2
3-98
No. 826
Name Description Dig In2 Sel

Note:
Values
Default: 0 = Not Used Options: 0 = Not Used 1 = Enable 2 = Clear Faults 3 = Ext Fault 4 = Norm Stop-CF 5 = Start 6 = Reverse 7 = Run 8 = Reserved 9 = Reserved 10 = Jog 1 11 = Reserved 12 = Reserved 13 = Jog 2 14 = Normal Stop 15 = Spd Ref Sel0 16 = Spd Ref Sel1 17 = Spd Ref Sel2 18 = CurLim Stop 19 = Coast Stop 20 = Accel Decel2
Enter a value to select the function of digital input 2. Refer to Par 825 for a description of options 34 UserGen Sel0 - 37 UserGen Sel3. For all Stop Functions: Low = Stop, High = OK to Run, In "Norm Stop-CF" Low = Normal Stop and Clear Fault.
Notes: Option 38 ExtFault Inv was added for firmware version 2.04. Option 39 Home Switch was added for firmware version 3.01. Values 41 and 42 were added for firmware version 4.001.
21 = Indx Step 22 = Indx StepRev 23 = MOP Inc 24 = MOP Dec 25 = MOP Reset 26 = PI Trim En 27 = PI Trim Hold 28 = PI Trim Rst 29 = Trend Trig 30 = PreCharge En 31 = Regis 2 Ltch 32 = +Hrd OvrTrvl 33 = -Hrd OvrTrvl 34 = UserGen Sel0 35 = UserGen Sel1 36 = UserGen Sel2 37 = UserGen Sel3 38 = ExtFault Inv 39 = Home Switch 41 = Find Home 42 = Return Home 21 = Indx Step 22 = Indx StepRev 23 = MOP Inc 24 = MOP Dec 25 = MOP Reset 26 = PI Trim En 27 = PI Trim Hold 28 = PI Trim Rst 29 = Trend Trig 30 = PreCharge En 31 = Reserved 32 = +Hrd OvrTrvl 33 = -Hrd OvrTrvl 34 = UserGen Sel0 35 = UserGen Sel1 36 = UserGen Sel2 37 = UserGen Sel3 38 = ExtFault Inv 39 = Reserved 41 = Find Home 42 = Return Home 14 = Reserved 15 = Motor TrqRef 16 = MtrTrqCurRef 17 = Speed Ref 18 = Speed Fdbk 19 = Torque Est 20 = Scl Spd Fdbk 21 = RampedSpdRef 22 = Spd Reg Out 23 = MOP Level 24 = Trend 1 DInt 25 = Trend 1 Real 26 = Trend 2 DInt 27 = Trend 2 Real
827 828 829 830
Dig In3 Sel
Default: 0 = Not Used Options: 0 = Not Used Dig In4 Sel 1 = Enable(1) Enter a value to select the function of digital input 4. 2 = Clear Faults Dig In5 Sel 3 = Ext Fault Enter a value to select the function of digital input 5. 4 = Norm Stop-CF Dig In6 Sel 5 = Start Enter a value to select the function of digital input 6. 6 = Reverse Refer to Par 825 for a description of options 34 UserGen Sel0 - 37 UserGen Sel3. 7 = Run 8 = Reserved Note: For all Stop Functions: Low = Stop, High = OK to Run, In "Norm Stop-CF" Low = 9 = Reserved Normal Stop and Clear Fault. 10 = Jog 1 Note: Notes: Option 38 ExtFault Inv was added for firmware version 2.04. Option 39 11 = Reserved Home Switch was added for firmware version 3.01. Values 41 and 42 were added 12 = Reserved and value 39 was deleted for firmware version 4.001. 13 = Jog 2 14 = Normal Stop (1) Opening an Enable input will cause the motor to coast-to-stop, ignoring any programmed 15 = Spd Ref Sel0 Stop modes. 16 = Spd Ref Sel1 17 = Spd Ref Sel2 18 = CurLim Stop 19 = Coast Stop 20 = Accel Decel2 Enter a value to select the function of digital input 3. Default: 17 = Speed Fdbk Anlg Out1 Sel Identifies the signal used on Analog Output 1. If the desired signal is not available in the Options: 0 = User Select selection list, choose option 0 - User Select and link with Par 832 [Anlg Out1 DInt] or Par 833 1 = Output Freq [Anlg Out1 Real] to select the desired parameter for output. 2 = Sel Spd Ref 3 = Output Curr The following table provides the parameter that corresponds to the option selected in this 4 = Trq Cur (Iq) parameter. 5 = % Motor Flux 6 = Output Power Option Parameter Option Parameter 7 = Output Volts 8 = DC Bus Volts 16 MtrTrqCurRef 305 [Mtr Trq Curr Ref] 1 Output Freq 310 [Output Freq] 9 = PI Reference 301 [Motor Speed Ref] 2 Sel Spd Ref 40 [Selected Spd Ref] 17 Speed Ref 10 = PI Feedback 11 = PI Error 71 [Filtered SpdFdbk] 3 Output Curr 308 [Output Current] 18 Speed Fdbk 12 = PI Output 471 [Estimated Torque] 4 Trq Cur (Iq) 499 [Trq Cur Fdbk (Iq)] 19 Torque Est 13 = Reserved 20 Scl Spd Fdbk 72 [Scaled Spd Fdbk] 5 % Motor Flux 309 [% Motor Flux] 6 Output Power 311 [Output Power] 7 Output Volts 307 [Output Voltage] 8 DC Bus Volts 306 [DC Bus Voltage] 9 PI Reference 181 [PI Reference] 10 PI Feedback 182 [PI Feedback] 11 PI Error 12 PI Output 183 [PI Error] 180 [PI Output] 21 RampedSpdRef 22 Spd Reg Out 23 MOP Level 24 Trend 1 DInt 25 Trend 1 Real 26 Trend 2 DInt 27 Trend 2 Real 43 [Ramped Spd Ref] 101 [SpdReg Integ Out] 1090 [MOP Level Real] 572 [Trend Out1 DInt] 573 [Trend Out1 Real] 576 [Trend Out2 DInt] 577 [Trend Out2 Real]
831
15 Motor TrqRef 303 [Motor Torque Ref]
3-99
No. 832 833 834
Name Description Anlg Out1 DInt
Values
Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648
Link this parameter to an integer source parameter that will control Analog Output 1.
RW 32-bit Integer RW Real RW Real
Default: 0.0000 Anlg Out1 Real Link this parameter to a real (floating point) source parameter that will control Analog Output Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000.0000 1. Default: 0.0000 Anlg Out1 Offset Provides an offset for Analog Output 1 before the scaling and limit blocks in the Analog Output Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 1 function. This parameter value is summed with either Par 832 [Anlg Out1 DInt] or Par 833 [Anlg Out1 Real] at the beginning of the function. Units: /V Anlg Out1 Scale Scales the range of the source parameter to the range of Analog Output 1. For example: If Par Default: 0.0000 831 [Anlg Out1 Sel] is set to 1 Output Freq, the output frequency of the drive is 0 - 60Hz and Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 you enter 6 in this parameter, Par 837 [Anlg Out1 Value] = 6Hz per 1V, or 0 - 60Hz. Par 832 [Anlg Out1 DInt] or Par 833 [Anlg Out1 Real] is multiplied by this number after the limit function. Note: The turn-off point for this parameter has been changed from 0.001 to 0.0001 for firmware version 4.002. Units: Volt Anlg Out1 Zero Applies an offset to the scaled value of Analog Output 1. This parameter is summed with the Default: 0.0000 output of the scaling block. This sum produces Par 837 [Anlg Out1 Value]. Typically this value Min/Max: -/+20.0000 corresponds to 0V for Analog Output 1. Displays the voltage reference for Analog Output 1 before the digital to analog conversion.
835
RW Real
836
RW Real
837 838
Anlg Out1 Value
Units: Volt Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+10.0000
Default: 3 = Output Curr Anlg Out2 Sel Identifies the signal used on Analog Output 2. If the desired signal is not available in the Options: 0 = User Select selection list, choose option 0 - User Select and link with Par 839 [Anlg Out2 DInt] or Par 840 1 = Output Freq [Anlg Out2 Real] to select the desired parameter for output. Refer to Par 831 for a list of 2 = Sel Spd Ref parameters that correspond to the option selected in this parameter. 3 = Output Curr 4 = Trq Cur (Iq) 5 = % Motor Flux 6 = Output Power 7 = Output Volts 8 = DC Bus Volts 9 = PI Reference 10 = PI Feedback 11 = PI Error 12 = PI Output 13 = Reserved Link this parameter to an integer source parameter that will control Analog Output 2.
14 = Reserved 15 = Motor TrqRef 16 = MtrTrqCurRef 17 = Speed Ref 18 = Speed Fdbk 19 = Torque Est 20 = Scl Spd Fdbk 21 = RampedSpdRef 22 = Spd Reg Out 23 = MOP Level 24 = Trend 1 DInt 25 = Trend 1 Real 26 = Trend 2 DInt 27 = Trend 2 Real RW 32-bit Integer RW Real RW Real
839 840 841
Anlg Out2 DInt
Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648
Default: 0.0000 Anlg Out2 Real Link this parameter to a real (floating point) source parameter that will control Analog Output Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 2. Default: 0.0000 Anlg Out2 Offset Provides an offset for Analog Output 2 before the scaling and limit blocks in the Analog Output Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 2 function. This parameter value is summed with either Par 839 [Anlg Out2 DInt] or Par 840 [Anlg Out2 Real] at the beginning of the function. Units: /V Anlg Out2 Scale Scales the range of the source parameter to the range of Analog Output 2. For example: If Par Default: 0.0000 838 [Anlg Out2 Sel] is set to 1 Output Freq, the output frequency of the drive is 0 - 60Hz and Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 you enter 6 in this parameter, Par 844 [Anlg Out2 Value] = 6Hz per 1V, or 0 - 60Hz. Par 839 [Anlg Out2 DInt] or Par 840 [Anlg Out2 Real] is multiplied by this number after the limit function. Note: The turn-off point for this parameter has been changed from 0.001 to 0.0001 for firmware version 4.002. Units: Volt Anlg Out2 Zero Applies an offset to the scaled value of Analog Output 2. This parameter is summed with the Default: 0.0000 output of the scaling block. This sum produces Par 844 [Anlg Out2 Value]. Typically this value Min/Max: -/+20.0000 corresponds to 0V for Analog Output 2. Displays the voltage reference for Analog Output 2 before the digital to analog conversion.
842
RW Real
843
RW Real
844
Anlg Out2 Value
Units: Volt Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+10.0000

RO Real RO Real
3-100
No. 845
Name Description Dig Out1 Sel
Values
Default: 3 = Ready Options: 0 = User Select 1 = Not Fault 2 = Not Alarm 3 = Ready 4 = Running 5 = Reserved 6 = Reserved 7 = Enable On 8 = Active 9 = At Speed 10 = At Setpt 1 11 = Above Setpt 2 12 = At ZeroSpeed 13 = Speed Limit 14 = CurrentLimit
identifies the signal used on Digital Output 1. If the desired signal is not available in the selection list, choose option 0 - User Select and link with Par 846 [Dig Out1 Data] and Par 847 [Dig Out1 Bit] to select the desired parameter and bit for output.
15 = Torque Limit 16 = Power Limit 17 = Fault 18 = Alarm 19 = Command Dir 20 = Actual Dir 21 = Jogging 22 = In Position 23 = Posit Watch1 24 = Posit Watch2 25 = Cmpr 1 A</=B 26 = Cmpr 1 A>/=B 27 = Cmpr 2 A</=B 28 = Cmpr 2 A>/=B
846 847
Dig Out1 Data Dig Out1 Bit
Default: 00000000000000000000000000000000 RW 32-bit 00000000000000000000000000000000 Boolean Link a word to this parameter that will control Digital Output 1. The bit within the selected word Min: Max: 11111111111111111111111111111111 that will control Digital Output 1 is set by Par 847 [Dig Out1 Bit]. RW 16-bit Integer
Default: 0 Selects the bit, from the word linked to Par 846 [Dig Out1 Data], that will change the status of Min/Max: -32/31 Digital Output 1 (e.g., when Par 847 [Dig Out1 Bit] equals 0, bit 0 of Par 846 [Dig Out1 Data] will control Digital Output 1). Units: Sec Dig Out1 On Time Defines the amount of time between a False to True transition on the output status and the Default: 0.00 corresponding change in state of Digital Output 1. If a transition on an output condition occurs Min/Max: 0.00/600.00 and starts the time delay and the output condition returns to its original state before the delay timer reaches the setpoint, the delay timer will be aborted and the corresponding output status or digital output will not change state. Par 848 [Dig Out1 On Time] can be disabled by setting the delay time to 0 (zero). Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Units: Sec Dig Out1 OffTime Defines the amount of time between a True to False transition on the output status and the Default: 0.00 corresponding change in state of Digital Output 1. If a transition on an output condition occurs Min/Max: 0.00/600.00 and starts the time delay and the output condition returns to its original state before the delay timer reaches the setpoint, the delay timer will be aborted and the corresponding output status or digital output will not change state. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Default: 8 = Active Dig Out2 Sel Identifies the signal used on Digital Output 2. If the desired signal is not available in the Options: 0 = User Select selection list, choose option 0 - User Select and link with Par 851 [Dig Out 2 Data] and Par 1 = Not Fault 852 [Dig Out2 Bit] to select the desired parameter and bit for output. 2 = Not Alarm 3 = Ready 4 = Running 5 = Reserved 6 = Reserved 7 = Enable On 8 = Active 9 = At Speed 10 = At Setpt 1 11 = Above Setpt 2 12 = At ZeroSpeed 13 = Speed Limit 14 = CurrentLimit
848
849
850
851 852
Dig Out2 Data
Default: 00000000000000000000000000000000 RW 32-bit 00000000000000000000000000000000 Boolean Link a word to this parameter that will control Digital Output 2. The bit within the selected word Min: Max: 11111111111111111111111111111111 that will control Digital Output 2 is set by Par 852 [Dig Out2 Bit]. Default: 0 Dig Out 2 Bit Selects the bit, from the word linked to Par 851 [Dig Out 2 Data], that will change the status of Min/Max: -32/31 Digital Output 2 (e.g., when Par 852 [Dig Out 2 Bit] equals 0, bit 0 of Par 851 [Dig Out 2 Data] will control Digital Output 2). Units: Sec Dig Out2 On Time Defines the amount of time between a False to True transition on the output status and the Default: 0.00 corresponding change in state of Digital Output 2. If a transition on an output condition occurs Min/Max: 0.00/600.00 and starts the time delay and the output condition returns to its original state before the delay timer reaches the setpoint, the delay timer will be aborted and the corresponding output status or digital output will not change state. Par 853 [Dig Out2 On Time] can be disabled by setting the delay time to 0 (zero). Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. RW 16-bit Integer
853

3-101
No. 854
Name Description Dig Out2 OffTime
Values
Units: Sec Defines the amount of time between a True to False transition on the output status and the Default: 0.0 corresponding change in state of Digital Output 2. If a transition on an output condition occurs Min/Max: 0.0/600.00 and starts the time delay and the output condition returns to its original state before the delay timer reaches the setpoint, the delay timer will be aborted and the corresponding output status or digital output will not change state. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Identifies the signal used on Digital Output 3. If the desired signal is not available in the selection list, choose option 0 - User Select and link with Par 856 [Rly Out3 Data] and Par 857 [Rly Out3 Bit] to select the desired parameter for output. Default: 1 = Not Fault Options: 0 = User Select 1 = Not Fault 2 = Not Alarm 3 = Ready 4 = Running 5 = Reserved 6 = Reserved 7 = Enable On 8 = Active 9 = At Speed 10 = At Setpt 1 11 = Above Setpt 2 12 = At ZeroSpeed 13 = Speed Limit 14 = CurrentLimit
855
Rly Out3 Sel
856 857
Default: 00000000000000000000000000000000 RW 32-bit Rly Out3 Data Link a word to this parameter that will control the Relay Output 3. The bit within the selected Min: 00000000000000000000000000000000 Boolean word that will control Relay Output 3 is set by Par 857 [Rly Out3 Bit]. Max: 11111111111111111111111111111111 Default: 0 Rly Out3 Bit Selects the bit, from the word linked to Par 856 [Rly Out3 Data] that will change the status of Min/Max: -32/31 the Relay Output 3 (e.g., when Par 857 [Rly Out3 Bit] equals 0, bit 0 of Par 856 [Rly Out3 Data] will control the Relay Output 3). RW 16-bit Integer
858
Rly Out3 On Time
Units: Sec Defines the amount of time between a False to True transition on the output status and the Default: 0.00 corresponding change in state of Relay Output 3. If a transition on an output condition occurs Min/Max: 0.00/600.00 and starts the time delay and the output condition returns to its original state before the delay timer reaches the setpoint, the delay timer will be aborted and the corresponding output status or relay output will not change state. Par 858 [Rly Out3 On Time] can be disabled by setting the delay time to 0 (zero). Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Units: Sec Defines the amount of time between a True to False transition on the output status and the Default: 0.00 corresponding change in state of Relay Output 3. If a transition on an output condition occurs Min/Max: 0.00/600.00 and starts the time delay and the output condition returns to its original state before the delay timer reaches the setpoint, the delay timer will be aborted and the corresponding output status or relay output will not change state. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
859
Rly Out3 OffTime

3-102
No.
Name Description General BitSwap Description
Values
The six (6) Bit Swap functions are used to replace one bit in a word with one bit from a different word. This is typically done to a control word where one bit in the control word is replaced by a bit from another word such as a digital input. Four (4) input parameters and one (1) output parameter are used to accomplish each Bit Swap function. Refer to the User Functions 1 block diagram on page B-20.
860 865 870 875 880 885 861 866 871 876 881 886 862 867 872 877 882 887 863
BitSwap 1A Data
Default: 0 Min/Max: 32 bits of data
RW 32-bit Boolean
This is the main word in which 1 bit will be edited. All of the data from this word except the selected bit in Par 861 [BitSwap 1A Bit] are passed to Par 864 [BitSwap 1 Result].
This parameter specifies the bit to be replaced in Par 860 [BitSwap 1A Data].
BitSwap 2A Data BitSwap 3A Data BitSwap 4A Data BitSwap 5A Data BitSwap 6A Data BitSwap 1A Bit BitSwap 2A Bit BitSwap 3A Bit BitSwap 4A Bit BitSwap 5A Bit BitSwap 6A Bit BitSwap 1B Data BitSwap 2B Data BitSwap 3B Data BitSwap 4B Data BitSwap 5B Data BitSwap 6B Data BitSwap 1B Bit
This parameter contains the word from which the replacement bit will be selected. Only the selected bit is passed to Par 864 [BitSwap 1 Result].
RW 32-bit Boolean
Default: 0 This parameter specifies the bit from Par 862 [BitSwap 1B Data] that will replace the specified Min/Max: -32/+31 bit in Par 860 [BitSwap 1A Data] and be loaded to Par 864 [BitSwap 1 Result]. A negative bit selection may be used to invert the data. Use -32 to invert the value of bit 0.
868 873 878 883 888 864 869 874 879 884 889
This parameter contains the result of the Bit Swap operation.
BitSwap 2B Bit BitSwap 3B Bit BitSwap 4B Bit BitSwap 5B Bit BitSwap 6B Bit BitSwap 1 Result BitSwap 2 Result BitSwap 3 Result BitSwap 4 Result BitSwap 5 Result BitSwap 6 Result

RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RO 32-bit Boolean
3-103
No. 892
Name Description SL Comm TP Sel
Values
Zero Zero SL MultA Src SL Mult A In SL Mult B In SL Mult Out Rx Axis Size Rx Dir Size Rx Buf Size Rx Pkg Size Rx Seq Cnt Rx Index 0 Rx Index 1 Rx Index 2
Default: 0 = Enter or write a value to select SynchLink data displayed by Par 893 [SL Comm TP Data]. Options: 0 = 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= 8= 9= 10 = 11 = 12 = Displays data selected by Par 892 [SL Comm TP Sel].
13 = BufSeqErrTim 14 = Rx Sys Rev 15 = Tx Axis Size 16 = Tx Dir Size 17 = Tx Buf Size 18 = Tx Pkg Size 19 = Tx Seq Cnt 20 = Tx Index 0 21 = Tx Index 1 22 = Tx Index 2 23 = Rx Vendor ID 24 = Rx ModuleTyp 25 = Rx Serial # RO 32-bit Integer RO 32-bit Integer
893 894
SL Comm TP Data
Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648
Default: 0 SL CRC Err Accum Displays the total accumulated number of Cycle Redundancy Check (CRC) errors. Clearing a Min/Max: 0/4294967296 fault resets this accumulator. This data is visible on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer Communication window. Refer to the SynchLink System Design Guide, publication 1756-TD008, for PowerFlex 700S SynchLink topologies, hardware and wiring details. Default: 0 SL CRC Error Displays the number of CRC errors that occurred during the last test (last 8 mS). This data is Min/Max: 0/4294967296 visible on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer Communication window. Default: 0 SL BOF Err Accum Displays the total accumulated number of Beginning of Frame (BOF) errors. Clearing a fault Min/Max: 0/4294967296 resets this accumulator. This data is visible on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer Communication window. Default: 0 SL BOF Error Displays the number of BOF errors that occurred during the last test (last 8 mS). This data is Min/Max: 0/4294967296 visible on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer Communication window. Default: 2 SL CRC Err Limit Identifies the number of CRC errors per test (per 8 mS) allowed before the drive declares a Min/Max: 0/256 SynchLink CRC Error exception event. Set this limit on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer Communication window. Default: 2 SL BOF Err Limit The number of BOF errors per test (per 8 mS) allowed before the drive declares a SynchLink Min/Max: 0/256 BOF Error exception event. Set this limit on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer Communication window. Indicates the current revision of the local SynchLink Programmable Logic firmware.
895 896
897 898
RO 32-bit Integer RW 32-bit Integer
899
RW 32-bit Integer
900 901 902 903
SynchLink Rev
Default: 0.1 Min/Max: 0.1/999.9
SL System Rev
Default: 0.001 Indicates the system revision of the SynchLink network. To be compatible on the network, all Min/Max: 0.001/999.999 nodes must have the same major revision.
Indicates the presence of SynchLink faults. This data is visible on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer Communication window. Bit 0 Sync Loss indicates SynchLink communication has failed, after it had been established. Bit 1 Rx Loss indicates the receive port is not receiving data, and the receive port configuration is set to receive data. Bit 2 Many BOF Err indicates the number of Beginning Of Frame (BOF) errors exceeds limit set by Par 899 [SL BOF Err Limit]. Bit 3 Many CRC Err indicates the number of Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) errors exceeds limit set by Par 898 [SL CRC Err Limit]. Bit 4 Pckg Msg Err indicates the received package sequence number has not matched for 1.0S. Bit 5 CommForm Err indicates the format of received data does not match the configuration of the receive port. Bit 6 Sys Rev Err indicates the system revision in the received data does not match the value of Par 900 [SynchLink Rev]. Bit 7 Mult TKeeper indicates more than one node on the SynchLink system is configured as a time keeper. Comm Frmt Er Many BOF Err Pckg Msg Err Mult TimeKpr Sys Rev Err Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Many CRC Err Sync Loss
SL Error Status SL Error History
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
Rx Loss
0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
Linkable
3-104
No. 904
Name Description SL Node Cnfg
Values
Set bits to configure the SynchLink node. Setting bit 0 Time Keeper configures the local node as the Time Master. Setting bit 2 Sync Now configures the node to synchronize with the Time Master immediately (1-2S per node) on power-up or recovery. If you do not set bit 2, the node will stay in the fast mode, taking up to 36S per node to synchronize on power-up or recovery. Setting bit 3 Reset SL resets SynchLink. This can be used to reset SynchLink after a configuration change instead of cycling the drives power. Note: This parameter was changed to non-linkable for firmware version 3.01. Sync Now Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reset SL Time Keeper Reserved
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True Axis (A) 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 No Data No Data SL Multiply Event P0 Event P1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Event Status Reserved Reserved Reserved Axis (A) 0 0 0 1 0 No Data No Data SL Multiply Event P0 Event P1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Event Status Reserved Reserved Reserved Direct (D) 0 2 2 4 3 4 4 Buffered (B) 0 4 18 8 14 4 18
905
Defines the node's communication format for receiving SynchLink data. This determines the Value number of axis data, direct data and buffered data words received. Configure the format by Options 0 using the Peer Communication window in the DriveExecutive programming software. Option 14 can be used to allow the drive to receive position data that can be used as a 6 position reference. 7 Notes: Options 6 and 16 were added for firmware version 2.04. Option 14 was added and this parameter was changed to non-linkable for firmware version 3.01. 9 14 16 17
SL Rx CommFormat
906 907 908 909
SL Rx DirectSel0
Default: 0 = Determines the destination for the data received at word 0 of direct received data. Configure Options: 0 = the selection by using the Peer Communication window. 1= SL Rx DirectSel1 2= Determines the destination for the data received at word 1 of direct received data. Configure 3= the selection by using the Peer Communication window. 4= SL Rx DirectSel2 5= Determines the destination for the data received at word 2 of direct received data. Configure 6= the selection by using the Peer Communication window. 7= SL Rx DirectSel3 8= Determines the destination for the data received at word 3 of direct received data. Configure 9= the selection by using the Peer Communication window. 10 = Notes: Options 16 - 26 were added for firmware version 2.04. These parameters were 11 = changed to non-linkable for firmware version 3.01. 12 = 13 =
14 = Reserved 15 = Reserved 16 = Reserved 17 = Reserved 18 = Reserved 19 = Reserved 20 = Reserved 21 = Dir Tx Data 22 = Dir Rx Data 23 = E0 Accum 24 = E1 Accum 25 = Opt0 Accum 26 = Opt1 Accum
910
SL Tx Comm Format
Defines the node's communication format for transmitting SynchLink data. This determines the number of axis data words, direct data words and buffered data words transmitted. Configure the format by using the Peer Communication window in the DriveExecutive programming software. Value 14 can be used to allow the drive to transmit position data that can be used as a position reference. Note: Option 14 was added and this parameter was changed to non-linkable for firmware version 3.01.
Value Options 0 7 9 14 17
Direct (D) 0 2 4 3 4
Buffered (B) 0 18 8 14 18
911 912 913 914
Default: 0 = SL Tx DirectSel0 Determines the source type for the data transmitted by direct transmit word 0. The source type Options: 0 = selections are: no data, event, feedback and drive parameter. 1= SL Tx DirectSel1 2= Determines the source type for the data transmitted by direct transmit word 1. The source type 3= selections are: no data, event, feedback and drive parameter. 4= SL Tx DirectSel2 5= Determines the source type for the data transmitted by direct transmit word 2. The source type 6= selections are: no data, event, feedback and drive parameter. 7= SL Tx DirectSel3 8= Determines the source type for the data transmitted by direct transmit word 3. The source type 9= selections are: no data, event, feedback and drive parameter. 10 = Note: These parameters were changed to non-linkable for firmware version 3.01. 11 = 12 = 13 =
14 = Reserved 15 = Reserved 16 = Reserved 17 = Reserved 18 = Reserved 19 = Reserved 20 = Reserved 21 = Dir Tx Data 22 = Dir Rx Data 23 = E0 Accum 24 = E1 Accum 25 = Opt0 Accum 26 = Opt1 Accum
Linkable
3-105
No. 915 916
Name Description SL Rcv Events SL Clr Events

Reserved Options
Values
Displays the received event status from Par 917 [SL Rx P0 Regis]. Set these bits to clear the corresponding event latches indicated in Par 915 [SL Rcv Events]. Opt0 Regis Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved E1 Regis 0 1 0 1 Rx Ovflow SLDir01 Real 0 1 E0 Regis 0 0 0 = False 1 = True RO 32-bit Integer RO 32-bit Integer RW Real RO 16-bit Integer RW Real RO Real RW Real RO Real 0 0 Local Ovflow 0 = False 1 = True 0 0 SLDir00 Real 0 = False 1 = True
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
917
Displays received port 0 registration data, if direct received data is configured to be port 0 registration data by the Rx Direct Data Selector (Parameters 905-909). Configure this selection by using the Peer Communication window. Displays received port 1 registration data, if direct received data is configured to be port 1 registration data by the Rx Direct Data Selector (Parameters 905-909). Configure this selection by using the Peer Communication window. Provides the floating point (real) input to the real to integer conversion function.
SL Rx P0 Regis
Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648
918
SL Rx P1 Regis
Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648
921 922 923
SL Real2DInt In
Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+16.0000
Default: 0 SL Real2DInt Out Displays the integer output of the real to integer conversion function. The value is the result of Min/Max: 0/65535 the formula: Par 921 [SL Real2DInt In] x Par 923 [SL Mult Base]. Specifies the base for SynchLink real to integer and integer to real conversion functions. Determines the resolution of the conversion results. You must use the same value at the transmitting node and receiving / multiplying nodes. Enter a value that will not produce an overflow - the product of this value and the inputs to the conversion and multiply functions must be less than 65,536.
SL Mult Base
Default: 10000.0000 Min/Max: 0.2000/50000.0000
924
Default: 0.0000 SL Mult A In Displays the A Multiplier Input, as a floating point (real) value. This value is divided by the Par Min/Max: 0.0000/65535.0000 923 [SL Mult Base]. The source of the A Multiplier is determined by the Rx Direct Data Selector (Parameters 905-909). The possible sources are: zero, Par 1054 [MulDiv 1 Mul], Par 1056 [MulDiv 1 Result], Par 1058 [MulDiv 2 Mul], or Par 1060 [MulDiv 2 Result]. The SynchLink Multiply function takes this input before it is converted to floating point. The B Multiplier Input. This must be a floating point (real) value. The SynchLink Multiply function takes this input after it is converted to integer.
925 926
SL Mult B In
Default: 1.0000 Min/Max: 0.25000/2.0000
Default: 0.0000 SL Mult Out Min/Max: 0.0000/65535.0000 Displays the output of the SynchLink Multiply function as a floating point (real) value. The value is the result of the formula: Par 924 [SL Mult A In] source (integer) x Par 925 [SL Mult B In] / Par 923 [SL Mult Base] or Par 924 [SL Mult A In] x Par 925 [SL Mult B In]. Note: The SynchLink Multiply function produces an output that is always positive. Displays the status of the SynchLink Multiply function. Bit 0 Local Ovflow indicates a math overflow due to local multiply. Bit 1 Rx Ovflow indicates a math overflow in received data. Bit 3 Ftol Ovflow indicates a math overflow in the real to integer conversion function. FtoI Ovflow Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
927
SL Mult State
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
928
Rx Dir Data Type

Options Reserved Reserved
Sets the data type for the SynchLink received direct words. If the word's bit is set the data type is floating point (real). If the bit is not set the data type is integer. SLDir03 Real SLDir02 Real
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
Reserved
0 3
0 2
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Linkable
3-106
No. 929
to
Name Description SL Dir Data Rx00

to
Values
RO 32-bit Integer
932 933
SL Dir Data Rx03
This is the SynchLink direct data received. See Par 928 [Rx Dir Data Type] for data type configuration. Sets the data type for the SynchLink received buffered data. If the word's bit is set the data type is floating point (real). If the bit is not set the data type is integer. SLBuf29 Real SLBuf28 Real SLBuf27 Real SLBuf26 Real SLBuf25 Real SLBuf24 Real SLBuf23 Real SLBuf22 Real SLBuf21 Real SLBuf20 Real SLBuf19 Real SLBuf18 Real SLBuf17 Real SLBuf16 Real SLBuf15 Real SLBuf14 Real SLBuf13 Real SLBuf12 Real SLBuf11 Real SLBuf10 Real SLBuf09 Real SLBuf08 Real SLBuf07 Real SLBuf06 Real SLBuf05 Real SLBuf04 Real SLBuf03 Real SLBuf02 Real SLBuf01 Real 0 1 SLDir01 Real 0 1 SLBuf01 Real 0 1 1 1 Sel Switches Options Reserved Reserved SLBuf00 Real 0 0 0 = False 1 = True RO 32-bit Integer 0 0 SLDir00 Real 0 = False 1 = True RW 32-bit Integer 0 0 SLBuf00 Real 0 = False 1 = True RO 32-bit W Integer 1 0 User Params 0 = False 1 = True
Rx Buf Data Type
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
934
to
SL Buf Data Rx00

to
951 964
SL Buf Data Rx17 Tx Dir Data Type
This is the SynchLink buffered data received. See Par 933 [Rx Buf Data Type] for data type configuration. Indicates the data type of each Direct Transmit word. If the word's bit is set the data type is floating point (real). If the bit is not set the data type is integer. Use the Peer Communication window to configure this selection. SLDir03 Real SLDir02 Real Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Options Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
965
to
SL Dir Data Tx00

to This is the SynchLink direct data transmitted. See Par 964 [Tx Dir Data Type] for data type configuration.
968 969
SL Dir Data Tx03
Tx Buf Data Type

Options Reserved Reserved
Indicates the data type of each Buffered Transmit word. If the word's bit is set the data type is floating point (real). If the bit is not set the data type is integer. Use the Peer Communication window to configure this selection. SLBuf29 Real SLBuf28 Real SLBuf27 Real SLBuf26 Real SLBuf25 Real SLBuf24 Real SLBuf23 Real SLBuf22 Real SLBuf21 Real SLBuf20 Real SLBuf19 Real SLBuf18 Real SLBuf17 Real SLBuf16 Real SLBuf15 Real SLBuf14 Real SLBuf13 Real SLBuf12 Real SLBuf11 Real SLBuf10 Real SLBuf09 Real SLBuf08 Real SLBuf07 Real SLBuf06 Real SLBuf05 Real SLBuf04 Real SLBuf03 Real SLBuf02 Real
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
970
to
SL Buf Data Tx00

to
987 1000
SL Buf Data Tx17
This is the SynchLink buffered data transmitted. See Par 969 [Tx Buf Data Type] for data type configuration. This parameter is used to enable and disable the optional user functions. If a bit is set the corresponding function in enabled. If the bit is not set the corresponding function is disabled and will not be processed (outputs will not be updated). Notes: Bit 16 Ratio Calc was added for firmware version 2.04. Bit 5 AddSub Math and bit 6 Delay Timer were added for firmware version 3.01. Bit 7 EGR (Electronic Gear Ratio) was added for firmware version 4.001. Logic Functs MulDiv Math Delay Timer Options Ratio Calc Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved MOP EGR AddSub Math
UserFunct Enable
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
1 6
1 5
1 4
1 3
1 2
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Converts
Linkable
3-107
No. 1001
This parameter displays the actual status of the user functions. If a bit is set, then the corresponding function is active. When Par 1001 [UserFunct Actual] does not match Par 1000 [UserFunct Enable] it is an indication that the function could not activate because of an error. Typically, the limitation is caused by processor overloading. Adjust Par 146 [FW TaskTime Sel] to a slower task cycle (more time). MulDiv Math Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved MOP User Params 0 0 RW 32-bit Integer Sel Switches 0 1 Logic Functs
Name Description UserFunct Actual
Values
Converts
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 = False 1 = True
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
1002
to
UserData DInt 01
to
Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648
1011 1012
to
UserData DInt 10
These are general purpose parameters available for storage of 32-bit enumerated data or DInt data by the user. These parameters will be retained through power cycles.
User Data Real 01

to
Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000
RW Real
1021 1022
UserData Real 10 Sel Switch Ctrl
These are general purpose parameters available for storage of Real data by the user. These parameters will be retained through power cycles. This is the control parameter for the switches used by the Selector Switch user functions. 16 Input Selector Switches (Pars 1029 - 1044) are controlled by bits 1-4. Bit 0 SSW DataPass Updates the output. If bit 0 is low, the output is NOT updated with the selected input. Bits 1 Sel Swtch 00 - 4 Sel Swtch 03 Binary coded selection of the 16 inputs to the switch. Bit 1 is the Least Significant Bit. If these bits are all low (set to 0), Par 1029 is selected. If these bits are all high (set to 1) Par 1044 is selected. (Refer to Pars 1029 - 1044.) The values in these bits can be controlled by the digital inputs. (Refer to Pars 825 - 830 and to the Selector Switches section of the PowerFlex 700S Drives with Phase II Control - Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM003..., for more information.) Bit 5 SW Real 1 On activates the Real switch. (Refer to Pars 1023 - 1025.) Bit 6 SW DInt 1 On activates the DInt switch. (Refer to Pars 1026 - 1028.) SW Real 1 On SW DInt 1 On Sel Swtch 03 Sel Swtch 02 Sel Swtch 01 Sel Swtch 00 Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved SSW DataPass
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
0 = False 1 = True Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 RW Real RW Real
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
1023 1024 1025
This is the Normally Closed input to the Real switch. When Par 1022 [Sel Switch Ctrl], bit 5 SW Real 1 On is low, this input is updated to Par 1025 [Swtch Real 1 Output].
Swtch Real 1 NC
Default: 0.0000 Swtch Real 1 NO This is the Normally Open input to the Real switch. When Par 1022 [Sel Switch Ctrl], bit 5 SW Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 Real 1 On is high, this input is updated to Par 1025 [Swtch Real 1 Output]. Default: 0.0000 Swtch Real 1 Out This is the result of the Real switch. The output is loaded with the selected input based on Par Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 1022 [Sel Switch Ctrl], bit 5 SW Real 1 On. If this parameter does not update, check the setting of Par 1000 [UserFunct Enable], bit 1 User Params. This is the Normally Closed input to the DInt switch. When Par 1022 [Sel Switch Ctrl], bit 6 SW DInt 1 On is low, this input is updated to Par 1028 [Swtch DInt 1 Output].
RO Real
1026
Swtch DInt 1 NC
Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000
RW 32-bit Integer
Linkable
3-108
Read-Write
Name No. Description 1027 Swtch DInt 1 NO
Values
Default: 0.0000 This is the Normally Open input to the Real switch. When Par 1022 [Sel Switch Ctrl], bit 6 SW Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 DInt 1 On is high, this input is updated to Par 1028 [Swtch DInt 1 Output].
RW 32-bit Integer RO 32-bit Integer RW Real
1028 Swtch DInt 1 Out
Default: 0.0000 This is the result of the switch. The output is loaded with the selected input based on Par 1022 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 [Sel Switch Ctrl], bit 6 SW DInt 1 On. If this parameter does not update, check the setting of Par 1000 [UserFunct Enable], bit 1 User Params. to Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000
1029 Sel Swtch In00

to
1044 Sel Swtch In15
Set these values for the inputs to the selector switch specified in Par 1022 [Sel Switch Ctrl]. All inputs are entered as Real values. You may use the output of the selector switch as either Real or DInt. A conversion is done to create the DInt value. RO Real
1045 SelSwtch RealOut
Default: 0.0000 This is the result of the selector switch. The output is loaded with the selected input based on Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 Par 1022 [Sel Switch Ctrl], bit 0 and bits 1-4. The output is only updated when Par 1022 [Sel Switch Ctrl], bit 0 SSW DataPass is high. If Par 1022 [Sel Switch Ctrl], bit 0 is not high the output will not be updated to the selected input. If this parameter does not update, check the setting of Par 1000 [UserFunct Enable], bit 1 User Params. This value is the value of Par 1045 [SelSwtch RealOut] converted to a DInt value. Use this value for point to point positioning values. Input value for a first DInt to Real value conversion. Note: This parameter name changed from [DInt2Real In] to [DInt2Real1 In] for firmware version 3.01. Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648 Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648
1046 SelSwtch DIntOut 1047 DInt2Real1 In
RO 32-bit Integer RW 32-bit Integer RW Real
1048 DInt2Real1 Scale
Default: 0.0000 Input value to scale the first conversion from DInt to Real. This is a multiplication to the input Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 value after conversion to a Real value. Note: This parameter name changed from [DInt2Real Scale] to [DInt2Real1 Scale] for firmware version 3.01. This is the resultant output of the first conversion form a DInt value to a Real value after scaling. Note: This parameter name changed from [DInt2RealResult] to [DInt2Real1Result] for firmware version 3.01. Input value for Real to DInt value conversion. Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000
1049 DInt2Real1Result
RO Real
1050 Real2DInt In
Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000
RW Real RW Real
1051 Real2DInt Scale
Default: 0.0000 Input value to scale the conversion from Real to DInt. This is a multiplication to the input value Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 after conversion to a DInt value. Default: 0 This is the resultant output of the conversion form a Real value to a DInt value after scaling. Min/Max: -/+2147483648
1052 Real2DInt Result 1053 MulDiv 1 Input
Default: 0.0000 Input value to be scaled as need with the Multiplication and Division function. This input will be Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 multiplied by Par 1054 [MulDiv 1 Mul] and then divided by Par 1055 [MulDiv 1 Div]. The result will be loaded to Par 1056 [MulDiv 1 Result].
Equation: (Par 1053 * Par 1054) / Par 1055 = Par 1056
1054 MulDiv 1 Mul 1055 MulDiv 1 Div
Set this value as the multiplier to the value of Par 1053 [MulDiv 1 Input]. The result will be divided by Par 1055 and loaded into Par 1056. See Par 1053.
Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000
RW Real RW Real
Default: 0.0000 Set this value as the divisor of the result of Par 1053 * Par 1054. The result will be loaded into Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 Par 1056. See Par 1053. This is the result output from the Multiplication and Division function. See Par 1053. Equation: Par 1056 = (Par 1053 * Par 1054) / Par 1055 Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000
1056 MulDiv 1 Result
RO Real
1057 MulDiv 2 Input
Default: 0.0000 Input value to be scaled as need with the Multiplication and Division function. This input will be Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 multiplied by Par 1058 [MulDiv 2 Mul] and then divided by Par 1059 [MulDiv 2 Div]. The result will be loaded to Par 1060 [MulDiv 2 Result].
RW Real
Equation: (Par 1057 * Par 1058) / Par 1059 = Par 1060
Data Type
Linkable
3-109
Read-Write
Name No. Description 1058 MulDiv 2 Mul 1059 MulDiv 2 Div
Values
Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000
RW Real RW Real
Set this value as the multiplier to the value of Par 1057 [MulDiv 2 Input]. The result will be divided by Par 1059 and loaded into Par 1060. See Par 1057.
Default: 0.0000 Set this value as the divisor of the result of Par 1057 * Par 1058. The result will be loaded into Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 Par 1060. See Par 1057. This is the result output from the Multiplication and Division function. See Par 1057. Equation: Par 1060 = (Par 1057 * Par 1058) / Par 1059 Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000
1060 MulDiv 2 Result
RO Real
1061 Logic Config
Set this parameter to configure the logic routine in Pars 1063 - 1070. The result of this logic routine is displayed in Par 1062 [Logic/Cmpr State]. There are three configurable logic blocks as displayed below. Each block can be configured as (AND / NAND / OR / NOR / XOR / NXOR). Select the functions as desired. Multiple operation selection for one block will result in the first selection (least significant bit) being the active mode.
Logic Config 1061 xx Logic /Cmpr State (Logic 1 Result) 1062
And, Nand, Or, Nor, Xor, Nxor
Logic 1A Data Logic 1A Bit Logic 1B Data Logic 1B Bit Logic 2A Data Logic 2A Bit Logic 2B Data Logic 2B Bit
1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070
00
(Logic 3 Result) 1062 02
(Logic 2 Result) 1062 01
Logic 3 NXOR
Logic 2 NXOR
Logic 1 NXOR
Logic 3 NAND
Logic 2 NAND
Logic 3 NOR
Logic 2 NOR
Logic 1 NOR
Logic 3 XOR
Logic 2 XOR
Logic 1 XOR
Logic 3 AND
Logic 2 AND
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
Logic 1 AND 0 = False 1 = True 0 0 Logic 1 Rslt 0 = False 1 = True RW 32-bit Boolean RW 16-bit Integer RW 32-bit Boolean RW 16-bit Integer RW 32-bit Boolean RW 16-bit Integer RW 32-bit Boolean
Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
1062 Logic/Cmpr State

1071 Compare 1A Compare 1B 1072
Displays the logical states of the Logic routine (Pars 1063 - 1070) and the results of the compare functions (Par 1071 - 1074).
< = > = < = > =
Logic /Cmpr State 1062 04 (Cmpr 1 A</=B)
1062
05 (Cmpr 1 A>/=B)
1073 Compare 2A Compare 2B 1074
Logic /Cmpr State 1062 06 (Cmpr 2 A</=B)
1062
07 (Cmpr 2 A>/=B)
Cmpr 2 A>/=B
Cmpr 2 A</=B
Cmpr 1 A>/=B
Logic 3 Rslt
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
1063 Logic 1A Data 1064 Logic 1A Bit
Selects the data word for the first input to Logic Block 1. See Par 1061 [Logic Config]. Selects the bit of Par 1063 [Logic 1A Data] for the first input to Logic Block 1. Note: To invert the selected input enter the desired bit as negative. Use -32 to invert bit 0. Selects the data word for the second input to Logic Block 1. See Par 1061 [Logic Config]. Selects the bit of Par 1065 [Logic 1B Data] for the second input to Logic Block 1. Note: To invert the selected input enter the desired bit as negative. Use -32 to invert bit 0. Selects the data word for the first input to Logic Block 2. See Par 1061 [Logic Config] Selects the bit of Par 1067 [Logic 2A Data] for the first input to Logic Block 2. Note: To invert the selected input enter the desired bit as negative. Use -32 to invert bit 0. Selects the data word for the second input to Logic Block 2. See Par 1061 [Logic Config].
Default: 0 Min/Max: 32 bits of data Default: 0 Min/Max: -31/32 Default: 0 Min/Max: 32 bits of data Default: 0 Min/Max: -31/32 Default: 0 Min/Max: 32 bits of data Default: 0 Min/Max: -31/32 Default: 0 Min/Max: 32 bits of data
1065 Logic 1B Data 1066 Logic 1B Bit
1067 Logic 2A Data 1068 Logic 2A Bit
1069 Logic 2B Data
Logic 2 Rslt
Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Cmpr 1 A</=B
Reserved
Logic 1 NAND
Logic 3 OR
Logic 2 OR
Logic 1 OR
Data Type
Linkable
3-110
Read-Write
Name No. Description 1070 Logic 2B Bit
Values
Default: 0 Min/Max: -31/32 Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000
Selects the bit of Par 1069 [Logic 2B Data] for the second input to Logic Block 2. Note: To invert the selected input enter the desired bit as negative. Use -32 to invert bit 0.
1071 Compare 1A
Sets input A for the Compare 1 function. The compare function allows the user to compare two values. The results of the compare are displayed in Par 1062 [Logic/Cmpr State]. Available functions are ( A </= B , A >/= B ).
1072 Compare 1B
Default: 0.0000 Sets input B for the Compare 1. The compare functions allow the user to compare two values. Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 The results of the compare are displayed in Par 1062 [Logic/Cmpr State]. Available functions are ( A </= B , A >/= B ). Default: 0.0000 Sets input A for the Compare 2. The compare functions allow the user to compare two values. Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 The results of the compare are displayed in Par 1062 [Logic/Cmpr State]. Available functions are ( A </= B , A >/= B ). Default: 0.0000 Sets input B for the Compare 2. The compare functions allow the user to compare two values. Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 The results of the compare are displayed in Par 1062 [Logic/Cmpr State]. Available functions are ( A </= B , A >/= B ). Motor Operated Potentiometer (MOP) control and configuration. Bit 0 Increase, if set, increments the MOP level (output) from Par 1087 [MOP Rate] to Par 1088 [MOP High Limit]. Bit 1 Decrease, if set, decrements the MOP level (output) from Par 1087 [MOP Rate] to Par 1089 [MOP Low Limit]. Bit 2 Reset, if set, resets the MOP level (output) to zero and bit 0 Increment and bit 1 Decrease are inhibited. Bit 3 Reset @ Stop, if set, resets the MOP level (output) to zero when stop is set. Bit 4 Reset @ PwrLs, if set, resets the MOP level (output) to zero when power is lost. Note: If either bit 3 or bit 4 is not set, the MOP level (output) will be saved until bit 2 Reset is set. Reset @ Stop Options Reset @ PwrLs
RW Real
1073 Compare 2A
RW Real
1074 Compare 2B
RW Real
1086 MOP Control
Decrease
Default Bit
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
Increase
Reset
1087 MOP Rate
Units: Sec Sets the rate of change (increment or decrement) for the MOP. The setting 0.1/sec will equate Default: 0.1000 Sec to an increment or decrement of 0.1 for every second active. If this is used for the speed Min/Max: 0.0000/2200000000.0000 reference, that equals 10% of base speed every second for a total of 10 seconds to reach base speed reference. Sets the upper limit for the MOP output. The MOP cannot be incremented above this level. Units: Sec Default: 1.0000 Sec Min/Max: 0.0000/2200000000.0000 Units: Sec Default: -1.0000 Sec Min/Max: -2200000000.0000/0.0000 Units: Sec Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000
RW Real
1088 MOP High Limit 1089 MOP Low Limit
RW Real RW Real
Sets the lower limit for the MOP output. The MOP cannot be decremented below this level.
1090 MOP Level Real 1091 MOP Scale Dint
RO Real RW Real
Actual output value of the MOP as a real number. This value is also found in the speed reference selection. A value of 1.0 equals base motor speed.
Default: 1.0000 Set this value for scaling of the Dint MOP output. The MOP is calculated and controlled as a Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 Real value MOP. Use this scaler to adjust for an integer value. Use this parameter to scale the conversion from Par 1090 [MOP Level Real] to Par 1092 [MOP Level Dint]. Actual output value of the MOP as a DInt number. This value is scaled by Par 1091 [MOP Scale DInt]. Default: 0.0000 Min/Max: -/+2147483648 Disabled Disabled Fault Hold Input Set Input Lo
1092 MOP Level DInt
RO 32-bit Integer
1093 Anlg In1LossCnfg 1094 Anlg In2LossCnfg 1095 Anlg In3LossCnfg
Default: 0 = Options: 0 = 1= Selects drive action when an analog input signal loss is detected. Signal loss is defined as an 2= analog signal less than 1 V or 2 mA. The signal loss event ends and normal operation 3= resumes when the input signal is greater than or equal to 1.5 V or 3 mA. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
4 = Set Input Hi 5 = Goto Preset1 6 = Hold OutFreq
Data Type
Linkable
3-111
Read-Write
Name No. Description 1096 AddSub 1 Input
Values
Default: 1.0000 Input value to be added to and/or subtracted from as need with the Add and Subtract function. Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 This input will be added with Par 1097 [AddSub 1 Add]. The result will be subtracted from by the value in Par 1098 [AddSub 1 Subtrct]. The result of the operation is loaded to Par 1099 [AddSub 1 Result]. Equation: Par (1096 + Par 1097) - Par 1098 = Par 1099 Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
RW Real
1097 AddSub 1 Add
This value is added to the value of Par 1096 [AddSub 1 Input]. The result will be subtracted from by Par 1098 and loaded into Par 1099. See Par 1096. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
Default: 1.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000
RW Real
1098 AddSub 1 Subtrct
Default: 1.0000 This value is subtracted from the result of Par 1096 + Par 1097. The result will be loaded into Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 Par 1099. See Par 1096. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. This is the result output from the Add and Subtract function. See Par 1096. Default: 1.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000
RW Real
1099 AddSub 1 Result
RO Real
Equation: Par 1099 = (Par 1096 + Par 1097) - Par 1098 Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. RW Real
1100 AddSub 2 Input
1101 AddSub 2 Add
This value is added to the value of Par 1100 [AddSub 2 Input]. The result will be subtracted from by Par 1102 and loaded into Par 1103. See Par 1100. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
Default: 1.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000
RW Real
Default: 1.0000 This value is subtracted from the result of Par 1100 + Par 1101. The result will be loaded into Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 Par 1103. See Par 1100. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. This is the result output from the Add and Subtract function. See Par 1100. Default: 1.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000
RW Real
RO Real
Equation: Par 1103 = (Par 1100 + Par 1101) - Par 1102 Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. RW Real
1104 AddSub 3 Input
1105 AddSub 3 Add
This value is added to the value of Par 1104 [AddSub 3 Input]. The result will be subtracted from by Par 1106 and loaded into Par 1107. See Par 1104.
Default: 1.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000
RW Real
Default: 1.0000 This value is subtracted from the result of Par 1104 + Par 1105. The result will be loaded into Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000 Par 1107. See Par 1104 Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
RW Real
This is the result output from the Add and Subtract function. See Par 1104. Equation: Par 1107 = (Par 1104 + Par 1105) - Par 1106 Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
Default: 1.0000 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0000
RO Real
Data Type
Linkable
3-112
Read-Write
Name No. Description 1108 DelTmr1 TrigData
Values
Default: 0 Min/Max: 32 bits of data Link a word to this parameter that will control a user-defined on or off delay timer. The bit within the selected word that will control the delay timer is set by Par 1109 [DelTmr1 Trig Bit]. The user-defined on/off delay timer is enabled by setting bit 6 Delay Timer of Par 1000 [UserFunct Enable].
DelayTimer1Stats 00 Enabled DelayTimer1PrSet DelayTimer1 Data DelayTimer 1 Bit 1110 1108 1109 1112 00 Timing 00 Done 1111 DelayTimer1Accum
RW 32-bit Boolean
Delay Timer 1
1109 DelTmr1 Trig Bit
Selects the bit, from the word linked to Par 1108 [DelTmr1 TrigData], that will change the status of the user-defined delay timer to on or off. When Par 1109 [DelTmr1 Trig Bit] is a positive number, the delay timer is an on timer. When Par 1109 is a negative number, the delay timer is an off timer. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. The time that the value in Par 1111 [DelayTimer1Accum] must reach before bit 2 Timer Done in Par 1112 [DelayTimer1Stats] is set. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. The amount of time that has elapsed since the timer was enabled (Par 1112 [DelayTimer1Stats], bit 2 set). Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Displays the status of the user-defined on or off delay timer. Bit 0 Timer Enable when this bit is set, the timer is enabled. Bit 1 Timer Timing when this bit is set, the timer is running. Bit 2 Timer Done when this bit is set, the timer is done. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Timer Done Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Timer Enable Timer Timing
RW 16-bit Integer
1110 DelayTimer1PrSet
Units: Sec. Default: 0 Min/Max: 0/600.00 Units: Sec. Default: 0 Min/Max: 0/600.00
RW 16-bit Integer
1111 DelayTimer1Accum
RO 16-bit Integer
1112 DelayTimer1Stats
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True RW 32-bit Boolean
1113 DelTmr2 TrigData
Default: 0 Link a word to this parameter that will control a user-defined on or off delay timer. The bit Min/Max: 32 bits of data within the selected word that will control the delay timer is set by Par 1114 [DelTmr2 Trig Bit]. The user-defined on/off delay timer is enabled by setting bit 6 Delay Timer of Par 1000 [UserFunct Enable].
DelayTimer2Stats 00 Enabled DelayTimer2PrSet DelayTimer2 Data DelayTimer2 Bit 1115 1113 1114 1117 00 Timing 00 Done 1116 DelayTimer 2Accum
Delay Timer 2
1114 DelTmr2 Trig Bit
Selects the bit, from the word linked to Par 1113 [DelTmr2 TrigData], that will change the status of the user-defined delay timer to on or off. When Par 1114 [DelTmr2 Trig Bit] is a positive number, the delay timer is an on timer. When Par 1114 is a negative number, the delay timer is an off timer. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. The time that the value in Par 1116 [DelayTimer2Accum] must reach before bit 2 Timer Done in Par 1117 [DelayTimer2Stats] is set. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. The amount of time that has elapsed since the timer was enabled (Par 1117 [DelayTimer2Stats], bit 1 set). Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
RW 16-bit Integer
1115 DelayTimer2PrSet
Units: Sec. Default: 0 Min/Max: 0/60000 Units: Sec. Default: 0 Min/Max: 0/60000
RW 16-bit Integer
1116 DelayTimer2Accum
RO 16-bit Integer
Data Type
Linkable
3-113
Read-Write
Name No. Description 1117 DelayTimer2Stats
Values
Displays the status of the user-defined on or off delay timer. Bit 0 Timer Enable when this bit is set, the timer is enabled. Bit 1 Timer Timing when this bit is set, the timer is running. Bit 2 Timer Done when this bit is set, the timer is done. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Timer Done Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Timer Enable Timer Timing
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True Units: Sec. Default: 10.00 Min/Max: 0.01/6553.50 Units: Sec. Default: 10.00 Min/Max: 0.01/6553.50 RW Real RW Real RW Real
1120 Home Accel Time 1121 Home Decel Time 1122 Home Speed
Acceleration rate when Homing. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Deceleration rate when Homing. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
Units: RPM Speed reference used when Homing. Default: 0.005 Notes: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. The default value was changed Min/Max: -/+ 8.000 from 0.000 to 0.005 for firmware version 4.001.
1123 Home Position
Default: 0 User-defined Home position. After the Homing function is completed, the following Min/Max: -/+ 2147483648 parameters are updated with the value of Par 1123: Par 744 [PositRef EGR Out], Par 747 [Position Cmmd], Par 763 [Position Actual] and Par 765 [Posit Actl Load]. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. This parameter was activated for firmware version 4.001. Actual home position after the Homing function is complete. The value in this parameter displays the raw position feedback data at home position. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001. Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+ 2147483648
RW 32-bit Integer
1124 Home Actual Pos
1125 DC Brake Level
Units: Volts Defines the DC brake current level injected into the motor when DC Brake is selected as a Default: 0.0 Min/Max: 0.0/3000.0 stop mode. This also sets the braking current level when Fast Stop is selected. The DC braking voltage used in this function is created by a PWM algorithm and may not generate the smooth holding force needed for some applications. Refer to the PowerFlex 700S with Phase II Control Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM003. Notes: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01, but is not functional (for future use). The maximum value was changed from 1170.0 to 3000.0 for firmware version 4.002.
ATTENTION: If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists, an auxiliary mechanical braking device must be used. ATTENTION: This feature should not be used with synchronous or permanent magnet motors. Motors may be demagnetized during braking.
1126 DC Brake Time
Sets the amount of time DC brake current is injected into the motor. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01, but is not functional (for future use). Sets the position reference for the Motion Planner. The units are counts. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
Units: Sec. Default: 0.0 Min/Max: 0.0/655.0 Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+ 2147483648
RW Real
1130 PPMP Pos Command 1131 PPMP Pos Mul
Default: 1 Part of the input scale block. Set this value as the multiplier to the value of Par 1130 [PPMP Min/Max: 1/2000000 Pos Command]. Also see Par 1132 [PPMP Pos Div]. The scale block is enabled by setting bit 4 of Par 1134 [PPMP Control]. The the intermediate product must be < 31 bits. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Default: 1 Part of input scale block. Set this value as the divisor of the product of Par 1130 [PPMP Pos Min/Max: 1/2000000 Command] and Par 1131 [PPMP Pos Mul]. Integer math applies. The scale block is enabled by setting bit 4 of Par 1134 [PPMP Control]. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
1132 PPMP Pos Div
RW 32-bit Integer
Data Type
Linkable
3-114
Read-Write
Name No. Description 1133 PPMP Scaled Cmd
Values
Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+ 2147483648
Indicates the result of integer scaling of the position reference for the Motion planner or the Position loop. The units are counts. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
RO 32-bit Integer
1134 PPMP Control
Establishes the operating condition for the Motion Planner. The operating mode(s) is selected if the corresponding bit is set. Bit 0 Absolute Absolute mode. When using the Homing function while in Absolute mode, the value in Par 758 [Pt-Pt Posit Ref] must be set relative to the value in Par 763 [Position Actual] after homing is complete. For example: When homing is complete Par 763 [Position Actual] = 1000 counts. If you want to move to an absolute position of 2000 counts relative to the home switch, you must enter a value of 3000 counts into Par 758 [Pt-Pt Posit Ref] (i.e., 1000 + 2000 = 3000). If you want to move back to the home switch, using the same value in Par 763 [Position Actual] after homing (1000), you must enter a value of 1000 into Par 758 [Pt-Pt Position Ref] (i.e., 0 + 1000 = 1000). Bit 1 Incremental Incremental mode Bit 2 Start Start Bit 4 Scaling En Scaling enabled Bit 5 Over Ride En Override enabled Bit 6 S Curve En S Curve Enabled Bit 7 Cond Hold Conditional Hold Bit 8 Pause Pause Bit 9 Re-Synch Re-Synch Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Incremental S Curve En Scaling En Cond Hold Options Re-Synch Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Pause Over Ride En
Reserved
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
Absolute
Start
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
1135 PPMP Status
Displays the current operating status of the Motion Planner. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Zero Speed Incremental S Curve En Scaling En Cond Hold Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Running Done Over Ride En
Re-Synch
Reserved
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
Absolute
Pause
Start
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 = False 1 = True
1136 PPMP Rev Spd Lim
Units: RPM Sets the maximum reverse speed reference limit. Default: -0.5 Notes: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Changed the default value and Min/Max: -/+ 8.0 made the parameter linkable for firmware version 4.001. Sets the maximum forward speed reference limit. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Changed the default value and made the parameter linkable for firmware version 4.001. Units: RPM Default: +0.5 Min/Max: -/+ 8.0
RW Real
1137 PPMP Fwd Spd Lim
RW Real
1138 PPMP Over Ride
Default: 1.0 Multiplies both forward (Par 1136 [PPMP Rev Spd Lim]) and reverse (Par 1137 [PPMP Fwd Min/Max: 0.0/1.5 Spd Lim]) speed limits by this value. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Changed the default value, minimum value and made the parameter linkable for firmware version 4.001. Sets the ramp time for acceleration (time to go from zero to full speed). Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Sets the ramp time for deceleration (time to go from full speed to zero speed). Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Units: Sec. Default: 10.00 Min/Max: 0.01/6553.50 Units: Sec. Default: 10.00 Min/Max: 0.01/6553.50
RW Real
1139 PPMP Accel Time 1140 PPMP Decel Time
1141 PPMP SCurve Time
Units: Sec. Sets the amount of time that is applied to the S Curve. Half of the time specified is added at Default: 0.05 the beginning and half end of the acceleration and deceleration ramp. Min/Max: 0.00/4.00 Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Units: RPM Provides a speed reference output from the Motion Planner. Typically this parameter would be Default: 0.0 used by the drives speed loop. A link could be made from a velocity reference input to this Min/Max: -/+ 8.0 parameter. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
1142 PPMP Spd Output
RO Real
Data Type
Linkable
3-115
Read-Write
Name No. Description 1143 PPMP Pos Output
Values
Default: 0.0 Provides a position reference output from the Motion Planner. This output is scaled in counts. Min/Max: -/+ 2147483648.0 Typically this parameter would be used by the drive's Position Loop. A link could be made from auxiliary position input to this parameter. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Provides indication of feedback counts remaining in the move. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Motion Planner test point selection. Notes: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Selection 9 was changed to Reserved for firmware version 4.001. Default: 0.0 Min/Max: -/+ 2147483648.0 Default: 0 = Zero Options: 0 = Zero 1 = MP FrctAccmI 2 = MP WholeAccm 3 = MP EPR 4 = MP NBase 5 = MP Once Flag 6 = MP Pos Fdbk 7 = MP Pos Fdbk1 8 = MP ErrorSum 9 = Reserved 10 = MP IntegHold 11 = MP Pos Exact 12 = MP Pos Diff 13 = MP One Shot 14 = MP Run Delay 15 = MP ResyncOne 16 = MP Task Time Default: 0.0 Min/Max: -/+ 2147483648.0
RO Real
1144 PPMP Pos To Go 1145 PPMP TP Select
RO Real
17 = MP Mtn Calc 18 = MP AnlgPulse 19 = MP Rate In 20 = MP Rate Out 21 = MP Gain 22 = MP Kx 23 = MP FrctAccmR 24 = MP AccelRate 25 = MP DecelRate 26 = MP Cal 27 = SC Sum 28 = SC Index 29 = SC ArraySize 30 = SC Once 31 = SC Enable 32 = SC Ipos RO 32-bit Integer
1146 PPMP TP DataDInt
Test point integer data. This data is meaningful only if the selection at Par 1145 [PPMP TP Select] is integer data. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
1147 PPMP TP DataReal
Test point real data. This data is meaningful only if the selection at Par 1145 [PPMP TP Select] is not integer data. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Input value for a second DInt to Real value conversion. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. Input value to scale the second conversion from DInt to Real. This is a multiplication to the input value after conversion to a Real value. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01. This is the resultant output of the second conversion form a DInt value to a Real value after scaling. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 3.01.
Default: 0.0 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0
RO Real
1150 DInt2Real2 In
Default: 0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648.0 Default: 0.0 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0
1151 DInt2Real2 Scale
1152 DInt2Real2Result
Default: 0.0 Min/Max: -/+2200000000.0
RO Real
1155 Heidn VM Pos Ref
Virtual Master position reference for the Heidenhain option card. This value is used by the Virtual Master function as a position reference. This parameter can be linked to a position reference source, such as Par 1160 [VirtEncPositFast]. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001.
Default: 0.0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648.0
RW 32-bit Integer
1156 Heidn VM Enc PPR
Units: PPR Virtual Master Encoder Pulse per Revolution (PPR). This value defines the encoder PPR for Default: 1024 the Virtual Master function. The Heidenhain option card produces the encoder pulse Min/Max: 1024 and 2048 only according to this PPR value, which is limited to 1024 or 2048 encoder lines. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001.
RW 32-bit Integer
1160 VirtEncPositFast
Default: 0.0 Virtual Encoder position output in Task 1. One of three outputs from the Virtual Encoder Min/Max: -/+2147483648.0 function. This value is the encoder position reference output for Task1 (fast rate). Par 62 [Virt Encdr Posit] and Par 63 [Virt Encdr Dlyed] are the encoder position output in Task 2. For the Virtual Master Encoder function, you must use Par 1160 [VirEncPosiFast] as the position reference updated in Task 1. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001.
RO 32-bit Integer
Data Type
Linkable
3-116
Read-Write
Name No. Description 1161 EGR Config
Values
Configuration for the Electrical Gear Ratio (EGR) user function. Setting bit 7 EGR of Par 1000 [UserFunct Enable] enables the EGR user function. The combination of bit 0 Output Sel 0 and bit 1 Output Sel 1 determines the output of the EGR user function as follows: Bit 1 Bit 0 Description 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Par 1165 [EGR Pos Output] is set to zero Par 1165 [EGR Pos Output] is active Par 1165 [EGR Pos Output] is set to the value of Par 1164 [EGR Pos Input] Par 1165 [EGR Pos Output] is set to the value of Par 1166 [EGR Pos preset]
Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001. Output Sel 1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Options Output Sel 0
Default Bit
0 8
0 7
0 6
0 5
0 4
0 3
0 2
0 1
0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
1162 EGR Mul
Default: 1.0 Multiplier (numerator) of the EGR user function position input. Min/Max: -/+2000000.0 (Par 1164 [EGR Pos Input] x Par 1162 [EGR Mul]) / Par 1163 [EGR Div] = Par 1165 [EGR Pos Output] Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001. Default: 1.0 Divisor (denominator) of the EGR user function position input. Min/Max: +1.0/+2000000.0 (Par 1164 [EGR Pos Input] x Par 1162 [EGR Mul]) / Par 1163 [EGR Div] = Par 1165 [EGR Pos Output] Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001. Position reference input to the Electrical Gear Ratio user function. This parameter can be linked to a position reference source, such as Par 1160 [VirtEncPositFast]. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001. Default: 0.0 Min/Max: -/+2147483648.0
1163 EGR Div
RW 32-bit Integer
1164 EGR Pos Input
RW 32-bit Integer
1165 EGR Pos Output
Default: 0.0 Position reference output from the Electrical Gear Ratio user function. This parameter can be Min/Max: -/+2147483648.0 linked to a position reference sink, such as Par 1155 [Heidn VM Pos Ref]. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001.
RO 32-bit Integer RW 32-bit Integer
1166 EGR Pos Preset
Default: 0.0 A preset value for the Electrical Gear Ratio user function. This value is set to the value in Par Min/Max: -/+2147483648.0 1165 [EGR Pos Output] when bits 0 Output Sel 0 and 1 Output Sel 1 of Par 1161 [EGR Config] are set. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001. For Future Use. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001. For Future Use. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001. For Future Use. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001. For Future Use. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001. For Future Use. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001. For Future Use. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001. For Future Use. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001. For Future Use. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001. Default: 0 Min/Max: +/-32767 Default: 0 Min/Max: +/-32767 Default: 0 Min/Max: +/-32767 Default: 0 Min/Max: +/-32767 Default: 0 Min/Max: +/-32767 Default: 0 Min/Max: +/-32767 Default: 0 Min/Max: +/-32767 Default: 0 Min/Max: +/-32767
1170 MC Generic 1 1171 MC Generic 2 1172 MC Generic 3 1173 MC Generic 4 1174 MC Generic 5 1175 MC Generic 6 1176 MC Generic 7 1177 MC Generic 8
RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer RW 16-bit Integer
Data Type
Linkable
3-117
Read-Write
Name No. Description 1178 MC Generic 9
Values
Default: 0 Min/Max: +/-32767 Default: 0 Min/Max: +/-32767
For Future Use. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001. For Future Use. Note: This parameter was added for firmware version 4.001.
1179 MC Generic 10
Data Type
Linkable
3-118
Parameter Cross Reference By Name

Param Name Text
% Motor Flux +Hrd OvrTrvlCnfg +Sft OvrTrvlCnfg 700L AlarmStatus 700L EventStatus 700L FaultStatus Abs OverSpd Lim Abs Posit Offset Accel Time 1 Act Spd Reg BW CurrFdbk AdjTime AddSub 1 Add AddSub 1 Input AddSub 1 Result AddSub 1 Subtrct AddSub 2 Add AddSub 2 Input AddSub 2 Result AddSub 2 Subtrct AddSub 3 Add AddSub 3 Input AddSub 3 Result AddSub 3 Subtrct AI 1 Filt Gain AI 2 Filt Gain AI 3 Filt Gain Alarm Status 1 Alarm Status 2 Alarm Status 3 Analog I/O Units Anlg In1 Data Anlg In1 Filt BW Anlg In1 Offset Anlg In1 Scale Anlg In1 Value Anlg In1LossCnfg Anlg In2 Data Anlg In2 Filt BW Anlg In2 Offset Anlg In2 Scale Anlg In2 Value Anlg In2LossCnfg Anlg In3 Data Anlg In3 Filt BW Anlg In3 Offset Anlg In3 Scale Anlg In3 Value Anlg In3LossCnfg Anlg Out1 DInt Anlg Out1 Offset Anlg Out1 Real
Param Name Text

Anlg Out1 Scale Anlg Out1 Sel Anlg Out1 Value Anlg Out1 Zero Anlg Out2 DInt Anlg Out2 Offset Anlg Out2 Real Anlg Out2 Scale Anlg Out2 Sel Anlg Out2 Value Anlg Out2 Zero Applied LogicCmd Atune Spd Ref Atune Trq Ref Aux Posit Ref BasicIndx Output BasicIndx Preset BasicIndx Step BitSwap 1 Result BitSwap 1A Bit BitSwap 1A Data BitSwap 1B Bit BitSwap 1B Data BitSwap 2 Result BitSwap 2A Bit BitSwap 2A Data BitSwap 2B Bit BitSwap 2B Data BitSwap 3 Result BitSwap 3A Bit BitSwap 3A Data BitSwap 3B Bit BitSwap 3B Data BitSwap 4 Result BitSwap 4A Bit BitSwap 4A Data BitSwap 4B Bit BitSwap 4B Data BitSwap 5 Result BitSwap 5A Bit BitSwap 5A Data BitSwap 5B Bit BitSwap 5B Data BitSwap 6 Result BitSwap 6A Bit BitSwap 6A Data BitSwap 6B Bit BitSwap 6B Data Brake OL Cnfg Brake PulseWatts Brake TP Data Brake TP Sel Brake Watts Brake/Bus Cnfg
Parameter #
835 831 837 836 839 841 840 842 838 844 843 152 74 129 743 799 798 797 864 861 860 863 862 869 866 865 868 867 874 871 870 873 872 879 876 875 878 877 884 881 880 883 882 889 886 885 888 887 369 416 419 418 417 414
Param Name Text

Break Frequency Break Voltage Bus Reg ACR Kp Bus Reg Kd Bus Reg Ki Bus Reg Kp Bus Util Limit BusReg/Brake Ref BusUndervoltCnfg Cnv NotLogin Cfg Coarse Spd Trgt CoarsePosit Trgt Compare 1A Compare 1B Compare 2A Compare 2B Control Options CurrFdbk AdjTime Current Limit Gain Current Reg BW Curr Ref TP Data Curr Ref TP Sel DC Brake Level DC Brake Time DC Bus Voltage Dead Time Dead Time Comp Decel Time 1 Delayed Spd Ref DelayTimer1Accum DelayTimer1PrSet DelayTimer1Stats DelayTimer2Accum DelayTimer2PrSet DelayTimer2Stats DelTmr1 Trig Bit DelTmr1 TrigData DelTmr2 Trig Bit DelTmr2 TrigData DeltaSpeedScale Dig In1 Sel Dig In2 Sel Dig In3 Sel Dig In4 Sel Dig In5 Sel Dig In6 Sel Dig Out1 Bit Dig Out1 Data Dig Out1 OffTime Dig Out1 On Time Dig Out1 Sel Dig Out2 Bit Dig Out2 Data Dig Out1 OffTime
Parameter #
530 529 548 547 545 546 500 415 393 368 750 748 1071 1072 1073 1074 153 551 362 503 358 357 1125 1126 306 404 405 33 45 1111 1110 1112 1116 1115 1117 1109 1108 1114 1113 60 825 826 827 828 829 830 847 846 849 848 845 852 851 854
Parameter #
309 397 395 334 332 333 335 757 32 97 551 1097 1096 1099 1098 1101 1100 1103 1102 1105 1104 1107 1106 804 810 816 326 327 328 821 800 805 803 802 801 1093 806 811 809 808 807 1094 812 817 815 814 813 1095 832 834 833
3-119
Param Name Text

Dig Out2 On Time Dig Out2 Sel DigIn ConfigStat DigIn Debounce DInt2Real1 In DInt2Real1 Scale DInt2Real1Result DInt2Real2 In DInt2Real2 Scale DInt2Real2Result Direction Mask Direction Owner DPI CommLoss Cfg DPI Data In A1 DPI Data In A2 DPI Data In B1 DPI Data In B2 DPI Data In C1 DPI Data In C2 DPI Data In D1 DPI Data In D2 DPI Data Out A1 DPI Data Out A2 DPI Data Out B1 DPI Data Out B2 DPI Data Out C1 DPI Data Out C2 DPI Data Out D1 DPI Data Out D2 DPI In DataType DPI Out DataType Drive Logic Rslt Drive OL JnctTmp Drive OL Status Drive OL TP Data Drive OL TP Sel Drive Ramp Rslt EGR Config EGR Div EGR Mul EGR Pos Input EGR Pos Output EGR Pos Preset Elapsed MWHrs Elapsed Run Time Encdr 0/1 Config Encdr 0/1 Error Encdr0 Position Encdr0 Spd Fdbk Encdr1 Position Encdr1 Spd Fdbk Encoder0 PPR Encoder1 PPR Err Count Lmt
Parameter #
853 850 159 823 1047 1048 1049 1150 1151 1152 673 680 391 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 650 659 158 345 346 348 347 53 1161 1163 1162 1164 1165 1166 299 298 233 234 230 231 240 241 232 242 589
Param Name Text

Est Theta Delay Estimated Torque Exception Event1 Exception Event2 Exception Event3 External DB Res Ext Flt/Alm Cnfg Fault Clr Mask Fault Clr Owner Fault Status 1 Fault Status 2 Fault Status 3 Fault TP Data Fault TP Sel FB Opt0 Posit FB Opt0 Spd Fdbk FB Opt1 Posit FB Opt1 Spd Fdbk Fdbk LsCnfg Alt Fdbk LsCnfg Pri Fdbk LsCnfgPosit Fdbk Option ID FdbkAxis FdbkSel FdbkAxis FdbkVal FdbkAxis RotFdbk FdbkAxisUnwdFdbk Filtered SpdFdbk Flux Current Flux Rate Limit Flux Ratio Ref Flux Reg I Gain Flux Reg P Gain1 Flux Reg P Gain2 Flux Satur Coef Flx CurFdbk (Id) Flx LpassFilt BW Flying StartGain FricComp Rated FricComp Setup FricComp Slip FricComp Spd Ref FricComp Stick FricComp Trq Add From DL DataType FromDriveLogix00 FromDriveLogix01 FromDriveLogix02 FromDriveLogix03 FromDriveLogix04 FromDriveLogix05 FromDriveLogix06 FromDriveLogix07 FromDriveLogix08 FromDriveLogix09
Parameter #
477 471 320 321 322 544 379 674 681 323 324 325 330 329 250 251 252 253 366 365 367 249 701 702 709 710 71 488 425 424 444 443 470 426 489 361 170 68 65 67 64 66 69 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611
Param Name Text

FromDriveLogix10 FromDriveLogix11 FromDriveLogix12 FromDriveLogix13 FromDriveLogix14 FromDriveLogix15 FromDriveLogix16 FromDriveLogix17 FromDriveLogix18 FromDriveLogix19 FromDriveLogix20 FVC CEMF Comp FVC Mode Config FVC Tune Config FVC2 Mode Config FVC2 Tune Config FW Functions En FW FunctionsActl FW TaskTime Actl FW TaskTime Sel Fwd Speed Limit Hardware Present Heatsink Temp Heidenhain0 Cnfg Heidenhain0 Stat Heidn Encdr PPR Heidn Encdr Type Heidn Mkr Offset Heidn VM Enc PPR Heidn VM Pos Ref HiHp InPhsLs Cfg Home Accel Time Home Actual Pos Home Decel Time Home Position Home Speed -Hrd OvrTrvlCnfg IdsCmd Slew Rate IdsCompCoeff Mot IdsCompCoeff Reg Ids Command Ids Integ Freq Ids Reg P Gain In Posit BW In Posit Dwell Inert Adapt BW Inert Adapt Gain Inert Adapt Sel Inertia SpeedRef Inertia Trq Add Inertia TrqLpfBW InertiaAccelGain InertiaDecelGain Interp AccelRate
Parameter #
612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 469 510 515 511 516 147 149 148 146 76 145 313 263 264 267 266 265 1155 1156 370 1120 1124 1121 1123 1122 398 586 459 460 496 429 430 782 783 133 134 132 56 59 54 57 58 752
3-120
Param Name Text

Interp Flt Cnfg Interp Position Interp Speed Interp SyncInput Inv OL Pend Cnfg Inv OL Trip Cnfg Inv OT Pend Cnfg Iq Actual Lim Iq Actual Ref Iq Rate Limit Iq Ref Limited Iq Ref Trim Iqs Command Iqs Integ Freq Iqs Rate Limit Iqs Reg P Gain Ireg IGain Fctr Is Actual Lim Iu Offset Iw Offset Jerk Jog Mask Jog Owner Jog Speed 1 Jog Speed 2 Kd Current Limit Ki Current Limit Language Leak Indc Satur1 Leak Indc Satur2 Leak Inductance LED Status Lgx Closed Cnfg Lgx Comm Format Lgx CommLossData Lgx LinkChngCnfg Lgx OutOfRunCnfg Lgx Timeout Cnfg LimGen X axis In LimGen Y axis Mn LimGen Y axis Mx Limit Gen Hi Out Limit Gen Lo Out Limit Status Limited Spd Ref Lin1 Update Rate Lin1Stahl Status Line Undervolts Linear1 Config Linear1 CPR Linear1 Status Linear1 TP Data Linear1 TP Sel Load Estimate
Parameter #
378 749 751 693 376 377 375 353 350 354 355 351 495 421 423 422 428 352 453 454 42 672 679 29 39 364 363 201 493 494 492 554 388 600 385 389 386 387 206 205 204 207 208 304 41 289 291 409 285 290 286 288 287 221
Param Name Text

Local I/O Status Logic 1A Bit Logic 1A Data Logic 1B Bit Logic 1B Data Logic 2A Bit Logic 2A Data Logic 2B Bit Logic 2B Data Logic Command Logic Config Logic Ctrl State Logic Mask Logic Mask Act Logic State Mach Logic Status Logic TP Data Logic TP Sel Logic/Cmpr State LstFaultStopMode Max Spd Ref Lim Maximum Freq Maximum Voltage MC Build Number MC Cmd Lim Cnfg MC Diag Done MC Diag Error 1 MC Diag Error 2 MC Diag Error 3 MC Diag Status MC FaultTPSelect MC FaultTP Value MC Firmware Rev MC Generic 1 MC Generic 2 MC Generic 3 MC Generic 4 MC Generic 5 MC Generic 6 MC Generic 7 MC Generic 8 MC Generic 9 MC Generic 10 MC Status MC TP1 Bit MC TP1 Select MC TP1 Value MC TP2 Select MC TP2 Value Min Flux Min Spd Ref Lim MOP Control MOP High Limit MOP Level DInt
Parameter #
824 1064 1063 1066 1065 1068 1067 1070 1069 151 1061 157 670 713 150 155 162 161 1062 331 31 532 531 456 382 519 463 464 465 518 475 476 457 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 555 468 466 467 473 474 360 30 1086 1088 1092
Param Name Text

MOP Level Real MOP Low Limit MOP Rate MOP Scale Dint Motn Axis Resp Motn Axis Status Motn AxisControl Motn Cnct Status Motn CoarseMulti Motn Config Motn Event Ctrl Motn EventStatus Motn Mx Neg Trvl Motn Mx Pos Trvl Motn Posit Cmmd Motn Posit Sync Motn PositErrTol Motn RotaryCmmd Motn Speed Cmmd Motn TP Select Motn TP Value MotnCnfgErrParam MotnPositLockTol MotnUnwdTurnCmmd MotnUpdatePeriod Motor Ctrl Ackn Motor Ctrl Cmmd Motor Ctrl Mode Motor Flux Est Motor Freq Ref Motor NP FLA Motor NP Hertz Motor NP Power Motor NP RPM Motor NP Volts Motor NTC Coef Motor OL Factor Motor Poles Motor Posit Est Motor Spd Fdbk Motor Speed Est Motor Speed Ref Motor Stall Cnfg Motor Stall Time Motor Torque Ref MotorFluxCurr FB Mtr Current Lim Mtr Fdbk Sel Alt Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri Mtr I2T Calibrat Mtr I2T Count Mtr I2T Curr Min Mtr I2T Spd Min Mtr I2T Trp ThrH
Parameter #
1090 1089 1087 1091 689 687 688 690 685 686 692 691 695 694 698 700 696 705 699 703 704 711 697 706 684 167 166 485 359 296 2 3 5 4 1 487 336 7 227 300 226 301 374 373 303 312 356 223 222 339 341 337 338 340
3-121
Param Name Text

Mtr NP Pwr Units Mtr OL Pend Cnfg Mtr OL Trip Cnfg Mtr Trq Curr Ref Mtr Vds Base Mtr Vqs Base Mtring Power Lim MtrPosit Simulat MtrSpd Simulated MulDiv 1 Div MulDiv 1 Input MulDiv 1 Mul MulDiv 1 Result MulDiv 2 Div MulDiv 2 Input MulDiv 2 Mul MulDiv 2 Result NetLoss DPI Cnfg Normal Stop Mode Notch Filt Freq NotchAttenuation OL ClsLp CurrLim OL OpnLp CurrLim Opt 0 Regis Ltch Opt 1 Regis Ltch Opt0/1 RegisCnfg Opt0/1 RegisCtrl Opt0/1 RegisStat Output Curr Disp Output Current Output Freq Output Power Output Voltage ParamAccessLevel PeakDetect1 Out PeakDetect2 Out PeakDtct Ctrl In PeakDtct Status PeakDtct1 Preset PeakDtct2 Preset PI Error PI Feedback PI High Limit PI Integ HLim PI Integ LLim PI Integ Output PI Integ Time PI Lower Limit PI Lpass Filt BW PI Output PI Preload PI Prop Gain PI Reference PI TP Data
Parameter #
6 372 371 305 434 435 127 229 228 1055 1053 1054 1056 1059 1057 1058 1060 392 168 118 117 344 343 257 258 254 255 256 297 308 310 311 307 196 215 219 210 211 214 218 183 182 191 188 189 190 187 192 184 180 185 186 181 179
Param Name Text

PI TP Sel PkDtct1 In DInt PkDtct1 In Real PkDtct2 In DInt PkDtct2 In Real PLL Bandwidth PLL Control PLL EPR Input PLL EPR Output PLL Ext Spd Ref PLL Ext SpdScale PLL LPFilter BW PLL FiltPositOut PLL Posit Out PLL Posit OutAdv PLL Position Ref PLL Rev Input PLL Rev Output PLL Speed Out PLL SpeedOut Adv PLL TP DataDInt PLL TP DataReal PLL TP Select PLL VirtEncdrRPM PM AbsEncd Offst PM D Inductance PM Mtr CEMF Coef PM Mtr CEMF Comp PM Q Inductance PM Stator Resist PM Test Freq Ref PM Test FreqRamp PM Test I Ref PM Test Idc Ramp PM TestWait Time PMag Mode Config PMag Tune Config Port Mask Act Posit Actl Load Posit Detct1 In Posit Detct2 In Posit FB EGR Div Posit FB EGR Mul Posit Gear Ratio Posit Load Fdbk Posit Offset 1 Posit Offset 2 Posit Offset Spd Posit Spd Output Posit TP Select PositDetct1 Stpt PositDetct2 Stpt Position Actual Position Cmmd
Parameter #
178 212 213 216 217 722 720 725 726 728 729 730 733 731 732 721 723 724 734 735 718 719 717 727 504 521 523 427 520 522 508 507 509 506 505 512 517 714 765 784 785 767 766 796 764 753 754 755 318 737 780 781 763 747
Param Name Text

Position Control Position ErrCnfg Position Error Position Fdbk Position Ref Sel Position Status PositionFdbk Sel PositRef EGR Div PositRef EGR Mul PositRef EGR Out PositReg Droop PositReg Integ PositReg P Gain PositTP DataDInt PositTP DataReal Power EE TP Data Power EE TP Sel Power Loss Level Power Loss Mode Power Loss Time PPMP Accel Time PPMP Control PPMP Decel Time PPMP Fwd Spd Lim PPMP Over Ride PPMP Pos Command PPMP Pos Div PPMP Pos Mul PPMP Pos Output PPMP Pos To Go PPMP Rev Spd Lim PPMP Scaled Cmd PPMP SCurve Time PPMP Spd Output PPMP Status PPMP TP DataDInt PPMP TP DataReal PPMP TP Select PreCharge Delay PreChrg Control PreChrg Err Cnfg PreChrg TimeOut Preset Speed 1 Preset Speed 2 Preset Speed 3 Preset Speed 4 Preset Speed 5 Preset Speed 6 Preset Speed 7 Pt-Pt Accel Time Pt-Pt Decel Time Pt-Pt Filt BW Pt-Pt Posit Ref PWM Frequency
Parameter #
740 399 769 762 742 741 777 746 745 744 771 770 768 738 739 413 412 408 406 407 1139 1134 1140 1137 1138 1130 1132 1131 1143 1144 1136 1133 1141 1142 1135 1146 1147 1145 472 411 381 410 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 759 760 761 758 402
3-122
Param Name Text

Pwr Strct Mode Ramped Spd Ref Rated Amps Rated Slip Freq Rated Volts Real2DInt In Real2DInt Result Real2DInt Scale Regen Power Lim RegisLtch0 Value RegisLtch0/1Cnfg RegisLtch0/1Ctrl RegisLtch0/1Stat RegisLtch1 Value Reslvr0 CableBal Reslvr0 Carrier Reslvr0 In Volts Reslvr0 SpdRatio Reslvr0 TP Data Reslvr0 TP Sel Reslvr0 Type Sel Resolver0 Cnfg Resolver0 Status Rev Speed Limit Rly Out3 Bit Rly Out3 Data Rly Out3 OffTime Rly Out3 On Time Rly Out3 Sel Rotor Resistance Rslvr0 XfrmRatio RsTempCoefAdjust RsTmpCoefAdjstEn Run Boost Rx Buf Data Type Rx Dir Data Type S Curve Time Saved Events Scaled Spd Fdbk Scaled Spd Ref Sel Switch Ctrl Sel Swtch In00 Sel Swtch In01 Sel Swtch In02 Sel Swtch In03 Sel Swtch In04 Sel Swtch In05 Sel Swtch In06 Sel Swtch In07 Sel Swtch In08 Sel Swtch In09 Sel Swtch In10 Sel Swtch In11 Sel Swtch In12
Parameter #
420 43 400 486 401 1050 1052 1051 128 235 236 237 238 239 276 273 274 272 271 270 277 268 269 75 857 856 859 858 855 502 275 590 591 528 933 928 34 436 72 46 1022 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041
Param Name Text

Sel Swtch In13 Sel Swtch In14 Sel Swtch In15 Selected Spd Ref Selected SpdRefA Selected SpdRefB Selected Trq Ref SelSwtch DIntOut SelSwtch RealOut SrLssAngleStblty SrLss VoltStblty SrLss StbltyFilt Servo Lock Gain Set Speed Lim Setpt 1 Data Setpt 1 Limit Setpt 2 Data Setpt 2 Limit Setpt1 TripPoint Setpt2 TripPoint -Sft OvrTrvlCnfg Skip Speed 1 Skip Speed 2 Skip Speed 3 Skip Speed Band SL BOF Err Accum SL BOF Err Limit SL BOF Error SL Buf Data Rx00 SL Buf Data Rx01 SL Buf Data Rx02 SL Buf Data Rx03 SL Buf Data Rx04 SL Buf Data Rx05 SL Buf Data Rx06 SL Buf Data Rx07 SL Buf Data Rx08 SL Buf Data Rx09 SL Buf Data Rx10 SL Buf Data Rx11 SL Buf Data Rx12 SL Buf Data Rx13 SL Buf Data Rx14 SL Buf Data Rx15 SL Buf Data Rx16 SL Buf Data Rx17 SL Buf Data Rx18 SL Buf Data Rx19 SL Buf Data Rx20 SL Buf Data Rx21 SL Buf Data Rx22 SL Buf Data Rx23 SL Buf Data Rx24 SL Buf Data Rx25
Parameter #
1042 1043 1044 40 49 50 319 1046 1045 537 538 539 85 171 172 174 175 177 173 176 396 136 137 138 139 896 899 897 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959
Param Name Text

SL Buf Data Rx26 SL Buf Data Rx27 SL Buf Data Rx28 SL Buf Data Rx29 SL Buf Data Tx00 SL Buf Data Tx01 SL Buf Data Tx02 SL Buf Data Tx03 SL Buf Data Tx04 SL Buf Data Tx05 SL Buf Data Tx06 SL Buf Data Tx07 SL Buf Data Tx08 SL Buf Data Tx09 SL Buf Data Tx10 SL Buf Data Tx11 SL Buf Data Tx12 SL Buf Data Tx13 SL Buf Data Tx14 SL Buf Data Tx15 SL Buf Data Tx16 SL Buf Data Tx17 SL Buf Data Tx18 SL Buf Data Tx19 SL Buf Data Tx20 SL Buf Data Tx21 SL Buf Data Tx22 SL Buf Data Tx23 SL Buf Data Tx24 SL Buf Data Tx25 SL Buf Data Tx26 SL Buf Data Tx27 SL Buf Data Tx28 SL Buf Data Tx29 SL Clr Events SL Comm TP Data SL Comm TP Sel SL CommLoss Cnfg SL CommLoss Data SL CRC Err Accum SL CRC Err Limit SL CRC Error SL Dir Data Rx00 SL Dir Data Rx01 SL Dir Data Rx02 SL Dir Data Rx03 SL Dir Data Tx00 SL Dir Data Tx01 SL Dir Data Tx02 SL Dir Data Tx03 SL Error History SL Error Status SL Mult A In SL Mult B In
Parameter #
960 961 962 963 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 916 893 892 384 383 894 898 895 929 930 931 932 965 966 967 968 903 902 924 925
3-123
Param Name Text

SL Mult Base SL Mult Out SL Mult State SL MultErr Cnfg SL Node Cnfg SL Rcv Events SL Real2DInt In SL Real2DInt Out SL Rx CommFormat SL Rx DirectSel0 SL Rx DirectSel1 SL Rx DirectSel2 SL Rx DirectSel3 SL Rx P0 Regis SL Rx P1 Regis SL System Rev SL System Time SL Tx CommFormat SL Tx DirectSel0 SL Tx DirectSel1 SL Tx DirectSel2 SL Tx DirectSel3 SLAT Dwell Time SLAT ErrorSetpnt SlewRateTimeLimit SlipReg Err Lmt SlipReg Off Iqs SlipReg On Hystr Slip Comp Gain Slip Gain Slip Gain Max Slip Gain Min Slip Preload Val Slip Ratio Slip Reg I Gain Slip Reg P Gain Slip RPM @ FLA Slip RPM Meter Slip Slew Rate Spd Err Filt BW Spd Fdbk Scale Spd Fdbk TP Data Spd Fdbk TP RPM Spd Fdbk TP Sel Spd Ref Bypass Spd Ref Bypass2 Spd Ref TP Data Spd Ref TP RPM Spd Ref TP Sel Spd Ref1 Divide Spd Ref2 Multi Spd Reg BW Spd Reg Damping Spd Reg Droop
Parameter #
923 926 927 390 904 915 921 922 905 906 907 908 909 917 918 901 317 910 911 912 913 914 120 119 533 587 461 593 99 98 445 446 552 525 448 447 98 107 553 89 73 247 246 245 37 48 79 78 77 11 13 90 91 86
Param Name Text

Spd Reg I Gain Spd Reg Neg Lim Spd Reg P Gain Spd Reg PI Out Spd Reg Pos Lim Spd Reg TP Data Spd Reg TP Sel SpdRef + SpdTrm1 SpdRef Filt BW SpdRef Filt Gain SpdReg AntiBckup SpdReg Integ Out SpdReg P Gain Mx SpdTrim 3 Scale SpdTrim2 Filt BW Speed Comp Speed Error Speed Ref 1 Speed Ref 2 Speed Ref A Sel Speed Ref B Sel Speed Ref Scale Speed Trim 1 Speed Trim 2 Speed Trim 3 Speed/TorqueMode SReg FB Filt BW SReg Out Filt BW SReg Trq Preset SRegFB Filt Gain SRegOut FiltGain SrLss Angl Comp SrLss FreqReg Ki SrLss FreqReg Kp Srlss Spd Reg BW Srlss Spd Reg Ki Srlss Spd Reg Kp SrLss StbltyFilt SrLss Volt Comp SrLss VoltStblty Srlss ZeroSpdLim SrLssAngleStblty SrvoAxis RotFdbk SrvoAxisUnwdFdbk Start/Acc Boost Start Inhibits Start Mask Start Owner Start/Acc Boost Startup State Stator Frequency StatorInductance StatorResistance Steg&Heidn TPDta
Parameter #
82 103 81 302 102 109 108 47 36 35 84 101 92 24 26 55 100 10 12 27 28 38 21 22 23 110 94 96 87 93 95 541 449 450 106 105 104 539 542 538 169 537 707 708 527 156 671 678 527 452 526 490 491 262
Param Name Text

Steg&Heidn TPSel Stegmann0 Cnfg Stegmann0 Status Stop Dwell Time Stop Oper TP Sel Stop Owner StopOper TP Data STrim2 Filt Gain Swtch DInt 1 NC Swtch DInt 1 NO Swtch DInt 1 Out Swtch Real 1 NC Swtch Real 1 NO Swtch Real 1 Out SynchLink Rev SynchLink Status TachSwitch Level Test Current Ref Test Freq Rate Test Freq Ref Test Mode Config Time Axis Output Time Axis Rate To DL DataType To DriveLogix00 To DriveLogix01 To DriveLogix02 To DriveLogix03 To DriveLogix04 To DriveLogix05 To DriveLogix06 To DriveLogix07 To DriveLogix08 To DriveLogix09 To DriveLogix10 To DriveLogix11 To DriveLogix12 To DriveLogix13 To DriveLogix14 To DriveLogix15 To DriveLogix16 To DriveLogix17 To DriveLogix18 To DriveLogix19 To DriveLogix20 Torque En Dly Torque Neg Limit Torque Pos Limit Torque Ref1 Torque Ref1 Div Torque Ref2 Torque Ref2 Mult Torque Step Torque Trim
Parameter #
261 259 260 154 163 677 164 25 1026 1027 1028 1023 1024 1025 900 316 224 431 433 432 514 203 202 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 501 126 125 111 112 113 114 116 115
3-124
Param Name Text

Total Inertia Trend Control Trend In1 DInt Trend In1 Real Trend In2 DInt Trend In2 Real Trend In3 DInt Trend In3 Real Trend In4 DInt Trend In4 Real Trend Mark DInt Trend Mark Real Trend Out1 DInt Trend Out1 Real Trend Out2 DInt Trend Out2 Real Trend Out3 DInt Trend Out3 Real Trend Out4 DInt Trend Out4 Real Trend PreSamples Trend Rate Trend State Trend Status Trend Trig Bit Trend Trig Data Trend TrigA DInt Trend TrigA Real Trend TrigB DInt Trend TrigB Real TrendBuffPointer Trq CurFdbk (Iq) Trq NegLim Actl Trq PosLim Actl Trq Ref TP Data Trq Ref TP Sel Tune Test Status Tx Buf Data Type Tx Dir Data Type UserData Dint 01 UserData Dint 02 UserData Dint 03 UserData Dint 04 UserData Dint 05 UserData Dint 06 UserData Dint 07 UserData Dint 08 UserData Dint 09 UserData Dint 10 UserData Real 01 UserData Real 02 UserData Real 03 UserData Real 04 UserData Real 05
Parameter #
9 556 570 571 574 575 578 579 582 583 567 568 572 573 576 577 580 581 584 585 566 559 558 557 565 564 560 561 562 563 569 499 124 123 131 130 165 969 964 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016
Param Name Text

UserData Real 06 UserData Real 07 UserData Real 08 UserData Real 09 UserData Real 10 UserFunct Actual UserFunct Enable V/Hz Mode Config V/Hz Status Vds Command Vds Fdbk Filt Vds Max Vds Min VirtEncPositFast Virt Encdr Dlyed Virt Encdr Posit Virt Encoder EPR Virtual Edge/Rev Voltage Class VoltFdbkLossCnfg VPL Build Number VPL Firmware Rev VPL Mem Address VPL Mem Data Bit VPL Mem Data Flt VPL Mem Data Int VPL Mem Link Flt VPL Mem Link Int VPL Mem Password Vqs Command Vqs Fdbk Filt Vqs Max Vqs Min VqsReg Err Lmt VqsReg Off Freq VqsReg On Hystr Vuv Fdbk Offset Vvw Fdbk Offset Write Mask Write Mask Act X Notch Attenu X Notch FiltFreq X Offst SpdFilt XReg Integ HiLim XReg Integ LoLim XReg Integ Out XReg Spd HiLim XReg Spd LoLim Xsync Gen Period Xsync In 1 Xsync In 2 Xsync In 3 Xsync Out 1 Xsync Out 2
Parameter #
1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1001 1000 513 540 498 441 438 440 1160 63 62 61 225 403 394 315 314 479 482 481 480 484 483 478 497 442 437 439 588 462 592 549 550 669 712 778 779 756 773 772 774 776 775 787 788 790 793 789 791
Param Name Text

Xsync Out 2 Dly Xsync Out 3 Xsync Out 3 Dly Xsync Status Zero Speed Lim
Parameter #
792 794 795 786 160
Chapter
Troubleshooting
Chapter Objectives
This chapter provides information to guide you in troubleshooting the PowerFlex 700S. A list and description of drive faults (with possible solutions, when applicable) and alarms is included.
For Information on... Faults and Alarms Drive Status Manually Clearing Faults Fault/Alarm Descriptions See page... 4-4 4-1 4-4 4-5
Drive Status
The condition or state of your drive is constantly monitored. Any changes will be indicated through the front panel LEDs and/or the HIM (if present). If the DriveLogix option is not present the associated indicators will not be present. The RUN LED and the controller LEDs are only operational when the drive is energized. These LEDs are only visible when the drive door is open or when viewed from the HIM or an application program (e.g., DriveExplorer) in parameter 554 [LED Status]. This feature is only available with DriveLogix version 15.03 or later. ATTENTION: The RUN LED and the controller LEDs are only operational when the drive is energized and only visible with the drive door open. Servicing energized equipment can be hazardous. Severe injury or death can result from electrical shock, burn or unintended actuation of controlled equipment. Follow Safety related practices of NFPA 70E, ELECTRICAL SAFETY FOR EMPLOYEE WORKPLACES. DO NOT work alone on energized equipment!
4-2
Troubleshooting
LED Indications
Figure 4.1 Drive Status Indicators
Table 4.A Drive Status Indicator Descriptions

# Name Color State Description
PWR
(Power)
Green Green Yellow
Steady Flashing Steady Flashing Steady Flashing Steady Flashing Alternately
Illuminates when power is applied to the drive. Drive ready, but not running & no faults are present. Drive running, no faults are present. When running, a type 2 (non-configurable) alarm condition exists, drive continues to run. When stopped, a start inhibit exists and the drive cannot be started. A type 1 (user configurable) alarm condition exists, but drive continues to run. A fault has occurred. A non-resettable fault has occurred. The drive is in flash recovery mode. The only operation permitted is flash upgrade.
Power Structure
STS
(Status)
Red Red / Yellow
DRIVE
Communications
Control Assembly
PORT MOD NET A NET B
Status of DPI port internal communications (if present). Refer to the Status of communications module (when installed). Communication Status of network (if connected). Adapter User Manual Status of secondary network (if connected). Steady The module is configured as the time keeper. or The module is configured as a follower and synchronization is complete. The follower(s) are not synchronized with the time keeper. The module is configured as a time master on SynchLink and has received time information from another time master on SynchLink. The drives enable input is high. The drives enable input is low.
(1)
SYNCHLINK Green
Control
Green Red ENABLE Green Green
Flashing Flashing On Off
(1)
SynchLink LEDs are located on the SynchLink daughtercard on the main circuit board in the control cassette.
Troubleshooting
4-3
Precharge Board LED Indications

Precharge Board LED indicators are found on Frame 5 & 6 drives. The LEDs are located above the Line Type jumper shown in Figure 1.2.
Name Color State Power Green Steady Alarm Yellow Flashing [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Fault Red Flashing [2] [4]
(1) (2)
Description Indicates when precharge board power supply is operational Number in [ ] indicates flashes and associated alarm (1): Low line voltage (<90%). Very low line voltage (<50%). Low phase (one phase <80% of line voltage). Frequency out of range or asymmetry (line sync failed). Low DC bus voltage (triggers ride-through operation). Input frequency momentarily out of range (40-65 Hz). DC bus short circuit detection active. Number in [ ] indicates flashes and associated fault (2): DC bus short (Udc <2% after 20 ms). Line sync failed or low line (Uac <50% Unom).
An alarm condition automatically resets when the condition no longer exists A fault indicates a malfunction that must be corrected and can only be reset after cycling power.
Table 4.B Common Causes of a Run Inhibit

Examine Parameter 156 [Run Inhibit Status] Bit Description 1 No power is present at the Enable Terminal TB2- 16 2, 3, 4 A stop command is being issued 5 Power loss event is in progress, indicating a loss of the AC input voltage 6 Data supplied by the power structure EEprom is invalid or corrupt 7 Flash Update in Progress 8 Drive is expecting a Start Edge and is receiving a continuous signal. 9 Drive is expecting a Jog Edge and is receiving a continuous signal. 10 A conflict exists between the Encoder PPR programming (Par 232 or 242) and the encoder configuration for edge counts (Par 233, bits 4 & 5). 11 The drive cannot precharge because a precharge input is programmed and no signal is present. Start input configured but stop not configured Run input configured but control options do not match Start input configured but control options do not match Multiple inputs configured as Start or Run 12 Digital Configuration Action Apply the enable Close all stop inputs Restore AC power Cycle the power. If problem persists, replace the power structure. Complete Flash Procedures Open all start buttons and remove all start commands Open all jog buttons and remove all jog commands Verify encoder data and reprogram
Reprogram the input or close the precharge control contact.
14
Program Par 825-830 to include a stop button, rewire the drive Program Par 153, Bit 8 to 0 (2 wire control) Program Par 153, Bit 8 to 1 (3 wire control) Reprogram Par 825-830 so multiple starts, multiple runs or any combination do not exist Multiple inputs configured as Jog1 Reprogram Par 825-830 so only (1) is set to Jog1 Multiple inputs configured as Jog2 Reprogram Par 825-830 so only (1) is set to Jog2 Multiple inputs configured as Fwd/Rev Reprogram Par 825-830 so only (1) is set to Fwd/Rev Invalid Feedback Device for Permanent Magnet Motor Control Set Par 222 to Value 5 (FB Opt Port0)
4-4
Troubleshooting
HIM Indication
The HIM also provides visual notification of a fault.
Condition Drive is indicating a fault. The LCD HIM immediately reports the fault condition by displaying the following: Faulted appears in the status line Fault number Fault name Time that has passed since the fault occurred Press Esc to regain control of the HIM Display
F- Faulted > Auto
Main Menu: DC Bus Overvolt Diagnostics Fault Time since 00:23:52 Parameter
0.0 Hz Fault F24
Manually Clearing Faults
This section will contain a table that illustrates the HIM keystrokes necessary to clear faults.
Step Key(s)
1. Press Esc to acknowledge the fault. The fault information will be removed so that you can use the HIM. 2. Address the condition that caused the fault. The cause must be corrected before the fault can be cleared. 3. After corrective action has been taken, clear the fault by one of these methods. Press Stop Cycle drive power Select Clear Faults from Diagnostic - Faults menu
Esc
Faults and Alarms
A fault is a condition that stops the drive. An alarm is a condition that, if left untreated, may stop the drive. There are three configuration types for indicating a fault and/or alarm.
Table 4.C Fault Type Descriptions
Type Fault Description Non-Configurable Fault User Configurable The cause of the fault must be corrected before the fault can be cleared. Programming and commissioning personnel can configure the drives response to these exception events. Responses include: Ignore Alarm Fault Coast Stop Fault Ramp Stop Fault Current Limit Stop Can only be configured as a alarm.
Non-Configurable Alarm
Troubleshooting
4-5
Fault/Alarm Descriptions
No. Name 1 Abs Ovespd Det
Table 4.D Fault/Alarm Descriptions and Configuration Parameters
Type(1) Description Action Motor speed has exceeded the limits set by Par 75 [Rev Speed Check to see if the encoder feedback polarity is correct. Limit], Par 76 [Fwd Speed Limit] and Par 335 [Abs OverSpd Lim] Check to see if the drive is in torque mode, selected in Par 110 [Speed/TorqueMode] value 2 Torque Ref. If the drive is in torque mode, verify that there is a load present. Verify min/max settings in Par 75 [Rev Speed Lim] and Par 76 [Fwd Speed Lim]. Check to see if the load is overhauling. If it is overhauling, turn the bus regulator off using Par 414 [Brake/Bus Cnfg] bit 2 BusRef High.
Vref Decel Fail
Encoder 0 Loss
The value of Par 301 [Motor Spd Ref] has failed to decrease during a ramp to zero speed stop. This could possibly be due to a speed trim from Par 21 [Speed Trim 1], Par 22 [Speed Trim 2] or Par 23 [Speed Trim 3]. One of the following has occurred on encoder 0: Reconnect encoder or replace encoder. missing encoder (broken wire) quadrature error phase loss One of the following has occurred on encoder 1: missing encoder (broken wire) quadrature error phase loss A fault on port 0 of the Hi-Resolution Encoder Feedback Option Card, MDI Option Card, Heidenhain, or Resolver Feedback Option Card has occurred. Configured with Par 365 [Fdbk LsCnfg Pri], Par 366 [Fdbk LsCnfg Alt], and Par 367 [Fdbk LsCnfgPosit] Reconnect encoder or replace encoder. Configured with Par 365 [Fdbk LsCnfg Pri], Par 366 [Fdbk LsCnfg Alt], and Par 367 [Fdbk LsCnfgPosit] Reconnect encoder or replace encoder Reconnect option feedback card
Encoder 1 Loss
Opt Port 0 Loss
Opt Port 1 Loss
Configured with Par 365 [Fdbk LsCnfg Pri], Par 260 [Stegmann0 Status] displays the fault status for port Par 366 [Fdbk LsCnfg Alt], and Par 367 [Fdbk 0 of the Hi-Resolution Encoder Feedback Option Card. LsCnfgPosit] Par 264 [Heidenhain0 Stat] displays the fault status for port 0 of the Heidenhain Feedback Option Card. Par 269 [Resolver0 Status] displays the fault status for port 0 of the Resolver Feedback Option Card. The Linear sensor portion of the MDI feedback option card has Reconnect encoder or replace encoder detected a fault condition. Reconnect option feedback card Par 286 [Linear1 Status] displays the fault status for linear portion of the MDI feedback Option Card. Configured with Par 365 [Fdbk LsCnfg Pri], Par 366 [Fdbk LsCnfg Alt], and Par 367 [Fdbk LsCnfgPosit] Replace Main Control Board Verify the SynchLink configuration in Par 904 [SL Node Cnfg] Par 905 [SL Rx CommFormat], and Par 910 [SL Tx CommFormat] Reconnect SynchLink communication fibers Configured with Par 384 [SL CommLoss Cnfg] Verify AC line power
7 8 9
Params Defaulted SLink HW Fail SLink Comm Fail
All parameters are reset to default by user. A fault on loading SynchLink firmware into FPGA on Main Control Board at power up. A SynchLink communication fault has occurred. Par 902 [SL Error Status] displays SynchLink errors.
10
Drive Power Loss
DC Bus voltage has fallen below the minimum value Par 306 [DC Bus Voltage] displays bus voltage Par 330 [Fault TP Data] displays the minimum value when Par 329 [Fault TP Sel] is set to five The drive must first complete precharge before this check is made
4-6
Troubleshooting
No. Name 11 Motor OLoad Trip
Type(1) Description Action A motor overload trip has occurred. Par 308 [Output Current] is Reduce mechanical load squared, scaled and integrated over time. When this integrated Enter correct motor nameplate full load amps value exceeds 1.0, this Exception Event occurs. Par 2 [Motor NP FLA] The integrator's output can be viewed in Par 330 [Fault TP Configured with Par 371 [Mtr OL Trip Cnfg] Data] when Par 329 [Fault TP Sel] is set to 13 Mtr OL Outpt. The overload integration rate is affected by Par 336 [Motor OL Factor], Par 337 [Mtr I2T Curr Min], Par 338 [Mtr I2T Spd Min] and Par 339 [Mtr I2T Calibrat]. A motor overload is pending. Par 308 [Output Current] is Reduce the mechanical load squared, scaled and integrated over time. When this integrated Enter correct motor nameplate full load amps value exceeds 0.5, this exception event occurs. Par 2 [Motor NP FLA] The integrator's output can be viewed in Par 330 [Fault TP Data] when Par 329 [Fault TP Sel] is set to 13 Mtr OL Outpt. The overload integration rate is affected by Par 336 [Motor OL Factor], Par 337 [Mtr I2T Curr Min], Par 338 [Mtr I2T Spd Min] and Par 339 [Mtr I2T Calibrat]. The motor has stalled. These three conditions have occurred at the same time for the amount of time specified in Par 373 [Motor Stall Time]: 1.) Drive is not stopped (Par 150 [Logic State Mach] not equal to zero) 2.) Drive is on limit (Par 304 [Limit Status] not equal to zero) 3.) Drive is at zero speed (Par 155 [Logic Status] / bit 13 At Zero Spd is set). Par 313 [Heatsink Temp] is within 10C of maximum. Configured with Par 372 [Mtr OL Pend Cnfg]
12
Motor OLoad Pend
13
Motor Stalled
Increase torque limit Reduce mechanical load Configured with Par 374 [Motor Stall Cnfg]
14
Inv OTemp Pend
Reduce the mechanical load
15
Inv OTemp Trip
Lower the ambient temperature View the maximum heat sink temperature in Par 348 [Drive OL Configured with Par 375 [Inv OT Pend Cnfg] TP Data] when Par 347 [Drive OL TP Sel] is set to 30 fMaxHsDegc. Reduce the mechanical load Par 313 [Heatsink Temp] is above the maximum limit or temperature sensor has failed (shorted or open). Lower the ambient temperature See Par 346 [Drive OL Status] / bit 0 NTC Shorted and bit 1 NTC Open. The drive's operating point is approaching the intermittent current rating limitation. If output current remains at or above present levels, an inverter overload condition will occur. The drive's operating point has exceeded the intermittent current rating and a foldback to the continuous rating in Par 400 [Rated Amps] has occurred. A digital input has detected an external fault.
16
Inv OLoad Pend
Reduce the load on the drive Configured with Par 376 [Inv OL Pend Cnfg] Reduce the mechanical load Configured with Par 377 [Inv OL Trip Cnfg] Configured with Par 379 [Ext Flt/Alm Cnfg]
17
Inv OLoad Trip
18
Ext Fault Input
19
DSP Memory Error
Enter a value of 3 Ext Fault or 38 ExtFault Inv in one of the following parameters to configure an input to detect an external fault: Par 825 [Digin 1 Sel] Par 826 [Digin 2 Sel] Par 827 [Digin 3 Sel] Par 828 [Dig In4 Sel] Par 829 [Dig In5 Sel] Par 830 [Dig In6 Sel] Flash memory does not match the SRAM memory Cycle the drive power If the fault remains, replace the Main Control Board Cycle the drive power If the fault remains, replace the Main Control Board
20
DSP Device Error
A DSP (Velocity Position Loop) interrupt task has not been completed in the allotted time.
Troubleshooting
4-7
No. Name 22 Over Frequency
23
MC Commissn Fail
Type(1) Description Encoderless algorithm fails to converge on correct speed. Two possible causes: 1.) Velocity regulator is attempting to run below motors slip speed. 2.) Frequency regulator pulls out and commanded motor frequency slows to maximum frequency limit. The drive has failed to complete either the Motor Autotuning procedure or the Power Circuits Diagnostics test. Par 463 [MC Diag Error 1], Par 464 [MC Diag Error 2], and Par 465 [MC Diag Error 3] display Motor Autotuning and Power Circuit Diagnostic faults. Par 465 [MC Diag Error 3] - Drive current, inductance, voltage and speed are not within motor nameplate specifications. This fault occur most frequently on low horsepower motors.
Action
Verify that motor nameplate data is entered correctly into the drive. Verify the motor is wired for the correction voltage entering into the drive. Verify the encoder (if used) and velocity feedback is correct.
24
DC Bus Overvolt
Change tuning mode in to Par 515 [FVC Tune Config] to 9 NoRotate Tune. Refer to Protection in Appendix A - Specifications on page A-1 Verify the AC Line. for DC Bus Overvoltage Trip levels. Verify that either the brake or bus regulator is enabled (Par 414 [Brake/Bus Cnfg], bit 0 Brake Enable or bit 3 Bus Reg Enable, respectively). Verify that Par 128 [Regen Power Lim] is set properly. If Par 414 [Brake/Bus Cnfg] bit 0 Brake Enable is set, verify braking resistor is properly sized.
25 26
Inv Trans Desat Ground Fault
The IGBT detects a transistor failure (Desat). A current to earth exceeds 35% of the peak drive rating.
27
Inst Overcurrent
Instantaneous motor current exceeds 214% of rating
Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition. Reduce mechanical load. Check the motor and external wiring to the motor. Cycle power Reflash firmware
28
VPL/MC Comm Fail
A communication failure has occurred between the Velocity Position Loop (VPL) processor and the Motor Control (MC) processor on the main control board. Possible causes are:
29
PWM Signal Short
30
MC Firmware
Replace Main Control Board VPL is flashing MC firmware into the MC processor when HIM indicates "Loading Config". MC has failed to complete or pass diagnostic tests. MC has not detected VPL handshake activity for over 32 ms. VPL has not detected MC handshake activity for over 32 ms. This is indicated when Fault Test Point 15 or 16 equals 1. This test point is viewed in Par 330 [Fault TP Data] when Par 329 [Fault TP Select] is set to value 15 or 16. This fault is detected when ever the actual IGBT gate is different than the commanded IGBT states. This fault is detected by the Motor Control (MC) processor. One of the following Motor Control (MC) firmware errors has Cycle power occurred: Reflash firmware MC Task Over Run Illegal Interrupt Replace Main Control Board Self Diagnostic Fault Data Error
4-8
Troubleshooting
No. Name 31 Precharge Error
32 33
35 38
Type(1) Description The precharge function has failed to complete within 30 seconds (default) of the precharge request. The precharge time out is configurable by Par 410 [PreChrg TimeOut]. A precharge request is initiated when the DC Bus voltage is above the Undervoltage Trip level and the precharge input is high (the requirement for the precharge being high can be bypassed by setting Par 411 [PreChrg Control] bit 01 PreChrg Enable off). PWM Asynch The Motor Control Processor is not synchronized with SynchLink. +/- 15volt Power The12V DC control voltage is outside the tolerance range. The positive voltage power must be within the band from +17.00 to +11.61V DC. The negative voltage power must be within the band from -17.00 to -11.61V DC. Parameter Chksum The checksum read from the EEPROM does not match the checksum calculated Brake OL Trip
Action Verify the value in Par 410 [PreChrg TimeOut]. Verify the bit value in Par 411 [PreChrg Control] = 1 Enbl PrChrg. Configured with Par 381 [PreChrg Err Cnfg]
Replace switch mode power supply. For smaller frames, replace drive.
Cycle power Replace Main Control Board Verify actual temperature of brake: - If hot, wait for brake to cool - If cold, cycle power to the drive If cold, verify Par 416 [Brake PulseWatts] and Par 417 [Brake Watts] are correct. Configured with Par 369 [Brake OL Cnfg] Cycle power
The calculated temperature of the dynamic braking resistor is too high. The temperature is calculated by a thermal model. If the resistor is internal, the model uses resistor characteristic stored in the power structure EEPROM memory. If the resistor is external, the model uses values of Par 416 [Brake PulseWatts] and Par 417 [Brake Watts].
39
PowerEE CRC Fail
The Cycling Ring Checksum (CRC) of the data stored in the Power Board EEPROM does not match the stored CRC.
40 41
SLink Mult Oflow Ridethru Timeout
42
DC Bus Undervolt
In High Horse Power units, check communication bus lines - 10 pin connector in Main Control Board, High Horse Power interface board, and fiber optic cable connections. A SynchLink Multiplier Overflow has occurred. Par 927 [SL Mult Configured with Par 390 [SL MultErr Cnfg] State] displays SynchLink multiplier overflow errors. The drive has been in a bus loss ridethrough condition for more Verify the AC Line. than two seconds (default). The ridethrough timeout is Verify the value in Par 407 [Power Loss Time]. configurable by Par 407 [Power Loss Time]. Bus voltage has fallen below the level configured by Par 409 Verify the AC Line. [Line Undervolts]. In frames 1-4, and 9 - 13 verify the precharge resistor is present. (With power off, there should be a resistance between DC+ and BR+). In frames 5 & 6, check the precharge board for errors. See the precharge board LED for fault sequence.
43
VoltageFdbk Loss
Configured with Par 393 [BusUndervoltCnfg] Loss of Motor or DC Bus Voltage Feedback has occurred Check the communication line between Motor because of a communication failure between Motor Control and Control (MC) and Voltage Feedback board. Voltage Feedback board. Replace the Voltage Feedback board. Configured with Par 394 [VoltFdbkLossCnfg] Runtime data (hours, energy) has been reset to zero due to a checksum error. Safety circuit is active. Interpolator for position feedback lost synchronization with Velocity Position Loop (VPL). Current Minor Loop (CML) task has been delayed or run with incorrect interval. The controlling device (HIM or controller) has been disconnected while the drive was running.
44 45 46 47 48
Runtime Data Rst Enable Health Interp Out Synch MC CML Task Fail No Ctrl Device
Check input signal to the Safety circuit. Configured with Par 378 [Interp Flt Cnfg] Cycle power.
Troubleshooting
4-9
No. Name 49 DPI Loss Port 1
Type(1) Description The device at DPI port 1 has stopped communicating with the drive. A SCANport device is connected to a drive operating DPI devices at 500k Baud The device at DPI port 2 has stopped communicating with the drive. A SCANport device is connected to a drive operating DPI devices at 500k Baud The device at DPI port 3 has stopped communicating with the drive. A SCANport device is connected to a drive operating DPI devices at 500k Baud The device at DPI port 4 has stopped communicating with the drive. A SCANport device is connected to a drive operating DPI devices at 500k Baud The device at DPI port 5 has stopped communicating with the drive. A SCANport device is connected to a drive operating DPI devices at 500k Baud The device at DPI port 6 has stopped communicating with the drive. A SCANport device is connected to a drive operating DPI devices at 500k Baud A communications fault has occurred between the communication adapter at DPI port 1 and the network.
Action Verify DPI device is present and functional at port 1. Configured with Par 391 [DPI CommLoss Cfg] Verify DPI device is present and functional at port 2. Configured with Par 391 [DPI CommLoss Cfg] Verify DPI device is present and functional at port 3. Configured with Par 391 [DPI CommLoss Cfg] Verify DPI device is present and functional at port 4. Configured with Par 391 [DPI CommLoss Cfg] Verify DPI device is present and functional at port 5. Configured with Par 391 [DPI CommLoss Cfg] Verify DPI device is present and functional at port 6. Configured with Par 391 [DPI CommLoss Cfg] Verify network connection. Verify status of network. Configured with Par 392 [NetLoss DPI Cnfg] Verify network connection. Verify status of network. Configured with Par 392 [NetLoss DPI Cnfg] Verify network connection. Verify status of network. Configured with Par 392 [NetLoss DPI Cnfg] Verify network connection. Verify status of network. Configured with Par 392 [NetLoss DPI Cnfg] Verify network connection. Verify status of network. Configured with Par 392 [NetLoss DPI Cnfg] Verify network connection. Verify status of network. Configured with Par 392 [NetLoss DPI Cnfg] Clear fault
50
DPI Loss Port 2
51
DPI Loss Port 3
52
DPI Loss Port 4
53
DPI Loss Port 5
54
DPI Loss Port 6
55
Net Loss DPI P1
56
Net Loss DPI P2
A communications fault has occurred between the communication adapter at DPI port 2 and the network.
57
Net Loss DPI P3
58
Net Loss DPI P4
59
Net Loss DPI P5
60
Net Loss DPI P6
61 62 63
Logix Out of Run Logix Timeout Logix Closed
The DriveLogix controller is in a Non-Run mode. Non-Run modes include program, remote-program and faulted modes.
Configured with Par 386 [Lgx OutOfRunCnfg] The communication connection to the DriveLogix controller has Configured with Par 387 [Lgx Timeout Cnfg] timed out. The DriveLogix controller has closed the Controller to Verify drive is present in I/O Drive connection. Configured with Par 388 [Lgx Closed Cnfg]
4-10
Troubleshooting
No. Name 64 Logix Link Chng 65 HiHp In PhaseLs
66
HiHp Bus Com Dly
67
HiHp Bus Link Ls
68
HiHp Bus CRC Er
Type(1) Description Action A required link in the Controller to Drive Communication Format Clear fault has been modified. Configured with Par 389 [Lgx LinkChngCnfg] (High Horse Power Only) 1. Check for voltage on each AC input phase. AC Input Phase Loss - the AC input phase voltage has fallen. 2. Check the status of each external AC input fuse. Configured with Par 370 [HiHp InPhsLs Cfg] Check the communication bus lines - 10 pin (High Horse Power Only) Bus Communication Time Delay - the communication bus has connector on the Main Control Board, High Horse Power Fiber Optic Interface board, and delayed feedback, or bad communication quality. fiber connections. (High Horse Power Only) Check the communication bus lines - 10 pin Bus Communication Link Loss - bus communication between connector on the Main Control Board, High the High Power Fiber Optic Interface circuit board and the Horse Power Fiber Optic Interface board, and Voltage Feedback circuit board has stopped. fiber connections. (High Horse Power Only) Check the communication bus lines - 10 pin Bus Communication CRC Error - too many Cycling Ring connector on the Main Control Board, High Checksum (CRC) errors have occurred in the communication Horse Power Fiber Optic Interface board, and bus. fiber connections. A fast power cycle may cause the 700S Main Control Board to attempt to communicate with the ASIC Board before the ASIC Board is energized. (High Horse Power Only) Bus Communication Watchdog Error - no message (packets) came through in the communication bus -a watchdog error was detected. (High Horse Power Only) Fan Feedback Loss - an inverter cooling fan did not send active feedback, or did not work.
69
HiHp Bus WtchDog
70
HiHp Fan Fdbk Ls
Check the communication bus lines - 10 pin connector on the Main Control Board, High Horse Power Fiber Optic Interface board, and fiber connections. 1. Check the communication bus lines - 10 pin connector on the Main Control Board, High Horse Power Fiber Optic Interface board, and fiber connections. 2. Check the inverter cooling fans. Reduce mechanical load.
71
HiHp Drv OvrLoad
72
HiHp PwrBd PrcEr
73
HiHp PrChrg Cntc
(High Horse Power Only) Drive Overload - the drive's operating point has exceeded the intermittent current rating and a foldback to the continuous rating in Par 400 [Rated Amps] has occurred. (High Horse Power Only) Power Board Processor Error - a processor on the High Power Fiber Optic Interface circuit board has detected a self diagnostic problem. (High Horse Power Only) Precharge Contactor Fault - the precharge contactor did not send back the active feedback.
Replace the High Power Fiber Optic Interface circuit board.
If the drive is an AC input model, check the precharge resistor and contactor. If the drive is a DC input model, check a jumper for precharge bypass switch on the High Power Fiber Optic Interface circuit board. Cycle power. Check the communication bus lines - 10 pin connector on the Main Control Board, High Horse Power Fiber Optic Interface board, and fiber connections. Lower the ambient temperature.
74
HiHp PwrEE Error
(High Horse Power Only) Power EEPROM Error - the Cycling Ring Checksum (CRC) of the data stored in the High Power Fiber Optic Interface circuit board EEPROM does not match the stored CRC.
75
HiHP PwrBd Otemp
76
HiHP HardwareVer
77
HiHP CurrUnblnce
(High Horse Power Only) Power Board Over Temperature - the temperature of the High Power Fiber Optic Interface circuit board has exceeded 85 C. (High Horse Power Star-coupler Frame 12 Only) Check the version of each inverter (left and The left and right side inverter units have different current right units), then replace the unit. ratings, or the ASIC board on the power-board is not functioning. (High Horse Power Star-coupler Frame 12 Only) Check motor wiring for each unit. The output current between the left and right side inverter units are unbalanced (20% of current feedback rating, e.g. 184A = 920A * 0.2).
Troubleshooting
4-11
No. Name 78 HiHP VoltUnblnce
79
HiHP Bus Data
Type(1) Description (High Horse Power Star-coupler Frame 12 Only) The bus voltage for the left and right side inverter units is unbalanced (6% of normal bus voltage, e.g. 41Vdc = 675Vdc * 0.06). (High Horse Power Star-coupler Frame12 Only) Communication Bus data are mismatched between left side unit and right side unit.
Action Check input power and wiring for each unit.
81
+ Soft Over Trvl
82
- Soft Over Trvl
83
+ Hard Over Trvl
84
- Hard Over Trvl
85 86
Position Error Drive Homing
88 92 93
Stahl Optics Ride Thru +/- 12volt Power Alarm Analog In 1 Loss
94
95
Analog In 2 Loss
96
Analog In 3 Loss
129 130 131 132

(1)
Faults Cleared Fault Q Cleared Alarm Cleared Alarm Q Cleared
* * * *
Configured with Par 399 [Position ErrCnfg] When the drive is in Drive Homing mode (Par 740 / bit 24 or bit Check Par 740 / bit14 Find Home or bit 27 27 is On), the Drive Homing Alarm triggers and the drive moves Return Home. to a home position automatically. Linear Stahl Encoder detected a fault. Par 291 [Lin1Stahl Reconnect encoder or replace encoder. Status] shows the details of the fault. Reconnect option feedback card. Check the AC input voltage and DC bus The bus voltage has dropped to the Ride-Through level voltage. specified in Par 408 [Power Loss Level]. The12V DC control voltage is outside the tolerance range (Alarm). The positive voltage power exceeds +15.50 V DC. The negative voltage power exceeds -15.50V DC. Analog Input channel 1 is lost. For configuration of Analog Input Check condition of Analog Input channel 1. channel 1, see Par 1093 [Anlg In1LossCnfg]. Change configuration for parameter 1093 [Anlg In1LossCnfg]. Analog Input channel 2 is lost. For configuration of Analog Input Check condition of Analog Input channel 2. channel 2, see Par 1094 [Anlg In2LossCnfg]. Change configuration for parameter 1094 [Anlg In2LossCnfg]. Analog Input channel 3 is lost. For configuration of Analog Input Check condition of Analog Input channel 3. channel 3, see Par 1095 [Anlg In3LossCnfg]. Change configuration for parameter 1095 [Anlg In3LossCnfg]. Indicates that all faults have been cleared. *Informational only. Indicates that the fault queue has been cleared. *Informational only. Indicates that all alarms have been cleared. *Informational only. indicates that the alarm queue has been cleared. *Informational only.
(Motion Only) Position feedback exceeds the maximum positive travel setting, Par 694 [Motn Mx Pos Trvl]. (Motion Only) Position feedback, exceeds the maximum negative travel setting, Par 695 [Motn Mx Neg Trvl]. (Motion Only) Signal for the hardware positive over travel appears on a digital input. (Motion Only) Signal for the hardware negative over travel appears on a digital input. (Motion Only) Par 769 [Position Error] exceeded Par 696 [Motn PositErrTol].
Check communication bus lines - 10 pin connector on Main Control Board, High Horse Power Fiber Optic Interface board and fiber connections. Configured with Par 395 [+Sft OvrTrvlCnfg]
Configured with Par 396 [-Sft OvrTrvlCnfg]
Configured with Par 397 [+Hrd OvrTrvlCnfg]
Configured with Par 398 [-Hrd OvrTrvlCnfg]
Verify the value in Par 696 [Motn PositErrTol].
Refer to Table 4.C on page 4-4 for Fault Type Descriptions.
4-12
Troubleshooting
Table 4.E Fault Description Cross Reference

Fault +/- 12volt Power Alarm +/- 15volt Power + Hard Over Trvl - Hard Over Trvl + Soft Over Trvl - Soft Over Trvl Abs Ovespd Det Alarm Cleared Alarm Q Cleared Analog In 1 Loss Analog In 2 Loss Analog In 3 Loss Brake OL Trip DC Bus Overvolt DC Bus Undervolt DPI Loss Port 1 DPI Loss Port 2 DPI Loss Port 3 DPI Loss Port 4 DPI Loss Port 5 DPI Loss Port 6 Drive Homing Drive Power Loss DSP Device Error DSP Memory Error Enable Health Encoder 0 Loss Encoder 1 Loss Ext Fault Input Faults Cleared Fault Q Cleared Ground Fault HiHp Bus Com Dly HiHp Bus CRC Er HiHP Bus Data HiHp Bus Link Ls HiHp Bus WtchDog HiHP CurrUnblnce HiHp Drv OvrLoad HiHp Fan Fdbk Ls HiHP HardwareVer HiHp In PhaseLs HiHp PrChrg Cntc HiHP PwrBd Otemp HiHp PwrBd PrcEr HiHp PwrEE Error No. 93 33 83 84 81 82 1 131 132 94 95 96 38 24 42 49 50 51 52 53 54 83 10 20 19 45 3 4 18 129 130 26 66 68 79 67 69 77 71 70 76 65 73 75 72 74 Fault HiHP VoltUnblnce Inst Overcurrent Interp Out Synch Inv OLoad Pend Inv OLoad Trip Inv OTemp Pend Inv OTemp Trip Inv Trans Desat Logix Closed Logix Link Chng Logix Out of Run Logix Timeout MC CML Task Fail MC Commissn Fail MC Firmware Motor OLoad Pend Motor OLoad Trip Motor Stalled Net Loss DPI P1 Net Loss DPI P2 Net Loss DPI P3 Net Loss DPI P4 Net Loss DPI P5 Net Loss DPI P6 No Ctrl Device Opt Port 0 Loss Opt Port 1 Loss Over Frequency Fault Parameter Chksum Params Defaulted Position Error PowerEE CRC Fail Precharge Error PWM Asynch PWM Signal short Ridethru Timeout Ride Thru Runtime Data Rst SLink Comm Fail SLink HW Fail SLink Mult Oflow Stahl Optics VoltageFdbk Loss VPL/MC Comm Fail Vref Decel Fail No. 78 27 46 16 17 14 15 25 63 64 61 62 47 23 30 12 11 13 55 56 57 58 59 60 48 5 6 22 35 7 85 39 31 32 29 41 92 44 9 8 40 88 43 28 2
Appendix
Chapter Objectives
For Information on Specifications DPI Communication Configurations Output Devices Drive Fuse & Circuit Breaker Ratings List of Motors with Compatible Thermistor Ratings Auxiliary Power Supply Drive Frame Size to HP/kW Ratings Cross Reference Approximate Dimensions See Page... A-1 A-5 A-6 A-17 A-31 A-32 A-33 A-34
Specifications
Specification Category
Protection Drive Frames 9 & up 600V / 600V 690V (frames (frames 200-208V 240V 380/400V 480V 0-4) 5&6) 380/400V 480V 500V 600V 690V AC Input Overvoltage Trip: 300VAC 300VAC 600VAC 600VAC 863VAC 863VAC 675VAC 675V AC 675V AC 889VAC 889VAC Bus Overvoltage Trip: 405VDC 405VDC 810VDC 810VDC 1164VDC 1164VDC 911VDC 911VDC 911VDC 1200VDC 1200VDC Bus Undervoltage Trip: Adjustable Adjustable Nominal Bus Voltage: 281VDC 324VDC 540VDC 648VDC 810VDC 931VDC 540VDC 648VDC 645VDC 810VDC 931VDC All Drives Heat Sink Thermistor: Monitored by microprocessor overtemp trip Monitored by microprocessor overtemp trip Drive Overcurrent Trip Calculated value, 105% of motor rated to 200% of drive rated Calculated value, 105% of motor rated to 200% of drive rated Software Current Limit: Hardware Current Limit: 105% of 3 sec. rating (158%-210%) 360% of rated Heavy Duty current (typical) Instantaneous Current 143% of 3 sec rating (215%-287%) Limit: Line Transients: Up to 6000 volts peak per IEEE C62.41-1991 up to 6000 volts peak per IEEE C62.41-1991 Control Logic Noise Showering arc transients up to 1500V peak Showering arc transients up to 1500V peak Immunity: Power Ride-Thru: 15 milliseconds at full load 15 milliseconds at full load Logic Control Ride-Thru 0.25 sec., drive not running 0.25 seconds, drive not running Ground Fault Trip: Phase-to-ground on drive output Phase-to-ground on drive output Short Circuit Trip: Phase-to-phase on drive output Phase-to-phase on drive output Frames 1-6 (690V Drive frames 5 & 6 only)
A-2
Agency Certification Frames 1-6 (690V Drive frames 5 & 6 only) The drive is designed to meet applicable requirements of the following codes/standards: IEC 61800-2 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems General requirements IEC 61800-5-1 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Safety requirements NFPA 70 US National Electric Code NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment UL and cUL Listed to UL508C and CAN/CSA - 22.2 No. 14-95 Frames 9 & up The drive is designed to meet applicable requirements of the following codes/standards: IEC 61800-2 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems General requirements IEC 61800-5-1 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Safety requirements NFPA 70 - US National Electrical Code UL and cUL Listed to UL508C and CAN/CSA - 22.2 No. 14-95
Marked for all applicable European Directives EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) Emissions EN 61800-3 Adjustable Speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 Immunity EN 61800-3 Second Environment, Restricted Distribution Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC) EN 50178 Electronic Equipment for use in Power Installations NA
N223
II 2 G/D
Marked for all applicable European Directives EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) Emissions EN 61800-3 Adjustable Speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC) EN 50178 Electronic Equipment for use in Power Installations Certified to AS/NZS, 1997 Group 1, Class A.
TUV Rheinland Product Safety
..
Production inspected
Certified to ATEX directive 94/9/EC. Group II Category (2) GD Applications with ATEX Approved Motors. Refer to Appendix J for more information. TUV Rheinland (applies to frames 1 - 6, 200/400V, and frames 5 & 6, 690V only) TUV Functional Safety Report only for frames 1 - 4, 600V (no FS mark on the label)
Certified to ATEX directive 94/9/EC. Group II Category (2) GD Applications with ATEX Approved Motors. Refer to Appendix J for more information. TUV functional safety report only (no FS mark on the label)
EN 50178
Bauart geprft
Functional
TUV Rheinland
..
Type approved
Environment Altitude: Surrounding Air Temperature without Derating: Open Type: IP20: NEMA/UL Type 1: IP56, NEMA/UL Type 4X:
0 to 50 C (32 to 122 F) 0 to 50 C (32 to 122 F) 0 to 40 C (32 to 104 F) 0 to 40 C (32 to 104 F) Note: Frames 9 & 10 are rated 0 to 40 C (32 to 104 F) surrounding air. Storage Temperature (all -40 to 70 C (-40 to 158 F) const.): Relative Humidity: 5 to 95% non-condensing Shock: 10G peak for 11 ms duration ( 1.0 ms) Vibration: 0.152 mm (0.006 in.) displacement, 1G peak, 5.5 Hz Sound
Atmosphere
W
Safety
1000 m (3300 ft.) max. without derating
1000 m (3300 ft) max. without derating Based on drive rating.
40 to 70 C (40 to 158 F)
5 to 95% non-condensing 15G peak for 11ms duration (1.0 ms) 2 mm (0.0787 in.) displacement, 1G peak EN50178 / EN60068-2-6 Frame Fan Sound Note: Sound pressure level is Frame Sound Background Notes: Sound pressure Speed Level measured at 2 meters. Level Noise Level level is measured at 1 meter. All devices 1 30 CFM 59 dB 9 78 49 measured are 400V 2 50 CFM 57 dB 10 77 49 IP21 and in power up 3 120 CFM 61 dB 13 76 46 mode. Refer to 4 190 CFM 59 dB PFLEX-IN006, 5 200 CFM 71 dB PowerFlex 700H/S 6 300 CFM 72 dB Installation Manual for Fan Speed information. Important: Drive must not be installed in an area where the Important: Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas, vapors or ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas, vapors or dust. If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time, it dust. If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time, it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere. corrosive atmosphere.
A-3
Electrical AC Input Voltage Tolerance: Frequency Tolerance: Input Phases: DC Input Voltage Tolerance Displacement Power Factor: Efficiency: Max. Short Circuit Current Rating: Using Recommended Fuse or Circuit Breaker Type Maximum Drive to Motor Power Ratio Method Induction Motor: Brushless Motor: Frames 1-6 (690V Drive frames 5 & 6 only) See Input Voltage Range/Tolerance on page C-1 for Full Power and Operating Range 47-63 Hz Three-phase input provides full rating for all drives. Single-phase operation provides 50% of rated current. +/- 10% of Nominal Bus Voltage (above) 0.98 across speed range 97.5% at rated amps, nominal line volts. Maximum short circuit current rating to match specified fuse/ circuit breaker capability. 200,000 Amps The drive to motor rating cannot exceed a 2:1 ratio Frames 9 & up See Input Voltage Range/Tolerance on page C-1 for Full Power and Operating Range 47-63 Hz. Three-phase input provides full rating for all drives. Single-phase operation provides 20% of rated current. +/- 10% of Nominal Bus Voltage (above) 0.98 across speed range 97.5% at rated amps, nominal line volts. 200,000 Amps
The drive to motor rating cannot exceed a 2:1 ratio
Control
Sine coded PWM with programmable carrier frequency, Indirect Self-Organized, Field-Oriented Control, Current-regulated. Ratings apply to all drives. Refer to the PowerFlex 700S Phase II Control Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM003, for derating guidelines. The drive can be supplied as 6 pulse or 12 pulse in a configured package. Carrier Frequency Drive rating: 4 kHz Settings: 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 kHz (6 kHz is for V/Hz operation only) Output Voltage Range: 0 to rated motor voltage Output Frequency Range: 0 400 Hz
Sine coded PWM with programmable carrier frequency, Indirect Self-Organized, Field-Oriented Control, Current-regulated. Ratings apply to all drives. Refer to the PowerFlex 700S Phase II Control Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM003, for derating guidelines. The drive can be supplied as 6 pulse or 12 pulse in a configured package. Drive rating: 2 kHz Settings: 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 kHz (6 kHz is for V/Hz operation only) 0 to rated motor voltage 0 400 Hz Note: For output frequencies above 320 - 400 Hz consult the factory. Speed Control Speed regulation - without feedback Speed regulation - without feedback 0.1% of base speed across 120:1 speed range 0.1% of base speed across 120:1 speed range 120:1 operating range 120:1 operating range 50 rad/sec bandwidth 50 rad/sec bandwidth Speed regulation - with feedback Speed regulation - with feedback 0.001% of base speed across 120:1 speed range 0.001% of base speed across 120:1 speed range 1000:1 operating range 1000:1 operating range 744 rad/sec bandwidth 300 rad/sec bandwidth Torque Regulation Torque Regulation - without feedback Torque Regulation - without feedback +/-5%, 600 rad/sec bandwidth +/-10%, 600 rad/sec bandwidth Torque Regulation - with feedback Torque Regulation - with feedback +/-2%, 2500 rad/sec bandwidth +/-5%, 2500 rad/sec bandwidth Selectable Motor Control: Field Oriented Control with and without a feedback device and Field Oriented Control with and without a feedback device and permanent magnet motor control permanent magnet motor control Stop Modes: Multiple programmable stop modes including Ramp, Coast and Multiple programmable stop modes including Ramp, Coast and Current Limit Current Limit Accel/Decel Independently programmable accel and decel times adjustable Independently programmable accel and decel times adjustable from 0 to 6553.5 in 0.1 second increments. from 0 to 6553.5 in 0.1 second increments. S-Curve Time Adjustable from 0.5 to 4.0 seconds Adjustable from 0.5 to 4.0 seconds Intermittent Overload: 110% Overload capability for up to 1 minute 110% Overload capability for up to 1 minute 150% Overload capability for up to 3 seconds 150% Overload capability for up to 3 seconds Current Limit Capability: Independent Motoring and Regenerative Power Limits Independent Motoring and Regenerative Power Limits programmable to 800% of rated output current programmable to 800% of rated output current Electronic Motor Overload Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response. Investigated Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response. Investigated Protection by U.L. to comply with N.E.C. Article 430 U.L. File E59272, by U.L. to comply with N.E.C. Article 430 U.L. File E59272, volume 12. volume 12.
A-4
Feedback Encoder Inputs (2): Encoder PPR Rating: Frames 1-6 (690V Drive frames 5 & 6 only) Frames 9 & up Dual Channel Plus Marker, Isolated with differential transmitter Dual Channel Plus Marker, Isolated with differential transmitter Output (Line Drive) Incremental, Dual Channel Quadrature type Output (Line Drive) Incremental, Dual Channel Quadrature type Encoder PPR ratings are limited to the values specified in the table below:
PPR Rating Values:
n= 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
2n = 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384
x mod 75 75 150 300 600 1200 2400 ----------
mod 125 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 ----------
mod 225 225 450 900 1800 3600 7200 ----------
mod 375 375 750 1500 3000 6000 12000 ----------
mod 625 625 1250 2500 5000 10000 20000 ----------
mod1125 1125 2250 4500 9000 18000 -----------
Encoder Voltage Supply:
DriveLogix
Hi-Resolution Feedback Option card obtains the following information via the Hiperface RS-485 interface shortly after power-up: Address, Command Number, Mode, Number of turns, Number of Sine/Cos cycles, Checksum Customer-I/O Plug (P1) Allen-Bradley PN: S94262912 - Hi Res: Weidmuller PN: BL3.50/90/12BK Resolver Option: Excitation Frequency: 2400 Hz Excitation Voltage: 4.25-26 Vrms Operating Frequency 1 - 10 kHz Range: Resolver Feedback 2V 300 mV Voltage: Maximum Cable 304.8 meters (1000 ft.) Length: User Available 1.5 megabytes MemoryBase: Battery: 1769-BA 0.59g lithium Serial Cable: 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC 1756-CP3 directly to controller 1747-CP3 directly to controller category 3 (2) Compact I/O Connection: Up to (16) modules Cable: 20D-DL2-CL3 20D-DL2-CR3
Maximum Input Frequency: Stegmann Option: Encoder Voltage Supply: Hi-Resolution Feedback: Maximum Cable Length: RS-485 Interface:
5V DC or 12 V DC 320 mA/channel 5V DC minimum high state voltage of 3.0V DC, maximum low state voltage at 0.4V DC 12 V DC minimum high state voltage of 7.0V DC, maximum low state voltage of 0.4V DC 400 kHz 11.5V DC @ 130 mA Sine/Cosine 1V P-P Offset 2.5 182 m (600 ft.)
5V DC or 12 V DC 320 mA/channel 5V DC minimum high state voltage of 3.0V DC, maximum low state voltage at 0.4V DC 12 V DC minimum high state voltage of 7.0V DC, maximum low state voltage of 0.4V DC 400 kHz 11.5V DC @ 130 mA Sine/Cosine 1V P-P Offset 2.5 182 m (600 ft.) Hi-Resolution Feedback Option card obtains the following information via the Hiperface RS-485 interface shortly after power-up: Address, Command Number, Mode, Number of turns, Number of Sine/Cos cycles, Checksum Allen-Bradley PN: S94262912 Weidmuller PN: BL3.50/90/12BK 2400 Hz 4.25-26 Vrms 1 - 10 kHz 2V 300 mV 304.8 meters (1000 ft.) 1.5 megabytes 1769-BA 0.59g lithium 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC 1756-CP3 directly to controller 1747-CP3 directly to controller category 3 (2) Up to (16) modules 20D-DL2-CL3 20D-DL2-CR3
A-5
DPI Communication Configurations
Typical Programmable Controller Configurations

Important: If programs are written that continuously write information to the drive, care must be taken to properly format the block transfer. If attribute 10 is selected for the block transfer, values will be written only to RAM and will not be saved by the drive. This is the preferred attribute for continuous transfers. If attribute 9 is selected, each program scan will complete a write to the drives non-volatile memory (EEprom). Since the EEprom has a fixed number of allowed writes, continuous block transfers will quickly damage the EEprom. Do Not assign attribute 9 to continuous block transfers. Refer to the individual communications adapter User Manual for additional details.
Logic Command Word

Logic Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Command Description x Normal 0 = Not Normal Stop Stop 1 = Normal Stop x Start (1) 0 = Not Start 1 = Start x Jog 1 0 = Not Jog using [Jog Speed 1] 1 = Jog using [Jog Speed 1] x Clear 0 = Not Clear Fault Fault(2) 1 = Clear Fault x x Unipolar 00 = No Command Direction 01 = Forward Command 10 = Reverse Command 11 = Hold Direction Control x Reserved x Jog 2 0 = Not Jog using [Jog Speed 2] 1 = Jog using [Jog Speed 2] x Current 0 = Not Current Limit Stop Limit Stop 1 = Current Limit Stop x Coast Stop 0 = Not Coast to Stop 1 = Coast to Stop x Reserved x Reserved x Spd Ref Sel0 Bits x Spd Ref 14 13 12 Sel1 0 0 0 = Spd Ref A x Spd Ref 0 0 1 = Spd Ref B Sel2 0 1 0 = Preset 2 0 1 1 = Ref. 3 (Preset 3) 1 0 0 = Ref. 4 (Preset 4) 1 0 1 = Ref. 5 (Preset 5) 1 1 0 = Ref. 6 (Preset 6) 1 1 1 = Ref. 7 (Preset 7)
x
(1) (2)
Reserved
A Not Stop condition (logic bit 0 = 0, logic bit 8 = 0, and logic bit 9 = 0) must first be present before a 1 = Start condition will start the drive. To perform this command, the value must switch from 0 to 1.
A-6
Logic Status Word

Logic Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Status x Active x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
(1)
Description 0 = Not Active 1 = Active Running 0 = Not Running 1 = Running Command 0 = Reverse Direction 1 = Forward Actual 0 = Reverse Direction 1 = Forward Accel 0 = Not Accelerating 1 = Accelerating Decel 0 = Not Decelerating 1 = Decelerating Jogging 0 = Not Jogging 1 = Jogging Fault 0 = No Fault 1 = Fault Alarm 0 = No Alarm 1 = Alarm Flash Mode 0 = Not in Flash Mode 1 = In Flash Mode Run Ready 0 = Not Ready to Run 1 = Ready to Run At Limit(1) 0 = Not At Limit 1 = At Limit Tach Loss 0 = Not Tach Loss Sw Sw 1 = Tach Loss Sw At Zero Spd 0 = Not At Zero Speed 1 = At Zero Speed At Setpt 0 = Not At Setpoint Speed Spd 1= At Setpoint Speed Enable 0 = Not Enabled 1 = Enabled
See Parameter 304 - [Limit Status] in the PowerFlex 700S drive for a description of the limit status conditions.
DPI Device Limitations

PowerFlex 700S Drives use a 450mA device on the 12V DPI power supply. Due to the typical load of a external DPI device of 140mA, there is a three DPI device limit.
Output Devices
Common mode cores are internal to the drive. For information on output devices such as output contactors, cable terminators and output reactors refer to the PowerFlex Reference Manual, Vol. 2.
A-7
Drive Ratings
The tables on the following pages provide drive ratings (including continuous, 1 minute and 3 seconds), PWM frequency ratings, ambient operating temperatures and watts loss information.
Table A.A 208 Volt AC Input Frames 1-6 Drive Ratings
Drive Catalog Number 20DB4P2 20DB6P8 20DB9P6 20DB015 20DB022 20DB028 20DB042 20DB052 20DB070 20DB080 20DB104 20DB130 20DB154 20DB192 20DB260
(1)
Frame
kW Rating
ND HD
PWM Freq.
kHz
Temp.(1)
C
Input Ratings
Amps kVA
Output Amps
Cont. 1 Min. 3 Sec.
1 1 1 1 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 6
0.75 1.5 2.2 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 66
0.55 1.1 1.5 3.0 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 45 50
3.7 6.8 9.5 15.7 23.0 29.6 44.5 51.5 72 84.7 113 84.7 141 113 167 141 208 167 255 199
1.3 2.4 3.4 5.7 8.3 10.7 16.0 18.6 25.9 30.5 40.7 30.5 44.1 35.3 60.1 50.9 75.0 60.1 96.7 71.7
4.8 7.8 11 17.5 25.3 32.2 48.3 56 78.2 92 120 92 130 104 177 150 221 177 260 205
5.6 10.4 12.1 19.3 27.8 38 53.1 64 93.1 117.3 132 138 143 156 195 225 243 266 286 305
7.0 13.8 17 26.3 38 50.6 72.5 86 124.2 156.4 175 175 175 175 266 300 308 308 390 410
The temperature rating listed for frame size 1-4 drives is for NEMA open types only. The adhesive tape label must be removed in order to operate at this temperature, otherwise the ambient operating temperature of these drives is 40 C.
Table A.B 240 Volt AC Input Frames 1 - 6 Drive Ratings

Drive Catalog Number 20DB4P2 20DB6P8 20DB9P6 20DB015 20DB022 20DB028 20DB042 20DB052 20DB070 20DB080 20DB104 20DB130 20DB154 20DB192 20DB260
(1)
Frame
HP Rating
ND HD
PWM Freq.
kHz
Temp.(1)
C
Input Ratings
Amps kVA
Output Amps
Cont. 1 Min. 3 Sec.
1 1 1 1 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 6
1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100
0.75 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 45 50
3.3 5.9 8.3 13.7 19.9 25.7 38.5 47.7 64.2 73.2 98 73 122 98 145 122 180 145 233 169
1.4 2.4 3.4 5.7 8.3 10.7 16.0 19.8 26.7 30.5 40.6 30.5 50.7 40.6 60.1 50.7 74.9 60.1 96.8 74.9
4.2 6.8 9.6 15.3 22 28 42 52 70 80 104 80 130 104 154 130 192 154 260 205
4.8 9 10.6 16.8 24.2 33 46.2 63 78 105 115 120 143 156 169 195 211 231 286 305
6.4 12 14.4 23 33 44 63 80 105 140 175 160 175 175 231 260 288 308 390 410
A-8
Table A.C 400 Volt AC Input Frames 1 - 6 Drive Ratings

Frame Drive Catalog Number 20DC2P1 20DC3P5 20DC5P0 20DC8P7 20DC011 20DC015 20DC022 20DC030 20DC037 20DC043 20DC056 20DC072 20DC085 (1) 20DC105 20DC125 20DC140 20DC170 20DC205 (2) 20DC260
(1) (2) (3)
kW Rating
ND HD
PWM Freq.
kHz
Temp.(3)
C
Input Ratings
Amps kVA
Output Amps
Cont. 1 Min. 3 Sec.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 5 5 5 6 6 6
0.75 1.5 2.2 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 55 75 90 110 132
0.55 1.1 1.5 3.0 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 45 55 75 90 110
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 45 50 50 50(4) 50(4) 50(4) 50(4) 50(4) 50(4) 50(4) 50(4) 40(4) 40(4) 40(4) 40(4)
1.8 3.2 4.6 7.9 10.8 14.4 20.6 28.4 35.0 40.7 53 68.9 81.4 68.9 100.5 81.4 121.1 101 135.6 121 164.6 136 198.5 164 254.7 199
1.3 2.2 3.2 5.5 7.5 10.0 14.3 19.7 24.3 28.2 36.7 47.8 56.4 47.8 69.6 56.4 83.9 63.7 94 69.6 114 94 138 114 166 138
2.1 3.5 5.0 8.7 11.5 15.4 22 30 37 43 56 72 85 72 105 85 125 96 140 105 170 140 205 170 260 205
2.4 4.5 5.5 9.9 13 17.2 24.2 33 45 56 64 84 94 108 116 128 138 144 154 158 187 210 220 255 286 308
3.2 6.0 7.5 13.2 17.4 23.1 33 45 60 74 86 112 128 144 158 170 163 168 210 210 255 280 289 313 390 410
(4)
20DC085 current rating is limited to 45 degrees C ambient. 20DC205 current rating is limited to 40 degrees C ambient. The temperature rating listed for frame size 1-4 drives is for NEMA open types only. The adhesive tape label must be removed in order to operate at this temperature, otherwise the ambient operating temperature of these drives is 40 C. UL Type 12/IP54 (flange mount) heatsink ambient temperature rating is 40 C/ambient of unprotected drive portion (inside enclosure) is 55 C. The ambient temperature for the UL Type 12/IP54 standalone drives is 40 C.
Table A.D 400 Volt AC Input Frames 9 - 13 Drive Ratings

Frame Drive Catalog Number 20DC261 9 20DC300 20DC385 20DC460 20DC500 20DC590 20DC650 20DC730 20DC820 20DC920 9 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 kW Rating
ND HD
PWM Freq.
kHz
Temp.
C
Input Ratings
Amps
Output Amps
Cont. 1 Min. 3 Sec.
Watts Loss
Watts
132 160 200 250 250 315 355 400 450 500 -
110 132 160 200 250 250 315 355 400 450
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
263 207 302 247 388 302 463 388 504 423 594 524 655 594 735 655 826 735 927 826
261 205 300 245 385 300 460 385 500 420 590 520 650 590 730 650 820 730 920 820
287 308 330 368 424 450 506 578 550 630 649 780 715 885 803 975 902 1095 1012 1230
410 410 450 490 600 600 770 770 750 840 956 956 1062 1062 1095 1170 1230 1314 1380 1476
2700 2700 3100 3100 4320 4320 5335 5335 5921 5921 6620 6620 7538 7538 8312 8312 9201 9201 10670 10670
A-9
Frame
Drive Catalog Number 20DC1K0 12 20DC1K1 20DC1K3 20DC1K4
kW Rating
ND HD
PWM Freq.
kHz
Temp.
C
Input Ratings
Amps
Output Amps
Cont. 1 Min. 3 Sec.
Watts Loss
Watts
13 13 13
560 630 710 800 -
500 560 630 710
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
40 35 40 40 40 40 40 40
1038 927 1158 1038 1310 1158 1461 1209
1030 920 1150 1030 1300 1150 1450 1200
1133 1370 1265 1545 1430 1725 1595 1800
1555 1600 1620 1620 2079 2079 2175 2400
11729 11729 13801 13801 15077 15077 16511 16511
Table A.E 480 Volt AC Input Frames 1 - 6 Drive Ratings

Drive Catalog Number 20DD2P1 20DD3P4 20DD5P0 20DD8P0 20DD011 20DD014 20DD022 20DD027 20DD034 20DD040 20DD052 20DD065 20DD077 20DD096 20DD125 20DD156 20DD180 20DD248
(1)
Frame
HP Rating
ND HD
PWM Freq.
kHz
Temp.(1)
C
Input Ratings
Amps kVA
Output Amps
Cont. 1 Min. 3 Sec.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 5 5 6 6 6
1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200
0.75 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50(2) 50(2) 50(2) 50(2) 50(2) 50(2) 50(2) 50(2) 40(2) 40(2)
1.6 2.6 3.9 6.9 9.5 12.5 19.9 24.8 31.2 36.7 47.7 59.6 72.3 59.6 90.1 72.3 117 90.1 146.5 131 169 147 232.8 169
1.4 2.2 3.2 5.7 7.9 10.4 16.6 20.6 25.9 30.5 39.7 49.6 60.1 49.6 74.9 60.1 97.6 74.9 121.7 97.6 140.5 121.7 188 140.5
2.1 3.4 5.0 8.0 11 14 22 27 34 40 52 65 77 65 96 77 125 96 156 125 180 156 248 180
2.4 4.5 5.5 8.8 12.1 16.5 24.2 33 40.5 51 60 78 85 98 106 116 138 144 172 188 198 234 273 270
3.2 6.0 7.5 12 16.5 22 33 44 54 68 80 104 116 130 144 154 163 168 234 250 270 312 372 360
Watts Loss Watts 103 117 135 210 243 271 389 467 519 543 708 767 780 780 1157 1157 1529 1529 1895 1895 2254 2254
(2)
The temperature rating listed for frame size 1-4 drives is for NEMA open types only. The adhesive tape label must be removed in order to operate at this temperature, otherwise the ambient operating temperature of these drives is 40 C. UL Type 12/IP54 (flange mount) heatsink ambient temperature rating is 40 C/ambient of unprotected drive portion (inside enclosure) is 55 C. The ambient temperature for the UL Type 12/IP54 standalone drives is 40 C.
Table A.F 480 Volt AC Input Frames 9 - 13 Drive Ratings

Drive Catalog Number 20DD261 20DD300 20DD385 20DD460 20DD500 Frame HP Rating
ND HD
PWM Freq.
kHz
Temp.
C
Input Ratings
Amps
Output Amps
Cont. 1 Min. 3 Sec.
Watts Loss
Watts
200 9 250 10 300 10 350 10 450 -
150 200 250 300 350
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
252 207 290 247 372 302 444 388 483 423
261 205 300 245 385 300 460 385 500 420
287 308 330 368 424 450 506 578 550 630
410 410 450 490 600 600 770 770 750 840
2700 2700 3100 3100 4320 4320 5335 5335 5921 5921
A-10
Drive Catalog Number 20DD590 20DD650 20DD730 20DD820 20DD920 20DD1K0 20DD1K1 20DD1K3 20DD1K4
Frame
HP Rating
ND HD
PWM Freq.
kHz
Temp.
C
Input Ratings
Amps
Output Amps
Cont. 1 Min. 3 Sec.
Watts Loss
Watts
11 500 11 500 11 600 12 700 12 800 12 900 13 1000 13 1200 13 1250 -
450 500 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1000
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 35 40 40 40 40 40 40
570 524 628 594 705 655 792 735 888 826 994 927 1110 994 1255 1110 1400 1158
590 520 650 590 730 650 820 730 920 820 1030 920 1150 1030 1300 1150 1450 1200
649 780 715 885 803 975 902 1095 1012 1230 1133 1370 1265 1545 1430 1725 1595 1800
956 956 1062 1062 1095 1170 1230 1314 1380 1476 1555 1600 1620 1620 2079 2079 2175 2400
6620 6620 7538 7538 8312 8312 9201 9201 10670 10670 11729 11729 13801 13801 15077 15077 16511 16511
Table A.G 600 Volt AC Input Frames 1 - 6 Drive Ratings

Frame Drive Catalog Number 20DE1P7 20DE2P7 20DE3P9 20DE6P1 20DE9P0 20DE011 20DE017 20DE022 20DE027 20DE032 20DE041 20DE052 20DE062 20DE077 20DE099 20DE125 20DE144
(1)
HP Rating
ND HD
PWM Freq.
kHz
Temp.(1)
C
Input Ratings
Amps kVA
Output Amps
Cont. 1 Min. 3 Sec.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 5 5 6 6
1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150
0.75 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 45 45 50(2) 50(2) 50(2) 50(2) 50(2) 50(2) 40(2)
1.3 2.1 3.0 5.3 7.8 9.9 15.4 20.2 24.8 29.4 37.6 47.7 58.2 72.3 58.2 92.9 72.3 117 93 135 117
1.4 2.1 3.1 5.5 8.1 10.2 16.0 21.0 25.7 30.5 39.1 49.6 60.5 75.1 60.5 96.6 75.1 121.6 96.6 140.5 121.6
1.7 2.7 3.9 6.1 9 11 17 22 27 32 41 52 62 77 63 99 77 125 99 144 125
2 3.6 4.3 6.7 9.9 13.5 18.7 25.5 33 40.5 48 61.5 78 85 94 109 116 138 149 158 188
2.6 4.8 5.9 9.2 13.5 18 25.5 34 44 54 64 82 104 116 126 126 138 188 198 216 250
(2)
The temperature rating listed for frame size 1-4 drives is for NEMA open types only. The adhesive tape label must be removed in order to operate at this temperature, otherwise the ambient operating temperature of these drives is 40 C. UL Type 12/IP54 (flange mount) heatsink ambient temperature rating is 40 C/ambient of unprotected drive portion (inside enclosure) is 55 C. The ambient temperature for the UL Type 12/IP54 standalone drives is 40 C.
A-11
Table A.H 600 Volt AC Input Frames 9 - 14 Drive Ratings

Drive Catalog Number 20DE170 20DE208 20DE261 20DE325 20DE385 20DE416 20DE460 20DE502 20DE590 20DE650 20DE750 20DE820(1) 20DE920 20DE1K0 20DE1K1 20DE1K5
(1) (2)
9 9 10 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 12 13 13 13 14
HP Rating ND HD 150 150 200 150 250 200 350 250 400 350 450 350 500 400 500 500 600 500 700 650 800 700 900 700 1000 900 1100 1000 1300 1100 1600 1400
PWM Freq. kHz

(2) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3)
Temp. C 40 40 35 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 35 40 40 40 40 40 35 35 40 40 40 40 35 35 40 40 40 40 35 35 40 40
Input Ratings Amps 164 139 201 164 252 201 314 252 372 314 402 314 444 372 485 444 570 485 628 570 724 628 792 628 888 792 994 888 1139 994 1448 1255
Output Amps Cont. 1 Min. 170 187 144 216 208 230 170 250 261 287 208 312 325 358 261 392 385 424 325 488 416 458 325 488 460 506 385 578 502 552 460 690 590 649 502 753 650 715 590 885 750 825 650 975 820 902 650 975 920 1012 820 1230 1030 1133 920 1380 1180 1298 1030 1463 1500 1650 1300 1950
3 Sec. 245 245 289 289 375 375 470 470 585 585 585 585 693 693 828 828 885 904 1062 1062 1170 1170 1170 1170 1380 1410 1545 1755 1755 1755 2250 2340
Watts Loss Watts 4206 4206 4751 4751 5527 5527 5622 5622 6345 6345 6925 6925 7539 7539 9502 9502 10570 10570 11082 11082 12690 12690 15907 15907 17306 17306 22500 22500
20DE820 drives (ND) are only capable of producing 95% of starting torque under 10 Hz. Rated PWM for 700H control 1.5kHz, Rated PWM for 700S control 2.0kHz.
Table A.I 690 Volt AC Input Frames 5 & 6 Drive Ratings

Drive Catalog Number 20DF052 20DF060 20DF082 20DF098 20DF119 20DF142
(1)
Frame
5 5 5 5 6 6
kW Rating ND HD 45 37.5 55 45 75 55 90 75 110 90 132 110
PWM Freq. kHz 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Frame
Temp.(1) C 50 50 50 50 50 50 40 40 50 50 50 40
Input Ratings Amps kVA 46.9 59.5 40.1 48.0 57.7 68.9 46.9 59.5 79.0 94.4 57.7 68.9 94.7 113 79.0 94.4 115 138 92.9 113 139 165.9 115 137
Output Amps Cont. 1 Min. 52 57 46 69 60 66 52 78 82 90 60 90 98 108 82 123 119 131 98 147 142 156 119 179
3 Sec. 78 92 90 104 123 120 127 140 179 196 213 238
UL Type 12/IP54 (flange mount) heatsink ambient temperature rating is 40 C/ambient of unprotected drive portion (inside enclosure) is 55 C. The ambient temperature for the UL Type 12/IP54 standalone drives is 40 C.
A-12
Table A.J 690 Volt AC Input Frames 9 - 14 Drive Ratings

Drive Catalog Number 20DF170 20DF208 20DF261 20DF325 20DF385 20DF416 20DF460 20DF502 20DF590 20DF650 20DF750 20DF820(1) 20DF920 20DF1K0 20DF1K1 20DF1K5
(1)
9 9 10 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 12 13 13 13 14
kW Rating ND HD 160 132 200 160 250 200 315 250 355 315 400 315 450 355 500 400 560 500 630 560 710 630 800 630 900 800 1000 900 1100 1000 1500 1300
PWM Freq. kHz 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Temp. C 40 40 35 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 35 40 40 40 40 40 35 35 40 40 40 40 35 35 40 40 40 40 35 35 40 40
Input Ratings Amps 171 145 210 171 263 210 327 263 388 327 419 327 463 388 506 463 594 506 655 594 756 655 826 655 927 826 1038 927 1189 1038 1511 1310
Output Amps Cont. 1 Min. 170 187 144 216 208 230 170 250 261 287 208 312 325 358 261 392 385 424 325 488 416 458 325 488 460 506 385 578 502 552 460 690 590 649 502 753 650 715 590 885 750 825 650 975 820 902 650 975 920 1012 820 1230 1030 1133 920 1380 1180 1298 1030 1463 1500 1650 1300 1950
3 Sec. 245 245 289 289 375 375 470 470 585 585 585 585 693 693 828 828 885 904 1062 1062 1170 1170 1170 1170 1380 1410 1545 1755 1755 1755 2250 2340
Watts Loss Watts 4206 4206 4751 4751 5527 5527 5622 5622 6345 6345 6925 6925 7539 7539 9502 9502 10570 10570 11082 11082 12690 12690 15907 15907 17306 17306 22500 22500
20DF820 drives (ND) are only capable of producing 95% of starting torque under 10 Hz.
Table A.K 325 Volt DC Input Frames 1 - 6 Drive Ratings

Drive Catalog Number 20DB015 20DB022 20DB028 20DB042 20DB052 20DB070 20DB080 20DN104(1) 20DN130(1) 20DN154(1) 20DN192(1) 20DN260(1)(2)
(1) (2) (3)
Frame
Frame
HP Rating PWM Freq. Temp.(3) DC Input Ratings ND 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 HD 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 kHz 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 C 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 50 Amps 16 23.3 30 45 55 75.3 85.8 114.1 142.6 169 210.6 272.1
Output Amps(4) Cont. 15.3 22 28 42 52 70 80 104 (80) 130 (104) 154 (130) 192 (154) 260 (205) 1 Min. 16.8 24.2 33 46.2 63 78 105 115 (120) 143 (156) 169 (195) 211 (231) 286 (305) 3 Sec. 23.0 33 44 63 80 105 140 175 (160) 175 (175) 231 (260) 288 (308) 390 (410)
1 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 6
(4)
Catalog number corresponds to output amps for these drives. Drive must be programmed to lower voltage to obtain higher currents shown at right. Catalog number corresponds to drives with precharge only. The temperature rating listed for frame size 1-4 drives is for NEMA open types only. The adhesive tape label must be removed in order to operate at this temperature, otherwise the ambient operating temperature of these drives is 40 C. Frame 5 and 6 drives have dual current ratings; one for normal duty applications, and one for heavy duty applications (in parenthesis). The drive may be operated at either rating.
A-13
Table A.L 540 Volt DC Input Frames 1 - 6 Drive Ratings

Drive Catalog Number 20DC3P5 20DC5P0 20DC8P7 20DC011 20DC015 20DC022 20DC030 20DC037 20DC043 20DC056 20DC072 20DC085 20DH105 (1) 20DH125 (1) 20DH140 (1) 20DH170 (1) 20DH205 (1) 20DH260 (1)
(1) (2)
Frame
kW Rating
ND HD
PWM Freq. Temp.(2) DC Input Ratings Output Amps kHz 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 C 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 40 40 40 40

Amps Cont. 1 Min. 3 Sec.
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 5 5 5 6 6 6
1.5 2.2 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 55 75 90 110 132
1.1 1.5 3.0 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 45 55 75 90 110
3.7 5.3 9.3 12.6 16.8 24 33.2 40.9 47.5 61.9 80.5 95.1 120.2 95.1 120.2 95.1 159 120.2 192 159 226 192 298 226
3.5 5.0 8.7 11.5 15.4 22 30 37 43 56 72 85 105 85 125 96 140 105 170 140 205 170 260 205
4.5 5.5 9.9 13 17.2 24.2 33 45 56 64 84 108 116 128 138 144 154 158 187 210 220 255 286 305
6.0 7.5 13.2 17.4 23.1 33 45 60 74 86 112 144 158 170 163 168 210 210 255 280 289 313 390 410
Also applies to P voltage class. Fuses must be applied in the (+) leg and (-) leg of the DC Common Bus. The temperature rating listed for frame size 1-4 drives is for NEMA open types only. The adhesive tape label must be removed in order to operate at this temperature, otherwise the ambient operating temperature of these drives is 40 C.
Table A.M 540 Volt DC Input Frames 9 - 13 Drive Ratings

Drive Catalog Number 20DH261 20DH300 20DH385 20DH460 20DH500 20DH590 20DH650 20DH730 20DH820 20DH920 20DH1K0 20DH1K1 Frame kW Rating ND 132 160 200 250 250 315 355 400 450 500 560 630 HD 110 132 160 200 250 250 315 355 400 450 500 560 PWM Freq. kHz 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Temp. C 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 35 40 40 DC Input Ratings Amps 307 241 353 288 453 353 541 453 589 494 695 612 765 695 859 765 965 859 1083 965 1213 1083 1354 1213 Output Amps Cont. 261 205 300 245 385 300 460 385 500 420 590 520 650 590 730 650 820 730 920 820 1030 920 1150 1030 1 Min. 287 308 330 368 424 450 506 578 550 630 649 780 715 885 803 975 902 1095 1012 1230 1133 1370 1265 1545 3 Sec. 410 410 450 490 600 600 770 770 750 840 956 956 1062 1062 1095 1170 1230 1314 1380 1476 1555 1600 1620 1620
9 9 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 12 13
A-14
Drive Catalog Number 20DH1K3 20DH1K4
Frame
kW Rating HD 630 710
PWM Freq. kHz 2 2 2 2
Temp. C 40 40 40 40
DC Input Ratings Amps 1530 1354 1707 1413
Output Amps Cont. 1300 1150 1450 1200 1 Min. 1430 1725 1595 1800 3 Sec. 2079 2079 2175 2400
ND 13 710 13 800 -
Table A.N 650 Volt DC Input Frames 1 - 6 Drive Ratings

Drive Catalog Number 20DD2P1 20DD3P4 20DD5P0 20DD8P0 20DD011 20DD014 20DD022 20DD027 20DD034 20DD040 20DD052 20DD065 20DD077 20DJ096 (1) 20DJ125 (1) 20DJ140 (1) 20DJ156 (1) 20DJ180 (1) 20DJ248 (1)
(1) (2)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 5 5 5 6 6 6
HP Rating ND HD 1 0.75 2 1.5 3 2 5 3 7.5 5 10 7.5 15 10 20 15 25 20 30 25 40 30 50 40 60 50 75 60 100 75 100 75 125 100 150 125 200 150
PWM kHz 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2
Temp.(2) C 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 40 40
Frame
DC Input Ratings Amps 1.9 3.0 4.5 8.1 11.1 14.6 23.3 28.9 36.4 42.9 55.7 69.6 84.5 105.3 84.5 137.1 105.3 137 105.3 171 137.1 198 171.2 272 198
Output Amps Cont. 1 Min. 2.1 2.4 3.4 4.5 5.0 5.5 8.0 8.8 11 12.1 14 16.5 22 24.2 27 33 34 40.5 40 51 52 60 65 78 77 97.5 96 106 77 116 125 138 96 144 135 148 96 144 156 172 125 188 180 198 156 234 248 273 180 270
3 Sec. 3.2 6.0 7.5 12 16.5 22 33 44 54 68 80 104 130 144 154 163 168 200 192 234 250 270 312 372 360
Also applies to R voltage class. Fuses must be applied in the (+) leg and (-) leg of the DC Common Bus. The temperature rating listed for frame size 1-4 drives is for NEMA open types only. The adhesive tape label must be removed in order to operate at this temperature, otherwise the ambient operating temperature of these drives is 40 C.
Table A.O 650 Volt DC Input Frames 9 - 13 Drive Ratings

Drive Catalog Number 20DJ261 9 20DJ300 20DJ385 20DJ460 20DJ500 20DJ590 20DJ650 20DJ730 Frame HP Rating
ND HD
PWM Freq.
kHz
Temp.
C
DC Input Ratings
Amps
Output Amps
Cont. 1 Min. 3 Sec.
9 10 10 10 11 11 11
200 250 300 350 450 500 500 600 -
150 200 250 300 350 450 500 500
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
294 231 338 294 434 338 519 434 564 474 666 587 733 666 824 733
261 205 300 245 385 300 460 385 500 420 590 520 650 590 730 650
287 308 330 368 424 450 506 578 550 630 649 780 715 885 803 975
410 410 450 490 600 600 770 770 750 840 956 956 1062 1062 1095 1170
A-15
HP Rating Drive Catalog Number ND HD 20DJ820 12 700 600 20DJ920 12 800 700 20DJ1K0 12 900 800 20DJ1K1 13 1000 900 20DJ1K3 13 1200 1000 20DJ1K4 13 1250 1000 Frame
PWM Freq.
kHz
Temp.
C
DC Input Ratings
Amps
Output Amps
Cont. 1 Min. 3 Sec.
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
40 40 40 40 40 35 40 40 40 40 40 40
925 824 1038 925 1162 1038 1297 1162 1467 1297 1636 1354
820 730 920 820 1030 920 1150 1030 1300 1150 1450 1200
902 1095 1012 1230 1133 1370 1265 1545 1430 1725 1595 1800
1230 1314 1380 1476 1555 1600 1620 1620 2079 2079 2175 2400
Table A.P 810 Volt DC Input Frames 1 - 6 Drive Ratings

Drive Catalog Number 20DE1P7 20DE2P7 20DE3P9 20DE6P1 20DE9P0 20DE011 20DE017 20DE022 20DE027 20DE032 20DE041 20DE052 20DE062 20DT099 20DT144
(1)
Frame
HP Rating
ND HD
PWM Freq.
kHz
Temp.(1)
C
DC Input Ratings Output Amps

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 100 150
0.75 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 75 125
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 45 50(2) 50(2) 50(2) 40(2)
1.5 2.4 3.5 6.2 9.1 11.5 18 23.6 29 34.3 43.9 55.7 68.0 108.6 84.5 158 137.1
1.7 2.7 3.9 6.1 9 11 17 22 27 32 41 52 62 99 77 144 125
2 3.6 4.3 6.7 9.9 13.5 18.7 25.5 33 40.5 48 61.5 78 109 116 158 188
2.6 4.8 5.9 9.2 13.5 18 25.5 34 44 54 64 82 104 126 138 216 250
Table A.Q 810 Volt DC Input Frames 9 - 14 Drive Ratings

Drive Catalog Number 20DK170 20DK208 20DK261 20DK325 20DK385 20DK416 20DK460 20DK502 20DK590 Frame HP Rating
ND HD
PWM Freq.
kHz
Temp.
C

9 9 10 10 10 10 11 11 11
150 200 250 350 400 450 500 500 600
150 150 200 250 350 350 400 500 500
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
40 40 35 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 35 40 40 40 40 40 35 35
192 162 235 192 294 235 367 294 434 367 469 367 519 434 566 519 666 566
170 144 208 170 261 208 325 261 385 325 416 325 460 385 502 460 590 502
187 216 230 250 287 312 358 392 424 488 458 488 506 578 552 690 649 753
245 245 289 289 375 375 470 470 585 585 585 585 693 693 828 828 885 904
A-16
Drive Catalog Number 20DK650 20DK750 20DK820 (1) 20DK920 20DK1K0 20DK1K1 20DK1K5
(1)
Frame
HP Rating
ND HD
PWM Freq.
kHz
Temp.
C

12 700 12 800 12 900 13 1000 13 1100 13 1300 14 1600
650 700 700 900 1000 1100 1400
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
40 40 40 40 35 35 40 40 40 40 35 35 40 40
733 666 846 733 925 733 1038 925 1162 1038 1331 1162 1692 1467
650 590 750 650 820 650 920 820 1030 920 1180 1030 1500 1300
715 885 825 975 902 975 1012 1230 1133 1380 1298 1463 1650 1950
1062 1062 1170 1170 1170 1170 1380 1410 1545 1755 1755 1755 2250 2340
20DK820 drives (ND) are only capable of producing 95% of starting torque under 10 Hz.
Table A.R 932Volt DC Input Frames 5 & 6 Drive Ratings

kW Rating Drive Catalog Number ND HD 20DW098 5 90 75 20DW142 6 132 110 Frame
(1)
PWM Freq.
kHz
Temp.(1)
C

2 2 2 2
50(2) 50(2) 50(2) 40(2)
92.3 92.3 162.2 134.9
98 82 142 119
108 123 156 179
127 140 213 238
Table A.S 932 Volt DC Input Frames 9 - 14 Drive Ratings

Frame Drive Catalog Number 20DM170 9 20DM208 20DM261 20DM325 20DM385 20DM416 20DM460 20DM502 20DM590 20DM650 20DM750 20DM820(1) 20DM920 kW Rating
ND HD
PWM Freq.
kHz
Temp.
C
DC Input Ratings
Amps
Output Amps
Cont. 1 Min. 3 Sec.
9 10 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 12 13
160 200 250 315 355 400 450 500 560 630 710 800 900
132 160 200 250 315 315 355 400 500 560 630 630 800
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
40 40 35 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 35 40 40 40 40 40 35 35 40 40 40 40 35 35 40 40
200 170 245 200 307 245 383 307 453 383 490 383 542 453 591 542 695 591 765 695 883 765 965 765 1038 925
170 144 208 170 261 208 325 261 385 325 416 325 460 385 502 460 590 502 650 590 750 650 820 650 920 820
187 216 230 250 287 312 358 392 424 488 458 488 506 578 552 690 649 753 715 885 825 975 902 975 1012 1230
245 245 289 289 375 375 470 470 585 585 585 585 693 693 828 828 885 904 1062 1062 1170 1170 1170 1170 1380 1410
A-17
kW Rating Drive Catalog Number ND HD 20DM1K0 13 1000 900 20DM1K1 13 1100 1000 20DM1K5 14 1500 1300
(1)
Frame
PWM Freq.
kHz
Temp.
C
DC Input Ratings
Amps
Output Amps
Cont. 1 Min. 3 Sec.
2 2 2 2 2 2
40 40 35 35 40 40
1162 1038 1331 1162 1766 1530
1030 920 1180 1030 1500 1300
1133 1380 1298 1463 1650 1950
1545 1755 1755 1755 2250 2340
20DM820 drives (ND) are only capable of producing 95% of starting torque under 10 Hz.
Drive Fuse & Circuit Breaker The tables on the following pages provide recommended AC line input fuse and circuit breaker information. Tables with DC Link fuse Ratings
recommendations are also provided.
Fuse Size
Fuse sizes are the recommended minimum size based on 40o C ambient, 75o C wiring and U.S. N.E.C. Other country, state or local codes may require different fuse/circuit breaker ratings.
Fuse Type
The recommend fuse type is listed below. If available current ratings do not match the tables provided, the fuse rating that exceeds the drive continuous rating should be chosen. IEC BS88 (British Standard) Parts 1 & 2 (1), EN60269-1, Parts 1 & 2, type go or equivalent should be used for these drives. UL UL requirements specify that UL Class CC, T or J fuses must be used for all drives in this section (2).
(1) (2)
Typical designations include, but may not be limited to the following; Ora 1 & 2:AC, AD, BC, BD, CD, DD, ED, EFS, EF, FF, FG, GF, GG, GH Typical designations include; Type CC - KTK, FNQ-R Type J - JKS, LPJ Type T - JJS, JJN
A-18
Table A.T 208 Volt AC Input Frames 1-6 Drive Protection Devices
Drive Catalog Number 20DB4P2 20DB6P8 20DB9P6 20DB015 20DB022 20DB028 20DB042 20DB052 20DB070 20DB080 20DB104 Frame kW Rating
ND HD
Input Ratings
Amps kVA
Dual Element Non-Time Time Delay Fuse Delay Fuse

Min. (1) Max. (2)
Circuit Motor Circuit Breaker (3) Protector (5) 140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Range (6)(7)
Max. (5) Available Catalog Numbers (8)
Min. (1) Max. (2) Max. (4)
1 1 1 1 1 2 3 3 4 4 5
20DB130 5 20DB154 6 20DB192 6 20DB260 6

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
0.75 1.5 2.2 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 66
0.55 1.1 1.5 3.0 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
3.7 6.8 9.5 15.7 23.0 29.6 44.5 51.5 72 84.7 113 84.7 141 113 167 141 208 167 255 199
1.3 2.4 3.4 5.7 8.3 10.7 16.0 18.6 25.9 30.5 40.7 30.5 44.1 35.3 60.1 50.9 75.0 60.1 96.7 71.7
6 10 12 20 30 40 60 80 90 110 150 125 175 125 225 200 300 225 300 225
10 15 20 35 50 70 100 125 175 200 250 200 275 225 350 300 450 350 575 450
6 10 12 20 30 40 60 80 90 110 150 125 175 125 225 200 300 225 300 225
17.5 30 40 70 100 125 175 200 300 350 475 350 500 400 500 500 600 500 750 600
15 30 40 70 100 125 175 200 300 350 350 300 375 300 500 450 600 500 750 600
7 15 15 30 30 50 70 100 100 150 150 150 250 150 250 250 400 250 400 400
M-C2E-B63 M-C2E-C10 M-C2E-C16 M-C2E-C20 M-C2E-C25
M-D8E-B63 M-D8E-C10 M-D8E-C16 M-D8E-C20 M-D8E-C25
M-F8E-C10 M-F8E-C16 M-F8E-C20 M-F8E-C25 M-F8E-C32 M-F8E-C45
M-CMN-2500 M-CMN-4000 M-CMN-6300 M-CMN-6300 M-CMN-9000 M-CMN-9000 M-CMN-9000
Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping. Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection. For US NEC, minimum size is 125% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. Circuit Breaker - inverse time breaker. For US NEC, minimum size is 125% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. Maximum allowable rating by US NEC. Exact size must be chosen for each installation. Motor Circuit Protector - instantaneous trip circuit breaker. For US NEC minimum size is 125% of motor/drive FLA. Ratings shown are suggested. Instantaneous trip settings must be set to US NEC code. Not to exceed 1300% FLA. Bulletin 140M with adjustable current range should have the current trip set to the minimum range that the device will not trip. Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, UL listed for 208 Wye or Delta, 240 Wye or Delta, 480Y/277 or 600Y/ 347. Not UL listed for use on 480V or 600V Delta/Delta systems. The AIC ratings of the Bulletin 140M Motor Protector may vary. See publication 140M-SG001.
Table A.U 240 Volt AC Input Frames 1-6 Drive Protection Devices
Drive Catalog Number 20DB4P2 20DB6P8 20DB9P6 20DB015 20DB022 20DB028 20DB042 20DB052 20DB070 20DB080 20DB104 Frame HP Rating
ND HD
Input Ratings
Amps kVA

Min. (1) Max. (2)
Circuit Motor Circuit Breaker (3) Protector (5) 140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Range (6)(7)
Min. (2) Max. (3) Max. (4)
1 1 1 1 1 2 3 3 4 4 5
20DB130 5 20DB154 6 20DB192 6 20DB260 6

(1) (2)
1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100
0.75 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75
3.3 5.9 8.3 13.7 19.9 25.7 38.5 47.7 64.2 73.2 98 73 122 98 145 122 180 145 233 169
1.4 2.4 3.4 5.7 8.3 10.7 16.0 19.8 26.7 30.5 40.6 30.5 50.7 40.6 60.1 50.7 74.9 60.1 96.8 74.9
5 10 12 20 25 35 50 60 90 100 125 100 175 125 200 175 225 200 300 225
8 15 20 30 50 60 90 100 150 180 225 175 275 225 300 275 400 300 575 450
5 10 12 20 25 35 50 60 90 100 125 100 175 125 200 175 225 200 300 225
15 25 35 60 80 100 150 200 275 300 400 300 500 400 600 500 600 600 750 600
15 25 35 60 80 100 150 200 275 300 300 300 375 300 450 375 575 450 750 600
7 15 15 30 30 50 50 100 100 100 150 100 250 150 250 250 250 250 400 400
M-C2E-B63 M-C2E-C10 M-C2E-C10 M-C2E-C16 M-C2E-C25
M-D8E-B63 M-D8E-C10 M-D8E-C10 M-D8E-C16 M-D8E-C25
M-CMN-2500 M-CMN-4000 M-CMN-6300 M-CMN-6300 M-CMN-9000 M-CMN-9000 M-CMN-9000
Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping. Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection. For US NEC, minimum size is 125% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum.
A-19
(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
Circuit Breaker - inverse time breaker. For US NEC, minimum size is 125% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. Maximum allowable rating by US NEC. Exact size must be chosen for each installation. Motor Circuit Protector - instantaneous trip circuit breaker. For US NEC minimum size is 125% of motor/drive FLA. Ratings shown are suggested. Instantaneous trip settings must be set to US NEC code. Not to exceed 1300% FLA. Bulletin 140M with adjustable current range should have the current trip set to the minimum range that the device will not trip. Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, UL listed for 208 Wye or Delta, 240 Wye or Delta, 480Y/277 or 600Y/ 347. Not UL listed for use on 480V or 600V Delta/Delta systems. The AIC ratings of the Bulletin 140M Motor Protector may vary. See publication 140M-SG001.
Table A.V 400 Volt AC Input Frames 1 - 6 Drive Protection Devices

Drive Catalog Number 20DC2P1 20DC3P5 20DC5P0 20DC8P7 20DC011 20DC015 20DC022 20DC030 20DC037 20DC043 20DC056 20DC072 20DC085 (1) 20DC105 20DC125 20DC140 20DC170 20DC205 (2) 20DC260
(1) (2)
Frame
Input kW Rating Ratings

ND HD Amps kVA
Dual Element Time Delay Fuse

Min.
(3)
Non-Time Delay Circuit Fuse Breaker (5)

Min.
(5)
Motor Circuit Protector (7)

Max.
(8)
140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Range (8)(9)

Available Catalog Numbers (10)
Max.
(4)
Max.
(6)
Max.
(6)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 5 5 5 6 6 6
0.75 1.5 2.2 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 55 75 90 110 132
0.55 1.1 1.5 3.0 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 45 55 75 90 110
1.8 3.2 4.6 7.9 10.8 14.4 20.6 28.4 35.0 40.7 53 68.9 81.4 68.9 100.5 81.4 121.1 101 135.6 121 164.6 136 198.5 164 254.7 199
1.3 2.2 3.2 5.5 7.5 10.0 14.3 19.7 24.3 28.2 36.7 47.8 56.4 47.8 69.6 56.4 83.9 63.7 94 69.6 114 94 138 114 166 138
3 6 6 15 15 20 30 35 45 60 70 90 110 90 125 110 150 125 200 150 250 200 250 250 350 250
6 7 10 17.5 25 30 45 60 80 90 125 150 200 175 225 175 275 200 300 225 375 300 450 375 550 450
3 6 6 15 15 20 30 35 45 60 70 90 110 90 125 110 150 125 200 150 250 200 250 250 350 250
8 12 20 30 45 60 80 120 125 150 200 250 300 275 400 300 500 375 400 300 600 550 600 600 750 600
15 15 20 30 45 60 80 120 125 150 200 250 300 300 300 300 375 375 400 300 500 400 600 500 750 600
3 7 7 15 15 20 30 50 50 60 100 100 150 100 150 150 250 150 250 150 250 250 400 250 400 400
M-C2E-B25 M-C2E-B40 M-C2E-B63 M-C2E-C10 M-C2E-C16 M-C2E-C20 M-C2E-C25
M-D8E-B25 M-D8E-B40 M-D8E-B63 M-D8E-C10 M-D8E-C16 M-D8E-C20 M-D8E-C25
20DC085 current rating is limited to 45 degrees C ambient. 20DC205 current rating is limited to 40 degrees C ambient. (3) Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping. (4) Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection. For US NEC, minimum size is 125% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. (5) Circuit Breaker - inverse time breaker. For US NEC, minimum size is 125% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. (6) Maximum allowable rating by US NEC. Exact size must be chosen for each installation. (7) Motor Circuit Protector - instantaneous trip circuit breaker. For US NEC minimum size is 125% of motor/drive FLA. Ratings shown are suggested. Instantaneous trip settings must be set to US NEC code. Not to exceed 1300% FLA. (8) Bulletin 140M with adjustable current range should have the current trip set to the minimum range that the device will not trip. (9) Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, UL listed for 208 Wye or Delta, 240 Wye or Delta, 480Y/277 or 600Y/ 347. Not UL listed for use on 480V or 600V Delta/Delta systems. (10) The AIC ratings of the Bulletin 140M Motor Protector may vary. See publication 140M-SG001.
A-20
Table A.W 400 Volt AC Input Frames 9 - 13 Drive Protection Devices

Drive Catalog Number 20DC261 20DC300 20DC385 20DC460 20DC500 20DC590 Frame kW Rating
ND HD
Input Ratings
Amps
Dual Element Time Delay Fuse Non-Time Delay Fuse

Min. (1) Max. (3) Min. (1) Max.(3)
9 9 10 10 10 11
132 160 200 250 250 315 -
110 132 160 200 250 250 315 355 400 450 500 560 630 710
263 207 302 247 388 302 463 388 504 423 594 524 655 594 735 655 826 735 927 826 1038 927 1158 1038 1310 1158 1461 1209
350 275 400 350 500 400 600 500 650 550
750 (1 per phs) 375 (2 per phs) 700 (1 per phs) 350 (2 per phs) 850 (1 per phs) 425 (2 per phs) 750 (1 per phs) 375 (2 per phs) 1000 (1 per phs) 500 (2 per phs) 850 (1 per phs) 425 (2 per phs) 1100 (1 per phs) 550 (2 per phs) 1000 (1 per phs) 500 (2 per phs) 1200 (1 per phs) 600 (2 per phs) 1100 (1 per phs) 550 (2 per phs) 1350 (1 per phs) 700 (2 per phs) 1200 (1 per phs) 600 (2 per phs) 1350 (1 per phs) 700 (2 per phs) (2) 1500 (1 per phs) 750 (2 per phs) (2) 1700 (1 per phs) 850 (2 per phs) (2) 1500 (1 per phs) 750 (2 per phs) (2) 1900 (1 per phs) 950 (2 per phs) (2) 1600 (1 per phs) 800 (2 per phs) (2)
550 450 650 500 850 650 1000 850 1100 900 1300 1100 1400 1300 1600 1400 1800 1600 2000 1800 2300 2000 2300 (2) 2500 (2) 2900 (2) 2500 (2) 3000 (2) 2700 (2)
350 275 400 350 500 400 600 500 650 550
750 (1 per phs) 375 (2 per phs) 700 (1 per phs) 350 (2 per phs) 850 (1 per phs) 425 (2 per phs) 750 (1 per phs) 375 (2 per phs) 1000 (1 per phs) 500 (2 per phs) 850 (1 per phs) 425 (2 per phs) 1100 (1 per phs) 550 (2 per phs) 1000 (1 per phs) 500 (2 per phs) 1200 (1 per phs) 600 (2 per phs) 1100 (1 per phs) 550 (2 per phs) 1350 (1 per phs) 700 (2 per phs) 1200 (1 per phs) 600 (2 per phs) 1350 (1 per phs) 700 (2 per phs) (2) 1500 (1 per phs) 750 (2 per phs) (2) 1700 (1 per phs) 850 (2 per phs) (2) 1500 (1 per phs) 750 (2 per phs) (2) 1900 (1 per phs) 950 (2 per phs) (2) 1600 (1 per phs) 800 (2 per phs) (2)
700 600 900 700 1100 900 1300 1100 1500 1200 1700 1500 1900 1700 2100 1900 2400 2100 2700 2400 3000 2700 3000 (2) 3400 (2) 3900 (2) 3400 (2) 4300 (2) 3600 (2)
Bussmann Style Semi-Conductor Fuse 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M8547 170M8547 170M8547 170M8547 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M8547 170M8547 170M8547 170M8547 170M8547 170M8547 170M6466 (2) 170M6466 (2) 170M6466 (2) 170M6466 (2) 170M6466 (2) 170M6466 (2)
Motor Circuit Circuit Breaker (4) Protector (6)

Max. (5) Max. (5)
700 600 900 700 1100 900 1300 1100 1500 1200 1700 1500 1900 1700 2100 1900 2400 2100 2700 2400 3000 2700 3000 3400 3900 3400 4300 3600
400 300 400 400 600 400 600 600 700 600 800 700 1000 800 1200 1000 1200 1200 1200 1200 1400 1200 1400 1500 1700 1500 1900 1600
20DC650
11 355 -
20DC730
11 400 -
20DC820
12 450 -
20DC920
12 500 -
20DC1K0
12 560 -
20DC1K1
13 630 -
20DC1K3
13 710 -
20DC1K4
13 800 -
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping. Fuses and disconnect are supplied with AC input NEMA/UL Type 1 drives. Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection. For US NEC, minimum size is 125% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. Circuit Breaker - inverse time breaker. For US NEC, minimum size is 125% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. Maximum allowable rating by US NEC. Exact size must be chosen for each installation. Motor Circuit Protector - instantaneous trip circuit breaker. For US NEC minimum size is 125% of motor/drive FLA. Ratings shown are suggested. Instantaneous trip settings must be set to US NEC code. Not to exceed 1300% FLA.
A-21
Table A.X 480 Volt AC Input Frames 1 - 6 Drive Protection Devices

Drive Catalog Number 20DD2P1 20DD3P4 20DD5P0 20DD8P0 20DD011 20DD014 20DD022 20DD027 20DD034 20DD040 20DD052 20DD065 20DD077 Frame HP Rating
ND HD
Input Ratings
Amps kVA

Min. (1) Max. (2) Min. (3)
Circuit Motor Circuit 140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Breaker (3) Protector (5) Range (6)(7)
Max. (4) Max. (4)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4
20DD096 5 20DD125 5 20DD156 6 20DD180 6 20DD248 6

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200
0.75 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125
1.6 2.6 3.9 6.9 9.5 12.5 19.9 24.8 31.2 36.7 47.7 59.6 72.3 59.6 90.1 72.3 117 90.1 146.5 131 169 147 232.8 150 169
1.4 2.2 3.2 5.7 7.9 10.4 16.6 20.6 25.9 30.5 39.7 49.6 60.1 49.6 74.9 60.1 97.6 74.9 121.7 97.6 140.5 121.7 188 140.5
3 4 6 10 15 17.5 25 35 40 50 60 80 100 80 125 100 150 125 200 175 225 200 300 225
6 8 10 15 20 30 50 60 70 90 110 125 170 125 200 170 250 200 350 250 400 350 550 400
3 4 6 10 15 17.5 25 35 40 50 60 80 100 80 125 100 150 125 200 175 225 200 300 225
8 12 20 30 40 50 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 250 350 300 500 350 600 500 600 600 700 600
15 15 20 30 40 50 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 250 350 300 375 350 450 375 500 450 700 500
3 7 7 15 15 20 30 50 50 50 70 100 100 100 125 100 150 125 250 250 250 250 400 250
M-C2E-B25 M-C2E-B40 M-C2E-B63 M-C2E-C10 M-C2E-C16 M-C2E-C16 M-C2E-C25
M-D8E-B40 M-D8E-B63 M-D8E-C10 M-D8E-C16 M-D8E-C16 M-D8E-C25
M-F8E-C10 M-F8E-C16 M-F8E-C16 M-F8E-C25 M-F8E-C32 M-F8E-C45 M-F8E-C45
M-CMN-2500 M-CMN-4000 M-CMN-4000 M-CMN-4000 M-CMN-6300 M-CMN-9000 M-CMN-9000 M-CMN-9000 M-CMN-9000
Table A.Y 480 Volt AC Input Frames 9 - 14 Drive Protection Devices

Drive Catalog Number 20DD261 20DD300 20DD385 20DD460 20DD500 20DD590 Frame HP Rating
ND HD
Input Ratings
Amps

Min. (1) Max. (3)
Non-Time Delay Fuse

Min. (1) Max. (3)
9 9 10 10 10 11
200 250 300 350 450 500 -
150 200 250 300 350 450 500
252 207 290 247 372 302 444 388 483 423 570 524 628 594
20DD650
11 500 -
350 275 400 350 500 400 600 500 650 550 750 (1 per phs) 375 (2 per phs) 700 (1 per phs) 350 (2 per phs) 800 (1 per phs) 400 (2 per phs) 750 (1 per phs) 375 (2 per phs)
550 450 650 550 850 650 1000 850 1000 900 1300 1100 1400 1300
350 275 400 350 500 400 600 500 650 550 750 (1 per phs) 375 (2 per phs) 700 (1 per phs) 350 (2 per phs) 800 (1 per phs) 400 (2 per phs) 750 (1 per phs) 375 (2 per phs)
700 600 900 700 1100 900 1300 1100 1500 1200 1700 1500 1900 1700
Bussmann Style Semi-Conductor Fuse 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M8547 170M8547 170M8547 170M8547 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813

Max. (5) Max. (5)
700 600 900 700 1100 900 1300 1100 1500 1200 1700 1500 1900 1700
400 300 400 400 600 400 600 600 700 600 800 700 800 800
A-22
Drive Catalog Number 20DD730
Frame
HP Rating
ND HD
Input Ratings
Amps

Min. (1) 900 (1 per phs) Max. (3)
Non-Time Delay Fuse

Min. (1) 900 (1 per phs) Max. (3)
11 600 -
500 600 700 800
705 655 792 735 888 826 994 927 1110 994 1255
1600 1400 1800 1600 2000 1800 2300 2000 2500 (2) 2300 (2) 2900 (2) 2500 (2) 3200 (2) 2700 (2)
2100 1900 2400 2100 2700 2400 3000 2700 3400 (2) 3000 (2) 3900 (2) 3400 (2) 4300 (2) 3600 (2)
Circuit Breaker (4) Bussmann Style Semi-Conductor Fuse Max. (5) 170M5813 2100 170M5813 170M8547 170M8547 170M8547 170M8547 170M8547 170M8547 170M6466 (2) 170M6466 (2) 170M6466 (2) 170M6466 (2) 170M6466 (2) 170M6466 (2) 1900 2400 2100 2700 2400 3000 2700 3400 3000 3900 3400 4300 3600

Max. (5)
900 900 1000 1000 1200 1200 1300 1200 1400 1300 1600 1400 1800 1500
20DD820
12 700 -
20DD920
12 800 -
20DD1K0
12 900 -
20DD1K1
13 1000 900
20DD1K3
13 1200 -
1000 1110 1400
20DD1K4
13 1250 -
1000 1158
450 (2 per phs) 850 (1 per phs) 425 (2 per phs) 1000 (1 per phs) 500 (2 per phs) 900 (1 per phs) 475 (2 per phs) 1200 (1 per phs) 600 (2 per phs) 1100 (1 per phs) 550 (2 per phs) 1300 (1 per phs) 650 (2 per phs) 1200 (1 per phs) 600 (2 per phs) 1400 (1 per phs) 700 (2 per phs) (2) 1300 (1 per phs) 650 (2 per phs) (2) 1600 (1 per phs) 800 (2 per phs) (2) 1400 (1 per phs) 700 (2 per phs) (2) 1800 (1 per phs) 900 (2 per phs) (2) 1500 (1 per phs) 750 (2 per phs) (2)
450 (2 per phs) 850 (1 per phs) 425 (2 per phs) 1000 (1 per phs) 500 (2 per phs) 900 (1 per phs) 475 (2 per phs) 1200 (1 per phs) 600 (2 per phs) 1100 (1 per phs) 550 (2 per phs) 1300 (1 per phs) 650 (2 per phs) 1200 (1 per phs) 600 (2 per phs) 1400 (1 per phs) 700 (2 per phs) (2) 1300 (1 per phs) 650 (2 per phs) (2) 1600 (1 per phs) 800 (2 per phs) (2) 1400 (1 per phs) 700 (2 per phs) (2) 1800 (1 per phs) 900 (2 per phs) (2) 1500 (1 per phs) 750 (2 per phs) (2)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping. Fuses and disconnect are supplied with AC input NEMA/UL Type 1 drives. Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection. For US NEC, minimum size is 125% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. Circuit Breaker - inverse time breaker. For US NEC, minimum size is 125% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. Maximum allowable rating by US NEC. Exact size must be chosen for each installation. Motor Circuit Protector - instantaneous trip circuit breaker. For US NEC minimum size is 125% of motor/drive FLA. Ratings shown are suggested. Instantaneous trip settings must be set to US NEC code. Not to exceed 1300% FLA.
Table A.Z 600 Volt AC Input Frames 1 - 6 Drive Protection Devices

Drive Catalog Number 20DE1P7 20DE2P7 20DE3P9 20DE6P1 20DE9P0 20DE011 20DE017 20DE022 20DE027 20DE032 20DE041 20DE052 20DE062 20DE077 Frame Dual Element Time Delay HP Rating Input Ratings Fuse
ND HD Amps kVA Min. (1)
Non-Time Delay Fuse 2 3 6 9 10 15 20 30 35 40 50 60 80 90 90 125 100 6 10 15 20 35 40 60 80 100 125 150 200 225 300 250 375 300
Motor Circuit Circuit (3) Protector(5) 140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Range(6)(7) Breaker
Max. (2) Min. (3) Max. (4) Max. (4)
1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 20DE099 5 100
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 5
0.75 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75
1.3 2.1 3.0 5.3 7.8 9.9 15.4 20.2 24.8 29.4 37.6 47.7 58.2 72.3 58.2 92.9 72.3
1.4 2.1 3.1 5.5 8.1 10.2 16.0 21.0 25.7 30.5 39.1 49.6 60.5 75.1 60.5 96.6 75.1
2 3 6 9 10 15 20 30 35 40 50 60 80 90 90 125 100
4 6 9 12 20 25 40 50 60 70 90 110 125 150 125 200 175
15 15 15 20 30 40 50 80 100 125 150 200 225 300 250 375 300
3 3 7 15 15 15 20 30 50 50 100 100 100 100 100 150 100
M-C2E-B16 M-C2E-B25 M-C2E-B40 M-C2E-B63 M-C2E-C10 M-C2E-C10 M-C2E-C16 M-C2E-C25
M-D8E-B40 M-D8E-B63 M-D8E-C10 M-D8E-C10 M-D8E-C16 M-D8E-C25
M-F8E-C10 M-F8E-C10 M-F8E-C16 M-F8E-C25 M-F8E-C25 M-F8E-C32 M-F8E-C45
M-CMN-2500 M-CMN-2500 M-CMN-4000 M-CMN-4000 M-CMN-6300 M-CMN-6300 M-CMN-9000 M-CMN-6300 M-CMN-9000
A-23
Drive HP Rating Catalog Number ND HD 20DE125 6 125 100 20DE144 6 150 125 Frame
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
Dual Element Time Delay Input Ratings Fuse

Amps kVA Min. (1)
Non-Time Delay Fuse 150 125 175 150 375 375 400 375
Motor Circuit Circuit Breaker (3) Protector(5) 140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Range(6)(7)
Max. (2) Min. (3) Max. (4) Max. (4)
117 93 135 117
121.6 96.6 140.5 121.6
150 125 175 150
250 200 300 275
375 375 400 375
250 150 250 250
Table A.AA 600 Volt AC Input Frames 9 - 14 Drive Protection Devices

Drive Catalog Number 20DE170 20DE208 20DE261 20DE325 20DE385 20DE416 20DE460 Frame HP Rating
ND HD
Input Ratings
Amps

Min. (2) Max. (4)
Non-Time Delay Fuse

Min. (2) Max.(4)
9 9 10 10 10 10 11
150 200 250 350 400 450 500
150 150 200 250 350 350 400 500 500 650 700 700 900
164 139 201 164 252 201 314 252 372 314 402 314 444 372 485 444 570 485 628 570 724 628 792 628 888 792
20DE502
11
500
20DE590
11
600
20DE650
12
700
20DE750
12
800
20DE820(1) 12
900
20DE920
13
1000
225 175 275 225 325 275 400 325 475 400 525 400 575 (1 per phs) 300 (2 per phs) 475 (1 per phs) 250 (2 per phs) 625 (1 per phs) 325 (2 per phs) 575 (1 per phs) 300 (2 per phs) 725 (1 per phs) 375(2 per phs) 625 (1 per phs) 325 (2 per phs) 800 (1 per phs) 400 (2 per phs) 725 (1 per phs) 375 (2 per phs) 950 (1 per phs) 475 (2 per phs) 800 (1 per phs) 400 (2 per phs) 1000 (1 per phs) 500 (2 per phs) 800 (1 per phs) 400 (2 per phs) 1200 (1 per phs) 600 (2 per phs) (3) 1000 (1 per phs) 500 (2 per phs) (3)
375 300 450 375 575 450 725 575 850 725 900 725 1000 850 1100 1000 1300 1100 1400 1300 1600 1400 1800 1400 2000
(3)
1800 (3)
225 175 275 225 325 275 400 325 475 400 525 400 575 (1 per phs) 300 (2 per phs) 475 (1 per phs) 250 (2 per phs) 625 (1 per phs) 325 (2 per phs) 575 (1 per phs) 300 (2 per phs) 725 (1 per phs) 375(2 per phs) 625 (1 per phs) 325 (2 per phs) 800 (1 per phs) 400 (2 per phs) 725 (1 per phs) 375 (2 per phs) 950 (1 per phs) 475 (2 per phs) 800 (1 per phs) 400 (2 per phs) 1000 (1 per phs) 500 (2 per phs) 800 (1 per phs) 400 (2 per phs) 1200 (1 per phs) 600 (2 per phs) (3) 1000 (1 per phs) 500 (2 per phs) (3)
500 500 600 500 775 600 950 775 1100 950 1200 950 1300 1100 1500 1300 1700 1500 1900 1700 2200 1900 2400 1900 2700
(3)
Bussmann Style Semi-Conductor Fuse 170M3819 170M3819 170M3819 170M3819 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M8547 170M8547 170M8547 170M8547 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M6466
(3)
Circuit Motor Circuit Breaker (5) Protector (7)

Max (6) Max. (6)
500 500 600 500 700 600 900 750 1100 900 1200 900 1300 1100 1500 1300 1700 1500 1900 1700 2200 1900 2400 1900 2700 2400
250 200 300 250 350 300 450 400 500 450 550 450 600 500 650 600 800 700 900 800 1000 900 1100 900 1200 1100
2400 (3)
170M6466 (3)
A-24
Drive Catalog Number 20DE1K0
Frame
HP Rating
ND HD
Input Ratings
Amps

Min. (2) Max. (4)
Non-Time Delay Fuse

Min. (2) 1300 (1 per phs) 650 (2 per phs) (3) Max.(4)
13
1100
1000 1100 900
994 888 1139 994 1448 1255
20DE1K1
13
1300
20DE1K5
14
1000
1300 (1 per phs) 650 (2 per phs) (3) 1200 (1 per phs) 600 (2 per phs) (3) 1500 (1 per phs) 750 (2 per phs) (3) 1300 (1 per phs) 650 (2 per phs) (3) 1900 (1 per phs) 650 (3 per phs) 1600 (1 per phs) 550 (3 per phs)
2300 (3) 2000 (3) 2600 (3) 2200 (3) 3300 2900
3000 (3) 2700 (3) 3500 (3) 3000 (3) 4500 3900
Circuit Breaker (5) Bussmann Style Semi-Conductor Fuse Max (6) 170M6466 (3) 3000 170M6466 (3) 170M6466 (3) 170M6466 (3) 170M6466 170M6466 2700 3500 3000 4500 3900

Max. (6)
1300 1200 1500 1300 1900 1700
1200 (1 per phs) 600 (2 per phs) (3) 1500 (1 per phs) 750 (2 per phs) (3) 1300 (1 per phs) 650 (2 per phs) (3) 1900 (1 per phs) 650 (3 per phs) 1600 (1 per phs) 550 (3 per phs)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
20DE820 drives (ND) are only capable of producing 95% of starting torque under 10 Hz. Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping. Fuses and disconnect are supplied with AC input NEMA/UL Type 1 drives. Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection. For US NEC, minimum size is 125% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. Circuit Breaker - inverse time breaker. For US NEC, minimum size is 125% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. Maximum allowable rating by US NEC. Exact size must be chosen for each installation. Motor Circuit Protector - instantaneous trip circuit breaker. For US NEC minimum size is 125% of motor/drive FLA. Ratings shown are suggested. Instantaneous trip settings must be set to US NEC code. Not to exceed 1300% FLA.
Table A.AB 690 Volt AC Input Frames 5 & 6 Drive Protection Devices
Frame Drive Catalog Number 20DF052 5 20DF060 20DF082 20DF098 20DF119 20DF142
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
kW Rating
ND HD
Input Ratings
Amps kVA
Dual Element Time Delay Fuse Non-Time Delay Fuse

Min. (1) Max. (2) Min. (2) Max. (3)

Max. (4) Max. (5)
5 5 5 6 6
45 55 75 90 110 132
37.5 45 55 75 90 110
46.9 40.1 57.7 46.9 79.0 57.7 94.7 79.0 115 92.9 139 115
59.5 48.0 68.9 59.5 94.4 68.9 113 94.4 138 113 165.9 137
60 50 80 60 100 80 125 100 150 125 175 150
110 90 125 110 200 125 200 200 250 200 300 250
60 50 80 60 100 80 125 100 150 125 175 150
175 150 225 175 375 225 375 375 400 375 450 400
175 150 225 175 375 225 375 375
Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping. Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection. For US NEC, minimum size is 125% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. Circuit Breaker - inverse time breaker. For US NEC, minimum size is 125% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. Maximum allowable rating by US NEC. Exact size must be chosen for each installation. Motor Circuit Protector - instantaneous trip circuit breaker. For US NEC minimum size is 125% of motor/drive FLA. Ratings shown are suggested. Instantaneous trip settings must be set to US NEC code. Not to exceed 1300% FLA.
Table A.AC 690 Volt AC Input Frames 9 - 14 Drive Protection Devices

Drive Catalog Number
kW Rating
ND HD
Input Ratings Amps
Dual Element Time Delay Fuse Min. (2) Max. (4)
Non-Time Delay Fuse Min. (2) Max. (4)
20DF170 20DF208 20DF261 20DF325 20DF385
160 9 200 10 250 10 315 10 355
132 160 200 250 315
171 145 210 171 263 210 327 263 388 327
225 200 275 225 350 275 425 350 500 425
375 300 450 375 575 450 725 575 850 725
225 200 275 225 350 275 425 350 500 425
500 500 600 500 775 600 950 775 1100 950
Bussmann Style Semi-Conductor Fuse 170M3819 170M3819 170M3819 170M3819 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813
Circuit Motor Circuit Breaker (5) Protector (7) (6) Max. Max. (6)
Frame
500 400 600 500 750 600 900 750 1100 900
250 200 300 250 350 300 450 400 500 450
A-25
Drive Catalog Number
kW Rating
ND HD
Input Ratings Amps
Dual Element Time Delay Fuse Min. (2) Max. (4)
Non-Time Delay Fuse Min. (2) Max. (4)
20DF416 20DF460
10 400 11 500
315 400 500 500 560 630 630 800 900 1000 1300
419 327 463 388 506 463 594 506 655 594 756 655 826 655 927 826 1038 927 1189 1038 1511 1310
20DF502
11 560
20DF590
11 580
20DF650
12 630
20DF750
12 710
20DF820(1) 12 800 20DF920 13 900 20DF1K0 13 1000 20DF1K1 13 1100 20DF1K5 14 1500
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
525 425 600 (1 per phs) 300 (2 per phs) 500 (1 per phs) 250 (2 per phs) 650 (1 per phs) 325 (2 per phs) 600 (1 per phs) 300 (2 per phs) 750 (1 per phs) 375 (2 per phs) 650 (1 per phs) 325 (2 per phs) 850 (1 per phs) 425 (2 per phs) 750 (1 per phs) 375 (2 per phs) 950 (1 per phs) 475 (2 per phs) 850 (1 per phs) 425 (2 per phs) 1100 (1 per phs) 550 (2 per phs) 850 (1 per phs) 425 (2 per phs) 1200 (1 per phs) 600 (2 per phs) (3) 1100 (1 per phs) 550 (2 per phs) (3) 1300 (1 per phs) 650 (2 per phs) (3) 1200 (1 per phs) 600 (2 per phs) (3) 1500 (1 per phs) 750 (2 per phs) (3) 1300 (1 per phs) 650 (2 per phs) (3) 1900 (1 per phs) 650 (3 per phs) 1700 (1 per phs) 575 (3 per phs)
900 700 1000 850 1100 1000 1300 1100 1400 1300 1600 1400 1800 1400 2000 (3) 1800 (3) 2300 (3) 2000 (3) 2600 (3) 2300 (3) 3300 2900
525 425 600 (1 per phs) 300 (2 per phs) 500 (1 per phs) 250 (2 per phs) 650 (1 per phs) 325 (2 per phs) 600 (1 per phs) 300 (2 per phs) 750 (1 per phs) 375 (2 per phs) 650 (1 per phs) 325 (2 per phs) 850 (1 per phs) 425 (2 per phs) 750 (1 per phs) 375 (2 per phs) 950 (1 per phs) 475 (2 per phs) 850 (1 per phs) 425 (2 per phs) 1100 (1 per phs) 550 (2 per phs) 850 (1 per phs) 425 (2 per phs) 1200 (1 per phs) 600 (2 per phs) (3) 1100 (1 per phs) 550 (2 per phs) (3) 1300 (1 per phs) 650 (2 per phs) (3) 1200 (1 per phs) 600 (2 per phs) (3) 1500 (1 per phs) 750 (2 per phs) (3) 1300 (1 per phs) 650 (2 per phs) (3) 1900 (1 per phs) 650 (3 per phs) 1700 (1 per phs) 575 (3 per phs)
1200 950 1300 1100 1500 1300 1700 1500 1900 1700 2200 1900 2400 1900 2700 (3) 2400 (3) 3000 (3) 2700 (3) 3500 (3) 3000 (3) 4500 3900
Bussmann Style Semi-Conductor Fuse 170M5813 170M5813 170M8547 170M8547 170M8547 170M8547 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M5813 170M6466 (3) 170M6466 (3) 170M6466 (3) 170M6466 (3) 170M6466 (3) 170M6466 (3) 170M6466 170M6466
Circuit Motor Circuit Breaker (5) Protector (7) Max. (6) Max. (6)
Frame
1200 900 1300 1100 1500 1300 1700 1500 1900 1700 2200 1900 2400 1900 2700 2400 3000 2700 3500 3000 4500 3900
550 450 600 500 650 600 800 700 900 800 1000 900 1100 900 1200 1100 1300 1200 1500 1300 1900 1700
20DF820 drives (ND) are only capable of producing 95% of starting torque under 10 Hz. Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping. Fuses and disconnect are supplied with AC input NEMA/UL Type 1 drives. Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection. For US NEC, minimum size is 125% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. Circuit Breaker - inverse time breaker. For US NEC, minimum size is 125% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. Maximum allowable rating by US NEC. Exact size must be chosen for each installation. Motor Circuit Protector - instantaneous trip circuit breaker. For US NEC minimum size is 125% of motor/drive FLA. Ratings shown are suggested. Instantaneous trip settings must be set to US NEC code. Not to exceed 1300% FLA.
A-26
Table A.AD 325 Volt DC Input Frames 1 - 6 Drive Protection Devices

Drive Catalog Number 20DB015 20DB022 20DB028 20DB042 20DB052 20DB070 20DB080 20DN104(1) 20DN130(1) 20DN154(1) 20DN192(1) 20DN260(1)(2)
(1) (2) (3)
Frame 1 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 6
HP Rating ND HD 5 3 7.5 5 10 7.5 15 10 20 15 25 20 30 25 40 30 50 40 60 50 75 60 100 75
DC Input Ratings Amps 16 23.3 30 45 55 75.3 85.8 114.1 142.6 169 210.6 272.1
Fuse 30 45 60 90 100 150 175 225 250 300 400 400
Non-Time Delay Fuse(3) HSJ30 HSJ45 HSJ60 HSJ90 HSJ100 HSJ150 HSJ175 HSJ225 HSJ250 HSJ300 HSJ400 HSJ400
Catalog number corresponds to output amps for these drives. Drive must be programmed to lower voltage to obtain higher currents shown at right. Catalog number corresponds to drives with precharge only. The power source to Common Bus inverters must be derived from AC Voltages 600V or less, as defined in NFPA70; Art 430-18 (NEC). Battery supplies or MG sets are not included. The following devices were validated to break current of the derived power DC Bus: Disconnects: Allen-Bradley Bulletin No. 1494, 30 to 400 A; Bulletin No. 194, 30 to 400 A, or ABB: OESA, 600 & 800 A; OESL, all sizes. Fuses: Ferraz Shawmut Type HSJ, all sizes. For any other devices, please contact the factory.
Table A.AE 540 Volt DC Input Frames 1 - 6 Drive Protection Devices

kW Rating Drive Catalog Number 20DC3P5 20DC5P0 20DC8P7 20DC011 20DC015 20DC022 20DC030 20DC037 20DC043 20DC056 20DC072 20DC085 20DH105 (1) 20DH125 (1) 20DH140 (1) 20DH170 (1) 20DH205 (1) 20DH260 (1)
(1) (2)
DC Input Ratings
Amps
Frame 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 5 5 5 6 6 6
ND
HD
1.5 2.2 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 55 75 90 110 132
1.1 1.5 3.0 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 45 55 75 90 110
3.7 5.3 9.3 12.6 16.8 24 33.2 40.9 47.5 61.9 80.5 95.1 120.2 95.1 120.2 95.1 159 120.2 192 159 226 192 298 226
Fuse 8 10 15 20 25 40 50 70 90 100 125 150 175 175 200 200 250 250 350 350 350 350 400 400
Non-Time Delay Fuse(2) JKS-8 JKS-10 HSJ15 HSJ20 HSJ25 HSJ40 HSJ50 HSJ70 HSJ90 HSJ100 HSJ125 HSJ150 HSJ175 HSJ175 HSJ200 HSJ200 HSJ250 HSJ250 HSJ350 HSJ350 HSJ350 HSJ350 HSJ400 HSJ400
Also applies to P voltage class. Fuses must be applied in the (+) leg and (-) leg of the DC Common Bus. The power source to Common Bus inverters must be derived from AC voltages 600V or less, as defined in NFPA70; Art 430-18 (NEC). Battery supplies or MG sets are not included. The following devices were validated to break current of the derived power DC Bus: Disconnects: Allen-Bradley Bulletin No. 1494, 30 to 400 A; Bulletin No. 194, 30 to 400 A, or ABB: OESA, 600 & 800 A; OESL, all sizes. Fuses: Bussmann Type JKS, all sizes;Type 170M, Case Sizes 1, 2 and 3, or Ferraz Shawmut Type HSJ, all sizes. For any other devices, please contact the factory.
A-27
Table A.AF 540 Volt DC Input Frames 9 - 14 Drive Protection Devices

kW Rating Drive Catalog Number Frame ND HD 20DH261 9 132 110 20DH300 9 160 132 20DH385 10 200 160 20DH460 10 250 200 20DH500 10 250 250 20DH590 11 315 250 20DH650 11 355 315 20DH730 11 400 355 20DH820 12 450 400 20DH920 12 500 450 20DH1K0 12 560 500 20DH1K1 13 630 560 20DH1K3 13 710 630 20DH1K4 13 800 710 DC Input Ratings Amps 307 241 353 288 453 353 541 453 589 494 695 612 765 695 859 765 965 859 1083 965 1213 1083 1354 1213 1530 1354 1707 1413 Fuse 500 500 630 630 700 700 900 900 500 (2 per phs) 500 (2 per phs) 550 (2 per phs) 550 (2 per phs) 630 (2 per phs) 630 (2 per phs) 700 (2 per phs) 700 (2 per phs) 700 (2 per phs) 700 (2 per phs) 550 (3 per phs) 550 (3 per phs) 630 (3 per phs) 630 (3 per phs) 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 Bussmann Style Fuse 170M6608 170M6608 170M6610 170M6610 170M6611 170M6611 170M6613 170M6613 170M6608 170M6608 170M6609 170M6609 170M6610 170M6610 170M6611 170M6611 170M6611 170M6611 170M6609 170M6609 170M6610 170M6610 170M7107 170M7107 170M7107 170M7107 170M7107 170M7107
Table A.AG 650 Volt DC Input Frames 1 - 6 Drive Protection Devices

Drive Catalog Number 20DD2P1 20DD3P4 20DD5P0 20DD8P0 20DD011 20DD014 20DD022 20DD027 20DD034 20DD040 20DD052 20DD065 20DD077 20DJ096 (1) 20DJ125 (1) 20DJ140 (1) 20DJ156 (1) 20DJ180 (1) 20DJ248 (1)
(1)
Frame 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 5 5 5 6 6 6
HP Rating ND HD 1 0.75 2 1.5 3 2 5 3 7.5 5 10 7.5 15 10 20 15 25 20 30 25 40 30 50 40 60 50 75 60 100 75 100 75 125 100 150 125 200 150
DC Input Ratings Amps 1.9 3.0 4.5 8.1 11.1 14.6 23.3 28.9 36.4 42.9 55.7 69.6 84.5 105.3 84.5 137.1 105.3 137 105.3 171 137.1 198 171.2 272 198
Fuse 6 6 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 80 90 100 150 175 175 200 200 250 250 300 300 400 400 400 400
Non-Time Delay Fuse(2) JKS-6 JKS-6 JKS-10 HSJ15 HSJ20 HSJ30 HSJ40 HSJ50 HSJ60 HSJ80 HSJ90 HSJ100 HSJ150 HSJ175 HSJ175 HSJ200 HSJ200 HSJ250 HSJ250 HSJ300 HSJ300 HSJ400 HSJ400 HSJ400 HSJ400
Also applies to R voltage class. Fuses must be applied in the (+) leg and (-) leg of the DC Common Bus.
A-28
(2)
The power source to Common Bus inverters must be derived from AC Voltages 600V or less, as defined in NFPA70; Art 430-18 (NEC). Battery supplies or MG sets are not included. The following devices were validated to break current of the derived power DC Bus: Disconnects: Allen-Bradley Bulletin No. 1494, 30 to 400 A; Bulletin No. 194, 30 to 400 A, or ABB: OESA, 600 & 800 A; OESL, all sizes. Fuses: Bussmann Type JKS, all sizes;Type 170M, Case Sizes 1, 2 and 3, or Ferraz Shawmut Type HSJ, all sizes. For any other devices, please contact the factory.
Table A.AH 650 Volt DC Input Frames 9 - 14 Drive Protection Devices

HP Rating Drive Catalog Number Frame ND HD 20DJ261 9 200 150 20DJ300 9 250 200 20DJ385 10 300 250 20DJ460 10 350 300 20DJ500 10 450 350 20DJ590 11 500 450 20DJ650 11 500 500 20DJ730 11 600 500 20DJ820 12 700 600 20DJ920 12 800 700 20DJ1K0 12 900 800 20DJ1K1 13 1000 900 20DJ1K3 13 1200 1000 20DJ1K4 13 1250 1000 DC Input Ratings
Amps
294 231 338 294 434 338 519 434 564 474 666 587 733 666 824 733 925 824 1038 925 1162 1038 1297 1162 1467 1297 1636 1354
Fuse 500 500 630 630 700 700 900 900 500 (2 per phs) 500 (2 per phs) 550 (2 per phs) 550 (2 per phs) 630 (2 per phs) 630 (2 per phs) 700 (2 per phs) 700 (2 per phs) 700 (2 per phs) 700 (2 per phs) 550 (3 per phs) 550 (3 per phs) 630 (3 per phs) 630 (3 per phs) 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400
Bussmann Style Fuse 170M6608 170M6608 170M6610 170M6610 170M6611 170M6611 170M6613 170M6613 170M6608 170M6608 170M6609 170M6609 170M6610 170M6610 170M6611 170M6611 170M6611 170M6611 170M6609 170M6609 170M6610 170M6610 170M7107 170M7107 170M7107 170M7107 170M7107 170M7107
Table A.AI 810 Volt DC Input Frames 1 - 6 Drive Protection Devices

HP Rating Drive Catalog Number 20DE1P7 20DE2P7 20DE3P9 20DE6P1 20DE9P0 20DE011 20DE017 20DE022 20DE027 20DE032 20DE041 20DE052 20DE062 20DT099 20DT144 Frame 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 5 6
ND HD
DC Input Ratings
Amps
1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 100 150
0.75 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 75 125
1.5 2.4 3.5 6.2 9.1 11.5 18 23.6 29 34.3 43.9 55.7 68.0 108.6 84.5 158 137.1
Fuse 3 6 6 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 90 125 150 150 200 200
Non-Time Delay Fuse(1) JKS-3 JKS-6 JKS-6 JKS-10 HSJ15 HSJ20 HSJ30 HSJ40 HSJ50 HSJ60 HSJ70 HSJ90 HSJ125 HSJ150 HSJ150 HSJ200 HSJ200
A-29
(1)
Table A.AJ 810 Volt DC Input Frames 9 - 14 Drive Protection Devices

HP Rating Drive Catalog Number Frame ND HD 20DK170 9 150 150 20DK208 9 200 150 20DK261 10 250 200 20DK325 10 350 250 20DK385 10 400 350 20DK416 10 450 350 20DK460 11 500 400 20DK502 11 500 500 20DK590 11 600 500 20DK650 12 700 650 20DK750 12 800 700 12 900 20DK820 (1) 700 20DK920 13 1000 900 20DK1K0 13 1100 1000 20DK1K1 13 1300 1100 20DK1K5 14 1600 1400
(1)
DC Input Ratings
Amps
192 162 235 192 294 235 367 294 434 367 469 367 519 434 566 519 666 566 733 666 846 733 925 733 1038 925 1162 1038 1331 1162 1692 1467
Fuse 400 400 450 450 450 450 550 550 700 700 800 800 450 (2 per phs) 450 (2 per phs) 500 (2 per phs) 500 (2 per phs) 500 (2 per phs) 500 (2 per phs) 500 (2 per phs) 500 (2 per phs) 630 (2 per phs) 630 (2 per phs) 630 (2 per phs) 630 (2 per phs) 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400
Bussmann Style Fuse 170M5608 170M5608 170M5609 170M5609 170M5609 170M5609 170M6609 170M6609 170M6611 170M6611 170M6612 170M6612 170M5609 170M5609 170M6608 170M6608 170M6608 170M6608 170M6608 170M6608 170M6610 170M6610 170M6610 170M6610 170M7107 170M7107 170M7107 170M7107 170M7107 170M7107 170M8610 170M8610
20DK820 drives (ND) are only capable of producing 95% of starting torque under 10 Hz.
Table A.AK 932Volt DC Input Frames 5 & 6 Drive Protection Devices

Drive Catalog Number 20DW098 20DW142
(1)
kW Rating Frame ND HD 5 90 75 6 132 110
DC Input Ratings
Amps
92.3 92.3 162.2 134.9
Fuse 160 160 250 250
Non-Time Delay Fuse(1) HSJ160 HSJ160 HSJ250 HSJ250
A-30
Table A.AL 932 Volt DC Input Frames 9 - 14 Drive Protection Devices

kW Rating Drive Catalog Number Frame ND HD 20DM170 9 160 132 20DM208 9 200 160 20DM261 10 250 200 20DM325 10 315 250 20DM385 10 355 315 20DM416 10 400 315 20DM460 11 450 355 20DM502 11 500 400 20DM590 11 560 500 20DM650 12 630 560 20DM750 12 710 630 12 800 20DM820(1) 630 20DM920 13 900 800 20DM1K0 13 1000 900 20DM1K1 13 1100 1000 20DM1K5 14 1500 1300
(1)
DC Input Ratings
Amps
200 170 245 200 307 245 383 307 453 383 490 383 542 453 591 542 695 591 765 695 883 765 965 765 1038 925 1162 1038 1331 1162 1766 1530
Fuse 315 315 400 400 500 500 630 630 700 700 700 700 450 (2 per phs) 450 (2 per phs) 500 (2 per phs) 500 (2 per phs) 500 (2 per phs) 500 (2 per phs) 550 (2 per phs) 550 (2 per phs) 630 (2 per phs) 630 (2 per phs) 630 (2 per phs) 630 (2 per phs) 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400
Bussmann Style Fuse 170M3746 170M3746 170M5742 170M5742 170M5744 170M5744 170M5746 170M5746 170M6745 170M6745 170M6745 170M6745 170M5743 170M5743 170M5744 170M5744 170M5744 170M5744 170M5745 170M5745 170M5746 170M5746 170M5746 170M5746 170M7107 170M7107 170M7107 170M7107 170M7107 170M7107 170M8610 170M8610
20DM820 drives (ND) are only capable of producing 95% of starting torque under 10 Hz.
A-31
List of Motors with Compatible Thermistor Ratings

Motor Type Motor (kW) 1.5 2.2 3.7 3.7 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 11 11 15 15 18.5 18.5 22 22 30 37 45 55 75 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 22 30 37 55 55 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 Type (Catalog No.)(1) M-51027 M-51028 M-51001 M-51007-1 M-51002 M-51008-1 M-51003 M-51009-1 M-51004 M-51010-1 M-51005 M-51011-1 M-51012 M-51012-1 M-51013 M-51013-1 M-51050 M-51051 M-51052 M-51053 M-51054 M-51043 M-51015 M-51016 M-51017 M-51018 M-51019 M-51020 M-51021 M-51022 M-51023 M-51024 M-51026 M-51027 MC-M2051 MC-M2052 MC-M2053 MC-M2054 MC-M2055 MC-M2056 MC-M2057 MC-M2058 MC-M2059 MC-M2060 MC-M2061 MC-M2062 MC-M2063 MC-M2064 MC-M2065 MC-M2066 MC-M2067 MC-M2068 MC-M2069 Poles 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 6 6 6 6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Base Speed (RPM) 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1000 1000 1000 500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 Voltage (Vrms) 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 155 155 155 155 155 140 140 140 140 140 140 140 140 140 155 155 135 155 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 Rate Current (Arms) 7.5 11 18 18 25 25 33 33 47 47 63 63 81 81 95 95 145 183 220 265 346 5.3 11.4 15 24.5 34.8 44 67.1 80.7 120 176 210 334 315 4.7 6.3 10 15.5 20.5 29 37 45 53 71 85 97 121 163 188 227 280 335 375 Ex. Current (Arms) 2.045 3.24 5.25 8.8 11.25 14.3 16.4 19.65 23 28.15 29.7 30.55 GD2 (Kg/ m2) 0.024 0.045 0.066 0.066 0.12 0.12 0.15 0.15 0.32 0.32 0.43 0.43 0.71 0.71 0.82 0.82 0.83 1.1 1.4 2 2.7 0.0075 0.0100 0.0120 0.0180 0.0390 0.0470 0.0810 0.1370 0.2000 0.5800 0.7000 1.1000 4.0000 -
200 STD Motor
200 SVO Motor
400 STD Motor
A-32
Motor Type
400 SVO Motor

(1)
Motor (kW) 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 22 22 30 37
Type (Catalog No.)(1) MC-M20 MC-M20 MC-M20 MC-M20 MC-M20 MC-M20 MC-M20 MC-M20 MC-M20 MC-M20 MC-M20
Poles 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 6 6
Base Speed (RPM) 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1000 1000
Voltage (Vrms) 280 280 280 280 280 280 280 280 280 280 280
Rate Current (Arms) 5.4 7.3 12.3 17.3 22 34 42 58.5 58.5 88 125
Ex. Current (Arms) -
GD2 (Kg/ m2) -
Manufacturer, Reliance Electric-Japan, catalog number for ordering.
Auxiliary Power Supply
The following are manufacturers of Auxiliary Power Supplies for 300V DC.
Frame Size All Manufacturer Allen-Bradley 24V Input Drive Input - all voltage classes Refer to the PowerFlex 700S Auxiliary Control Power Supply Installation Instructions, publication 20D-IN021 for more information. Phoenix Contact: 24V Input 29 49 82 6 230V Input 29 49 81 3 Acopian U300Y20 Manufacturer Part Number 20-24V-AUX1
1-4 1-6
A-33
Drive Frame Size to HP/kW Ratings Cross Reference
Table A.AM PowerFlex 700S Drives with AC Input

208 ND Frame kW 1 0.75 1.5 2.2 4.0 5.5 2 7.5 3 11 15 4 18.5 22 5 30 37 6 45 55 66 9 10 11 12 13 14 HD kW 0.55 1.1 1.5 3.0 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 240 ND HP 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 HD HP 0.75 1.5 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 400V ND kW 0.75 1.5 2.2 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 55 75 90 110 132 132 160 200 250 250 315 355 400 450 500 560 630 710 800 480V HD kW 0.55 1.1 1.5 3.0 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 45 55 75 90 110 110 132 160 200 250 250 315 355 400 450 500 560 630 710 HD ND HP HP 1 0.75 2 1.5 3 2 5 3 7.5 5 10 7.5 15 10 20 15 25 20 30 25 40 30 50 40 60 50 75 60 100 75 125 100 150 125 200 150 200 150 250 200 300 250 350 300 450 350 500 450 500 500 600 500 700 600 800 700 900 800 1000 900 1200 1000 1250 1000 600V HD ND HP HP 1 0.75 2 1.5 3 2 5 3 7.5 5 10 7.5 15 10 20 15 25 20 30 25 40 30 50 40 60 50 75 60 100 75 125 100 150 125 150 150 200 150 250 200 350 250 400 350 450 350 500 400 500 500 600 500 700 650 800 700 900 700 1000 900 1100 1000 1300 1100 1600 1400 690V ND kW 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 315 355 400 450 500 560 630 710 800 900 1000 1100 1500 HD kW 37.5 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 315 315 355 400 500 560 630 630 800 900 1000 1300
Table A.AN PowerFlex 700S Drives with DC Input

Frame 325V ND HP 1 5.0 7.5 2 10 3 15 20 4 25 30 5 40 50 6 60 75 100 HD HP 3.0 5.0 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 540V ND kW 1.5 2.2 4.0 5.5 7.5 11.0 15 18.5 22 20 37 45 55 55 75 90 110 132 HD kW 1.1 1.5 3.0 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 45 55 75 90 110 650V ND HP 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10.0 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 100 125 150 200 HD HP 0.75 1.5 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 75 100 125 150 810V ND HP 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10.0 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 100 150 HD HP 0.75 1.5 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 75 125 932V ND kW 90 132 HD kW 75 110
A-34
Frame 325V ND HP 9 10 11 12 13 14
HD HP
540V ND kW 132 160 200 250 250 315 355 400 450 500 560 630 710 800 1000
HD kW 110 132 160 200 250 250 315 355 400 450 500 560 630 710 900
650V ND HP 200 250 300 350 450 500 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1200 1250 1500
HD HP 150 200 250 300 350 450 500 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1000 1400
810V ND HP 150 200 250 350 400 450 500 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1300
HD HP 150 150 200 250 350 350 400 500 500 650 700 700 900 1000 1100
932V ND kW 160 200 250 315 355 400 450 500 560 630 710 800 1000 1100 1300
HD kW 132 160 200 250 315 315 355 400 500 560 630 630 900 1000 1100
Approximate Dimensions
Note: For approximate dimensions of Frames 9 - 14, refer to the PowerFlex 700H and 700S Frame 9-14 Installation Instructions, publication PFLEX-IN006
Figure A.1 Frame 1-3 (Frame 1 Shown)
AA A 15.0 (0.59) D C 5.5 (0.22)
5.8 (0.23) dia.
E 312 (12.28)
8.0 (0.31)
Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches)
Frame 1 2 3
(1) (2)
(1)
Slim A 135.0 (5.31) 222.0 (8.74) 222.0 (8.74)
Expanded AA 166.9 (6.57) 253.9 (9.99) 253.9 (9.99)
B 336.0 (13.23) 342.5 (13.48) 517.5 (20.37)
C 200.0 (7.87) 200.0 (7.87) 200.0 (7.87)
Weight (2) kg (lbs.) D E Drive Drive & Packaging 105.0 (4.13) 320.0 (12.60) 7.03 (15.5) 9.98 (22) 192.0 (7.56) 320.0 (12.60) 12.52 (27.6) 15.20 (33.5) 192.0 (7.56) 500.0 (19.69) 18.55 (40.9) 22.68 (50)
Refer to Drive Frame Size to HP/kW Ratings Cross Reference on page A-33 for frame information. Weights include HIM, DriveLogix controller with ControlNet daughtercard, Hi-Resolution Encoder Option, and 20-COMM-C ControlNet adapter.
A-35
Figure A.2 Frame 1-3 Bottom Views

Frame 1
108.5 (4.27) 87.5 (3.44) 67.5 (2.66) 47.5 (1.87) 28.6 (1.13) Dia. 22.2 (0.87) Dia. 3 Places
22.4 (0.88) Dia. 2 Places
Frame 2
167.5 (6.59) 156.9 (6.18) 28.7 (1.13) Dia. 3 Places
25.5 (1.00) 162.3 (6.39) 187.6 (7.39) 133.3 (5.25) 185.1 (7.29)
157.5 (6.20) 150.9 (5.94) 112.1 (4.41)
184.8 (7.28)
43.0 (1.69) 70.0 (2.76) 75.9 (2.99) 96.0 (3.78)
39.3 (1.55) 57.2 (2.25) 72.7 (2.86) 106.0 (4.17) 139.4 (5.49) 177.4 (6.98)
Frame 3 - All Drives, except 50 HP, 480 V (37 kW, 400V)

105.3 (4.15) 22.2 (0.87) Dia. 28.7 (1.13) Dia. 2 Places 94.7 (3.73) 37.3 (1.47) Dia. 2 Places
Frame 3 - 50 HP, 480V (37 kW, 400V) Normal Duty Drive

105.3 (4.15) 94.7 (3.73) 28.7 (1.13) Dia. 2 Places 34.9 (1.37) Dia. 46.7 (1.84) Dia. 2 Places 2 Places
165.1 (6.50)
184.5 (7.26) 160.1 (6.30)
184.5 (7.26) 165.1 (6.50) 160.1 (6.30)
151.1 (5.95) 127.7 (5.03)
127.7 (5.03)
Vent Plate
22.7 (0.89) 29.0 (1.14) 66.0 (2.60) 97.0 (3.82) 137.2 (5.40) 187.0 (7.36)
22.7 (0.89) 29.0 (1.14) 66.0 (2.60) 130.0 (5.12) 186.0 (7.32)
A-36
Figure A.3 Frame 4 Dimensions

AA A D
7.0 (0.28) 2 Places
13.0 (0.55)
15.1 (0.59)
312 (12.28)
S
Lifting Holes 4 Places
7.0 (0.28) 3 Places
8.0 (0.31)
Frame (1) 4
(1) (2)
Slim A (Max.) 220.0 (8.66)
Expanded AA 251.9 (9.92)
B 758.8 (29.87)
C (Max.) 201.7 (7.94)
Refer to the Drive Frame Size to HP/kW Ratings Cross Reference on page A-33 table for frame information. Weights include HIM, DriveLogix controller with ControlNet daughtercard, Hi-Resolution Encoder Option, and 20-COMM-C ControlNet adapter.
Figure A.4 Frame 4 Bottom View

76.0 (2.99) 65.3 (2.57) 28.7 (1.13) Dia. 2 Places 47.0 (1.85) Dia. 2 Places 54.1 (2.13) Dia. 2 Places
22.2 (0.87) Dia.
65.0 (2.56) 26.8 (1.06) 36.8 (1.45) 51.5 (2.03) 63.8 (2.51) 112.8 (4.44) 180.8 (7.12)
B E
Weight (2) kg (lbs.) D E Drive Drive & Packaging 192.0 (7.56) 738.2 (29.06) 24.49 (54.0) 29.03 (64.0)
189.7 (7.47) 177.9 (7.00) 157.9 (6.21) 141.9 (5.59) 105.1 (4.14)
A-37

6.5 (0.26)
AA A
37.6 (1.48)
259.1 (10.20)
15.0 (0.59)
Detail
312 (12.28)
E
S
CAUTION
HOT surfaces can cause severe burns
6.5 (0.26) 12.5 (0.49)
Lifting Holes - 4 Places 12.7 (0.50) Dia.
Frame (1) 5
(1) (2) (3)
Slim Expanded A (Max.) AA B C (Max.) 308.0 (12.16) 339.9 (13.38) 644.5 (25.37) (2) 275.4 (10.84)
D 225.0 (8.86)
Weight (3) kg (lbs.) E Drive Drive & Packaging 625.0 (24.61) 37.19 (82.0) 42.18 (93.0)
Refer to the Drive Frame Size to HP/kW Ratings Cross Reference on page A-33 table for frame information. When using the supplied junction box (100 HP drives Only), add an additional 45.1 mm (1.78 in.) to this dimension. Weights include HIM, DriveLogix controller with ControlNet daughtercard, Hi-Resolution Encoder Option, and 20-COMM-C ControlNet adapter.
A-38

169.0 (6.65) 158.2 (6.23) 34.9 (1.37) Dia. 2 Places 22.2 (0.87) Dia. 2 Places
62.7 (2.47) Dia. 2 Places
241.9 (9.52) 229.5 (9.04) 220.0 (8.66)
184.0 (7.24) 159.5 (6.28) 96.0 (3.78)
65.0 (2.56) 93.0 (3.66) 110.0 (4.33) 150.0 (5.91) 215.0 (8.46) 280.0 (11.02) 320.0 (12.60)
107.6 (4.24) 96.9 (3.81)
34.9 (1.37) Dia. 22.2 (0.87) Dia. 2 Places 62.7 (2.47) Dia. 2 Places Removable Junction Box
241.9 (9.52) 223.5 (8.80) 188.5 (7.42) 184.3 (7.26) 153.5 (6.04) 96.0 (3.78)
65.0 (2.56) 93.0 (3.66) 109.0 (4.29)
193.0 (7.60) 297.3 (11.70)
A-39

8.5 (0.33)
AA A
49.6 (1.95) 360.6 (14.20) 18.0 (0.71)
Detail
312 (12.28)
B E
126.3 (4.97)
8.5 (0.33) 13.5 (0.53)
Lifting Holes 4 Places 12.7 (0.50) Dia.
Frame (1) 6
(1) (2) (3)
Slim Expanded Approx. Weight (2) kg (lbs.) A (Max.) AA B C (Max.) D E Drive Drive & Packaging 91.85 (202.5) 403.9 (15.90) 435.8 (17.16) 850.0 (33.46) 275.5 (10.85) 300.0 (11.81) 825.0 (32.48) 71.44 (157.5) (3)
Refer to the Drive Frame Size to HP/kW Ratings Cross Reference on page A-33 table for frame information. Weights include HIM and Standard I/O. Add an additional 3.6 kg (8.00 lbs.) for 200 HP drives.
A-40

123.5 (4.86) 112.9 (4.44) 34.9 (1.37) Dia. 22.2 (0.87) Dia. 4 Places Removable Junction Box
62.7 (2.47) Dia. 3 Places
275.5 (10.85) 219.0 (8.62) 222.3 (8.75) 148.5 (5.85) 116.6 (4.59) 185.4 (7.30)
242.0 (9.53) 151.8 (5.98)
67.3 (2.65) 114.4 (4.5) 119.4 (4.7) 136.4 (5.37) 197.4 (7.77) 297.4 (11.7) 347.4 (13.7) 397.4 (15.6)
Appendix
List of Control Block Diagrams
Flow diagrams on the following pages illustrate the drives control algorithms.
For Information on Overview Speed Control - Reference Select Speed Control - Reference Speed Control - Regulator Process Control Torque Control - Torque Torque Control - Current Speed/Position Feedback Inputs & Outputs - Digital Inputs & Outputs - Analog Control Logic Position Control - Interp/Direct Position Control - Point-to-Point Position Control - Auxiliary/Control Point-To-Point Motion Planner Phase Locked Loop Virtual Master Encoder User Functions 1 User Functions 2 Synchlink V/Hz Diagnostic Tools Inverter Overload IT DriveLogix Connection - Speed Control DriveLogix Connection - Position Control DriveLogix Connection - Motion Control See Page... B-3 B-4 B-5 B-6 B-7 B-8 B-9 B-10 B-11 B-12 B-13 B-14 B-15 B-16 B-17 B-18 B-19 B-20 B-21 B-22 B-23 B-24 B-25 B-26 B-27 B-28
B-2
Diagram Conventions and Definitions

Definitions of the Per Unit system: 1.0 PU Position = Distance traveled / 1sec at Base Spd 1.0 PU Speed = Base Speed of the Motor 1.0 PU Torque = Base Torque of the Motor Symbols: Read Only Parameter Read / Write Parameter Read Only Parameter with Bit Enumeration Read / Write Parameter with Bit Enumeration Provides additional information ( [ ) = Enumerated Parameter ] = Page and Coordinate ex. 3A2 = pg 3, Column A, Row 2 = Constant value Task 1 Task 2 Task 3 Processor Task time selection. NOTE: Faster Task time selections may require program functions to be disabled to stay within processor load capabilities.
FW TaskTime Sel FW TaskTime Actl 146 148
* Notes, Important:
(1) Parameter 147 [FW Functions En] is used to activate and deactivate firmware functions. The PowerFlex 700S drive ships with the position regulator deactivated . To enable the position regulator set p147b16 on. (2) Parameter 1000 [UserFunct Enable] is used to activate and deactivate the User Functions. (3) These diagrams are for reference only and may not accurately reflect all logical control signals; actual functionality is implied by the approximated diagrams. Accuracy of these diagrams is not guaranteed .
val = 0 0.5 mS 2.0 mS 8.0 mS
val = 1 0.5 mS 1.0 mS 8.0 mS
val = 2 0.25 mS 1.0 mS 8.0 mS
Position Control (Task 2)

PositReg P Gain 768 Posit Reg Integ 770 Notch Filter Link Motor Speed Ref 48 23 Speed Trim 3 Proportional Channel Motor Spd Fdbk Spd Reg P Gain Spd Reg I Gain Spd Reg BW Ramped Spd Ref 43 46 Scaled Spd Ref 81 82 90 300 Lead Lag Droop 86 22 Speed Trim 2 Point to Point 318 Posit Spd Output
PowerFlex 700S Phase 2

Speed Control - Regulator (Task 1)
Spd Reg PI Out 302 PI Regulator Lead Lag
overview.eps
CoarsePosit Trgt 748
Position Interpolator
Block Diagrams
+
301
Aux Posit Ref 743
Pt-Pt Posit Ref 758

Gear Rat
Reference Selection (Mode) [N] [D]
Position Feedback Selection
Position Fdbk 762
Posit Ref Sel 742 Position Offset
PI Regulator
Posit Load Fdbk
Link Integration Channel Link

Gear Rat
764
[N] [D]
Speed Control - Reference (Task 2)
Speed Ref A Sel
Selected Spd Ref
27
40
Speed Ref B Sel
28 Spd Reg PI Out 21 FricComp TrqAdd Friction Comp Inertia Trq Add Inertia Comp xxx Torque Ref Inputs 59 59 *, /, + 69 69 302 Link Speed Trim 1
Preset Spd 1
14
Linear Ramp & S Curve

Lead Lag
Torque Control (Task 1)

Mtr Trq Curr Ref Bus Volt & Power Regulator 305
Preset Spd 2
15
FOC Perm Magn & Vector Control

Notch Filter
Preset Spd 3
16
Speed Ref Selection
Preset Spd 4
17
Virtual Encoder
+
Torque Selection
1 Flux Limit
Preset Spd 5
18
Current Processing
Preset Spd 6
19
Preset Spd 7
20
Inertia Adaption
Drive & Motor Protection
Motor
E1
Process Control (Task 2)

PI Output 180 Link (not a default link)
Gear Load
E
2
PI Reference 181
PI Feedback 182 Limit
PI Regulator
PI Prop Gain 184
186
PI Lpass Filt BW
PI Integ Time
187
B-3
B-4
D I
1 Speed Ref Select A 49
Speed Control - Reference Sel

(Task 2)
Applied LogicCmd Applied LogicCmd 152 0 1 Jog Speed 1 29 39 1 Jog Speed 2 1 Preset Speed 2 15 16 17 18 19 20 7 6 5 4 3 Preset Speed 3 Preset Speed 4 Preset Speed 5 Preset Speed 6 Preset Speed 7 2 0 0 18 152 23 Selected Spd Ref 40 to 4A2
Speed Ref A Sel 27 0 1 2 Speed Ref B Sel Speed Ref 1 Spd Ref1 Divide 1 2 Speed Ref 2 12 11 10 0 0 28 Speed Ref Select B 50 152 28 29 30 0
Speed Ref 1
10
Spd Ref1 Divide
11
spd_control_ref_sel.eps
Speed Ref 2
12
X
+
4 5
Spd Ref2 Multi 3
13
MOP Level Real
1090
From 18H2
/
X
+
From 18H2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Preset Speed 1 6 7 MOP Level Real Preset Speed 1 Preset Speed 2 Preset Speed 3 Preset Speed 4 Preset Speed 5 Preset Speed 6 Preset Speed 7 Drv Mounted HIM Remote HIM Remote HIM Reserved DPI Comm DPI Port 5 DPI Port 3 DPI Port 2 DPI Port 1 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 1090 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Spd Ref2 Multi 3 13
14
Preset Speed 2
15
Preset Speed 3
16
Preset Speed 4
17
Preset Speed 5
18
Preset Speed 6
19
TestPoints P77 Spd Ref TP Sel P78 Spd Ref TP RPM P79 Spd Ref TP Data
Preset Speed 7
20
Drv Mounted HIM
DPI Port 1
Remote HIM
DPI Port 2
Remote HIM
DPI Port 3
Reserved
DPI Comm
DPI Port 5
spd_control_ref.eps
Speed Control - Reference

Control Options 153 151 Limited Spd Ref 1 41 Limit 0 157 Min Spd Ref Lim 30 31 151 00 Max Spd Ref Lim Ramp S Curve 01 0 Logic Ctrl State (SRef Ramp En) 1 04 Ramped Spd Ref 43 00 Logic Ctrl State 157 00 Logic Command (SpdRamp Hold)
(Task 2)
Selected Spd Ref
from 3H2
40
Max
53
2 21
Drive Ramp Rslt {Integer Based } Delayed Spd Ref
Applied LogicCmd
152
20
152
Inv &
Accel Time 1 Decel Time 1 33 34 32
(Unipol Fwd) +1 151 S Curve Time 157 Logic Ctrl State (SRef SCrv En) 02 Logic Command (Spd S Crv En) 01
Logic Command (SpdRamp Dsbl)
One Scan
Delay
45
(Unipol Rev ) -1
62
Virt Encdr Posit
One Scan
61 Virtual Encoder Virt Encoder EPR Delay
63 Virt Encdr Dlyed
Link 64 Inertia SpeedRef Link Logic Command (Inertia Comp) 151 9 57 58 60 10 Inertia Comp Total Inertia InertiaAccelGain InertiaDecelGain DeltaSpeedScale Ramped Spd Ref Spd Ref Bypass 37
(kn * s)+ wn s + wn
FricComp Spd Ref
FricComp Trq Add 69 151 11 Friction Comp to Torque Control [7B2]
4 56
n t
Logic Command (Frict Comp)
FricComp Setup FricComp Stick FricComp Slip FricComp Rated
65 66 67 68
Control Options 153 21 54
lpf
Inertia Trq Add 59 55 Scaled Spd Ref Speed Comp SpdRef + SpdTrm1 to Torque Control [7B2] Spd Ref Bypass2
5 Link
43
Ramped Spd Ref Control Options 153 01 (SRef Filt En) 35 SpdRef Filt Gain SpdRef Filt BW 36
X
38 Speed Ref Scale
46
Lead Lag
+
Speed Trim 1 21
47
Link
48 to Speed Control - Regulator [5A2]
B-5
B-6
D I
spd_reg.eps
Speed Control - Regulator

(Task 1)
X
Logic Ctrl State (Inrta Tst En ) 157 04 157 06 0 91 92 9 Autotune Bypass Limit 0 Rev Speed Lim Fwd Speed Lim 76 157 8 (Spd Reg En ) 5 (J Tst FulSpd ) 75 74 Atune Spd Ref Logic Ctrl State 1 1 0 Logic Ctrl State (CurrLim Stop )
Speed Trim 3
23
SpdTrim 3 Scale
24
from Speed Control - Reference [4H5]
Spd Ref Bypass 2
*
90 Spd Reg BW set param 90 = 0 to manually adjust param 81 & 82 Total Inertia
48 4x
Ovr Smpl
+ +
Spd Reg Damping SpdReg P Gain Mx
2
(kn * s)+ wn s + wn
Speed Trim 2
Posit Spd Output [13H3] 318 [14H4] from Position Control Lead Lag
22
STrim 2 Filt Gain
25
# All Regulators and Filters BW values are expressed as Radians / Second. The Notch filter is in Hertz .
SpdTrim 2 Filt BW
26
nff
SpdReg AntiBckup 84 Speed Error
FeedFwd
Logic Ctrl State (Spd Reg En )
157
08
0 0 Spd Reg PI Out
(kn * s)+ wn s + wn
Motor Speed Ref
301
+ Filter 2nd Order LPass
100
+ +
P Gain 81 Spd Reg P Gain * 102
+ kp + +
1 Limit SRegOut FiltGain 95 Lead Lag
302 to Torque Control [7A3]
Motor Spd Fdbk Spd Err Filt BW 71 Servo Lock Gain 85 89

ServoLck
300
(kn * s)+ wn s + wn
ks s
from Feedback [9H2]
Lead Lag
SRegFB Filt Gain
Filtered SpdFdbk
Spd Reg Pos Lim
93
+ I Gain 153 151 06 05 82 Spd Reg I Gain * 12
SRegFB Filt BW Control Options (Jog -NoInteg ) Logic Command (SReg IntgHld ) (SReg IntgRst ) 153 0 1 18
94
ki s
101
103 Spd Reg Neg Lim SpdReg Integ Out
SReg Out Filt BW 96
5 Control Options (SpdRegPreset ) SRegTrqPreset 87 303 Motor Torque Ref
Droop Spd Reg Droop 86
process_control.eps
1 Logic Ctrl State (ProcsTrim En )
Process Control
Logic Status (Running) 155 1
(Task 2)
OR
23
&
157 Control Options (PITrim EnOut ) 153 31
Logic Command (ProcsTrim En ) 151 12
2 183 0 0 PI Output 1 180 Typically LINK to p 22 PI Error
PI Reference
181
+ Filter
kp +
Limit PI High Limit PI Lower Limit 190 Limit PI Integ Output 192 191 P Gain 186
LPass PI Feedback PI Lpass Filt BW 184 PI Prop Gain 182
ki s
151 15 187 185 PI Integ HLim PI Integ LLim 189 188 Logic Command (PI Trim Hold ) (PI Trim Rst) 14 I Gain PI Integ Time PI Preload
Limit Gen Hi Out

1
Time Axis Output 203 LimGen X axis In 206

-1 +1
-1
207 Limit Gen Lo Out 208
Time Axis Rate 153 24
202
5 151 3
Control Options (Time Axis En )
OR
Time Func Generator LimGen Y axis Mn LimGen Y axis Mx 205 204
Limit Generator TestPoints P178 PI TP Sel P179 PI TP Data
Logic Command (Time Axis En )
B-7
B-8
D I
TestPoints
P130 Trq Ref TP Sel P131 Trq Ref TP Data
Torque Control - Torque

(Task 1)
torque_control_torq.eps
Spd/Torque Mode 110 Logic Ctrl State (Forced Spd ) Motor Spd Fdbk 132 01 02 133 134 00 300 0 1 0 1 Logic Ctrl State (Torq Ref En ) 157 Inert Adapt BW Inert Adapt Gain 0 0 1 09 2 Inert Adapt Sel (Inrtia Adapt ) (Load Est) (First Diff) 157 10 Total Inertia 9
from Speed Control 0
Inertia Adaption
Spd Reg PI Out [5H4]
302
Inertia Trq Add [4H5]
59
+ + + Min
3 4 319 5 1 Selected Trq Ref
FricComp Trq Add [4G4]
69
Max + +
Notch
II R
Torque Ref 1
111
Limit
Motor Torque Ref 303
Torque Ref1 Div
112
/
+ +
Torque Step NotchAttenuation Notch Filt Freq 7 118 117 116 6
Torque Ref 2
113
Limit Status 304
Torque Ref2 Mult
114
X
Abs Min
+ + +
Torque Trim
115
Slat Min
8 108 109 SLAT Forced Spd 48 Spd Reg TP
Speed Error
100
Filter
[5C4]
89
2nd Order LPass
SLAT Error Setpoint
119
Slat Max
SLAT Dwell Time 415
120
BusReg /Brake Ref
100 401
/
Mtring Power Lim 127
DC Bus Voltage
306
Motor Spd Fdbk
300
Torque Pos Limit
125
Power Limit Calc
Min
123 Torque PosLim Actl
Rated Volts
X
+
X
+ + +
+ Bus Volt Regulator Limit

03 128 Regen Power Lim
5 0.045 00 02 Brake/Bus Cnfg (Bus Reg En )
X
414
Cur Lim MC
Flux
-1
from 8H2 353 Iq Actual Lim 126 Torque Neg Limit Flux
Brake/Bus Cnfg (Brake Enable ) (BusRef High )
414
-1
&
Max
124 Torque NegLim Actl
torque_control_current.eps
Torque Control - Current

(Task 1)
OL OpnLp CurrLim 343 Is Actual Lim
pu Stator Current Fdbk from Motor Control IT-openloop 356 Mtr Current Lim Motor NP FLA Output Current MotorFluxCurr FB 2 Flux Current * 312 488 Calc Iq
Min
352
Is
Iq Actual Lim
X
308 Max = inverter 3 sec rating
Min
353
to 7F5
OL ClsLp CurrLim 344 Control Options (OL ClsLpDsbl ) Drive OL JnctTemp Heatsink Temp 153 345 313 346 13 IT-closedloop
3 26
Control Options (Trq Trim En ) 0 303 1 Control Options (Trq Trim En ) Logic Ctrl State (CurrRef En ) 157 0 1 11 0.0 Iq Actual Ref 1 359 Motor Flux Est Iq Ref Trim Limit Torque NegLim Actl 124 351 1.02 Flux 0
Filter
153
Drive OL Status Motor Torque Ref
0.0
Motor Torque Ref
303 153 26
from 7H3
kp+
ki s
PI Reg
Iq Ref Limited 355 Limit 304 Rate Lim Iq Delay Option
Mtr Trq Curr Ref 305 to Motor Control
4 1 Flux 350
Torque Est
Calc Flux LPass
% Motor Flux
Limit Status 354 Iq Rate Limit
309
153
11 Control Options (Iq Delay )
Flx LpassFilt BW
361 Min Flux 1.0 360
Torque PosLim Actl
123
1.02 Flux
* Calculated by Autotune
(may be overwritten )
TestPoints P357 Curr Ref TP Sel P358 Curr Ref TP Data
B-9
B-10
D I
Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri 222 Mtr Fdbk Alt Sel 223 0 Posit Fdbk Sel 0 777 Motor Spd Fdbk 0 1 1 1 1
Filter
1 151 2 Encdr0 Spd Fdbk 231 230 Encdr0 Position 0 234 Encdr 0/1 Error Encdr1 Spd Fdbk 241 240 Encdr1 Position 1 Spd Fdbk Scale 2 Position Fdbk 3 MtrSpd Simulated 228 4 4 4 4 235 239 236 Encdr0 RegisLtch Encdr1 RegisLtch Enc0/1 RegisCnfg 257 258 254 Opt 0 Regis Ltch Opt 1 Regis Ltch Opt0/1 RegisCnfg When p777 = 3, Position Fdbk will follow p 222 [Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri ] 762 to Position Control [13A4] & [14B4] LPass 73 Logic Status (TachLoss Sw ) 155 12 0 300 153 16 FdbkLoss Detect to Speed Control [5A4] Control Options (AutoTach Sw )
Logic Command (TachLoss Rst )
Speed/Posit Fdbk
(Task 1)
** Encoder 0
spd_posit_fdback.eps
Encoder 0 PPR
Processing
232
Encdr 0/1 Config
233
** Encoder 1
To HIM Display Scaled Spd Fdbk
Encoder 1 PPR
Processing
242
72
Motor Speed Est
226
3 227 Motor Posit Est Accum
1 1-Z-1
Virt Edge /Rev
225
1 1-Z-1
229 MtrPosit Simulat Accum FB Opt0 Spd Fdbk 251 5 5 5 5 260 Stegmann 0 Status Heidenhain 0 Stat Resolver 0 Status FB Opt1 Posit 252 6 264 269 250 FB Opt0 Posit
Motor Simulator
Spd Calc
Stegmann0 Cnfg
259
TestPoints
Heidenhain0 Cnfg
263
Resolver 0 Config
268
** Feedback Option Card 0
237
Enc0/1 RegisCtrl
255
Opt0/1 RegisCtrl
Fdbk Option ID
249
Processing
P245 Spd Fdbk TP Sel P246 Spd Fdbk TP RPM P247 Spd Fdbk TP Data
** Feedback Processing
238
Enc0/1 RegisStat
256
Opt0/1 RegisStat
Reslvr0 SpdRatio
272
Encoder 0/1 Registration
Option 0/1 Registration
Reslvr0 Carrier
273
Reslvr0 In Volts
274
Rslvr0 XfrmRatio
275
Reslvr0 CableBal
276
Each Feedback device has an FIR filter with the number of taps adjustable . Default setting for each FIR filter is 8 taps. Increasing the number of taps increases the filtering of the Speed feedback signal . Reducing the number of taps reduces the filtering of the Speed feedback signal . See parameter descriptions for the following . Parameter 233 Encdr 0/1 Config Parameter 263 Heidenhain 0 Cnfg Parameter 259 Stegmann 0 Config Parameter 268 Resover 0 Config
in_out_digital.eps
24vDC Inputs Local I/O Status [DigIn 1] 824 TB2-01 TB2-02 Debounce Dig In1 Sel 825
Selector
1 SynchLink 24 VDC Bit Filter 823 DigIn Debounce 03 04 05 SynchLink Bit Filter Dig In2 Sel 826
Selector
{DI 1-3 Common} 24 VDC Common
01
TB2-09
Inputs & Outputs - Digital

(Task 1)
Digital Output Selections
TB2-10
TB2-11 01 02
TB2-12
Prt0/1 RegisCnfg
236
08 09
Digital Input Selections

824 02
10 11
Local I/O Status [DigIn 2]
2 Debounce 06 07 823 DigIn Debounce 08 09 10 Local I/O Status [DigIn 3] 824 03
0) User Select 1) Not Fault 2) Not Alarm 3) Ready 4) Running 5) Reserved 6) Reserved 7) Enable On 8) Active 9) At Speed 10) At Setpt 1 11) Above Setpt2 12) At ZeroSpeed 13) Speed Limit 14) CurrentLimit
15) Torque Limit 16) Power Limit 17) Fault 18) Alarm 19) Command Dir 20) Actual Dir 21) Jogging 22) In Position 23) Posit Watch1 24) Posit Watch2 25) Cmpr 1 A </=B 26) Cmpr 1 A >/=B 27) Cmpr 2 A </=B 28) Cmpr 2 A >/=B
823 Dig In3 Sel 827

Selector
11 12
Debounce
3 15 Local I/O Status [DigIn 4] 824 04 Dig Out1 Data Dig Out1 Bit 823 Dig In4 Sel 828
Selector
24vDC / 115vAC Inputs S4 - Open for 115vAC
DigIn Debounce 13 14
0) Not Used 1) Enable 2) Clear Faults 3) Ext Fault 4) Norm Stop-CF 5) Start 6) Reverse 7) Run 8) Reserved 9) Reserved 10) Jog 1 11) Reserved 12) Reserved 13) Jog 2 14) Normal Stop 15) Spd Ref Sel0 16) Spd Ref Sel1 17) Spd Ref Sel2 18) CurLim Stop 19) Coast Stop 20) AccelDecel2
21) BscIndx Step 22) BscIndxStpRv 23) MOP Inc 24) MOP Dec 25) MOP Reset 26) PI Trim En 27) PI Trim Hold 28) PI Trim Rst 29) Trend Trig 30) PreCharge En 31) Reserved 32) +Hrd OvrTrvl 33) -Hrd OvrTrvl 34) UserGen Sel0 35) UserGen Sel1 36) UserGen Sel2 37) UserGen Sel3 38) ExtFault Inv 39) Home Switch 40) Find Home 41) Return Home
{DI 4-6 Common}
TB2-13 Debounce
846 847
Local I /O Status (Dig Out 1) 824 Delay Dflt = 3 Dig Out1 Sel 845
Selector
16 TB2-03 TB2-04 Dig Out1 On Time Dig Out1 Off Time Local I /O Status (Dig Out 2) 824 848 849 TB2-05
TB2-14 16 17
TB2-15 DigIn Debounce 18 19 20 Local I/O Status [DigIn 5] 824 05
TB2-16
{Hw Enable}
Dig Out2 Data 823 Dig In5 Sel 829

Selector
851 Dig Out2 Bit 852
17 Delay Dflt = 8 Dig Out2 Sel 850 Dig Out2 On Time

Selector Dig Out2 Off Time
21 22
Debounce
DigIn Debounce 23 24 25 Local I/O Status [DigIn 6] 824
853 854 06 Rly Out3 Data 856 824 18 Local I /O Status (Relay Out 3)
5 823 DigIn Debounce 28 29 30 26 27 Debounce
Dig In6 Sel 830

Selector
Rly Out3 Bit
857
TB2-06 Delay Dflt = 1 Rly Out3 Sel 855

Selector
TB2-07 Rly Out On Time Rly Out Off Time 858 859 TB2-08
When DI 6 is set for Hardware Enable , p830 is not available
Hw Enable Jumper Bypass
155 824
21
Logic Status [Hw Enable On] Local I /O Status 00 [Hw Enbl Byps]
B-11
B-12
D I
1 TB1-13 TB1-14 801 Anlg In1 Value TB1-15 Anlg In1 Data -10v Ref Ref Common +10v Ref
Inputs & Outputs - Analog

(Task 1)
Analog Output Selections
Analog I/O Units (AI1 Current)
821
00
in_out_analog.eps
TB1-01
+ +
800 Lead Lag 802 AI 1 Filt Gain Anlg In 1 Filt BW 805 804
TB1-02
A/D 14bit
(kn * s)+ wn s + wn
Anlg In1 Offset
803
Anlg In1 Scale
TB1-03
Shield
User Defined P310 Output Freq P040 Selected Spd Ref P308 Output Current P499 Trq CurFdbk (Iq) P309 % Motor Flux P311 Output Power P307 Output Voltage P306 DC Bus Voltage P181 PI Reference P182 PI Feedback P183 PI Error P180 PI Output 16) 17) 18) 19) 20) 21) 22) 23) 24) 25) 26) 27) MtrTrqCurRef Speed Ref Speed Fdbk Torque Est Scl Spd Fdbk RampedSpdRef Spd Reg Out MOP Level Trend 1 Dint Trend 1 Real Trend 2 Dint Trend 2 Real P303 Motor Torque Ref
P305 Mtr Trq Curr Ref P301 Motor Speed Ref P071 Filtered SpdFdbk P471 Estimated Torque P072 Scaled Spd Fdbk P043 Ramped Spd Ref P302 Spd Reg PI Out P1090 MOP Level Real P572 Trend Out1 DInt P573 Trend Out1 Real P576 Trend Out2 DInt P577 Trend Out2 Real
Analog I/O Units (AI2 Current) 807 Anlg In2 Value Anlg In2 Data
821
01
TB1-04
+ +
806 Anlg Out 1 DInt Anlg Out 1 Real 833 832 Lead Lag 808
0) User Select 1) Output Freq 2) Sel Spd Ref 3) Output Curr 4) Trq Cur (Iq) 5) % Motor Flux 6) Output Power 7) Output Volts 8) DC Bus Volts 9) PI Reference 10) PI Feedback 11) PI Error 12) PI Output 13) Reserved 14) Reserved 15) Motor TrqRef
TB1-05
A/D 14bit
+
+
810 811 Anlg Out1 Sel Anlg Out 1 Offset Anlg Out 1 Scale 835 Anlg In3 Data 834 831
Selector
(kn * s)+ wn s + wn
Anlg In2 Offset
809
Shield
TB1-08
Anlg In2 Scale AI 2 Filt Gain Anlg In 2 Filt BW Dflt = 18
+
Analog I/O Units (AO1 Current) 821 16
X
Limit
+
836 Anlg Out 1 Zero 1 [x]
D/A 12bit
TB1-09
4 813 Anlg In3 Volts
Analog I/O Units (AI3 Thermstr) 10 [x]
821
02
+
837
TB1-10
TB1-06
+ +
812 Anlg Out 2 DInt Anlg Out 2 Real 840 839 Lead Lag 814 AI 3 Filt Gain 816 817 Anlg Out2 Sel Anlg In 3 Filt BW
Anlg Out1 Value
TB1-07
A/D 10bit
(kn * s)+ wn s + wn
Anlg In3 Offset
815
Anlg In3 Scale
+
Dflt = 3 838
Selector
TB1-08
Shield
Analog I/O Units (AO2 Current)
821
17
841
Analog Input Filter Settings

Gain Light Filter Heavy Filter BW
Anlg Out2 Offset
X
Limit Anlg Out 2 Scale 842 10 [x] 1 [x] 843 Anlg Out 2 Zero
D/A 12bit
TB1-11
+
844
TB1-12
0.25 0.1
50 10
Anlg Out 2 Value
control_logic.eps
1 Logic Command 151
Control Logic
(Task 3)
Dig In1 Sel
825 0 1
FromDriveLogix 00
602 0 Applied LogicCmd 152
val = "Enable"
Enable Circuit
from DriveLogix High (1) Dig In1

824 01 15 0
15
2 15 826 0 1 Drive Logic Rslt 158 0 31
31
b00 b01 b02 b03 b04 b05 b06 b07 b08 b09 b10 b11 b12 b13 b14 b15
SpdRamp Dsbl Spd S Crv En TachLoss Rst Time Axis En SpdRamp Hold SReg IntgHld SReg IntgRst Reserved Reserved Ext Flt/Alm Inertia Comp Frict Comp PI Trim En Position En PI Trim Hold PI Triim Rst
Dig In2 Sel High (1) Dig In2

824 02
val = "Enable"
Port 7
Drv Mounted HIM
Port 1
15
Port 2
TestPoints P161 Logic TP Sel P162 Logic TP Data Dig In3
0 15
Port 3
Logic Parser
Dig In3 Sel
827
val = "Enable"
0
High (1)
824 03
External DPI Connection
Port 5
15
Port 0
Dig In4 Sel
828
val = "Enable" High (1) Dig In4

824 04 0 1
Logic Status [Enable On ]
Aux. External DPI Connection
&
val = "Enable" Dig In5 Sel
829
155
15
15
to Software Enable Control
Masks
Owners
High (1) Dig In5

824 05
0 1
Internal DPI Comm Device
15
Dig In6 Sel
830
val = "Enable" High (1) Dig In6

824 06 0 1 Hw Enable Jumper 155 Logic Status 21 [Hw Enable On]
Digital Inputs
Normal Stop Start Jog 1 Clear Fault Forward Reverse Reserved Jog 2 CurrLim Stop Coast Stop Reserved Reserved Spd Ref Sel 0 Spd Ref Sel 1 Spd Ref Sel 2 Reserved
SpdRamp Dsbl Spd S Crv En TachLoss Rst Time Axis En SpdRamp Hold SReg IntgHld SReg IntgRst Reserved Reserved Ext Flt/Alm Inertia Comp Frict Comp PI Trim En Position En PI Trim Hold PI Triim Rst
Normal Stop Start Jog 1 Clear Fault Forward Reverse Reserved Jog 2 CurrLim Stop Coast Stop Reserved Reserved Spd Ref Sel 0 Spd Ref Sel 1 Spd Ref Sel 2 Reserved
15
to Hardware Enable Circuit
670 671 672 673 674
Logic Mask Start Mask Jog Mask Direction Mask Fault Clr Mask
677 678 679 680 681
Stop Owner Start Owner Jog Owner Direction Owner Fault Clr Owner
Note: The following parameters are typically referenced when configuring or monitoring Control Logic; p155 [Logic Status] p156 [Start Inhibits]
Bypass
824
Local I/O Status 00 [Hw Enbl Byps ]
When p824 bit 0 is low, p830 is not available and Dig In6 is used for Hardware Enable exclusively
B-13
B-14
1 751 Interp Speed
752
Interp AccelRate
Position Control - Interp/Direct

* PositRef EGR Out
742 Posit Ref Sel 744
(Task 2)
747
Coarse Spd Trgt

x x x
750 Interp Position 749 Aux Posit Ref 2 PositRef EGR Div 746 PositRef EGR Mul 745 743 1
Gear Rat
CoarsePosit Trgt 0
748
pos_control_inter_dir.eps
Position Control (Interp Rev)
740
13
Interpolator
[N] [D] + +
* Position Cmmd
2 00
Xsync Status (Sync Pulse) See Point-to-Point Position Control Diagram page 8
786
00
693
Motn Posit Sync
700
00
Interp SyncInput
753 754
Filter
p786 or p700 must be linked to p 693 for proper Interpolator operation Posit Offset 1 X Offst SpdFilt Posit Offset 2 Posit Offset Spd 755 740 741 05 Position Status (XOffReRef Act ) 740 Position Error 05 04 157 Position Control (X Offset Pol ) Position Control (XOff ReRef ) Rate Lim LPass 03
+
756 [15H5] Logic Ctrl State (position enable ) Output Enable 740 01
&
Posit Spd Output 0 0 1 318
II R
763
*
Position Actual
Position Fdbk
+ P Gain Limit XReg Spd LoLim Posit Gear Ratio

Motor Speed ( Gear Output Spd )
769
Calib Const
kp
+
Position Status 741 741 2 3 X Notch Attenu X Notch FiltFreq 774 778 779 775 776 XReg Spd HiLim
to Speed Control - Regulator [5A2] Notch
from Speed /Posit Fdbk [9H3] 796 PositReg P Gain 768
762
Link
+ I Gain Limit
Calib Const
+ -
ki s
Position Status
Posit Load Fdbk

Gear Rat
764
[N] [D]
765 Posit Actl Load XReg Integ LoLim XReg Integ HiLim 740 740 157 03 03 02 772 773 Droop 766 767
XReg Integ Out
741 741 00 01
This point is a delta change. When the position loop is first enabled the position command and feedback delta are zero.
Posit FB EGR Mul
*
770
PositReg Integ
Posit FB EGR Div
Position Control Xzero Preset
740
08
Abs Posit Offset On the rising edge (activation) of p741 bit 7 [15H5] the following bit assignments occur :
757
Position Control (Integ En)
Position Control (Integ Hold )
Inv
&
PositReg Droop
771
[15H5]
Logic Ctrl State (position enable )
1) If p740 bit 8 is set , then p763, p765, p744, and p747 get loaded with [Position Fdbk (p762) - Abs Posit Offset (p757 )]. 2) If p740 bit 8 is reset, then p763, p765, p744, and p747 get loaded with the reference value (prior to reference derivative function in coordinate [D2]).
pos_control_pt_to_pt.eps
1
This point is a delta change . When the position loop is first enabled the position command and feedback delta are zero.
742 Position Control AbsPositCtrl 740 1 Position Cmmd 06 0 744
Position Control - Point-to-Point

(Task 2)
* PositRef EGR Out *
Position Control AbsPositCtrl 740 06 Position Control SetZeroPosit 740 09
Posit Ref Sel
[N] [D] + +
747
Gear Rat
2 2 PositRef EGR Div 741 Position Status (PtPtRRef Act ) Posit Offset 1 753 754
Filter
See Interpolated /Direct Position Control Diagram Page 6 1 PositRef EGR Mul 746 745
Pt-Pt Posit Ref 4 X Offst SpdFilt
758
756
740
10
Reref
Position Control (Pt-Pt ReRef) Posit Offset 2 Posit Offset Spd 755 740 741 740 05 04 Position Control (X Offset Pol ) Position Control (XOff ReRef ) Rate Lim LPass
1) Parameter 740 b06 may be set when a multi -turn absolute feedback device is used for Point to Point positioning . Activating p 740 b06 will ReRef the position reference to the absolute feedback when position control is activated (p741 b07). If the value at p 758 is different than the feedback in 763 a position error will exist and the machine will move to position when activated . 2) When p740 b06 is high the [SetZeroPosit ] p740 b09 may be used to set the zero home position accumulators . This can only be used when the drive is not in run and p740 b06 = 1. 3) When p740 b06 is high, p745 & p746 are bypassed . In absolute mode the point to point position regulator can only use raw counts as position command .
from [15H5] Logic Ctrl State 157 PositSpfRef > 0.01 Position Control (Pt-PtRmpStop ) 740 20 03
3 Position Status 05 (XOffReRef Act )
OR &
Speed Out Enable
740
01
&
0 0
II R
Position Fdbk
762
769 Posit Gear Ratio PositReg P Gain 763 Position Actual 796 768 761 759 760
+
Calib Const
Position Error
Motor Speed ( Gear Output Spd )
Posit Spd Output 1 Limit Notch 318 to Speed Control - Regulator [5A2]
from Speed /Posit Fdbk [9H3]
Point to Point Position
X Notch Attenu X Notch FiltFreq Position Status 741 741 0 02 (X Spd LLim ) 03 (X Spd HLim )
778 779
Pt-Pt Filt BW Pt-Pt Accel Time Pt-Pt Decel Time
5 from [15H5] Logic Ctrl State 157 03
Position Control Xzero Preset
740
08
Abs Posit Offset On the rising edge (activation) of p741 bit 7 [15H5] the following bit assignments occur : XReg Spd LoLim 775
757
Inv
740 20
&
XReg Spd HiLim 776
1 0 0 1
Position Control (Pt-PtRmpStop )
1) If p740 bit 8 is set , then p763, p765, p744, and p747 get loaded with [Position Fdbk (p762) - Abs Posit Offset (p757 )]. 2) If p740 bit 8 is reset, then p763, p765, p744, and p747 get loaded with the reference value (prior to reference derivative function in coordinate [D2]).
B-15
B-16
D I
1 Sync Generator
Position Control - Aux / Control

(Task 2)
789 Position Actual 791 740 740 780 17 16 Xsync Out 2 (Integer ) 763 Link 784 741 08 Xsync Out 2 Dly (Integer ) Position Control (X Watch 1 En) (X Watch 1 Dir) Position Status (Posit Watch 1) Posit Detct1 In Xsync Out 1 (Integer )
Xsync In 1 (Integer ) Latch
788
Xsync In 2 (Integer ) Latch Delay 794 Latch 763 740 740 781 19 Position Control (X Watch 2 En) (X Watch 2 Dir) 18 Link 785 741 09 Delay Xsync Out 3 (Real) PositDetct 1 Stpt Position Actual Posit Detct2 In Position Status (Posit Watch 2) Xsync Out 3 Dly (Real) 792
790
One Scan Position Watch 1
pos_control_aux_control.eps
Xsync In 3 (Real) 795
793
One Scan Position Watch 2
SL System Time (Sec)

0.5ms
317 786 PositDetct 2 Stpt

0.5ms * 2(p787)
3 Sync Pulse Generator Position Error 769
0.5ms
Xsync Status 00 (Sync Pulse)
Xsync Gen Period
787
741
10
Position Status (In Position)
In Position Detect
In Posit BW In Posit Dwell 783 782
Pos Reg On (p741 bit 7) needs to be set to activate the position regulator . 740 7 Power up
Auxiliary Control
Position Control (AbsoluteMode )
Position Control
(BscIndx Prst)
740
14
OR
(BscIndx Step ) Position Control 740 11 (BscIndx Enbl )
740
12
Posit Ref Sel = (Pt to Pt)
&
&
OR
(BscIndxStpRv )
740
15
Motion Connection = Active Posit Ref Sel = (Interpolate ) Logic Command (PositionEnbl ) 151 13
Position Status (Regulator On )
(BscIndx Rev)
740
13
OR
&
OR
741
07
X
+ +
BasicIndx Output 799
Applied LogicCmd (PositionEnbl )
-1
FW Functions En (PositionCtrl ) 147 16
&
152
13
&
Logic Ctrl State (Running ) 155 01
157
03
Logic Ctrl State (Position En) [13G3] & [14G4] & [14B4]
BasicIndex Step
797
BasicIndexPreset
798
Position Control Point to Point Motion Planner

(Task 2)
pt_to_pt_motion_plan.eps
PPMP Control (Over Ride En) 1134 PPMP Over Ride PPMP Control (Scaling_En) 1137 1133 0 1 1134 4 PPMP Scaled Cmd 1136 PPMP Fwd Spd Lim 1138 PPMP Rev Spd Lim 5 8 1134
PPMP Control (Pause)
PPMP Pos Command
1130
X
X
1144 PPMP Pos To GO 1142 PPMP Spd Output
PPMP Pos Mul
1131
PPMP Pos Div 1132
/
Scale
Profile Gen. 741 147 151 PPMP Control Absolute 0 1 2 7 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Start xxxx Scaling Enable Override En S Curve En Cond Hold 1135 Absolute Incremental 0 PPMP Status 8 9 Pause Re-Synch 10 Zero Speed 11 Done 12 Running Incremental Start Cond_Hold Re_Synch 1134 1139 PPMP Accel Time 13 1140 PPMP Decel Time 1134 6 PPMP Control (S -Curve En) 1141 PPMP SCurve 19 7 S Curve
Position Status (Regulator On)
1143 PPMP Pos Output
FW_Funct (MotinPlanner)
&
Command Interpreter
Position Enable
TestPoints P 1145 TP Select P1146 TP Dint Out P1147 TP Real Out
B-17
B-18
D I
Phase Locked Loop

(Task 1)
730 PLL LPFilter BW PLL Control (ACOMP) PLL Control (VFF) 720 2 720 0
1 720 1
PLL Ext SpdScale
PLL Control (EXT)
phase_lock_loop.eps
729
PLL Ext Spd Ref PLL Bandwidth FW_Funct (PhaseLockLp) 147 734 PLLSpeedOut Adv PLL Speed Out 24
728
X Lpf
722 0 735 0 731 732 0 733 PLL Posit OutFil PLL Posit Out PLL Posit OutAdv
X to V Conv + VE
PLL Position Ref
721
+ -
Loop Filter +
[ ] [ ]
727 PLL VirtEncdrRPM 59 Inertia Trq Add
EGR
54
Icomp lpf
lpf Inertia Comp
4 PLL Rev Input 726 PLL EPR Output PLL EPR Input 725 724 PLL Rev Output 723
X
153 21 Control Options
Test Points P717 PLL TP Select P718 PLL DataInt P719 PLL DataReal
62 Virt Encdr Posit (Task 2)
Ramped Spd Ref
Virtual Master Encoder

(Task 1)
(Task 2) (Task 1)
virtual_master_encoder.eps
43
One Scan
63 Virt Encdr Dlyed (Task 2) Delay Virt Encdr Posit (Task 1) 1160
Virtual Encoder Position Task 1 (P1160) and Task 2 (P62) synchronize every Task 2 scan with the value of P62.
61
Virtual Encoder
Virt Encoder EPR
2 User Functions (Task 1) EGR Config 1161 2 EGR Position Output 1165 01 00 Output Selection
Execution order for Virtual Master in Task 1 1. Execute Virtual Encoder and output P1160 2. Execute EGR user function and output P1165 3. Read Virtual Master Position Reference P1155 4. Update SynchLink registers
EGR Position Input
1164 Deriv
EGR
[N] [D]
1 Accum 0 1166 3 0 1162 1163
When EGR config (P1161) = 0x01, the accumulator integrates the EGR output (P1165) with the result of EGR function.
EGR Position Preset
Activation - Virtual Encoder: P147.bit04 (Virtual Encorder) = 1 - EGR user function: P1000.bit07 (EGR) = 1 - Virtual Master: Connect Heidenhain Option card
EGR Mul
EGR Div
Heidn Encdr Type (VrtlMaster En) 266 06
Heidn0 Cnfg (VrtlMaster Invert Dir) 263 07
(C09.bit22)
(C09.bit23)
Heidenhain Option Card
1155 VrtlMaster PosRef
(C0E)
1 Heidenhain 0 Encoder VrtlMaster Encoder (C0F) (C07) (C0D)
5 SynchLink System Time at Position data update 317
+ -
Update Time Delay
(SynchLink Interface)
SynchLink System Time at beginning of VScan 317
VrtlMaster PPR Heidn Mkr Offset
1156 263
B-19
B-20
D I
Bit Swap operation

BitSwap 1 Result xx
User Functions
(Task 3)
BitSwap 1A Data
xx
32bit Word A (Data) x
BitSwap 1A Bit MOP Rate

Rate
xx 1087 1086
Increment Decrement Reset Limit
user_functions_1.eps
BitSwap 1B Data Increase Decrease Reset BitSwap 1 Result 864 BitSwap 4A Bit 876 MOP High Limit BitSwap 4B Data 877 MOP Low Limit MOP Scale DInt BitSwap 2 Result 869 BitSwap 5A Bit 881 DelayTimer 1PrSet BitSwap 5B Data 882 883 DelayTimer 1 Bit BitSwap 6A Data BitSwap 6A Bit 886 887 888 BitSwap 6B Data BitSwap 6B Bit Bit Swap 889 DelayTimer 2PrSet DelayTimer 2 Data 1115 1113 1114 885 BitSwap 6 Result DelayTimer 2Stats 00 Enabled 1117 00 Timing 00 Done 1116 DelayTimer 2 Bit DelayTimer 2Accum 1109 DelayTimer 1 Data 1108 BitSwap 5B Bit 1110 BitSwap 5A Data Bit Swap 884 880 BitSwap 5 Result DelayTimer 1Stats 00 Enabled 1112 00 Timing 1089 1091 878 BitSwap 4B Bit 1088 Reset @PwrLs 1086 04 BitSwap 4A Data Bit Swap 879 875 Reset @ Stop 1086 03 BitSwap 4 Result 1086 02 1086 01 00
xx
1) Word A "Data" is passed to the "Result" 2) The selected "Bit" of Word A is replaced (swapped) with the selected "Bit" of Word B
1090 MOP Level Real
BitSwap 1B Bit
xx
MOP
BitSwap 1A Data
860
BitSwap 1A Bit
861
Bit Swap
Convert DInt-Real x Scale
1092
BitSwap 1B Data
862
BitSwap 1B Bit
863
BitSwap 2A Data
865
BitSwap 2A Bit
866
Bit Swap
BitSwap 2B Data
867
BitSwap 2B Bit
868
(Task 1)
BitSwap 3 Result 874
Delay Timer 1
00 Done 1111 DelayTimer 1Accum
BitSwap 3A Data
870
BitSwap 3A Bit
871
Bit Swap
BitSwap 3B Data
872
BitSwap 3B Bit
873
(Task 2)
Delay Timer 2
user_functions_2.eps
Sel Swtch Ctrl DInt2Real1 Result SelSwtch RealOut (Real) 1045 DInt2Real2 Result DInt2Real2 In DInt2Real2 Scale 1151 Real2DInt Result Real2DInt In 1050 1051 1052 Real2DInt Scale AddSub 2 Add AddSub 2 Subtrct AddSub 2 Input 1150 1152 AddSub 1 Subtrct 1098 AddSub 1 Add 1097 SelSwtch DIntOut (Integer ) 1046 with Rounding DInt2Rea1l Scale 1048 AddSub 1 Input 1096 DInt2Real1 In 1047
1022
00
User Functions
Convert DInt-Real x Scale
1049
Sel Swtch Ctrl
1022
01 02 03 04
(Task 3)
SelSwtch In 00 (Real)
1029
+ +
AddSub 1 Result
1030
1099
1031
Convert Dint-Real x Scale

1100 1101 1102
1032
AddSub 2 Result 1103
1033
SelSwtch In 05 (Real) MulDiv 1 Input MulDiv 1 Mul 1054 1055 MulDiv 1 Div 1053
1034
Convert Real-DInt x Scale
AddSub 3 Input AddSub 3 Add
1104 1105 AddSub 3 Subtrct 1106
1035
AddSub 3 Result
1071 Logic/Cmpr State Compare 1A Compare 1B 1072 1062
1107
1036
** Selector Switch can be controlled via the Digital Inputs or Parameter 1022.Use UserGen Selx as the Digital input type. The Digital input selection is an OR function with Parmeter 1022.
X
MulDiv 1 Result
3 MulDiv 2 Input MulDiv 2 Mul 1058 1059 MulDiv 2 Div 1057
1037
/
1056
Selector Switch Control Table
1038
04 (Cmpr 1 A</=B)
1039
10
X /
1060
MulDiv 2 Result
< = > =
1073 Compare 2A Logic/Cmpr State (Logic 1 Result) 1062 00 (Logic 3 Result) 1062 02 Compare 2B 1074
1062
05 (Cmpr 1 A>/=B)
SelSwtch In 11 (Real) Logic Config 1061 xx
1040
11
Digital In P 1022 UserGen Sel0 OR P1022 Bit 1 UserGen Sel1 OR P1022 Bit 2 UserGen Sel2 OR P1022 Bit 3 UserGen Sel3 OR P1022 Bit 4
Logic/Cmpr State 1062 06 (Cmpr 2 A</=B)
SelSwtch In 12 (Real) Logic 1A Data Logic 1A Bit Logic 1B Data Logic 1B Bit 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 Logic 2A Data Logic 2A Bit SW DInt 1 Output 1028 Logic 2B Data Logic 2B Bit 1065 1064 1063
1041
12
1042
13
1043
14
< = > =
1062
07 (Cmpr 2 A>/=B)
1044
15
And, Nand, Or, Nor, Xor, Nxor And, Nand, Or, Nor, Xor, Nxor
User Functions - Execution order (Logic 2 Result) 1062 01
Sel Switch Ctrl (SW DInt 1 On)
1022
06
SW DInt 1 NC
1026
SW DInt 1 NO
1027
Sel Switch Ctrl (SW Real 1 On) SW Real 1 Output 1025
1022
05
SW Real 1 NC
1023
SW Real 1 NO
1024
1) Selector Switch Function (16 input) 2) Real SPDT Selector switch (2 input) 3) DInt SPDT Selector switch (2 input) 4) Logic Function 5) Comparator 1 6) Comparator 2 7) Data Conversion 1 DInt to Real 8) Data Conversion 2 Dint to Real 9) Data Conversion Real to DInt 10) Multiply/Divide Function 1 11) Multiply/Divide Function 2 12) MOP Function 13) Add/Subtrct Function 1 14) Add/Subtrct Function 2 15) Add/Subtrct Function 3 16) Timer 1 17) Timer 2
B-21
B-22
D I
1 SL Rx Direct Sel 0 906 924 0 929 Convert Dint-Real 1 SL Buf Rx Word 00 from SL Hardware SL Buf Data Rx 00 SL Dir Data Rx 00 929 1 SL Mult B In 925 2 917 SL Rx P 0 Regis SL Rx P 1 Regis 918 3 10 915 SL Rcv Events Tx Buf Data Type (SLBuf00 Real) 969 0 1 Convert Real-DInt 00 SL Buf Data Tx 00 SL Tx DirectSel 0 SL Real2Dint Out 922 0 0 SL Dir Tx Word 00 to SL Hardware Convert Real-DInt 1 1 235 2 239 916 965 929 23 230 24 25 26 250 22 21 10 Receive Data Format : Axis Update # of Direct Words 3 964 00 Tx Dir Data Type (SLDir 00 Real) 911 965 923 0 Use P 929 Directly SL Mult Base SL Mult A In 933 00 Rx Buf Data Type (SLBuf00 Real)
Synchlink.eps
Direct Receive Data*
Buffered Receive Data*
SynchLink
Rx Dir Data Type (SLDir00 Real)
928
00
Rx Word 00 from SL Hardware
/
SL Mult Out
Convert Dint-Real
X
926
Buffered Transmit Data*
Direct Transmit Data*
SL Buf Tx Word 00 to SL Hardware
SL Real2Dint In
921
SL Mult Base 0
923
Convert Real-DInt x Base
From Registration Latch 0
* Notes
There are a total of 4 Direct Receive Words , 4 Direct Transmit Words , 18 Buffered Receive Words , and 18 Buffered Transmit Words. This diagram only shows Word 00 of each type .
RegisLtch 0 Value
From Registration Latch 1
RegisLtch 1 Value
Parameters 905 [SL Rx CommFormat ] and 910 [SL Tx CommFormat ] set the format for the receive and transmit data. The following tables show the different formats for transmit and receive data and the respective SynchLink fiber update rates for the direct and buffered data.
SL Clr Events
SL Dir Data Tx 00
SL Dir Data Rx 00
From Encdr 0 Accum
Encdr0 Position 240
Parameter [SL 905 # of Axis * Rx CommFormat ] 7 0 9 0 17 0 14 1 Transmit Data Format : # of Axis *
NA NA NA 1ms
2 4 4 3
Direct Word Update 50 uSec 50 uSec 50 uSec 50 uSec
# of Buffered Words 18 8 18 14
Buffered Word Update 0.5 mSec 0.5 mSec 1 mSec 1 mSec
From Encdr 1 Accum
Encdr1 Position
From Fdbk Opt 0 Accum
Axis Update
# of Direct Words
FB Opt0 Posit
From Fdbk Opt 1 Accum 252
FB Opt1 Posit
Parameter [SL 910 Tx CommFormat ] 7 9 17 14
0 0 0 1
NA NA NA 1ms
2 4 4 3
Direct Word Update 50 uSec 50 uSec 50 uSec 50
# of Buffered Words 18 8 18 14
Buffered Word Update 0.5 mSec 0.5 mSec 1 mSec 1ms
V_Hz.eps

Volts / Hz
Ramped Spd Ref 43 46 Scaled Spd Ref Skip Freq Limit Link Speed Trim 1 69 21
Speed Control - Reference (Task 2)
Speed Ref A Sel
27
Speed Ref B Sel
28
Linear Ramp & S Curve

Lead Lag
V/Hz Current Processing
Preset Spd 1 136 137 138 139 Inertia Comp 55 Virtual Encoder Friction Comp
14
Preset Spd 2
15
Preset Spd 3
16
Speed Ref Selection
Skip Speed 1
Preset Spd 4
17
Skip Speed 2
Preset Spd 5
18
Skip Speed 3
Preset Spd 6
19
Skip Speed Band
Preset Spd 7
20
V/HZ Boost
Motor
3
V
Hz
530 528 PI Output 180 527 529 Link (not a default link ) Limit PI Lpass Filt BW 184 485 531
Break Freq Run Boost Start/Acc Boost Break Voltage Max Voltage Max Freq
532
Process Control (Task 2)
PI Reference
181
PI Feedback 182
PI Regulator
PI Prop Gain
186
PI Integ Time
V/Hz Control Motor Ctrl Mode = 3

540 540 0 1
V/Hz Status
187
Current Lim Bus Volt Lim
V/Hz Mode
B-23
B-24
D I
Diagnostic Tools
NOTE: The change bit, Peak x Chng (where x = 1 or 2), is set TRUE if the peak detect value changes, otherwise the change bit is set FALSE. Change is also set to FALSE if the detector is in HOLD or SET.
(Task 3)
PeakDtct Ctrl In (Peak 1 Set) 210 1 Peak Detect1 Out 0 210
diagnostic_tools.eps
Peak Detect
PeakDtct Ctrl In (Peak 1 Hold) PkDtct1 In Real 213 212 PkDtct1 In DInt PeakDtct Ctrl In (Peak1SelHigh) 210 2 214
Peak Detect
211 PeakDtct1 Preset 0 PeakDtct Status (Peak 1 Chng) 210 210 5 4
215
Trend Control (Auto Output ) Trend TrigA Real 561 562 563 564 PkDtct2 In DInt PeakDtct Ctrl In (Peak2SelHigh) 210 6 565 Buffer Full 0 557 2 556 Trend Status (Complete ) PkDtct2 In Real Trend TrigB DInt Trend TrigB Real Trend Trig Data Trend Trig Bit Trend Control (Enbl Collect )
556
15
Trend TrigA DInt
560
>
OR
217 216 Trend Status (Triggered )
Trending
(Task 1)
PeakDtct Ctrl In (Peak 2 Set) PeakDtct Ctrl In (Peak 2 Hold)
Trend Rate
559
Setting bit 15 of p556 causes the trend data to auto play back at the rate entered p 559 (milliseconds ).
S R
557 1
Peak Detect2 Out 219 218
Peak Detect
PeakDtct2 Preset 211 1 PeakDtct Status (Peak 2 Chng)
Trend PreSamples
566
Trend Marker DInt
567
S R
Trend Marker Real Trend Control (In 1 Real) 556 0 Trend In2 DInt 574 575 0 Trend Out 1 DInt 1 572 Trend Out 1 Real 573 1 Trend In3 Real Trend In2 Real Trend In3 DInt 1 0 1 0 1 556 2 556 3 Trend In1 DInt 570 571 Trend In1 Real 578 579 Trend Control (In 2 Real) Trend Control (In 3 Real)
568 Trend Control (In 4 Real) 0 1 0 Trend Out 2 DInt 576 Trend Out 2 Real 577 1 556 4 0 Trend In4 DInt Trend In4 Real 582 583 1 0 Trend Out 3 DInt 580 Trend Out 3 Real 581 1
TrendBuffPointer
569
Trend Out 4 DInt 584 Trend Out 4 Real 585
0 . . . . . . . . . . 1023
0 . . . . . . . . . . 1023
0 . . . . . . . . . . 1023
0 . . . . . . . . . . 1023
Trend Mark DInt Trend Mark Real TrendBuffPointer 569 568
1) p566 selects the number of data points to store prior to the trend trigger (pre-trigger data ). 2) p567 or p568 , depending on the data type of the trend data , determines the marker value placed in the trend data at the beginning of the pre-trigger data (trigger point p566 - 1). 3) Pre-trigger data is located at negative pointer values from [- p566] to -1 4) The trigger point data value is located at p569 pointer value 0 5) Post-trigger data is located in positive pointer values from 0 to [+ p566] 567
inverter_ovrload_IT.eps
Inverter Over Load (IT)
Inverter Overload IT
313 Heatsink Temp Drive OL JnctTemp Drive OL Status 346 (NTC Shorted ) (NTC Open ) (HS OverTemp ) (HS Pending ) (IT Trip) (IT Pending) (IT Foldback ) (Jnc OverTemp ) Motor NP FLA Exception Event 1 320 14 (Inv OTmpTrip 0 Mtr I2T Trp ThrH 340 60 pu_current time (sec) 15 (Inv OL Pend ) 16 (Inv OLTrip ) 13 (Inv OTmpPend ) Mtr I2T Calibrat 339 2 Output Current pu Stator Current fdbk pu_current 1 2 3 4 OL OpnLP CurrLim 343 6 7 OL ClsLp CurrLim 344 5 0 345
Power Device Characteristics
NTC
Pwr EE Data
Iq Ref Limited
355
Heat sink and Junction degree Calculator
Duty Cycle
Bus Voltage
PWM Frequency
(see torque block)
Mtr Over Load (I2T)
X
308 2.0 typ
right of curve
Exception Event 1 320 10 (Mtr OL Trip) 11 (Mtr OL Pend )
DB resistor
321 5
Mtr OL Factor Mtr I2T Curr Min Exception Event 2 (BrakeOL Trip ) Mtr I2T Spd Min
336 337
1.025 typ
Brake/Bus Cnfg
dc bus
1.0
pu motor velocity 338
(Brake Enable )
414
(Brake Extern )
5 417
Brake PulseWatts {pulse watts @ 1sec} 416
Brake Watts 415
TestPoints P347 Drive OL TP Sel P348 Drive OL TP Data
BusReg/Brake Ref {% of peak ac line }
B-25
B-26

DriveLogix-Speed Control DriveLogix
Links
155 71 303 308 555 824 631 630 629 628 627 626
Drive Control
From DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [0] From DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [1] From DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [2] To DriveLogix00 Logix Tag LogicStatus To DriveLogix01 Logix Tag FilteredSpdFdbk To DriveLogix02 Logix Tag MotorTorqueRef To DriveLogix03 Logix Tag Output Current To DriveLogix04 Logix Tag MCStatus To DriveLogix05 Logix Tag LocalIOStatus From DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [3] From DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [4] From DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [5] From DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [6] From DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [7] From DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [8] From DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [9] Logic Status
Undefined Available Connections
DL_conn_spd_control.eps
600
To DriveLogix Lgx Comm Format = 16 Speed Ctrl
Filtered SpdFdbk
Motor Torque Ref
Output Current MC Status
Local I/O Status
From DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData [0] From DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData [1] From DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData [2] From DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData [3] From DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData [4]
151 10 111 110 116 86 607 606 605 604 603 602
From DriveLogix Speed Ref 1 FromDriveLogix01 Logix Tag SpeedRef1 FromDriveLogix02 Logix Tag TorqueRef1
Logic Command
FromDriveLogix00 Logix Tag LogicCommand
To DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [0] To DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [1] To DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [2] To DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [3]
Torque Ref 1
Speed/TorqueMode Torque Step
FromDriveLogix03 Logix Tag SpdTorqModeSelect FromDriveLogix04 Logix Tag TorqueStep FromDriveLogix05 Logix Tag SpdRegDroop
To DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [4] To DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [5] To DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [6] To DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [7] To DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [8] To DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData [0] To DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData [1] To DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData [2] To DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData [3] To DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData [4] To DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData [5]
Spd Reg Droop

DriveLogix-Position Control DriveLogix
Links
155 71 308 824 741 762 763 769 633 632 631 630 629 628 627 626
DL_conn_pos_control.eps
Drive Control
Logic Status To DriveLogix00 Logix Tag LogicStatus To DriveLogix01 Logix Tag FilteredSpdFdbk To DriveLogix02 Logix Tag OutputCurrent To DriveLogix03 Logix Tag LocalIOStatus To DriveLogix04 Logix Tag PositionStatus To DriveLogix05 Logix Tag PositionFdbk To DriveLogix06 Logix Tag PositionActual To DriveLogix07 Logix Tag PositionError
To DriveLogix
600
Lgx Comm Format = 17 Position Ctrl
Filtered SpdFdbk Output Current
From DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [0] From DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [1] From DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [2] From DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [3] From DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [4]
Local I/O Status Position Status Position Fdbk Position Actual Position Error
From DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [5] From DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [6] From DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [7] From DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [8] From DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData[0] From DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData[1] From DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData[2] From DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData[3] From DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData[4] From DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData[5] To DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [0] To DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [1] To DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [2] To DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [3] To DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [4] To DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData [5] To DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData [0] To DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData [1]
From DriveLogix
151 10 740 748 758 753 607 606 605 604 603 602
Logic Command Speed Ref 1
FromDriveLogix00 Logix Tag LogicCommand FromDriveLogix01 Logix Tag SpeedRef1 FromDriveLogix02 Logix Tag PositionControl FromDriveLogix03 Logix Tag CoarsePositTrgt FromDriveLogix04 Logix Tag PtPtPosRef FromDriveLogix05 Logix Tag PositOffset1
Position Control
Coarse Posit Trgt
Pt-Pt Posit Ref Posit Offset 1
To DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData [2] To DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData [3] To DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData [4] To DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData [5] To DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData [6]
B-27
B-28

DriveLogix-Motion Control DriveLogix
From DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData[0] From DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData[11]
626
To DriveLogix Links
155
Drive Control
Logic Status To DriveLogix00 Logix Tag LogicStatus
DL_conn_motn_control.eps
600
Lgx Comm Format = 19 Motion Ctrl
From DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData[0] From DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData[8] To DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData[0] To DriveLogix UserDefinedRealData[2] To DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData[0] To DriveLogix UserDefinedIntegerData[2]
748 750 693 700 699 698
From DriveLogix
CoarsePosit Trgt
FromDriveLogix00 Motion Planner Coarse Positon FromDriveLogix01 Motion Planner Coarse Speed FromDriveLogix02 Motion Planner Synch ** These Parameters must be set or the DriveLogix will show a Module not Configured Error for the drive I/O connection.
Coarse Spd Trgt
Intrp SyncInput
**
These do not show up in the Controller or Program Tags
147
16
=1 Positon Control Firmware Enable
151
13
=1 Position Loop Enable
*** P904 bit 0 = 1 must be set to Time Keeper or receive it from another SynchLink device for the Motion Connection. If it is not set or received the software reports a CST erro.
740
= 1 Interpolator Enable
740
= 0 AbsPositCtrl must be off for Motion Control
P146 = 0 Position Loop must run in the 2 ms task in order to match the only configuration in Version 13 of RSLogix5000.
740
= 0 Xzero Preset must be off for Motion Control
742
= 0 Position Ref Sel
Speed Trim 2
22
318
Posit Spd Output
Speed Ref 2
12
751
Interp Speed
Appendix
Application Notes
For additional application notes, refer to the PowerFlex 700S Adjustable Frequency AC Drive with Phase II Control - Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM003.
For Information on Input Voltage Range/Tolerance Motor Control Mode Motor Overload Stop Dwell Time Setpt 1 Data Setpt 2 Data
See Page... C-1 C-2 C-5 C-7 C-8 C-8
Input Voltage Range/ Tolerance
Drive Rating 200-240
380-400
500-600 (Frames 1-4 Only) 500-690 (Frames 5 & 6 Only) Drive Full Power Range =
Nominal Line Voltage 200 208 240 380 400 480 600 600 690
Nominal Motor Voltage 200 208 230 380 400 460 575 575 690
Drive Full Power Range 200-264 208-264 230-264 380-528 400-528 460-528 575-660 575-660 690-759
Drive Operating Range 180-264
342-528
432-660 475-759 475-759
Drive Operating Range =
Nominal Motor Voltage to Drive Rated Voltage + 10%. Rated current is available across the entire Drive Full Power Range Lowest Nominal Motor Voltage - 10% to Drive Rated Voltage + 10%. Drive Output is linearly derated when Actual Line Voltage is less than the Nominal Motor Voltage
C-2
Application Notes
HP @ Motor (Drive Output)
No Drive Output
Derated Power Range Full Power Range Drive Operating Range
Nominal Motor Voltage -10% Nominal Motor Voltage
Drive Rated Voltage Drive Rated Voltage +10%
Actual Line Voltage (Drive Input)
Example: Calculate the maximum power of a 5 HP, 460V motor connected to a 480V rated drive supplied with 342V Actual Line Voltage input. Actual Line Voltage / Nominal Motor Voltage = 74.3% 74.3% 5 HP = 3.7 HP 74.3% 60 Hz = 44.6 Hz At 342V Actual Line Voltage, the maximum power the 5 HP, 460V motor can produce is 3.7 HP at 44.6 Hz.
HP @ Motor (Drive Output)
5 HP 3.7 HP
No Drive Output
342V 460V
480V 528V
Actual Line Voltage (Drive Input)
Motor Control Mode
Parameter 485 [Motor Ctrl Mode] selects the type of motor control to use. This parameter is set during the HIM assisted startup when asked to select the Motor Control. The settings for Parameter 485 [Motor Ctrl Mode] are 0 - "FOC" selects field oriented control. Field oriented control is used with AC squirrel cage induction motors for high performance. 1 - "FOC 2" selects field oriented control and is only used for a specific type of AC induction motor with motor thermal feedback. Note: FOC 2 is used only for motors manufactured by Reliance Electric - Japan. 2 - "Pmag Motor" selects control for permanent magnet motors. 3 - "V/Hz" selects volts per hertz control. This selection is available in v2.003 and later. 4 - "Test" puts the drive in a test mode to perform the direction test. "Test" is automatically selected during the direction test portion of the Start-Up routine and does not need to be set manually by the user.
Application Notes
C-3
Field Oriented Control, Permanent Magnet Motor Control, and Volts/Hertz Control are described in further detail below.
Field Oriented Control

Field oriented control is used with AC squirrel cage induction motors for high performance. Motor data and an autotune is required for correct operation in this mode. Field oriented control is selected by setting parameter 485 [Motor Ctrl Mode] = 0 "FOC". In field oriented control, the drive takes the speed reference that is specified by the Speed Reference Selection Block and compares it to the speed feedback. The speed regulator uses Proportional and Integral gains to adjust the torque reference for the motor. This torque reference attempts to operate the motor at the specified speed. The torque reference is then converted to the torque producing component of the motor current. This type of speed regulator produces a high bandwidth response to speed command and load changes. In field oriented control the flux and torque producing currents are independently controlled. Therefore, you can send a torque reference directly instead of a speed reference. The independent flux control also allows you to reduce the flux in order to run above base motor speed.
High Bandwidth Current Regulator
CURRENT FEEDBACK
Flux Reg.
SPEED REF.
V mag
Speed Reg.
TORQUE REF.
Current Reg.
V ang
Voltage Control
Inverter
Motor
Encoder Adaptive Controller

AUTOTUNE PARAMETERS SPEED FEEDBACK SLIP
C-4
Application Notes
Permanent Magnet Control

Permanent magnet control is used with permanent magnet motors. Permanent magnet motor control is selected by setting parameter 485 [Motor Ctrl Mode] = 2 "Pmag Motor". Permanent magnet motor control requires either a hi-resolution Stegmann encoder or compatible resolver feedback on the motor. Refer to PowerFlex 700S Stegmann Hi-Resolution Encoder Feedback Option on page F-1 for a list of compatible hi-resolution Stegmann encoders and compatible resolvers. Motor data and an autotune is required for correct operation in this mode. Refer to PowerFlex 700S Permanent Magnet Motor Specifications on page I-1 for a list of compatible Allen-Bradley permanent magnet motors and motor data to be used with the PowerFlex 700S.
Volts/Hertz Control - v2.003 and later

Volts/Hertz control is used in fan, pump, or multi-motor applications. Volts/ Hertz operation creates a fixed relationship between output voltage and output frequency. Configuration: Volts/Hertz control is selected by setting parameter 485 [Motor Ctrl Mode] = 3 "V/Hz". Volts/Hertz allows a wide variety of patterns using linear segments. The default configuration is a straight line from zero to rated voltage and frequency. This is the same volts/hertz ratio that the motor would see if it were started across the line. As seen in the diagram below, the volts/hertz ratio can be changed to provide increased torque performance when required. The shaping takes place by programming five distinct points on the curve:
Application Notes
C-5
1. Parameter 527 [Start/Acc Boost] is used to create additional torque for breakaway from zero speed and acceleration of heavy loads at lower speeds. 2. Parameter 528 [Run Boost] is used to create additional running torque at low speeds. The value is typically less than the required acceleration torque. The drive will lower the boost voltage to this level when running at low speeds (not accelerating). This reduces excess motor heating that could be caused if the higher start/accel boost level were used. 3. Parameters 529 [Break Voltage] and 530 [Break Frequency] are used to increase the slope of the lower portion of the Volts/Hertz curve, providing additional torque. 4. Parameters 1 [Motor NP Volts] and 3 [Motor NP Hertz] set the upper portion of the curve to match the motor design and mark the beginning of the constant horsepower region. 5. Parameters 531 [Maximum Voltage] and 532 [Maximum Freq] slope that portion of the curve used above base speed.
Motor Overload
Setting Parameter 338 [Mtr I2T Spd Min]

Parameter 338 [Mtr I2T Spd Min] sets the minimum speed for the motor overload (I2T) function. This value determines the minimum speed the drive should run below the minimum current threshold set in parameter 337 [Mtr I2T Curr Min]. Parameters 338 [Mtr I2T Spd Min] and 337 [Mtr I2T Curr Min] set the first current/speed breakpoint. From this point the current threshold is linear to the value specified by the motor service factor set in parameter 336 [Motor OL Factor].
C-6
Application Notes
Figure C.1 Motor Overload Curve When Par 338 [Mtr I2T Spd Min] Is Less Than 1.0
Current
P336 [Motor OL Factor]
When motor current exceeds the value of the curve, the motor overload output integrates. A motor overload exception event occurs when the value of the motor overload output reaches 1.0. The value of the motor overload output is visible in Par 330 [Fault TP Data] when the value of Par 329 [Fault TP Sel] equals 13.
P337 [Mtr I2T Curr Min]
Speed P338 [Mtr I2T Spd Min] Base Speed (1.0)
Figure C.2 Motor Overload Curve When Par 338 [Mtr I2T Spd Min] Is Equal To 1.0
Current
P336 [Motor OL Factor]
When the value of Par 338 [Mtr I2T Spd Min] equals 1.0, the curve is flat - at the value of rated motor current times the value of Par 336 [Motor OL Factor]. If the motor current exceeds the value of the curve, the value of the motor overload output integrates. The value of the motor overload output is visible in Par 330 [Fault TP Data] when the value of Par 329 [Fault TP Sel] equals 13.
Speed
Motor Overload Memory Retention Per 2005 NEC

The PowerFlex 700S drive with Phase II control (firmware 3.01 and higher) has the ability to retain the motor overload count at power down per the 2005 NEC motor overtemperature requirement. To enable motor overload memory retention, set bit 20 Motor OL Ret of parameter 153 [Control Options] to 1. To disable motor overload memory retention, set bit 20 Motor OL Ret of parameter 153 [Control Options] to 0. The motor overload count value can be viewed in parameter 341 [Mtr I2T Count].
Application Notes
C-7
Stop Dwell Time
Sets an adjustable delay time between detecting zero speed and disabling the speed and torque regulators, when responding to a stop command. Important: Consult industry and local codes when setting the value of this parameter.
Figure C.3 Drive Operation When Par 154 [Stop Dwell Time] Equals Zero
Speed
When Par 154 [Stop Dwell Time] equals zero, the drive turns off the velocity and torque regulators when it detects zero speed.
P 160 [Zero Speed Lim] 0 Time
Drive Receives Stop Command
Figure C.4 Drive Operation When Par 154 [Stop Dwell Time] is Greater Than Zero
Speed
Drive Detects Zero Speed and Turns Off Regulators
When Par 154 [Stop Dwell Time] is greater than zero, the drive delays turning off the velocity and torque regulators for the amount of time specified in Par 154.
P 154 [Stop Dwell Time]
P 160 [Zero Speed Lim] 0 Time
Drive Receives Stop Command
Drive Detects Zero Speed
Drive Turns Off Regulators
C-8
Application Notes
Setpt 1 Data
Provides data for comparison of Par 172 [Setpt 1 Data] to Par 173 [Setpt1 TripPoint], driving bit 16 At Setpt 1 of Par 155 [Logic Status].
Figure C.5 At Setpoint 1 Status
P172 [Setpt 1 Data] bit 16 "At Setpt 1" turns on bit 16 "At Setpt 1" turns on bit 16 "At Setpt 1" turns on bit 16 "At Setpt 1" turns off bit 16 "At Setpt 1" turns off bit 16 "At Setpt 1" turns on bit 16 "At Setpt 1" turns on bit 16 "At Setpt 1" turns off bit 16 "At Setpt 1" turns off bit 16 "At Setpt 1" turns off
P173 [Setpt1 TripPoint] + 2 x P174 [Setpt 1 Limit] P173 [Setpt1 TripPoint] + P174 [Setpt 1 Limit] P173 [Setpt1 TripPoint] P173 [Setpt1 TripPoint] - P174 [Setpt 1 Limit] P173 [Setpt1 TripPoint] - 2 x P174 [Setpt 1 Limit]
Time
Setpt 2 Data
Provides data for comparison of Par175 [Setpt 2 Data] to Par 176 [Setpt2 TripPoint], driving bit 17 Above Setpt 2 of Par 155 [Logic Status].
Figure C.6 Above Setpoint 2 Status
bit 17 "Above Setpt 2" turns on bit 17 "Above Setpt 2" turns off P175 [Setpt 2 Data]
P176 [Setpt 2 TripPoint]
P176 [Setpt 2 TripPoint] - P177 [Setpt 2 Limit] P176 [Setpt 2 TripPoint] - 2 x P177 [Setpt 2 Limit]
Time
Appendix
HIM Overview
For Information on External and Internal Connections LCD Display Elements ALT Functions Menu Structure Viewing and Editing Parameters Linking Parameters Removing/Installing the HIM
See Page... D-1 D-2 D-2 D-3 D-5 D-6 D-7
External and Internal Connections
The PowerFlex 700S provides cable connection for a hand-held HIM or Port Expander/Splitter (Frame 1 shown).
1
2 3ro 1
.
No.
Connector DPI Port 1 DPI Port 2 DPI Port 3 or 2
Description HIM connection when installed in cover. Cable connection for handheld and remote options. Splitter cable connected to DPI Port 2 provides additional port.
D-2
HIM Overview
LCD Display Elements

Display Description
Stopped
Main Menu: 0.0 Diagnostics Parameter Device Select
0.0
Auto
RPM
Direction Drive Status Alarm Commanded or Output Speed
Auto/Manual
Information
Programming / Monitoring / Troubleshooting
ALT Functions
To use an ALT function, press the ALT key release it, then press the programming key associated with one of the following functions:
Table D.A ALT Key Functions
ALT Key and then...
Esc ALT Sel ALT ALT ALT ALT ALT
S.M.A.R.T. View Lang Auto/Man Remove Exp Param #
Function not available. Allows the selection of how parameters will be viewed or detailed information about a parameter or component. Function not available. Function not available. Allows HIM removal without causing a fault if the HIM is not the last controlling device and does not have manual control of the drive. Allows the value to be entered as an exponent. Allows entry of a parameter number for viewing/editing.
ALT . ALT +/
HIM Overview
D-3
Menu Structure
Figure D.1 HIM Menu Structure

User Display
Esc Sel
Diagnostics
Faults Status Info Device Version HIM Version
PowerFlex 700S Product Data Main Control Board Power Unit Board
View Fault Queue Clear Faults Logic Status Clr Fault Queue Run Inhibit Stat Logic Control State Reset Device
LCD HIM Product Data LCD HIM Standard Control Board Keyboard Numeric
Parameter
View selected through Param Access Lvl FGP Numbered List Changed
ALT
Sel
FGP: File File 1 Name File 2 Name File 3 Name
Basic Advanced FGP: Group Group 1 Name Group 2 Name Group 3 Name FGP: Parameter Parameter Name Parameter Name Parameter Name Value Screen
Device Select
PowerFlex 700S Connected DPI Devices
Memory Storage
Him CopyCat Reset To Defaults Save EEPROM Recall EEPROM
Device -> HIM Device <- HIM Delete HIM Set
Start-Up
Continue Start Over
Introduction
Preferences
Drive Identity Change Password User Dspy Lines User Dspy Time User Dspy Video Reset User Dspy Contrast
Motor Control Motor Data Feedback Config Pwr Circuit Diag Direction Test Motor Tests Inertia Measure Speed Limits Speed Control Strt/Stop/I/O Done/Exit
Press Press Press Press

Esc
ALT
to move between menu items to select a menu item to move 1 level back in the menu structure
Sel
to select how to view parameters
D-4
HIM Overview
Diagnostics Menu When a fault trips the drive, use this menu to access detailed data about the drive.
Option Faults Status Info Device Version HIM Version Description View fault queue or fault information, clear faults or reset drive. View parameters that display status information about the drive. View the firmware version and hardware series of components. View the firmware version and hardware series of the HIM.
Parameter Menu Refer to Viewing and Editing Parameters on page D-5. Device Select Menu Use this menu to access parameters in connected peripheral devices. Memory Storage Menu Drive data can be saved to, or recalled from, the HIM or EEPROM. EEPROM is permanent non-volatile drive memory. HIM sets are files stored in permanent non-volatile HIM memory.
Option HIM Copycat Device -> HIM Device <- HIM EEPROM Description Save data to a HIM set, load data from a HIM set to active drive memory or delete a HIM set.
Save data to EEPROM, load data from EEPROM to active drive memory or name a User set. Reset To Defaults Restore the drive to its factory-default settings.
Important: When loading data from a HIM set via the Copycat function, values for parameters 81 [Spd Reg P Gain] and 82 [Spd Reg I Gain] are re-calculated and overwritten due to parameter 90 [Spd Reg BW] being set to the default value of 10. To avoid overwriting the values of parameters 81 and 82, record the values before performing the Copycat from a HIM to the drive, manually update the values after the download and set parameter 90 to 0. Start Up Menu See Chapter 2.
HIM Overview
D-5
Preferences Menu The HIM and drive have features that you can customize.
Option Drive Identity Change Password User Dspy Lines Description Add text to identify the drive. Enable/disable or modify the password.
Select the display, parameter, scale and text for the User Display. The User Display is two lines of user-defined data that appears when the HIM is not being used for programming. User Dspy Time Set the wait time for the User Display or enable/disable it. User Dspy Video Select Reverse or Normal video for the Frequency and User Display lines. Reset User Dspy Return all the options for the User Display to factory default values.
The PowerFlex 700S drive is initially set to Basic Parameter View. To view all parameters, set parameter 196 [ParamAccessLvl] to option 1 Advanced. Parameter 196 is not affected by the Reset to Defaults function.
Viewing and Editing Parameters
LCD HIM
Step Key(s) Example Displays
1. In the Main Menu, press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll to Parameter. 2. Press Enter. FGP File appears on the top line and the first three files appear below it. 3. Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll through the files. 4. Press Enter to select a file. The groups in the file are displayed under it. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select a group and then a parameter. The parameter value screen will appear. 6. Press Enter to edit the parameter. 7. Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to change the value. If desired, press Sel to move from digit to digit, letter to letter, or bit to bit. The digit or bit that you can change will be highlighted. 8. Press Enter to save the value. If you want to cancel a change, press Esc. 9. Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll through the parameters in the group, or press Esc to return to the group list.
or
FGP: File Monitor Motor Control Dynamic Control
or
FGP: Group Motor Data Monitoring Drive Config FGP: Parameter Motor NP Volts Motor NP FLA Motor NP Hertz
or
Sel
FGP: Par 2 Motor NP FLA 1.000 Amps [ALT][VIEW] -> Limits
or
Esc
FGP: Par 2 Motor NP FLA 1.500 Amps [ALT][VIEW] -> Limits
D-6
HIM Overview
Numeric Keypad Shortcut

If using a HIM with a numeric keypad, press the ALT key and the +/ key to access the parameter by typing its number.
Linking Parameters
Most parameter values are entered directly by the user. However, certain parameters can be linked, so the value of one parameter becomes the value of another. For Example: the value of an analog input can be linked to [Accel Time 1]. Rather than entering an acceleration time directly (via HIM), the link allows the value to change by varying the analog signal. This can provide additional flexibility for advanced applications. Each link has 2 components: Source parameter sender of information. Destination parameter receiver of information. Most parameters can be a source of data for a link, except parameter values that contain an integer representing an ENUM (text choice). These are not allowed, since the integer is not actual data (it represents a value). Refer to the list of parameters in Chapter 3 for information on which parameters can be destinations. All links must be established between equal data types (parameter value formatted in floating point can only source data to a destination parameter value that is also floating point).
Establishing A Link
Step Key(s) Example Displays FGP: Parameter Accel Time 1 Decel Time 1 S Curve Time
1. Select a valid destination parameter to be linked. The parameter value screen displays. 2. Press Enter to edit the parameter. The cursor will move to the value line. 3. Press ALT and then View (Sel). Next, press the Up or Down Arrow to change Present Value to Define Link. Press Enter. 4. Enter the Source Parameter Number and press Enter. The linked parameter can now be viewed two different ways by repeating steps 1-4 and selecting Present Value or Define Link. If an attempt is made to edit the value of a linked parameter, Parameter is Linked! will be displayed, indicating that the value is coming from a source parameter and can not be edited. 5. To remove a link, repeat steps 1-5 and change the source parameter number to zero (0). 6. Press Esc to return to the group list.
Esc ALT + Sel
or
Min: 0.01000 Max: 6553.5 Dflt: 10.0 Present Value Define Link
Parameter: #32 Accel Time 1 Link: 800 Analog In1 Data
HIM Overview
D-7
Removing/Installing the HIM The HIM can be removed or installed while the drive is powered.
Step Key(s) To remove the HIM... 1. Press ALT and then Enter (Remove). The Remove HIM configuration screen appears. 2. Press Enter to confirm that you want to remove ALT + the HIM. 3. Remove the HIM from the drive. To install HIM... 1. Insert into drive or connect cable. Example Displays
Remove Op Intrfc: Press Enter to Disconnect Op Intfc? (Port 1 0.0 Control)
D-8
HIM Overview
Notes:
Appendix
Chapter Objectives
For Information on Specifications Wiring and Configuring the Second Encoder Option Card
See Page... E-1 E-2
Specifications
2nd Encoder Feedback Option Card Specifications

Consideration Input Description Dual Channel Plus Marker, Isolated with differential transmitter Output (Line Drive) Incremental, Dual Channel Quadrature type Encoder Voltage Supply 5V DC or 12V DC 320 mA per channel 5V DC requires an external power supply. 12 V DC minimum high state voltage of 7V DC, maximum low state voltage of 0.4V DC Maximum Input Frequency 400 kHz
Table E.A Recommended Cable

Cable Type and Length Encoder/Pulse I/O Less 30.5 m (100 ft.) Encoder/Pulse I/O 30.5 m (100 ft.) to 152.4 m (500 ft.) Combined: Signal: Power: Combined: Wire Type(s) Description Belden 9730 (or equivalent) (1) 0.196 mm2 (24AWG), individually shielded. Belden 9730/9728 (or 0.196 mm2 (24AWG), equivalent) (1) individually shielded. Belden 8790 (2) 0.750 mm2 (18AWG) (3) Belden 9892 0.330 mm2 or 0.500 mm2
(3)
Encoder/Pulse I/O Signal: 152.4 m (500 ft.) to 259.1 m (850 ft.) Power: Combined:
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Belden 9730/9728 (or equivalent) (1) Belden 8790 (2) Belden 9773/9774 (or equivalent) (4)
0.196 mm2 (24AWG), individually shielded. 0.750 mm2 (18AWG) 0.750 mm2 (18AWG), individually shielded pair.
Belden 9730 is 3 individually shielded pairs (2 channel plus power). If 3 channel is required, use Belden 9728 (or equivalent). Belden 8790 is 1 shielded pair. Belden 9892 is 3 individually shielded pairs (3 channel), 0.33 mm2 (22 AWG) plus 1 shielded pair 0.5 mm2 (20 AWG) for power. Belden 9773 is 3 individually shielded pairs (2 channel plus power). If 3 channel is required, use Belden 9774 (or equivalent).
E-2
Terminal block P1 contains connection points for a differential encoder. This terminal block resides on the Second Encoder Option Card.
Terminal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Signal N/C N/C N/C N/C A Not A B Not B Z Not Z Power Common Shield Description Not connected
Quadrature A input Quadrature B input Marker Pulse DC Power for encoder interface Connection point for encoder cable shield
Wiring and Configuring the Second Encoder Option Card
Connection Examples Differential Encoder with Internal Supply

Encoder P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 N/C N/C N/C N/C A Not A B Not B Z Not Z Power Common Shield
A Not A B Not B Z Not Z Power Common
Differential Encoder with External Supply

Encoder P1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
A Not A B Not B Z Not Z Power Common
N/C N/C N/C N/C A Not A B Not B Z Not Z Power Common Shield
Power Common
E-3
Dip Switch Settings
S1
SIDE VIEW UP = OPEN = OFF
OPEN
FRONT - TOP VIEW
1 2 3 4
DOWN = CLOSED= ON
Voltage Selection 5V DC 12V DC
S1-1 (Supply) Closed Open
S1-2 (A Channel) Closed Open
S1-3 (B Channel) Closed Open
S1-4 (Z Channel) Closed Open
for complete installation instructions, refer to publication 20D-IN009, Installation Instructions - Second Encoder Option Card for PowerFlex 700S Drives with Phase II Control.
E-4
Notes:
Appendix
Chapter Objectives
For Information on Specifications Wiring the Stegmann Hi-Resolution Feedback Option Card to an Encoder
See Page... F-1 F-2
Specifications
Stegmann Hi-Resolution Feedback Option Card Specifications

Consideration Encoder Voltage Supply Hi-Resolution Feedback Maximum Cable Length Maximum Frequency (Encoder Speed) RS-485 Interface Description 11.5V dc @ 130 mA Sine/Cosine 1V P-P Offset 2.5 90m (295 ft.) 12.5 s/cycle (4687.5 RPM for encoders with 1024 sine cycles per revolution) (9375 RPM for encoders with 512 sine cycles per revolution) The Hi-Resolution Feedback Option card obtains the following information via the Hiperface RS-485 interface shortly after power-up: Address Command Number Mode Number of turns Number of Sine/Cos cycles Checksum Allen-Bradley PN: S94262912 Weidmuller PN: BL 3.5/12/90
Customer-I/O plug (P1)
Supported Encoders
Table F.A specifies which encoders are supported by the 700S Hi-Resolution Stegmann Encoder Feedback Option module. Important: Please note that encoders must be ordered as "Single Ended". This will ensure that the RS-485 channel has the proper termination network installed at the factory.
F-2
Table F.A Supported Encoders

Model Stegmann SINCOS SCS-60, SCS-70, SCM-60, and SCM-70 Stegmann SINCOS SCS-KIT-101 and SCM-KIT-101 Stegmann SINCOS SRS-50, SRS-60, SRM-50, and SRM-60 Stegmann SINCOS SRS/ SRM 25 Resolution 512 sine cycles per revolution. Comment SCM-60 and SCM-70 have built-in mechanical turns counter.
1024 sine cycles per revolution. SCM-60 and SCM-70 have built-in mechanical turns counter. 1024 sine cycles per revolution. SRM-50 and SRM-60 have built-in mechanical turns counter.
1024 sine cycles per revolution SRS25 and SRM25 have built-in mechanical turns counter. IP65 Protection Class. Size 25 square flange mounting. Stegmann SINCOS SRS660 1024 sine cycles per revolution Hollow-shaft up to 14 mm diameter Stegmann SINCOS 512 sine cycles per revolution. While the software supports this SHS-170 encoder, the SHS-170 draws excessive current and should only be used with an external power supply. Allen-Bradley 842HR 1024 sine cycles per revolution Has built-in mechanical turns counter. IP65 Protection Class. Size 25 square flange mounting.
SINCOS, SINCODER and LINCODER are registered trademarks of Stegmann Inc.
Wiring the Stegmann Hi-Resolution Feedback Option Card to an Encoder
Terminal block P1 contains connection points for a Stegmann Hiperface encoder. This terminal block resides on the Hi-Resolution Encoder Feedback Option card.
Hiperface is a registered trademark of Stegmann Inc.
TIP: Remember to route wires through the sliding access panel at the bottom of the Control Assembly.
F-3
Table F.B Terminal Block Designations

Terminal 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Signal POWER COMMON POWER REFSIN +SIN REFCOS +COS SHIELD SHIELD N/C N/C DATA+ (RS 485) DATA- (RS 485) Description Power supply for encoder interface. Negative Sine signal. Positive Sine signal. Negative Cosine signal. Positive Cosine signal. Connection point for encoder cable shield. Not connected. Positive DH485 terminal. Negative DH485 terminal.
Table F.C Recommended Cables

If you are using this motor and feedback device: Allen-Bradley 1326AB-BXXXX-21ML and -21MKXL motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen-Bradley 1326AB-BXXXX-M2L, -M2KXL, -S2L and -S2KXL motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen-Bradley MPL-A5xx and all MPL-Bxxx motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen-Bradley 1326AB-BXXXX-M2L, -M2KXL, -S2L and -S2KXL motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen-Bradley MPL-A5xx and all MPL-Bxxx motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen-Bradley MPL-A3xx - MPL-A45xx and all MPG series motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen-Bradley MPL-A3xx - MPL-A45xx and all MPG series motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder HPK-Series motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Any other motor with external Stegmann SHS-170 rotary encoder Any other motor with external Stegmann SCS-60, SCS-70, SCM-60 or SCM-70, SRS-50, SRS-60, SRM-60, SRM-60, SRS-25, SRM-25, or Allen-Bradley 842HR rotary encoder Any other motor with external Stegmann SCS-Kit 101 or SCK-Kit 101 rotary encoder Any other motor with external Stegmann SRS660 rotary encoder
Use this cable: Allen-Bradley 1326-CECU-XXL-XXX
1 2
3 4 5 6
7 8
9 10 11 12
See this wiring diagram: Figure F.1 on page F-4
Allen-Bradley 2090-CDNFDMP-SXX
Figure F.2 on page F-4
Allen-Bradley 2090-CDNFDMP-SXX
Allen-Bradley 2090-XXNFMP-SXX
Allen-Bradley 2090-UXNFDMP-SXX
Allen-Bradley 2090-XXNFMF-SXX
Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable with 12-pin DIN style connector Figure F.7 on page F-6 Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable with 10-pin MS style connector Figure F.8 on page F-6
Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable with 8-pin Berg style connector Figure F.9 on page F-6 Is available only with pre-attached Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable of various lengths Figure F.10 on page F-7
F-4
Connection Examples
Figure F.1 1326AB-BXXXX-21ML, and -21MKXL motors with a 1326-CECU-XXL-XXX cable

Hi-Res Feedback Option Board POWER COMMON 12 POWER 11 REFSIN 10 +SIN 9 REFCOS 8 +COS 7 SHIELD 6 SHIELD 5 N/C 4 N/C 3 DATA+ (RS 485) 2 DATA- (RS 485) 1 WH BK BK RD BK BU BK WH BK RD BK BU BK GN A B C D E F G H I J ENCODER POWER POWER COMMON REFSIN +SIN REFCOS +COS DATA+ (RS-485) DATA- (RS-485) SHIELD OVERALL SHIELD
BK GN
Figure F.2 MPL-A5xx and all MPL-Bxxx motors or 1326AB-BXXXX-M2L, -M2KXL, -S2L, and -S2KXL motors with 2090-CDNFDMP-SXX cable
Hi-Res Feedback Option Board POWER COMMON 12 POWER 11 REFSIN 10 +SIN 9 REFCOS 8 +COS 7 SHIELD 6 SHIELD 5 N/C 4 N/C 3 DATA+ (RS 485) 2 DATA- (RS 485) 1 WH/OR OR BK/WH BK WH/RD RD BK BK/WH RD WH/RD GN WH/GN OR WH/OR BU WH/BU A B C D E F N P R S ENCODER +SIN REFSIN +COS REFCOS DATA+ (RS-485) DATA- (RS 485) POWER COMMON TS+ TS-
BU WH/BU GN WH/GN
Figure F.3 MPL-A5xx and all MPL-Bxxx Motor or 1326AB-BXXXX-M2L, -M2KXL, -S2L, and -S2KXL motor with 2090-XXNFMP-SXX cable
Hi-Res Feedback Option Board POWER COMMON 12 POWER 11 REFSIN 10 +SIN 9 REFCOS 8 +COS 7 SHIELD 6 SHIELD 5 N/C 4 N/C 3 DATA+ (RS 485) 2 DATA- (RS 485) 1 WH/GY OR BK/WH BK WH/RD RD BK BK/WH RD WH/RD GN WH/GN OR WH/GY A B C D E F N P R S ENCODER +SIN REFSIN +COS REFCOS DATA+ (RS-485) DATA- (RS 485) POWER COMMON TS+ TS-
GN WH/GN
Note: Thermal Switch cannot be accessed using 2090-XXNFMP-SXX cable.
F-5
Connection Examples
Figure F.4 MPL-A3xx - MPL-A45xx and all MPG series motors with 2090-XXNFMP-SXX cable
Hi-Res Feedback Option Board POWER COMMON 12 POWER 11 REFSIN 10 +SIN 9 REFCOS 8 +COS 7 SHIELD 6 SHIELD 5 N/C 4 N/C 3 DATA+ (RS 485) 2 DATA- (RS 485) 1 WH/GY GY BK/WH BK WH/RD RD BK BK/WH RD WH/RD GN WH/GN GY WH/GY A B C D E F K L R S ENCODER +SIN REFSIN +COS REFCOS DATA+ (RS-485) DATA- (RS 485) POWER COMMON TS+ TS-
GN WH/GN

Figure F.5 MPL-A3xx - MPL-A45xx and all MPG series motors with 2090-UXNFDMP-SXX cable
Hi-Res Feedback Option Board POWER COMMON 12 POWER 11 REFSIN 10 +SIN 9 REFCOS 8 +COS 7 SHIELD 6 SHIELD 5 N/C 4 N/C 3 DATA+ (RS 485) 2 DATA- (RS 485) 1 WH/GY GY BK/WH BK WH/RD RD BK BK/WH RD WH/RD GN WH/GN GY WH/GY BU WH/BU A B C D E F K L R S ENCODER +SIN REFSIN +COS REFCOS DATA+ (RS-485) DATA- (RS 485) POWER COMMON TS+ TS-
BU WH/BU GN WH/GN
Figure F.6 HPK-Series motors with 2090-XXNFMF-SXX cable

Hi-Res Feedback Option Board POWER COMMON 12 POWER 11 REFSIN 10 +SIN 9 REFCOS 8 +COS 7 SHIELD 6 SHIELD 5 N/C 4 N/C 3 DATA+ (RS 485) 2 DATA- (RS 485) 1 WH/GY OR BK/WH BK WH/RD RD BK BK/WH RD WH/RD GN WH/GN OR WH/GY A B C D E F N P R S ENCODER +SIN REFSIN +COS REFCOS DATA+ (RS-485) DATA- (RS 485) POWER COMMON TS+ TS-
GN WH/GN
F-6
Connection Examples
Figure F.7 Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable with 12-pin DIN style connector
Hi-Res Feedback Option Board POWER COMMON 12 POWER 11 REFSIN 10 +SIN 9 REFCOS 8 +COS 7 SHIELD 6 SHIELD 5 N/C 4 N/C 3 DATA+ (RS 485) 2 DATA- (RS 485) 1 BU RD BN WH BK PK RD BU PK GN BN WH 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ENCODER POWER N/C POWER COMMON SHIELD +COS DATA- (RS 485) REFSIN +SIN N/C N/C DATA+ (RS 485) REFCOS
GY GN
GY BK
Figure F.8 Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable with 10-pin MS style connector
Hi-Res Feedback Option Board POWER COMMON 12 POWER 11 REFSIN 10 +SIN 9 REFCOS 8 +COS 7 SHIELD 6 SHIELD 5 N/C 4 N/C 3 DATA+ (RS 485) 2 DATA- (RS 485) 1 BU RD BN WH BK PK RD BU BN BK GY GN WH PK A B C D E F G H I J ENCODER POWER POWER COMMON REFSIN REFCOS DATA+ (RS 485) DATA- (RS 485) +SIN +COS N/C SHIELD
GY GN
Figure F.9 Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable with 8-pin Berg style connector
Hi-Res Feedback Option Board POWER COMMON 12 POWER 11 REFSIN 10 +SIN 9 REFCOS 8 +COS 7 SHIELD 6 SHIELD 5 N/C 4 N/C 3 DATA+ (RS 485) 2 DATA- (RS 485) 1 BU RD BN WH BK PK RD BU BN BK GY GN WH PK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ENCODER POWER POWER COMMON REFSIN REFCOS DATA+ (RS 485) DATA- (RS 485) +SIN +COS
GY GN
F-7
Connection Examples
Figure F.10 Pre-attached Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable

Hi-Res Feedback Option Board POWER COMMON 12 POWER 11 REFSIN 10 +SIN 9 REFCOS 8 +COS 7 SHIELD 6 SHIELD 5 N/C 4 N/C 3 DATA+ (RS 485) 2 DATA- (RS 485) 1 BU RD BN WH BK PK RD BU BN BK GY GN WH PK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ENCODER POWER POWER COMMON REFSIN REFCOS DATA+ (RS 485) DATA- (RS 485) +SIN +COS
GY GN
F-8
Notes:
Appendix
Chapter Objectives
For Information on Specifications Wiring the Resolver Feedback Option Card to a Resolver See Page... G-1 G-3
Specifications
Resolver Feedback Option Card Specifications

Consideration Excitation Frequency Excitation Voltage Resolver Feedback Voltage Customer-I/O plug (P1) Description 2381 - 9300 Hz 8 - 26 Vrms 2 Vrms +/- 300 mV Allen-Bradley PN: S94262908 Weidmuller PN: BL3.50/90/8BK
Compatible Resolvers
Table G.A specifies which resolvers are supported by the PowerFlex 700S Resolver Feedback Option module.
Table G.A Compatible Resolvers.
Parameter 275 [Reslvr0 Type Sel] Setting for Phase I Firmware 1.17 1 - Rel800123-2R 2 - Rel800123-2S 3 - Rel800123-2T 2 - Rel800123-2S 1 - Rel800123-2R 2 - Rel800123-2S 3 - Rel800123-2T 1 - Rel800123-2R N/A Parameter 275 [Reslvr0 Type Sel] Setting for Phase I Firmware 2.XX 1 - T2014/2087x1 2 - T2014/2087x2 3 - T2014/2087x2 2 - T2014/2087x2 1 - T2014/2087x1 2 - T2014/2087x2 3 - T2014/2087x2 1 - T2014/2087x1 Parameter 277 [Reslvr0 Type Sel] Setting for Phase II Firmware 1.XX 1 - T2014/2087x1 2 - T2014/2087x2 3 - T2014/2087x2 2 - T2014/2087x2 1 - T2014/2087x1 2 - T2014/2087x2 3 - T2014/2087x2 1 - T2014/2087x1
Manufacturer Tamagawa Tamagawa Tamagawa Tamagawa Tamagawa Tamagawa Tamagawa Tamagawa Advanced Micro Controls Inc. (AMCI)
Manufacturer Catalog Number TS-2014N181E32 TS-2014N182E32 TS-2014N185E32 TS-2087N12E9 TS-2087N1E9 TS-2087N2E9 TS-2087N5E9 TS-2087N11E9 R11X-C10/7
Notes x 1, flange-mounted enclosure x 2, flange-mounted enclosure x 5, flange-mounted enclosure x 2, HD foot-mounted enclosure, double shaft x 1, HD foot-mounted enclosure x 2, HD foot-mounted enclosure x 5, HD foot-mounted enclosure x 1, HD foot-mounted enclosure, double shaft
14 - AmciR11XC107 14 - AmciR11XC107
G-2
Allen-Bradley servo motors may be ordered with factory installed resolvers. Table G.B specifies which factory installed resolvers are supported by the 700S Resolver Feedback Option module.
Table G.B Compatibility with Resolvers on Allen-Bradley Motors
Parameter 275 [Reslvr0 Type Sel] Setting for Phase I Firmware 1.17 Not Supported 9 - AB 164982-8 13 - AB 129214-8 Parameter 275 [Reslvr0 Type Sel] Setting for Phase I Firmware 2.XX Not Supported 9 - 1326Ax 460v 13 - Reserved Parameter 277 [Reslvr0 Type Sel] Setting for Phase II Firmware 1.XX Not Supported 9 - 1326Ax 460v 13 - Reserved
Motor / Resolver Type Compatible Notes 1326 AB 230V Primary Resolver No Receiver type resolver - not supported 1326 AB 460V Primary Resolver Yes Transmitter type resolver supported 1326 AB 460V Secondary Yes Secondary resolver is Resolver geared to motor - not intended for motor speed / position feedback Transmitter type resolver supported 1326AD 230V Rare Earth No Receiver type resolver - not Primary Resolver supported 1326AH 460V Explosion Proof Yes Transmitter type resolver Motor Primary Resolver supported 1326AH 460V Explosion Proof Yes Secondary resolver is Motor Secondary Resolver geared to motor - not intended for motor speed / position feedback Transmitter type resolver supported 1326AS 460V Rare Earth Yes Transmitter type resolver Primary Resolver supported MPL 460V Primary Resolver Yes Transmitter type resolver supported
Not Supported 9 - AB 164982-8 N/A
Not Supported 9 - 1326Ax 460v N/A
Not Supported 9 - 1326Ax 460v N/A
9 - AB 164982-8 4 - AB 155407-8
9 - 1326Ax 460v 4 - MPL 460v
9 - 1326Ax 460v 4 - MPL 460v
Recommended Cable
Rockwell Automation strongly recommends the use of Reliance Electric 417900-207CG or Belden 9730 cable for installation, or an equivalent cable that meets these specifications: 3 Twisted Pairs, 80C, 300V Chrome FPR Jacket, Plenum Rated Conductor Size: 18 AWG Twists Per Inch: 2-3 twists per inch of wire lay per pair Capacitance Per Pair: not to exceed 30 pF per foot +/- 0.3 pF as read on a GEN_RAD Model 1658 RLC Digibridge or equivalent Capacitance Difference Pair to Pair: not to exceed 0.6 pF per foot as read on a GEN_RAD Model 1658 RLC Digibridge or equivalent Resistance per 1000 Feet: 17.15 +/- 10% Inductance per 1000 Feet: 0.13 mH +/- 10% as read on a GEN_RAD Model 1658 RLC Digibridge or equivalent Insulation Thickness: 0.008 in. Conductor Stranding 16/30 Jacket Thickness: 0.018 in.
G-3
7 8
Wiring the Resolver Feedback Option Card to a Resolver
Terminal 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Signal REF HIGH SHIELD REF LOW SIN HIGH SHIELD SIN LOW COS HIGH COS LOW
Description Positive Reference signal Connection point for resolver cable shield Negative Reference signal Positive Sine signal Connection point for resolver cable shield Negative Sine signal Positive Cosine signal Negative Cosine signal
Connection Examples Resolver Interface - Clockwise Rotation = Count Up
1 2 3 4 5
REF HIGH 8 SHIELD 7 REF LOW 6 SIN HIGH 5 SHIELD 4 SIN LOW 3 COS HIGH 2 COS LOW 1
+ -
+ + + -
REF
+ SIN COS
+ -
+ -
+ -
Resolver Interface - Clockwise Rotation = Count Down (Reverse Polarity of Sine or Cosine Signals)
+ -
+ + + -
REF
+ SIN COS
+ -
+ -
+ -
+ + + -
REF
+ SIN COS
+ -
+ -
G-4
Notes:
Appendix
For information about: Specifications Recommended Cables Wiring the MDI Option Card
See page H-1 H-2 H-3
Specifications
MDI Option Card Specifications

Consideration Rotary Encoder Voltage Supply Rotary Encoder Hi-Resolution Feedback Rotary Encoder Maximum Cable Length Linear Encoder Maximum Cable Length Rotary Encoder RS-485 Interface Description 11.5V DC @ 130 mA Sine/Cosine 1V P-P Offset 2.5 90m (295 ft.) 245m (800 ft.) The MDI Option card obtains the following information via the Hiperface RS-485 interface shortly after power-up: Address Command Number Mode Number of turns Number of Sine/Cos cycles Checksum high speed 12-24V DC sinking digital inputs Allen-Bradley PN: S94274917 Weidmuller PN: 67601782
Registration Inputs Customer-I/O plug (P1)
Linear Sensors
Temposonics R-Series Linear sensors with MTS part numbers ending in 1S2G1102 work with the MDI Option.
Part Number Character 1 S 2 G 1 1 02 Characteristic Input Voltage = +24Vdc SSI output Data Length = 24 Bits Output Format = Gray Code Resolution = 0.005 mm Performance = Standard Scale Orientation = Forward-acting Synchronized
Temposonics is a registered trademark of MTS Systems Corporation.
H-2
Rotary Encoders
Table H.A specifies which encoders work with the MDI Option. Important: Please note that encoders must be ordered as "Single Ended". This will ensure that the RS-485 channel has the proper termination network installed at the factory.
Table H.A Supported Encoders
Model Stegmann SINCOS SCS-60, SCS-70, SCM-60, and SCM-70 Stegmann SINCOS SCS-KIT-101 and SCM-KIT-101 Stegmann SINCOS SRS-50, SRS-60, SRM-50, and SRM-60 Stegmann SINCOS SRS/ SRM 25 Resolution 512 sine cycles per revolution. Comment SCM-60 and SCM-70 have built-in mechanical turns counter.
1024 sine cycles per revolution. SCM-60 and SCM-70 have built-in mechanical turns counter. 1024 sine cycles per revolution. SRM-50 and SRM-60 have built-in mechanical turns counter.
1024 sine cycles per revolution SRS25 and SRM25 have built-in mechanical turns counter. IP65 Protection Class. Size 25 square flange mounting. Stegmann SINCOS SRS660 1024 sine cycles per revolution Hollow-shaft up to 14 mm diameter Stegmann SINCOS 512 sine cycles per revolution. While the software supports this SHS-170 encoder, the SHS-170 draws excessive current and should only be used with an external power supply. Allen-Bradley 842HR 1024 sine cycles per revolution Has built-in mechanical turns counter. IP65 Protection Class. Size 25 square flange mounting.
SINCOS, SINCODER and LINCODER are registered trademarks of Stegmann Inc.
Recommended Cables
If you are using this motor and feedback device: Temposonics R-Series Linear sensors with MTS part numbers ending in 1S2G1102 Allen-Bradley 1326AB-BXXXX-M2L, -M2KXL, -S2L, and -S2KXL motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen-Bradley MPL-A5xx and MPL-Bxxx motors motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen-Bradley 1326AB-BXXXX-M2L, -M2KXL, -S2L, and -S2KXL motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen-Bradley MPL-A5xx and MPL-Bxxx motors motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen-Bradley MPL-A3xx - MPL-A45xx and all MPG series motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen-Bradley MPL-A3xx - MPL-A45xx and all MPG series motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder HPK-Series motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Use this cable: See this wiring diagram: Mating MTS molded extension cable for RG connector or integral Figure H.1 on page H-3 P cable Allen-Bradley 2090-CDNFDMP-SXX Figure H.2 on page H-4
Allen-Bradley 2090-CDNFDMP-SXX Allen-Bradley 2090-XXNFMP-SXX
Figure H.2 on page H-4 Figure H.3 on page H-4
Allen-Bradley 2090-XXNFMP-SXX Allen-Bradley 2090-XXNFMP-SXX
Allen-Bradley 2090-UXNFDMP-SXX
Figure H.5 on page H-5
Allen-Bradley 2090-XXNFMF-SXX
Figure H.6 on page H-5
H-3
If you are using this motor and feedback device: Any other motor with external Stegmann SHS-170 rotary encoder Any other motor with external Stegmann SCS-60, SCS-70, SCM-60 or SCM-70, SRS-50, SRS-60, SRM-60, SRM-60, SRS-25, SRM-25 or Allen-Bradley 842HR rotary encoder Any other motor with external Stegmann SCS-Kit 101 or SCK-Kit 101 rotary encoder Any other motor with external Stegmann SRS660 rotary encoder
Use this cable: Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable with 12-pin DIN style connector Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable with 10-pin MS style connector
See this wiring diagram: Figure H.7 on page H-5 Figure H.8 on page H-6
Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable with 8-pin Berg style connector Is available only with pre-attached Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable of various lengths
Wiring the MDI Option Card

Terminal 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Signal Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON Rotary Encoder POWER Rotary Encoder REFSIN Rotary Encoder +SIN Rotary Encoder REFCOS Rotary Encoder +COS Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) Linear Sensor CLOCK+ Linear Sensor CLOCKLinear Sensor DATA+ Linear Sensor DATARotary Encoder REGISTRATION+ Rotary Encoder REGISTRATIONLinear Sensor REGISTRATION+ Linear Sensor REGISTRATIONCHASSIS GND Description Power supply for Rotary Encoder interface Positive Sine signal for Rotary Encoder interface Negative Sine signal for Rotary Encoder interface Negative Cosine signal for Rotary Encoder interface Positive Cosine signal for Rotary Encoder interface Positive DH485 terminal for Rotary Encoder interface Negative DH485 terminal for Rotary Encoder interface Positive Clock terminal for Linear Sensor interface Negative Clock terminal for Linear Sensor interface Positive SSI terminal for Linear Sensor interface Negative SSI terminal for Linear Sensor interface Positive terminal for Rotary Encoder registration strobe Negative terminal for Rotary Encoder registration strobe Positive terminal for Linear Sensor registration strobe Negative terminal for Linear Sensor registration strobe Connection point for cable shields
Connection Examples
Figure H.1 Linear Sensor connections with MDI RG connector or P integral cable
EXTERNAL 24 Vdc POWER SUPPLY POWER COMMON RD or BN WH MDI Feedback Option Board 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON Rotary Encoder POWER Rotary Encoder REFSIN Rotary Encoder +SIN Rotary Encoder REFCOS Rotary Encoder +COS Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) Linear Sensor CLOCK+ Linear Sensor CLOCKLinear Sensor DATA+ Linear Sensor DATARotary Encoder REGISTRATION+ Rotary Encoder REGISTRATIONLinear Sensor REGISTRATION+ Linear Sensor REGISTRATIONCHASSIS GND
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
LINEAR SENSOR WH RD or BN GN YE GY PK 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 No Connection DC Ground +24 Vdc (-) CLOCK (+) CLOCK (+) DATA (-) DATA
YE GN GY PK
H-4
Connection Examples
Figure H.2 Rotary Encoder connections for MPL-A5xx and MPL-Bxxx motors or 1326AB-BXXXX-M2L, -M2KXL, -S2L, and -S2KXL motors with 2090-CDNFDMP-SXX cable
MDI Feedback Option Board Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON Rotary Encoder POWER Rotary Encoder REFSIN Rotary Encoder +SIN Rotary Encoder REFCOS Rotary Encoder +COS Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) Linear Sensor CLOCK+ Linear Sensor CLOCKLinear Sensor DATA+ Linear Sensor DATARotary Encoder REGISTRATION+ Rotary Encoder REGISTRATIONLinear Sensor REGISTRATION+ Linear Sensor REGISTRATIONCHASSIS GND 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 WH/OR OR BK/WH BK WH/RD RD GN WH/GN BU WH/BU BK BK/WH RD WH/RD GN WH/GN OR WH/OR BU WH/BU A B C D E F N P R S ROTARY ENCODER +SIN REFSIN +COS REFCOS DATA+ (RS-485) DATA- (RS 485) POWER COMMON TS+ TS-
Figure H.3 Rotary Encoder connections for MPL-A5xx and MPL-Bxxx motors or 1326AB-BXXXX-M2L, -M2KXL, -S2L, and -S2KXL motors with 2090-XXNFMP-SXX cable
MDI Feedback Option Board Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON Rotary Encoder POWER Rotary Encoder REFSIN Rotary Encoder +SIN Rotary Encoder REFCOS Rotary Encoder +COS Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) Linear Sensor CLOCK+ Linear Sensor CLOCKLinear Sensor DATA+ Linear Sensor DATARotary Encoder REGISTRATION+ Rotary Encoder REGISTRATIONLinear Sensor REGISTRATION+ Linear Sensor REGISTRATIONCHASSIS GND 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 WH/GY OR BK/WH BK WH/RD RD GN WH/GN BK BK/WH RD WH/RD GN WH/GN OR WH/GY A B C D E F N P R S ROTARY ENCODER +SIN REFSIN +COS REFCOS DATA+ (RS-485) DATA- (RS 485) POWER COMMON TS+ TS-

Figure H.4 Rotary Encoder connections for MPL-A3xx - MPL-A45xx and all MPG series motors with 2090-XXNFMP-SXX cable
MDI Feedback Option Board Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON Rotary Encoder POWER Rotary Encoder REFSIN Rotary Encoder +SIN Rotary Encoder REFCOS Rotary Encoder +COS Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) Linear Sensor CLOCK+ Linear Sensor CLOCKLinear Sensor DATA+ Linear Sensor DATARotary Encoder REGISTRATION+ Rotary Encoder REGISTRATIONLinear Sensor REGISTRATION+ Linear Sensor REGISTRATIONCHASSIS GND 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 WH/GY GY BK/WH BK WH/RD RD GN WH/GN BK BK/WH RD WH/RD GN WH/GN GY WH/GY A B C D E F N P R S ROTARY ENCODER +SIN REFSIN +COS REFCOS DATA+ (RS-485) DATA- (RS 485) POWER COMMON TS+ TS-
H-5
Connection Examples
Figure H.5 Rotary Encoder connections for MPL-A3xx - MPL-A45xx and all MPG series motors with 2090-UXNFDMP-SXX cable
MDI Feedback Option Board Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON Rotary Encoder POWER Rotary Encoder REFSIN Rotary Encoder +SIN Rotary Encoder REFCOS Rotary Encoder +COS Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) Linear Sensor CLOCK+ Linear Sensor CLOCKLinear Sensor DATA+ Linear Sensor DATARotary Encoder REGISTRATION+ Rotary Encoder REGISTRATIONLinear Sensor REGISTRATION+ Linear Sensor REGISTRATIONCHASSIS GND 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
WH/GY GY BK/WH BK WH/RD RD BK BK/WH RD WH/RD GN WH/GN GY WH/GY BU WH/BU A B C D E F K L R S ENCODER +SIN REFSIN +COS REFCOS DATA+ (RS-485) DATA- (RS 485) POWER COMMON TS+ TS-
BU WH/BU GN WH/GN
Figure H.6 HPK-Series motors with 2090-XXNFMF-SXX cable

ENCODER WH/GY OR BK/WH BK WH/RD RD BK BK/WH RD WH/RD GN WH/GN OR WH/GY A B C D E F N P R S +SIN REFSIN +COS REFCOS DATA+ (RS-485) DATA- (RS 485) POWER COMMON TS+ TS-
GN WH/GN

Figure H.7 Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable with 12-pin DIN style connector
MDI Feedback Option Board Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON Rotary Encoder POWER Rotary Encoder REFSIN Rotary Encoder +SIN Rotary Encoder REFCOS Rotary Encoder +COS Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) Linear Sensor CLOCK+ Linear Sensor CLOCKLinear Sensor DATA+ Linear Sensor DATARotary Encoder REGISTRATION+ Rotary Encoder REGISTRATIONLinear Sensor REGISTRATION+ Linear Sensor REGISTRATIONCHASSIS GND 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BU RD BN WH BK PK GY GN RD BU PK GN BN WH 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ROTARY ENCODER POWER N/C POWER COMMON SHIELD +COS DATA- (RS 485) REFSIN +SIN N/C N/C DATA+ (RS 485) REFCOS
GY BK
H-6
Connection Examples
Figure H.8 Rotary Encoder connections with Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable and 10-pin MS style connector
MDI Feedback Option Board Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON Rotary Encoder POWER Rotary Encoder REFSIN Rotary Encoder +SIN Rotary Encoder REFCOS Rotary Encoder +COS Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) Linear Sensor CLOCK+ Linear Sensor CLOCKLinear Sensor DATA+ Linear Sensor DATARotary Encoder REGISTRATION+ Rotary Encoder REGISTRATIONLinear Sensor REGISTRATION+ Linear Sensor REGISTRATIONCHASSIS GND 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BU RD BN WH BK PK GY GN RD BU BN BK GY GN WH PK A B C D E F G H I J ROTARY ENCODER POWER POWER COMMON REFSIN REFCOS DATA+ (RS 485) DATA- (RS 485) +SIN +COS N/C SHIELD
Figure H.9 Rotary Encoder connections with Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable and 8-pin Berg style connector
BU RD BN WH BK PK RD BU BN BK GY GN WH PK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ROTARY ENCODER
POWER POWER COMMON REFSIN REFCOS DATA+ (RS 485) DATA- (RS 485) +SIN +COS
GY GN
Figure H.10 Rotary Encoder connections with Stegmann pre-attached shielded twisted-pair cable
BU RD BN WH BK PK BU RD BN WH BK PK GY GN
ROTARY ENCODER
POWER COMMON POWER REFSIN +SIN REFCOS +COS DATA+ (RS 485) DATA- (RS 485)
GY GN
H-7
Connection Examples
Figure H.11 Registration Sensor connection

EXTERNAL 12 or 24 Vdc POWER SUPPLY POWER COMMON MDI Feedback Option Board 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON Rotary Encoder POWER Rotary Encoder REFSIN Rotary Encoder +SIN Rotary Encoder REFCOS Rotary Encoder +COS Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) Linear Sensor CLOCK+ Linear Sensor CLOCKLinear Sensor DATA+ Linear Sensor DATARotary Encoder REGISTRATION+ Rotary Encoder REGISTRATIONLinear Sensor REGISTRATION+ Linear Sensor REGISTRATIONCHASSIS GND
Rotary Registration Sensor + Power Common
Linear Registration Sensor + Power Common
H-8
Notes:
Appendix
Compatible Permanent Magnet Motors
The following table contains a list of specifications for the permanent magnet motors compatible with PowerFlex 700S drives. Note that you must have a high resolution Stegmann or Heidenhain encoder or compatible resolver. Table I.A Motor Name Plate and Rating Specifications
System Cont. Stall Torque (N-m)
1.58 1.58 3.05 3.05 4.08 4.74 5.99 6.21 5.99 5.99 8.36 8.13 10.20 10.20 10.70 19.40 27.90 1.58 3.05 4.18 4.74 6.55 5.65 8.25 8.25 10.20 14.10 10.70 19.40 26.80 34.00 34.00 36.70 48.00 62.80 60.00 83.10 110.00 110.00 130.00 124.30 124.30 162.70
Model Number
Parameter # MPL-A310P MPL-A310F MPL-A320P MPL-A320H MPL-A330P MPL-A420P MPL-A430P MPL-A430H MPL-A4520P MPL-A4520K MPL-A4530F MPL-A4530K MPL-A4540C MPL-A4540F MPL-A520K MPL-A540K(1) MPL-A560F MPL-B310P MPL-B320P MPL-B330P MPL-B420P(1) MPL-B430P(1) MPL-B4520P MPL-B4530F MPL-B4530K MPL-B4540F MPL-B4560F MPL-B520K(1) MPL-B540K(1) MPL-B560F MPL-B580F MPL-B580J(1) MPL-B640F MPL-B660F MPL-B680D MPL-B680F MPL-B860D(1) MPL-B880C(1) MPL-B880D(1) MPL-B960B(1) MPL-B960C(1) MPL-B960D(1) MPL-B980B(1)
Motor NP Motor NP Volts Motor NP FLA (A Frequency (line to line V rms) rms) (Hz)
1 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 2 3.4 2.1 6.4 4.6 8.5 9.0 11.9 8.6 12.4 10.6 9.5 14.4 6.6 13.0 16.3 29.3 29.3 1.7 3.2 4.3 4.5 6.5 6.0 5.0 7.8 6.4 8.3 8.1 14.5 14.5 18.4 22.6 22.7 27.2 24.0 33.9 33.6 33.6 40.3 29.7 38.9 50.2 31.8 3 294.0 185.3 271.3 208.7 280.7 268.7 234.0 184.7 234.0 223.3 144.7 196.0 93.3 162.0 208.0 180.7 125.3 310.0 313.3 274.0 255.3 214.0 236.7 162.0 200.7 162.0 144.7 208.0 177.3 130.7 132.7 148.0 106.0 81.3 94.0 79.3 96.0 72.7 86.7 62.0 76.0 76.7 59.3
Motor NP RPM Motor NP (oper. rpm) Power (KW)

4 4410 2780 4070 3130 4210 4030 3510 2770 3510 3350 2170 2940 1400 2430 3120 2710 1880 4650 4700 4110 3830 3210 3550 2430 3010 2430 2170 3120 2660 1960 1990 2220 1590 1220 1410 1190 1440 1090 1300 930 1140 1150 890 5 0.73 0.46 1.30 1.00 1.80 2.00 2.20 1.80 2.20 2.10 1.90 2.50 1.50 2.60 3.50 5.50 5.50 0.77 1.50 1.80 1.90 2.20 2.10 2.10 2.60 2.60 3.20 3.50 5.40 5.50 7.10 7.90 6.11 6.15 9.30 7.50 12.50 12.60 15.00 12.70 14.80 15.00 15.02
Motor Poles
7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Current peak (A rms)

9.9, 6.6 20.9 13.6 26.9 32.5 47.4 31.8 35.4 30.4 29.7 43.8 20.5 38.2 46.0 84.9 84.9 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.2 12.0 17.0 13.4 19.1 16.3 25.5 23.3 42.4 42.4 66.5 66.5 46.0 67.9 66.5 67.9 67.5 69.0 113.2 63.6 88.4 102.5 70.7
Motor Max RPM (rpm)

5000 3000 5000 3500 5000 5000 5000 3500 5000 4000 2800 4000 1500 3000 4000 4000 3000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 3000 4000 3000 3000 4000 4000 3000 3000 3800 3000 3000 2000 3000 2000 1500 2000 1200 1500 2000 1000
I-2
Model Number
MPL-B980C(1) MPL-B980D(1) MPG-A004-031 MPG-A010-031 MPG-A010-091 MPG-A025-031 MPG-A025-091 MPG-A050-031 MPG-A050-091 MPG-A110-031 MPG-A110-091 MPG-B010-031 MPG-B010-091 MPG-B025-031 MPG-B025-091 MPG-B050-031 MPG-B050-091 MPG-B110-031 MPG-B110-091 1326AB-B410G 1326AB-B410J 1326AB-B420E 1326AB-B420H 1326AB-B430E 1326AB-B430G 1326AB-B515E 1326AB-B515G 1326AB-B520E 1326AB-B520F 1326AB-B530E 1326AB-B720E 1326AB-B720F 1326AB-B730E 1326AB-B740C 1326AB-B740E 1326AS-B310H 1326AS-B330H 1326AS-B420G 1326AS-B440G 1326AS-B460F 1326AS-B630F 1326AS-B660E 1326AS-B690E 1326AS-B840E 1326AS-B860C 1326AH-B330F 1326AH-B440F 1326AH-B540F 3050R-7 11050R-7
(1)
Motor NP Motor NP Volts Motor NP FLA (A Frequency (line to line V rms) rms) (Hz)
460 460 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 390 390 48.2 63.6 1.8 2.1 0.9 9.9 3.0 24.7 5.0 20.2 17.0 1.6 0.7 4.0 1.9 16.3 3.4 12.9 10.6 2.5 3.5 2.8 5.5 3.9 5.6 6.1 9.5 6.7 8.8 9.5 17.5 27.5 22.8 20.9 32.0 0.8 2.1 2.6 5.4 6.2 7.8 11.8 19.0 21.2 17.6 2.1 3.3 11.1 66.0 218.0 67.3 74.7 222.7 189.3 295.3 181.0 168.0 120.0 275.0 122.0 184.0 162.7 357.3 219.0 175.0 92.0 290.0 112.0 184.0 118.0 165.0 70.0 137.3 67.7 114.3 70.3 88.7 71.0 70.3 74.3 70.0 117.0 78.3 52.3 79.7 204.5 204.5 179.0 149.0 148.5 142.7 100.7 87.3 79.3 77.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 50.0 50.0
Motor NP RPM Motor NP (oper. rpm) Power (KW)

1010 1120 3340 2840 4430 1810 1680 1200 2750 1220 1840 2440 5360 2190 1750 920 2900 1120 1840 3540 4950 2100 4120 2030 3430 2110 2660 2130 2110 2230 2100 3510 2350 1570 2390 4090 4090 3580 2980 2970 2140 1510 1310 1190 1160 3000 2500 2500 500 500 16.80 18.60 0.21 0.36 0.19 0.88 0.52 1.50 0.75 2.20 1.60 0.34 0.23 0.92 0.54 1.20 0.79 2.00 1.60 1.00 1.40 1.10 2.20 1.40 2.30 2.30 2.90 2.90 2.90 4.20 6.80 11.70 9.60 8.70 12.70 0.30 0.90 1.20 2.00 2.80 2.40 3.40 5.00 4.70 6.00 0.75 1.22 2.60 30.00 110.00
Motor Poles
8 8 8 8 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 8 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 6 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 12 12
Current peak (A rms)

99.0 141.4 4.0 6.0 2.3 19.8 8.5 53.0 15.6 53.0 33.2 4.4 1.5 11.3 5.2 32.5 9.9 31.1 20.5 7.4 10.4 8.5 15.6 11.7 16.8 18.3 28.5 20.1 26.4 28.5 52.5 66.5 66.5 62.7 66.5 2.4 6.0 7.8 16.2 18.6 18.5 29.8 41.3 39.5 44.4 9.0 13.8 47.2 132.0 436.0
System Cont. Stall Torque (N-m)

158.20 158.20 0.60 1.21 0.41 4.65 2.95 11.90 2.60 17.20 8.30 1.33 0.41 4.02 2.95 12.40 2.60 17.00 8.30 2.70 2.70 5.00 5.10 6.60 6.40 10.40 10.40 13.00 13.10 18.00 30.90 31.80 39.00 53.00 50.80 0.70 2.10 3.20 6.40 9.00 10.70 21.50 36.40 37.60 49.30 -
Motor Max RPM (rpm)

1500 2000 6000 4875 5900 5200 5625 2510 3775 2875 3500 6450 6450 4838 5900 2510 4560 2420 3500 5000 7250 3000 6000 3000 5000 3000 5000 3000 3500 3000 3500 5000 3350 2200 3400 6200 6500 5250 5250 4300 4500 3000 3000 3000 2000 3000 2500 2500 500 500
Due to low inertia and low electrical time constant characteristics, it is recommended that the system inertia be at least 0.02 seconds when using this motor for constant velocity applications.
Appendix
General Information
This document provides information on operation of an ATEX Approved drive and ATEX approved motor. The motor is located in a defined hazardous environment, while the drive is not. A protective system is required to stop current flow to the motor when an over temperature condition has been sensed in the motor. When sensed, the drive will go into a stop condition. To restart the drive, the over temperature condition must be resolved, followed by a valid start command to the drive. The PowerFlex 700S Phase II drive must have the DriveGuard Safe-Off with Second Encoder option board installed for ATEX applications. Consult the option board User Manual for installation instructions if necessary. The drive is manufactured under the guidelines of the ATEX directive 94/9/ EC. These Drives are in Group II Category (2) Applications with ATEX Approved Motors. Certification of the drive for the ATEX group and category on its nameplate requires installation, operation, and maintenance according to this document and to the requirements found in the User Manual and appropriate Motor Instruction Manual(s). ATTENTION: Operation of this ATEX certified drive with an ATEX certified motor that is located in a hazardous environment requires additional installation, operation, and maintenance procedures beyond those stated in the standard user manual. Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if all additional instructions in this document are not observed.
Motor Requirements
The motor must be manufactured under the guidelines of the ATEX directive 94/9/EC. It must be installed, operated, and maintained per the motor manufacturer supplied instructions. Only motors with nameplates marked for use on an inverter power source, and labeled for specific hazardous areas, may be used in hazardous areas on inverter (variable frequency) power. When the motor is indicated for ATEX Group II Category 2 for use in gas environments (Category 2G) the motor must be of flameproof construction, EEx d (according to EN50018) or Ex d (according to EN60079-1 or IEC60079-1). Group II motors are marked with a temperature or a temperature code.
J-2
When the motor is indicated for ATEX Group II Category 2 for use in dust environments (Category 2D) the motor must be protected by an enclosure (according to EN50281-1-1 or according to IEC61241-1: Ex tD). Group II motors are marked with a temperature. The motor over temperature signal supplied to the drive must be a normally closed contact (open during over temperature condition) compatible with the digital (logic) input circuitry of the drive. If multiple sensors are required in the motor, the connection at the drive must be the resultant of all required contacts wired in series. Refer to all product markings for additional cautions that may apply. Typical motor markings are contained on a motor certification nameplate similar to the sample below.
FLAMEPROOF Exd ENCLOSURE

EExd I/IIB II 2 G/D I M2 Sira ATEX Tamb C to 0518 C
MFG. BY ROCKWELL AUTOMATION
Drive Wiring
Important: ATEX certification of this drive requires that 2 separate inputs be configured to monitor a normally closed over temperature contact (or multiple contacts wired in series) presented to the drive from the motor. The first input must energize Digital Input6/Hardware Enable on the drive control board (TB2, terminal 16). The second input must energize the relay coil on the DriveGuard Safe-Off with Second Encoder option board (terminals 1 & 2 on the board). This option board must be installed in the drive for ATEX applications. It is offered with a 24V DC coil only. Both input signals are wired with respect to the drive's digital input common when using a control board with 24V I/O. Motor supplied contacts must have ratings compatible with the input circuit ratings and applied voltage level of the drive.
J-3
Safe-Off Terminal Descriptions

No. 1 2 3 4 Signal +24V DC 24V Common Monitor - N.C. Common - N.C. Description Connections for power to energize coil. 33.3 mA typical, 55 mA maximum. Normally closed contacts for monitoring relay status. Maximum Resistive Load: 250V AC / 30V DC / 50 VA / 60 Watts Maximum Inductive Load: 250V AC / 30V DC / 25 VA / 30 Watts
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Wiring Example
AC Line Input Power
PowerFlex 700S Phase II AC Drive 1 2 24V DC Common +24V DC Gate Control Power Supply Safe Off Option
Motor Over Temperature Sensor(s)
3 4 1 2 Gate Control Circuit 13 16 Digital In 4-6 Com. Digital In 6 (Enable)
J-4
Drive Hardware Configuration
Digital Input 6 must be configured as a Hardware Enable. Ensure that Jumper P22 on the Main Control Board is set to HW Enable (Pins 2 and 4).`
Jumper P22
4 2 3 1
= HW Enable
4 2
3 1
= No HW Enable
Verify Operation
At regular intervals during the life of the machine check the protective system for proper operation. Both channels shall be verified using the table below. How frequently the protective system is checked is dependent on the safety analysis of the machine section controlled by the drive.
Protective System Status Safe-Off Option Terminals 1 & 2 PowerFlex 700S Phase II Enable Input Safe-Off Option Monitor Contact Terminals 3 & 4 PowerFlex 700S Phase II Drive Inhibits Param. 156, Bits 1 & 16 Drive In Drive In Drive In Safe State Safe State Safe State Channel Operation No Power Power Applied No Power Applied Applied No Power No Power Power Applied Applied Applied Description For Verification Open Closed Closed Drive Able To Run Power Applied Power Applied
Open
Bit 16 = 1 Bit 1 = 1
Bit 16 = 0 Bit 1 = 1
Bit 16 = 1 Bit 1 = 0
Bit 16 = 0 Bit 1 = 0
Appendix K
What is SynchLink?
SynchLink is a fiber optic communication link that allows its users to implement distributed motion and drive systems based on ControlLogix and PowerFlex700S products. SynchLink should be used in conjunction with a standard control network, such as ControlNet or Ethernet/IP. A standard network is used for general control interlocking and transfer of diagnostic data across the system. SynchLink does not function as a standard control network (e.g. it only broadcasts data). The PowerFlex 700S Drives transfer two types of data between drives, including: Direct - Data delivered in a single message. A SynchLink message can contain a maximum of four direct data words; each word is 32 bits in length. Direct data can be automatically forwarded to the next SynchLink node in the daisy chain or ring configurations. Buffered - Data that exceeds the four word limit of a direct data transfer. Buffered data is appropriately segmented at the transmitting device and reassembled at the receiving device. Buffered data cannot be automatically forwarded to the next SynchLink node in the daisy chain and ring configurations. Refer to the SynchLink Design Guide, publication 1756-TD008..., when planning and connecting the SynchLink network. Refer to SynchLink Board for PowerFlex 700S Drives with Phase II Control, publication 20D-IN010..., for information on installing the SynchLink option board.
K-2
Table K.A SynchLink Cables and Accessories

Description 2 x 25 cm Fiber Optic Link 2 x 1 M Fiber Optic Link 2 x 3 M Fiber Optic Link 2 x 5 M Fiber Optic Link 10 M Fiber Optic Link 20 M Fiber Optic Link 50 M Fiber Optic Link 100 M Fiber Optic Link 250 M Fiber Optic Link 500 M Fiber Optic Bulk Termination Kit Connector (10) Splice Bushing (5) Pulling Bullet Fiber Stripper Tool SynchLink Fiber-Hub, 1 input, Base SynchLink Fiber-Hub, 4 output, Star Splitter SynchLink Bypass Switch Cat. No. 1403-CF 000 1403-CF 001 1403-CF 003 1403-CF 005 1403-CF 010 1403-CF 020 1403-CF 050 1403-CF 100 1403-CF 250 1403-CF BLK 1403-NTOL 1403-N10 1403-N11 1403-N12 1403-N13 1751-SLBA 1751-SL4SP 1751-SLBP/A
Important: Do not overtighten tie-wraps.

Table K.B Fiber Optic Cable Assembly Specification
Parameter Connecting Cables Value 200/230 micron HCS (Hard Clad Silica) Versalink V-System Lucent Technologies, Specialty Fibers Technology Division 300 meters with no more than one splice or one adapter
Maximum Cable Length 1 meter Minimum Cable Length Minimum inside bend radius 25.4mm (1 in.) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently damage the fiber optic cable. Signal attentuation increases with decreased inside bend radii. Operating Wavelength 650 nm (Red) Data Rate 5 Mbps Maximum 10 - Daisy Chain, Node Count 256 - Star Configuration
Index
A
AC Supply Source 1-3 Unbalanced 1-4 Ungrounded 1-4 AC Supply Source Consideration 1-3 Access Tap 1-11 Access Panel 1-9 Ambient Temperature 1-3 Application Notes C-1 Armored Cable 1-7 Assisted Start-Up 2-6 ATEX Applications J-1 Drive Hardware Configuration J-4 Drive Wiring J-2 Motor Requirements J-1 Auxiliary Power Supply 1-23, A-32 Class 1 LED Product P-4 Clear Faults Manually 4-4 Clearances Mounting 1-3 Clearing Faults 4-4 Command Word Logic A-5 Common Mode Capacitors 1-17 Common Mode Interference 1-20 Common Start-Up Faults 2-5 Communication Masks & Owners 3-12 Communications Programmable Controller Configurations A-5 Compatible Motors Thermistor A-31 Conduit 1-8 Conformity CE 1-30 Contactors Input/Output 1-16 Control Block Diagrams B-1 Control Wire 1-20 Controller DriveLogix P-2 Conventions P-3 Cooling Fan Voltage 1-10 Copycat D-4 Cover Opening 1-2 Covers Removing 1-2
B
Before Applying Power 2-1 Bipolar Inputs 1-20 Bottom Plate Removal 1-9 Brake Resistor 1-15
C
Cable 1-9 Cable Entry Plate Removal 1-9 SHLD Terminal 1-5 Cable Length Motor 1-9 Cable Trays 1-8 Cables, Power Armored 1-7 Insulation 1-7 Separation 1-7 Shielded 1-7 Type 1-7 Unshielded 1-7 Capacitors 1-17 CE Conformity 1-30 Checklist, Start-Up 2-1 Circuit Breaker Ratings A-17 Circuitry 1-23
D
Data, Saving D-4 Defaults, Resetting to D-4 Diagnostic Data, Viewing D-4 Distribution Systems 1-17 Unbalanced 1-4 Ungrounded 1-4 Documentation P-1 DPI Communication Configurations A-5 Drive Frame Sizes P-3
Index-2
Drive Status 4-1 Drive Status Indicator 2-3, 4-2 DriveLogix Controller P-2 Drives Support P-2 Dynamic Brake Resistor 1-15 Dynamic Control Configuration 3-5
Grounding Filter 1-6 Recommended Scheme 1-5 Shields 1-5 Grounding Requirements 1-5
H
Hardware Enable Circuitry 1-23 High Resolution (Stegmann) Specifications F-1 High Speed Inputs 1-28 HIM D-1 ALT Functions D-2 External and Internal Connections D-1 External Connections D-1 Internal Connections D-1 LCD Display Elements D-2 Removing the HIM D-7 HIM Indication 4-4 HIM Menu Structure D-3, D-4 HIM Menus Diagnostics D-4 Memory Storage D-4 Preferences D-5 Hi-Resolution Encoder Feedback Option PowerFlex 700S F-1
E
Electrostatic Discharge P-4 EMC Directive 1-30 EMI/RFI Filter Grounding, RFI Filter 1-6 Enclosure Rating 1-3 Encoders H-2 ESD P-4
F
Factory Defaults, Resetting to D-4 Fan Voltage 1-10 Fault Non-Resettable 4-4 Fault Descriptions 4-5 Fault Queue D-4 Faults Common Start-Up 2-5 Manually Clear 4-4 Manually Clearing 4-4 Faults and Alarms 4-4 Feedback Option Resolver G-1 Fiber Optic Cable Assembly Specification K-2 Filter, RFI 1-6 Frame Sizes P-3 Fuse & Circuit Breaker Ratings A-17 Fuse Size A-17 Fuse Type A-17
I
I/O Configuration Settings Main Control Board 1-29 I/O Terminals Wiring Main Control Board 1-21 I/O Wiring 1-20 Indicator Drive Status 2-3, 4-2 Input Phase Selection 1-10 Input Power Conditioning 1-4 Input/Output Contactors Using 1-16 Inputs High Speed 1-28 Inputs & Outputs Analog Inputs 3-13 Installation/Wiring Chapter 1 1-1
G
General Precautions P-4
Index-3
J
Jumper 1-17 Location 1-18, 1-19 Jumper Removal 1-17
Mounting Clearances 1-3 MOV 1-4 MOVs 1-17 Multi-Device Interface Option Card H-1
L
LCD HIM Menus D-4 LED Class 1 P-4 LED Indications 4-2 Line Type 1-10 Linear Sensors Temposonics H-1 Location Power Terminal Block 1-13 Logic Command Word A-5 Logic Status Word A-6 Low Voltage Directive 1-30
N
National Codes and standards 1-7
O
Opening Cover 1-2 Opening the Cover 1-2 Operating Temperature 1-3 Operating Temperatures 1-3 Operator Interface D-5 Option Card E-1, G-1 MDI H-1 Resolver G-1 Output Devices A-6
M
Main Control Board Wiring I/O Terminals 1-21 Main Control Board I/O Configuration Settings 1-29 Manual Conventions P-3 Manually Clearing Faults 4-4 MDI H-1 Recommended Cables H-2 Specifications H-1 Support Linear Sensors H-1 Supported Rotary Encoders H-2 Menu Structure, HIM D-4 Mode Capacitors 1-17 Monitor Metering 3-3 Motor 1-9 Motor Cable Lengths 1-9 Motor Control Motor Data 3-4 Motor Control Mode C-2 Field Oriented Control C-3 Permanent Magnet Control C-4 Volts/Hertz Control C-4 Motor Ratings A-31
P
Parameter By Name 3-118 Changing/Editing D-5 Data 3-15 Linear List Format 3-15 Viewing D-5 Parameters 3-1 About 3-1 Cross Reference 3-118 Organization 3-3 Programming 3-1 Parameters, Groups Communication 3-4 Dynamic Control 3-3 Inputs & Outputs 3-4 Monitor 3-3 Motor Control 3-3 Position Control 3-4 Process Control 3-3 Speed Control 3-3 Speed/Posit Fdbk 3-4 Torque Control 3-3 User Functions 3-4 Utility 3-4 PE 1-5
Index-4
Permanent Magnet Motor Specifications I-1 Permanent Magnet Motors Compatible Motors I-1 Motor Name Plate and Rating Specifications I-1 Phase Selection Input 1-10 Position Control Position Config 3-9 Power 1-9 Power Conditioning, Input 1-4 Power Supply Auxiliary 1-23, A-32 Power Terminal Block 1-9, 1-13 Location 1-13 Power Wiring 1-6 Powering Up the Drive 2-1 Precautions P-4 Preferences, Setting D-5 Process Control Regulator 3-8 Programmable Controller Configurations A-5
Resolver Feedback Specifications G-1 Wiring G-3 Resolver Feedback Option Card E-1, G-1 Rotary Stegmann H-2 Rotary Encoders Stegmann H-2 Run Inhibit Common Causes Run Inhibit 2-5, 4-3
S
Saving Data D-4 Scheme Recommended Grounding 1-5 Setting Preferences D-5 Shielded Cables Power 1-7 SHLD Terminal 1-5 Side Covers Removing 1-2 Signal Wire 1-20 Sinking Input/Output 1-27 Sourcing Input/Output 1-27 Spare Connectors E-1, G-1 Specifications 1-13, A-1 Speed Control Reference 3-6 Speed/Posit Fdbk Feedback Config 3-10 Start-Up 2-1 Assisted 2-6 Checklist 2-1 Faults 2-5 Status Indicator 2-3, 4-2 Status Word Logic A-6 Stegmann High Resolution F-1 Support Encoders F-1 Stegmann Hi-Resolution Specifications F-1 Supplemental Information A-1 Supply Source 1-3 Support P-2 Surrounding Air 1-3 Operating Temperatures 1-3
R
RCD Residual Current Detector 1-3 Recommended 1-20, F-3 Recommended Cables Cables F-3 Recommended Documentation P-1 Recommended Grounding Scheme 1-5 Reflected Wave 1-8 Removal 1-9 Access Panel 1-9 Removing the Cassette Cassette Removal 1-2 Removing the Side Covers 1-2 Reset to Defaults D-4 Residual Current Detector 1-3 Resistor Brake 1-15 Resolver E-1, G-1
Index-5
SynchLink K-1 SynchLink Cables and Accessories K-2
T
Tap Access 1-11 TB1 - Row B (Bottom) Terminals 1-27 TB2 - Row T (Top) Terminals 1-27 Technical Support P-2 Terminal Block 1-9 Location 1-13 Specification 1-13 Wire Size Power 1-12 Thermistor Ratings A-31 THWN THHN 1-7 Torque Control Torque 3-7 Troubleshooting 4-1 Typical Jumper Locations 1-18, 1-19
U
Unbalanced/Ungrounded Supply 1-4 Ungrounded Distribution Systems 1-17 Unshielded Power Cables 1-7 User Functions Param & Config 3-14 User Sets D-4 Utility Drive Memory 3-11
V
Viewing and Changing Parameters D-5 Voltage Low Voltage 1-30
W
Wire Signal 1-20 Wiring Cable Entry Plate Removal 1-9 I/O 1-20 Main Control Board 1-21 Power 1-6
Index-6
www.rockwellautomation.com
Power, Control and Information Solutions
Americas: Rockwell Automation, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204-2496 USA, Tel: (1) 414.382.2000, Fax: (1) 414.382.4444 Europe/Middle East/Africa: Rockwell Automation SA/NV,Vorstlaan/Boulevard du Souverain 36, 1170 Brussels, Belgium, Tel: (32) 2 663 0600, Fax: (32) 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific: Rockwell Automation, Level 14, Core F,Cyberport 3, 100 Cyberport Road, Hong Kong, Tel: (852) 2887 4788, Fax: (852) 2508 1846
Publication 20D-UM006G-EN-P July 2008
Supersedes 20D-UM006F-EN-P - January 2007 Copyright 2008 Rockwell Automation. All rights reserved. Printed in USA.

Powerflex® 700S High Performance Ac Drive - Phase Ii Control

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Descrição original:

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Powerflex® 700S High Performance Ac Drive - Phase Ii Control

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drive Phase II Control

Important User Information

PowerFlex 700S Phase II AC Drive User Manual

3-14 A-4 B-11 B-19 B-21 B-25 C-6

Encoder specifications updated Updated and new Control Block Diagrams

A-1 & A-17 B-1

Important User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Summary of Changes Preface

Manual Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1

1-30 1-30 1-30 1-31 1-31

Programming and Parameters

A-31 A-32 A-33 A-34

Control Block Diagrams

PowerFlex 700S 2nd Encoder Feedback Option Card

PowerFlex 700S Stegmann Hi-Resolution Encoder Feedback Option

Wiring the Stegmann Hi-Resolution Feedback Option Card to an Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . F-2

PowerFlex 700S Resolver Feedback Option Card

PowerFlex 700S Multi-Device Interface (MDI) Option Card

PowerFlex 700S Permanent Magnet Motor Specifications

SynchLink Board for PowerFlex 700S Drives with Phase II Control

Who Should Use This Manual

What Is Not In This Manual

The following publications provide general drive information.

The following publications provide detailed PowerFlex 700S drive information:

For Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support:

For Automation and Control Technical Support:

Drive Frame Sizes

Class 1 LED Product

Catalog Number Explanation

Catalog Number Explanation, Continued

Brake IGBT is standard on Frames 13 and optional on Frames 49 ONLY.

Not available for Frame 3 drives or larger.

This is an embedded EtherNet option that is only available with DriveLogix5730.

Opening the Drive Covers

With Adhesive Label

50.8mm (2.0 in.)

101.6mm (4.0 in.)

101.6mm (4.0 in.)

50.8mm (2.0 in.)

101.6mm (4.0 in.)

AC Supply Source Considerations

Unbalanced, Ungrounded or Resistive Grounded Distribution Systems

Input Power Conditioning

Recommended Grounding Scheme

Required Input Fusing Required Branch Circuit Disconnect

Shield Termination - SHLD

RFI Filter Grounding

Fuses and Circuit Breakers

Power Cable Types Acceptable for 200-600 Volt Installations

Motor Cable Lengths

Power Terminal Blocks

Cable Entry Plate Removal

Power Wiring Access Panel Removal

Single-Phase Input Power

AC Input Phase Selection (Frames 5 & 6 Only)

Cooling Fan Voltage

Selecting/Verifying Fan Voltage (Frames 5 & 6 Only)

3-PH 1-PH LINE TYPE SPARE 1

Important Common Bus (DC Input) Application Notes

Terminal Bolt Size(2)

SHLD Terminal AUX Terminal Block

Fan Terminal Block

BR1/ BR2 DC+ DC+ DC

BR1/ BR2 DC+